sue an aae a 3 4 bd ow eae bee ee gee taae rh iP y Y Peal SRB Wane WW We er RY sR CTI 8 NS bs 5 z Louse, 23 ns bs HK gy eed aed hag Bef HG o 4 ‘ 1 J 8 Hi wutedy « ara nek 8 ee he 2 ae ee eine hie eee ae UF seer 4 « * oF ~ Pa ero wien et eta er ee ie) ieee heaters pconseck tal oh AMO ered “ Kens) hee ae os aan a ASEAN TS Ac RAO Fe SRE A Nl Sesh cand, Lahael sites ate ag wathadeld Mies (eee pias ATS 8 8 aa SW RA dev tog Oe eA hand Oe AFA A Oo Heh SG eG 8 He AER ee a La eh 4:9 8318-8 9 YO hr 81 ates tay sions TLL aaee naa ay Paar Pray tet st Sk ae eer ee sy vee aan eet ee tea Pah S Soh ets a ame ‘ Oe eit ae a Va eee a ete ta va teat aN iat aa ce y errr eerie: ee ehh 2 tata 4h eae Ee tae 8H 1 OO At 1a ida'gue iu hagas pee aniia ° BA gt A he ee ee F TA AN a Cae a A ei A/a Ba Peek 4 ber raw 5A GS aot hs Nai ehh Ann i a sa a5 ae beet 8h wh aay Sy C ‘ CW Lay en 4 ed ia ea te eet ed 4 ew V A aro a Mipre Neal Mane RS 8 9-8 eke Se tt Ca NAY Yes VAS tae eed ey we aT a tite « yea ede ale: 44k! ash gi ra 10 4 _asert ATT Mr ce oe ee a ee pv es Fey ‘. CS ot aeyieal tS eed Ve 4a eaer'> & REGS Mian gy big at gets 344g FE We awe te 4 aba Peds hy SERN eS r o * ere -) ALAS ee Rige teh ta ASM Tee ime hoa 4 Pope Ye GI EL aD rehph Petat Jah eponess 4a 8a ee Pogey ads tt 4 { wie th a ey Sea es “on a4 " eae a4 sae a Vg oe TUF AE Rae 9 eee eens Pe es) sg a4,9 > asta PMYES, Fed 626 054 af! fawtais ‘ + Any ay a ey Bl ta SERIE OP hee A i ee Oh Riek 3 ee, -? tf f Whyte eS 3 thy 3 sera atc ae Daan na ne ed ye eit 2 Gee uF Gate oP A, yh te Paes er Vow cae 3 . ys Cie 0 Pa) Hit 4, 8 he . ene! fos eT “4* pack aes a , AME Rae ees ais C15 he 8 AS 9 HEN 444 . q * + e. CeeK 4 da ae Abode f Vieeead a ae? ASR Fi) a AI as Se Pha KS WANS Aa sy vas ear) a ia bate han patel nid, A999 85.5.9 AeA eh peo) ope 2. eS bee it rah aed SOUR % C499 age Yew igs jal ‘ . i947 - Pel ade WS s9 Lei dee? EF t9 ia%) Syeedid bebe tis det i? » 4 AiG ye f RECS ole ee . aa bate ie pr PR eset oF Ber Ont ry ae OP Soca mie epee CF RAN t i eay ou ea leap wiowineueen Nee WAS eA 4A 4 Pl ieehd Oe thd Pads Med sy the he J tw Le ake \ ’ 4 : Ay Cutie i eileen 4am As Sh qWae he AAG tat yl Get Ge ts é nt Ste Hpettne Fyre 4 i O94 4 CECA ee gh 2 Hm eS ww, eet we yr Toke “ WER oe ere ese rr o Aa, vk d wee Lake ij LAE ; 5 Pe he Ya fest ieee es Ye Tes TN A Cag %: a Hevea Riis PR Riese a) 7 _ a6 _ ¢ a ( - ‘ (Sage a4 jena d deve ye eo ewe ee ) , as | PTC. On Yea COS cs bien A reas! r; eae rare Boe hs oaths eet , fi Pee RTT el eevaet Sivas ber Deke etd vbr y OPH IG PUG Atty bait Bo atl OR te Pas Resets 4 ete ee, 2 4 biRide E51 ee PSEA SE Bi é i . et Re * 7a uF Kis TE as ,* a oe ' ‘ ; Sheer 14449 (AL aes ee ,: acai a Se A ed Be ret tet es nore ¥ eb eN sw ae tee t : | 4 pel aeits * routtite vr ‘3 2 ek ‘ ‘ ‘ Lee Ee aa <8 4a tA ee eee Cee ‘ - ‘ é ‘ - ? +s ‘ te 44s tried Sy eee ANY SanGid, daw ai aey, es Lined Mast aM S14 a 5] ’ ‘ 44 CG. L2OU Cae tees eet as ete Bs LOA ee ee sre ai wreh e free f : ‘ ¢ ‘ a8 % i elLaedti oaee ReeES Oe L Sey G4 ee el od a4 Aga ee it 4 $ ‘ i ’ 4 Hee a 6 SR AA WAT UD veed § a By 4 ‘ in| . < Lie 7 ‘ ANS end Bbw aay S 1 kee Eke ‘ 74 ike eee 2 ae F Me 4 Wa WH Ae ‘ ou Tiake gan bOee aly) Pi SAG te tir yetonnd fie * : -is ‘ ; ‘a ¢ 4 ied Caw Saad aad eee TARA IO i 5 tide Pee Sore oe oe See ee a ee 7 A ek ee ee Ye te ek ARTO Cae ] a 74 Ce Rk oat eek Ae Tie 88 hee ee eal Ty. S| 444 be Lae VA at Re we OATS Hh On Ge Nap arg adh Bal a" 4 Pre BAe Sy sea? AS hy “/ dey ie ew ON GR sawed t 4 . ne +a PER Ee re ew atte soe ‘ ad - d Cu BAY Wd aM Sd qt prey uy i} fh . sy Vea : i a : PR MOL ea pen yet ay SRN ONE SORT Na etEN ie a ey yay Pa SOR COT Qe EF ehh mead fF ae ry oti sinew “ 48 04 HOCK CWS ed WAS ton yawned 4 * hi oes eee wre Ran Lae A. Aes, 4 46a Bie FAR H RU A ak ’ ; aa 4 a ee | yaad ta fe) 4G 044 B Va esa aes wae nat Peewpavey as La A LAA A RL PPO 45 - ‘ a4 Py ny : 1R 01s Qe se AAS MSW aS A Ae tel a ea # agtieet?d . ais Lantaate aaa? Li ee ee CW EO Fe Bee 4 ,aag ae Se a ty 4 ed O48 ae ee Wee SE CR CRM ET RG MA a f i PY Oae 4G ELENA eae Th eat Dag Lede gee dw 4 See Ory ‘ aen tas vs i oe re wi + : sieanten a? Cade a pe aR TAT bi A hire! 5 , ao oy Pie ' 4 tawae . . Foe 4 Ore Rik aged aaa 4 ‘ ‘ ‘ ack a em on er ey o hite eke WEE Oe 4 8A pr preietinn.& icin he BM, 4 wae ‘ 44 we Oe ee 2 “ ‘ RR RI EE Ro TI : ‘i das tag K4 eae 8 1 ge 4 ES 89 a ET fs 5 in tng aor ee ee " za Wir hk RENE CORREA Se ae te ga yg eek 4B ak alt veal ye es od Bate a Leh HME LT wae be ariel bn Lay tf oT M4 4 " ‘ , : TOO Fayed Chee nae Cee ie sa wey ‘74 ere * yauwa toad TEVA SH XM eRe Ft esha Dy ty fly we a ine j a! ‘ {nae " Pee WO We ke CRRA ee +98 be eer ys 1 ey ses 4 Ceiw nae Rae Ow 4 we Haw ay da 44a Oke We ae ave tw Redes 41s ERS : : ena? “ puree eaelaa” sv aint THEW Pee aP ey ear) Wale Lasens + «4994 POR EW RAKE RAUL RRA Oe ee ’ ON 9s ete @ Sih fei pBin9.0 9.9 4:8 a6 909 Aes Wd, uae 4 Vad ae a8 \ GAS OAM RET Cae e ‘ eh MARTON a r ris : a ieun haw ee 146 ‘ 4 CWEAM HAMA Ae beets Re re ean wa) " ‘ a a evaawes ey . Atel ou bs i ¥ JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME 43, 1953 BOARD OF EDITORS J. P. E. Morrison JOHN C. EWERS R. K. Coox U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. CHacs, JR. ELBERT L. Litre, JR. ZOOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrMan PHitie DRUCKER CHEMISTRY ANTHROPOLOGY DEAN B. CowleE Davin H. DUNKLE PHYSICS GEOLOGY ALAN STONE ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royaut & GuILFoRD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND ACTUAL DATES OF PUBLICATION, VOLUME 43 No. 1) ppel—28, January 23,1953 No. 2, pp. 29-64, February 26, 1953 No. 3, pp. 65-96, March 20, 1953 No. 4, pp. 97-136, April 24, 1953 No: 0, pp: 137-168; May 25,1953 No. 6, pp. 169-200, June 24, 1953 Noe 75 pp. 20162407 July-23, 1953 No. 8, pp. 241-272, August 19, 1953 No. 9, pp. 273-304, September 23, 1953 No. 10, pp. 305-340, October 22, 1953 No. 11, pp. 341-888, November 17, 1953 No. 12, pp. 389-436, January 4, 1954 Vou. 43 JANUARY 1953 No. 1 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY * OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS WILLIAM F. FosHaG J. P. E. Morrison JOHN C. EWERS U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. CHacs, JR. ELBERT L. LITTLE, JR. BIOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrMan R. K. Coox CHEMISTRY PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS T. P. THAYER Puitie DRUCKER GEOLOGY ANTHROPOLOGY C. W. SABROSKY ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royaut & GuILFoRD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND . Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate): Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3 .25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13 .00 $16.25 $3 .00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26 .00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39 .00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year. .......-..-..--- =. -- see $7 .50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to-vol. 10; incl.——not javatlable* 2... elses. 2: — a Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)...:..... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 42, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $356.00. Monocrapu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,” by Herbert Friedmann. $4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.:...2..... 5.25.32 eee $25.00 Single volumes, unbownd)s. 5. cij0 acs © Ske = ee ee 2.00 Dingle numbers. 2.255 4 ens eae sae i oe ee eee 20 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences” and addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. RaPppLeYe#, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, DC: Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 43 January 1953 No. 1 PALEONTOLOGY —The classification of the strophomenoid brachiopods. ALWYN WiurAMs, Glasgow University. (Communicated by G. A. Cooper.) The strophomenoid brachiopods include a host of diversified stocks that flourished mainly during Paleozoic times, although a descendant, the thecideid Lacazella, still survives. The morphological variation of the group is extremely wide, as a comparison of such bizarre forms as Gemmellaroza, Leangella, Scacchinella, Stropheodonta, The- cospira, and Taffia shows. Nevertheless, there are a number of morphological features that may be regarded as typically stropho- menoid; they include the pseudopunctate condition of the test, the shell modification due to the loss of a functional pedicle, the presence of a pseudodeltidium and chilid- ium, the nature of the cardinal process and the absence of brachiophores, and_ shell convexity. The pseudopunctae represent long, un- branched, arcuate calcareous rods embedded within the fibrous layer of the shell (Fig. 1). They do not penetrate the lamellar layer, and it is supposed that they were laid down by the outer epithelial layer of the mantle immediately behind the outer lobe. It is probable that the deposition and growth of these spicules were limited mainly to the mantle proper, for in the postero- median portion of the adult shell, an area presumed to have been occupied by the viscera, an inner impunctate fibrous layer generally extends over a pseudopunctate zone laid down during the early stages of shell growth. In addition, the structures grouped around the notothyrium—the car- dinal process, socket ridges, and notothyrial platform—are impunctate, as are also the teeth and supporting lamellae of the pedicle valve; although in the _ stropheodontids, which had a series of denticles arranged along the hinge-line in place of simple teeth each denticle is built of fibrous ma- terial deposited around a rod of nonfibrous calcite similar to the pseudopunctae. The chiidium and pseudodeltidium are also impunctate, being composed principally of an extension of the lamellar layer sometimes supported by an underlying deposit of fi- brous calcite. Beecher (1901), p. 260) cited the impunctate nature of the pseudodeltid- lum as evidence to support his contention that the pseudodeltidium represents a third shell subsequently fused to the pedicle valve in contrast to the punctate deltidium, which he regarded as an integral part of the pedicle valve, in punctate telotrematous forms. In this respect at least his observa- tions are incorrect: the pseudodeltidium is impunctate because itis composed of the lamellar layer which is not perforated in any strophomenoids, whereas the deltidium of such a form as a terebratuloid is punctate because both fibrous and lamellar layers of the shell are penetrated by the caecae. It has long been known that in the post- nepionic stages of the majority of stropho- menoids a functional pedicle was absent and that consequently the mode of life varied from lying free on the sea floor to attachment either by the pedicle or by cementation of the pedicle valve to some foreign body. The persistence of a functional pedicle throughout life is more characteristic of the earlier strophomenoids for, despite exceptions like Leptaena, most of the later Lower Paleozoic stocks were not attached. Attachment by cementation of the pedicle valve was a later development attained by many independent groups but especially characteristic of the Upper Paleozoic ortho- tetaceids. The position of the pedicle in relation to 2, JOURNAL OF THE the valves is a highly distinctive feature of the strophomenoids. In the young stages of unattached stocks like Sowerbyella, Fardenia, and Strophomena, as well as in forms with a persistently functional pedicle like Leptaena, the pedicle base was ensheathed in a pipe consisting of an extension of the lamellar layer situated on the apex of the umbo and not on any part of the interarea of the pedicle valve. This pedicle sheath then was distinct from the pseudodeltidium or del- thyrium as can be seen in adult forms with the scar of the pedicle sheath still visible, though in some strophomenoids with a per- sistent pedicle the foramen was frequently enlarged by resorption and encroached on to the apex of the pseudodeltidium. The disposition of the pedicle sheath repre- sents a radical departure from the telotre- matous pedicle opening which is limited to the delthyrium. Also if Percival’s observa- tion (1945) on Terebratella «inconspicua Sowerby—that the pedicle valve occupies a dorsal position during development—had general application the position of the pedicle foramen has an added significance, for the inclination of the sheath away from the hinge-line suggests that in this group the converse was true. The limitation of the pedicle opening to the apex of the pedicle valve and not to the interarea probably accounted for the complementary growth of the pseudodeltid- ium and chilidium: the latter structure is an integral part of the brachial valve yet it fits snugly with the edge of the former and its size is inversely proportional to the development of the pseudodeltidium. In this way the median openings of the interareas which in other brachiopods accommodated the pedicle were effectively sealed by the mantle flaps which were also responsible for the growth of the interareas. This comple- mentary growth of the pseudodeltidium and chilidium was expressed in the more ad- vaneed stocks such as the stropheodontids and orthotetaceids in a trend toward the complete elimination of the chilidium and the development of an entire pseudodeltid- ium flush with the hinge-line. This ultimate stage was reached independently by many Devonian stropheodontids but only by one orthotetaceid, the Triassic Thecospira, for WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 1 even in the Permian forms like Meekella and Derbyia a vestige of the chilidium re- mained and the pseudodeltidium carried a narrow median fold which accommodated it. Nevertheless, despite such a trend and its culmination in the stropheodontids and Thecospira it is true to say that both struc- tures are typical features of strophomenoid organization. The development of two distinctive types of cardinal processes is also highly significant in the strophomenoids. In a number of early stocks like Taffia and Leptella the diductor scars must have been attached directly to the floor of the notothyrium for there are no outgrowths which could have accommodated the mus- | cle bases. The most primitive modification of this state was the growth of a median partition which usually extended from the notothyrial floor to the chilidium as in the plectamboni- tids. This septum is commonly described as a simple cardinal process and the continued usage of this term is eminently convenient but in all probability the diductor bases were attached to the notothyrial floor on either side of the median septum or to a pair of small lateral ridges. A similar development occurred in the leptestiids. Thus some early members like Leptella were without a median partition while some later stocks hke Leangella were equipped with a series of lateral ridges in addition to the median septum. The leptesti- ids were characterized especially by the development of a pair of prominent plates— the chilidial plates—forming the lateral walls of the notothyrium. These together with the median septum were not only firmly ankylosed to the notothyrial floor but also elevated above the hinge-line and prolonged ventrally to it and since the muscle bases were probably inserted within the slots formed by the median septum and the chilidial plates the entire structure is analogous to the bilobed cardinal process. The bilobed cardinal process of the strophomenaceids and orthotetaceids is quite distinct from the plectambonitaceid arrange- ment for the diductor muscles were attached not to the notothyrial floor but to a pair of outgrowths from it, each of which bore JANUARY 1953 the muscle bases on the posterior face, the area of attachment being often increased by the growth of numerous thin calcareous plates. Opik (1932, p. 61) has commented on the presence of a fine ridge lying medianly between the lobes of the cardinal process of many strophomenaceids and his suggestion that this ridge is a degenerate homologue of the plectambonaceid median partition is probably true. Despite subsequent modification of the ——— WS (Ey = OSAAW Yin = SV 1 (ANY, a WSSA¢ LIN ve ——— —- WILLIAMS: CLASSIFICATION OF STROPHOMENOID BRACHIOPODS 3 strophomenaceid cardinal process, as for example the stropheodontids and_ ortho- tetaceids in which the chilidium and noto- thyrium are vestigial or absent and the cardinal process lobes project for some distance into the umbonal region of the pedicle valve, the pattern of development outlined above seems to be fundamental. Another important feature of stropho- menoid organization was the apparent, and in many stocks the undoubted, absence of Fic. 1.—Strophomenoid shell structure: A, Diagrammatic representation of a portion of a stropho- menoid valve just anterior to the muscle scar showing the lamellar layer (L), the spicules (S) embedded in the fibrous layer (F), and the nonfibrous calcareous deposit of the muscle base (M); B, structure of the strophomenoid pseudodeltidium showing the lamellar layer (L), the fibrous layer (F), and a section of a tooth (T); C and D, the plectambonaceid and strophomenaceid cardinal processes, as typified by Sowerbyella and Strophonelloides, respectively; chilidium (C), lamellar layer (L), fibrous layer (F), and calcareous nonfibrous deposit (N). | JOURNAL OF THE any specialized structures associated with the cardinalia which gave support to the lophophore. Thus in the stropheodontids the pair of ridges forming the inner boundary of the sockets in early members are usually referred to as ‘‘brachiophores.”’ With the progressive spread of denticles along the hinge line in later stocks, the teeth and socket arrangement became vestigial and the ridges either disappear entirely or, exceptionally as in the Leptostrophias, became modified to form ankylosed but- tresses to the cardinal process lobes. It seems then that the ridges were nothing more than internal walls to the sockets, and the function of lophophore support cannot be ascribed to them. This is equally true for the strophomenids which are equipped with weak ridges like the early stropheodontids. Within the orthotetaceid group there is also no evidence to suggest that any spe- cialized structures supported the lophophore; the presence of strong, large teeth, the loss of the interarea of the convex brachial valve, and the pronounced ventral growth of the bilobed cardinal process all contributed to the development of a pair of highly modified socket ridges which usually formed concave cups ankylosed to the sides of the cardinal process lobes and supported by a pair of plates growing up from the floor of the valve, e.g., Meekella. Even in Thecospira the calcareous spires were not attached to any structures associated with the socket ridges but were supported by a pair of very short, scarcely differentiated outgrowths from the bases of the cardinal process lobes. Opik (1933, p. 44) has come to a similar conclusion in his investigation of Leangella in which the ridges defining the teeth sockets are especially prominent; and in the plect- ambonaceids generally it is highly lkely that the so-called ‘‘crural processes’? or ‘‘brachiophores”’ functioned only as socket bounding ridges. It is therefore suggested that the term ‘‘socket ridge’? be used in place of ‘‘crura”’ or “‘brachiophores”’ for all strophomenoids. There is not very much evidence as to the form of the strophomenaceid lophophore but from a knowledge of occasionally pre- served impressions as in Leptaenisca and WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 1 “Strophomena” jukest Davidson it is prob- able that it consisted of a pair of depressed spiral coils, a disposition compatible with shell configuration. A spirolophous lophophore was apparently also characteristic of the orthotetaceids; impressions of depressed coiled brachia are found in Davidsonia and in Thecospira, a form hitherto classified as a rostrospira- ceid, the fleshy brachia were strengthened by the development of a pair of spirally coiled calcareous ribbons. These spires form a pair of high cones extending well into the interior of the pedicle valve and it is probable that the lophophore of those ortho- tetaceids in which the depth of the shell was greatly increased by the exceptional growth of the pedicle valve were similarly disposed. On the other hand many paleontologists, notably Kozlowski (1929) and Opik (1933), have concluded that the strongly elevated and striated ridge often found in the plec- tambonaceid brachial valve completely sur- rounding the postero-median area (here called the ‘‘lophophore platform”’) represent the zone of attachment for the lophophore in a manner analogous to the lophophore- supporting structure of thecideids. The suggestion is certainly the most plausible explanation for the development of such an extraordinary feature and if it is correct the lophophore probably consisted of a simple lobate ring (compare the ptycholo- phous condition as in Lacazella). Elevated ridges are also found in the brachial valve of the strophomenaceid Christiania and are strongly reminiscent of the plectambonaceid lophophore platform. In this stock however the partitions are disposed in two discrete loops and if the functional interpretation of these structures is correct the lophophore was schizolophous. One other important characteristic re- mains to be discussed—namely, the con- figuration of the shell. The protegulum and nepionic shells of all strophomenoids, as far as known, were biconvex, a relationship that was maintained throughout the ontogeny of the orthotetaceids except for a minority like some schellwienellas in which the pedicle valve became concave during ephebic stages of growth. JANUARY 1953 The brachial valve of all strophomenaceids and plectambonaceids in contrast became concave in neanic stages at least and al- though many independent stocks develop resupinate shells the concavo-convex re- lationship of the neanic stage was never completely eliminated. This contrast between the biconvex shell of the orthotetaceids and what is essentially a simple or modified concavo-convex shell of the plectambonaceids and strophomena- ceids was probably accompanied by im- portant differences in anatomical distribu- tion and constituted a significant divergence within the group. THE BASIS Until the publication of Opik’s brachiopod studies (1930-1934) the classification of the strophomenoids had never been in a satis- factory state although their distinctiveness had been apparent to paleontologists since 1848 when King took what was then a radical step and erected a family, the Strophomeni- dae, for the inclusion of Strophomena and allied forms. Even the historic studies of Beecher did little to stimulate any worth- while suprageneric grouping and as recently as 1929 Schuchert and Le Vene (p. 16) described the classification of the stropho- menoids as ‘‘not yet satisfactory”? and were content to use resupination as a subfamily division of the Strophomenidae though they must have been aware of the artificiality of such an arrangement. The plectambonaceid classification pro- posed by Opik is preeminently utilitarian; it consists of the grouping together of demonstrably related genera into sub- families, families, etc., by purely morpho- logical comparisons: but because it is executed with all due regard to the range of individual stocks it transcends the pigeon- holing of genera and allows for the establish- ment of as natural a classification as one can expect in the light of present knowledge. The building up of a classification from a series of basic units in this way reveals a number of important features concerning the morphogeny of a series of related stocks. It is for instance usual to find that very few, if any, characters are peculiar to a group; many characters, often the most diagnostic OF CLASSIFICATION WILLIAMS: CLASSIFICATION OF STROPHOMENOID BRACHIOPODS 9) ones, appear independently in other re- motely related stocks and it appears that the higher the suprageneric category the greater the morphological overlap with other cate- gories. Thus superfamily definitions of plec- tambonitaceids and the orthoid clitambona- ceids classified in this way are virtually the same although nobody acquainted with the groups would hesitate to agree that they were independent of each other from inception to extinction. This continual reduplication of morpho- logical features in undoubtedly independent groups is of course related to the mechanics of evolution. It is an expression of. paral- lelism in related stocks and though it raises many taxonomic problems it cannot be ig- nored. This realization should allay most doubts arising from a classification in which it is sometimes impossible to describe a series of characters which are unique to one category or another. Another fact emerging from the building up of a classification by the grouping to- gether of related genera is that any morpho- logical features will generally have a taxo- nomic importance directly related to the number of independent lines of descent (expressed systematically as genera) con- stituting a stock and not a preconceived value constant throughout a series of stocks. For example, the type of cardinal process is taxonomically one of the most important strophomenoid characters. Along with other features it serves to distinguish the plectambonitaceids from the stropho- menaceids and in this instance has a super- family status. In contrast, the absence of a cardinal process in the taffids and leptestiids serves only to distinguish genera although had such primitive stocks undergone per- sistent divergences and specialization un- accompanied by the development of a cardinal process its absence would have been correspondingly more important taxonomi- cally. This is true for instance of the orthoteta- celds. The orthotetaceids were equipped with a bilobed cardinal process homologous with the strophomenaceid one, and on the basis of this structure alone would be included within the strophomenaceids. But 6 JOURNAL the orthotetaceid stock, which was distinct in such features as the persistence of a bi- convex shell throughout ontogeny and the almost universal adoption of the cementing habit, survived into the Trias and during its existence underwent a number of signif- icant divergences some of which merit family recognition, thus imparting to the stock a superfamily status. Accordingly the bilobed cardinal process being present in all members of the Strophomenacea and Orthotetacea has a subordinal value. This pattern of variable taxonomic values for the cardinal process is true for all characters and is a natural manifestation of divergence and development. The classification proposed below has been modelled with the foregoing considera- tions in mind. Its basic units—the generic stocks—have been grouped together into appropriate suprageneric categories and the only factor other than morphological comparison which has been given particular attention is the time range of each genus, in the hope that the more blatant deficiencies of morphological grouping will be eliminated. Suborder STROPHOMENOIDEA Opik, 1934, emended Brachiopods derived out of orthoid ancestors by the development of a pseudopunctate shell and by the early loss of a functional pedicle so that the majority of forms included in the sub- order either lay free on the sea floor or were at- tached by cementation to a foreign body; del- thyrium and notothyrium closed posteriorly by the complementary development of a pseudo- deltidium and chilidium; diductor bases of the branchial valve attached to a bilobed cardinal process or to the notothyrial floor variously modified and usually divided into two distinct areas by a,median ‘“‘cardianal process’’; lopho- phore, unsupported by any specialized part of the cardinalia but in some stocks presumably attached to a platform developed on the brachial valve and exceptionally strengthened by a cal- careous skeleton, generally spirolophous, some- times ptycholophous, exceptionally schizolo- phous. Lower Ordovician to Recent. PLECTAMBONACEA, nh. superfamily Conecavo-convex or resupinate strophomenoids with cardinalia consisting of well developed socket ridges, a notothyrium covered by a OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 1 convex chilidium sometimes supported, and exceptionally replaced, by a pair of chilidial plates, and a cardinal process, which when present, consists of a simple median ridge with subsidiary lateral ridges in later forms; pseudo- deltidium small, pedicle presumably functional in those adult forms with a persistent supra- apical foramen, more usually lost during ontogeny so that mature shells of most stocks were un- attached. Ordovician to Devonian. Family Taffiidae Ulrich and Cooper, 1936 Plectambonaceids with orthoidlike muscula- ture and cardinalia; notothyrium covered com- pletely by a convex chilidium, cardinal process when present, simple, median supra-apical foramen small, persistent throughout ontogeny. Lower Ordovician, Upper Canadian to Chazy. Type genus, Taffia Ulrich. Family Plectambonitidae Kozlowski, 1929 Plectambonaceids with a median cardinal process growing from the notothyrial floor and ankylosed posteriorly to a convex chilidium; pedicle valve with a pair of accessory teeth lying anterolaterally to two simple teeth; brachial valve with a variably developed lophophore platform; supra-apical foramen sporadically per- sistent in adult forms. Lower and Middle Ordo- vician. Subfamily Plectambonitinae Jones, 1928 Plectambonitids with a denticulate hinge line in addition to the accessory and simple teeth; pedicle valve with divergent diductor scars separated anteriorly by a low broad plate; brachial valve with aseptate muscle scars. Lower and Middle Ordovician (Bz to C3 of the Baltic.) Type genus, Plectambonites Pander. Subfamily Ahtiellinae Opik, 1933 Plectambonitids with smooth hinge lines and a lophophore platform developed on the brachial valve. Lower Ordovician (B3; to C; of the Baltic.) Type genus, Ahtiella Opik. Leptestiidae, n. family Plectambonaceids with a pair of chilidial plates usually supporting a chilidium forming the sides of the notothyrium and generally ankylosed to the median cardinal process to form a tripartite structure; brachial valve usually provided with an elevated lophophore platform. Lower Ordovician to Middle Devonian. Figs. 2-7.—2, Plectambonitid morphology, /ngria Opik; interior of brachial valve (2a) with posterior view above; interior of pedicle valve (2b). 3, Leptestiinid morphology, Leptellina Ulrich and Cooper; interior of brachial valve (38a) with posterior view above; interior of pedicle valve (8b). 4, Sowerbyel- linid morphology as typified by Sowerbyella Jones; cardinalia of brachial valve (4a) with posterior view above, posteromedian area of pedicle valve (4b). 5, Christianiid morphology as typified by Christiania Hall and Clarke; interior of brachial valve (5a) with posterior view above, interior of pedicle valve (5b) with the anterior part of the shell removed to show the posteromedian area. 6, Generalized stropho- meninid morphology; cardinalia and muscle scars of brachial valve (6a) with posterior view above, posteromedian area of pedicle valve interior (6b). 7, Stropheodontid morphology, Strophonelloides Caster; cardinalia and muscle scars of brachial valve (7a) with posterior view above, posteromedian area of pedicle valve interior (7b). 8 JOURNAL OF THE Subfamily Leptestiinae Opik, 1933 Leptestiids with the socket ridges not fused with the chilidial plates and with a strongly developed lophophore platform; median cardinal process occasionally absent, in some later stocks flanked by two or more subsidiary ridges; ad- ductor sears of brachial valve sometimes borne on an elevated platform lying anterior to the cardinalia; accessory teeth and _ denticulate hinge-line occasionally developed; supraapical foramen never persistent throughout ontogeny. Lower Ordovician (Upper Canadian) to Upper Silurian. Type genus, Leptestia Bekker. Subfamily Sowerbyellinae Opik, 1930 Leptestiids with the chilidial plates, median cardinal process, and socket ridges ankylosed to the notothyrial platform to give a_ structure like an inverted V; hinge line exceptionally denticulate or pierced by oblique canals; apical foramen rarely persistent throughout ontogeny. Ordovician to Middle Devonian. Type genus, Sowerbyella Jones. Discusston.—The leptestiinids and the sower- byellinids were from their inception quite dis- tinct from contemporary plectambonaceids es- pecially in the development of the chilidial plates and it seems that the two groups repre- sented an important divergent development from the strophomenoid ancestral stocks. Ulrich and Cooper (1936, p. 626) erected a subfamily, the Leptellinae, for the inclusion of early forms like Leptellina and Leptella which had either a simple cardinal process or none at all. In the opinion of the writer the subfamily is best regarded as a synonym of the Leptestiinae Opik, 1933; many European leptestiinids also possess a simple median cardinal process and its absence in Leptella was, as Ulrich and Cooper demonstrated for the taffids, not particularly significant among primitive plectambonaceids. Superfamily STROPHOMENACEA Schuchert, 1896 Concavo-convex or resupinate, pseudopunctate brachiopods usually with a persistent supraapical foramen which became sealed up by shell deposit in some later stocks so that mature individuals were either unattached or, exceptionally, ce- mented by part of the pedicle valve to a foreign body; cardinal process bilobed; pseudodeltidium sometimes completely closing the delthyrium, chilidium when present consisting of a simple convex arch. Ordovician to Carboniferous. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 1 Family Strophomenidae King, 1846 Strophomenaceids with a pair of simple teeth usually supported by small dental lamellae; pseudodeltidium never completely closing the delthyrium, chilidium always present; brachia lacking skeletal support but apparently con- sisting of a pair of very low spires exceptionally impressed on the internal shell surface. Ordovician to Carboniferous. Strophomeninae, n. subfamily * Strophomenids usually with a functional ped- icle throughout ontogeny but sometimes lying free on the substratum due to the sealing up of the supra-apical foramen during maturity Ordovician to Carboniferous. Type genus, Stro- phomena de Blainville. Leptaenoideinae, n. subfamily Strophomenids attached throughout ontogeny by the cementation of the umbonal region of the pedicle valve to a foreign body. Middle Silurian to Lower Devonian. Type genus, Leptaenoidea Hedstrém. Discussion.—The proposed family Rafinesqui- nidae Caster (1939) is synonymous with Stro- phomenidae King, 1846, as emended above. The only way to continue recognizing both fam- ilies is to relegate all resupinate forms to the Stro- phomenidae, a patently artificial discrimination. The adoption of secondary attachment by cementation in two strophomenid stocks (Leptae- noidea Hedstrom and Leptaenisca Beecher) seems to merit the division of the strophomenids into two new subfamilies. Cementation constitu- ted a profound change of habit and was also achieved independently of this development by other strophomenoids. Family Stropheodontidae Caster, 1939 Strophomenaceids lacking a functional pedicle with the simple teeth and dental lamellae re- placed by denticles subsequently spreading along the hinge-line; socket ridges abbreviated subse- quent to the loss of dental lamellae becoming obsolescent or disappearing completely, excep- tionally forming buttresses to the cardinal process lobes; pseudodeltidium initially small, apical, becoming progressively larger and in some stocks ultimately closing the delthyrium completely; chilidium initially massive becoming degenerate and in some stocks ultimately com- pletely lost.» Upper Ordovician to Upper De- vonian. a | JANUARY 1953 WILLIAMS: CLASSIFICATION Subfamily Stropheodontinae Caster, 1939 Stropheodontids which lay free on the sub- stratum during maturity. Upper Ordovician to Upper Devonian. Type genus, Stropheodonta Hall. Liljevallinae, n. subfamily Stropheodontids which were attached through- out ontogeny by cementation of the pedicle valve to a foreign body. Middle Silurian. Type genus, Laljevallia Hedstrom. Discussion.—The stropheodontid affinities of Liljevallia are revealed in the development of denticles along the hinge-line on either side of the delthyrium, the absence of dental lamellae and simple teeth, and the brachyprionid muscle scar. The stock, then, like the leptaenoideinids and the orthotetaceids is illustrative of the de- velopment of cemented forms from a number of unattached independent strophomenoid an- cestors. Hitherto Liljevallia, Leptaenoidea, and Leptaenisca have usually been placed within the Davidsoniinae but each genus has pronounced affinities with either the Strophomenidae or the Stropheodontidae and it seems better to erect new subfamilies in the manner proposed above than to continue previous practice. Christianiidae, n. family v Concavo-convex strophomenaceids with a lophophore platform consisting of a pair of discrete, U-shaped loops presumably giving support to a schizolophous lophophore; pseudo- deltidium and convex chilidium well developed, cardinal process bilobed, socket ridges strong; supra-apical foramen persistent throughout on- togeny. Middle and Upper Ordovician Type genus, Christiania Hall and Clarke. Discusston.—Christiania represents an isolated terminal development out of one of the early strophomenoid divergences which is not closely related to any other known stock. The presence of a lophophore platform suggests affinities with the Plectambonacea, but it is more probable that the platform, which is not like any plectam- bonaceid structure, represents an independent convergent development for in other respects and especially in the possession of a bilobed cardinal process Christiania is strophomenaceid. ORTHOTETACEA, n. superfamily , Strophomenoids without a functional pedicle; pedicle valve usually greatly modified and ce- OF STROPHOMENOID BRACHIOPODS 9 mented by the umbo or a greater part of the shell surface to a foreign body; brachial valve convex throughout ontogeny; cardinal process bilobed often greatly extended into the pedicle valve, sometimes highly modified; lophophore probably spirolophous in all stocks, exceptionally impressed and supported by spirally coiled calcareous ribbons. Upper Ordovician to Triassic. Family Orthotetidae MacEwan, 1939 Orthotetaceids with a variable but well de- veloped hinge-line and interarea in the pedicle valve; pedicle valve consisting of one continuous chamber; pseudodeltidium of earlier stocks apical and chilidium. correspondingly massive, in later stocks pseudodeltidium completely covering delthyrium, chilidium vestigial, perideltidium always present; shell surface usually finely costel- late with additional radial plicae in many later stocks. Upper Ordovician to Permian. Subfamily Orthotetinae Waagen, 1884 Orthotetids equipped with a pair of dental lamellae often extravagantly developed and in various stages of convergence and coalescence. Upper Ordovician to Permian. Type genus, Orthotetes Fischer. Schuchertellinae, n. subfamily . Orthotetids which have lost the dental lamellae through obsolescence. Devonian to Permian. Type genus, Schuchertella Girty. Subfamily Davidsoniinae King, 1850 Orthotetids lacking costellate ornamentation ; pseudodeltidium and chilidium well developed; dental lamellae obsolescent, sockets deep bounded by flaring socket ridges fused with cardinal process; both valves bear the impressions of a pair of spirally coiled brachia forming very ow cones with the apices directed towards the- brachial valve. Middle Devonian. Type genus, Davidsonia Bouchard. Discusston.—The term perideltidium (Dunbar and Condra 1932, p. 67): has been given to a pair of triangular surfaces forming part of the interarea of the orthotetid pedicle valve and lying lateral to the pseudodeltidium although not necessarily adjacent to it..The perideltidium is variable in area and development but is an integral part of the interarea and is not an oc- currence dependent on shell exfoliation. Each area is slightly elevated above the rest of the interarea and in addition to being orna- LO JOURNAL OF THE mented by growth lines parallel to the hinge- line is also feebly striated at right angles to the hinge-line so that the resultant series of grooves and ridges does not radiate from the umbo and lie obliquely to the perideltidial boundaries. Serial sections of a number of orthotetids sub- stantiate the conclusions of Dunbar and Condra that the perideltidial boundaries are represented by a sharp deflection of both lamellar and fibrous layers. It can also be observed that the stria- tions represent crenulations of the lamellar layer and that part of the fibrous layer adjacent to it. One would have anticipated constrictions on the hinge-line of the brachial valve corresponding to the deflected edges of the perideltidium, but none can be observed, and no plausible reason can be suggested for this differentiation of the interarea. Apart from including the Davidsoniinae within the Orthotetidae the division of the family into two subfamilies dependent upon the presence or absence of dental lamellae is, in the opinion of the writer, more than a convenient morphological grouping for it seems to have been one of the natural consequences of orthotetid development. The earliest known orthotetid, Fardenia Lamont, a biconvex form equipped with dental lamellae, appeared towards the end of the Ordovician and flourished throughout the Silu- rian. There is evidence to suggest (Williams, 1950, p. 120) that by the end of Silurian times sufficient divergence had occurred within the stock to give rise to a schuchertellid, which had lost the dental lamellae by obsolescence, and also a concavo-convex Schellwienella (like the Lower Devonian S. umbraculum (Schloth.)) with strongly developed divergent dental lamellae. It is probable that two such forms were an- cestral to two main stocks, viz, orthotetinid and schuchertellinid which remained independent during their subsequent histories. The range of all described genera is consistent with this belief and there is no evidence to suggest. that either stock was replenished from the other by WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO«1 obsolescence of the dental lamellae or the develop- ment of secondary ones. With regard to the various genera equipped with well-developed dental lamellae it is note- worthy that the disposition of the lamellae seems to be closely related to the configuration of the pedicle valve. Thus Schellwienellas possess concave pedicle valves and divergent dental lamellae while all other orthotetinids have con- vex pedicle valves and dental lamellae which are parallel, convergent, or in various stages of coalescence. Taking into consideration the fact that the dental lamellae always occupied a constant position relative to the interarea, where they lay immediately beneath the teeth, it is reasonable to assume that their disposition was a function of the form and growth of the anterior wall of the pedicle valve. Consequently many species ascribed to such genera as Sicelia, Ortho- tetina, Geyerella, and Meekella may represent independent convergences rather than closely related stocks. Gemmellarolidae, n. family » Attached orthotetaceids with a long conical pedicle valve capped by a reduced operculiform brachial valve; hinge-line obsolescent, interarea completely lost except for a narrow elevated ridge in the pedicle valve representing the pseudodeltidium; articulation aided by the development in both valves of an excessively thickened margin serrated by oblique furrows; cardinalia massive, elongated, with the bilobed cardinal process and laterally extended socket ridges completely fused, in the interior of the pedicle valve the cardinalia is contained within a subcircular myophore chamber, about a third the length of the valve extending from the umbo almost to the periphery of the valve and lying immediately anterior to the pseudodeltid- ium; fibrous layer of shell adjacent to lamellar layer disposed in long sharp folds radiating from the umbo. Permian. Type genus Gemmellaroia Crossman. Figs. 8-12.—8, Orthotetinid morphology, Meekella White and St. John; interior of brachial valve (8a) with posterior view above; interior of pedicle valve (8b). 9, Scacchinellid morphology as typified by Scacchinella Gemmellaro; interior of brachial valve (9a); reconstruction of part of the pedicle valve interior (9b) showing the median septum and the transverse partitions. 10, Gemmellaroiid morphology as typified by Gemmellaroia Crossman; complete shell with a transverse section of the pedicle valve to show the shell structure and the disposition of the myophore chamber (10b), anterior view of brachial valve interior (10a). 11, Thecospirid morphology as typified by Thecospira Zugmayer; interior of brachial valve (lla), interior of pedicle valve (11b) tilted to show the muscle scar arrangement. 12, Diagrammatic representation of the interarea of the orthotetid pedicle valve to show the nature of the perideltidium (PE); lamellar layer (L), fibrous layer (F), pseudodeltidium (P), tooth (T). 10a Frias. 8-12 (See opposite page for legend). 12 JOURNAL OF THE Discussion.—The gemmellaroiids represent a later divergence from a more generalized ortho- tetid stock in which a number of morphological modifications present in the orthotetids gen- erally are carried to conclusion. Thus the ex- cessive elongation of the pedicle valve and the reduction of the hinge-line is seen in late ortho- tetids like Orthotetina but never on the scale of the gemmellaroids. The myophore chamber is especially characteristic of the family but is not unique for a similar structure evolved in an otherwise typical Permian orthotetid (Ortho- tetella King). Scacchinellidae, n. family Attached orthotetaceids, pedicle valve long, conical twisted with longitudinally striated interarea, brachial valve gently convex, exterior spinose without radial ornamentation; interior of pedicle valve with a strong median septum extending anteriorly for over half the length of the shell and divided into a series of chambers by the deposition of a variable number of trans- verse partitions the last formed chamber pre- sumably being the only one occupied by the viscera; brachial valve with a long bilobed cardinal process which extended well into the pedicle valve on either side of the median sep- WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 1 tum; socket ridges small, adductor muscle scars impressed on the inner surfaces of a pair of long, thick ridges extending anteriorly from the cardinal process bases. Permian. Type genus, Scacchinella Gemmellaro. Discussion.—The_ scacchinellids are unique among the orthotetaceids and indeed among all brachiopods in the division of the pedicle valve into a series of chambers by the deposition of transverse partitions. The writer has observed in an occasional Derbyia the apparently natural occurrence of thin flaps of fibrous shell deposit projecting into the body chamber and a similar occurrence is reported by Licharew (1928, p. 272) in the gemmellaroid Tectarea. But in the scacchinellids the partitions were apparently a regular feature of all mature individuals and were presumably a consequence of the great disparity between the volume of the soft parts and the excessive elongation of the pedicle valve. Family Thecospiridae Bittner, 1893 Orthotetaceids attached to a foreign body by cementation of the pedicle valve, exterior tu- berculate without radial ornamentation but sometimes rugate; interarea of pedicle valve entire, without any definition of the pseudo- deltidium, interarea of brachial valve vestigial, OR'DOWVUEIAIN SILURIAN DEVONIAN CARBONIFEROUS | PERMIAN TRIAS SOWERBYELLINAE LEPTESTIINAE AHTIELLINAE PLECTAMB ONITINAE STIANUDAE oO D ar x Q Go n STROPHEODONTINAE GEMMELLAR OIIDAE ORTHOTETINAE HECOSPIRIDAE _ 2 —eEeE SCACCHINELLIDAE Fig. 13.—The stratigraphical distribution of the strophomenoid brachiopods, including the theci- deids; the size of the suprageneric categories figured in the chart is proportionate to the number ot genera included in each category as well as their stratigraphical range. JANUARY 1953 childium absent; pedicle valve with strong un- supported teeth and a small broad muscle scar divided medianly by a low median septum; brachial valve with an erect cardinal process, functionally bilobed but united medianly to form a tripartite structure, sockets deep, muscle scars contained within a pair of subparallel ridges extending anteriorly from the cardinalia and divided medianly by a low median ridge; cardinal process bases prolonged into a pair of short processes which support a pair of spirally coiled calcareous ribbons directed towards the lateral slopes of the pedicle valve; brachial ribbon sharply folded throughout its length to give a V-shaped cross section. Triassic. Type genus, Thecospira Zugmayer. Discussion—The orthotetaceid features of Thecospira are so striking and numerous that it cannot be excluded from the strophomenoids because its lophophore was supported by a pair of spirally coiled calcareous ribbons. The shell is strongly pseudopunctate, the spicules penetrate the internal surfaces which are tuberculate and though they do not penetrate the lamellar layer they are excessively prolonged to give the ex- terior a bluntly spinose appearance. Other strophomenoid features include the mode of attachment, the entire interarea of the pedicle valve (compare the stropheodontids and a similar tendency in those orthotetaceids with a vestigial chilidium) the cardinal process and the muscle sears which are reminiscent of late orthotetaceids like Derby a. ue READ: PROSSERIA GRANDIS 13 The presence of calcified spiral supports in Thecosptra then does not signify that the stock was related to the rostrospiroids or spiriferoids; they represent an independent development out of a spirolophous orthetetaceid. BIBLIOGRAPHY BEECHER, C. E. Studies in evolution. 1901. Caster, K. E. A Devonian fauna from Colombia. Bull. Amer. Pal. 24 (83). 1939. DunBar, C. O., and Conpra, G. E. Brachiopoda of the Pennsylvanian System in Nebraska: Nebraska Geol. Surv. Bull. 5: ser. 2. 1932. Licuarew, B. Uber einige seltene und neue Brachiopoda aus dem Unterperm des nérdlichen Kaukasus. Palaeont. Zeitschr. 10: 258-289. 1928. Koz.towskI, R. Les brachiopodes Gothlandiens de la Podolieé Polonaise. Palaeont. Polonica 1. 1929. Oprx, A. Uber die Plectellinen. Act. et Comm. Univ. Tartu: 1-85. 1982. ——.. Uber Plectamboniten. Act. et Comm. Univ. Tartu: 1-79. 1933. Percival, E. A contribution to the life history of the brachiopod Terebratella inconspicua Sowerby. Trans. Roy. Soc. New Zealand 71 (1): 1-23. 1944. SCHUCHERT, C., and LE VENE, C. M. Brachi- opoda. Fossilium catalogus, pars 42. Tuomas, I. The British Carboniferous Ortho- tetinae. Mem. Geol. Surv. Great Britain. Palaeont. 1 (2): 83-134. 1910. Unricn, E. O., anc Cooprr, G. A. Ozarkian and Canadian Bachiopoda: Geol. Soc. Amer., Spec. Paper 13. 1938. Wiuutams, A. Llandovery brachiopods from Wales with speccal reference to the Llandovery district. Quart. Jour. Geol. Sei. 108: 85-136. 1951. PALEOBOTANY. —Prosseria grandis, a new gerus and new species from the Upper Devonian of New York. CHarues B. Reso, U. 8. Geological Survey. (Com- municated by Roland W. Brown.) The extensive collections of fossil plants made by C.8. Prosser from Devonian hori- zons in New York and Ohio contain nu- merous specimens of interest to students of Paleozoic floras. One of the most remarkable of these specimens is a large slab of black shale and its counterpart carrying as an incrustation the remains of an unusual representative of the Articulatae. The litera- ture on Devonian floras contains no refer- ence to any genus that may be extended to include this plant. In consequence this fossil 1 Publication authorized by the Director, U. 8S. Geological Survey. 13 referred to a new genus, Prosseria, named in honor of the collector. There follows a discussion of the type specimen and _ its possible relationships. PTERIDOPHYTA Articulatae ?Pseudoborniales Prosseria, n. gen. Generic characters at present defined by the single known species. Prosseria grandis, n. sp. Diagnosis.—Plant large, stem 25 mm in di- 14 JOURNAL OF ameter in the type, articulate, surface smooth. Nodes enlarged (40-50 mm in diameter) and giving off both branches and whorls of leaves. Leaves about 18 (?), 9-11 visible on one side, apparently in fascicles of three, emerging from definite points of insertion at the node; linear and long (383 em long and 6 mm wide), narrow at base and enlarging gradually upward for about 15 centimeters, nervation indistinct. Branches, 2 at each node, emerging from opposite sides of the stem, only the bases preserved in the type specimen. Collected by C. 8. Prosser in 1889 from the “Upper Genesee’? shale (West River shale, Genesee group). Kimble Gully, 1 mile southeast of Penn Yan, Yates County, N. Y. Discusston.—The general aspect of Prosseria grandis is shown in Fig. 1. The nearly smooth stem with enlarged nodes, the whorl of linear leaves, and the opposite branching are striking features of the fossil. The leaves, as has already been pointed out, are in fascicles of three on the one side exposed. Details of the lower portions of the leaves and of the bases are rather vague, however, and do not permit critical study. Judged from the occurrences of leaves attached only at the upper one of the two nodes and their absence in the lower node, the appendages must have developed definite abscission layers. It will be seen that there are three distinct leaf bases in the half of the flattened stem exposed at the upper node. These are circular, and leave a distinct 1mpression, suggesting definite articula- tions by their clear-cut aspect as indicated above. The two lateral organs at each node are ob- viously in a different category from the strap- shaped leaves. Their larger size, the open angle they make with the stem, and their frayed ends (indicative of the absence of an abscission layer) are proof of this. These are regarded by the writer as lateral branches. With the meager data at hand concerning this fossil it is obviously unwise to attempt any estimate of the size of the entire plant. The plant may have been quite large, in which case the specimen is but a branch. On the other hand the plant very likely was a relatively small one, and the axis here preserved is the main shoot. The affinities of Prosserta grandis are beyond question with the Articulatae. The plant may possibly be related to Pseudobornia Nathorst. The features observable in the material are, however, scarcely sufficient to be conclusive. It THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. | will be recalled that Pseudobornia? is charac- terized by large articulated stems with one to two branches at each node. The leaves are in whorls of four, are short-stalked, dichotomously divided, and with toothed margins. Their general aspect is somewhat plumose. The fructification is a strobilus said to be comparable with Chezro- strobus Scott.2 The single well-known species, Pseudobornia ursina Nathorst, is from the Upper Devonian of Bear Island. This genus is an iso- lated type which, in the opinion of many paleo- botanists, shows affinities with the Sphenophyl- lales. The linear leaves of Prosseria contrast strongly with the plumose ones of Pseudobornia and provide adequate grounds for generic sepa- ration. The stem provides little information of value in determining relationships, and, in the absence of fertile structures of Prosseria, it is obviously impossible to reach any definite con- clusion regarding exact affinities. There are likewise known the Middle Devonian Calamophyton and Hyenia, grouped by Krausel and Weyland in the Protoarticulatae. These plants, at least in their general makeup, are far more primitive types than Prosseria, showing only a semiverticillate arrangement of much smaller and definitely dichotomous leaves. To the writer it would seem that Prosseria is much more closely related to the Sphenophyl- lales or Pseudoborniales than to the Equtsteales. The greatly enlarged nodes of Prosseria certainly indicate this. Such a condition is quite charac- teristic of the stems of Sphenophyllum, common in the Carboniferous. Nathorst’s figures of Pseudo- bornia ursina show the same condition. Stems of Calamites do not, however, show this. Comparison with the stems identified by Dawson as Calamites inornatus* and later referred by White to Pseudobornia® is unsatisfactory. Dawson’s plant is a broadly ribbed type with the nodes scarcely enlarged. The prominent nodal scars so characteristic of Prusseria are not shown 2Natuorst, A. G., Zur fossilen Flora der Polarldnder. Kongl. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl. 36 (2): 25-28, pl. 7, figs. 9-13, pl. 8, figs. 1, 3-13, pl. 9, pl. 10, figs. 1-3. 1902. ’Scorr, D. H., On Cheirostrobus, a new type of fossil cone from the calciferous sandstone. Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London 189: ser. B, 1-34, pls. 1-6. 1897. 4 Dawson, J. W., Flora of the Devonian period in northeastern America. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 18: 310, pl. 17, fig. 56. 1862. §WuitTse, D. in Kindle, E. M., Stratigraphic relations of Devonian shales of northern Ohio. Amer. Journ. Sci. 34 (4): 210. 1912. READ: PROSSERIA GRANDIS 15 Fig. 1.—Photograph of the shale slab carrying the specimen of Prosseria grandis, showing the great length of the leaves, the enlarged nodes, and the smooth stem, X 14. Fig. 2——Photograph of the upper of the two nodes of the preceding figure showing the leaf bases and the opposite branch(?) bases, X 1. 16 JOURNAL OF THE in the figure of the type specimen of C. inornatus. It is, in fact, extremely doubtful if there is suffi- cient information available to permit the proper generic determination of the latter. It is quite likely a Protocalamites. This new plant, although only its vegetative features are known and those imperfectly, has a rather important morphological — significance. Briefly, Prossera grandis is an early member of the Articulatae of early Late Devonian age (Portage). It shows definite whorls of large and long-divided leaves. The nodal structure suggests WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 1 affinity with the Sphenophyllales. The leaves are, however, far larger than those of the Carbonif- erous Articulatae. These large leaves in this very early type hardly support the frequent claims that the leaves of this group were originally microphyllous. Rather, the suggestion, based on arrangement of the known members of the Articulatae in chronologic order with Prosseria taking its place near, at least, to the base, is that the series may be one of reduction from megaphylls rather than expansion from micro- phylls. MYCOLOGY.—A new species of Protodontia from British Columbia. G. W. Mar- tin, State University of Iowa. In January 1950 Dr. Ruth Macrae, of the Division of Botany and Plant Pathology, Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, Can- ada, sent me two specimens of a tremellace- ous fungus, accompanied by careful notes and drawings, which obviously represented the same species but which were clearly dis- tinct from any I had previously seen or to which I could find reference in the literature. Both had been collected the preceding year by W. G. Ziller on slash of black cottonwood in central British Columbia. The specimens, although sporulating freely, appeared to be incompletely developed and the assignment to a genus offered great difficulty, hence I laid them aside awaiting fuller information. Meanwhile, two additional collections from the same area were found in the collections at Ottawa, one collected by Mr. Ziller and one by Dr. M. K. Nobles. Dr. Macrae kindly sent me the balance of the material from Ottawa and Mr. Ziller let me see the even more abundant material of all four collections deposited in the Forest Pathology Collection of the Dominion Department of Agriculture at Victoria, British Columbia. On the basis of this material, I feel justified in describing the species. Protodontia oligacantha, sp. nov. Fructificationibus late effusis, resupinatis, tenuibus, mediis fuligineis vel avellaneis, ad fimbrias albas pallescentibus; aculeis sparsis, fimbriatis, albis, ad 0.6 mm longis; hymenio in basidiis et dendrophysibus dense aggregatis consistente; subhymenio hyalino; hyphis funda- menti fulvis; probasidiis globosis vel pyriformi- bus, plerumque 13-20 x 9-12u, denique crucia- tim-septatis; epibasidiis crassis breviculis latis, 2—2.5(-3)u; basidiosporis cylindraceo-curvulis, apiculatis, (9-)10-12(-13) x (4-)4.5-5(-5.5)y, per repetitionem germinantibus. Broadly effused, up to 13 X 5 cm in extent, possibly larger, Benzo Brown to Cinnamon Drab, fading to buff or pallid near the broad, thin, fimbriate, white margin; waxy when moist, the hymenial surface drying horny; spines blunt, broad, somewhat fimbriate, white, up to 690u long and 350u in diameter at base, tapering toward tips, sparsely and irregularly distributed; in section 65-2304 thick between the spines, composed of a colorless hymenial layer 20-40u thick, a yellowish basal layer of horizontal hyphae and an intermediate layer of variable thickness, clear yellow by transmitted light, which pene- trates the spines, composed of indistinct ag- glutinated hyphae intermingled with crystalline accretions; hymenium continuous, covering both Fic. 1.—Protodontia oligacantha, type: Habit, < 1, showing fimbriate margin. JANUARY 1953 Fie. 2.—Protodontia oligacantha, type: Longi- tudinal section of spine, showing hymenium and sterile tip, X 80. spines and area between them, except at tips of spines, composed of colorless basidia and dendro- physes; dendrophyses 3-4u in diameter at base, branching subdichotomously several times and irregularly attenuated toward the tips, some- times with clamp-connections; probasidia globose to ovate or pyriform, mostly 13-20 x 9-12y, becoming cruciate-septate, each cell producing a thick, rather short epibasidium, 2-2.5(-3)u in diameter; basidiospores cylindrical to allantoid, usually with numerous small guttules, sometimes with 1-3 large guttules and numerous smaller ones, (9-)10-12(-18) x (4-)4.5-5(-5.5)u, ger- minating by repetition. British Columbia: Cottonwood, August 3, 1949, W. G. Ziller, V-5013 (DAOM 21881), type. Other collections examined: Cottonwood, July 26, 1949, M. K. Nobles, V-5247 (DAOM 22974); Cinema, August 11, 1949, W. G. Ziller, V-5084 (DAOM 22973) and V-5087 (DAOM 21934). All on dead wood of Populus trichocarpa T. & G. Numbers cited are those of Herb. Lab. For. Path. Victoria (V) and Myc. Herb. Sci. Serv. Dept. Agr. Ottawa (DAOM). Portions of all except V-5084 are in Myc. Coll. 8. U. I. The specific epithet is based on oXtyos, few, and a@kav@a, spine. The outstanding characteristics of P. oliga- cantha are the sparse development of the spines and the broad, spineless, fimbriate margin (Fig. 1). Where most abundant, the spines number 3-5 to a square millimeter. They are fertile over most of the surface, as is the hymenium between them, but the extreme tip is often sterile (Fig. 2), owing to protrusion of an extension of the inter- mediate yellow layer, giving them a fimbriate appearance when examined dry under a binocu- MARTIN: NEW SPECIES OF PROTODONTIA 17 lar. They tend to be borne in lines on whitish strands, which makes the hymenial surface ap- pear faintly reticulate under a lens. Some speci- mens of Eichleriella spinulosa (B. & C.) Burt bear tubercles on the hymenial surface which may approach in abundance the spines of P. oligacantha, but the much thicker, darker fructi- fication, the larger spores and basidia and the strongly determinate margin of the former species mark it as clearly distinct. The basidia and spores are of approximately the same size as those of E. macrospora (Peck) Martin, which may bear scattered tubercles and is sometimes subfimbriate and indeterminate when young, but the thick, determinate fructification of mature collections of that species and the characteristic texture, difficult to describe, but readily recognizable when known, make it impossible to consider it the same as the Canadian fungus. In the four ample collections which have been studied, there is no suggestion that P. oligacantha ever develops a determinate margin. It seems probable, how- ever, that collections made later in the season might show a somewhat more extensive develop- ment of the spines. The basidia and spores (Fig. 3) are characteristic of the Tremellaceae. There is often a suggestion of a clamp connection at the base of the basidium, but in most cases this cannot be seen. The dendrophyses (Fig. 3, ¢) are rather difficult to see since the terminal portion does not stain. The largest fructifications examined were 13 < 4 cm and 12 X 5 ecm respectively, one of oe \) @! PS € Fic. 3.—Protodontia oligacantha: a-d, no. V- 5087. a, Two basidia and ovate structure, probably a very young basidium (note beak on basidium at right); b, two basidia, one in apical view; c¢, dendrophysis; d, two spores, one preparing to germinate by repetition. e-f, No. V-5013. e, two basidia, f, two spores, one preparing to germinate by repetition. All X 1,000. @= 18 JOURNAL OF THE these measurements secured by matching two broken pieces. The growth may well become much more extensive. ago 24: 508-511. 1932) I discussed the genus Protodontia with particular reference to our commonest spezies, which I referred to P. uda v. Hoéhn., and at that time commented on the genus Protohydnum Moll., in which Protodontia is often included. Recently (Univ. Iowa Stud. Nat. Hist. 19 (3): 63. 1952), I reported P. piceicola (Kihner) Martin from Ontario. A collection from Louisiana by Langlois, determined by him as Protohydnum lividum, in the herbaria of the U. 8. Dept. of Agriculture and the Missouri Botanical Garden, may well be that species and a Protodontia, but the generic transfer should be made only by one who has access to adequate European ma- Some years (Mycologia WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 1 terial. These seem to be the only species known from the United States and Canada. Dr. M. A. Donk has been kind enough to let me see some of his notes on Protodontia. He believes that what I have referred to P. uda is in reality distinct from the European form. This may be correct. I have not seen enough European material to be certain it is not and have depended mainly on published descriptions for the determi- nation of our collections. These, however, show substantial variation but nothing beyond what may, in my opinion, be considered as due to differences in degree of maturity or as responses to local environmental fluctuations. Whelden (Mycologia 29: 100-115. 1937), who studied cytologically an American collection referred to P. uda, reports that his material had been compared with von Hoéhnel’s type by Dr. D. P. Rogers, who found them to agree exactly. ICHTHYOLOGY.—Ten new American gobioid fishes in the United States National Museum, including additions to a revision of Gobionellus. Isaac GINSBURG, U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. (Communicated by L. P. Schultz.) During revisional studies of the genera of American fishes, the following 10 unde- scribed species and subspecies discovered in the U. 8. Fish and Wildlife Service and the U. 8S. National Museum are here named and briefly described. All holotypes are deposited in the National Museum. Figures of proportional measurements given below refer to percentages of the stand- ard length. Lengths of the pectoral and ventral fins denote the length of their longest rays, from their point of articulation, as de- termined at the surface without dissection, to their distal margin. The given lengths of specimens refer to the total length, including the caudal fin, unless otherwise stated. The numbers of fin supports are of para- mount importance in the classification of fishes, including gobies. The precise struc- ture of the fins of fishes in general, namely, the different kinds of fin supports comprising the fins, differs largely by family or other major taxonomic groupings. The variability and relative numbers of the different sup- ports differ by species or population of lower rank, and also by higher taxonomic groups. The numbers of fin supports have been widely used in taxonomy; but the broader problem of the comparative morphology of the fins of fishes in general has been largely neglected. Lately, this subject began to en- gage the attention of investigators. Hubbs (Copeia, 1948: 1384; 1945: 75) raises the question of the use of a certain fin formula in describing gobioid fishes, in connection with a discussion of the structure of the fins of other fishes. Beebe (Zoologica 27: 45. 1942) is of the opinion that the last two approxi- mated dorsal rays of Dixonina—a genus belonging to a different order than gobies— and related genera should be enumerated separately instead of counting them together as one ray. However, a thorough study of the comparative morphology of the fins in the major groups of fishes still remains to be made. As the fin structure differs largely by major groups, the proper and most advan- tageous method of enumeration, and any formula expressing such enumeration, will differ by such major groups. In the superfamily Gobioidea the struc- ture of the fins is as follows: The first dorsal consists of flexible (with few exceptions), unsegmented fin supports which are evi- dently homologous with the pungent spines of other fishes having two dorsal fins. The first fin support of the second dorsal is, as the fin supports of the first dorsal, likewise flexible and unsegmented, and is presumably also homologous with the pungent spine in | JANUARY 1953 the same position of other fishes (although no thorough study has as yet been made to verify this assumption). The first unseg- mented fin support of the second dorsal is followed by a variable number of segmented, and variously branched rays, the last two of which are very closely approximated at the base. The structure of the anal is the same as that of the second dorsal. The above described structures apply to all the species in the superfamily and vir- tually to all the individuals of any species. Exceptions from the general rule that are now and then found in individual fish—and such exceptions comprise less than | percent of the combined counts of all the species examined—are to be considered as slight abnormalities rather than as representations of a normal individual variability. As these are superfamily characters, there seems no point in repeating these facts under each species, either in words or by a formula, as it is unnecessary to repeat any other super- family character in the species descriptions. Consequently, in the descriptions here given the following uniform method is adopted in enumerating those rays that are of impor- tance in separating the species: All counts are given in Arabic numerals. A semicolon separates the counts of the two dorsals and a hyphen connects the extremes of the range of the count of any given fin. The first un- segmented fin support of the second dorsal, and anal, is included in the count, while the last two approximated rays of both fins are counted as one. This is the method I used uniformly in previous publications on go- bioids. If it is desired to get the number of segmented rays only, that is, to exclude the first fin support and count the last two as one ray, 1 is to be subtracted from the figures given below; to include the first and count the last two separately, 1 needs to be added; excluding the first and counting the last two separately, the numbers will be the same as those given below. The rays in the pectoral fin of gobies generally do not differ in essential structure, except that some of the marginal rays grow progressively shorter, and the extent of branching decreases outwardly. In the fol- lowing descriptions all the pectoral rays are included without distinction in the same count. GINSBURG: TEN NEW GOBIOID. FISHES 19 Family ELEOTRIDAE Dormitator cubanus, n. sp. D 7; 8-9. A 8-9. P 15. Se 33-35. No mucous pores on preopercular sulcus. Total number of gill rakers in outer row of first gill arch, in a 94- mm specimen, 29. Head 30-31, postorbital part of head 15.5-16.5, caudal 27-28, ventral 23.5- 24.5, pectoral 23-25.5. Body with a median lon- gitudinal row of very diffuse spots; a dark shoul- der spot above pectoral base; a dark, narrow, short, oblique band on cheek, under anterior margin of pupil to end of maxillary; the two dorsals and caudal with rows of small dark spots, roughly transverse on caudal and oblique on dorsals. (No oblique transverse light bands on body against a darker background as in related species, but their absence possibly due to fading.) Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 55668. San Cristdébal, Cuba; C. H. Eigenmann; 1902; female 82 mm. Paratypes—U.S.N.M. no. 123234, a male ob- tained with the holotype, 73.6 mm in standard length with the caudal broken, approximately 94 mm in total length. U.S.N.M. no. 55688; Pinar del Rio, Cuba; C. H. Eigenmann; March 1902; female 48 mm. Remarks.—This is a well-marked species and differs sharply from its congeners in the number of gill rakers. Specimens of comparable size, with that stated above, of the other species have a total of 51 or more gill rakers in the outer row of the first gill arch. It also differs in lacking pores on the preopercular sulcus, and in aver- aging fewer dorsal and anal rays and shorter fins; although there is more or less intergradation in these latter characters. Taking its character pattern as a whole, cubanus is sharply defined and rather easily distinguishable. It is probably a highly localized species and confined to some fresh-water streams in Cuba, as 445 specimens of Dormitator examined from the western At- lantic coasts, ranging from Texas to Brazil, and from several West Indian Islands including Cuba, all belong to the common Atlantic species, maculatus. The three specimens forming the basis of this account were collected by Eigenmann (Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish. 22 (1902): 211-236. 1903) during his investigation of the cave inhabiting fishes of Cuba, in 1902, when he made many striking dis- coveries. He then obtained both maculatus and cubanus and recorded them together under the former designation. 20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Dormitator latifrons mexicanus, n. subsp. D(6) 7 (8); (8) 9-10. A (9) 10-11. P 14-16. Se 34-36.—Preopercular sulcus with pores, usu- ally 4 in number. Total number of gill rakers in outer row of first gill arch, in 8 specimens 242- 256 mm (from Colima, Mexico), 182-145, and in the same specimens, head 30.5-32.5, post- orbital 16-18, caudal 30.5-32.5, ventral 20-22, pectoral 22.5-24. In the holotype, gill rakers 107, head 33, postorbital 19, caudal 34.5, ventral 21.5, pectoral 25.5. Body dark with rather nar- row, obliquely transverse, diffuse, lighter cross bands; a large very dark shoulder spot near and over pectoral base; a narrow dark band on cheek under anterior margin of pupil to end of maxil- lary; posterior part of head with dark longitu- dinal, nearly parallel bands, rather faint to well defined; a somewhat curved band at pectoral base. Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 7350. San Lucas, Lower California; I. Xanthus; male 140 mm. Remarks.—Other 49 specimens 24-256 mm examined from the Pacific coast of Mexico ranging from La Paz in the Gulf of California to Salina Cruz in the gulf of Tehuantepec. The subspecies mexicanus differs from latifrons chiefly in the number of gill rakers and the head length. Both of these characters differ also intra- specifically with the size of the fish and it is necessary to compare specimens of like size. Two specimens of latifrons from the Pacific coast of Panamd4, 235-259 mm, comparable in size with the large specimens described above, have gill rakers 149-164 and head length 33.5-88. D. mexicanus also averages a shorter caudal, ventral, pectoral and postorbital part of the head; but it intergrades considerably with latifrons in these characters. The two are apparently allopatric populations on the Pacific coast of Mexico and Central America, respectively. In this prelim- inary account the few largest specimens are com- pared and they do not show intergradation in the two chief characters. However, a comparison of the 50 specimens examined.of mexicanus with 47 specimens of latifrons, segregated by com- parable size groups shows that they intergrade with a degree of divergence of subspecies mag- nitude. ‘ The name latifrons was proposed by Richard- son for two specimens from the ‘‘Pacific Ocean.” It has since been used for the common eastern Pacific species of Dormitator, including Mexico and Central America, or the name was placed in VoL. 43, NO. 1 the synonymy of D. maculatus, depending on whether an author treated the eastern Pacific population as a distinct species, or he treated that population as being conspecific with that from the western Atlantic. As the common east- ern Pacific species is here divided into two sub- species, the name latifrons is hereby restricted to the Panama population, since it is more likely that Richardson’s specimens came from the coast of central America than that of Mexico. Guavina micropus, n. sp. D 7; 10. A 10. P 16. Se 89. Almost completely scaled, except underside of head, and preoper- cular sulcus, and a small area on side of snout in front of eye, altogether or largely scaleless. Seales on posterior part of body rather weakly spinulose, others cycloid. Ventral 11.5, pectoral 16, body depth 22.5, least depth of caudal pe- duncle 15, head 31, postorbital 18, head depth directly behind eye 15, head width at same point 20, maxillary 13, snout 9, eye 5.5, interorbital 10.5, antedorsal distance 36.5. Color brownish, dark on dorsal aspect, much lighter below; no saliently distinctive markings, pigment some- what concentrated on upper part of pectoral base forming a rather faint, diffuse blotch. Holotype——U.S.N.M. no. 123230. Miraflores Locks, Panama Canal; east chamber; A. O. Foster; April 28-29, 1937; female 90 mm in standard length, the caudal damaged. Remarks.—Only one species of this genus was known heretofore, G. guavina from the western Atlantic coasts. The new species differs at a glance in having a strikingly short ventral fin, which also shows up well after measuring, 10 specimens of guavina having the ventral 18-19.5. This species also has a shorter pectoral and ante- dorsal, but these differences are not as great as that of the ventral; in the same 10 specimens of guavina, pectoral 20.5-22, antedorsal 39.5-41.5. It also has one ray less in the dorsal (in the speci- mens examined of guavina, the dorsal rays are constantly 11), and it further differs in having the preopercular sulcus naked instead of scaled over. This is most probably a hitherto undiscovered Pacific species, corresponding to the Atlantic guavina, which has found its way into the Panama Canal. Gobiomorus polylepis, n. sp. D 6; 10. A 10. P 18. Se 77-78. Caudal 24.5, JANUARY 1953 ventral 18.2-18.4, pectoral 17.8-18, depth about 20 (belly collapsed and not accurately deter- minable), peduncle 11.5-12, head 30-80.5, post- orbital 18-18.1, head depth 12.38-12.4, head width 14.7-14.8, maxillary 12.5-13, snout 9.5—- 10, eye 3.43.8, interorbital 7—7.5, antedorsal 36.5-37. Irregularly shaded, without distinctive markings (perhaps faded from long immersion in preservative); pectoral, caudal and the two dorsals with rows of small diffuse spots. Holotype—U.S.N.M. no. 130917. Colima, Mexico; exhibited by Mexican Government at Chicago World’s Fair, 1893; female 277 mm, 222 mm in standard length. Paratype.—U.S.N.M. no. 123233; from same container as the type; female 243 mm in stand- ard length with caudal end broken off, approxi- mately 303 mm in total length. Remarks.—Two common and widespread spe- cies of Gobiomorus were known _ heretofore, maculatus from the Pacific drainage and dor- mitor from the Atlantic drainage. In preparing a revision of the genus, polyelpis was compared with 257 specimens of maculatus from localities ranging from the Gulf of California to Peru, including 14 specimens from the coast of Mexico, and 204 specimens of dormitor ranging from Texas to Venezuela. This is a strongly marked species and is easily distinguishable from the two com- mon species by the number of scales. In 175 specimens of dormitor the range of the scale count is 58-64, in 241 specimens of maculatus the range is 54-60, as compared with 77-78 in polylepis. In the number of anal and pectoral rays, polylepis nearly agrees with the Atlantic dormitor, rather than with the Pacific maculatus, and in the number of scales it is also nearest dormitor. It is remarkable that such a sharply defined and large gobioid species from the North American continent escaped detection up to now. It is probably another one of those species having a narrowly circumscribed geographic range. Erotelis smaragdus civitatum, n. subsp. D 6; 12. A 10. P 17. Se 105. Scales on dorsal aspect extending to within a short distance of eyes; opercle entirely scaleless; cheek almost naked, only a few scales present posteriorly near its middle; all scales cycloid. Preopercular spine rather reduced and concealed under the skin. Caudal 27.5, ventral 13, pectoral 15.5, depth 15, peduncle 10, head 20.5, postorbital 13.5, head depth 9, head width 9.5, maxillary 7.5, snout 4.2, eye 3.2, interorbital 4.3, antedorsal 32.5. GINSBURG: TEN NEW. GOBIOID FISHES Ak Color almost uniformly dusky, darker on dorsal and somewhat lighter on ventral aspect; pigment somewhat concentrated on upper part of pec- toral base to form a diffuse blotch; otherwise no distinctive color marks. Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 123229. St. Vincent Island, Fla.; taken with seine in deep soft mud in large pond on the bay side of the island; Tsaac Ginsburg; July 23, 1932; female 123 mm. Remarks.—The above description is drawn from the holotype. Two small specimens 46-57 mm from Harbor Island, Tex., collected by John C. Pearson, have the following counts: D 6; IAC MOLINE 1S; eal 1D) Oe AL AO ae ae This subspecies differs from smaragdus chiefly in the number of dorsal rays. In 26 specimens of smaragdus the dorsal rays number 11 in 25 and 10 in 1. In 11 specimens of the Pacific armiger the dorsal rays number 13 in 9 and 12 in 2. The dorsal count in cwitatum, 12 in 2 specimens and 11 in 1, is intermediate between smaragdus and armiger. While only 3 specimens of civitatum are available, fair composite samples of armiger and smaragdus were examined to show that it di- verges at least subspecifically from the latter. The samples examined indicate a divergence of sub- species degree. In general appearance, cwitatuwm is not as excessively slender as smaragdus which is almost anguilliform, but somewhat approaches in this respect the species of the closely related genus Hleotris. This difference is rather marked on direct comparison of specimens, but does not show up well in measurements. Of the 26 specimens of smaragdus examined 7 are from Key West, the others are from Cuba, Haiti, Puerto Rico, Curacao, Panama, and Vene- zuela. Consequently the Key West population of smaragdus is nearer to those of the West Indies and Central America than to that on the north- ern Gulf coast of the United States. Chriolepis tagus, n. sp. DEC 2 Ae tine ao Amterior parhnor soody, naked, posterior part scaled, scales extending forward to under end of first dorsal; caudal base with modified scales. (The single specimen de- scribed is in but indifferent condition, the squa- mation especially is defective and nearly all scales have fallen. The scale pockets indicate the extent of squamation. On the caudal base only one scale is now remaining, at its outer angle, a conspicuously modified, large ctenoid scale, very similar to the scale present in Chriolepis minutillus in the same position.) Lower jaw with 22 JOURNAL OF THE two inner posterior caninoids. Kye large, the interorbital narrow. Ventral falling considerably short of anus. Pectoral reaching beyond a ver- tical through origin of first dorsal. Tongue mod- erately emarginate. (Color apparently faded, only a few large scattered chromatophores on head.) Holotype.—U.S.N.M. no. 123232. Tagus Cove, Albemarle Island, Galdpagos Archipelago; dredged in 10-18 fathoms; Hancock Expedition, W. L. Schmitt; January 15, 1934; male 16.3 mm in standard length, 21 mm to end of partly broken caudal. Remarks.—The squamation is more extensive in this species than in any known species of Chriolepts. The number of anal and _ pectoral rays is higher than in any other species. The number of dorsal rays is higher than in any species, except some individual variants of minutillus. Altogether, tagus is a sharply di- vergent and strongly marked species. Chriolepis benthonis, n. sp. D7;9.A8. P 16. Anterior part of body naked, posterior part scaled; scales extending forward to a point near midline under base of seventh dorsal ray; in 12 oblique rows to base of caudal; a few scales on posterior part of peduncle ctenoid, most scales cycloid; modified scales on caudal base present (most modified scales missing and cannot be described in detail). Lower jaw without posterior inner caninoids. Eye very large; inter- orbital very narrow. Ventral reaching anus. Pectoral reaching to under base of first dorsal ray. Tongue entire. Ventral 28.5, pectoral 27.5, depth 21, peduncle 12, head 30.5, postorbital 14.5, head depth 17, head width 19, maxillary 12, snout 8, eye 10.5, interorbital 2, antedorsal 37.5. (Color a rather uniform light yellowish, probably faded.) Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 47641. Blake Ex- pedition, station ccxuiI, Alexander Agassiz; off Progreso, Yucatdn, Mexico; lat. 23° 13’ N., long. 89° 10’ W.; 84 fathoms; male 30.7 mm in standard length, the caudal damaged. Remarks.—This species has the lowest num- ber of dorsal and anal rays of any known species of Chriolepis. The extent of scalation is nearly as in the Pacific zebra; it differs from that species, besides the difference in the number of dorsal and anal rays, also in having smaller teeth, a larger eye and narrower interorbital. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 1 Psilotris, n. gen. Genotype.—Psilotris alepis, n. sp. This genus is characterized by and differs from all known American eleotrid genera, by a com- bination of two characters: the total lack of scales and the absence of mucous pores. Full grown specimens of Hleotrica also lack scales; but Psilotris differs in lacking pores as well. A de- tailed study of American gobioids leads to the conclusion that the character of the pores is more important as a phylogenetic criterion than the character of the squamation. It follows then that Psilotris is more nearly related to Chriolepis which also lacks pores, although the latter has the body partly scaled. With respect to the squamation, and other characters as well, Ps7- lotris and Chriolepis present a closely analogous, parallel development to the genera Gobiosoma and Garmannia in the family Gobiidae. Etymology.—Psilotris, an abbreviated form of psiloeleotris (naked eleotris). Psilotris alepis, n. sp. D 7; 10. A 9. P 15. Seales altogether absent, on caudal base as well as on the body and head. Body moderately elongate, compressed; head moderately depressed. Maxillary ending under anterior margin of pupil. Mouth subterminal, lower jaw but slightly projecting; gape very moderately inclined, a horizontal through distal margin of upper lip passing through lower part of eye. Teeth in bands; outer teeth well enlarged; inner posterior teeth in lower jaw also enlarged, but hardly large enough to be described as canin- oid. Ventral falling considerably short of anus; pectoral slightly short of a vertical through base of first dorsal ray. Gill opening restricted, at- tachment of branchiostegal membrane near lower part of pectoral base. Female anal papilla large, thick, globose. No mucous pores on head. Caudal 27.5, ventral 23:5, pectoral’ 27-5, depth 2a. peduncle 13.5, head 30.5, postorbital 18, head depth 16, head width 17.5, maxillary 11.5, snout 7, eye 7, interorbital 3, antedorsal 42.5. (Because of the very small size of the specimen measured, and the comparative crudeness of the instrument used, an ordinary Vernier caliper, the preceding measurements are rough approximations only.) Diffusely cross-banded; body with 5 broad, ir- regular, diffuse bands, the anterior 2 somewhat Y-shaped; a subvertical, diffuse band under anterior part of eye; a wider, oblique band under posterior part of eye. JANUARY 1953 Holotype.—U.S.N.M. no. 123231. St. Croix Island, Virgin Islands; on reef; Smithsonian Hart- ford Expedition, W. L. Schmitt; April 8, 1937; female 17 mm. The small specimen examined appears to be an adult. It apparently represents a very small species, rather than the young of a larger species. This species is readily distinguished from all known western Atlantic eleotrids by its total lack of scales. Its relationship is discussed above under the genus account. Family GoBIIDAE Genus Gobionellus Girard Since my revision of this genus was published (Bull. Bingham Oceanogr. Coll. 4 (art. 2). 1932), I had the opportunity to study many more samples of nearly all species, comprising for most species many more specimens than those forming the basis of the revision. Besides the additional specimens examined, characters hitherto gener- ally neglected and not considered in the revision, have been studied in detail. The more striking results of this study of additional samples and characters are as follows: (1) Two new species were discovered. (2) It was concluded that two American species, previously described and referred to Huctenogobius, are more properly placed in Gobionellus as their character pattern, in general, fits in well with the other species of the latter genus. (A discussion of the statusof Euctenogobius has been published by me in Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus: 82: 19. 1933.) (3) The relationship of one species as treated in the re- vision, needs emendation. The two new species are here described, and also three new subgenera are established, in accordance with the addi- tional information to place all species in their proper place in the scheme of classification em- ployed in the revision. Gobionellus mystax, n. sp. D 6; 13. A 14. P 17-19. Sc 70-73. Scales ex- tending on antedorsal area to a vertical plane through preopercular sulcus, a narrow naked area on midback, corresponding to predorsal keel, extending from origin of first dorsal, all the way forward; dorsal area in front of preopercular sulcus, and side of head scaleless; throat largely naked, except a rather narrow longitudinal median strip of scales; pectoral base scaleless; ventral aspect of belly scaled, except a rather moderate naked area directly behind base of GINSBURG: TEN NEW GOBIOID FISHES 23 ventral fin; anterior scales and those on belly cycloid, posterior scales nearly all ctenoid, the ctenoid scales beginning at a point near midline under base of fourth dorsal spine. Teeth in nar- row bands, those in outer and inner rows only a little larger than others. Second and third dorsal spines in male notably prolonged, the third longest, reaching base of fifth dorsal ray. Maxil- lary notably long, its end reaching preopercular margin or nearly so. Caudal 55.5-57.5, ventral 20.5-21, pectoral 19, depth 16-17, peduncle 9-9.5, head 22, postorbital 10.5-11, head depth 13, head width 11-11.3, maxillary 15.5-16, snout 8-8.5, eye 4.5, interorbital 3.5-4, antedorsal 29. (Color dark all over without distinctive markings, probably the color pattern obliterated from long immersion in preservative.) Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 130859. Laguna de Mexcaltitan, Territory of Tepic [now the state of Nayarit], Mexico; exhibited by Mexican Government at Chicago World’s Fair, 1893; male 227 mm, 144 mm in standard length. Paratype.—U.S.N.M. no. 123235. In same lot with the type; male 251 mm, 161 mm in standard length. Remarks.—This species is close to microdon and belongs in the same subgenus with it, Go- batus. It differs in having a longer maxillary and caudal. In the genus Gobionellus both of these characters differ with the species and also intra- specifically with sex and size, the caudal con- siderably and the maxillary moderately so. As the two specimens examined are very large males, it may be suggested that the seemingly specific differences are rather due to their size and sex. However, they were compared with a male of microdon 117 mm in standard length from Mira- flores Lake, Panama Canal, not much smaller than the two specimens here described, and the differences in these two characters are too pro- nounced to be reasonably ascribed to intra- specific individual variability or sex and size differences. They are evidently interspecific dif- ferences and the two specimens represent a spe- cies close to but different from microdon. In the above male of microdon: caudal 34; maxillary 12.5, ending under posterior margin of eye. The maxillary in mystaz is so strikingly long that the generic definition given in my revision of the genus needs to be emended to include this spe- cles. The scales in the two specimens of mystax number 70-73, while in the two types of micro- D4 JOURNAL OF THE don from Rio Ahome, México, they number 60-61, and it would seem that the two species also differ in the scale count. However, in two specimens of muicrodon from Rio Juan Diaz, Panama, the scales are 59-65, while in two from the Panama Canal they number 69-72. Consequently, the scale count in microdon seems to differ intraspecifically with the popula- tion, and its possible value as an interspecific character remains to be determined by more ex- tensive samples. Gobionellus gracillimus, n. sp. D 6; 14. A 15. P 18-20. Se 83-99. Antedorsal area completely scaled to within a short distance of eyes; opercle with a moderate-sized patch of scales at upper anterior corner; cheek naked .or a few scales present; throat partly scaled; pec- toral base scaleless; ventral aspect of belly scaled over posteriorly, a rather large or moderate sized area behind base of ventral fin naked;anterior scales cycloid, posterior scales’ mostly ctenoid, the ctenoid scales beginning at a point variably situated under base of third dorsal spine to under base of fifth dorsal ray. Teeth in narrow bands, those in outer and inner rows a little larger than those in between. Maxillary generally ending under space between posterior margin of pupil and that of eye; slightly past eye in the largest males. Second to fourth dorsal spines notably prolonged in large specimens, the longest spine usually reaching to base of fifth or sixth dorsal ray, sometimes to base of third ray. Body not- ably slender and caudal notably long; depth 11.9-15.5 in female, 11-13.3 in male; caudal 41-46.5 in female, 51.5-63.5 in male. Other measurements not of paramount specific im- portance and only shghtly or moderately dif- ferent with sex, the range of both sexes as follows: ventral 17.5-21.5, pectoral 16.0-—20.5, peduncle 7.5-9, head 18-21.5, postorbital 8.5-11.5, head depth 10.5-13, head width 9-10.5, maxillary 9.5-11.5, snout 6.5-7.5, eye 3.5-5, interorbital 2-3, antedorsal 25-29.5. (All preceding measure- ments, including that of caudal and depth, of specimens 106-165 mm in standard length.) A large, longitudinally oblong, dark spot below first dorsal and centered slightly above middle of body; a small spot on caudal base; 2 or 3 small dark spots on anterior margin of first dorsal; a median longitudinal row of many small spots, well marked in a recently preserved specimen, now faded, and not discernible in other pre- WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 1 served specimens; the large body spot and the caudal spot rather well marked in the smaller specimens, faint or imperceptible in large ones (color pattern seemingly becoming faint ‘with growth and also fading in preserved specimens). Holotype-—U.S.N.M. no. 1238227. Apalachi- cola Bay, Fla.; trawl; July 16, 1932; Isaae Ginsburg; male 271 mm, 165 mm in standard length. Remarks.—Thirteen other specimens 106-157 mm in standard lengths were studied from St. Johns River, New Smyrna, and Pensacola Bay, Fla.; Bayou St. Denis, La.; off Padre Island, Tex. In the revision of the genus, the populations of the extremely long bodied, western Atlantic gobies which belong to the subgenus Gobionellus, were divided into two species on the basis of the scale count, hastatus with more numerous scales from the northern Gulf coast, and oceanicus with fewer scales from Key West, the West Indies, and Central America. On the basis of the samples examined for the revision of the genus, the two species showed both a morphologic and geo- graphic gap between them. Hildebrand and Cable later found that their geographic ranges overlap and that both species occur at North Carolina (Bull. U. 8. Bur. Fish. 48: 365. 1938). By an ex- amination of many more specimens, I now find that these two species also intergrade somewhat in the scale count and are not as easily separable as the smaller samples indicated. Furthermore, I now find that the finer scaled gobies from the coast of the United States (58 specimens were now examined instead of the 7 specimens exam- ined for the revision), fall into two groups, rather roughly separable by four correlated char- acters. One group, here distinguished as gracillt- mus, has a longer caudal, more slender body, longer dorsal spines and more numerous scales. The data for the four characters seem to form four bimodal curves, and we are evidently deal- ing with two distinct populations, gracillimus and hastatus. However, they intergrade in all four characters and individual specimens cannot always be placed with certainty. If a specimen has all four, or at least three, of the characters typical or close to the mode of its population, it can be placed with a measure of assurance, and this is so with the large majority of specimens. But, if a specimen has less than three characters correlated, or if three or four of its characters fall near the borderline its proper position is doubt- JANUARY 1953 ful. (Such doubtful specimens constitute approxi- mately 10 percent of the total.) Consequently, the proper taxonomic status of these two evi- dently distinct populations is uncertain. If they were to occupy separate geographic ranges, they should properly be treated as two geographic subspecies, and such a course could hardly be questioned. As it is, they either constitute two coordinate, synpatric subspecies, in which case they form an exception to the general rule that two subspecies occupy separate territories, per- haps they are ecological subspecies having nearly the same geographic range; or they constitute two full species which are but incompletely dis- tinguishable by current taxonomic methods. These questions might be resolved by a more elaborate sampling of the populations, perhaps supplemented by ecological studies. The distin- guishing characters, except the scale count, dif- fer also with size and sex, and hence it would take very extensive samples to work out the finer details. Large males, 120 mm or over in standard length, diverge most, and such specimens are well separable by species. It is probable that depth of water is a factor in the distributional basis of the separation of the two species. Detailed records of capture are wanting or incomplete for most of the con- stituent samples examined. But judged by the available records, it seems that gracillimus is usually taken with a trawl, while hastatus is taken with a seine as often as with a trawl. How- ever, neither species is a real deep water fish. The greatest depth recorded is 10 fathoms for a specimen of gracillimus taken off Padre Island, Tex. Hight of the 14 specimens of gracillimus examined, comprising 5 constituent samples, were taken in Pensacola Bay and that body of water seems to be the center of distribution of the species. Gobidus, n. subgen. Genotype —Gobionellus longicaudus (Jenkins and Evermann) = Gobius longicaudus Jenkins and Evermann. Before this subgenus is characterized, two new symbols are herewith proposed to be used for two mucous pores placed over the opercle. In Sanzo’s (Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel 20: 251-328. 1911) system of symbols for the various parts of the lateral line organs of gobies, the anterior and posterior pore which form the openings of GINSBURG: TEN NEW GOBIOID FISHES 25 the mucous channel over the opercle, are desig- nated as p’ and p”, respectively. His symbols for these pores are rather cumbersome, some- what confusing, and to a certain extent misleading in that those two pores are often present or absent independently of p, at least I find it so in the American species. The symbols @ and 7 are, therefore, here proposed to designate the anterior and posterior pore, respectively. Extreme groups of species of Gobionellus are sharply distinguished by three striking char- acters, in addition to others. Those of the sub- genus Gobionellus have a notably long and slender body, small scales, and they possess 4 and 7; while those of Gobica have a body more hike the usual gobiid shape, large scales and they lack 6 and +. The subgenus Gobidus lacks 6 and r like Gobica, its scales are nearly as in Gobionel- lus, while the body shape is rather intermediate or nearer to Gobionellus. Its dorsal spines are not at all prolonged and shorter than in any other subgenus, except Congruogobius. In the revision, the species of this subgenus was included with microdon in the subgenus Gobatus, largely on the basis of the scale and fin ray counts. However, the latter has @ and 7, and in other characters as well is much nearer the subgenus Gobionellus. Gobidus essentially agrees with Gobica in the lateral line organs and the color pattern, and in spite of superficial appearances, it is nearer to that subgenus than to Gobatus. Gobionellus longicaudus has generally been placed by authors in the synonymy of sagittula, and in the revision of the genus I disposed of that name in the same manner; but the study of additional samples and characters show that the Mexican longicaudus and the Panamanian sagittula diverge markedly in the number of pectoral rays (a character not studied in detail in the revision) and scales, although they inter- grade to some extent and may perhaps be treated as coordinate geographic subspecies. Without a definite commitment as to the taxonomic rank of longicaudus for the present, I prefer to designate it as the genotype of Gobidus because I have ex- amined the type specimens and am certain of its position, while sagittula I identify only from its description. Gobatinus, n. subgen. Genotype.—Gobionellus panamensis (Meek and Hildebrand) = Euctenogobius panamensis Meek and Hildebrand. 26 JOURNAL OF THE This subgenus also is in a sense intermediate between the two groups noted above in that it has a combination of important characters of both groups, but in a manner reverse from that of the subgenus Gobidus. The scales are large (34-37) as in Gobica, while it has @ and 7 like Gobionellus. The body shape is intermediate be- tween that of the last two named subgenera. Gobatinus has the teeth in the upper jaw usually in one row, sometimes a second incomplete inner row is present. In the other subgenera, the teeth in the upper jaw are in 2—5 rows, depending on the subgenus. Congruogobius, n. subgen. Genotype.—Gobionellus liolepis (Meek and Hildebrand) = Euctenogobius liolepis Meek and Hildebrand. This subgenus differs from all others in having the two dorsal fins confluent and the scales cycloid, except that the scales on a narrow strip WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 1 along a median area on the posterior part of the body are weakly ctenoid or cycloid. In these two characters it is somewhat intermediate be- tween the genera Gobionellus and Gobioides but much nearer the former. Indeed, Gobionellus and Goboides are nearer in relationship than has been heretofore suspected. This is shown not only by the somewhat intermediate positions occupied by the subgenus Congruogobius, but by other char- acters as well, especially by the lateral line or- gans, a discussion of which would take us too far afield here. The scales in Congruogobius are 77-84; 9 and +r are present. In the latter two characters, as well as in the shape of the body and the number of fin rays, it nearly agrees with or is nearest to the subgenus Gobionellus. The interorbital is rather wide as in the subgenus Gobionellus, while the eye is even smaller than in that subgenus when specimens of the same size are compared. In the latter two characters it also somewhat approaches Gobioides. MALACOLOGY .—Amunicola brandi, a new species of snail from northwestern Chi- huahua. Rosert J. Drake, Biblioteca y Museo de Sonora, Hermosillo, Sonora. (Communicated by Joseph P. E. Morrison.) In the middle of April 1949, the writer was in northwestern Chihuahua with Prof. C. Clayton Hoff, of the Department of Biology of the University of New Mexico. At that time, Dr. Hoff was the recipient of a grant-in-aid from the United States Public Health Service for collecting and studying ectoparasites (fleas and lice) of rodents in northern Chihuahua and southern New Mexico. During this trip, at Las Palomas, Distrito Galeana, Chihuahua, the type material of the species of fresh-water amnicolid snail here described was collected. The Las Palomas region is the type locality of another amnicolid, described as Bythinella palomasensis by Henry A. Pilsbry (1895: 68-69; Dall, 1898: 369-370). He based his © description on two dead shells that had been collected in April 1892 by Edgar A. Mearns, military medic and naturalist of the International Boundary Commission of the United States and Mexico. Mearns, assisted by Frank X. Holzner, made daily collecting visits to Lake Palomas during the period from April 7 to April 15, 1892. (Mearns, 1907: 10). In the description of Bythinella palomasensis, Mearns’s locality was given as merely at ‘‘Lake Palomas, northeastern [sic] Mexico.” Lake Palomas in northwestern Chihuahua, as it normally existed in the later 1800’s, is no more. Then it consisted of a chain of shallow and marshy ponds connected by a small running stream, all of which termi- nated in a more or less broad and shallow permanent lake. The area of the old lake bed now fills with water only during the short rainy season; otherwise, it is a dusty and waterless flat. The small town of Columbus, Luna County, N. Mex., is on the border. The small Mexican port-of-entry and customs station at Palomas, Chihuahua, is 1 mile south of Columbus. Las Palomas is a small collection of adobe houses 6 miles south of Palomas and the border. It is at Las Palo- mas, Chihuahua, that ‘‘some fine, bold springs” as noted in the International Boundary Commission report (1898, pt. 11: 16) are located. The species of Amni- colidae described, lives in the Las Palomas springs with another amnicolid (unde- termined, perhaps a Lyrodes), the common pea-clam Pisidiuwm abditum Haldeman, and JANUARY 1953 a form of the everpresent Physa. No shells belonging to the present new species were found that remotely resemble the single illustration of the moderately high and narrow Bythinella palomasensis Pilsbry Mall, foc. cit., pl. 31, fig. 9). The region was very dry at the time of our 1949 trip; no land shells were found alive or aestivating. Some shells were gathered from the rejectamenta of the Rio Casas Grandes at the Vado de Fusiles about 30 miles due south of Palomas and the border. They will be reported on in time. Dr. Harald A. Rehder, curator, Division of Mollusks, U. 8S. National Museum, kindly provided illustrations of the type material for this paper. Dr. Joseph P. H. Morrison, of the same division, gave much help in many ways. Amnicola brandi, n. sp. Figs. 1-6 Holotype.—The shell is white, under average size for genus, and globose. The spire is short and rounded; the protoconch is elevated and slightly eroded. The umbilicus is deeply perforate and narrow. The surface exhibits very faint growth wrinkles. There are 3.9 whorls which are convexly inflated and have some shouldering at the moderately impressed sutures. The aperture is oval, wider than high; its height and width equal about half the height and width of the entire shell. The inner lip flares slightly, is very white, and its callus forms a rounded rim on the side next to the umbilicus. The holotype (U.S.N.M. no. 601494) measures: length, 2.2 mm; width, 1.8 mm; aperture length, 1.0 mm; aperture width, 1.0 mm. It was collected by C. Clayton Hoff and Robert J. Drake, on April 15, 1949, in springs at Las Palomas, Chihuahua. This species is named in honor of Dr. Donald D. Brand because of his long period of active interest in the geography, archeology, and natural history of northern Mexico—especially that of northwestern Chihuahua. Brand’s archeological writings are so steeped in geographic description that his works on northwestern Mexico are indispensable references for naturalists and an- thropologists interested in study of the area (see especially Brand, 1935, 1936, 1937, 1943). Paratypes: The five descriptional paratypes (U.'S.N.M. no. 601495) are illustrated (Figs. 2-6). About 200 paratypes were collected. They DRAKE: AMNICOLA BRANDI Dil, have been deposited as follows: Wendell O. Gregg Collection, 5132; Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, 185402; Ernest J. Roscoe Col- lection, 295; Morris K. Jacobson Collection, 2257; Department of Paleontology of the Cali- fornia Academy of Sciences, 32878; Allyn Han- cock Foundation of the University of Southern California, 1230; Carnegie Museum, 62.39827; Chicago Natural History Museum, 32001; Museum of Zoology of the University of Michi- gan, 169876; Drake Molluscan Collection, 1459, 1460; Museum of Comparative Zoology, 185251; Department of Geology Museum of the Uni- versity of New Mexico, 1347; Elmer G. Berry Collection; Laboratory of Conchology of the Bibhoteca y Museo de Sonora; Stanford Uni- versity Paleontological Type Collection, 8025; 6 : Fias. 1-6.—Amanicola brandi, n. sp.:1, Holotype (U.S.N.M. no. 601494) : 2-6, paratypes (U.S.N.M. no. 601495). 5 28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON American Museum of Natural History, 72857; 5S. S. Berry Collection; Joshua L. Baily, Jr., Collection; Museum of Paleontology of the University of California, 36121-36129; San Diego Society of Natural History; Allyn G. Smith Collection, 9027; Hans Friedrich Col- lection, 9936; U. S. National Museum, 600499, 600500. Discussion.—Amnicola brandi is a_ species that is small in size when compared with most of the amnicolids of the eastern United States and Canada. This feature is shared in common by all Southwestern Amnicolidae. Consistency of char- acters is evidence for long isolation and ‘‘in- breeding” for the species. Dr. Joseph P. E. Morrison (1949) has presented a classification of the subfamilies of the Amnicolidae based _pri- marily on reproductive features. These four subfamilies are: Hydrobiinae, Bythinellinae, Buliminae, and Emmericiinae. Dr. Morrison has examined the male organs of some of the preserved paratypes of Ammnicola brandi. He re- ports brandi has only one functional duct in the male reproductive system. Therefore the species is placed generally in the Hydrobiinae. (The operculum is paucispiral with the concave side next to the animal.) The genus of brandi is closest to what is considered Amnicola s. s. In time, a new generic category may have to be established for brandz. To do so now and before Morrison’s results of many years of study with ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 1 the family are available to all concerned would only be confusing. Many species that have been placed in Amnicola very probably belong in “Amnicola”’ and consequently in any of the subfamilies now recognized as biological. LITERATURE CITED Branp, D.D. The distribution of pottery types in northern Mexico. Amer. Anthrop. n.s., 37: 287-305. 1935. Notes to accompany a vegetation map of northwest Mexico. Univ. New Mexico Bull., biol. ser., 4 (4). 1936. . The natural landscape of northwestern Chihuahua. Univ. New Mexico Bull., geol. series., 5 (2). 1937. The Chihuahua culture area. ico Anthrop. 6-7: 115-138. 1943. DauL, W. H. Report on the mollusks collected by the International Boundary Commission of the United States and Mexico, 1892-1894. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 19: 333-379. 1896. INTERNATIONAL BOUNDARY COMMISSION. Report of the Boundary Commission upon the survey and re-making of the boundary between the United States and Mexico west of the Rio Grande, 1891 to 1896. Parts I, 11, atlas. Washington, 1898. Mearns, E. A. Mammals of the Mexican Bound- ary of the United States. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull’565 pies 190% Morrison, J. P. E. The cave snails of eastern North America. Amer. Malacol. Union News Bull. and Ann. Rep. for 1948: 13-15. 1949. Pitsspry, H. A. A new Mezican Bythinella. Nautilus 9: 68-69. 1895. New Mex- Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences COST SIGE. 2 5 Sa a WALTER RamMBeERG, National Bureau of Standards REE ACEC PVs ok a 5.6 ala ere andin es eo F, M. Serzuer, U.S. National Museum JE OO yu en eee ae F, M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards _ OSes Howarp S. Rapp.eyez, U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey 2 2 STS... doo Joun A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Harap A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Penesopmical society of Washington...............2...6.00e0eeeee A. G. McNisx Anthropological Society of eat ang ee ee ane a gary MIC Waupo R. WEDEL eamerical society of Washington. ...... 0.006.000 ..0 cee eee ee Hvueu T. O’NBILL Mhemical mocicty of Washington...........6.0.. 0000. e eee eee eee Joun K. TaYLor Entomological Society of Washington........................ FREDERICK W. Poos MatenainGeorraphic SOCIeLY...... 2.2... sce ec cee cee ees ALEXANDER WETMORE Pea erier society of Washington. ..........0.05. 06 0ee cane eewss A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia. ....................... FrepD O. CoE Mantnibiartiscorical SOCICLY... 2.20.60... e cnc eee cee cee wees GILBERT GROSVENOR Repeal pocicty of Washington.......0.:..02...2..ese.e eee ees Les M. HutcHins Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wiui1am A. Dayton Mashingeton Society of Engineers...-............ 00... 00c ee eee CuiFrFrorD A. Barts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers...... A. Hi Score Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp 8. DILL Helminthological Society GE VWasMinetOM. vo iekyc) sebuah s biye cae ane L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists Neen AnGus M. GRIFFIN Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... FLtoyp W. HoucH Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers........... HERBERT G. DoRSEY District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Section, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine N. R. Evxis Elected Members of the Board of Managers: rrnitry 1958 ck ee ce C. F. W. Mussesecr, A. T. McPHERSON Re) Ls a ei a Sara EH. BRANHAM, MILTon Harris SM STMEAEY WONT. cde ce cea et ae eeu eeuaee Rocer G. Batss, W. W. DiEHL MMEIMOROVICIUNCTS. 5... ow ee ce ee wees All the above officers plus the Senior Editor memoear Haciors and Associate Editors. .... ccc cece ee ee ee nee [See front cover] Executive Committee....WALTER RAMBERG (chairman), F. M.SretTzuper, H.S.Rappieye, Wiuuram A. Dayton, F. M. DEFANDORF Committee on Membership. .E. H. WALKER (chairman), M. S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE CoT- TAM, R. C. Duncan, JOHN Faber, G. T. Faust, I. B. HANSEN, FRANK Kracexk, D. B. JONES, E. G. REINHARD, REeEcE I. Satter, Leo A. SHinn, F. A. Smiru, HeInz SPEcuHT, H.M. Trent, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings....H. W. Weuts (chairman), Wm. R. CamMpBELL, W. R. CHAp- LINE, D. J. Davis, H. G. Dorsry, O. W. TorrRESON Committee on Monographs (W. N. FENTON, chairman): Mermebertmrary LO5S. 6... es eee es UREA vac seh ft 3 ele R. W. Imuay, P. W. OMAN SMES oe oa pa cie shad cab caw bg ween aa wb slo tls S. F. Buaxg, F. C. Kracex oe SALES) IIS G58 ee ee W.N. Fenton, ALAN STONE Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (J. R. SwALLEN, general chairman): Meresialogical Sclvences...........:. J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), L. M. Hutcuins, MarGARET Pittman, F. W. Poos, L. P. ScHuttz For Engineering Sciences............. R. C. Duncan (chairman), A. C. FIELDNER, Wayne C. Hatt, J. W. McBurney, O. S. Reapine, H. L. WHITTEMORE WIG TEEMUSUCHL SCONCES. . occ os ie ce eee L. A. Woop (chairman), P. H. ABELSON, F.S. Dart, Grorcs W. Irvine, Jr., J. H. McMILLEN For Teaching of Science......M. A. Mason (chairman), F. E. Fox, M. H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research....... L. E. Yocum (chairman), H. N. Eaton, F. HERZFELD Committee on Policy and Planning: SEMI EY, BODO eke coo dic wie ed aS oe See es W. A. Dayton (chairman), N. R. Smita Beerrrniaty 198A ste. Shes een ba eo tees woes H. B. Couns, Jr., W. W. RuBEy PIP EDEE SMES Eee shad, ee yom nies cin) s, 5 SO EIG eae wok ots 80 L. W. Parr, F. B. SIusBEE Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPHERsON, chairman): Serpe PRISE LOS c/o sia cree is c's Waive) 2 aetiais eu Sem acees A. H. Cuarg, F. L. MouLer UTM TEMT TT ee oe Cie s : ae \ateeia oe deve J. M. CaLpwE.u, W. L. ScumitrT SE MPU TT EVAL OOO & Sah \icts, Sessa bitvertys Sk ce glare gis sides ase’ A. T. McPuerson, W. T. Reap REE EEL LUCHOM OC OUILCTL OF Ala A. Alo IS cn. farcke Sg sb soc wnina sale ata caw acess F, M.SEtTzLeRr Committee of Audttors...... C. L. Gazin (chairman), Louisz M. Russeuu, D. R. Tate Commitiee of Tellers. ..GEORGE P. WALTON (chairman), GEorGE H. Coons, C. L. GARNER CONTENTS PALEONTOLOGY.—The classification of the strophomenoid brachiopods. ASW: WTDIGIAMIS 0h dyes che ks ee 2S ww a rr PALEOBOTANY.—Prosseria grandis, a new genus and new species from the Upper Devonian of New York. CHARLES B. READ.......... Mycotocy.—A new species of Protodontia from British Columbia. G. WY IEA PUN 5 ook a0) ey dey aig oc) ke ant Sob ede MGV Rete ee IcuTHyYoLocy.—Ten new American gobioid fishes in the United States National Museum, including additions to a revision of Gobzonellus. TAAC GINSBURG oho Poe as OO ee eee MatacoLocy.—Amnicola brandi, a new species of snail from north- western Chihuahua. -Roserr J. DRAKE... .....-24 2) eee This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. Page 13 16 18 26 506, 72 7 eg) Lal a "3 . 2 LAs * ; 2 ff Z ed $ . ’ Lt o leo Vou. 43 FEBRUARY 1953 No. 2 JOURNAL © ‘ OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS J. P. E. Morrison JoHN C. EWERs R. K. Coox U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. CuHacn, JR. EvBert L. LIrtuez, JR. ZOOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrMan Puitie DRUCKER CHEMISTRY ANTHROPOLOGY DEAN B. Cowl Davin H. DUNKLE PHYSICS GEOLOGY ALAN STONE ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royraut & GuILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate): Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6 . 50 $ 9.75 $13 .00 $16.25 $3 .00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26 .00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U.S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JOURNAL.—Per year.......:.........+575 eee $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vols ito voli 10: inel,—notiavailablet: > 2...) hese — = Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. @1 numbers per vol.) ....->.... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 | C70 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 42, inel.) available for sale to libraries at $356.00. Monoerapad No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann. $4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete......14. s...2.-- 5-5) ee eee $25.00 Single volumes: unbound)... iho... 020. .0 booed ae uns ee 2.00 Single mumbers:: os oe ad ics dic. Fanida'e ames 6a Ga eee eee .25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences”? and ea to the Treasurer, H.S. RappLeyre, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, DiC: Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 43 February 1953 No. 2 MYCOLOGY. —Three new species of Conidiobolus zsolated from leaf mold. CHARLES DrecHsieR, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Plant Industry Station, Belts- ville, Md. Recently I reported (Drechsler, 1952) that Delacroixia coronata (Cost.) Sace. & Syd., a saprophytic entomophthoraceous fungus which earlier was encountered only rarely by mycologists and was generally presumed to be very meagerly distributed, is in fact virtually ubiquitous on leaf mold and other vegetable materials undergoing slow decay in moist contact with the ground. Separate cultures of the fungus, free of alien or- ganisms, are with little effort obtainable in large numbers from isolation plate cultures prepared by fastening portions of decaying plant detritus with soft agar in a central area on the ceiling of each Petri dish. The soft agar employed not only serves as an adhesive matrix securely holding all parti- cles of detritus in a canopylike layer about 10 mm above the layer of sterile agar on the floor of the Petri dish, but also supplies moisture to all detritus particles and thereby encourages prompt germination of any coni- dia or resting spores that may be present. Since in D. coronata either repetitional or mycelial development soon leads to forma- tion and violent discharge of new conidia, macroscopically discernible mycelia of this fungus are commonly found growing in a maizemeal-agar plate within 48 hours after the canopy of leaf mold has been superposed. From the regularity with which D. coronata develops in canopied agar plates, even though only 0.2 to 0.8 gram of leaf mold is used in each Petri dish, it would seem beyond question that this fungus must exist in our middle and northern latitudes more abundantly than any of the numerous conspicuously insectivorous species through which the Entomophthoraceae have long been familiar. The frequently early appearance of Dela- croixia coronala in canopied plate cultures, together with its rapid growth, its prompt production of numerous conidia, and the forceful projection of these conidia over adjacent areas, makes more difficult the detection and isolation of less vigorous entomophthoraceous fungi likewise com- monly present in leaf mold and other slowly decaying residues. Mainly for this reason few cultures referable to Conidiobolus were obtained from several dozen of the first canopied agar plates I prepared with leaf mold from different localities in Maryland and Virginia. The difficulties consequent to excessively close seeding of the conidia on the sterile substratum were later obviated with fair success by leaving agar plates exposed to conidial discharge for only a few hours, especially during the third and fourth days after the canopy had been pre- . pared. Conveniently sparse seeding was 29 obtained by removing the lid and _ its adhering canopy at successive intervals to a new bottom containing a newly poured plate of sterile maizemeal agar, each agar plate after exposure being immediately covered with a sterile lid. After 6, 8, or 10 hours, when some of the scattered conidia had grown out vegetatively, the resulting mycelia could be detected readily by ex- amining the agar surface with the naked eye by reflected light. Through early re- moval of the young mycelia to sterile maizemeal agar slants plenteous collections of pure cultures were obtained; in these were included, besides D. coronata and some almost equally vigorous entomoph- thoraceous species, a number of related species less obtrusive because of their 30 JOURNAL OF THE slower growth and feebler conidial propul- sion. Most of the entomophthoraceous fungi thus isolated seem best assignable to the genus Conidiobolus erected by Brefeld (1884) primarily on his C. utriculosus, a robust species that made its appearance adventitiously in nutrient solution he had placed under fruiting bodies of Hirneola and Haidia for the purpose of germinating discharged basidiospores. From the scale of magnification indicated for the relevant figures, the disjunctive mycelial hyphae of this species seem to vary from 10 to 20u in width. Its globose zygospores are stated to measure 60 to 100u in diameter. Its conidia are described as being pear-shaped, with a length of 50u and a width of 35u. Although such large dimensions should help to invite notice, C. utrzculosus has apparently not been recorded again at first hand since its description 68 years. ago. Brefeld also reported as occurring on some ‘Tremel- linen” a second species of Conzdiobolus with conidia he stated to be scarcely one- third as large as those of C. utriculosus. The few illustrations he gave of these smaller spores show lengths varying from 20 to 23yu and widths varying from 14 to 1l5u. Since in his material the smaller species always became overgrown at an early stage by the more vigorous C. utriculosus he was unable to cultivate it separately, and only rather provisionally named it C. minor. No addi- tional first-hand report of this tentative species is known. In view of the circum- stances under which it was observed its distinctness from C. wtriculosus 1s open to serious doubt, for in all fairly robust species continued repetitional development leads to marked reduction in conidial size and indeed often brings about dimensional differences more pronounced than the differ- ences noted by Brefeld. On the other hand, if the assemblage of entomophthoraceous fungi I have so far isolated from decaying plant detritus is at all representative, spe- cies with relatively small primary conidia are more numerous than species rivaling C. utriculosus in the size of their asexual spores. Nevertheless, a saprophytic member of the Entomophthoraceae that appears even WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 2 more robust than Conidiobolus uiriculosus was obtained by Gilbert (1919) from fern prothallia grown in water cultures or on moist sphagnum. The large globose primary conidia of this fungus, which are described as measuring 48 to 60u in diameter, would seem alien both to C. utriculosus and to Delacroixia coronata. The propulsion of these conidia often for a distance of 65 mm bespeaks a discharge mechanism several times more powerful than any mechanism operative in the different species of my collection. As Guilbert’s account makes no mention of hirsute resting spores or of any production of small conidia on multiple short outgrowths extended from large co- nidia, the fungus may eventually find a place in Brefeld’s genus. Apparently it has not been reported again during the 33 years since it was first made known and has not hitherto appeared among my cultures. More recently Couch (1939) fully de- scribed under the binomial Conzdzobolus brefeldianus a readily culturable entomoph- thoraceous fungus he obtained as a contami- nant in an agar plate that had been exposed to spore discharge from a fruiting layer of Septobasidium apiculatum Couch on Cornus amomum Mill. From Conidiobolus utriculo- sus, with which it makes up the meager established membership of the genus, this fungus differs by its generally smaller di- mensions—the width of its hyphae being given as varying from 5.4 to 8u, the thick- ness of its spherical conidia as varying from 10 to 3lu, and the diameter of its zygospores as varying from 18 to 33u. Canopied agar plate cultures prepared with plant detritus taken from localities near the District of Columbia during the winter of 1951-52 have not yielded C. brefeldzanus, but the species has come forth abundantly in cultures prepared with small quantities of some dry plant detritus which W. F. Jeffers kindly collected early in July 1951 in woods near Tampa, Fla., and near States- boro, Ga. While canopied agar plate cultures are very serviceable in bringing to light a cate- gory of entomophthoraceous fungi that are not often encountered by chance, and in showing such fungi to be virtually ubiquitous on slowly decaying detritus, they are far JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 43 February 1953 No. 2 MYCOLOGY. —Three new species of Conidiobolus zsolated from leaf mold. CHARLES Drecusitier, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Plant Industry Station, Belts- ville, Md. Recently I reported (Drechsler, 1952) that Delacroixia coronata (Cost.) Sace. & Syd., a saprophytic entomophthoraceous fungus which earlier was encountered only rarely by mycologists and was generally presumed to be very meagerly distributed, is in fact virtually ubiquitous on leaf mold and other vegetable materials undergoing slow decay in moist contact with the ground. Separate cultures of the fungus, free of alen or- ganisms, are with little effort obtainable in large numbers from isolation plate cultures prepared by fastening portions of decaying plant detritus with soft agar in a central area on the ceiling of each Petri dish. The soft agar employed not only serves as an adhesive matrix securely holding all parti- cles of detritus in a canopylike layer about 10 mm above the layer of sterile agar on the floor of the Petri dish, but also supplies moisture to all detritus particles and thereby encourages prompt germination of any coni- dia or resting spores that may be present. Since in D. coronata either repetitional or mycelial development soon leads to forma- tion and violent discharge of new conidia, macroscopically discernible mycelia of this fungus are commonly found growing in a maizemeal-agar plate within 48 hours after the canopy of leaf mold has been superposed. From the regularity with which D. coronata develops in canopied agar plates, even though only 0.2 to 0.8 gram of leaf mold is used in each Petri dish, it would seem beyond question that this fungus must exist in our middle and northern latitudes more abundantly than any of the numerous conspicuously insectivorous species through which the Entomophthoraceae have long been familiar. 29 The frequently early appearance of Dela- croixia coronata in canopied plate cultures, together with its rapid growth, its prompt production of numerous conidia, and the forceful projection of these conidia over adjacent areas, makes more difficult the detection and isolation of less vigorous entomophthoraceous fungi likewise com- monly present in leaf mold and other slowly decaying residues. Mainly for this reason few cultures referable to Conidiobolus were obtained from several dozen of the first canopied agar plates I prepared with leaf mold from different localities in Maryland and Virginia. The difficulties consequent to excessively close seeding of the conidia on the sterile substratum were later obviated with fair success by leaving agar plates exposed to conidial discharge for only a few hours, especially during the third and fourth days after the canopy had been pre- pared. Conveniently sparse seeding was obtained by removing the lid and _ its adhering canopy at successive intervals to a new bottom containing a newly poured plate of sterile maizemeal agar, each agar plate after exposure being immediately covered with a sterile lid. After 6, 8, or 10 hours, when some of the scattered conidia had grown out vegetatively, the resulting mycelia could be detected readily by ex- amining the agar surface with the naked eye by reflected light. Through early re- moval of the young mycelia to sterile maizemeal agar slants plenteous collections of pure cultures were obtained; in these were included, besides D. coronata and some almost equally vigorous entomoph- thoraceous species, a number of related species less obtrusive because of their 30 JOURNAL OF THE slower growth and feebler conidial propul- sion. Most of the entomophthoraceous fungi thus isolated seem best assignable to the genus Conidiobolus erected by Brefeld (1884) primarily on his C. wtriculosus, a robust species that made its appearance adventitiously in nutrient solution he had placed under fruiting bodies of Hirneola and Haidia for the purpose of germinating discharged basidiospores. From the scale of magnification indicated for the relevant figures, the disjunctive mycelial hyphae of this species seem to vary from 10 to 20u in width. Its globose zygospores are stated to measure 60 to 100u in diameter. Its conidia are described as being pear-shaped, with a length of 50u and a width of 35un. Although such large dimensions should help to invite notice, C. utriculosus has apparently not been recorded again at first hand since its description 68 years ago. Brefeld also reported as occurring on some ‘Tremel- linen” a second species of Conzdiobolus with conidia he stated to be scarcely one- third as large as those of C. utriculosus. The few illustrations he gave of these smaller spores show lengths varying from 20 to 23u and widths varying from 14 to 15u. Since in his material the smaller species always became overgrown at an early stage by the more vigorous C. utriculosus he was unable to cultivate it separately, and only rather provisionally named it C. minor. No addi- tional first-hand report of this tentative species is known. In view of the circum- stances under which it was observed its distinctness from C. utriculosus is open to serious doubt, for in all fairly robust species continued repetitional development leads to marked reduction in conidial size and indeed often brings about. dimensional differences more pronounced than the differ- ences noted by Brefeld. On the other hand, if the assemblage of entomophthoraceous fungi I have so far isolated from decaying plant detritus is at all representative, spe- cies with relatively small primary conidia are more numerous than species rivaling C. utriculosus in the size of their asexual spores. Nevertheless, a saprophytic member of the Entomophthoraceae that appears even WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 2 more robust than Conidiobolus utriculosus was obtained by Gilbert (1919) from fern prothallia grown in water cultures or on moist sphagnum. The large globose primary conidia of this fungus, which are described as measuring 48 to 60u in diameter, would seem alien both to C. utriculosus and to Delacroixia coronala. The propulsion — of these conidia often for a distance of 65 mm bespeaks a discharge mechanism several times more powerful than any mechanism operative in the different species of my collection. As Gilbert’s account makes no mention of hirsute resting spores or of any production of small conidia on multiple short outgrowths extended from large co- nidia, the fungus may eventually find a place in Brefeld’s genus. Apparently it has not been reported again during the 33 years since it was first made known and has not hitherto appeared among my cultures. More recently Couch (1939) fully de- scribed under the binomial Conzdzobolus brefeldianus a readily culturable entomoph- thoraceous fungus he obtained as a contami- nant in an agar plate that had been exposed to spore discharge from a fruiting layer of Septobasidium apiculatum Couch on Cornus amomum Mill. From Conidiobolus utriculo- sus, with which it makes up the meager established membership of the genus, this fungus differs by its generally smaller di- mensions—the width of its hyphae being given as varying from 5.4 to 8u, the thick- ness of its spherical conidia as varying from 10 to 3lu, and the diameter of its zygospores as varying from 18 to 33u. Canopied agar plate cultures prepared with plant detritus taken from localities near the District of Columbia during the winter of 1951-52 have not yielded C. brefeldianus, but the species has come forth abundantly in cultures prepared with small quantities of some dry plant detritus which W. F. Jeffers kindly collected early in July 1951 in woods near Tampa, Fla., and near States- boro, Ga. While canopied agar plate cultures are very serviceable in bringing to light a cate- gory of entomophthoraceous fungi that are not often encountered by chance, and in showing such fungi to be virtually ubiquitous on slowly decaying detritus, they are far FEBRUARY 1953 less helpful than might be desired in dis- closing what particular constituents of detritus samples were used as sources of nourishment. Owing to the forceful discharge of conidia by the fungi in question, and to successive repetitional development of the discharged spores, it may be presumed that during prolonged periods of rainy weather numerous constituent particles near each particle used as a nutrient substratum will become bestrewn with conidia in greater or lesser abundance. Naturally when samples of detritus are gathered before drier condi- tions have supervened, and portions of them are fastened soon afterwards in a moist matrix to the ceiling of a Petri plate, some of the conidia adhering to merely contaminated particles may be expected to produce and shoot off new conidia that will be no less effective in establishing mycelia on the agar below than conidia shot off from the nutrient particles themselves. It is true that if canopied cultures are prepared with detritus that has previously been exposed for several months to gradual drying, all the earliest new conidia may be expected to have their origin from the germination of resting spores, which, except in Delacroixia coronata, are commonly formed on the as- similative hyphae, and therefore should be present mainly in nutrient particles. Such germination, however, entails some delay, so that when the earliest new conidia fall on the agar floor the whole canopy has be- come so badly overgrown with alien molds that the individual particles are obscured beyond recognition. Although the species of Entomophthora- ceae readily growing in pure culture on ordinary substrata are often termed ‘“‘sapro- phytic” they do not, as a rule, thrive well in the presence of putrefactive organisms. Even rather slight bacterial contamination often halts their vegetative development completely, and subsequently brings about degeneration of their mycelial hyphae and asexual reproductive apparatus throughout the affected area. In agar plate cultures exposed to promiscuous contamination they are often rather strongly repressed by filamentous fungi little noted for antago- nistic behavior. Against generally antago- nistic molds, as, for example, species of DRECHSLER: THREE NEW SPECIES OF CONIDIOBOLUS Sil Penicillium, Aspergillus, and Trichoderma, they show, on the whole, very little en- durance. Rather commonly when their conidia fall near such molds neither vegeta- tive nor repetitional germination ensues, but the spores turn dark and degenerate internally. Despite the wide assortment of fila- mentous fungi with which they were often intermixed in older plate cultures, none of the species in my collection have been seen attacking other molds. In view of Brefeld’s statement that Conidiobolus utriculosus un- der natural conditions subsisted parasitically on fruiting bodies of ‘‘Tremellinen’’ oc- casion was taken whenever possible to observe the behavior of Conidiobolus my- celia when they encountered mycelia of basidiomycetes. Suitable opportunity for such observation was offered frequently in agar plate cultures that had been canopied with fine-textured debris found lodged ba- sally between the crowded culms in old tussocks of some grasses, for in addition to conidia of Conidiobolus this kind of litter brought forth basidiospores that likewise were discharged early and gave rise to numerous clamp-bearing mycelia. No sign of parasitism was noted in extensive areas where the two types of mycelia were closely intermixed. Brefeld’s statement that Conzdiobolus utriculosus subsists parasitically on fruiting bodies of ‘““Tremellinen” was not amplified by any mention of observed abnormal changes in the fructifications harboring the entomophthoraceous fungus. Couch made no mention of any abnormality affecting the Septobasidium material from which he obtained C. brefeldianus. White (1937) did not record any unusual condition in the apothecia of Peziza domiciliana Cooke which when fastened above an agar plate for ascospore discharge gave him abundant growth of Delacroixia coronata. In these several instances of adventitious occurrence of readily culturable entomophthoraceous fungi the fruiting bodies need not have been infected, but may merely have been newly contaminated with conidia cast upon them from neighboring mycelia of the phycomy- cetous forms concerned. Other objects within range of spore discharge, as, for example, 32 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON chunks of bark, fragments of wood, pieces of twigs, and lumps of leaf residues, could well be expected to become contaminated no less frequently than fruiting bodies of ascomycetes and basidiomycetes, but in the past have less often been superposed over nutrient solutions and_ sterile agar plates. Conidia adhering to them have had correspondingly less opportunity to dis- charge secondary conidia down upon an expanse of favorable substratum that was being kept under close observation by an alert investigator. Presumably neither newly discharged conidia nor actively sporulating mycelia are necessary in canopied plate cultures, since here the moisture in the soft agar used as an adhesive matrix en- courages germination of resting spores. A SLOW-GROWING LUSTROUS DISJUNCTIVE SPECIES WITH SMALL CONIDIA AND SMALL ZYGOSPORES An unobtrusive species of Conidiobolus which in the small size of its conidia recalls C. minor was obtained from leaf mold collected on Janu- ary 22, 1952, in woods near Fort Myer, Arlington, Va. Its isolation in pure culture was attended with some little difficulty, as its vegetative growth is slow in comparison with that of several con- generic species among which it was intermingled. When cultivated on moderately firm maizemeal agar at temperatures near 20° C., it extends its mycelium radially only about 2.56 mm in 24 hours. To the naked eye an individual young mycelium appears markedly lustrous throughout. Later as the mycelium expands the lustrous effect often diminishes in the older central region while remaining undimmed toward the sharply de- marcated margin. When viewed under the micro- scope the hyphae in the marginal zone show a considerable degree of prallelism in their arrange- ment. For the most part they vary in width from 4 to 7u (Fig. 1, A, B). Although the individual filament shows noticeable variations in width along its slightly crooked course, pronounced fluctuations in this dimension are not usual, and only rather little tapering is observable near the bluntly rounded tip. Branching at the margin of an extensive mycelium is often characterized by angular relationships usual in dichotomy (Fig. 1, B). Cross-walls are laid down fairly early, the most distal septum in a filament being ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 2 often found 150 to 200u from the tip. Vacuoliza- tion near a newly inserted cross-wall (Fig. 1, B) commonly leads to complete emptying of a short hyphal part, and as evacuated portions of hyphal membrane usually soon fade from sight many living segments appear disjointed from their fellows. Some disjointed segments later produce short diverticulate branches (Fig. 1, C) and thus acquire an irregular, somewhat lobulate outline. Asexual reproduction takes place by develop- ment of a single conidium from the individual! hyphal segment. A hyphal segment formed on the surface of the substratum pushes forth into the air and toward the main source of light an erect or ascending branch which on attaining a length frequently of 20 or 25u (Fig. 1, D, E) swells out markedly at its tip. The terminal swelling receives all the protoplasmic contents of the hyphal segment, and is then delimited as a conidium through deposition of a convex basal wall. Hyphal segments formed in submerged positions first extend a branch or prolongation through the ambient to the surface. When the surface is reached the elongating filament grows erectly or ascendingly into the air, its course, after an abrupt (Fig. 1, F) or more gradual (Fig. 1, G, H) upward turn, being directed toward the main source of light. The aerial prolongation then develops into a conidiophore in the same way as an aerial branch from a procumbent hyphal segment. Once the globose conidium has been cut off it exerts strong pressure upon the basal septum protruding convexly upward, until the peripheral membrane ruptures circularly along the circumference of the partition. ln- mediately the basal wall splits into two layers, and concomitantly the distal layer is everted with such briskness through pressure of the conidial protoplast that the spore is thrown off forcibly, though the trajectory on a flat level surface may not exceed a few millimeters. While in their small dimensions the conidia (Fig. 1, I, a4), even without repetitional develop- ment, rather closely approach those shown in Brefeld’s illustration of Conidiobolus munor, they seem less elongated than Brefeld’s speci- mens, and their basal wall appears more abruptly protuberant. They are commonly filled through- out with coarsely granular protoplasm, except that the basal protuberance usually shows more nearly homogeneous texture. They do not nor- SPECIES OF CONIDIOBOLUS NEW THREE DRECHSLER FEBRUARY 1953 19pP ADIN YIIAT ‘2 by, yy rere e000 ture on Petri plates of amera lucida dofaec 1 in pure cul ing ., as found developi form magnification with the a text. . NOV sp 1 iven 1n ts drawn at a un f all parts g 10n O . bolus lamprauges, all par ? gar . Explanat —Conidio la Mailzemea 1 Fie throughout 34 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES mally contain anything at all resembling the sub- spherical globules, about 3 to 5u in diameter, shown in two conidia of C. minor depicted by Brefeld. After falling on a moist substratum the dis- charged conidium often germinates by emission of a vegetative germ hypha (Fig. 1, J). If the substratum is already permeated with mycelium, repetitional development often ensues; the conid- ium putting forth a relatively short stout out- growth on the tip of which it then gives rise to a secondary conidium (Fig. 1, K, L). The secondary conidium, like its parent, is normally delimited by a convexly arched basal partition (Fig. 1, K), and like its parent, again, is thrown off forcibly on circumscissile rupture of the peripheral mem- brane, abrupt splitting of the basal wall, and concomitant rapid eversion of the distal layer. In material mounted under a cover glass for microscopical examination all conidia, including those of secondary origin (Fig. 1, L), are usually not discharged after a normal manner, but com- monly remain seated on the tip of the empty conidiophore, there gradually assuming their familiar proximally protuberant shape by gradu- ally everting the entire basal septum. Occasionally a conidium (Fig. 1, M, a) puts forth a germ tube (Fig. 1, M, b) that unites with a hyphal segment (Fig. 1, M, c) to form a zygo- spore. Much more often zygospores are formed through union of two hyphal segments that repre- sent adjacent cells of the same mycelial filament. Onset of sexual reproductive development is first noticeable when one of the paired segments becomes locally swollen in the region near the crosswall separating it from its mate. The swelling increases steadily in size and soon appears as a globose enlargement. Apparently the adjoining portion of the other segment undergoes some widening at about the same time, but the increase in diameter here is usually less than 2u, and only occasionally as much as 3u. At a rather early stage the cross-wall separating the paired seg- ments largely disappears, and granular proto- plasm thereupon flows into the globose enlarge- ment at both poles. Meanwhile the farther portions of both segments show increasing vacuo- lization, leading soon to progressive evacuation of contents. Successive stages in evacuation of the ‘female’? segment—the segment (Fig. 1, N, a; O, a) within which the globose enlargement, or young zygospore, is formed—as well as of the “male” segment (Fig. 1, N, b; O, b) is frequently VOL. 43, NO. 2 marked by deposition of a series of retaining walls. Transfer of protoplasm from the two seg- ments is usually completed at nearly the same time, though in many instances the ‘‘female” segment (Fig. 1, P, a) appears somewhat slower than the “male” (Fig. 1, P, b) in contributing the last installment of its contents. As a rule the portions of membranous envelope successively evacuated soon collapse and vanish from sight, so that when the protoplasmic materials have migrated into the young zygospore, only relatively small membranous parts of the “female” (Fig. 1, Q, a; R, a) and “male” (42) be segments remain visible. The portion of mem- branous envelope representing the ‘female’’ segment (fig. 1,8, a) shows no narrowing where it is attached, while that representing the ‘‘male”’ segment (Fig. 1, 8, b) usually appears somewhat narrowed at its juncture with the zygospore, owing to the slight local enlargement of this segment at an early stage. Transfer of protoplasm from the paired seg- ments to the globose fusion cell is accomplished ordinarily in less than 2 hours. The subsequent changes in internal organization take place more slowly. By imperceptible stages the contents of the fusion cell change from a finely granular to a coarsely granular texture (Fig. 1, Q). Globules of increasing size appear near the center of the protoplast (fig. 1, R). These coalesce into a single reserve globule which at first is often of somewhat irregular shape (Fig. 1, 8), but later, in the fully mature zygospore, has a sharply defined circular contour (Fig. 1, T, a-f). In the mature zygospore the thin wall originally present is found reinforced by a conspicuously thicker inner layer, and the living protoplasm forms a layer of nearly homo- geneous consistency between the wall and the reserve globule. The ripe zygospore here thus has much the same internal organization as the homologous spores of Conidiobolus utriculosus and C. bre- feldianus. However the curious though specious resemblance that the sexual apparatus of C. brefeldianus bears to sexual reproductive ap- paratus of monosporous oomycetes is not evident in the present fungus. Even in the occasional instances where conjugation takes place between hyphal segments originating in separate hyphae (Fig. 1, U,a, b) fertilization of an oogonium by an antheridium is never closely simulated. Owing to early fusion of all paired hyphal segments any globose enlargement with conformation and ee a FresBrRuARY 1953 dimensions suggestive of an oogonium has very obviously received its contents in approximately equal measure from both segments. A term (Aaumpavyns) meaning “lustrous” may serve conveniently as specific epithet of the fungus in bringing to mind the macroscopic appearance of its mycelium. Conidisbolus lamprauges, sp. nov. Mycelium lente crescens (circa 2.5 mm in die), incoloratum, nitidum, aliquid ramosum, mox septatum, in hyphis 3-8u (plerumque 4-7y) latis constans; -eellulis mycelii 35-200u longis, saepius aliquid flexuosis, quandoque plus minusve disjunctis, interdum pluribus ramulis brevibus praeditis; hyphis conidiophoris simplicibus, erectis vel ascendentibus, in aere 25-100u (vulgo 25-50y) ad lucem protendentibus, interdum 5—15y subter apicem parum inflatis, ibi 4-8y latis, in apice unicum conidium ferentibus; conidiis se violenter abjicentibus, incoloratis, globosis, sed deorsum papilla rotundoconica vel hemisphaerica (1.5-4y alta, 2.5-7u lata) praeditis, 15-22u (ex toto) longis, 12.5-20u crassis, protoplasmatis dense granulosi repletis; zygosporis interdum e copula- tione inter cellulam mycelii et tubum germina- tionis interdum e copulatione cellularum aliae atque aliae hyphae ortis, sed saepissime e copula- tione cellularum duarum contiguarum ejusdem hyphae oriundis, hyalinis, globosis, plerumque 12-18 crassis, in maturitate guttula nitida 7.5-11.5y crassa et muro 1.3-2.2u crasso praeditis. Habitat in foliis quercorum putrescentibus in Arlington, Virginia. Mycelium colorless, lustrous, at 20° C. growing radially about 2.5 mm in a day, moderately branched; assimilative hyphae somewhat flexu- ous, 3 to 8u (mostly 4 to 7u) wide, soon becoming divided by cross-walls at intervals of 35 to 200u; the resulting hyphal segments sometimes remain- ing contiguous and at other times becoming dis- jointed, frequently after disjunction putting forth several short diverticulate or lobate branches. Conidiophores arising singly from individual hyphal segments, simple, colorless, projecting 25 to 100u (commonly 25 to 50y) erectly or ascendingly into the air, the aerial part always oriented toward the main source of light, often slightly widened and having a diameter of 4 to 8u some little distance (mostly 5 to 15u) below its tip whereon is borne a single conidium. Conidia filled with densely granular protoplasm, through sudden eversion of the up- curved basal membrane forcibly thrown off, DRECHSLER: THREE NEW SPECIES OF CONIDIOBOLUS 30 ~ colorless, globose, measuring 15 to 22u in total length and 12.5 to 20u in greatest width, the everted basal membrane forming a hemispherical or rounded-conical papilla 1.5 to 4u high and 2.5 to 7 wide at its origin. Conjugation sometimes taking place between a germ hypha and a hyphal segment, sometimes between 2 hyphal segments originating in separate mycelial filaments, but most often between 2 adjacent segments in the same mycelial filament; the fusion cell always initiated wholly within one of the gametangia, though in immediate proximity to the other gametangium; zygospore at maturity hyaline, globose, usually 12 to 18u in diameter, containing an eccentrically placed reserve globule 7.5 to 11.5u in diameter, provided with a wall commonly 1.3 to 2.2u thick. Occurring in decaying oak (Quercus spp.) leaves in woods in Arlington, Va. A SPECIES WITH INCONSPICUOUS DISJUNCTIVE MYCELIUM AND PREDOMINANTLY DICLINOUS CONJUGATION A species of Conidiobolus noticeably more ro- bust than C. lamprauges was obtained from leaf mold kindly collected by A. W. Rakosy in Carroll County, N. H., late in September 1951. In maizemeal-agar plate cultures kept at tempera- tures near 20° C. it grows radially about 5 mm in 24 hours. Its submerged mycelium is inconspicu- ous, frequently being only indistinctly visible to the naked eye except at the sharply demarcated advancing margin, though it never vanishes from macroscopic sight as completely as the mycelium of two species of Basidiobolus that are widely distributed in leaf mold (Drechsler, 1952a). Viewed under the microscope an expanding mycelium of the fungus displays at its periphery terminal portions of many elongating hyphae mostly 6 to 8u in width (Fig. 2, A). Very little tapering is observable below the bluntly rounded end. Formation of cross-walls ensues after about an hour, with the result that in many hyphae the most distal septum is found approximately 200u from the tip. The segments delimited suc- cessively in the individual filaments vary moder- ately in length. Many are a little longer (fig. 2, J, a) or a little shorter (Fig. 2, J, b) than 100u. As in C. lamprauges hyphal segments formed adjacent to one another may remain contiguous or may become disjointed through withdrawal of contents from one side of the separating cross- wall. After being delimited some segments will 36 JOURNAL OF THE widen perceptibly, then occasionally attaining a diameter in excess of 10u (Fig. 2, B, a). In addi- tion such stout segments not infrequently will put forth branches only 3 or 4u wide (Fig. 2, B, b, ¢) and will thereby in small compass display opposite extremes in thickness of filamentous parts. Asexual reproduction takes place abundantly in maizemeal agar cultures of the fungus. An individual hyphal segment that is immersed under the substratum extends a branch or pro- longation which on reaching the surface soon turns upward and after widening rather markedly (Fig. 2, C, a) forms a globose swelling at its tip (Fig. 2, C, b). A hyphal segment that has origi- nated in a procumbent hypha often puts forth a branch erectly or ascendingly into the air(Fig. 2, D, a). This aerial branch, much like the aerial termination of a branch from a submerged segment, widens out markedly and then forms at its summit a globose swelling (Fig. 2, D, b) into which are soon received the entire protoplasmic contents of the reproductive unit. Thereupon the arched septum that was being formed progres- sively at the base of the globose part—its forma- tion proceeding from the periphery inward— during the later stages in the upward movement of protoplasm, is completed through deposition of wall material in the keystone region. A sub- spherical conidium is thus delimited, and soon afterwards is thrown off violently on sudden eversicn of the distal layer of the arched parti- tion. Since the aerial conidiophores, as in related species, are in conspicuous degree positively phototropic, the direction of discharge is con- sistently toward the main source of light. The conidia of the New Hampshire fungus (Fig. 2, E, aj) are in general larger than those of Conidiobolus lamprauges. Often the basal mem- brane here (Fig. 2, E, a-c) would seem to pro- trude less abruptly from the globose outline of the spore than in C. lamprauges, but often, too, the everted wall protrudes hardly less markedly (Fig. 2, E, d-h) than in the latter species. Usually the conidia of C. lamprauges seem filled through- out with coarsely granular protoplasm, whereas those of the New Hampshire fungus show com- monly a relatively clear peripheral layer that surrounds a large mass of conglutinated lumps. The lumps, varying in width from 1.5 to 3.5y, have an irregularly globose shape and thus some- what resemble small oil globules, but unlike oil globules are little given to coalescence. A conidium may germinate vegetatively by put- WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 2 ting forth a germ hypha (Fig. 2, F) or it may extend a conidiophore of variable length and produce a secondary conidium (Fig. 2, G, H). Sexual reproduction is accomplished by con- jugation so simple that the general appearance given differs little from that of chlamydospore development. In some instances two adjoining segments of the same hypha (Fig. 2, I, a, b) serve as gametangia, the fusion cell arising as a globose swelling situated wholly within one segment but lying immediately adjacent to the other segment. The separating cross-wall disappears almost entirely at an early stage, so that the incipient enlargement soon receives protoplasmic materials from both directions. As a rule the “male” seg- ment (Fig. 2, I, b) may be distinguished from the “female” (Fig. 2, I, a) by its narrower at- tachment to the young fusion cell. Conjugation between adjacent segments apparently occurs less frequently in the present species than scalariform conjugation between segments of different hyphae (Fig. 2, J, a, b). Since in di- clinous reproductive apparatus, too, the fusion cell is initiated at the place of hyphal union and wholly within one of the two gametangia (Fig. 2, K) the zygote commonly develops in a position partly or wholly within the hyphal connection. At the place of union the apposed portions of outer membranes dissolve almost completely, so that here, just as in monoclinous apparatus, protoplasm flows into the young fusion cell from the ‘‘male’’ segment (Fig. 2, J, b) about as freely as from the “female”? segment (Fig. 2, J, a). Indeed, the ‘‘male’’ segment (Fig. 2, J, b) will often have contributed all its contents when its mate (Fig. 2, J, a) still retains a considerable quantity of protoplasm. Soon after portions of conjugating hyphal segments have been evacuated the empty tubular membrane, together with the septa contained in it, collapses and disappears from view. Thus, only an hour after movement of protoplasm began in the unit of sexual ap- paratus shown in Fig. 2, J, less than a third of the original membranous envelope of the ‘“‘male”’ segment (Fig. 2, K, b) and scarcely half of the original envelope of the “‘female”’ segment (Fig. 2, K, a) remained visible. Forty minutes later all membranous parts of the ‘‘male’”’ gametan- gium had vanished, and only two short mem- branous spurs (Fig. 2, L, a), both left by the “female”? gametangium, could be seen attached to the developing zygospore, which now had not only laid down its definitive delimiting walls but had begun internal reorganization by elabo- FEBRUARY 1953 DRECHSLER: THREE NEW SPECIES OF CONIDIOBOLUS 371 C. Drechsler del. Fig. 2.—Conidiobolus thromboides, sp. nov., as found developing in pure culture on Petri plates of maizemeal agar; all parts drawn at a uniform magnification with the aid of a camera lucida; X 1000 throughout. Explanation of all parts given in text. 38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES rating many oily globules in its central region. During the ensuing 30 minutes the longer of the two empty spurs vanished from sight, so that in little more than two hours after conjugation could be clearly ascertained the united hyphal segments were converted into a globose zygote (Fig. 2, M) with only a short empty cylindrical stub to indicate its origin from filamentous parts. The numerous small globules in the central re- gion of the zygote had meanwhile coalesced to form seven or eight globules of considerably larger size. Through continued coalescence of multiple globules a single large reserve globule is even- tually formed. This body, much as in Conidiobolus lamprauges, lies well toward one side within the ripe zygospore (Fig. 2, N—R), a portion of its periphery approaching very close to the zygo- spore wall. Accordingly at maturity the proto- plasm, which shows relatively few granules scattered in a limpid matrix of nearly homo- geneous appearance, is disposed in a parietal layer pronouncedly thicker on one side than on the other. The thin envelope earlier surrounding the fusion cell is reinforced in the ripe zygospore by a much thicker inner layer presumably inter- pretable as the zygospore wall proper. Variability with respect to size is more moderate among zygospores of the New Hampshire fungus than might be inferred from the five individuals figured herein (Fig. 2, N—R), for one (Fig. 2, N) of the five—a specimen fully 27y in diameter— was selected more especially to illustrate approxi- mately maximum dimensions, while two others (Fig. 2, Q, R), each about 18 in diameter, were selected to illustrate approximately minimum dimensions. Only two (Fig. 2, O, P) of the five individuals, with diameters of 23.5u and 20u, respectively, are of dimensions frequent in the species. A term (@pou8oedns) meaning ‘full of of clots or grains’? may serve helpfully as specific epithet in recalling the conglutinated lumpy texture of conidial contents wherein the fungus differs markedly from the generally smaller Conidiobolus lamprauges. Conidiobolus thromboides sp. nov. Mycelium circa 5 mm in die crescens, incoloratum, saepius parum conspicuum, aliquid ramosum, mox septatum, in hyphis 3-10.54 (saepe 6-8) latis constans; cellulis assumentibus 50-200u (saepe circa 100u) longis, vulgo aliquid flexuosis, ali- quando plus minusve disjunctis, interdum paucis angustis ramulis praeditis; hyphis conidiophoris VOL. 43, NO. 2 simplicibus, erectis vel ascendentibus, in aere vulgo 35-150 ad lucem protendentibus, sursum inflatis, ibi saepe 10-15y latis, in apice unum conidium gignentibus; conidiis se violenter abjicentibus, incoloratis, globosis sed basi pa- pilla rotundoconica vel hemisphaerica (2.5-6yu alta, 4-10u lata) praeditis, plerumque ex toto 24-32u longis, 19-26.5u latis, in magna parte praecipue in medio glebarum protoplasmatis conglutinatarum repletis; zygosporis interdum e copulatione cellularum aliae atque aliae hyphae interdum e copulatione cellularum duarum contiguarum ejusdem hyphae oriundis, hyalinis, globosis, 17.5-27u (plerumque 19.5—-23.5u) cras- sis, in maturitate guttula nitida 10-15 crassa et muro magnam partem 2-2.5u crasso praeditis. Habitat in humo silvatica in New Hampshire. Mycelium colorless, often rather inconspicu- ous, moderately branched, at temperatures near 20° C. growing radially about 5 mm in a day; assimilative hyphae somewhat flexuous, 3 to 10.5u (mostly 6 to 8) wide, soon becoming divided by cross-walls at intervals of 50 to 2004; the hyphal segments sometimes remaining contiguous but at other times becoming dis- jointed, and in some instances putting forth one or more narrow branches. Conidiophores arising singly from individual hyphal segments, simple, colorless, projecting 35 to 150u (often about 100) erectly or ascendingly into the air, the aerial part oriented toward the main source of light, distally inflated, often measuring 10 to 15y in greatest width, bearing a single terminal condi- ium. Conidia forcibly thrown off through sud- den eversion of the arched basal membrane, colorless, usually in large part filled with some- what conglutinated protoplasmic lumps, globose, often measuring 24 to 32u in total length and 19 to 26.54 in greatest width, the everted basal membrane forming a hemispherical or rounded- conical papilla 2.5 to 6u high and 4 to 10u wide at its origin. Conjugation most usually taking place between two hyphal segments originating in separate mycelial filaments but sometimes taking place between two adjacent segments in the same filament; the fusion cell always initiated wholly within one segment and in immediate proximity to the other; zygospore at maturity hyaline, globose, 17.5 to 27u (mostly 19.5 to 23.5u) in diameter, containing a very eccentrically placed reserve globule 10 to 15u in diameter, and pro- vided with a wall for the most part 2 to 2.5u thick. Occurring in leaf mold in Carroll County, N. H. 39 OF CONIDIOBOLUS THREE NEW SPECIES DRECHSLER Fresruary 1953 pie ner i aaa 3 AED o> S. Cc: C42 NF Pr O= 5G: G. 5 to San ne a 2 my Data Evite ' in OR fo) lates of x 1000 1p ure culture on Petr form magnification with the aid of a camera lucida ing in p in text. retus, Sp. nov., aS found develop i given in all parts drawn at a un vaer ) . Explanation of all parts 1 agar throughout Fic. 3.—Conidiobolus ad maizemea 40 JOURNAL OF A SPECIES WITH ROBUST CONIDIOPHORES ARISING FROM RICHLY BRANCHED DELICATE MYCELIUM An entomophthoraceous fungus especially distinctive in its vegetative stage was first found developing in agar plate cultures prepared with leaf mold collected near Farmer, N. C., in De- cember 1951. Subsequently it was obtained also from leaf mold gathered in eastern central New Hampshire late in September 1951; from leaf mold gathered in oak woods along Lubbers Run in Arlington, Va., on February 28, 1952; from leaf mold collected near Criglersville, Va., on March 23, 1952; and from various kinds of plant detritus taken up in several places near Belts- ville, Md., at different times during January and February 1952. On maizemeal agar of moder- ate firmness it grows slowly, producing a lustrous mycelium somewhat more nearly opaque and correspondingly more conspicuous than the mycelium of Conidiobolus lamprauges. Before an individual mycelium has spread extensively it produces conidiophores from which conidia are thrown for distances of several millimeters toward the main source of light. Falling on a moist substratum many of these conidia give rise collectively to scattered subsidiary mycelia which soon occupy the area completely thereby barring further growth in that region by the parent mycelium. As the same sequence of events is repeated another array of mycelia come into being a little farther onward, which in their turn form a barrier against those to their rear. The fungus thus spreads over an expanse of substra- tum by establishing numerous demarcated my- cela that in large part remain discernible as individuals and therefore in the end often appear collectively as a patchwork of lustrous areas. Ordinarily no similar patchy or dappled effect is noticeable in related fungi, for while these likewise habitually colonize adjacent areas, their outlying mycelia—often from the first too transparent to stand out individually in clear relief—become merged indistinguishably when they coalesce. Under a microscope an extensive unobstructed mycelium of the present fungus shows along its growing margin numerous hyphae that measure mostly 3.5 to 4u in width, though in the distal portion they taper gradually to an apical width of approximately 3u (Fig. 3, A). Here and there in older cultures narrower hyphae are found which over considerable stretches may not exceed 2u in width and, indeed, may in some portions THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 2 measure as little as 1.8u in this dimension (Fig. 3, B). The greatest width sustained for some distance in the stouter filaments would seem approximately 4.5u (Fig. 4, A). Only rather moderate development of lateral branches occurs at the margin of an extensive mycelium (Fig. 3, A). Abundant branching is, however, usual in the earlier development of a mycelium from a germinating conidium. The ramified procumbent outgrowths shown in Fig, 3, C, represent only about one-twentieth of the entire three-dimen- sional hyphal system formed within a radius of 150yu from an individual spore. In older portions of an extensive mycelium many of the lateral branches (Fig. 4, A, r; B, r) are empty of protoplasmic contents and accord- ingly are found delimited basally from the parent hypha by a retaining wall. A much smaller number continue growth distally to give rise to conidiophores (Fig. 4, A, a; B, a; C, a). As the conidiophores here are often 204 or more in greatest width they offer a pronounced dimen- sional contrast with the mycelial filaments. The prolonged transfer of granular materials into the growing terminal conidium (Fig. 4, B, b) is not regularly accompanied, as in related species, by evacuation of a particular hyphal segment, or of any adjoining portion of axial hypha. When eventually the conidiophore is delimited by a basal septum (Fig. 4, C, a) the axial hypha and the connecting branch are often still filled with granular protoplasm. An arched septum is progressively laid down at the base of the conid- ium (Fig. 4, C, b) during the later stages in the upward movement of living contents. Soon after the septum has been completed, it is suddenly split into two layers. The distal layer at the same time is briskly everted, with the result that the conidium is thrown off forcibly. The distances spores are propelled here seem ap- preciably less than in Delacroixia coronata and Conidiobolus brefeldianus. Feebler propulsion might readily be expected since in my fungus the basal septum is arched less prominently, and therefore in being everted delivers a shorter and presumably less powerful stroke. The largest of the primary conidia (Fig. 4, D) produced by the fungus measure approximately 46u in total length and 45u in width. Well de- veloped primary conidia commonly vary be- tween 30 and 40u in both dimensions (Fig. 4, E, F). Individuals less than 25u (Fig. 4, G—M) would mostly seem to represent products of repetitional development. Such development / | { ’ if i ; ’ 4 , 4] OF CONIDIOBOLUS : THREE NEW SPECIES DRECHSLER FEBRUARY 1953 AS x ry BASS v ©, nest $} 3 *19P EY EY YIBACT ‘D2 lates of x 1000 rl p ) ure on Pet id of a camera lucida in pure cult th the a ing fication wl 1 form magn text. 1 iven in f all parts g 10n O all parts drawn at a un 1 agar; . Explanat throughout Fic. 4.—Conidiobolus adiaeretus, sp. nov., as found develop maizemea 42 . JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES takes place very freely in the present species. A protuberance is bourgeoned forth (Fig. 4, N, a) which after some elongation (Fig. 4, O—-Q: a) swells distally to form a globose secondary conid- ium (Fig. 4, P, b; Q, b) that is thrown off for- cibly in the same way as was its parent. As the reduction in size incurred in one repetitional generation is not especially pronounced in in- stances where the conidiophorous outgrowth is of moderate length, many secondary conidia (Fig. 4, P, b; Q, b) measure 30 to 40u in diameter and thus after discharge are not distinguishable from well developed primary conidia. With re- spect to their internal organization the conidia, both large and small somewhat resemble those of Conidiobolus thromboides in having a rather dense conglutinated central mass of protoplasm surrounded by a hyaline parietal layer. However the central mass here is less coarse in texture, its constituent particles being granules rather than lumps. When conidia are mounted in moist agar under a cover glass and subjected to micro- scopical examination in strong lght the con- glutinated mass soon contracts noticeably and the clear parietal layer becomes interspersed with vacuoles of increasing number and size. At temperatures near 20° C. aerial conidia are the only reproductive bodies formed by the fungus. On being stored at temperatures near 7° C. tubes of maizemeal agar well permeated with mycelium will permit copious formation of chlamydospores mainly under the surface of the culture medium. Since these chlamydospores, usually of globose or prolate ellipsoidal shape, very often show two truncated protuberances in opposite positions (Fig. 3, D-G), they appear largely of intercalary origin. Specimens showing only one protuberance suggestive of hyphal at- tachment (Fig. 3, H, I) seem of terminal origin. Most chlamydospores, like most conidia, vary in diameter from 25 to 40u (Fig. 3, D-H). Small individuals (Fig. 3, I-L), corresponding in their dimensions to conidia derived through successive repetitional development, are usually found only in meager quantity. Somewhat indurated cylin- drical cells (Fig. 3, M-—O), often about three times as wide as unmodified assimilative hyphae, are perhaps to be regarded as imperfectly differ- entiated chlamydospores. They often show con- glutinated granules in the middle region and clear protoplasm at both ends (Fig. 3, M, N). In well differentiated globose chlamydospores, much as in conidia, a relatively large congluti- VOL. 43, NO. 2 nated granular mass is surrounded by a parietal layer of more nearly transparent protoplasm. The fungus is referred to Conidiobolus since it grows well on ordinary culture media and in its asexual reproduction does not differ very widely from C. utriculosus, the type species of that genus. Its mycelium differs conspicuously from that of C. utriculosus, C. brefeldianus, C. lam- prauges, and C’. thromboides not only in the slender- ness of the component hyphae but also in their frequently copious branching. Although the fungus forms numerous septa that serve as retaining walls in closing off evacuated lateral branches from the living axial hyphae, early deposition of cross-walls to separate adjacent living segments—a very usual feature in the vegetative growth of other readily cultivable Entomophthoraceae—is not characteristic of its mycelial development. In agar plate cultures it shows no disjunction of living hyphal seg- ments. A term (advaipercs) meaning “un- divided”’ is therefore deemed a suitable specific epithet. _ Conidiobolus adiaeretus, sp. nov. Mycelium lente (circa 2 mm in die) crescens, nitidum, conspicuum; hyphis assumentibus, incoloratis, vulgo 1.8-4.5u latis; interdum mediocriter interdum copiose ramosis, ramulis brevibus saepe mox inanitis denique ab hyphis viventibus longis septo finitis; hyphis conidiophoris inco- loratis, simplicibus, erectis vel ascendentibus, in aere vulgo 50-100u (rarius 100—250u) ad lucem protendentibus, rectis vel curvatis, vulgo speciose inflatis, 8-25u (saepius 15-23u) latis, in apice unum conidium gignentibus; conidiis se violenter adjicentibus, incoloratis, globosis vel applanato- ellipsoideis sed basi papilla rotunda (2-6y alta, 5-17u lata) praeditis, plerumque ex toto 15—-46u longis, 13-45u latis, in parte parietem juxta protoplasmatis hyalini repletis in parte media granulis conglutinosis farctis; chlamydosporis plerumque intra materiam permeatam oriundis, incoloratis, plerumque intercalaribus, interdum terminalibus, vulgo globosis vel elongato-el- lipsoideis, 15-45u longis, 3-40u latis, in parte parietem juxta protoplasmate hyalino in parte media granulis conglutinosis instructis. Habitat in foliis arborum (praecipue quer- corum) putrescentibus prope Farmer, N. C., et prope Beltsville, Md., et prope Criglersville, Va., et in Arlington, Va., et in New Hampshire, etiam in aliis materius plantarum putrescentibus prope Beltsville, Maryland. : FEBRUARY 1953 Mycelium growing slowly (about 2 mm in 24 hours at 20° C.), lustrous, conspicuous; as- similative hyphae colorless, mostly 1.8 to 4.5u wide, sometimes moderately and sometimes abundantly branched, the shorter branches often emptied early of their protoplasm and then delimited basally by a retaining wall; conidiophores colorless, simple, straight or curved, projecting 50 to 200u (or more) erectly or ascendingly into the air, the aerial part oriented toward the main source of light, often pronouncedly inflated, 8 to 25u (commonly 15 to 23u) in greatest width, bearing a single conid- ium at the tip; conidia forcibly thrown off through sudden eversion of the arched basal membrane, colorless, containing a parietal layer of hyaline protoplasm which surrounds a large irregular mass of conglutinated granules, sub- spherical or sometimes oblate ellipsoidal in general shape, measuring 15 to 46u in total length and 13 to 45y in width, their everted basal membrane forming a rounded papilla 2 to 6y high and 5 to 17 wide; chlamydospores formed mainly within the substratum, borne inter- ealarily or terminally, mostly globose or ellipsoi- dal, 15 to 45u long and 13 to 40u wide, colorless, DRECHSLER, C. LI: PITTOSPORUM IN FORMOSA 43 containing a large central mass of conglutinated granules that is surrounded by a parietal layer of hyaline protoplasm. Occurring in decaying leaves of trees (especially of Quercus spp.) in woods near Farmer, N. C.; near Beltsville, Md.; near Criglersville, Va.; in Arlington, Va.; in Carroll County, N. H.; and also in other decaying plant materials near Beltsville, Md. REFERENCES BREFELD, O. Conidiobolus utriculosus wnd minor. Unters. Gesammtg. Mykologie 6: 35- 72, 75-78, pl. 3-5. 1884. Coucu, J. N. A new Conidiobolus with sexual reproduction. Amer. Journ. Bot. 26: 119-130. 1939. Widespread distribution of Dela- croixia coronata and other saprophytic Ento- mophthoraceae in plant detritus. Science 115: 575-576. 1952. Two species of Basidiobolus widely dis- tributed in leaf mold. (Abstract) Phyto- pathology 42: 341. 1952a. GILBERT, E. M. A peculiar entomophthorous fungus. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc. 38: 263-269, pl. 27, 28. 1919. Wuite, W.L. Note on Conidiobolus. Mycologia 29: 148-149. 1937. BOTANY .—The species of Pittosporum in Formosa. Hu1-Lin Li, Morris Arbore- tum, University of Pennsylvania. There are five species of the genus Pit- tosporum on the island of Formosa. Two of them are more or less widespread in Formosa and extend also widely on the mainland of China. One is confined to the southern part of the island, and another is found only on the small island of Botel Tobago. These two southern species de- scribed as endemic to Formos are actually found to be only the northernmost popula- tions of two widely distributed Philippine species. A fifth species is endemic to Formosa at high altitudes’ only. Recently a treatise on the Pittosporum species of eastern Asia was published by M. Gowda (The genus Pittosporum in the Sino-Indian Region. Journ. Arnold Arb. 32: 263-348. 1951). Six species! from Formosa are accounted for, his findings 1 On page 282, Gowda mentions that there are five species known from Formosa. He inadvert- ently left out his own new species, P. sahnianum, which he credited to Formosa on the basis of Wilson 11066. i. being very much at variance with those of the present writer. Gowda considers the Formosan plant known as P. makinoi to be distinct, but in the present study it is treated as conspecific with the widely dis- tributed P. tobira. For P. illicioides treated as a single species here, two separate species under different names are recognized by Gowda, one described as new. Gowda did not recognize the identity and relationship with Philippines species of the two southern species of Formosa. As Pittosporum is primarily a southern genus, the nature of some of the southernmost species in For- mosa, on the Chinese mainland, and in India cannot be properly elucidated without consulting related species of the southern islands of Asia. Selected specimens are cited from the U. §S. National Herbarium, Smithsonian Institution, indicated as (US), and the herbarium of the National Taiwan Uni- versity, Formosa, indicated as (NTU). 44 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON KEY TO THE FORMOSAN SPECIES A. Flowers, few, fasiculate, from axils of upper leaves, with slender peduncles; fruit often SOUUG STU da on casa SORES 1. P. tllicioides AA. Flowers or fruits usually many, in terminal racemes or spikes. B. Leaves broadest at or below middle, apex acute; fruit small, less than 1 cm across. C. Leaves large, 10-15 cm long; fruit very small, about 6 mm across 2. P. daphniphylloides CC. Leaves smaller, about 6-9 cm long; fruit larger, about 8 mm across 3. P. pentandrum BB. Leaves usually broadest above middle, apex obtuse to rounded; fruit large, 1.5 cm or more across. C. Leaves 6-8 em long and 2-3 em broad; fruit abounelPoremyaerassse een ee 4. P. tobtra CC. Leaves larger, 8-12 cm long, 3-5 cm broad; fruit about 2 em across 5. P. littorale 1. Pittosporum illicioides Makino in Bot. Mag. Tokyo 14: (31). 1900; Migo in Journ. Jap. Bot. 16: 566. 1940. Pittosporum oligocarpum Hay. in Journ. Coll. Scr, Univ Mokyorso0 eC) soon Oin(iat le Hormos); cone sels Hormoss f-5 63.) 1901: Kanehira, Formos. Trees 45: 1917, rev. ed. 249. f. 193, 19836; Gowda in Journ. Arnold Arb. 32: 304. 1951. Pittosporum oligospermum Hay. Icon. Pl. For- MVOSS Sole Ol Ord wocal wpe aloo’ Pittosporum sahnianum Gowda in Journ. Arnold Arb. 32: 305. 1951. Syn. nov. Widely distributed and common on the Chinese mainland and in Formosa, at medium to high altitudes. Formosa: Arisan, EH. H. Wilson 9774 (US); Seisui, prov. Karenko, E. H. Wilson 11066 (US); Sikayotaizan, G. Masamune 1296 (NTU). Gowda overlooked Migo’s paper which also considers P. glabratum Lindl. as confined to southern China, while the plant of central China, generally referred to P. glabratum, is the same as P. oligocarpum Hay. of Formosa and P. ullicioides Makino of Japan. Gowda maintains the last two as two distinct species, although for P. illicvoides he had access to only a sterile twig. For this widespread and common plant, Gowda recognizes two species as occurring on both the Chinese mainland and in Formosa: P. oligocarpum Hay. and P. sahnianum Gowda. The first is found mainly in Formosa but is also recorded from Chekiang and Kiangsi. The second is widespread on the Chinese mainland but is ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 2 also credited to Formosa on the basis of Wilson 11066. In his key the two species are differentiated mainly by the size of the fruit as follows: “Capsules extremely small, 6 mm long, without abruptly constricted stipe; inflorescence a simple cyme; flowers small, petals usually 6-7 mm long; pedicels extremely slender, less than Lama, GCG 4.8.00. P. oligocarpum Capsules large, 10 mm long; stipe abruptly con- stricted; inflorescence a cluster of single flowers; flowers large, petals usually 8 mm long; pedicels more than 1 mm thick 42).33e P. sahnianum’’ If one studies the actual specimens, it is clear that these differences are exaggerated. Gowda’s own descriptions do not agree with his key. He gives no measurement for the capsule of P. sahnianum in the description of the species, but for P. oliyocarpum, the size of the capsule is given as 7-9 mm instead of 6 mm long and it is “without or with inconspicuous stipe” instead of without stipe as mentioned in his key. Among the numbers he cited for P. sahnianum that are available to me, such as Chiao 14798, Wilson 1674, Ching 1455, 2264, etc., there appears considerable variation in the size of the capsule, in part apparently due to age, but evidently also due to its inherent variable nature. These cap- sules vary from 6 to 12 mm in length. The stipe at the base is generally conspicuous but varies considerably in length and diameter. The pedicles are often very slender, comparable to those of P. vligocarpum from Formosa. Specimens of P. oligocarpum cited by Gowda from Chekiang, Ching 1874, and from Formosa, Wilson 9774, have capsules varying from 6-9 mm long and also with a distinct but short stipe. It is true that the Formosan plants have generally smaller capsules, but the size of capsule alone does not indicate species differentiation in such a variable and widely distributed species. Wilson 11066 from Formosa, cited by Gowda as representing P. sahnianum, has capsules measuring about 10 mm long. But compared with Wilson 9774, also from Formosa but cited by him as P. oligo- carpum, besides the very slight difference in the size of the fruits, there is not the slightest differ- ence in other characters that can separate the two specimens specifically. Clearly only one species is represented in Formosa, and this is evidently also conspecific with the plants on the mainland of China known as P. glabratum auct. non Lindley and in Japan known as P. illicioides Makino. It seems that on the whole Frespruary 1953 bite too many species are recognized by Gowda in his treatment of the genus in eastern Asia, with over-emphasis on some minor variations probably of no genetic significance. 2. Pittosporum daphniphylloides Hay. in Journ. Coll. Sci. Tokyo 30 (1): 34. 1911; Icon. Pl. Formos. 1: 65. 1911; zbzd. 5: 6. 1916; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 248. f. 191. 1936; Gowda in Journ. Arnold Arb. 32: 336. 1951. Formosa, at high altitudes, central and eastern part of the island; usually epiphytic. Formosa: Arisan, EH. H. Wilson 10803 (US); Taito, Mori 11548 (photo of isotype, US). 3. Pittosporum pentandrum (Blanco) Merr. in Govern. Lab. Publ. (Philip.) 27: 19. 1905. Aquilaria pentandrum Blanco, Fl. Philip. 373. 1837. Pittosporum formosanum Hay. in Hay. & Mat- sum. in Journ. Coll. Sci. Tokyo 22: 32. f. 4. 1906 (Enum. PI. Formos.); Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 249. f. 192. 1936; Gowda in Journ. Arnold Arb. 32: 327. 1951. Syn. nov. Pittosporum undulatum sensu Hay. in op. cit. 33, non Vent. Southern Formosa, Hunchuen Peninsula, and Botel Tobago, along the seashore; also in Indo- China. Formosa: Takao, A. Henry 1058 (US), E. H. Wilson 98538 (US); Bankinsing, A. Henry 48 (US); Kuraru, Prov. Koshun, EL. H. Wilson 11001 (US). This species occurs commonly in the southern- most part of Formosa and on the island of Botel Tobago, along the seashore. The Formosan specimens are doubtless conspecific with P. pentandrum, a very common and widely distri- buted species of the Philippine islands. Gowda records P. formosana as also occurring in Tonkin, Indo-China. A variety of this species with pubes- cent ovary occurs in Tonkin and Hainan: P. pentandrum (Blanco) Merr. var. hainanense (Gagnepain) comb. nov. (P. formosanum var. hainanense Gagnepain, Fl. Gén. Indo-Chine 1: 238. 1909, Suppl. 1: 214. 1939). 4. Pittosporum tobira Ait. Hort. Kew, ed. 2, 2: 27. 1811; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 250. f. 192. 1936. Pittosporum makinoi Nakai, Fl. Sylv. Korea. 21: 84. 1936; Gowda in Journ. Arnold Arb. 32: 311. 1951. Syn. nov. Pittosporum tobira var. calvescens Ohwi in Journ. Jap. Bot. 12: 311. 1936. PITTOSPORUM IN FORMOSA 45 Widely distributed in eastern Asia; very com- mon along the coastal region in the northern part of Formosa. | Formosa: Keelung, T. Tanaka & Y. Shimada 11028 (US); Toyen, Sinchikushu, T. Tanaka & Y. Shimada 13589 (US); Sozan, Taihoku, E. H. Wilson 10790 (US); Silin, Taipeh, H. Keng 1034 (US); Sin-chow, prov. Karenko, E. H. Wilson 11094 (US); Shusin to So-o, Prov. Taihoku, E. H. Wilson 10285 (US). The Formosan plant is variously considered as conspecific with the widely distributed P. tobira, as by Kanehira, as a variety of the latter species, as by Ohwi, and as a distinct species, as by Nakai. Gowda follows Nakai in calling the Formosan plant a distinct species. Ohwi con- siders his variety as different from the typical form of P. tobira in the less pubescent habit and the slightly pilose ovary. Gowda says that the Formosan plant P. makinoit very closely re- sembles P. tobira, differing in having a glabrous inflorescence. The inflorescence is described by him as “usually glabrous,” but in his key it is given as “inconspicuously pilose.” In the original description of Nakai, the inflorescence is de- scribed as minutely and sparsely pilose. Actually the inflorescence is in general pubescent, as in P. tobira from other regions, such as Japan, Korea, and China. Gowda also tries to differ- entiate the two on the basis of their leaf shape, but his characterizations: ‘“‘leaves obovate, broadest above middle and abruptly rounded at apex, frequently emarginate”’ for P. tobira and ‘leaves usually obovate, broadest above the middle, usually rounded at apex” for P. makinoz, show that leaf shape cannot be successfully utilized. Clearly this Formosan plant, common especially along the coastal regions in the north- ern parts, is conspecific with the widespread species P. tobira, of China, Japan and Korea, also mainly of the coastal regions. Gowda is also inconsistent in his emphasis on the pubescence of the inflorescence, as he de- scribes two varieties with glabrous inflorescence, var. fukienense from Fukien and var. sukurai from the Bonin islands, under the species P. tobira, which is considered by him as different from P. makinoi and others in having the char- acter of the inflorescence “‘very conspicuously tomentose’’. 5. Pittosporum littorale Merr. in Philip. Journ. Sci. 5. Bot.: 179. 1910. 46 JOURNAL OF THE Pittosporum viburnifolium Hay. Icon. Pl. For- mos. 3: 32. 1913; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 251. f. 195. 1936; Gowda in Journ. Arnold Arb. 32: 323. 1951. Syn. nov. Formosa, in Botel Tobago Island only, and the Philippines. This species is known in Formosa only from WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 2 Botel Tobago Island and is the same as P. littorale of the Philippines; several specimens of the latter, including Merritt 9845, isosyntypes, are available for comparison. The oblanceolate and obtuse leaves, large flowers, and the subglo- bose 2-valved capsules are distinctive charac- teristics of the species. The plants grow in thickets along the seashore. ENTOMOLOGY .—The Diptera collected on the Cockerell and Hubbell Expeditions to Honduras: Part II, Asilidae.!\ Maurice T. JAMzEs, State College of Wash- ington. The present paper, based on material collected in Honduras by Prof. and Mrs. T. D. A. Cockerell during the winter of 1946- 47 and by Dr. T. H. Hubbell in 1923 and again in 1948, lists 37 species of Asilidae from Honduras, of which 8 are new and 2 are at least in part redescribed. I am in- debted to Dr. A. Earl Pritchard who, though he could not critically review the manu- script, read it and gave me several valuable suggestions. Psilonyx (2macropygialis (Williston)), 1901. Biologia Centrali-Americana, Diptera, 1: 301 (Leptogaster). Reference is made with doubt to this species because the specimen before me lacks the apical half on the abdomen. Aguan River Valley, Copete farm, April 10, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 355, 1 male. Leptogaster spp. Three specimens, representing three species, from Zamorano, can not safely be referred to known species nor described as new, because of the condition of the literature in this group. Asilus tuxpanganus Bellardi, 1862. Sagzio di ditterologia Messicana, Appendice: 22. Escuela Agricola Panamericana, Zamorano, July 24, 1948 (T. H. Hubbell), plain, Yeguare River, no. 141, 1 male, 1 female; same, July 1, 1948, roadside, no. 10, 1 male; same, creek bank, July 19, 1948, no. 103, 1 male. Astlus tenebrosus Williston, 1901. Biologia Centrali-Americana, Diptera, 1: 328. Cerro Uyuca, Dept. Morazdn, July 24, 1948 (T. H. Hubbell), 5,900-6,100 feet, cloud forest, no. 139, 1 male. Ommatius near marginellus (Fabricius), 1781. Species insectorum 2: 464 (Aszlus). Dos Aguas, 8 km west, October 27, 1946 (Cisneros), 1 male; 1For part I of this series, see Pan-Pac. Ent. 26 (2): 86-90. Rio Claura, April 12, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 245, 1 male. Ommatius parvus Bigot, 1875. Ann. Soe. Ent. France (5) 5: 247. Escuela Agricola Pana- mericana, Zamorano: July 1, 1948 (T. H. Hub- bell), 2,600 feet, roadside, no. 10, 5 males, 7 females; August 2, 1948 (Hubbell), 2,700 feet, oak woods, no. 180, 2 males; July 22, 1948 (Hub- bell), 2,650 feet, herbage and brush, no. 125, 1 male, 2 females; July 8, 1948 (Hubbell), 2,550 feet, plain, Yeguare River, no. 39, 2 males, 2 females; July 2, 1948 (Hubbell), plain, Yeguare River, 2,550 feet, no. 18, 1 female; July 19, 1948 (Hubbell), 2,600 feet, creek bank, no. 103, 1 female; July 29, 1948 (Hubbell), 2,650 feet, thicket, 1 female; July 10, 1948 (Hubbell) 2,700 feet, llanos, no. 50, 1 male. Los Llanos, Dept. El Paraiso, E. slope Zamorano Valley, Guinope Road, July 9, 1948 (Hubbell), 3,000 feet, no. 44, 1 male, 2 females. Eicherax flavescens, n. sp. A small species with predominantly silvery pile and silvery to yellowish pollen, predomi- nantly yellow legs, and the body ground color tending to yellow; one pair of scutellar bristles. Male.—Head black, densely covered with pol- len, which is yellowish on the front and vertex and otherwise silvery. Facial prominence cov- ering lower two-thirds of face, not especially strong; mystax dense, white except two small bristles above; a few black and white bristles and hairs along the ocular orbits, to the side of and above the antennae; ocellar bristles small, ocellar triangle small and otherwise devoid of vestiture; beard and postocular fringe white; six bristles on each side of upper part of occiput, mostly black. Antennae black with short black setulae; ratio of first, second, and third segments and arista 8: 4: 10: 15. Palpi black, black-haired. Fesruary 1953 Proboscis shining black, in some reflections bluish black, with long white hairs below. Thorax black, the ground color becoming yellowish to reddish on the humeri, postalar wall and parts of the postalar callus, metanotal slopes, and posterior half of pleura approximately behind a line drawn along the posterior margin of the mesopleura; scutellum and metanotum black. Pollen of mesonotum, uppermost parts of mesopleura, and scutellum yellowish; a gemi- nate mid-dorsal vitta and an adjacent oval area on each side, interrupted by the suture, more brownish pollinose, in places subshining; bristles and hairs of mesonotum, except a scattered few before the suture, and hairs of uppermost parts of mesopleura black; those of scutellum and otherwise of pleura white; scutellum with a pair of bristles and with short scattered hairs. Legs predominantly yellow; coxae in part black; each femur with a broad black dorsal vitta; tibiae, especially hind pair, blackened at apex; tarsi with fifth tarsomeres and narrow apices of the others brownish. Leg bristles apparently of variable color, but apparently wholly white on coxae, wholly white oralmost soon femora, mixed black and white on tibiae, and predominantly black on the tarsi. Venation normal for the genus, that is, of the Asilus type; wing subhyaline, clouded at the apex (roughly beyond base of second submarginal); veins yellow; halteres yellow. Abdomen chiefly reddish yellow in ground color, the second, sides of the first, and base of the third terga, and the apical half of the eighth sternite blackish; some short black inconspicuous hairs medially on the terga and dorsally on the hypopygium, vestiture otherwise white; pollen yellowish dorsally, white to silvery ventrally; two to three white bristles on each posterior angle of the terga, but these becoming small and inconspicuous beyond tergum 3; first three sterna each with several long bristle-like setulae; seg- ments seven and eight very short. Genitalia (Fig. 1) large, eighth sternite strongly produced posteriorly, at base with a crest of appressed white hairs and with the hairs to the side of and behind this crest directed backward to form a broad, rather loose, silky tuft. Length, 10 mm. Female-—Mystax not as dense as in the male; hairs all white but the bristles on its upper part and one to two on each side of the oral margin black. Abdomen predominantly black, reddish JAMES: DIPTERA COLLECTED IN HONDURAS AT only in spots on the sides of the segments and toward their apices. Eighth and ninth segments shining black, eighth longer than the preceding segments, relative lengths of segments 6 to 9 inclusively 25: 25: 35: 20; eighth segment broad at its base but soon becoming laterally com- pressed, the ninth compressed. Otherwise except sexually as described for the male. Types.—Holotype male, Olanchito, Honduras, April 24, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 382; Uni- versity of Michigan Museum of Zoology. Allo- type female, Escuela Agricola Panamericana, Za- morano, Morazan, July 1, 1948 (T. H. Hubbell), 2,600 feet (garden), no. 13. Remarks—This is the second species of this small neotropical genus to be recorded from Central America. E. nigripes (Bellardi) was described from Mexico and subsequently re- corded from Guatemala by Hine (1917). Carrera (1950) recognizes Eicherax as a valid genus; Curran (1934) and Bromley (1934) obviously included it in Erax, though later Bromley (1946) apparently admitted its distinctness and listed four species from Brazil, including the widespread E. nigripes and E. macularis (Wiedemann), the genotype E. simplex (Macquart), and E. ricnotes (Engel), 1929. The black legs will readily dis- tinguish all but simplex from the present species, and simplex is described as having only the hind femora blackened above, the description, based on a female, otherwise fitting flavescens well, except that no mention is made of the reddish- yellow ground color of the pleura. Since Mac- quart’s type came from Rio Negro, Brazil, it is quite unlikely, in view of these discrepancies, that he had the same species. Erax barbatus (Fabricius), 1805. Systema antli- atorum: 169 (Dasypogon). Tela, Dakota farm, May 23, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 608, 5 males, 1 female; Tela, March 14, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 67, 1 male; Tela, March 10, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 47, 3 females; Tela, La Fragua farm, May 7, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 128, 1 male; Tela, Lancetilla, July 28, 1948 (Hubbell); Puerto Castilla, March 3, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 2, 1 male, 1 female, April 26, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 392, 1 male; Escuela Agricola Panamericana, Zamorano, Morazan, July 1, 1948 (Hubbell), no. 10, roadside, 2,600 feet, 1 male; same, July 8, 1948, no. 39, plain, Yeguare River, 2,550 feet, 1 male, 1 female; same, December 6, 1946 (W. P. Cockerell), 1 male. Erax loewtt Bellardi, 1862. Saggio di dittero- logia Messicana, Appendice: 21. Tela, Jilamo 48 JOURNAL OF THE farm, May 28, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 657, 1 male. Erax stylatus (Fabricius), 1775. entomologiae: 795 (Asilus). Tela., Guaimas Dist., May 7, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 491, 1 male, May 10, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 527, 1 male, 1 female, May 5, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 470, 1 female, May 10, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 508, 1 male, May 3, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 452, 1 male, 1 female, and May 8, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 492, 1 female. Systema Erax poecilolamprus, n. sp. A member of Hine’s aestuwans group. The legs are wholly black, the femora with a strong me- tallic blue reflection visible only under certain lights; the male costa is expanded; in the male, the sixth, seventh, and the apex of the fifth tergum are silvery; in the female, the eighth abdominal segment is approximately equal in length to the fifth, sixth, and seventh combined. Male.—Head black, pale yellowish pollinose on front and face, whitish pollinose on the occiput. Mystax moderately dense: a group of 20-25 black bristles and bristly setae on its upper part and a row of stiff black bristles on the oral margin (sometimes only the lateral ones of this row are black); setae, hairs, and bristles of mystax otherwise yellow. Ocellars black; hairs of vertex mostly black, those of front and occiput mixed black and _ yellow. Occipital hairs and bristles yellow; a group of three to five stiff bristles with curved tips on each side of the vertex and some adjacent hairs black; an occasional black bristle in the postoc- ular row. Beard rather dense, composed of soft, yellowish, mostly plumose hairs. Antennae black; first and second segments with yellow setulae below, black above; arista 2 to 21% times as long as the rather short flagellum. Palpi with black and yellow bristles intermixed. Proboscis shining blue-black; some long yellow hairs below. Thorax black; mesonotum with yellowish pollen, somewhat brassy in certain reflections, anteriorly, which merges into cinereous on the posterior part of the mesonotum, the scutellum, and the pleura; this cinereous pollen, especially on the mesonotum, with brassy to purplish reflections in certain lights; mesonotum with a broad median geminate stripe and to each side of it an oval area, interrupted about medially by the suture; these areas subshining, somewhat bluish in certain reflections, and extending to the posterior declivity of the mesonotum; posterior declivity with three triangular black spots, one WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 2 above each postalar callus and one medially above the base of the scutellum; in certain lights these are confluent with the middorsal stripe and lateral spots. Some stiff black bristles on the pronotum. Bristles and mesonotum mostly black; some yellowish hairs on anterior margin, humeri, and above wing bases. Scutellum black-haired on disc, more or less broadly yellow- haired laterally and apically; two to three apical bristles on each side, black, sometimes in part yellow. Pile of prothorax yellow; that of upper parts of pleura generally black, of lower parts generally yellow. Legs wholly black; femora in certain lights with brilliant metallic blue reflections; coxae cinereous pollinose, legs otherwise subshining. Coxae with yellow hairs and bristles; bristles of legs otherwise at least mostly black; femora with yellowish hairs below, especially long and dense on the front pair, less so on the middle and least so on the hind pair; front and hind tibiae and tarsi with dense, velvety golden pile ven- trally; hairs of legs otherwise at least mostly black. Wing venation essentially as in aestuans; costa expanded; second submarginal cell with a distinct though short stump-vein basally; mem- brane brownish, distinctly darker near apex. Halteres yellow. Abdomen black, the apices of terga 2, 3, and 4 brownish; first segment cinereous pollinose; terga 2 to 4 mostly subshining black, the sides broadly cinereous, tergum 4 tending to opaque brownish; tergum 5 brownish black, the sides broadly cinereous and the apex densely silvery; 6 and 7 densely silvery; sterna cinereous, tending to silvery on 6 and 7. Three to four long black (sometimes at least partly yellow) bristles on each side of tergum 1; some short appressed black hairs on the posterior part of tergum 3 and on the dises of 4 and 5; only scattered white hairs on the silvery areas; hairs otherwise yellow. Eighth sternite cinereous, not at all posteriorly directed, but with a dense tuft of posteriorly directed black crinkly hairs at its middle apically. Genitalia shining black with bluish reflections as on the mesonotum (not so strongly metallic as on the femora); hypopygium (Fig. 2) broad from lateral view, truncate and _ tuberculate apically, with a tuft of black dense inwardly directed hairs on each lower apical margin; genitalia otherwise with scattered hair, mostly black except apically, where it is yellow. Length, 18-20 mm. hairs” of | FEBRUARY 1953 Female——Wing without costal expansion and with a longer stump at the base of the second submarginal cell; brownish clouding not so apparent as in the male. Abdominal terga 2 to 6 _ in coloration similar to 2 to. 4 in the male; 7 to 9 shining, 8 about equal in length to 5, 6, and 7 combined. Otherwise except sexually as de- scribed for the male. Types.—Holotype, male, Tela, Honduras, May 12, 1923, no. 535 (T. H. Hubbell). Allotype, female, same data but May 3, no. 452. Paratopo- types: 2 males, 2 females, same data as holo- type; | male, same data as allotype; 2 males, 2 JAMES: DIPTERA COLLECTED IN HONDURAS 49 females, same data but May 10, no. 527; 1 male, 1 female, same data but May 8, no. 492; 1 male, same data but May 7, no. 491; 2 females, same data but May 10, no. 512; 1 male, same data but May 5, no. 470; 1 female, same data but May 10, no. 508; 1 female, same data but May 1, no. 414. Paratype, 1 male, Aguan River Val- ley, Maloa farm, Honduras, April 24, 1923 (Hubbell). Remarks.—Several neotropical Hrax of the aestuans group have wholly black legs with golden-matted front and hind tibiae and tarsi, and, from their descriptions, seem similar to this Figs. 1-6.—Male genitalia, side view; pilosity and bristles omitted except ventral tuft in Fig. 2: 1, Hicherax flavescens, n. sp., from holotype; 2, Hrax poecilolamprus, n. sp., from paratype; 3, Hrax cockerellorum, n. sp., from holotype; 4, Erax hubbelli, n. sp., from holotype; 5, Proctacanthus caudatus Hine; 6, Pachychoeta complicata, n. sp., from paratype. 50 JOURNAL OF THE species. Two of these are keyed out by Hine (1919, pp. 107, 120), but loewit Bellardi( =dolicho- gaster Williston) has only the seventh and the posterior margin of the sixth male terga silvery; mexicanus Hine is smaller, has male terga five to seven silvery, and has the seventh male sternum strongly produced apically; both these species have male genitalia different from those of poecilolamprus. Of Bromley’s Brazilian species neowillistont (=willistont Bromley, nec Hine) and latiforceps have three submarginal cells; subchalybeus has the beard, postgenal hairs, and pruinosity of the face and occiput white, the ensemble giving the insect a light bluish-gray appearance; and chapadensis lacks the dilation of the male costa. Erax cockerellorum, n. sp. Referable to Hine’s carinatus group, though with a poorly developed mesonotal mane. A black species with golden to violaceous (depend- ing on the light) thoracic pollen, black legs except the larger part of the tibiae, an expanded male costa, and silvery pollinose sixth and seventh male terga. Male—vVestiture of head mostly black, but prominently yellow in places. Facial tubercle prominent; mystax composed of black hairs and bristles except a small tuft of yellow hairs on its upper part and a more prominent tuft of yellow bristles above middle of oral margin. Beard composed of yellow plumose hairs; a few yellow hairs at middle of occiput above; pile and bristles of head otherwise black, including three to five moderately stout occipital bristles on each side above. Color of pollen of head hard to determine but apparently as in the female. Antennae black, wholly black-haired; flagellum lanceolate, about two-fifths length of arista; first segment a little longer than flagellum. Palpi black-haired. Mesonotum dorsally compressed and typical of the carinatus group but with at most a very feebly developed crest; an abundance of bristles behind the suture. Tomentum golden, in some lights violaceous; a median black vitta divided anteriorly by an area of pale tomentum. Scutel- lum with three marginal bristles on each side, these variably black or yellow, and with an abundance of moderately long pile which is black medially and yellow laterally. Hypopleura with each a tuft of yellow hairs, pile and bristles of pleura otherwise black. Legs mainly black; tibiae mainly bright yellow, apices black, strongly WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 2 contrasting; front coxa with white and yellow hairs; some yellow hairs at base of front femur below and of middle femur below and laterally: front and hind tibiae with dense short golden pile, middle tibia with longer, more scattered hairs inwardly, that on the hind tibia apically and extending onto the first two tarsal segments golden-brown; bristles and pile otherwise black, with some golden or yellow intermixed; the pre- vailing appearance of the vestiture of the legs, except when the insect is viewed anteriorly, being black. Wings distinctly brown, the veins black; costa expanded; stump vein at base of second submarginal cell very short. Halteres yellow. Abdomen with sixth and seventh terga silvery and genital segments shining black; pollinose pattern otherwise hard to distinguish, but sterna, first tergum, and sides of second to fifth terga inclusively apparently cinereous. Pile mixed black and yellow on tergum 1, long and black on sterna 1, 2, 7, and 8, long and white on other pregenital sterna and on sides of terga 2 and 3, short and white on tergum 6, otherwise short and black; most genital pile black; a mane of dense, crinkly black hairs on each process of the ninth sternite. Hypopygium (Fig. 3) robust. Length, 19 mm. Female—Pollen of head mostly golden, except that that just above the antennae and on the facial prominence is cinereous. Mystax with upper tuft of hairs as in the male but with bristles above the oral margin, except one aberrant one, black. Very few pale hairs at bases of front and middle femora. Costa not expanded and stump vein at base of second submarginal cell much longer than the vein connecting it with the radial sector. First and second abdominal segments brownish pollinose; apex of second tergum, third and fourth terga except a large dorsal arrowhead- shaped marking, pointed apically, on each, the moderately interrupted basal and partial lateral margins of the fourth tergum, a small sublateral basal spot on the fifth tergum, the apex of the second, base of the fifth, and all of the second, third, and fourth sterna, cinereous pollinose; eighth segment shining; the remaining parts of the abdomen subshining, black. Eighth segment slightly longer than the fifth, sixth, and seventh combined. Otherwise, except sexually, as de- scribed for the male. Types—Holotype male, allotype female, Uroca Peak, Honduras, March 9, 1947 (Morelos): FEBRUARY 1953 State College of Washington type collection no. 173. The holotype is somewhat ‘‘greased,’”’ so that part of the pollinose pattern is hard to distinguish, but otherwise it is in good condition. Remarks.—This species seems to fit best in Hine’s carinatus group. The mesonotum is compressed as in the more typical members of that group, but the mesonotal crest is very feeble, in fact, hardly discernible. In Hine’s key (1919, pp. 107, 131) it runs best to jubatus, with which it agrees in having the vestiture of the pronotal declivity entirely black; jubatus has a strong crest, however, and differs otherwise in color characters. The male genitalia are of the same general type as those of jubatus, though they are more robust and differ considerably in detail. The mesonotum is more strongly com- pressed than in members of the barbatus group and the vestiture of the mesonotal declivity and of the scutellum is longer and denser. Erax hubbelli, n. sp. Best referable to Hine’s carinatus group, al- though the lack of a mesonotal crest suggests the barbatus group. A black species with bicolored tibiae, coppery thoracic pollen, an expanded male costa, and silvery pollinose sixth and seventh abdominal segments in the male. Male.—Pollen of head yellowish, becoming coppery on front and vertex and on face above facial prominence, more cinereous on facial prominence and along inner occipital orbits. Facial prominence strong. Bristles of mystax black on upper, white on lower half; smaller hairs of face mixed black and white; those above antennae and on ocellar triangle black, long. Beard white, occiput mostly with white vestiture, most of the setae of the postocular fringe and a group of four to six bristles on each side above, and occasionally some of the adjacent hairs, black. Antennae black with black hairs; ratio of first, second, and third antennal segments and of arista 12: 5: 10: 25. Palpi with black hair and bristles. Proboscis shining, a tuft of stout white setae below and some short white hairs apically. Thorax with coppery pollen which becomes yellowish on lower parts of pleura and cinereous on mesonotal declivity over an indefinite area in front of the scutellum; pollen of scutellum cinereous, yellowish at base; a geminate median vitta and three triangular spots on the meso- notal declivity, one above each wing base and one above the middle line of the scutellum, JAMES: DIPTERA COLLECTED IN HONDURAS ol devoid of pollen; a lateral oval spot on each side of the mesonotal vitta, interrupted at the suture, appearing pollinose only under certain lights. Prothorax with black bristles and with white pile anteriorly and black posteriorly; scutellum with long white crinkly pile and with two to four bristles, usually black, on each side; thorax otherwise chiefly with black hair and bristles. Legs chiefly black; tibiae reddish yellow, distinctly black apically and less distinctly so basally except on the hind pair; bristles of legs black; pile and setulae of coxae yellow, more whitish toward median line of body, those of the underside of the middle and fore femora basally whitish; pile of inner side of fore and hind tibiae and basitarsi dense, short, velvety, golden; vestiture of legs otherwise mainly black, in many places with pale pile intermixed. Wings with a slight tinge of brown; costa inflated; stump vein of second submarginal cell very short. Abdomen slender; sixth and seventh segments wholly densely silvery pollinose; first segment, sides of terga 2 to 5, and sterna 2 to 5, cinereous pollinose; terga 2 to 5 subshining medially. A few black bristles laterally on each side of ter- gum 1, terga 4 and 5 with short black hairs, terga 6 and 7 with short silvery hairs; pregenital segments otherwise with rather long crinkly whitish hairs. Eighth sternum transverse, not produced apicad. Eighth segment and genitalia shining black, the hypopygium (Fig. 4) largely bluish-black. Ninth sternum with a dense ventral crest of black, crinkly hairs. Vestiture of genitalia black. Length, 18 mm. Types—Holotype male, Mount Caculatepe, Morazdn, Honduras, 4,200—-4,500 feet, August 6, 1948 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 203, University of Michigan Museum of Zoology. Paratype, male, Escuela Agricola Panamericana, Zamorana, Mount Caculatepe, Morazin, Honduras, 4,600— 5,200 feet, August 6, 1948 (Hubbell), no. 204. Remarks.—In Hine’s key (1919, pp. 107, 108, 131) this species runs to bzcolor Bellardi, if traced to the barbatus group, where the lack of a mesonotal crest would tend to place it, or to couplet 6 of the carinatus group, where the lack of a crest would prevent it from tracing further. E. bicolor is quite a differently appearing species, with a more evenly rounded mesonotum, a dis- tinctly grayish pollinose body, a predominantly white pile, and a different hypopygium. This species, in which the mesonotal crest is 52 JOURNAL OF THE lacking, and the preceding one, in which it is feeble, do not fit well into the carinatus group, as Hine defines it. However, among the species which Hine refers to that group, the crest varies considerably in its density, from a very heavy one in such species as jubatus Williston and sub- cupreus Schaeffer to a thin one in cressoni Hine. In the light of this fact, cockerellorum and hub- belli do not seem so anomalous. In these two Species, as in other members of the group, the facial prominence is very sharply defined, es- pecially above; the third antennal segment is short, lanceolate, and not more than two-fifths the length of the arista; the hairs of the meso- notal declivity and of the scutellum are long and dense; the number of scutellar bristles is small, usually not more than six; the wing of the male has an expanded costa and a very short, some- times evanescent, stump-vein at the base of the second submarginal cell; and the male genitalia fit a common pattern. Hrax unicolor Bellardi, 1861. Saggio di dit- terologia Messicana 2: 37. Zamorano, January 1, 1947 (Cisneros), 1 male, and December 17, 1946, 1 female; Agua Amarilla, December 15, 1946, 1 male. EHrax argyrogaster Macquart, 1846. Dipteres exotiques, Suppl. 1: 84. Negrito, March 27, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 148, 1 male, 2 females. Erax interruptus (Macquart), 1834. Histoire naturelle des diptéres 1: 310 (Asilus). Escuela Agricola Panamericana, Zamorano, Morazan, July 26, 1948 (Hubbell), 2,600 feet, plain, no. 146, 1 male; same, July 10, 1948 (Hubbell), plains, 2,700 feet, no. 50, 1 male, 2 females; same, July 11, 1948 (Hubbell), flats, Yeguare River, no. 59, 1 female; Galeras, October 19, 1946 (G. Vidales), 1 female. Erax triton Osten Sacken, 1887. Biologia Centrali-Americana, Diptera, 1: 200. Zamorano, March 28, 1947 (Adan Oseguero). Pachychoeta complicata, n. sp. A black species with predominantly yellow legs, yellowish-brown mesonotal pollen, and lightly infumated wings. Male.—Head black, the pollen mostly white with a slightly yellow cast, that on the front and vertex distinctly yellow. Bristles and setulae of front, vertex, upper part of occiput, uppermost part of mystax, first two antennal segments, and, in part, of palpi, black; the short hairs near apex of proboscis yellow; vestiture of head otherwise WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 2 white. Ratio of antennal segments and arista 16: 7: 11: 37; arista distinctly though narrowly flattened apically and terminating in a lanceolate process followed by a short spine. Antenna mostly black, the second segment and the third in part reddish. Thorax black, the pale-pollinose areas yellowish brown on mesonotum, upper parts of pleura, and base of scutellum, the pollen otherwise whitish with yellow reflections; mesonotum with a median broad blackish-pollinose (reddish brown in some lights) geminate stripe extending from its anterior margin to a point halfway from the suture to the scutellum; an oval presutural and a similar postsutural spot on each side; behind these, a triangular spot on each side and a median prescutellar triangle. Vestiture black on mesono- tum, scutellum, and uppermost parts of meso- pleura; a few yellow pronotal bristles; vestiture otherwise white. Legs largely reddish yellow; coxae and tro- chanters black, pollen as on thoracic pleura; extreme apex of middle and apical third to half of hind femur blackish; hind tibia blackish on approximately the apical half: front and middle tarsi brownish beyond the basitarsi, hind tarsus wholly brownish. Fine, erect hairs of legs mostly pale, the appressed and stiffer ones, however, black; hind femur with both black and yellowish appressed hairs, however; bristles mostly black except on fore femur; front and hind tibiae and tarsi with matted yellow to golden pile below. Halteres yellow. Wings lightly infumated, dis- tinctly darker posteriorly and apically. Abdomen black; apex of first, sides of second to fifth, and venter of first to fifth segments, whitish pollinose; terga 1 to 5 on dise brownish- black pollinose, this pollen extending, in a paler color, onto dise of tergum 6 at its base and, very narrowly, onto base of tergum 7; apices of terga 2 to 5 lighter brown pollinose; segments 6 and 7 ventrally and, except as noted above, dorsally, silvery pollinose. Long pile on sides and venter, especially toward base of abdomen, and bristles at apices of segments, white; appressed hairs of terga mixed black and white. Genitalia as in Fig. 6; shining, mostly black, the inner parts reddish, blackish to reddish-brown pilose; hypopygium basally on dorsal side with a dense tuft of long black bristles and ventrolaterally on the bulbous part with a group of five to six very long black bristles and several shorter hairs, its terminal digitate process with curly, moderately short, Fespruary 1953 JAMES: reddish brown hairs below; ninth sternite pro- longed beyond other terminalia, provided with long dense reddish brown hairs laterally and apically, a few black bristles ventrally at the apex, and with mostly black hairs and setulae on its ventral surface. Length, 17 mm. Types—Holotype male, Tela, Guaimas Dist., May 10, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 508; University of Michigan Museum of Zoology. Paratypes: male, same data; male, same data but May 2, 1923, no. 436. Remarks—This species agrees in most respects with the description and figures of Eraz annulipes (Brazil) given by Macquart, so far as the de- scription of a female may fit a male; however, in annulipes the wing is figured and described as being uniformly infumated and the thorax and abdomen are said to be gray-pollinose. In view oi these discrepancies, I feel reasonably safe in considering the present form distinct. Proctacanthus caudatus Hine, 1911, Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. 4: 159. The series before me seems to be this species, the only discrepancy with Hine’s description being that the mystax is partly black; the extent of the black is variable, however, in these five specimens, no two being alike; the black may be limited to most of the strong bristles on the oral margin, at one extreme, or, at the other, may involve also most of the setulae above this row. Curran (1934a) does not include caudatus in his key; depending on whether the mystax were partly black or wholly yellow, it would run to dina Curran, couplet 9, except that the apical lamellae of the ovipositor have only marginal spines, or to fulviventris Macquart, from which Hine’s key will readily separate it. In the series before me, all thoracic bristles and all hairs and setulae of the mesonotum and scutellum are black; the hairs and setulae of the vertex and, in general, of the upper parts of the pleura, part of the pronotal vestiture, the postocular bristles, and, usually, the tuft of two to four bristles arising among the pale hairs at the sides of the first abdominal segment, are black. The pale pollen of the mesonotum varies from gray to chocolate brown. The male genitalia are as in Fig. 5: the hypopygium is black-haired above, yellow-haired below. Honduras records —Tela, May 5, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 478, 1 male; Tela, May 21, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 601, 1 male; Tela, July 5, 1924, 1 male, | female, in copula (U. S. National Mu- DIPTERA COLLECTED IN HONDURAS 53 seum); Escuela Agricola Panamericana, Zamo- rano, July 24, 1948 (Hubbell), 2,250 feet, flat Yeguare River, no. 141, 1 male. Promachus cinctus Bellardi, 1861. Saggio di ditterologia Messicana 2: 25. Tela, Guaimas Dist.: May 5, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 470, 1 female; May 2, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 442, 1 female; May 10, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 529, 1 female; May 9, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 505, 1 male; May 8, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 492, 1 male; May 10, 1923 (Hub- bell), no. 508, 1 female: May 12, 1923 (Hubbell). no. 535, 1 female: May 9, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 497, 1 male. Progresso, May 1, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 497, 1 male. Promachus forfexr Osten Sacken, 1887. Biologia Centrali-Americana, Diptera; 1: 194. Tela, Guaimas Dist., May 10, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 508, 1 male. Promachina trapezoidalis (Bellardi), 1861. Saggio di Ditterologia Messicana 2: 28 (Pro- machus). Tela, Guaimas Dist.: May 3, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 452, 1 female; May 2, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 440, 1 male, 2 females; May 9, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 497, 2 females; May 12, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 535, 1 female; May 2, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 442, 1 male; May 10, 1923 (Hub- bell), no. 527, 1 female. Progreso, May 1, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 544, Choluteca River bridge, Tegucigalpa-Danli Road, 1,950 feet, El Paraiso Dist., July 25, 1948 (Hubbell), no. 142, 1 male. Mallophora freycineti Macquart, 1839. Diptéres exotiques 1(2): 85. Zamorano, March 28, 1947 (Salazar), 1 male. Mallophora sp. This species traces to abana Curran in Curran’s key (1934b), but it does not fit the description of that species. It is probably new, but I do not feel secure in describing it as such. Tela, Guaimas Dist., May 3, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 452, 1 male. Atomosia hondurana, n. sp. Close to rujipes Macquart, but with about the apical half of the hind tibia, a preapical band on the hind femur, at least the last two tarsomeres of the hind tarsus, and the postalar callus black. Male-—Head black, entirely covered with pollen which is yellowish on the vertex and upper occiput, otherwise silvery; mystax, beard, and pile of palpi and proboscis white; that of vertex and antennae yellow, except that it becomes black at the apex of the first and second antennal segments; ocellar bristles one pair, yellow; first antennal segment with an outstanding yellow 54 JOURNAL OF THE bristle. Antennae structurally as in ru/fipes, elongated, first segment about twice second in length, third with the short dorsal spine a little beyond its middle; black, second segment red- dish. Palpi black; proboscis shining black. Thorax including postalar callus wholly black; mesonotum with appressed brassy tomentum and with semierect hairs on middle line and in dorsocentral rows; mesonotum from _ posterior view appearing to have two longitudinal tomen- tose vittae. Scutellum with two pairs of marginal bristles, the outer ones small and sometimes difficult to distinguish. Pleura silvery-pollinose, hairs mostly white, those on upper part more yellowish. Coxae black, silvery pollinose and pilose; front and middle femora and tibiae wholly yellow with white to yellow hairs and bristles; hind femur with a broad preapical black annulus, otherwise yellow; hind tibia black on the apical half or sometimes more, otherwise yellow; pile of legs mostly white, bristles white to yellow; a fringe of white hairs ventrally on the hind tibia and femur, denser on the former. Front and middle tarsi each with apical tarsomere black with black hairs, otherwise yellow with yellow hairs and bristles; hind tarsus with usually last four tarsomeres wholly black, at least above, the hairs and bristles mixed black and yellow. Wings hyaline, veins brown; first posterior cell usually closed in the margin. Abdomen black, shining bluish in certain lights; terga 2 to 5 very narrowly margined posteriorly with silvery pollen, the margins a little broader laterally; brassy yellow tomentum dorsally on the segments, white pile laterally and ventrally. Hypopygium black; genitalia ventrally yellow, yellow-haired. Length, 8 mm. Female——Very much like the male, but on the average slightly larger and a little more ~ robust. Types-——Holotype male, Escuela Agricola Panamericana, Zamorano, 2,600 feet, at light, July 14, 1948 (T. H. Hubbell); University of Michigan Museum of Zoology. Allotype female, same data but July 11, 1948, on gardenia (Hub- bell), no. 58. Paratopotypes: 5 females, same data as allotype; 2 males, 3 females, July 4, 1948 (Hubbell), on gardenia, no. 25; 3 males, 5 females, July 9, 1948 (Hubbell), tall weeds, no. 45; 1 male, July 2, 1948 (Hubbell), 2,550 feet, flats, Yeguare River, no. 18; 1 male, Aug. 16, 1948 (Hubbell), on citrus, no. 225; 1 female, WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 2 July 1, 1948 (Hubbell), roadside, no. 10; 1 female, July 29, 1948 (Hubbell), thicket, no. 162. Remarks.—There is some variation in the color of the legs. The hind tarsus is usually as described, though the black may exceptionally be limited to the last two or three segments. The black on the hind tibia and femur may be more extensive, so that the segments may be more than half black. The black coloration is usually quite distinct and may have a metallic blue sheen. In Curran’s (1930) key this species traces to tenuis Curran from Brazil, from which it may readily be distinguished by the wholly pollinose vertex, occiput, and pleura; in Hermann’s (1912) key it runs to glabrata (Say), but in that species the first antennal segment is shorter and the pattern of leg coloration is different. The brief original description of anonyma Williston agrees with my specimens, so far as it goes, but according to Curran’s key anonyma has six or more ocellar bristles. The closest relationship, so far as I can determine, is with rufipes Macquart and species of that complex; this may be a subspecies of rufipes. Cerotainia minima Curran, 1930. Amer. Mus. Nov., no. 425: 12. Escuela Agricola Panameri- cana, Zamorano, Morazdn: July 9, 1948 (T. H. Hubbell), tall weeds, no. 45, 3 males, 3 females; July 19, 1948 (Hubbell), weed thicket, no. 106, 2 males, 8 females; July 22, 1948 (Hubbell), herbage and brush, no. 125, 1 male; July 6, 1948 (Hubbell), on rose, 2 females: July 15, 1948 (Hubbell), on citrus, no. 76, 1 female: July 1, 1948 (Hubbell), roadside, no. 10, 1 female. Zamorano, October 10, 1946, (Cisneros), 1 female; October 1946 (A. Carr), 1 female. Cerotainia ornatipes, n. sp. A black species with robust females, more slender males; the thorax thickly and entirely black-haired; the tarsi, except the apical segment of each, yellow, those of the male, especially the fore and middle pair, with appressed silvery hairs apically; the wing strongly clouded on the basal half. Male—Head black, covered with an och- raceous pollen anteriorly and on the vertex and a silvery pollen on the occiput; mystax white with a few scattered black bristles; pile of head other- wise mostly white, the beard silvery; ocellar bristles two, yellow, in addition a few yellowish hairs on the ocellar triangle; occipital bristles FEeBRuARY 1953 JAMES: DIPTERA COLLECTED IN HONDURAS ay) black, not rising from tubercles. Anten n ae elon-(W. P. Cockerell) and December 25, 1946 (T. gated, structurally much as in dasythrix; first segment eight to nine times as long as wide, about four times length of second; third segment miss- ing in both males of the type series, presumably much as in the female; antennae black, black- haired, the first segment with an outstanding black, bristle below, the second with one below and one above. Proboscis black, black- and white- haired. Thorax entirely black; mesonotum and scutel- lum with distinct bluish reflections when viewed under magnification; prothorax except pronotal collar, humeri, pleura, and metathorax pollinose, the pollen mostly ochraceous; all thoracic bristles and pile black, that of the mesonotum erect and dense; scutellum with an apical fringe of hairlike bristles which are distinctly longer than the pile of the disc. Mesopleura only moderately convex, not unusually swollen. Coxae black, ochraceous pollinose; femora black with bluish reflections as on the mesonotum; tibiae yellow with considerable infuscation, the hind one with a weak bluish reflection; tarsi bright yellow except apical tarsomere of each, which is black. Pile and bristles of fore and middle tarsi yellow, the pile becoming silvery and appressed dorsally on the last two tarsomeres; bristles of hind tarsus black, its pile yellow ventrally, black dorsally on the basal tarsomeres, with some yellow pile on the third and some yellow and silvery on the last two tarsomeres; pile and bristles of the coxae, femora, and tibiae wholly black. Wing distinctly brown at base and along costal margin, gradually becoming subhyaline apically and_ posteriorly. Halteres infuscated. Abdomen elongated, tapering almost to a point; terga black with reflections as on the mesonotum, sterna densely ochraceous pollinose; vestiture black, with quite a few rather incon- spicuous yellow appressed hairs on the fifth and sixth terga. Genitalia yellow, yellow-haired. Length, 6-6.5 mm. Female —More robust than the male, especially the abdomen. Ratio of antennal segments 55: 15: 70. Pile of tarsi black dorsally, yellow ven- trally; no silvery tarsal pile as in the male. Abdomen oval. Types.— Holotype, male, Zamorano, January 14, 1947 (W. P. Cockerell); State College of Washington Type Collection no. 174. Allotype female, Zamorano, January 29, 1947. Paratopo- types: 2 females, Zamorano, December 7, 1946 D. A. Cockerell); 1 male, January 29, 1947. Remarks.—The relationship to C. dasythrix Hermann seems to be very close. It traces there in both Curran’s (1930) and Hermann’s (1912) keys, and the antennal structure is precisely as illustrated by Hermann. According to the de- scription of dasythrix, however, in that species the mystax and the pale vestiture of the head are yellow, there is a transverse band of golden hair behind the humeri, the tarsi are (wholly?) reddish brown and only the middle pair has silvery hair dorsally, and the body has a dark green (thorax) or brownish green to violet (ab- domen) reflection. Taracticus argentifacies, n. sp. A black species with predominantly black legs. predominantly silvery pollinose head and thorax, and small spinelike setulae forming most of the mesonotal vestiture. Male.—Head black, almost wholly covered with silvery pollen which is densest on the face and lower part of the occiput; the ocellar triangle at most in part subshining posteriorly. Mystax and beard white; bristles of occipital fringe yellow; ocellar triangle with one or two (one on one side, two on the other, in the type) pairs of small yellow bristles. Palpi and proboscis shining black with white hairs, the short ones at the apex of the proboscis yellow. Antennae black; the dorsal spine of the third segment set at about three-fifths the length of the segment. Thorax wholly black. Prothorax mostly silvery pollinose with white hairs and yellow pronotal bristles. Mesonotum largely lightly silvery to cinereous tomentose; posterior part of humerus, a rectangular presutural lateral area, a small spot above the wing base, the postalar callus, and a preapical rim of the scutellum, shining; a pair of yellowish-pollinose stripes on the mesono- tum, arising behind the suture and bowed strongly outward toward the humeri, contrasting with the rest of the mesonotal pollen. (The exact extent of the mesonotal and scutellar pollen is a little hard to determine because parts of these areas have been smeared with adhesive.) Meso- notum provided with numerous yellow spinelike setulae or short stout bristles and with hardly any softer hairs; hairs and bristles of pleura white. Scutellum with one pair of small yellow bristles. Legs mainly black, shining or subshining except the coxae; knees and bases of the hind femur, 56 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES tibia, and basitarsus yellow; pile and bristles of legs yellow. Wing hyaline, the veins brown; fourth posterior cell very little narrowed. Halteres yellow. Abdomen mostly black, seventh and genital segments vellow; terga with numerous setulose punctures, the setulae yellow to golden, laterally becoming pale yellow to white toward the base of the abdomen. Terga 1 to 4 each with a trans- verse rectangular silvery-pollinose spot apically on each side, these spots confined to about the lateral fourth of the segments; a very small round spot, removed from both apical and lateral margins, representing a remnant of such a spot on tergum 5; sterna cinereous-pollinose with scattered, fine white hairs. Genitalia yellow, yellow-haired. Length, 7 mm. Type.—Holotype male, Dept. Morazdn, ridge between La Montafita and C. Uyuca, 5+ km southwest of Suyapa, 5,200-5,400 feet, August 5, 1948 (T. H. Hubbell), fir woods; Museum of Zoology, University of Michigan. Remarks—tIn Pritchard’s (1938) key this species runs to vitripennis (Bellardi) from which it may readily be distinguished by the ochraceous face, the mostly shining mesonotum, and other characters. If the small pollinose area on the fifth tergum is taken into consideration in Pritch- ard’s key, this species will run to nigripes Williston, from which the bare ocellar triangle, the ochraceous thoracic pollen, the silvery lateral bar of the sixth abdominal segment, and other characters will distinguish it. The relationship to nigripes seems to be very close. Andrenosoma (Pilica) erythrogaster (Wiede- mann), 1828. Aussereuropdische Zweifliigelige Insekten 1: 523 (Laphria). Tela, Guaimas Dist., May 5, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 478, 1 male, no. 470, 1 female; same, May 3, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 452. 1 female. Laphria marginalis Williston, 1901. Biologia Centrali-Americana, Diptera, 1: 318. Negrito, March 19, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 128, 1 female. Lampria (?mexicana Macquart), 1847. Dipteres exotiques, Suppl. 2: 37. Tela, May 27, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), Jilamo farm, no. 645, 1 female. Aphestia nigra Bigot, 1878. Ann. Soc. Ent. France (5) 8: 235. Tela, Guaimas Dist., May 3, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 452, and May 5, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 473, 1 male, 1 female. Psilicurus caudatus Williston, 1901. Biologia VOL. 43, NO. 2 Centrali-Americana, Diptera, 1: 308. Tela, Guai- mas Dist., May 1, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 414, 1 female, May 3, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 452, 1 male, and May 10. 1923 (Hubbell), no. 527, 1 male. Stichopogon trifasciatus (Say), 1823. Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 3: 51 (Dasypogon). Zamorano, December 6, 1946 (W. P. Cockerell), 1 male; Progreso, March 28, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 150, 1 male; Tela, March 10, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 47, and May 21, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 596, 2 females. Holcocephala deltoidea (Bellardi), 1861. Saggio di ditterologia Messicana 2: 85 (Discocephala). Zamorano, January 15, 1947 (Dorothy Wiley), 1 male. Holcocephala oculata (Fabricius), 1805. Sys- tema antiliatarum: 151 (Dzoctria). Tela, April 28, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 406, 1 male; Tela, Guaimas Dist., March 17, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 115, 1 male; Rio Claura, April 13, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 264, 1 female. Helcocephala affinis (Bellardi), 1861. Saggio di ditterologia Messicana 2: 86 (Discocephala). Rio Paulaya, Barranco, April 16, 1923 (Hubbell), no. 290, 1 female. The above specimen agrees with the characterization given by Pritchard (1938), who stated that the species had not been recognized again since its original description. Diogmites ialapensis (Bellardi), 1861. Saggio di ditterologia Messicana 2: 65 (Saropogon). Tela, Dakota farm, May 26, 1923 (T. H. Hub- bell), no. 639, 1 male; Zamorano, Escuela Agri- cola Panamericana, 2600’, July 1, 1948 (Hub- bell), roadside, no. 10, and 2,550 feet, July 2, 1948 (Hubbell), flats. Yeguare River, no. 18, 2 females. Lissoteles hermannit Bezzi, 1910. Boll. Lab. Zool. Generale e Agraria, Portici, 4: 178. Bezzi described this species from a single female. My specimen fits his description very well except for the thoracic pattern, which may very well be subject to variation. Bezzi described the mesono- tum as gray-tomentose with a pair of not very distinct brown longitudinal stripes which diverge anteriorly. My specimen has two crescentric brown spots behind the humeri; these may well be the diverging anterior arms of these stripes, which otherwise do not seem to appear. There is a small brown bar about half way between each humerus and the suture and removed some dis- tance from the notopleural suture; just behind the suture and above the wing base there is a FEBRUARY 1953 round subshining black spot bordered with brown pollen below. Bezzi described the scutellum as having no macrochaetae; it does, however, have numerous long erect hairs, especially toward its sypex, some of which are almost bristlelike. Bezzi is uncertain about the abdominal pollen since in his specimen the abdomen is not in a good state or preservation (‘“‘greased’”’?). In my specimen the abdominal terga, especially 2 to 6 inclusively, are cinereous pollinose at the bases and sides, briefly so also apically, but with gray pollen, in djaces with somewhat of a yellow tinge, in the middle. Honduras record.—Puerto Castilla, May 3, 1923 (T. H. Hubbell), no. 2, 1 female. LITERATURE CITED BroMuLey,S.W. Asilidae, in Curran, C. H., The Diptera of Kartabo, Bartica District, British Guiana. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 66 (3): 327-360. 1934. The robber flies of Brazil. Livro de ho- MATTOX: NEW SPECIES OF EULIMNADIA Ni menagem a R. R. d’Almeida, no. 8: 103-120. 1946. CaRRERA, Messias.. Synoptical keys for the genera of Brazilian ‘‘Asilidae’’? (Diptera). Rev. Brasil. Biol. 10 (1): 99-111. 1950. CurrRAN, C. H. New American Asilidae (Dip- tera). Amer. Mus. Nov., no. 425:1-21. 1930. . The families and genera of North American Diptera, 512 pp. New York, 1934. HERMANN,F. Bettrdge zur Kenntnis der stidameri- kanischer Dipterenfauna aus Grund der Sam- melergebnisse eines Reise in Chile, Peru, und Bolivia. Asilidae. Nova Acta Abh. Kais. Leop.-Carol. Deutsch. Akad. Naturf. 96: 1-275. 1912. HINE, JAMES 8S. Costa Rican Diptera collected by Philip P. Calvert, Ph.D., 1909-1910. Paper 2: Tabanidae and Asilidae. Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. 43: 291-299. 1917. Robberflies of the genus Erax. Soc. Amer. 12: 103-157. 1919. PritcHaRD, A. Earu. Revision of the robberfly genus Taracticus Loew with descriptions of three new species (Diptera, Asilidae). Journ. New York Ent. Soc. 46: 179-190. 1938. Ann. Ent. ZOOLOGY .—Two new species of Eulimnadia from Maryland and Virginia (Crus- tacea: Conchostraca). N. T. Matrox, University of Southern California.! (Com- municated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) During the course of studies of the con- chostracan phyllopods in the collections of the U.S. National Museum two new mem- bers of the genus Hulimnadia were found. These animals were represented in 13 col- lections from temporary pools found in 3 different localities. Eulimnadia ventricosa, n. sp. Description—Male: With characters of the genus (Packard, 1883, and Daday, 1926). The bivalve shell is amber colored, transparent, and elongately oval (Fig. 1, a). The dorsal margin is slightly rounded with the highest elevation (umbo) approximately two-fifths the length from the anterior margin. The ventral margin of the shell is greatly rounded, with the posterior end more truncate than the anterior. The length of the shell averages 8.5 mm with an average height of 5.2 mm. The lines of growth vary in number from 8 to 12, with the outer ones very closely spaced. The head possesses the typical frontal organ 1 Department of Zoology, Allan Hancock Foun- eation. Allan Haneoek Foundation Contribution No. 108. (Fig. 1, c). The front is straight dorsally, but prominently extended ventrally forming a con- spicuous rostrum. The scape of the second antennae extends beyond the tip of the rostrum. Each flagellum of the second antennae is variously spined and has nine segments, the posterior one being longer than the anterior. The first antennae are longer than in the female, extending to the distal end of the third segment of the flagellum of the second antennae. The first antennae possess 9 or 10 dorsal sensory papillae. The body bears 18 pairs of swimming legs. The first and second pair are modified into the claw- hike gnathopods typical of the genus. The two segments of the sixth endite of the first pair of gnathopods are of the same length (Fig. 1, e). The terminal segment of the sixth endite of the second gnathopod is approximately twice the length of the proximal segment and is much longer than that of the first gnathopod (Fig. 1, f). The posterior 10 to 12 body segments bear middorsal spines. The telson is elongate, the ventral margin much shortened extending only one-third the distance of the dorsal margin (Fig. 1, g). The dorsal ridges of the telson are variously spined with 14 to 16 pairs of spines. The terminal telson 58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES claws are elongate and tapered, extending pos- teriorly to a distance equal to the length of the dorsal margin. The dorsal forked filament arises between the third and fourth pair of telson spines. Female: The female shell is much more rounded, ventricose, in outline (Fig. 1, 6). Both the dorsal and ventral margins are very rounded with the greatest height near the center. The length of the shell in mature females varies from 7.7 to 10.7 mm, and the height varies from 5.3 to 6.8 mm. The average size of those measured is 8.9 mm by 6.1 mm. The number of growth lines averages 10, with a variation of 8 to 12. The front of the head is much less concave than in the male with the rostrum less pro- nounced (Fig. 1, d). The second antennae are similar to those of the male. The first antennae are much reduced, not extending beyond the distal end of the scape of the second antennae. The swimming legs, 18 pairs, are unspecialized, being of the general, swimming type characteristic of the genus. The telson is similar to that of the male with 14 to 19 pair of dorsal spines, 15 pairs is the average number. Type locality——Bear Island, Potomac River, Montgomery County, Md. Types.—Holotype, male, U.S.N.M. no. 93439; paratypes, both sexes, U.S.N.M. no. 93440, and in writer’s collection. Remarks.—Eulimnadia ventricosa more closely resembles EH. stoningtonensis Berry than any other North American species of the genus. EF. ventri- cosa differs from stoningtonensis in the longer first antennae of the male; the greater number of telson spines, 14 being the maximum number in stoningtonensis; the origin of the forked filament of the telson between the third and fourth spines instead of between the fifth and sixth as in stoningtonensis; the more pronounced rostrum; a shell length-height ratio of 1.6 to 1 as against a 1.4 to 1 ratio for stoningtonensis; up to 12 growth lines in contrast to 10 for stoningtonensis; and a maximum size up to 10.7 mm, with 8.5 mm the longest shell length for stoningtonensis. Compared to other North American species E. ventricosa is larger, more ventricose, and has more lines of growth than any other member of the genus. Eulimnadia ventricosa is represented in nine collections. This species was taken in seven col- lections from Bear Island, Md., by Robert S. Bray during July and September, 1941. Notes on the environment for these collections indicate VOL. 43, NO. 2 that they were taken in small temporary pools with a recorded temperature variation of 71 to 88°F. and a pH variation of 6.4 to 6.7. In these collections there were 90 females and 9 males indicating a greater ratio of females than males as seems to be the case for other species of the genus. The species is also represented in a collection of 16 females and 2 males taken at Lilypons, Frederick County, Md., by O. L. Meehean on July 12, 1937. Also, there was one female in a collection of Cyzicus mexicanus made by Eric Tuttle in a temporary pool between Chain Bridge and Georgetown, D. C., on July 18, 1950, Eulimnadia francesae, n. sp. Description.—Male: The bivalve shell (Fig. 1, h) is pale yellow, transparent, and very much elongate. The dorsal margin is nearly straight with only a slight elevation near the center of the shell. The ventral margin is regularly rounded. The shell length varies in mature males from 4.3 mm, with a height of 2.56 mm, to 4.5 by 2.7 mm. There are 1 or 2 lines of growth, with 2 the common number, located near the outer margin. The head possesses the typical, dorsal pyriform frontal organ (Fig. 1, 7). The front is very straight, only slightly concave. The scape of the second antennae is short, extending only slightly beyond the tip of the rostrum. The flagella of the second antennae are variously spined, 9 seg- mented, and are relatively short. The first antennae with 10 to 12 dorsal papillae extends to the distal end of the fifth segment of the second antennae flagella. The body bears 18 pairs of swimming legs. The first and second pairs are modified gnathopods. The sixth endite of the first gnathopod is shorter than the length of the “claw” portion (Fig. 1, /). The two segments of the sixth endite of the second gnathopod are of equal length. (Fig. 1, m). The telson is truncate in general form (Fig. 1, n). The dorsal ridges are armed with 9 to 11 spines. The dorsal forked filament arises between the second and third pairs of spines. The terminal telson claws are elongated; they extend pos- teriorly less than the length of the dorsal telson margin. Female: The shell is elongately oval with the dorsal margin slightly elevated (Fig. 1, 7). The ventral margin is regularly and prominently rounded with the greatest height near the center of the shell. The number of growth lines on FEBRUARY 1953 MATTOX: NEW SPECIES OF EULIMNADIA 59 mature individuals varies from 2 to 4 with the to that of the male (Fig. 1, k). The front is only greater number possessing 3 lines. slightly concave and the dorsal surface is very The head of the female is very similar in form convex with the occipital notch very conspicuous. Fig. 1.—a-g, Eulimnadia ventricosa, n. sp.: a, Shell of male; 6, shell of female; c, head of male; d, head of female; e, first gnathopod of male; f, second gnathopod of male; g, telson. h-n, Eulimnadia francesae, n. sp.: h, Shell of male; 7, shell of female; 7, head of male; k, head of female; /, first gnathopod of male; m, second gnathopod of male; n, telson. Scales: a, 6, h, 1 equal 1 mm; all others 0.5 mm. 60 JOURNAL OF THE The second antennae have a longer scape than the male. The flagella of the second antennae are 9 segmented and are of equal length as in the male. The 18 pairs of swimming legs are of the characteristic type of phyllopod swimming ap- pendages. The telson is similar to that of the male with 9 to 11 dorsal spines; 10 is the typical number. Type locality Bear Island, Potomac River, Montgomery County, Md. Types.—Holotype, male, U.S.N.M. no. 93446, paratypes, both sexes, U.S.N.M. no. 93447, and in the collection of the writer. Remarks.—Eulimnadia francesae resembles E. diversa Mattox more than the other species in the genus. The distinctive differences between these two species are as follows: Shell of E. francesae is more elongate; the front of the head is more concave in FH. diversa; the frontal organ is more dorsal in EF. francesae; the occipital notch is more conspicuous, deeper, in FE. francesae; in the relative length of the second antennae those of E. francesae are shorter than E. diversa; the first antennae of the male are longer in #£. francesae; the equal length of the flagella of the second antennae is distinctive; HL. francesae has a WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCE VOL. 43, NO. 2 normal number of 10 telson spines while £. diversa has an average of 12; and the ventral telson claws of H. francesae are not as elongate as those of EH. diversa. The elongate shell, the small size, and the small number of growth lines, make HE. francesae different from all other North American species of the genus except E. alineata Mattox which has no lines of growth. This species is represented in four collections all from Bear Island, Md., and collected by Robert 8. Bray during July 1941. These animals were found in temporary pools with a recorded average temperature of 80°F. and a pH of 6.2. In the four collections there are 102 females and 17 males, again indicating the unequal ratio of the sexes typical of the genus. REFERENCES Berry, E. W. Description and notes on the life history of a new species of Eulimnadia. Amer. Journ. Sci. (5) 11: 429-433. 1926. Dapbay DE Dress, E. Monographie systematique des phyllopodes conchcstraces, Triseme Partie. Ann. Sei. Nat. Zool. (10) 11: 1-81. 1926. Matrox, N. T. Studies of the life history of a new species of fairy shrimp, Eulimnadia diversa. Trans. Amer. Mier. Soc. (2) 56: 249-255. 1937. PacKarD, A. 8. A monograph on the phyllopod Crustacea of North America. 12th Ann. Rep. U.S. Geol. Surv. Terr., Hayden, 1: 1883. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 457TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 457th meeting of the Board of Managers, held for the first time in the Board Room of the new quarters of the Cosmos Club, 2121 Massa- chusetts Avenue, on October 13, 1952, was called to order at 8:07 p.m. by President RAMBERG, with the following in attendance: WALTER Ram- BERG, FRANK M. Serzupr, F. M. DEFANDORF, H. 8S. Rappieye, J. A. STEVENSON, HaRatp A. ReuHDER, WiuuiaAM F. FosHac, A. T. McPHER- SON, SARA E. BRANHAM, RoGesrR G. Bates, A. G. McNisu, JoHn K. Taytor, C. A. Brerrs, A. H. Scott, L. A. Sprnpuer, A. M. Grirrin, N. R. Evuis, E. H. Watker, L. E. Yocum, and, by special invitation, F. N. FRENKIEL. The President announced that the November meeting would be addressed by John Hagen, of the Naval Research Laboratory, on Radio astronomy. ARCHIBALD T. McPHeERSOoN, chairman of the Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent, presented the following report: Junior Academy.—The organization of the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences was con- summated on June 13, 1952, at a meeting held in the Cosmos Club. Watson Davis, director of Science Service, addressed the meeting on Science for Youth. The Committee designated about 85 students and 40 recent graduates of secondary schools in the Greater Washington area as mem- bers and alumni members, respectively. The selec- tion was based on tangible achievements such as the winning of recognition in science fairs, science talent searches, or related activities. The Com- mittee also designated 57 fellows of the Junior Academy, including teachers whose students had shown outstanding accomplishments and others who have been especially active in the promotion of science education. The affairs of the Junior Academy are in the hands of a Governing Council comprised of the following persons in addition to the Committee on the Encouragement of Science Talent: Officers: FRED SCHINDLER (President), North- western High School; VERNon J. Mtcuen (Vice President), Kelly Miller Junior High; STanLEy PLATNIK (Treasurer), Roosevelt High School; Mary JEANNE KREEK (Secretary), Woodrow Wil- son High School. Alumni Representatives: CaroLt Cotson, East- ern High School; LEE Kimpetyt, McKinley High School—-American University. FEBRUARY 1953 Fellow Representatives: MARGARET E.. PATTER- SON, Science Clubs of America; Percy J. RAYFORD, head, Department of Science, Division 2; KEITH C. Jonnson, head, Department of Science, Divi- sion l. Membership Representatives: DaNnrEL Mrx, Macfarland Junior High School; Strerriep T. BauzeER, Gonzaga High School; Davip W. Ray, Dunbar High School. Science Service has kindly provided a meeting place for the Governing Council as well as office facilities. The first meeting of the Junior Academy for the current season was held at the George Wash- ington University on September 19 through the courtesy of Dr. Yocum, dean of the Graduate School. Howarb OwENs gave an illustrated lecture on Selection of a Science Project, after which the meeting divided into eight discussion groups each led by an outstanding scientist of the Washington area who gave further advice and guidance regard- ing the selection of projects in specific fields. Cooperation with Engineers.—The D. C. Council of Engineering and Architectural Societies has a Committee on Education which has been assigned duties parallel to those of two Academy Com- mittees—the Committee on Science Education headed by Dr. Bropg, and the present Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent. Dr. W. T. Reap, chairman of the Education Committee of the Council, is also a member of the Academy, Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent and provides liaison between the activities of the two organizations. An understanding has been arrived at whereby the Committee of the Council will direct its efforts at arranging speakers for school assemblies and conferences whereas the Academy Committee will take the lead in affairs of the Junior Academy and the Science Fair. A subcommittee of the Academy Committee is being set up under the chairmanship of Dr. A. H. Scorr to arrange for scientists to speak in schools along with engineers and to cooperate with a parallel subcommittee of the Engineers under the chairmanship of Mr. McCartua. Science Fair.—An estimate of $1,000 has been made for the cost of the Science Fair to be held next spring. Letters have gone out to all the societies affiliated with the Academy asking them for contributions, and the President of the Acad- emy has been asked personally to present the matter to the vice presidents representing the respective societies. - The D. C. Council, likewise, is asking for sub- stantial contributions from its affiliated societies. A discussion of this report brought out the following additional information: Eligibility for charter membership was based on (1) selection of members by science teachers whose activity in connection with the Science Fair and Science Talent Search projects was exceptionally good, (2) the selection of teachers to be designated as fellows based on the performance of their students PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 61 judged on the same basis; certain other fellows were designated on the basis of their interest as evidenced by activity in this connection, (3) the selection as alumni members of a few graduates on the basis of their accomplishments as evi- denced from these projects and the reeommenda- tion in addition of those teachers designated as fellows. The annual membership dues are $1. The Junior Academy is solvent. So far nothing has been spent out of the $100 provided by the Washington Academy for initial organizational expenses of the Junior Academy. The academies of Maryland and Virginia have no objection to students in nearby schools becoming members of the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences. Treasurer RAPPLEYE, who is ex-officio custodian of funds, will handle and report on the Junior Academy funds separately from those of the Washington Academy. For the Committee on Science Education, A. T. McPherson reported that its chairman, W. R. Bropg, had discussed with Judge Laws the matter of appointing a scientist as a member of the District of Columbia Board of Education. It appears that all appointments to the Board have been completed so that recommendations would be out of order at this time. In accordance with action by the Board at its last meeting, ballots relative to changes in the constitution and bylaws to provide for sponsor- ship of the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences were forwarded to the Academy mem- bership. Copies of the proposed constitution and bylaws for the Junior Academy and a brief summary of actions by the Board on this connec- tion were attached. Deaths of the following members were re- ported: E. C. AucuTER, on July 8, 1952; Ipa A. BENGSTON, on August 15, 1952; R. A. KeusEr, on April 16, 1952; H. E. McComs, on October 11, 1952; A. EK. McPuHErson, on August 5, 1952; P. F. Nemenyi, on March 1, 1952; and J. L. Peters on April 19, 1952. On request, J. H. Service was placed on the retired list. In view of a provision in the constitution and bylaws adopted by the Washington Junior Acad- emy of Sciences the following was proposed and adopted as the 18th of the Standing Rules of the Board of Managers of the Washington Academy: 18. The President shall designate each year a member of the Committee on the Encouragement of Science Talent to serve as Chairman of the Governing Council of the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences. Senior Editor Fosuae reported that the Jour- NAL now has a backlog of papers awaiting publi- 62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCE cation sufficient to fill six issues. His report was discussed by Messrs. McNisH and RAMBERG, and it was brought out that in so far as possible charges to authors are kept at a minimum and occur primarily when there are a large number of illustrations. Because of an expressed interest in the Jour- NAL as a possible medium for more papers on physics, Dr. F. N. FReNkKrIEL, of the Johns Hopkins Applied Physics Laboratory, had been invited to present his views at this meeting of the Board. He was asked to present his thoughts. Dr. FRENKIEL stressed the following points: 1. Existing journals do not seem satisfactory for many general articles on physics as these journals individually cover only highly specialized fields. Thought is now being given to the establishment of additional journals. 2. It would not be a difficult matter to enlarge the JouRNAL of the Academy and to publish a good many articles in physics and engineering. These articles in other magazines must be self- supporting. 3. One serious drawback to publication by physicists in the JOURNAL arises from its limited circulation among physicists and libraries. 4. Another arises from the fact that the Acad- emy, because it has no library, does not maintain exchange relations with other journals. Thus the JOURNAL is not well known except in highly specialized fields. 5. Thus, it seems that a field of coverage in scientific applications of physics and engineering exists which, were the academy interested in ex- panding the size and distribution of its JOURNAL might be more actively exploited. 6. This would entail an interested and well- qualified group of physicists who would contribute regularly and would assure initially several arti- cles in each issue over, say a period of one year. 7. With this backlog as a basis for an announce- able change in policy of content an attempt at increased circulation should succeed. 8. Other scientific and mathematical journals ask laboratories and firms to pay for the publica- VOL. 43, NO. 2 tion of articles by their staff members. Govern- ment laboratories might well give some such backing through assured purchase of reprints which they need. 9. Because Washington has a very large scien- tific population it should have a satisfactory local publication that would publish articles promptly. The discussion was continued by Messrs. FosHac, McNiso, McPuHrrson, RAMBERG, and SETZLER. It was pointed out that: A, The Acad- emy must be willing to have its present JouRNAL grow in size and circulation; B, the price of the JOURNAL might have to be increased; C, definite assurance of suitable articles would have to be determined and announced; E, individuals and hbraries would have to be circulated and sent free sample copies. President RAMBERG asked the Board of Editors to give this proposal its consideration. Vice-President McN1su reported that the Phil- osophical Society had held its first meeting in the New Auditorium of the Cosmos Club. The acoustics are good and a new projector has been ordered. The Philosophical Society would be willing to contribute toward a good moving picture projector if the other Affiliated Societies will participate. The vice-presidents were re- quested to ask their societies whether they could make substantial contributions toward such a projector. President-Elect Setzler mentioned receipt of a request for assistance from the Joint Press Rela- tions Committee that supplies the Science Calen- dar material regularly to four Washington papers, the Engineers’ Club, three universities, and eight technical or governmental bulletin boards or papers. The budget amounts to $125.97 for the coming years. It was understood that the Treas- urer will forward half this amount as a contribu- tion of the Academy and its affiliated societies. The meeting was adjourned at 9:45 p.m. F. M. Drranporr, Secretary. ®@ bituartes Pauu Fretrx Neminyi. The formal details of Neményi’s life are as follows: Born June 5, 1895, in Fiume; Dipl. Ing. Budapest Inst. Tech. 1918; Dr. Ing. Berlin Inst. Tech. 1922; Habilitation; died March 1, 1952, in Washington, D. C. Neményi’s life-long interest was pure me- chanics. He worked mainly in five fields: static elasticity, fluid dynamics, hydrology and hy- draulics, organization of mechanics, methods of research. The first of his three major discoveries in elasticity was a new singularity method [Zeitschr. Angew. Math. Mech. 9: 488 (1929); 10: 383 (1930)]. A number of rather complicated singu- larities, obtained by confluence of simple ones, are classified in terms of their influences in ac- cordance with a duality principle. Neményi’s statement of this generalization of Maxwell’s reciprocity theorem is: “The influence lines, in- fluence surfaces (or in general the influence fields) of any influence in the elastic solid, can be repre- sented by deflection curves, deflection surfaces (or in general by the displacement field) of the same solid, if acted upon by a singularity dually corresponding to the influence in question.”’ Pos- sibly this principle, which has not attracted the FEBRUARY 1953 attention it deserves and has never been put into mathematical form, could be made the basis of a genera] integration procedure. Neményi was content to illustrate its usefulness in special problems concerning beams, plates, and slabs. His interest in analogies, which he collected and always planned to organize into a treatise on the method, may well have begun with his own discovery that the stream-lines of any po- tential flow of an incompressible fluid may serve also as stress trajectories for a plane elastic system. He first approached the problem through his method of singularities [Proc. Int. Congr. Applied Mech. 1930]; later [Zeitschr. Angew. Math. Mech. 12: 364 (1931)], he gave an analytic proof of this beautiful result in the reformulation now called ““Neményi’s Theorem”: Given any net of isothermal curves, there exists a five parameter family of plane stress systems for which these curves are stress trajectories. Phrased thus in terms of pure elasticity, it suggests another question: To what extent is the solution of a problem in con- tinuum mechanics characterized by an associated trajectory system? This subject attracted Ne- ményi throughout the rest of his life. For a certain class of problems in plane plasticity, it - was answered in a paper written with Van Tuyl (Quart. Journ. Math. Mech. 5: 1 (1952)]; a more general elastic case is considered in a paper writ- ten with Sdenz [Journ. Rat. Mech. Anal. 1, 73 (1952)|; and related problems were solved by Prim and Sdenz. His third major discovery in elasticity is the reduction of the general extensional theory of. thin shells of revolution with meridian y = f(z) to the remarkably simple equation We ifica mney The functions U,, called ‘“Neményi’s stress func- tions,” yield at once the nth Fourier coefficients of all stress resultants. This fact has been made the basis of an analytic theory for this class of shell problems, and to the equation itself, which should be called ““Neményi’s equation,’ some subsequent literature has been devoted. Neményi discovered the result by an intricate analysis in graphical statics [Bygningsstatiske Meddelelser (1936), abstr. in Proc. 6th Int. Congr. Math. (1936)]; later an analytical derivation was ob- tained [Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 29: 159-162 (1943)]. All this theoretical work illustrates the inverse or semi-inverse approach, of which Neményi was OBITUARIES 63 a strong advocate. He summarized the field in a fine organizational summary [Adv. Applied Mech. 2, 123-151 (1951)]. While this paper does not contain any original contribution, the viewpoint expressed is sound, and the special cases pre- sented are strong advocates for the value of the method. The paper itself is significant as a counter to the current flood of blinding calcula- tion of “‘approximate”’ solutions; it deserves care- ful reading and reflection from every serious student of mechanics. In papers written jointly with Prim [Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 34: 119 (1948); Journ. Math. Phys. 27: 130 (1948); Proc. 7th Int. Congr. Appl. Mech. 2: 300; Quart. Journ. Math. Mech. 2: 129 (1949)] he applied inverse and semi-inverse methods to obtain numerous exact solutions of the nonlinear equations of gas dynamics, many of them representing rotational flows of nonuniform total energy. He named and pointed out the importance of “generalized Bel- trami flows,” in which the reduced velocity is a Beltrami field, and obtained many examples. The impressive variety of results to which his view- point, complemented by proper analytical ap- paratus, has ultimately led may be seen in the Princeton thesis of Prim [Journ. Rat. Mech. Anal. 1: 425-497 (1952)]. Neményi’s scientific knowledge extended well beyond the subjects of his researches, and the organization and scope of his numerous exposi- tory articles give them permanent value; e.g., “Selbstspannungen elastischer Gebilde”’ [Zeitschr. Ang. Math. Mech. 11: 59 (1931)], ‘‘Tragwerke auf elastisch nachgiebiger Unterlage”’ [ibid.; 450]. He was a leading authority on fishways [Iowa Studies in Eng., Nos. 23 and 24 (1941)] and the morphology of rivers [forthcoming review in Trans. Amer. Geogr. Union]. His ‘‘Wasserbauliche Strémungslehre” [Leipzig, 1933] was the first book to include an exposition of fluid flow through porous media. Other surveys deal with water power, soil mechanics, theory of structures, trans- port of granular materials, and filtration. He left a draft for an extraordinary book on fluid me- chanics, emphasizing the basic principles valid for all types of fluids and the consequent variety of their application to aerodynamics, hydraulics, meteorology, oceanography, and other fields. The introductory chapter is an analysis of the historical development of the main ideas and concepts, both in theory and in experiment, drawn entirely from the original sources. It will be completed and published as a memoir. 64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCE Experimental work always interested him, and by inserting into a stream a lens-shaped rotatable tube, punctured by a single hole and connected to a manometer, he was able to make rapid measurements of velocity direction along with speed and pressure |A new device for direct stream field studies, Copenhagen, 1935]. Neményi’s interest and ability extended to several nonscientific fields. He collected children’s art and sometimes lectured upon it. One of his last works is a brilliant review of the Eneyclo- pedia Brittanica [New Republic, Feb. 19, 1951]. For any person with a genuine question in mechanics, Neményi was always willing to sup- plement his great knowledge and deep under- standing by hours of library work. Since 1946 many of his ideas were worked out by his pupils: (in temporal order) C. Truesdell, R. C. Prim, AS Wane tay.) Ace Wis Saenz eke ourprmends ali. Kricksen. After a life of travel and change, during which he held minor positions in institutions in several foreign countries, Neményi came to the United States in 1939. Unfortunately here he found the problem of livelihood aggravated by the rifts between pure and applied mathematics, between pure science and engineering, between classical and modern physics, between teaching and re- search. For a no longer young person, whose English was poor, whose dress was unconven- tional, whose training was in civil engineering, and who claimed to be a physicist doing research on the principles of continuum mechanics, the mere gaining of daily bread became a major obstacle. With one exception, it was only in college mathematics departments that he was able to find employment at all, and here it came as a blow‘to him that a lifelong student of educa- tional methods and one moreover especially at- tracted by youth could turn out to be utterly incapable of dealing with undergraduate students, whose sole concern was to get a passing grade at the cost of as little learning as possible. The fact that most of his publications date from before 1933 or after 1946 is thus easily explained, since it was in the latter year that he joined the Naval Ordnance Laboratory, where he became a guid- ing spirit in the Theoretical Mechanics Sub- division during its brief period of scientific pro- VOL. 43, NO. 2 ductivity in 1946-1948. In 1949 he became a member of the Academy. In 1949 he transfer- red to the Naval Research Laboratory, where he later became Head of the Theoretical Me- chanics Section, a position he held at his death. He leaves a son, Peter, student of mathematics at Princeton University. C. TRUESDELL. Epwin F. Wenpt was born May 12, 1869, in New Brighton, Pa., a son of Christian and Agnes Scott Wendt. He was a grandson of John Scott, associate judge of Beaver County (Pa.), a great grandson of Frederick Wendt, pioneer glass manu- facturer of Pittsburgh, and a great grandson of David Scott, quartermaster of the army of Gen- eral Anthony Wayne. He graduated from Geneva College in 1888 and was awarded the degree of doctor of science in 1913, He entered the employ of the Pittsburgh & Lake Erie Railroad in 1888 as a roadman, eventually becoming assistant chief engineer. He later became engineer in charge of construction for the Lake Erie & Eastern Railroad. He was a member of the New York Central Lines engi- neering committee from 1907 to 1913. Dr. Wendt was a member of the government commission which inspected the Alaska Railroad in 1917. He was also a member of the Engineering Board of the Interstate Commerce Commission, and chief inspector in charge of the Eastern Division of the Bureau of Valuation of the I.C.C. from 1913 to 1921. He then left government service to enter private consulting practice, and was admitted to practice before the Interstate Commerce Commission in 1929. In addition to membership in the Washington Academy of Sciences, he was a member of the American Society of Civil Engineers, the Ameri- ean Institute of Consulting Engineers (president 1936-37), Engineers Society of Western Pennsy]l- vania, Washington Society of Engineers (presi- dent 1918), American Association for the Ad- vancement of Science, Signa! Section of American Association of Railroads, American Economic Association, Historical Society of Western Penn- sylvania, and the Railway Club of Pittsburgh. He was also a trustee of Geneva College for ten years. Frespruary 1953 attention it deserves and has never been put into mathematical form, could be made the basis of a general integration procedure. Neményi was content to illustrate its usefulness in special problems concerning beams, plates, and slabs. His interest in analogies, which he collected and always planned to organize into a treatise on the method, may well have begun with his own discovery that the stream-lines of any po- tential flow of an incompressible fluid may serve also as stress trajectories for a plane elastic system. He first approached the problem through his method of singularities [Proc. Int. Congr. Applied Mech. 1930]; later [Zeitschr. Angew. Math. Mech. 12: 364 (1931)], he gave an analytic proof of this beautiful result in the reformulation now called ““Neményi’s Theorem”: Given any net of isothermal curves, there exists a five parameter family of plane stress systems for which these curves are stress trajectories. Phrased thus in terms of pure elasticity, it suggests another question: To what extent is the solution of a problem in con- tinuum mechanics characterized by an associated trajectory system? This subject attracted Ne- ményi throughout the rest of his life. For a certain class of problems in plane plasticity, it was answered in a paper written with Van Tuy] [Quart. Journ. Math. Mech. 5: 1 (1952)]; a more general elastic case is considered in a paper writ- ten with Sdenz [Journ. Rat. Mech. Anal. 1, 73 (1952)]; and related problems were solved by Prim and Sdenz. His third major discovery in elasticity is the reduction of the general extensional theory of. thin shells of revolution with meridian y = f(z) to the remarkably simple equation tev =0. The functions U,, called ‘“Neményi’s stress func- tions,” yield at once the nth Fourier coefficients of all stress resultants. This fact has been made the basis of an analytic theory for this class of shell problems, and to the equation itself, which should be called ‘‘Neményi’s equation,’’ some subsequent literature has been devoted. Neményi discovered the result by an intricate analysis in graphical statics [Bygningsstatiske Meddelelser (1936), abstr. in Proc. 6th Int. Congr. Math. (1936)]; later an analytical derivation was ob- tained [Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 29: 159-162 (1943)I. All this theoretical work illustrates the inverse or semi-inverse approach, of which Neményi was OBITUARIES 63 a strong advocate. He summarized the field in a fine organizational summary [Adv. Applied Mech. 2, 123-151 (1951)]. While this paper does not contain any original contribution, the viewpoint expressed is sound, and the special cases pre- sented are strong advocates for the value of the method. The paper itself is significant as a counter to the current flood of blinding calcula- tion of “‘approximate”’ solutions; it deserves care- ful reading and reflection from every serious student of mechanics. In papers written jointly with Prim [Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 34: 119 (1948); Journ. Math. Phys. 27: 130 (1948); Proce. 7th Int. Congr. Appl. Mech. 2: 300; Quart. Journ. Math. Mech. 2: 129 (1949)] he applied inverse and semi-inverse methods to obtain numerous exact solutions of the nonlinear equations of gas dynamics, many of them representing rotational flows of nonuniform total energy. He named and pointed out the importance of “generalized Bel- trami flows,” in which the reduced velocity is a Beltrami field, and obtained many examples. The impressive variety of results to which his view- point, complemented by proper analytical ap- paratus, has ultimately led may be seen in the Princeton thesis of Prim [Journ. Rat. Mech. Anal. 1: 425-497 (1952)]. Neményi’s scientific knowledge extended well beyond the subjects of his researches, and the organization and scope of his numerous exposi- tory articles give them permanent value; e.g., “Selbstspannungen elastischer Gebilde”’ [Zeitschr. Ang. Math. Mech. 11: 59 (1931)], ‘“Tragwerke auf elastisch nachgiebiger Unterlage”’ [ibid.; 450]. He was a leading authority on fishways [Iowa Studies in Eng., Nos. 23 and 24 (1941)] and the morphology of rivers [forthcoming review in Trans. Amer. Geogr. Union]. His ‘‘Wasserbauliche Str6mungslehre” [Leipzig, 1933] was the first book to include an exposition of fluid flow through porous media. Other surveys deal with water power, soil mechanics, theory of structures, trans- port of granular materials, and filtration. He left a draft for an extraordinary book on fluid me- chanics, emphasizing the basic principles valid for all types of fluids and the consequent variety of their application to aerodynamics, hydraulics, meteorology, oceanography, and other fields. The introductory chapter is an analysis of the historical development of the main ideas and concepts, both in theory and in experiment, drawn entirely from the original sources. It will be completed and published as a memoir. 64. JOURNAL OF THE Experimental work always interested him, and by inserting into a stream a lens-shaped rotatable tube, punctured by a single hole and connected to a manometer, he was able to make rapid measurements of velocity direction along with speed and pressure [A new device for direct stream field studies, Copenhagen, 1935]. Neményi’s interest and ability extended to several nonscientific fields. He collected children’s art and sometimes lectured upon it. One of his last works is a brilliant review of the Encyclo- pedia Brittanica [New Republic, Feb. 19, 1951]. For any person with a genuine question in mechanics, Neményi was always willing to sup- plement his great knowledge and deep under- standing by hours of library work. Since 1946 many of his ideas were worked out by his pupils: (in temporal order) C. Truesdell, R. C. Prim, A. Van Tuyl, A. W.-Sdenz, R. Toupin, J. L. Ericksen. After a life of travel and change, during which he held minor positions in institutions in several foreign countries, Neményi came to the United States in 1939. Unfortunately here he found the problem of livelihood aggravated by the rifts between pure and applied mathematics, between pure science and engineering, between classical and modern physics, between teaching and re- search. For a no longer young person, whose English was poor, whose dress was unconven- tional, whose training was in civil engineering, and who claimed to be a physicist doing research on the principles of continuum mechanics, the mere gaining of. daily bread became a major obstacle. With one exception, it was only in college mathematics departments that he was able to find employment at all, and here it came as a blow to him that a lifelong student of educa- tional methods and one moreover especially at- tracted by youth could turn out to be utterly incapable of dealing with undergraduate students, whose sole concern was to get a passing grade at the cost of as little learning as possible. The fact that most of his publications date from before 1933 or after 1946 is thus easily explained, since it was in the latter year that he joined the Naval Ordnance Laboratory, where he became a guid- ing spirit in the Theoretical Mechanics Sub- division during its brief period of scientific pro- WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCE VoL. 43, No. 2 ductivity in 1946-1948. In 1949 he became a member of the Academy. In 1949 he transfer- red to the Naval Research Laboratory, where he later became Head of the Theoretical Me- chanics Section, a position he held at his death. He leaves a son, Peter, student of mathematics at Princeton University. C. TRUESDELL. Epwin F. Wenpt was born May 12, 1869, in New Brighton, Pa., a son of Christian and Agnes Scott Wendt. He was a grandson of John Scott, associate judge of Beaver County (Pa.), a great grandson of Frederick Wendt, pioneer glass manu- facturer of Pittsburgh, and a great grandson of David Scott, quartermaster of the army of Gen- eral Anthony Wayne. He graduated from Geneva College in 1888 and was awarded the degree of doctor of science in 1913. He entered the employ of the Pittsburgh & Lake Erie Railroad in 1888 as a roadman, eventually becoming assistant chief engineer. He later became engineer in charge of construction for the Lake Erie & Eastern Railroad. He was a member of the New York Central Lines engi- neering committee from 1907 to 1913. Dr. Wendt was a member of the government commission which inspected the Alaska Railroad in 1917. He was also a member of the Engineering Board of the Interstate Commerce Commission, and chief inspector in charge of the Eastern Division of the Bureau of Valuation of the I.C.C. from 1913 to 1921. He then left government service to enter private consulting practice, and was admitted to practice before the Interstate Commerce Commission in 1929. In addition to membership in the Washington Academy of Sciences, he was a member of the American Society of Civil Engineers, the Ameri- can Institute of Consulting Engineers (president 1936-37), Engineers Society of Western Pennsyl- vania, Washington Society of Engineers (presi- dent 1918), American Association for the Ad- vancement of Science, Signa! Section of American Association of Railroads, American Economic Association, Historical Society of Western Penn- sylvania, and the Railway Club of Pittsburgh. He was also a trustee of Geneva College for ten years. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences Sasi riet. pe) Sa Ee eee eens reece eas F. M. Serzter, U. 8. National Museum MepesHenr-ClCCL.. = oe ee es F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards REE POO ce ee ee lee JASON R. Swaten, U. 8. National Museum _ ESSE rr Howarp S. Rappers, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Pe) ee eee JOHN A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications _ Haratp A. Renper, U.S. National Museum Vice-Presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Pemosopnical society of Washington.................0.. 00200. A. G. McNisH Antarepolorics! Society of Washington. .................... WiuuiamM H. GILBERT Egioercal socievy of Washington............0.26....2..-. Hues Tuomas O’NEILL Maemical society of Washington. ......2..-......0....5.. GEORGE W. IRVING, JR. Entomological Society of WCisicie OMe yen ee koe ne nla F. W. Poos Mime cosrapiic SOclety....... 2.2) .5.6..65 62s el ALEXANDER WETMORE ematedoeciety of Washington..... 2. ... 2.2... eee A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................. FREDERICK O. CoE hain hstorical DOCICLY.. 622... 0. eee ee ee eee GILBERT H. GROSVENOR Bomueal sociehy of Washington.................. 6.2.5. -64 Harry A. BorTHWICK Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... GEORGE F. GRAVATT Meritimranoocicty Of HMPINeers. 2... 6. le ee ee eee C. A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers..ARNoLD H. Scott Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers Ricuarp 8. Dinu Helminthological Society of Washington...................6...... L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists.......... GLENN SLOCUM Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... FLoyp W. HovucH Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers....... HERBERT GROVE DoRSEY District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Secticn, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine N. R. Evwis Elected Members of the Board of Managers: MPT Oe. ee eee eee Sara EH. BRannam, Mitton Harris “os Vases LUG ie ns gee eee) ene ee en ae ee R. G. Bates, W. W. DIEHL 7 CADUCEUS nee Pa nara ee M. A. Mason, R. J. SEEGER Reema anmgers...............-......64 All the above officers plus the Senior Editor epee aehasiors and Associaie Editors...............0.- 4. [See front cover] Wieeeutive Committee..............---.- F. M. Serzuer (chairman), F. M. DEFANDORF, J. R. SwaLuen, H.S. RappLteyve, W. W. RuBEY Committee on Membership...... E. H. Waker (chairman), Myron S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE Cottam, C. L. Crist, JoHN Faser, ANaus M. Grirrin, D. BREESE JONES, FRANK C. Kracex, Louis R. Maxwett, A. G. McNisu, Epwarp C. REINHARD, REESE I. Saizer, Leo A. Suinn, Francis A. Smitu, Heinz Specut, Horace M. TRENT, ALFRED WEISSLER Mommenee on Meetings................. Watson Davis (chairman), JoHN W. ALDRICH, . AusTIN CuaRK, D. J. Davis Committee on Monographs (W. N. FENTON, chairman): ETRE ic es te eee ee Dk aa ee S. F. Buaxs, F. C. Kracrex J DASE ME I ee eee W.N. Fenton, ALAN STONE Seeenmeary 1950... 6... ee ee ee es G. ARTHUR CoopPER, JAMES I. HOFFMAN Commiitee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (A. V. ASTIN, general chairman): For Biological Sciences...... HERBERT FRIEDMANN (chairman), Harry A. Bortu- Wick, Sara . BranuaM, [Ra B. Hansen, BENJAMIN ScowaRrtTZ, T. DALE STEWART For Engineering Sciences...... SAMUEL LrEvy (chairman), MicHaEL GOLDBERG, E. H. Kennarp, E. B. Roperts, H. M. Trent, W. A. WILDHACK For Physical Sciences...... G. B. ScHUBAUER (chairman), R. 8S. Burineton, F. C. Kracex, J. A. SANDERSON, R. J. SEEGER, J. S. WILLIAMS For Teaching of Science..M. A. Mason (chairman), F. E. Fox, Monrot H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research............... Karu F. HerzFeLp (chairman), Hersert N. Eaton, L. EK. Yocum Committee on Policy and Planning: Miamlootiary 1954... 2... ee te ee H. B. Coutuins, W. W. Rusey (chairman) 2 PEED DDS GS a eee ae ee Oe ae L. W. Parr, F. B. SILSBEE MUTE FONG. fe eds ea aid how bes wes fea ks E. C. CrittEnDEN, A. WETMORE Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPuHerRson, chairman): ol. BIRD Te eee cee Or ee ee J. M. Caupwe.., W. L. Scumitr ME ARON OD See eae ea ek be ae eke See es A. T. McPHerson, W. T. REApD 2 CRED e 1 BCR is RN ea ena aire ra ee AustTIN CuarkK, J. H. McMILLEen Representative on Council of A. A. A.S...........:...- she Ecce ee tie Watson Davis Committee of Auditors....... Louise M. Russet (chairman), R. 8. Diu, J. B. REESIDE Committee of Tellers...... C. L. GarRNneER (chairman), L. G. Henpest, Myrna F. JONES CONTENTS Page Mycotocy.—Three new species of Conidiobolus isolated from leaf mold): (CHARLES DDRRCHSEER : : 2!) . 4 svececee om - ev ys ee te 29 Botany.—The species of Pittosporum in Formosa. Hvui-Lin Li...... 43 EntomMoLocy.—The Diptera collected on the Cockerell and Hubbell Expeditions to Honduras: Part II, Asilidae. Maurice T.Jamus.. 46 ZooLoGy.—l'wo new species of Hulamnadia from Maryland and Virginia (Crustacea: Conchostraca). N. T. Marrox. >. ...5..0 eee SFE PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY...... ae leer oibleds 6 Witte ta, as ee 60 OBITUARIES: Paul Felix Neményi; Edwin F. Wendt................. 62 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. Vou. 43 Marca 1953 No. 3 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS J. P. E. Morrison U.8. NATIONAL MUSEUM JOHN C. EwrErs R. K. Coox U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. CHacs, JR. EvBert L. LItTt1e4, JR. ZOOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrmMan Puitie DRUCKER CHEMISTRY ANTHROPOLOGY Dean B. Cowi1E PHYSICS Davip H. DUNKLE GEOLOGY ALAN STONE ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount RoraLt & GuiItrorD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate): Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 ‘pp: 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3 .25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 — 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26 .00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Harautp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year..........--.<-0:+.=eneeeeeee $7 .50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10; inel.—not available*....... =... 2% —_— _ Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 42, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $356.00. Monocgrapu No. 1, ‘““The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann. $4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete...........................05. $25.00 Single volumes; unbound)’. (aie... st. Sk Bee es Single numbers..255- . 2 2) ache cos ke oko ake aahore tees = een .25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and ate to the Treasurer, H.S. RappLere, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12, D.C. Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Won. 43 March 1953 INOS PALEONTOLOGY .—Jedria, a new subgenus of Naticopsis!. Etuis L. YocHELson, U. S. Geological Survey. (Communicated by G. Arthur Cooper.) While I was working with Dr. J. Brookes Knight and others on the Paleozoic Gastrop- oda section of the T'reatise on invertebrate paleontology, it became evident that clarifi- cation of the generic conception of Nati- copsis, together with the proposal of one new subgenus, would be desirable before publication of the treatise. The following discussion is intended to provide the needed clarification: Naticopsis (Jedria) Yochelson, n. subg. Genotype: Naticopsis meeki Knight, 1933 (p. 3/3). Neritiform shells with subsutural shoulders at ephebic stage. Neanic stages moderately high spired, having evenly rounded, unornamented whorls; mature whorl profile showing a_ sub- sutural shoulder followed by a very gently con- cave slope to a ventricose swelling at the periph- ery; shoulders of some species ornamented with strong transverse lirae. In 1933, Knight (p. 363) informally proposed the group of Naticopsis ventrica (Norwood and— Pratten), which included that species, the geno- type species of Jedria, and Naticopsis scintilla Girty. Among European species, the subgenus appears to include Naitcopsis placida (Koninck) and N. plicisiria (Phillips) from the Lower Car- boniferous, and N. subcostata (Archiac and Ver- neuil) from the Middle Devonian. One specimen, figured by Kittl as Naticopsis (Hologyra) declivis (1894, pl. 4, fig. 14), from the Triassic of Austria, is doubtfully referred to this subgenus. The genus Naticopsis as recognized in the Paleozoic includes those gastropods with anom- phalous shells that have straight, obliquely back- ward outer lips. A parietal inductura more or less extended in the plane of the aperture is always present. Ontogenetic changes in species are so 1 Publication authorized by the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. extreme that juveniles cannot be identified with adults except on the basis of growth series. The genus considered broadly includes species of var- ious shapes. Although these intergrade they ap- pear to group themselves around several major types which here are considered subgenera. At least four of these are recognized. Naticopsis (Jedria) as proposed above con- tains those relatively high spired shells that de- velop a subsutural whorl shoulder at maturity. Naticopsis (Planospirina) Kittl (1899, p. 48) in- cludes relatively low spired shells that have smoothly rounded whorls, but with the final whorl turning obliquely downward. Naticopsis (Naticopsis) McCoy (1844, p. 33) is restricted to those species of Naticopsis that have moder- ately low spired shells with a mammary apex above a smoothly rounded profile. Naticopsis (Marmolatella) Kittl (1894, p. 142) includes low spired shells having the upper whorl surface flat and extending outward. The subgenera Plano- spirina and Marmolatella both have Triassic genotypes and have not been used commonly in the literature on Paleozoic Neritacea. Fedavella Kittl (1894, p. 139), another name based on a Triassic genotype, seems to be a synonym of Naticopsis s:s. REFERENCES Kirti, E. Die triadischen Gastropoden der Marmo- lata und verwandter Fundstellen in den weissen Riffkalken Stidtirols. Jahrb. K.K. geol. Reich- enstalt 34: 99-182, pls. 1-6. 1894. . Die Gastropoden der Esinokalke nebst einer Revision der Gastropoden der Marmolatakalke. Ann. K.K. naturh. Hofmuseums 14: 1-237, pls. 4-6. 1899. Knicut, J. B. The gastropods of the St. Lowis, Missouri, Pennsylvanian outlier: VI. The Ner- itidae. Journ. Pal. 7: (4): 359-392, pls. 40-46. 1933. McCoy, F. A synopsis of the characters of the Car- boniferous limestone fossils of Ireland, pp. 5- 207, pls. 1-29. Dublin, 1844. | F MAR 3.9 1953 66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 3 PALEONTOLOGY .—Cardiniferella, 1. gen., the type of a new family of Carbon- iferous Ostracoda. 1. G. Soun,! U.S. Geological Survey. (Communicated by J.S. Williams.) The upper part of the Helms formation ot western Texas contains an abundant ostra- code fauna both in the limestones and in the interbedded shales (Sohn, 1950). These faunules, according to present-day knowl- edge, closely resemble the Chester ostra- codes described by Cooper (1941) from Illinois. The new genus described here is restricted to the limestone beds, where it is relatively abundant as silicified specimens in insoluble residues resulting from digestion with hydrochloric acid. It has a ‘‘kirkbyan pit,” a character that would place this genus in the family Kirkbyidae, were it not lacking the marginal rims that characterize genera in this family. The hingement in Cardinife- rella is hitherto unrecorded in the Ostracoda. Two recently published papers emphasize the variation and consequently the impor- tance of hingement in the classification of fossil ostracodes. Levinson (1950) analyzes the hingements of several Paleozoic genera. He illustrates the hinge elements of Ulrichia bituberculata (McCoy) (p. 70, figs. 8a, b); this species 1s probably not a true Ulrichia, but it illustrates the hinge elements of some Kirkbyidae. Triebel (1950) analyzes the hingement of several post-Paleozoic genera, and defines (p. 313) the following types of hingement: Merodent, only one valve dentate. Amphidont, both valves with one or more hinge teeth. Because Basslerella Kellett, 1935, from rocks of late Paleozoic age, has a merodont dentition Triebel assumes (pp. 313-314) that amphidont dentition developed from merodont. The relatively advanced amphi- dont hingement described in this paper does not shed any light on this assumption, be- cause Triebel deals with genera in the family Cytheridae (suborder Podocopa). This paper deals with a new family that is in the same higher group as the Kirkbyidae, which probably belongs to a different suborder. It is premature to speculate regarding the phylogenetic relationship and evolution of 1 Publication authorized by the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. the different types of dentition found in Ostracoda because the dentition of many Paleozoic genera has not as yet been worked out and because there are all too many un- described genera that probably contain im- portant clues to the development of the Ostracoda. The writer is grateful to Arthur L. Bow- sher, U. 8. Geological Survey, for making available the insoluble residues of his col- lections from the Helms formation of Texas, in which the new genus occurs, and to Dr. C. C. Branson, University of Oklahoma, Norman, Okla., who collected additional material at the type locality. CARDINIFERELLIDAE Sohn, n. fam. Straight-backed reticulated marine ostracodes with “kirkbyan pit” and amphidont hinge. This family differs from Kirkbyidae in hinge- ment and in the absence of marginal ridges. Tomiella Spizharsky (1937, pp. 148-146, 166) differs from the Kirkbyidae in not having mar- ginal ridges, but it does not belong in the Car- diniferellidae because of its simple hinge. Cardiniferella Sohn, n. gen. Type species: C. bowshert, n. sp. Subovate, straight-hinged ostracodes, lateral surface reticulate, except for smooth marginal area. Hinge incised, amphidont. Overlap slight, marginal area of one valve grooved to receive smaller valve. Muscle scar pit subcentrally lo- cated. This genus differs from all previously de- scribed genera in hingement. Amphissites has a somewhat similar hingement in that the larger valve overlaps the accommodation groove at the ends and fits into terminal sockets that open to the outside, but the grooved or smaller valve does not have terminal teeth, thus resulting in a merodont hingement. The same features dis- tinguish the cardiniferelloid hinge from the san- sabelloid (Kloedenellidae) hinge, and from the hinges of several late Paleozoic genera placed in Leperditellidae. Cardiniferella bowsheri Sohn, n. sp. Figs. 1-12 Subovate in lateral view; dorsal and ventral Marcu 1953 SOHN: A NEW FAMILY OF OSTRACODA 67 11 12 » Figs. 1-12.—Cardiniferella bowsheri Sohn, n. gen., n. sp.: 1, 2, Left and anterior views of paratype U.S.N.M. 118306 from U.S.N.M. loc. 3069-2 (note smooth area where reticulations were abraided, and anterior tooth of right valve); 3, 4, right and dorsal views of holotype, U.S.N.M. 118307 from U.S.G.S8. loc. 10889 (3, because the specimen is tilted backward, the pit appears on the photograph to be farther towards the posterior than it actually is; 41s oriented with anterior to the left); 5, 6, ventral and dorsal views of a smooth specimen, paratype U.S.N.M. 118308 from U.S.N.M. loc. 3070-2 (5 is oriented with anterior to left, 6 with anterior to right); 7-12, dorsal, lateral, and interior views of opposing valves of a carapace that was opened for the purpose of illustrating the hingement (7-9, left valve, 10-12, right valve, paratype U.S.N.M. 118309 from U.S.N.M. loc. 3070-2; note reflection of muscle scar pit on in- side of Fig. 12; the anterior cardinal portion of fig. 10 is broken). (Magnification approx. X30) 68 JOURNAL OF margins straight, subparallel. End margins curved, greatest curvature of anterior margin lower than that of posterior. Lateral surface reticulated, marginal areas and dorsum non- reticulated. Oval “kirkbyan pit” located anterior to midlength and slightly below midheight. Hingement incised, amphidont, consists of an accommodation groove in the smaller valve ter- minated by rounded, tenonlike teeth that are bounded by sockets that open to the outside. The dorsal edge of the overlapping valve termi- nated by accommodating mortiselike sockets that ‘are open dorsally; these are flanked by terminal teeth that consist of an enlargement of the over- lapping portion of the larger valve. The over- lapping valve has a groove along the marginal area to receive the bevelled edge of the smaller valve. This grooved zone is offset from the valve surface, resulting in a rimlike pleat on the out- side of the valve. The smaller valve has a narrow bevelled edge bordered by a thin strip that seals the closing valves. A very narrow duplicature is suggested in many specimens by a thin zone that borders the inside of the overlapping structures of both valves. Dorsal and ventral outlines sub- ovate, greatest convexity just in front of muscle scar pit. Cyathus vetustus Cooper, 1941, resembles this species in outline; it differs in the hingement and in the absence of a subcentral muscle scar pit, and it is devoid of reticulations. The preservation of many of the specimens does not show the reticulation (Figs. 5-12), but the presence of specimens with patches of the reticulations abraded (Fig. 1) indicates that the smooth forms having the characteristic outlines and hingement are conspecific with the reticu- lated forms. THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Measurements Greatest length (mm) Holotype, Figs, 8,4; U.S,N°M. U18307,..... 2 22> semen 0.81 Paratype, Figs. 1;,2,-U,. 8:N.M. 1US30B. .,.. 22. ouccmeeeeee 0.86 Paratype, Figs, 5; 6) U;SINM. 118308. . >. seer ene ey, Paratype, Fig. 8) U:S;N.M. 118309. ........... secu Beemer Paratype, Fig: 11, U:S:N-M: 118309... .3 7-0. eee 0.98 Type locality —U.S.G.S. 10889 Helms forma- tion, El Paso quadrangle, Tex., 244 miles west of Powwow Tanks, approximately 30° 50’ 17” N., 106° 04’ 40” W. Stop 13, West Texas Geol. Soc. Guidebook, Field Trip 5, 1949, and lime- stone bed 9, sec. ‘“‘C’”? West Texas Geol. Soe. Field Trip May-June 1946 (stop 1 on map ac- companying that trip). Coll. C. C. Branson, November 1949, A. L. Bowsher, 1948 (U.S.N.M. locality 3070-2). Distribution.—This species is abundant also in bed 11 of the same section (U.S.N.M. locality 3070-4), and at approximately the same strati- graphic level in a saddle 1.1 miles west of Pow- wow Tanks, approximately 31° 50’ 16” N., 106° 02’ 55” W. (U.S.N.M. locality 3069-2). REFERENCES Cooper, C. L. Chester ostracodes of Illinois. Ili- nois Geol. Surv. Rep. Investigations No. 77: 101 pp., 13 pls. 1941. Levinson, 8. A. The hingement of Paleozoic Os- tracoda and its bearing on orientation. Journ. Pal. 24: 63-75, 16 figs. 1950. Soun, I. G., Comparison of etched silicified ostra- codes from limestone with calcareous forms from subjacent shale. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 61 (12): pt. 2, 1504 (abs.). 1950. SpIzHARSKY, T. N. Ostracoda from the Kolchugino series of the coal-bearing strata of the Kuznetsk Basin. Trans. Central Geol. and Prosp. Inst., fase. 97: 1389-171 (Russ., Engl. Summ.), 2 figs., ipl 1937 TRIEBEL, Ericu. Homéomorphe Ostracoden-Gat- tungen. Senckenbergiana 31: 313-330. 1950. BOTAN Y.—Some new combinations in Guatemalan Bromeliaceae. LYMAN B. SMITH, Department of Botany, U.S. National Museum. The following new combinations are neces- sary preliminary to the publication of the Bromeliaceae in a projected part of the Flora of Guatemala by Standley and Steyermark. Tillandsia elongata H. B. K. var. subimbricata (Baker) L. B. Smith, comb. nov. Tillandsia subimbricata Baker, Journ. Bot. 25: 304. 1887. In 1889 André (Brom. Andr. 96) indicated that he did not consider Tillandsia subimbricata specifically distinct from T’. elongata, although he failed to make any combination for it. Subse- quent collections have shown a series of inter- gradations that amply justify André’s opinion. Tillandsia tricolor Schlecht. & Cham. var. melano- crater (L. B. Smith) L. B. Smith, comb. nov. Tillandsia melanopus E. Morr. ex Mez. in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 680. 1896, in large part but not as to type. Tillandsia melanocrater L. B. Smith, Contr. Gray Herb. 117: 31. 1937. VOL. 43, NO. 3 Marcu 1953 When first proposed on the basis of a few col- lections this taxon seemed easily distinguishable from Tillandsia tricolor. However, recent collec- tions from Guatemala break down all distinctions except the highly artificial one of size. It seems best, therefore, to regard T. melanopus as a Central American variety of the Mexican T’. tricolor. WIRTH AND BLANTON: PANAMA CULICOIDES 69 Vriesia montana (L. B. Smith) L. B. Smith & Pittendrigh, comb. nov. Thecophyllum montanum LL. B. Smithin Yuncker, Field Mus. Publ. Bot. 17: 319. 1938. The validity of the genus Thecophyllum will be discussed in detail in a later paper by Dr. C. S. Pittendrigh and myself, but the above combina- tion must be made now. ENTOMOLOGY .—Studies in Panama Culicoides (Diptera: Heleidae): 1, Descrip- tions of six new species.1 WiLLIs W. WrirTH? and FRANKLIN 8. BLANTON.? (Communicated by Curtis W. Sabrosky.) This paper is the first of a short series to bring up to date our taxonomic knowledge of the Panama species of biting midges of the genus Culicoides Latreille. In 1951 the junior author began a comprehensive survey of the biting Diptera of Panama. It soon be- came apparent that the large numbers of both male and female Culicoides which were collected in the traps in use for this survey would afford an unexcelled opportunity for a taxonomic study. The senior author, with a great taxonomic interest in the Heleidae, and advantageously located at the U. S. National Museum, where the types of a number of Neotropical species of Culicoides are located, was therefore invited to join in a cooperative study. Our efforts were greatly stimulated by the recent appearance of several important pa- pers on the Caribbean biting midges of this genus, including papers by Barbosa (1947), Fox (1946, 1947), Macfie (1948), and Ortiz (1950, 1951). All these authors have pre- sented keys for the identification of the Caribbean species. With the great amount of descriptive work concurrently going on, how- ever, keys are out of date almost as soon as published. Nevertheless, they are invaluable as working tools, and in a later paper of this series we will present a key to the Panama species. | Our terminology is the same as that em- 1 Published under the auspices of the Surgeon General, U. S. Army, who does not necessarily assume responsibility for the professional opinions expressed by the authors. 7 Entomologist, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, Agricultural Research Admin- istration, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Wash- ington, D. C. 3 Lieutenant Colonel, MSC, U. 8. Army Carib- bean, Fort Clayton, Canal Zone. ployed by Wirth (1952), where a more com- plete description of terms can be found. The most important difference between our usage and that of some other Culicoides workers is in our designation of the wing veins and cor- responding cells according to Tillyard’s mod- ification of the Comstock-Needham system; thus veins Cu, and Cup of older workers be- come Ms3.4 and Cuy, respectively, and cell Cu, becomes cell My, (labeled in Fig. 2). Length is measured in relaxed specimens from the anterior edge of the mesonotum to the tip of the abdomen; a more reliable measurement is the wing length, which along with the costal ratio is measured from the basal arculus. Body measurements, anten- nal and palpal proportions, and descriptions of male genitalia are obtained from speci- mens cleared in pure phenol and mounted on slides in phenol-balsam mixture after gradual infiltration. By this method dried specimens can be relaxed and cleared, and the refractive index of the phenol-balsam brings out the minute details of the antennal and palpal sensoria, the female spermathecae, and the internal structures of the male genitalia. In the following descriptions no special men- tion is made of the rudimentary third sper- matheca and sclerotized ring of the female internal reproductive organs, as they are present in all Neotropical species that we have studied. To our knowledge Ortiz (1951) was the first to show the presence of the dense tufts of short, curved setae around the margins of disciform, hyaline sensoria at the apices of certain antennal segments. We have made a comparative study of them in our species with very promising results. These tufts are always present on the third (first flagellar) 70 JOURNAL OF THE segment, occasionally on segments 4— or 6-7, nearly always on 8, 9, and 10, but only rarely on the five distal segments except in the species with the second anterior radial cell ina light area, where they appear on some or all of these segments. The types of our new species are deposited in the collection of the U. 8. National Mu- seum in Washington. Unless otherwise indi- cated, all specimens were collected by the junior author in light traps. We wish es- pecially to acknowledge the generous as- sistance of Irving Fox, John Lane, and Ig- nacio Ortiz-Cordero in making comparisons of species or furnishing valuable opinions on certain species, and for supplying specimens for comparative study. P. A. Woke and L. E. Rozeboom furnished Panama material for study, including some specimens from series which in part formed the type series of new species described by Fox (1947) and Barbosa (1947). We also gratefully acknowl- edge the assistance rendered by Col. Francis P. Kintz, Surgeon, and Lt. Col. Edward J. Dehne, Chief of Preventive Medicine, United States Army Caribbean, as well as personnel of the 25th Preventive Medicine Survey De- tachment. Culicoides uniradialis Wirth and Blanton, n. sp. Fig. 1, a-d 2. Length 1.1 mm, wing 1.1 mm by 0.4 mm. Head pruinose dark grayish brown; eyes broadly separated, bare. Antennae with flagellar segments in proportion of 25:22:22:22:20:20: 20 :20:20:20:20:20:30, all except apices of seg- ments 3-10 pale, remainder dark; distal sensory tufts on segments 3, 8, 9, 10. Palpal segments (Fig. 1, b) in proportion of 10:20:27:10:10, third segment very slightly swollen, with a small shal- low sensory pit. Mesonotum rather narrow, color uniform light tawny brown, with numerous short, appressed, yellowish hairs; scutellum concolorous with meso- notum. Postscutellum dark pruinose_ brown, pleura pale with transverse median area darker. Legs brown, subapical rings on femora, bases and » apices of mid and hind tibiae, and distal tarsal segments on all legs, pale. Wing (Fig. 1, a) with anterior radial cells not separated, the single cell long and narrow; costa to 0.75-0.8 of wing length; macrotrichia entirely absent. Wing predominantly pale yellowish, with faint, grayish, irregular bands: anterior radial WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, No. 3 cell pale except where covered by second dark wing band from a fourth of the way to halfway to apex. First dark wing band at proximal fourth of wing from costa to anterior media, interrupted and appearing again on base of vein Mzi, + Cu. Second band across second fourth of anterior radial cell taking in base of medial fork, inter- rupted and appearing again across basal half of mediocubital fork. Third band beginning as an oblique, dark mark across middle of cell R; from wing margin near apex of cell, broadening toward vein M, and extending along this vein and forming a broad dark mark in front of its apex; continuing broadly across middle of cells M, and M, to apex of vein Mai; and following vein M, also to apex. Halteres pale. Abdomen brown; spermathecae two, small, subequal and pyriform in shape. Male genitalia (Fig. 1, c, d). Ninth sternite very short with very shallow mesal excavation, the membrane bare; ninth tergite short, quadrate, with very small, widely separated, apicolateral processes. Basistyles stout, ventral roots stout and boat-hook shaped, dorsal roots not so long and rather stout; dististyles nearly straight, gradually tapered to tips which are blunt and not bent. Aedeagus short and stout, basal arms stout and forming anterior arch to half of total length; apex stout and rounded with faint ser- rations and apparently a few appressed, sharp, flattened, subapical spines. Parameres (Fig. 1, c) with bases knobbed; stems curved gently, each with ventral pouch about one-and-one-half times as long as its diameter, distal portions narrowed, tapered to sharp apical points with three or four subapical lateral barbs. Holotype @, allotype, Mojinga Swamp, Fort Sherman, Canal Zone, October 24, 1951, F. S$ Blanton (light trap) (type no. 61497, U.S.N.M.). Paratypes: 12 #o, 54 2 2, same data as type; 20°0,2 2 2, Loma Boracha, C. Z., October 29, 1951. Apparently related to the next species, kintzi n.sp., which it superficially resembles in its uni- formly tawny yellow color, wings with costa elongated, the apex in a light area, and the dark markings of the wing reduced, diffuse, and in cell R;, oblique. However, according to the male genitalia these species probably belong to dif- ferent groups, since in wniradialis the ventral roots are boat-hook shaped and the parameres have a ventral pouch and distal barbs, all these being lacking in kintzt. The other known species, with few exceptions, which have the second Marcu 1953 WIRTH AND BLANTON: PANAMA CULICOIDES Al b ; Cc SUGAREPENTER| Fig. 1.—Culicoides uniradialis: a, Female wing; b, female palpus; c, male parameres; d, male genitalia, parameres removed. Fie. 2.—Culicoides kintzi: a, Female wing, with important veins labeled; 6, female palpus; c, male parameres; d, male genitalia. Fic. 3.—Culicoides carpenteri: a, Female wing: b, mesonotal pattern; c, female palpus; d, male parameres; e, male genitalia. 72 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES anterior radial cell in a light spot belong to the well defined pulicaris or guttatus groups with characteristic and greatly different male genitalia, usually contiguous eyes and distal, sensory tufts on some or all of the last five antennal segments. Culicoides kintzi Wirth and Blanton, n. sp. Fig. 2, a-d 2. Length 1.0 mm, wing 0.9 mm by 0.4 mm. Head dark brown; eyes broadly separated, bare. Antennae with flagellar segments in propor- tion“of 20215 1o1Sela-toslostioe tole sel ee 26, distal sensory tufts on segments 3, 8, 9, and 10. Palpal segments (Fig. 2, b) in proportion of 8:12:22:8:8, third segment moderately swollen with a small, shallow sensory pit. Mesonotum rather narrow, color uniform dull brown, three very faintly indicated narrow, darker, longitudinal lines from level of humeral pits to scutellum, the latter concolorous with mesonotum. Postscutellum and pleura dark brown. Legs brown; femora with subapical, tibiae with sub-basal, narrow pale rings and mid and hind tibiae with apices broadly pale. Wing (Fig. 2, a) with two complete anterior radial cells, both rather narrow; costa extending to 0.7 wing length; sparse macrotrichiae on distal third of wing. Wing markings practically the same as those of wniradialis n. sp., but only the tip of second anterior radial cell in a pale area; pale markings of wing predominant, but not to the degree found in uniradialis. Halteres pale. Abdomen dark brown; spermathecae two, sub- equal, pyriform. Male genitalia (Fig. 2, c, d). Ninth sternite short, with very shallow mesal excavation, the membrane bare; ninth tergite short and broad with very long, slender, apicolateral processes and a distinct mesal cleft at apex. Basistyles stout, ventral roots wedge shaped, the sharp points nearly meeting mesad, the dorsal roots shorter, curved and stout; dististyles slightly curved, gradually tapered to stout, blunt apices. Aedeagus stocky, with basal arms abruptly bent; distal portion stout, tapered to a bluntly rounded apex. Parameres (Fig. 2, c) with bases knobbed, stems very slender, abruptly curved just before basal fourth, the following portions slghtly sinuate, abruptly bent at middle, the distal halves gradually tapered to slender, needlelike, simple points. Holotype @, allotype, Mojinga Swamp, Fort Sherman, Canal Zone, October 24, 1951, F. 8. Blanton (light trap) (type no. 61498, U.S.N.M.). VOL. 43, NO. 3 Paratypes: 8 @o@, 42 9 2, same data except dates August 28 to November 28, 1951. This species is superficially very similar to uniradialis n. sp., but is readily distinguished from it by the two completely formed radial cells, shorter costa, macrotrichiae at wing tips, and in the male, by the long apicolateral processes of the ninth tergite, slender, simple parameres, aedeagus with short basal arch and by the shape of the dorsal and ventral roots of the basistyles. Culicoides pachymerus Lutz, described from Ama- zonas, Brazil, appears to be closely related in the general wing pattern and in the shapes of the anterior radial cells, but the description is too scanty to make a close comparison. In pachy- merus, however, the dark wing markings are more extensive and the fore and hind tibiae are said to be greatly swollen. We dedicate this species to Col. Francis B. Kintz, Surgeon of the U.S. Army Caribbean, whose cooperation made this study possible. Culicoides carpenteri Wirth and Blanton, n. sp. Fig. 3; a=e 2. Length 1 mm, wing 1.0 mm by 0.45 mm. Head brown, eyes narrowly separated, bare. Antennae with flagellar segments in proportion of 20:15:18:18:18:18:18:18 :730:30:35:402ou: distal sensory tufts on segments 3, 11, 12, 13, 14. Palpal segments (Fig. 3, c) in proportion of 10:40:30:12:12, third segment scarcely swollen, with broad, shallow, sensory pit near apex. Mesonotum (Fig. 3, 6) elongate; color tawny yellowish brown, anterior portion except humeri darker brown and a fine median line and a sub- lateral pair of broader longitudinal bands of brown extending caudad to about middle of mesonotum. Scutellum dark in middle; post- scutellum and pleura dark brown. Legs dark brown, femora with basal and subapical, tibiae with sub-basal and hind tibiae with apical, rather wide, pale bands. Wing (Fig. 3, a) with anterior radial cells complete, narrow; costa to 0.6 of wing length; macrotiichia very sparse, appearing only on distal fourth of wing in cells R;, Mi, and M,. Wing predominantly pale, a very dark, blackish, stig- mal spot over second anterior radial cell and distal third of first; diffuse dark patches on wing just proximad of broad pale area around cross- vein r-m, over vein M3,,, Cu; midway between base and fork, halfway across cell R; behind stigmal spot, across middle of distal half of cell R; and continued along vein M; to wing tip Marcu 1953 forming an oval pale spot at apex of cell R; at wing margin; narrowly at medial fork and across basal half of mediocubital fork and subapically across cell M,; and Me, cutting off semicircular, apical spots in these cells at wing margin. Halteres pale. Abdomen whitish on basal half above, light brown elsewhere; spermathecae two, slightly un- equal, ovoid to slightly pyriform, the bases of the ducts sclerotized for a distance of a fourth of length of spermathecae. Male genitalia (fig. 3, d, e). Ninth sternite short with shallow mesal excavation, the posterior membrane bare; ninth tergite tapered to a pair of broadly separated, triangular apicolateral proc- esses. Basistyles with ventral roots large and boat-hook shaped, their apices nearly touching mesad, dorsal roots nearly as long, slender; dis- tistyles slightly curved, slender, with slightly enlarged, pointed apices. Aedeagus with basal arch rounded, extending to two-thirds of total length, the very short distal portion broad with truncated apex. Parameres (Fig. 3, d) with knobbed bases, rather stout stems bent at about half their lengths, each with a distoventral pouch of same. diameter as stem and about 1.5 times as long; apical portions about half the diameter of stems, tapered to pointed apices and each with a subapical fringe of about a dozen very fine hairs. Holotype 2, Madden Dam, Canal Zone, June 6, 1951, F. S. Blanton (light trap) (type no. 61500, U.S.N.M.). Allotype, Mojinga Swamp, Fort Sherman, C. Z., December 10, 1951. Para- types: 16 2 2, same data as holotype; 24 ° 9, same data as allotype, except dates August 15 to December 10, 1951; 1 2, Loma Boracha, C. Z., October 23, 1951: 2 2 9, Fort Sherman, C. Z., fume 7, 1951; 1 9°, Barro Colorado Island, January-March 1944, J. Zetek. The Barro Colorado Island specimen was in- cluded by Barbosa as a paratype of panamensis, which however, is a much different species, with a light spot straddling vein M, of the wing. C. carpenteri might be confused with pale specimens of galindoi n. sp., but by microscopic examination of the female palpi and male genitalia the two species may readily be separated. We are pleased to have the opportunity to name this species in honor of Col. Stanley J. Carpenter, formerly entomologist for the U. 8. Army Caribbean, whose interest in the Panama Culicoides problem gave great impetus to this project. WIRTH AND BLANTON: PANAMA CULICOIDES le Culicoides galindoi Wirtb and Blanton, n. sp. Fig. 4, a-f 2. Length 1.0 mm, wing 0.9 mm by 0.38 mm. Head brown; eyes contiguous, bare. Antennae with flagellar segments in proportion of 20:15: LS ko lo 2ocZoeo) a0 405 distal sen= sory tufts on segments 3, 7, 8, 9, 10. Palpal segments (Fig. 4, c) in proportion of 10:20:20:8: 10, third segment slightly swollen, with well developed subapical sensory pit. Mesonotum (Fig. 4, b) rich brown, on anterior half with extensive pruinose yellowish brown markings; principally a large pair of submedian patches and two sublateral pairs of smaller spots; posterior half almost entirely pale; scutellum dark in middle. Postscutellum and pleura dark brown, almost black. Legs dark brown, fore and mid femora with subapical, and all tibiae with subbasal, narrow pale rings. Wing (Fig. 4, a) nearly bare, sparse macro- trichia distad of level from end of costa to end of vein M3.:; anterior radial cells short, complete, costa to 0.6 of wing length. Second anterior radial cell and distal half of first included in a very dark spot; a very light spot over r-m crossvein from anterior wing margin to level of anterior media; a double light spot in cell Rs at end of costa, a very large rounded light spot at apex of cell R;, broadly meeting wing margin and usually continued along it a little way toward wing tip; two long light spots in cell M,, the second broadly meeting wing margin; base of cell M; with continuous light streak to transverse dark band at level of end of vein M3.4 and a broad apical light spot at wing margin; base of anal cell pale and a large double light spot at apex. Halteres pale. Abdomen dull, brownish black; spermathecae two, subequal, pyriform (Fig. 4, d). Male genitalia (Fig. 4, e, f). Ninth sternite very short, with shallow mesal excavation, the membrane spiculate; ninth tergite short and strongly tapered, with very short, triangular, apicolateral processes. Basistyles stout, dorsal roots slender, ventral roots longer and boat-hook shaped; their apices contiguous mesad; dististyles slender, with curved, pointed apices. Aedeagus with strong basal arch, the basal arms slender and curved, apex a short, rounded lobe. Parameres (Fig. 4, e) with crooked, knobbed bases, the stems slender and slightly sinuate, the apices abruptly recurved ventrad, each with three. subapical lateral barbs. 74 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Holotype @, allotype, Mojinga Swamp, Fort Sherman, Canal Zone, October 24, 1951; F. S. Blanton (light trap) (type no. 61501, U.S.N.M.). Paratypes: 26 oo’, 88 9 9, same data as types, except dates August 15 to October 24, 1951; 1 9, Cerro Campafia, Panama Prov., July 3, 1951; 1 9%, Pacora, Panama Prov., June 4, 1951; 2 @o’, 1 9, Madden Dam, C. Z., Sep- tember 21, 1951; 1 @, Arraijan, Panama Prov., August 8, 1951; 9 #0, 13 9 2, Loma Boracha, C. Z., October 29, 1951. Culicoides limai Barretto, from Sao Paulo, Brazil, is very similar but has a small ventral lobe on the male parameres, the basal arch of the aedeagus is narrower, the mesonotum has only a pair of small, anterior, sublateral pale patches; the scutellum is dark on the extreme ends as well as in the middle, and the tibiae have sub- apical pale bands on the fore and mid legs and at the bases and apices of the hind pair. From the original description, woke: Fox might be confused with galindoi, but Fox’s species is larger, the mesonotum has a faintly mottled pattern of punctiform dots and the wing is nearly bare with the markings very faint and diffuse. This species is named in honor of Dr. Pedro Galindo, of the Gorgas Memorial Laboratory, one of the leaders of the Panamanian Republic in the work on Diptera of medical importance. Culicoides vargasi Wirth and Blanton, n. sp. Fig. 5, a-e 2. Length 1.0 mm, wing 0.9 mm by 0.42 mm. Head pruinose dark brown; eyes nearly con- tiguous, bare. Antennae with flagellar segments Ine PLOportiony Ol a2 alae 2 ee) 22:25:28:36, distal sensory tufts on segments 3 and 7-10. Palpal segments (Fig. 5, c) in propor- tion of 8:12:25:9:11, third segment swollen with a broad, shallow, subapical, sensory pit. Mesonotum (Fig. 5, 6) dark brown, with promi- nent pattern of large, pruinose gray patches, including a large, contiguous, quadrate pair in middle before suture, a pair of rounded spots over humeral pits, three pairs of rounded, lateral spots and quadrate prescutellar sensory areas margined with gray. Scutellum gray, brown in middle. Legs brown, femora with subapical and tibiae with subbasal pale bands, hind tibiae with apices broadly pale. Wing (Fig. 5, a) with anterior radial cells normal, short; costa to 0.6 of wing length; macro- trichia very sparse and in rows over distal third of wing, a few in anal cell. Prominent yellow VOL. 43, NO. 3 spots on anterior wing margin at wing base and over r-m crossvein, the latter spot extending to slightly behind anterior media, the area between these two spots and a stigmal spot over second anterior radial cell and distal half of first very dark. Cell R; with two hourglass-shaped, trans- verse light spots, the first Just past end of costa, often divided into two s2parate, round spots, the second midway between this one and wing tip, both broadly meeting wing margin; cell R; also with two linear pale spots on anterior side of vein M,, the first one short, midway between pale spot over r-m crossvein and one at end of costa, the second extending between posterior ends of the two, anterior pale spots in cell R;. Apices of veins M, and My, pale margined; a prominent light spot straddling middle of vein M,; small, rounded, submarginal light spots in cells M; and M.; cell Mz. also with a large light spot behind medial fork and a small light spot just in front of mediocubital fork; veins M3.4 and Cu, entirely pale margined, the latter broadly so, the former broadly connected to a large light spot in cell M, which broadly meets wing margin midway of cell, anal cell with basal pale spot connected to pale areas at base of cell M. and with a single, round light spot just behind mediocubital fork. Halteres pale. Abdomen dark brown; spermathecae two, sub- equal, pyriform. Male genitalia (Fig. 5, d, e). Ninth sternite with broad, deep, mesal excavation, the posterior membrane bare; ninth tergite long and tapered, the apicolateral processes short and triangular. Basistyles with ventral roots long, curved and slender, with small caudal hook; dorsal roots almost as long; dististyles slender and slightly curved. Aedeagus with basal arms broadly sepa- rate to two-thirds of total length, the fork angular, a pair of short, bladelike processes on caudal side of shoulders of basal arms; distal portion slender, with rounded apex with faint serrations. Parameres (Fig. 5, d) with large basal knobs, stems slender and nearly straight, abruptly recurved at distal three-fifths with apices nar- rowed and each bearing a fringe of 4-5 sharp spines and a strong, bent, distal spine. Holotype @, allotype, Las Tablas, Los Santos Prov., Panama, June 14, 1951, F. S. Blanton (light trap) (type no. 61502, U.S.N.M.). Para- types: 9 oo, 10 9 2, same data as type; 12 707,59 2 2, Mojinga Swamp, Fort Sherman, C. Z., August 28, 1951 to January 1952; 1 o&, Rio Hato, Cocle Prov., September 24, 1951. Marcu 1953 WIRTH AND BLANTON: PANAMA CULICOIDES ~I Or 4. GALINDO| SN NN ae RN ae oe <= SV iG | SSS > = Ss Ssh 6.MAGNIPALPIS Fic. 4.—Culicoides galindoi: a, Female wing; b, mesonotal pattern; c, female palpus; d, female sper- mathecae; e, male parameres; f, male genitalia. Fig. 5.—Culicoides vargasi: a, Female wing; ), mesonotal pattern; c, female palpus; d, male parameres; e, male genitalia. Fia. 6.—Culicoides magni- palpis: a, Female wing; b, female palpus; c, female spermathecae; d, male parameres; e, male genitalia. 76 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Other material examined: VENEZUELA, 3 oA, 11 9 ¢, Ocumare del Tuy, May 28, 1951, I. Ortiz. This species is the Neotropical counterpart of bauert Hoffman, which it very closely resembles. In bauert, described from Maryland, there is only one pale line bordering the anterior side of vein M,, this located directly behind the light spot at the end of the costa; the hind femora lack the subapical pale rings and the hind tibiae lack the apical pale bands; the pit on the third palpal segment is small and deep and the spermathecae are subspherical. There are, however, no im- portant differences in the male genitalia. We dedicate this species to Dr. Luis Vargas, of the Instituto de Salubridad y Enfermedades Tropi- cales, México, D. F., México, a very enthusiastic and esteemed worker on Neotropical Culicoides. Culicoides magnipalpis Wirth and Blanton, n. sp. Fig. 6, a-e 9. Length 1.1 mm, wing 1.0 mm by 0.48 mm. Head dark brown; eyes bare. Antennae with flagellar segments in proportion of 20:15:18:20: 20:20 :20:20:25:25:25:30:40, distal sensory tufts on segments 3 and 11-15. Palpal segments (Fig. 6, 6) in proportion of 10:20:30:8:7, third segment remarkably bulbously swollen with broad, deep, sensory pit on distal half. Mesonotum tawny yellowish brown, a faint, contiguous pair of lighter yellowish, oval, sub- median spots on disc; humeral corners with a small pair of whitish spots; area between these and sensory pits blackish; scutellum tawny, slightly darker in middle. Postscutellum and pleura blackish, the latter pale on upper half. Legs dark brown, femora with subapical and tibiae with subbasal, narrow pale rings, distal tarsal segments pale. Wing (Fig. 6, a) with anterior radial cells complete: costa to 0.6 of wing length: macro- trichia long and numerous, extending to base of wing except in basal cell. Anterior margin of wing with yellowish spots at wing base, over r-m crossvein (extending only to anterior media), a large rounded spot at end of second anterior radial cell extending two-thirds way to vein M, and a large pale oval spot nearly filling distal half of cell R; past level of end of costa. Cell M, with two light spots, the distal one broadly attaining wing margin: cell M» with a long pale vou. 43, NO. 3 spot just ahead of mediocubital fork, and a second rounded spot broadly attaining wing margin. Cell My, with a large rounded spot in distal half: anal cell with one large pale spot in distal portion. Halteres pale. Abdomen dark brown: spermathecae (Fig. 6, c) two, subequal, subspherical. Male genitalia (Fig. 6, d, e). Ninth sternite with broad, deep mesal excavation, the posterior membrane bare: ninth tergite slightly longer than basal breadth, apicolateral processes short and widely separated, a slight median cleft. Basistyles with ventral roots slightly foot-shaped, their pointed apices nearly meeting mesad; dorsal roots slightly shorter, slender and simple; dis- tistyles slender, slightly curved, their apices bent and pointed. Aedeagus with basal arch to slightly over half of total length, the basal arms stout and bent midway forming a rooflike arch; distal portion stout at base, apex narrower and rounded. Parameres (Fig. 7, d) with bases knobbed, stems slender, bent near bases, middle portions straight, then bent outward and then ventromesad with tips slender and _ needlelike and each bearing four lateral barbs. Holotype @, allotype, Cerro Campania, Pan- ama, July 3, 1951, F. S. Blanton (light trap) (type no. 61503, U.S.N.M.). Paratypes: 4 9 9, same data as type. This species takes its place near the debilipalpis group of species on the basis of its wing markings, but differs from them in having the distal light spots attaining the wing margin in cells R;, Ms, and M,, and the third palpal segment is very distinctively swollen. LITERATURE CITED Barsosa, F. A. Culicoides (Diptera; Heleidae) da regiao Neotropica. An. Soc. Biol. Pernambuco 7: 3-30. 1947. Fox, I. A review of the species of biting midges or Culicoides from the Caribbean region (Diptera: Ceratopogonidae). Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. 39: 248-258. 1946. ———. Hoffmania, a new subgenus in Culicoides (Diptera: Ceratopogonidae). Proc. Biol. Soc Washington 61: 21-28. 1947. . Two new Central American biting midges of Culicoides (Diptera: Ceratopogonidae). Kuba 3: 90-91. 1947. Macriz, J. W.S. Some species of Culicoides (Dip- tera, Ceratopogonidae) from the state of Chiapas, Mexico. Ann. Trop. Med. and Parasitol. 42: 67-87. 1948. Marcu 1953 Ortiz, I. Estudios en Culicoides. Rev. Sanid. y Assist. Social 15: 429-465. 1950. . Estudios sobre Culicoides (Diptera, Cerato- pogonidae) VII. Culicoides dominicii n. sp. y TRAUB: A NEW FLEA FROM GUATEMALA ed clave para el reconocimiento de las especies venezolanas. Nov. Cient. Mus. Hist. Nat. La Salle, Zool. Ser., no. 5, 12 pp. 1951. WirtH, W. W. The Heleidae of California. Univ. California Publ. Ent. 9: 95-266. 1952. ENTOMOLOGY .—Wenzella obscura, a new genus and new species of flea from Guatemala (Siphonaptera).1 RopERT Travs, Lt. Col., MSC. The siphonapteran fauna of Guatemalan rodents, although of potential medical sig- nificance, is relatively little known. Among the excellent ectoparasites collected by a Chicago Natural History Museum expedi- tion to Guatemala in 1948, is the remarkable flea here described as a new genus of the family Hystrichopsyllidae, subfamily Rhadi- nopsyllinae. Wenzella, n. gen. Diagnosis.—Differs from al! known rhadinop- sylline genera in each of the following charac- teristics: Pronotal comb lacking; antenna with a conspicuous flange (Fig. 1, A.f.) extending from base to near apex of club, ensheathing much of first two segments; lacking even vestiges of ab- dominal comb of spinelets on terga two through six; prosternosome without a sinus to receive the small first vinculum (VC./); fourth vinculum distinct (Fig. 10, VC.4); male with three ante- sensiliary bristles; male eighth tergum (Fig. 7, 8T.) very large, inclosing much of genitalia; maxillary palpi (Fig. 1, M.P.) very long, ex- tending to apex of foretrochanters, suggesting Megarthroglossus of Anomiopsyllinae. Agrees with Stenischia Jordan, 1932, in that. the lateral metanotal area is not set off as a distinct sclerite, and instead the metanotum extends as a downward-directed long vertical triangle between metepisternum and metepi- mere.* Differs from other members of the sub- family (except Trichopsylloides Ewing, 1938) in lacking a genal ctenidium. Description —Caput integrecipitate, with in- ternal but distinct tubercle (Fig. 1, 7'B.). Anterior 1 Published under the auspices of the Surgeon General, Department of the Army, who does not necessarily assume responsibility for the profes- sional opinions expressed by the author. 2 Department of Entomology, Army Medical Service Graduate School, Walter Reed Army Med- ical Center, Washington, D. C. 3 In Trichopsylloides Ewing the metanotum is similarly downward-directed, but the lateral metanotal area is fairly well defined. and dorsal margins of head evenly and very broadly convex, not rounded; in female, those margins straighter. Genal region (GN .) extending downward beyond mid-point of maxillary lobe. Head chaetotaxy reduced in number and size of bristles, which are not set in distinct rows; postantennal region with but one row of bristles, that marginal. Eye greatly reduced. Palpi (L.P.) 5-segmented, not extending beyond apex of fore- coxae, much shorter than elongate maxillary palpi. Antenna peculiar in position and shape; although genus is integrecipitate in both sexes, in each sex the base of antenna is removed from crown of head (in other integrecipitate fleas, that of male is usually near top of head); antennal groove not definitely extending onto propleuron; first antennal segment directed anteriorly, almost horizontal, not pointing ventrad as is typical in other fleas; club almost rhomboidal, scarcely narrowed apically, its segments often partially fused, some reduced in size; club apparently consisting of seven or eight segments (actually nine present); with a conspicuous triangular flange. First vinculum (VC./) relatively broad. Margin of prosternosome straight, unmodified at level of insertion of this vinculum. Tentorial bridge (7.BR.) unusual in being displaced ecaudad, near vinculum (overlapping in specimen drawn); vermiform. Pronotum with but one com- plete row of bristles, those short; comb completely absent. Mesonotum (Fig. 10, MSN.) with two rows of bristles, the first somewhat irregular; with a relatively long, well-developed phragma (PH.2); with two or three pseudosetae (PS.S.). Mesepisternum (MPS.) with anterior margin fairly straight. An internal furea (/.F.2) con- spicuous, extending dorsad more than half height of mesepimere (MPM.). Mesepimere longer than broad (high), much longer than MPS. Meso- sternosome (MPS. and MPM.) with chaetotaxy reduced to about four bristles. Metanotum (MTN.) with a distinctive beak-shaped con- spicuous phragma (PH.3) (not as broad as that of mesonotum); with two rows of bristles; about 78 JOURNAL OF THE as long as mesonotum and about half again as long as pronotum (ignoring phragma). Sides of metanotum extending ventrad as a downward- pointing triangle, the altitude of the triangle about equal to that of rest of notum above it. Lateral metanotal area completely absent. Pleura! arch absent. Lower margins of metanotum heavily sclerotized, as is posterior margin of metepisternum (MT7'S.). Metepisternum (MT7S.) with anterior margin ventrally straight, its upper portion concave. With a conspicuous internal furca (J.F.3) arising from base of MTS. Squamu- lum absent. Metepimere (W7'M.) well developed, broader than long; lacking a striarium; chaeto- taxy relatively reduced; apparently not fused with metanotum, although margins contiguous. Metacoxa lacking the subapical patch of spiri- forms or subspiniform bristles characteristic of the subfamily (also missing in Trichopsylloides Ewing, 1938, and in Paratyphloceras Ewing, 1940). Tibial comb absent. Profemur without thin lateral or mesal bristles. Fifth tarsal segment on each leg with four pairs of lateral p!antar bristles, the apical pair somewhat reduced. Typical terga with two rows of bristles. Second abdominal! sternum without a striarium. With three antesensiliary bristles (Fig. 7. A.B.) in each sex; the bristles relatively unmodified; the plate supporting these bristles unusual in being displaced from dorsal and caudal margins. Ab- dominal spiracles much longer than Lroad. Male eighth tergum extending beyond base of clasper. Male eighth sternum very large, with many bristles. Movable finger (Fig. 9, F.) long and narrow, without spiniforms. Ninth sternum with distal arm (Fig. 7, D.A.9 and fig. 5) bearing subspiniforms; proximal arm (P.A.9) weakly sclerotized. Aedeagus relatively unmodified; with pouch wall (Fig. 8, P.W.) lightly sclerotized. Anal stylet (Fig. 2, A.S.) of female with a ‘ong apical bristle and dorsal and ventral subapical bristles. Sensilium somewhat convex. Abdominal bristles (particularly those of male eighth sternum) set In prominent bases (Figs. 6 and 4). Genotype: Wenzella obscura, n. sp. The genus is named for Rupert L. Wenzel, curator of insects, Chicago Natural History Museum, who has contributed very much to the study of ectoparasites and who organized and led the expedition which collected this exceptionally interesting flea. Wenzeila obscura, n. sp. (Figs. 1-11) Types—Holotype male and allotvpe female WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 3 ex Heteromys d. desmarestianus Grey (family Heteromyidae), a spiny pocket mouse; Guate- mala: Sacatepequez, 6 km west of Mixco; eleva- tion, 6,900 feet; collected by R. Mitchell and L. de la Torre; June 26, 1948. Six male and five female paratypes with same data. Holotype and allotype deposited in collections of the Chicago Natural History Museum. Paratypes deposited in the United States National Museum; the British Museum (Tring); the Division of Ento- mology, Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, Canada; the Chicago Natural History Museum; and the author's collection. Description. Heap, Mae (Fig. 1): Anterior margin of head a shallow are; in female nearly straight so that head is almost pointed. Pre- antennal region with a vestige of a row of seven or eight rudimentary bristles or hairs extending from insertion of mawxillary palpi to antennal groove; with an “ocular”? row of two small bristles, one near antennal groove and the other ventromarginal; with about eight to ten thin hairs scattered on rest of genal area. Anterior arm of tentorium (7.A.) visible on each side as an angled vermiform structure. Eye absent. Maxillary lobe (WX.) extending to near apex of second segment of maxillary palpus (M.P.). Gera (GN.) conspicuous, produced downward as a flap on each side, extending to near midpoint of second segment of maxillary palpus. True genal lobe (at area of junction with antennal groove) inconspicuous. Second segment of maxillary palpi about twice the length of first, larger than third, and subequal in length to fourth, which extends to about apex of foretrochanters. The labial palpi weakly sclerotized, extending to about apex of forecoxae. Postantennal region with very small thin vestigial bristles or hairs, pattern suggesting vestigial rows arranged 4-5-5, those of last row longest although still small; in addition, a patch of about 11 similar bristles near antennal groove; longest postantennal bristle at ventrocaudal angle. First segment of antenna with three to five tiny hairs at base and three or four scattered marginal hairs. Second segment bonnet-shaped, with one or two lateral bristles and a marginal row of hairs; the segment directed ventrad. Club of antenna rhomboidal but with ventral margin slightly convex apically; club about three-fourths as broad as long; with nine compact segments partially fused so that joints are inapparent, appearing to have merely seven or eight segments. Antennal flange covering most of second segment and extending beyond midpoint of club. First Marcu 1953 TRAUB: A NEW FLEA FROM GUATEMALA 79 vineulum or link plate (VC.1) less than twice as__ shorter than second, extending down to about long as broad, anterior and posterior margins mid-point of segment. In addition, with two more sclerotized than remainder of link plate. bristles near anteroventral angle. In each sex, THoraAx: Pronotum with first row of bristles prosternosome with an indication of a sinus for WENZELLA OBSCURA GEN. & SP NOV. Fic. 1—Head and prothorax, male. Fig. 2.—Anal stylet. 4.—Bristle of male eighth tergum. tergum and eighth sternum, male. Fic. 3.—Spermatheca. IPE. Fic. 5.—Distal arm of male ninth sternum. Fic. 6.—Eighth SO JOURNAL OF THE receipt of antennal club. Mesonotum (Fig. 10, MSN.) three-fourths as long as broad, excluding the conspicuous, cephalad-directed phragma (PH.2); mesonotal phragma triangular, its an- terior margin extending down to ventral sixth of notum and then with base of triangle emarginate; with two rows of bristles, anterior row short and terminating near level of anterior lucodise (LD.); posterior row terminating above second lucodise. Mesonotal flange with three pseudosetae (PS.S.) per side, all inserted above mid-point. Mesepi- sternum (MPS.) with one bristle near ventro- caudal] angle. Mesepimere (MV@PM.) with three bristles, two of these ventral, the third above insertion of third vinculum (VC.3). Internal furca (1.F.2) of mesosternum irregular, relatively con- spicuous, arising caudad to mesosternal rod; broad at base; apically narrow; extending dorsad to level of spiracle. Metanotum (MTN.) with two rows of bristles, the first short; about two- thirds as long as broad (measured at maximum, including breadth or height from dorsal margin to apex of ventral triangular extension) ; phragma of metanotum (PH.3) beak-shaped, about as long as broad; without indication of a lateral meta- notal sclerite; apical spinelets absent. Mesepi- sternum (MT7'S.) with a caudomarginal bristle near mid-point; this margin heavily sclerotized. Internal furea (/.F.3) of metasternum well de- veloped, vertical, extending about one third height of segment, narrowed above proximal third. Metepimere (M7TM.) somewhat rhom- boidal, but caudal margins slightly sinuate, very broad, i.e., breadth (height) greater than metanotum; with four bristles, two near bullet- headed spiracle, remaining two median. Fourth vinculum (VC.4), or link plate, vermiform. Leas: Forecoxa with thin scattered lateral bristles from base to apex. Mesocoxa with basal two thirds naked; apical third with a few lateral submarginal stout bristles. Metacoxa similar to mesocoxa but with a few thin submarginal hairs on proximal two thirds. Femora with three ven- tromarginal bristles near apex. Tibia with a row of thin bristles flanking the stout dorsomarginal ones; these last stout bristles arranged 1-2-1-2-2-3 on all legs. Apical bristle of first segment of metatarsus reaching to apex of second; one apical bristle of second segment reaching to apex of third. Tarsal claws long and narrow; fifth tarsal segment with fourth lateral plantar bristles thinner and shorter than others; the fifth plantar bristle represented by a hair. Measurements (in WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 3 microns) of tibiae and segments of tarsi (petiolate base deleted) of holotype are as follows: Tarsal Segments Leg | Tibia |——— a — | I 1 | THe") Sve Pro- 125 | 60 | 50 | 40 | 36 | fs Meso- | 180 120 75 | 50 | 35 | 90 | 40 | 100 Meta- 225 200 | 125 | 70 | ABDOMEN: First tergum (Fig. 10, 17.) with two rows of bristles, at times with an additional subdorsal bristle preceding the first row; first row extending to about mid-point of tergum; second row longer; with vestiges of two apical spinelets on flange; with a beak-shaped phragma (PH.-1T.) one and one-half times as long as broad at base; with two or three ventromarginal bristles. Basal sternum lacking a striarlum; with a _ ventro- marginal row of four to six or eight small bristles; other unmodified sterna with a row of six to eight long thin bristles preceded by three or four rows of shorter bristles: in instance of second sterna these anterior bristles irregularly arranged. Typical terga with two rows of bristles, the second row extending slightly below the sub- lanceolate spiracle, the anterior row somewhat shorter. Antesensiliary (antepygidial) bristles long and narrow in both sexes, relatively un- modified and resembling normal tergal bristles; in male (Fig. 7, A.B.) middle bristle almost thrice length of upper bristle; about twice length of lower; in female (Fig. 11, A.B.) about twice length of uppermost but ventral one three-fourths length of middle bristle. Plate bearing ante- sensiliary bristles displaced ventrad from dorsal margin a distance equal to length of dorsal bristle; displaced anterior of caudal margin a distance subequal to breadth of plate. Plate displaced even further in female. MopiFIED ABDOMINAL SEGMENTS, MALz (Fig. 7): Setal bases of abdominal bristles pronounced, heavily sclerotized. Eighth tergum (87. and Fig. 6) extending caudad beyond base of digitoid and ventrad to level of base of distal arm of ninth sternum; with about eight small thin bristles near and below subovate spiracle; dorsal margin slightly crenulate from sensilium to near apex; with anterior and posterior margins convergent and meeting in a triangular extension; anterior margin doubly sinuate; posterior margin slightly concave. Eighth sternum (8S. and Fig. 6) large, extending dorsad to near apex of proximal arm of ninth sternum and caudad to middle of distal Marcu 1953 TRAUB: A NEW FLEA FROM GUATEMALA WENZELLA OBSCURA GEN.& SP NOV. Fic. 7—Modified abdominal segments, male. Fic. 8.—Apical portion of aedeagus. Immovable process and digitoid of clasper. 81 Fic. 9.— 82 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY or} SCIENCES arm of ninth sternum; dorsal margin convex; caudal margin with a subventral sinus; with approximately 21 marginal and submarginal long bristles from base to apex; in addition, with six smaller ventromarginal bristles; long bristles on eighth sternum with setal bases even more heavily sclerotized than on other segments (Fig. 4). Immovable process of clasper (P. and Fig. 9) broad, extending to about mid-point of digitoid (F.); apex broadly rounded or subtruncate; caudal margin sinuate; with three fairly long subapical bristles and about six small mesal subapical bristles; with about three caudo- marginal bristles; two or three small thin medio- lateral bristles proximad of subapical patch. Movable finger or digitoid (F.) long and narrow, about five times as long as broad at midpoint; apex subacuminate; caudal margin fairly straight, except where curving at base; anterior margin sinuate, curving caudad apically and at base curving rather sharply anteriorly; with a small thin apical bristle and a caudomarginal row of about 12 small thin bristles extending to near base, but with a gap from apical two thirds to near apex. With two or three similar subapical bristles and with a few small anteromarginal or submarginal bristles extending from below mid- point to near apex. Manubrium (MB.) long and narrow. Ninth sternum weakly sclerotized for most of its length and hence difficult to see clearly except for apex of distal arm; proximal arm of ninth sternum (P.A.9) broad, apically truncate. Distal arm of ninth sternum (D.A.9 and Fig. 5) longer than proximal arm and apically much narrower: apex with three caudomarginal supspiniforms; with a group of about five or six similar caudo- marginal subspiniforms at apical two thirds; with two short thick bristles distad of proximal patch. Aedeagal apodeme (Fig. 7, AH.A) about three and one-half times as long as broad; proximal spur and apical appendage absent. Median dorsal lobe (Fig. 8, M.D.L.) straight. Sclerotized inner tube (S..T.) fairly straight and unspecialized, its armature represented as a weakly sclerotized winglike expansion. Apicomedian _ sclerite (A.M.S.) on each side of S.J.T. consisting of two portions: a proximal short, caplike sclerite and a large apical weakly sclerotized, somewhat dumb- bell-shaped structure. Lateral sclerotization of inner tube (L.S./.) ill-defined. Crochet (CR.) consisting of a large troughlike sclerite extending well apicad of inner tube; dorsal margin slightly convex, parallel to ventral margin for most its VoL. 43, NO. 3 length, but crochet subapically narrowing; ven- tral margin relatively heavily sclerotized. Lateral lobes (L.£.) narrow and extending to near apex of S.J.7., apparently an undifferentiated portion of the semimembranous pouch wall (P.W.). Cres- cent sclerite (C.S.) well developed. Penis rods (P.R.) not fully coiled. Aedeagal apodemal rod (A.A.R.), the third penile rod, arising from the base of the almost invisible pouch wall. Vesicle (V.) fairly welldeveloped. Apodemal strut (A P.S.) of usual type but sclerites not differentiated. Tenth segment conspicuous; sensilium (Fig. 7, SN.) with about 12 pits per side. Dorsal anal lobe (D.A.L.) relatively well sclerotized, covered with bristles, those at apex long. Ventral anal lobe (V.A.L.) with long apical bristles, its outlines: semimembranous for the most part. Proximal ventral sclerite of proctiger (V.P.) fairly well indicated. Mopiriep ABDOMINAL SEGMENTS, FEMALE (Fic. 11): Seventh sternum (7S) with caudal margin produced into a blunt lobe; below this, margin evenly convex; with four rows of bristles arranged approximately 4-8-9, those of last row very long. Seventh tergum (77'.) emarginate at level of the plate of the antesensiliary bristles, which are displaced slightly more ventrad. Eighth tergum (87.) very large, with two irregular rows of long thin bristles ranging from above spiracle to ventral margin; with about four long additional submarginal bristles near ventral sinus; posterior margin markedly produced caudad at level of ventral anal lobe. Eighth sternum (SS.) vestigial. Dorsal anal lobe (D.A.L.) with about eight medio- lateral bristles and a fringe of dorsal bristles; with a longer bristle at ventrocaudal angle. Ventral anal lobe (V.A.L.) not heavily sclerotized, ventral margin sinuate; with about three or four long thin bristles near anteroventral angle and one or two subapical bristles. Anal stylet (A.S. and Fig. 2) about three times as long as broad, with long apical bristle and two shorter subapical ones. Spermatheca (SP. and Fig. 3) with tail slightly longer than head, upturned. Head some- what longer than broad; subpyriform. Bursa copulatrix (B.C.) fairly well developed, globose, its duct rather short. DISCUSSION OF THE STATUS OF THE GENUS WENZELLA As will be seen from the diagnosis, Wen- zella differs greatly from other members of the subfamily (i.e., Nearctopsylla Roth- schild, 1915, Corypsylla C. Fox, 1908, Para- Marcu 1953 TRAUB: A NEW FLEA FROM GUATEMALA WENZELLA OBSCURA GEN. & SP NOV. Fie. 10—Mesothorax and metathorax and first abdominal tergum, male. abdominal segments, female. Fig. 11.—Modified 83 84 JOURNAL typhloceras Ewing, 1940, Trichopsylloides Ewing, 1938, Stenischia Jordan, 1932, Rha- dinopsylla Jordan and Rothschild, 1912, and Rectofrontia Wagner, 1930‘). Certain of these differences are shared by genera in other subfamilies and these are thought to be due to convergent evolution. Thus, the elongate maxillary palpi suggest MJegarthroglossus (subfamily Anomiopsyllinae). The new genus resembles Anomiopsyllus Baker, 1904, in the loss of pronotal and genal ctenidia as well as in the marked reduction in size and numbers of the head bristles. These adaptations are characteristic of fleas which ordinarily are restricted to the nests of the host (1, 2). The caudad displacement of the tentorial bridge (Fig. 1, 7.BR.) is also suggestive of Anomio- psyllus. In Rectofrontia and allies, as in most fleas, the bridge arises at the level of the anteroventral portion of the antennal groove. In its possession of a well-developed fourth vinculum (VC.4), Wenzella resembles the neopsylline and pygiopsyllid fleas. The ab- sence of a sinus to receive the first vinculum is also characteristic of these last two groups of fleas. Nevertheless, the taxonomic assign- ment of Wenzella is clearly indicated by the possession of the following characters: fusion of the segments of the antennal club; at least one of the internal rods of the meso- and metacoxae is cut short, interrupted or abbreviated; the large vertical internal furca of the mesosterna and metasterna; the fusion of the lateral metanotal area with the meta- notum. The subfamily Neopsyllinae includes fleas which differ in important details from Wenzella as follows: male antennal club un- modified, and also extending well onto pro- pleuron (along with corresponding fossa); inner surface of hindcoxa with a patch of spiniforms or small bristles; aedeagus with a very well developed, long, broad pouch; characteristically possessing a striarlum on second abdominal segment. The Pygiopsyl- lidae are essentially Australasian fleas, al- though one genus is known to occur in South America. In this group the genitalia are of 4 Micropsylloides Ewing, 1938, Ralzpsylla Ioff, 1946, Actenophthalmus C. Fox, 1925, and Micro- psylla Dunn, 1923, are considered to be synonyms of Rectofrontia and at best are subgenera. G. H. E. Hopkins, of the British Museum (Tring), has independently expressed a similar opinion about these genera of the Rhadinopsyllini. OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 43, NO. 3 a very different type, the sensilium is mark- edly convex, and there is no frontal tubercle. Tor these reasons the genus Wenzella is best placed in a new tribe of Rhadinopsyllinae characterized as follows: Wenzellini, n. tribe Clypeal tubercle internal. Integrecipitate, but the antennal groove removed from crown of head in both sexes. First vinculum not received in a distinct sinus of prosternum. Fourth vinculum present. Metepimeral striarium absent. Lacking a striarium on second abdominal segment. Inner side of hindtarsi virtually nude, lacking a patch of spiniforms or short bristles. Lateral metanotal area absent, the huge metanotum extending down between upper half of metepisternum and met- epimere. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I am very grateful to Dr. Karl Jordan, F. R. 8., of the British Museum (Tring), who verified the status of this unusual flea, and to Miss Phyllis T. Johnson, of the De- partment of Entomology, Army Medical Service Graduate School, Washington, for critical review of the manuscript. REFERENCES CITED Travus, R. Siphonaptera from Central America and Mexico. Zool. Mem. Chicago Nat. Hist. Mus. 1(1): 1-127, pls. 1-54. 1950. Traus, R.,-and Tipton, V. J. Jordanopsylla allredi, a new genus and species of flea from Utah (Siphonaptera). Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 41(8) : 264-270, 7 figs., 2 charts. 1951. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS A.B. antesensiliary bristle. A.F. antennal flange. A.A.R third aedeagal rod (accessory apodemal rod). A.M.S apicomedian sclerite. A.S. anal stylet. AE.A aedeagal apodeme. APS. apodemal strut of aedeagus. Be: bursa copulatrix. CS. erescent sclerite. CR crochet. ID wavs in dorsal anal lobe of proctiger. D.A9 distal arm of male ninth sternum. F. movable finger or digitoid of clasper. GN. gena. Mg internal furca of mesosternosome. TRS internal furca of metasternosome. i. lateral lobe of aedeagus. eA labial palpi. Marcu 1953 TODD: THE AMERICAN DUNLIN 85 GS-1. lateral sclerotization of inner PH.-1T. phragma of first abdominal ter- tube. gum. wD. lucodisce. PS.S pseudosetae. M.D.L median dorsal lobe of aedeagus. Sel lode sclerotized inner tube of M.P maxillary palpi. aedeagus. MB. manubrium. SN. sensilium. MPM mesepimere. SP. spermatheca. MPS. mesepisternum. pA anterior arm of tentorium. MSN. mesonotum. Abe Bal Ree tentorial bridge. MTM metepimere. AEE frontoclypeal tubercle. MTN metanotum. We vesicle of aedeagus. MTS. metepisternum. V.A.L ventral anal lobe of proctiger. MX maxillary lobe. VP. subanal sclerite. P. immovable process of clasper. VC.1 first vinculum or link plate. Pex 9 proximal arm of male ninth VC. third vinculum or link plate. sternum. VC 4 fourth vinculum or link plate. PR. penis rod. 7S. seventh sternum. P.W. wall of aedeagal pouch. 7AM seventh tergum. PE 2 phragma of mesonotum. 8S. eighth sternum. PH.3 phragma of metanotum. ae eighth tergum. ORNITHOLOGY —A taxonomic study of the American dunlin (Erolia alpina sub- spp.). W. E. Ciypr Topp, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa. (Communicated by Herbert Friedmann. ) The red-backed sandpiper, or dunlin, like certain of its affines, is circumboreal and Holarctic in its breeding range; unlike many of them, however, it does not. retire into the Southern Hemisphere for the winter, but spends that season in more temperate climes. A common and well-known shore- bird, it received its specific name alpina from Linnaeus in 1758. Obviously, it must have been one of the species he himself observed on his trip to Lapland in 1752, since he quotes no other authority. In 1766, however, failing to identify his bird with Brisson’s “‘l’Alouette de Mer,” he _ rede- scribed the latter as Tringa cinclus. Meyer and Wolf’s Tringa variabilis (1810) made a third designation for the same species, and the vast majority of the Old World refer- ences, as listed by Sharpe (1896), Ridgway (1919), and others fall under one or the other of these three names. In view of the seasonal changes to which the species is subject, and which were imperfectly under- stood in those early days, considerable al- lowance must be made for this duplication. It was some years before these supposed species were recognized as identical and the later names discarded. In the meantime two additional forms of the group had been described: Tringa schinzit by C. L. Brehm (1822) from the shores of the Baltic Sea and Scolopax sakhalina by Vieillot (1816) from Sakhalin Island, but the latter was not recognized as pertinent until Buturlin (Auk 21: 53. 1904) called attention to it. The form schinziz, although accepted by many authorities, was discounted by Sharpe (1896), who rightly considered it merely a geographical variant. From the material examined in this connection (11 specimens from Holland and Sweden) it appears to be an easily recognizable race, characterized by its smaller size and heavier _breast- streaking as compared with true alpina. It breeds in the British Islands and in corresponding latitutdes in Holland and the Baltic Sea countries—far to the southward of the normal range of true alpina. In due course the known range of the species was extended by various American authors, beginning with Wilson in 1813. No distinctions were admitted between the European and American birds until 1858, when Cassin drew attention to the larger size and disproportionately longer bill of the latter, which he thereupon christened americana, but without designating a type specimen. The name was accepted by most American writers, although latterly only in a subspecific sense. A few years later (1861) Coues discussed a supposedly larger race from the Pacific coast, which he provisionally S86 JOURNAL OF THE named pacifica. In 1885 Stejneger pointed out that Cassin’s name americana was pre- occupied, and proposed to replace it by Coues’s pacifica. He claimed that Coues’s type (here designated as no. 9540, collection U. 8S. National Museum) was ‘in every essential a true P. americana CaAssiIN,”’ which form was common to “both the Asiatic and American shores of the Pacific Ocean.”’ Stejneger’s conclusions were adopted in the American Ornithologists’ Union Check-List and were indeed not questioned until 1904, when the Russian ornithologist Buturlin showed that Vieillot’s long unrecognized name Scolopax sakhalina (1816), from Sak- halin Island, was pertinent to the Pacific form. As a result this name came into gen- eral use, nor was it ever challenged until 1914, when Thayer and Bangs insisted that east Siberian birds were not the same as American birds, to which latter they restored the name pacifica. The latest authors to discuss the question (Hellmayr and Conover, 1945) fully indorse and emphasize Thayer and Bangs’s views. And thus the matter stands at present. The identification of dunlin specimens he collected in Alaska gave some trouble to A. M. Bailey (Condor 28: 34. 1926) and to the authorities to whom he sent them for determination. He has generously placed his entire Alaskan series at my disposal. Taking breeding birds alone, I find that there seem to be two forms represented. One of these is a comparatively short-billed bird, with the dusky streaking on the throat and breast subdued or nearly wanting. Of this form there are available 26 breeding specimens from Point Barrow, Wainwright, Chipp River, and Point Hope—all in north- ern Alaska. The other form, represented by 20 breeding specimens from the rest of Alaska, is longer-billed by comparison, with heavier streaking on the throat and breast. Young birds of the two races in the spotted juvenal dress appear to differ only in the length of the bill. Through the courtesy of certain other institutions I have been able to compare a fair series of dunlin specimens from Sak- halin Island—topotypes of sakhalina of Vieillot—with the northern Alaska series, and I find the two populations racially WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 3 distinct. As Conover says, the upperparts in Sakhalin birds average lighter-colored — more buffy, less rufescent. Also the black area of the underparts averages more re- stricted. Compared with pacifica the much longer bill, darker upperparts, and more heavily streaked breast of the latter will serve to distinguish breeding specimens of the two forms at a glance. Note that Con- over’s study did not involve examination of any specimens taken north of Nome; this will account for his failure to discrimi- nate a northern race. As already stated, I have seen no specimens of this race from south of its breeding grounds, but I believe that the relatively shorter bill would serve to distinguish them. Now we come to consider the dunlin population of the American Arctic east of Alaska. Fortunately we have a fine series of breeding birds from two localities, Church- ill on the west coast of Hudson Bay and Southampton Island at its northern end. Even a casual comparison of these with breeding Alaskan birds will show that we are here dealing with a different race. Sea- sonally comparable Hudson Bay birds are obviously lighter brown above than Alaskan pacifica—raw sienna as against antique brown—although the streaking on the throat and breast runs about the same, and their bills average a trifle shorter. Birds taken in spring migration (May) show the same color differences when compared in series, although less markedly. Owing to lack of material I am unable adequately to compare birds in the ventrally spotted juvenal dress, but those I have seen (from Southampton and Churchill) vary greatly in the amount of spotting, while the differ- ent stages of postjuvenal molt cause great variation in the color of the upperparts. Judged from the description and measure- ments in Salomonsen’s Birds of Greenland, these cannot be referred to arctica, since their bills are much too long. This Hudson Bay population is also sufficiently homo- geneous and well marked to deserve racial recognition. In North America we should then have three races of the dunlin regularly represented, as follows: Erolia alpina arcticola, n. subsp. Type.—No. 8503, collection Carnegie Museum, Marcu 1953 adult male; Point Barrow, Alaska, June 8, 1898; E. A. Mellhenny. Subspecific characters —Similar to Frolia alpina pacifica (Coues) of middle and southern Alaska, ete., but bill averaging somewhat shorter (sex for sex); and throat and breast more lightly streaked (sometimes nearly immaculate). Similar also to E. alpina sakhalina (Vieillot) of Sakhalin Island and eastern Asia in general, but upperparts darker colored; throat and breast more decidedly streaked; and black abdominal area averaging more extensive. Measurements.—Adult males in breeding dress: Wing, 113-122 (average, 116.6); bill, 33-35 (33.7) ; tarsus, 22.5-25 (23.6). Female (8 specimens): Wing, 114-124 (120.5); bill, 34-39.5 (37); tarsus, 24-26 (25). List of specimens —Alaska: Point Barrow, 18; Point Hope, 1; Chipp River, 2; Wainwright, 25. Total, 46. Range.—Northern Alaska in summer; migra- tory and winter ranges not yet ascertained. Erolia alpina pacifica (Coues) [Pelidna| Pacifica Coues, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, July 1861: 189 (west coast of North America; the type from Simiahmoo, Washington —cf. Steyneger, U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 29: 121. 1885). Remarks.—The most distinctive character of this race is its relatively longer bill, which serves to distinguish it in winter dress when the plum- age characters are obscured. In breeding plum- age it tends to run a little darker above than arcticola, while the throat and breast average more heavily streaked. There are available a good series of breeding birds of this race from Wales, Alaska, also some typical specimens from St. Lawrence Island, Bering Sea, and winter and spring birds from the coast farther south. E. a. pacifica is of course very different from sakhalina, as Conover truly says. His comparisons of the two, be it noted, were made with speci- mens of undoubted pacifica and not of the more northern arcticola. There is no evidence that pacifica migrates southward along the Siberian coast, although it may do so upon occasion. All the specimens seen from that region appear refer- able to sakhalina, as defined by Conover. Measurements —Adult males in breeding dress: Wing, 110-121 (average, 115.5); bill, 35-43 (37.4); tarsus, 22-26.5 (24.7). Female: Wing, 109-120 (118.3); bill, 838-43.5 (41.4); tarsus, 24-27 (25.7). List of specimens——Alaska: Wales, 14; Cape TODD: THE AMERICAN DUNLIN 87 Prince of Wales, 2; St. Lawrence Island, Bering Sea, 4. British Colombia: Denman Island, 1. Washington: Simiahmoo (type), 1. Oregon: Bay- ocean, 3; Newport, 2; Devils Lake, 1; Netarts Bay, 2. California: Mount Eden Landing, 1; San Diego, 8. Lower California: Abreojos Point, 3. Total, 42. Erolia alpina hudsonia, n. subsp. Type.—No. 110079, collection Carnegie Mu- seum, adult female; Coral Inlet, Southampton Island, Hudson Bay, Canada, June 6, 1930; George M. Sutton. Subspecific characters—Similar in general to Erolia alpina pacifica (Coues) of central and southern Alaska and the Pacific coast of America, but general coloration of upperparts richer and brighter; throat and breast more heavily streaked with dusky; and bill averaging slightly shorter. Range.—From the Mackenzie Delta (presum- ably) east along the Arctic coast and islands to Baffin Land, and south along Hudson Bay to Churchill; migrating through eastern Canada and the eastern United States to the Gulf coast. Measurements.—Adult males in breeding plum- age: Wing, 113-118 (average, 115.5); bill, 35- 38.9 (36); tarsus, 25-27 (25.4). Female: Wing, 114-120 (117); bill, 37-41 (89); tarsus, 25-28 (26.3). Remarks.—Comparison of our fine series of breeding birds from Hudson Bay and northward shows that they represent a race different from either of the Alaska birds. The brighter colora- tion of the upperparts and the more heavily streaked throat and breast are constant features when specimens in the same stage of plumage are compared. In winter dress this race may some- times be distinguished from pacifica by the tend- ency to a shorter bill, but there is so much over- lap in this respect that the distinction is far from absolute. It is fair to presume, however, that this is the race that migrates across eastern North America to its winter quarters on the Gulf coast. List of breeding specimens—Southampton Is- land, Hudson Bay: Coral Inlet, 11; Four Rivers, 4; Prairie Point, 4; Fords Brooks, 3. Manitoba: Churchill, 15. Total, 37. There remain several North American dunlin records which have been referred to true alpina, but which according to Hellmayr and Conover (Publ. Field Mus. Nat. Hist., zool. ser., 13 (pt. 1, no. 3); 200, note. 1948) more likely pertain to the Greenland race, arctica. In view of the dis- 88 JOURNAL OF THE tinctions noted in the present paper, re-examina- tion of these records is indicated. The writer wishes to thank the institutions that have courteously placed at his disposal their material representing this group: Denver Mu- seum of Natural History (A. M. Bailey); Acad- WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 3 emy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia (Rodolphe M. de Schauensee); Museum of Com- parative Zoology (J. C. Greenway, Jr.); and United States National Museum (Dr. Herbert Friedmann). Measurements are based on a series of 10 specimens (unless otherwise specified). ZOOLOGY.—Postmonorchis donacis, a@ new species of monorchid trematode from the Pacific coast, and its life history. R. T. Youna,! University of Montana (emeritus). (Communicated by I. W. Price.) Hopkins (1941) has described a monorchid trematode in the pigfish (Orthopristis chrys- optera) and the spot (Leiostomus xanthurus), and Manter (1942) and Hanson (1950) have found the same worm in the grunt (Haemu- lon flavolineatum) although the latter writer questions the identity of the fish which she studied. A trematode of the same genus but a new species has been found by me in several species of surf perches (Embiotoci- dae), the corvina (Menticirrhus undulatus), and spot fin croaker (foncador stearnsz) which I now propose to describe, together with a note on its life history. The worms were studied mainly in the living condition, but whole mounts fixed in the Dubosq-Brazil modification of Bouin’s fluid and in an alcoholic solution of mercuric chloride with a 5-percent addition of acetic acid and stained in acetocarmine and in Ehrlich’s hematoxylin have also been em- ployed. The trematodes were numerous in 1935-36 and again in 1951. No search was made for them in the interim, but the infrequence of their intermediate host, the bean clam (Do- nax gouldiz), during this period renders their occurrence then unlikely. They differ from P. orthopristis as follows: Their form is different, being slender rather than rounded and resembling Genolopa in this respect. The testis is longer than wide, 1T am indebted to Dr. Carl L. Hubbs, of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography, for the use of an aquarium in the prosecution of this research, and to the San Diego Zoological Society and the U.S. Bureau of Animal Industry for the occupa- tion of rooms in their laboratories. I also had the privilege of spending a few days at the laboratory of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service at Beau- fort, N. C. To all these my thanks are due. I am indebted too to Edward W. Johnson, of the Uni- versity of Maryland, for the preparation of the map. while the reverse is true in the former, and the posterior notch mentioned by Hopkins is lacking. The vitelline reservoir is incon- stant, depending on the state of contraction or expansion of the yolk ducts. The excretory bladder is approximately spherical rather than elongated, while the uterus fills almost the entire posterior body region instead of being restricted mainly to the lateral regions. Black pigment spots are present, either as consolidated ‘‘eye’’ spots or as scattered granules evidently the remains of definite “eye” spots in the larva. The flame cell pat- tern could not be completely determined. In most specimens the flames were inactive, and in spite of a careful examination several probable cells escaped detection. All that could be seen are shown in Fig. 1. Judged from the close relationship of this worm to P. orthopristis it is highly probable if not absolutely certain that the formula is the same as that given by Hopkins for the latter. Postmonorchis donacis, n. sp. Slender, elongated worms covered with small spines anteriorly, which gradually disappear near the ventral sucker. Dimensions of fresh speci- mens, flattened beneath a cover glass: length 0.48 mm; width, 0.207; oral sucker, 0.071; ventral sucker, 0.06; pharynx, 0.048 by 0.031; ovary, 0.037 by 0.031; testis, 0.055 by 0.052; seminal vesicle, 0.105 by 0.095; eggs 0.024 by 0.015. In fixed material the dimensions are as follows: length, 0.336 mm; width 0.07; oral sucker, 0.046; ventral sucker, 0.038; seminal vesicle, 0.059 by 0.0345; ovary, 0.042 by 0.028; testis, 0.047 by 0.033; eggs, 0.021 by 0.012. Pigment spots pres- ent. Ventral sucker at about one-third length of body from anterior end. Ceca terminate posterior to anterior end of testis. Vas deferens and metra- term open through a gonopore in the midline just anterior to the ventral sucker. The cirrus sack Marcu 1933 O.| MM YOUNG: POSTMONORCHIS DONACIS ptlyy (ee legs CR Otek { boii Fic 1.—Free-hand drawing of Postmonorchis donacis, n. sp., ventral view. 89 O() JOURNAL OF THE encloses a heavily spined vas deferens and a distinct prostate gland which joins the latter where it expands into the large seminal vesicle. Metraterm heavily spined anteriorly with a pos- terior blind sack. Gravid uterus filling almost the entire posterior body and opening into the metra- term at about its mid length. Laurer’s canal present. Excretory bladder approximately spheri- cal. Vitellaria dendritic, composed of several lobes on a side, usually extending from the anterior end of the testis to about the middle of the seminal vesicle but occasionally reaching be- yond the ventral sucker. Manter (l.c., p. 350) says of the excretory vesicle in monorchids, “In some genera... it is Y-shaped, in others it is I-shaped.”’ No mention of a spherical shape is given. And further, ‘The seminal vesicle in the Monorchidae is often rudi- mentary and if present at all is difficult to ob- serve.’’ Regarding the seminal vesicle Manter’s statement is at variance with the account and figure (8) given by Hopkins (l.c.) for P. ortho- pristis and with my own observations on the present species, while in the latter the excretory bladder differs widely from the accounts of both these authors for the Monorchidae. Location of the parasite in the gut of the fish— In the surf perches the worms are found mainly in the rectum though occasionally elsewhere in the gut; in the corvina their distribution is more general. Three possible explanations offer them- selves for this distribution in the former: 1, Easier access to oxygen in the rectum; 2, dif- ferences in pH between the rectum and other parts of the gut; and 3, chemical differences other than pH between these regions. The first of these is apparently ruled out by the distribution in the corvina. A test of pH in a specimen of Cymato- gaster, one of the surf perches, made for me at the Scripps Institution showed a difference of one-half to 1 unit of pH between the rectum (5.92) and the rest of the gut from the duodenum to the rectum (6.45-6.90). This difference, how- ever, is not peculiar to the surf perches, tests of the gut of several other species of marine fish made by me showing similar differences. This leaves the third alternative as the most likely explanation. In a study of the gut of the surf perches (Young and Fox, 1936) the rectum was found to contain a brown or orange-colored pigment derived from the shrimp (Hippolyte californiensis), which the fish had been eating at the time. Dr. Fox determined this pigment to WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 3 be a carotenoid of the xanthophyll series which occurs throughout the gut but is transitory throughout most of the gut, persisting in the rectum for a considerable time, but ultimately disappearing there also when a xanthophyll rich diet is withheld. Apparently the worms find at- tachment easier in a region which is rich in this pigment than elsewhere. It is not essential how- ever for their attachment and survival as their distribution in the corvina, and occasionally in the surf perches indicates. In this connection the findings of Nicoll (1913, p. 200) are of much interest. He found Zoono- genus viridis “universally in the rectum and in no other part of the intestine...” of the sea bream (Sparus centrodontus). ‘The rectal con- tents..., partly from the fact that it feeds largely on Crustacea, are usually of a dull brown- ish color, but the color of the parasite was much more intensely red.” This similarity in location of two different trematodes in two different species of fish would seem to be more than a mere coincidence. Larval stages in the clam.——The larvae in the clam occur as sporocysts producing cercariae, which in turn give rise to metaceriae. The size of the sporocysts naturally varies with age, the largest I have seen measuring 0.72 by 0.14 mm in fixed material. The young sporocysts are some- what motile, changing shape from time to time. When present in large numbers the visceral mass is extensively destroyed, as Martin (1940) found in Cummingia, and is yellow in color. The fact that the clam is almost universally infested with metacercariae (see p. 92) in considerable num- bers without suffermg any apparent harm there- from renders it likely that either (1) several light infestations succeed one another without serious injury to the host, or (2) the visceral mass is re- generated after partial destruction by the para- site. The cercaria.—The cercaria is illustrated in Fig. 2. It measures 0.48 mm in length, including the tail, by 0.08 mm in diameter in living speci- mens. The tail is 0.17 mm long, the oral sucker is 0.045 mm and the ventral sucker 0.039 mm in diameter, the pharynx 0.017 by 0.011 mm. In fixed material the dimensions are as follows: length (including tail) 0.228 mm, diameter 0.042, tail 0.09. There are two eye spots. The anterior half of the body is covered with small spines, while the tail is encircled by numerous rings of overlapping scales which give the appearance of spines. Marca 1953 I could not determine all details of the excre- tory system. There is a small globular bladder at the base of the tail, with a group of several gland cells anterior to it containing granules which stain in neutral red. From the bladder two excretory ducts extend forward to the region of the oral sucker. Posterior to the ventral sucker the anlage of the future reproductive organs can be seen. This cerearia resembles closely Cercaria myo- cerca of Villot (1878) ecxept for a slight difference in the relative length of tail and body. It also re- sembles Cercaria cummingiae of Martin (l.c.). Both of these larvae, as well as the present one, infest marine pelecypods, so that in habit as well as structure they appear to be identical. Regard- ing the latter larva Martin (p. 473) says: ‘‘The cercaria has certain characters in common with Cercaria myocerca, Villot ... Both of these larvae have the simple, sac-shaped type of excretory bladder. This seems rather significant since C. myocerca 1S a marine form with a setiferous tail and all other described species of setiferous- tailed marine cercariae have either a Y or U- shaped, or a long tubular excretory bladder. Both species have eye spots. The molluscan host of C. myocerca is Scrobicularia tenuis which be- longs to the same family as Cummingia.” I regard the present species as identical with C. cummingiae which is, to all appearances syn- onymous with C. myocerca.? Regarding the adult worm to which these larvae belong Villot (l.c.) considered it to be an amphistome, which, as Dollfus (1925) says, is highly improbable. Martin on the other hand thought it was one of the Allocreadiidae. As will be seen from what follows it is highly probable that the adult worm is a monorchid. The metacercaria—The metacercaria can be rather easily excysted by pressure on the cover glass. When removed from the cyst it measures, extended, between 0.3 and 0.4 mm. It is located mainly at the base of the siphons, but occurs also in the gills and the edge of the mantle. The life history —It has not been possible to work this out completely. I have shown, as will be seen shortly, that the clam Donax gouldii is an intermediate host. But whether this is the 2 Should subsequent experiments prove con- clusively that Cercaria donacis is identical with C. myocerca the specific name donacis will be superseded by myocerca, which has priority. Until such demonstration, however, I prefer to use the new name, donacis. YOUNG: POSTMONORCHIS DONACIS 91 only one is uncertain. I have made repeated attempts to infest the clam with eggs from the adult worm but all of them were failures. Many worms containing brown-shelled eggs were teased and put in small vials or beakers with the clams, but no miracidia emerged, nor were sporocysts or cercariae found in the clams so exposed, even when the eggs contained active embryos. Most of these experiments were performed in sea water, but in one, Ringer’s solution plus mucous from the gut of an Embiotoca was used and in others extracts of the gut of a corvina and an Embiotoca were employed. I have also made a few attempts to infest the clams by pipetting eggs between the valves of the shell of four Donax but without success. SS —— I} Se SS a , A Dy EY (@) a . ——— = 4 oS = fe ————— 1 < ——— al ol Aa -—— i) —— = a Ea ae SS E-~ i) Ss Fic. 2—Free-hand drawing of the cerearia of Postmonorchis donacis, n. sp. Martin (l.c.) has described the life cycle of a related species, Monorcheides cummingiae, in the clam, Cummingia tellinoides and eels and floun- ders. He demonstrated the transfer of the parasite from the clam to the fish and postulated its passage in the reverse direction. He also demon- strated the transfer of cercariae from an infested to an uninfested clam, but did not determine Q2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES their mode of entrance into the latter, whether through the mouth or the body surface. I have placed active cercariae in dishes with clams but failed to infest the latter. And the cercariae are not attracted by siphons of the clam nor have I seen any of them ingested. I have, however, found a few cercariae in the clam which lacked tails and were surrounded by a very thin cyst, evidently the first stage of the metacercaria. I have also observed a second stage, intermediate in size between the first and the final stage, which latter is identical with the young worm. It seems certain that eggs teased out of the worms are not infective. It may be that they require a period of ripening in sea water before becoming so. Martin (l.c.), however, found that exposing eggs of Monorcheides to sea water for three weeks failed to induce development so that this hypothesis is improbable. It is also possible that a third host is involved in the cycle, perhaps a small copepod which may be ingested by the clam. The reverse transfer, from clam to fish has succeeded in many experiments, as the following data will show. A gravid Embiotoca jacksoni spawned in an aquarium at the Scripps Institution several days after its capture. The young fish were divided into two lots of seven each, one lot being fed abundantly on Donaz while the other lot served as controls. One of the experimental fish was found on examination to contain Postmonorchis while the controls were all negative. Another of the experimental fish was also infested with small trematodes but the condition of the worms when examined rendered positive identification impossible. It is highly probable that they too were Postmonorchis. Of seven other Embiotoca fed Donaz six proved positive for the parasite, while of 17 controls 14 were negative and three positive. Of 138 Muicrometris fed Donazx, 12 proved posi- tive and one negative, while of 44 controls 43 were negative and one positive. In Mission Bay, an arm of the sea near San Diego, Cymatogaster breeds abundantly in April and May in the kelp and eel grass which line its shores. There are no Donax in the bay and the young perch are apparently never infested. Feeding Donax to 24 of these young fishes resulted in infesting 16, while 16 control fish were all negative. That all the experimental fish in these experiments VOL. 43, NO. 3 OLA JOLLA MISSION PACIFKE OCEAN OSAN DIEGO SAN DIEGO BAY Fig. 3—Map of the San Diego region, Calif. received metacercariae is rendered virtually certain by the fact that of 400 clams examined only five lacked these organisms. I have calculated the significance of these results by a formula in Tippett (1937) we eS SV1/N + 1/N’ and S _ 2 — XP EG ee 7 N= 1224 where X and X’ represent the averages of the experimental and the control observations, « and x’ the value of each experimental] and control observation respectively, and N and WN’ the number of these observations. Knowing the value of T and the number of observations, both experi- mental and control, the probability of the result, based solely on chance, can be determined from a table compiled by Dr. George F. McEwen of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography.* Applying this formula to the first of the above experiments it becomes 7 = (143 — 0)/SV/.2857 = Ee where S = ~/(1 — .143)/12 = .25, which gives a probability of .1465. That is, there is about one chance in seven that this result might be due to chance alone. Including both of the infested ex- perimental fish in the calculation, which is reasonably justified, the probability becomes 0.044, or about 1 in 25. Making a similar calcula- 3 This table is based on one in Fisher’s Sta- tistical methods for research workers but ‘is more comprehensive. Marcy 1933 tion for the other experiments recorded above the probabilities in none of them exceed 1 in 1,000. The percentage of infested fish from different regions is also significant. Donax occurs only on the beaches where it is subjected to wave action and is alternately submerged and exposed by the tides. In both Mission and San Diego Bays (see map) tidal action occurs but wave action is absent, as is Donaz, while on the beach at La Jolla it is present in vast numbers in certain years. Both of the bays connect with the sea through narrow channels which may serve to isolate their fish from the open sea, at least for considerable periods. Unfortunately I have in- adequate data for the same species of fish, but a comparison of different species, all of which serve as hosts for the parasite is of much interest. In 1935 of 26 Embiotoca taken at La Jolla all but three were infested, several of them heavily, while of 33 Micrometris and 64 Cymatogaster from San Diego Bay only one of the former and none of the latter were infested. Many corvina were also taken at La Jolla in this year all but one of which were infested. It is obvious from these results that fish which have access to Donax are extensively infested, while those deprived of it seldom are. BIBLIOGRAPHY Douurus, R. Pu. Liste critique des cercaires ma- rines a queue sétigeére signalées jusqu’a present. Trav. Stat. Zool. Wimereux 9: 43-65. 1925. Hanson, M. L. Some digenetic trematodes of marine fishes of Bermuda. Proc. Helminth. Soc. Wash- ington 17: 74-88. 1950. Hopkins, 8. H. New genera and species of the PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 93 family Monorchidae (Trematod)a with a dis- cussion of the excretory system. Journ. Parasit. 27: 395-407. 1941. Manter, H. W. Monorchidae (Trematoda) from fishes of Tortugas, Florida. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc. 61: 349-60. 1942. Martin, W. E. The life cycle of Monorcheides cummingiae, with special reference to its ef- fect on the invertebrate host. Biol. Bull. 79: 131-44. 1940. Nicotu, W. On two new trematode parasites from British food-fishes. Parasitology 5: 197-202. 1913. Tippett, L. H. C. The methods of statistics. Lon- don, 1937. ViutoT, F.-C.-A. Organization et développement de quelques especes de trématodes endoparasites marins. Ann. Sei. Nat. Zool., 6e ser., 8: 40 pp. 1878. Youne, R. T., anp Fox, D. L. The structure and function of the gut in surf perches (Embioto- cidae) with reference to their carotenoid me- tabolism. Biol. Bull. 71: 217-37. 1936. ABBREVIATIONS USED ON FIGURES A, reproductive anlage. C, caecum. C’, cirrus. C”, cirrus pouch. KE, excretory bladder. G, glands. G’, gonopore. L, Laurer’s canal. M, metraterm. O, oral sucker. O’, ovary. P, pharynx. P’, prostate. S, seminal vesicle. T, testis. U, uterus. V, ventral sucker. V’, vitellarium. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 458TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 458th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the hbrary of the Cosmos Club on November 17, 1952, was called to order by President RaMBERG at 8:03 p.m. with the fol- lowing in attendance: WALTER Rampera, H. 8. RappLeye, J. A. Stevenson, W. F. Fosuaa, A. T. McPHERson, W. R. Wepet, Sara E. BranHaM, W. W. Dinui, F. M. DEFANDORF, Frank M. Snrzuer, A. G. McNisu, L. A. Sprnp- LER, HerBertT G. Dorsey, Martin A. Mason, E. H. Waker, W. N. Fenton, J. R. SWALLEN, and J. P. KE. Morrison. The President announced the appointments of W. T. Reap and N. L. Drake to the Science Education Committee. It was recommended that the Committee on Policy and Planning together with the Executive Committee consider publishing a simplified Red Book, and that it list the Members of the Acad- emy, the Constitution and the Bylaws, and in- formation pertaining to the objectives of the Academy, and that a page be devoted to each of the Affiliated Societies. The hope was expressed that this material can be published early next year. Chairman McPuHeErson, of the Committee for the Encouragement of Science Talent, presented Q4 JOURNAL OF THE a report that listed 45 members of professional societies who are now cooperating in the Pro- motion of Science Talent. This group has been organized to provide effective contact with stu- dents through assembly programs in all local private and public junior and senior high schools, at which an engineer or scientist will speak. They will also provide for group conferences with students in cooperation with science supervisors and school principals. Messrs. McPHERsoN and McNisu spoke of the Christmas Lectures to be sponsored by the Philo- sophical Society for the Washington Junior Acad- emy of Science. The first lecture is scheduled for December 30 on which date Dr. Lanp, of the Polaroid Corporation, will speak. The President read the following report of the Nominating Committee: The Nominating Committee, consisting of the Vice-Presidents of the Academy, met at the Cosmos Club on Monday, October 27, 1952. The meeting was called to order at 8-15 p.m. by A. G. McNisH, who presided. Others present were: HERBERT G. DorsEy, JoHN K. Tayior, JouHN A. STEVENSON for LEE M. Hutcuins, and ARNOLD He Scorr: The nominees selected for the offices to be filled by balloting by members in December were as follows: For President-Elect, Francis M. Drer- ANDORF; for Secretary, JASON R. SwALueEn; for Treasurer, Howarp S. RappLeye; and for the Board of Managers to serve from January 1953 to January 1956 (two to be elected), MArtTINn A. Mason, RAyMonp J. SEEGER, WiLuiAM T. Reap, and Hrerspert G. Dorsey. The death on October 13, 1952, of Dr. PauL G. Nera, Director of the U. S. Public Health, was announced. Senior Editor FosHage reported conversations subsequent to the last meeting with F. N. Fren- KIEL who thought that four to six articles in mathematics and physics would have to be pub- lished in each number of the JouRNAL to build up sufficient interest in the JouRNAL in these fields. Dr. Foshag felt that this would require a large increase in the budget. President RAMBERG suggested everything possible be done to main- tain and broaden general reading interest and suggested that it might prove attractive to read- ers if a section were devoted to prompt publica- tion of brief notices of new developments in these fields. The meeting adjourned at 9:55 p.m. 459TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 459th meeting of the Board of Managers WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, No. 3 held in Room 304 of the Cosmos Club on De- cember 15, 1952, was called to order by President RAMBERG at 8:03 p.m. with the following in at- tendance: WALTER RAMBERG, F. M. DEFANDORF, H. 8. Rappieye, J. A. STEVENSON, FRANK M. SETZLER, C. F. W. MurseBECK, Sara E. BRaAn- HAM, R. G. Bates, Hues T. O’NEILL, Joun K. Taytor, W. A. Dayton, A. H. Scorr, L. AL SPINDLER, M. A. Mason, E. H. WaAuKeEr, H. W. Wetts, W. N. Frenron, and, by special invita- tion, J. R. Swauuten, L. E. Yocum, Ropert G. Duncan, and LAWRENCE A. Woop. The Secretary read the following report for the Executive Committee: Meeting of the Executive Committee Decem- ber 12, 1952, attended by Messrs. Dayton, Ram- berg, Rappleye, Setzler, and Defandorf. Mr. Day- ton, Chairman of the Policy and Planning Committee, reported on the recommendation that his committee offered in answer to the question raised at the May meeting of the Board as to what material newly elected members should receive from the Academy. There was general agreement that newly elected members should receive in addition to the usual letter telling of election and the monthly copies of the Journal, a certificate of membership, a copy of the Academy Bylaws, in- formation on the history and aims of the Academy, information on the Affiliated Societies, and a cur- rent listing of Academy members. After a discussion of detail the Executive Com- mittee was of the opinion that in future Red Books the Academy should list Academy members but should not attempt to include the names of mem- bers of its Affiliated Societies. It was felt that in terms of the 50th anniversary issue, the current 1947-48 Red Book now out of print, the next issue could well be reduced in complexity and size. In brief it was felt that in the future Red Books should contain the following minimum informa- tion: 1. A brief history of the Academy. 2. Paragraphs describing how the objectives of the Academy are being met. 3. The Academy Bylaws and Standing Rules of the Board of Managers. 4. Descriptive material on the Affiliated So- cieties including a current listing of their officers. 5. List of Academy members with addresses, and separate groupings of members in accordance with employment connections. 6. Listing of usual meeting-times-and-places of the Affiliated Societies. A preliminary draft of material for (2) above was presented and it was understood that the Secretary and Treasurer will assemble the other information needed for publication. It was understood that the Treasurer will ob- tain estimates as to the cost of printing the Red Book by letterpress and a similar estimate for photo-offset reproduction, looking forward to pos- sible annual publication of the Red Book in the Marcu 1953 above simplified form, an edition to be published early next year. The Executive Committee considers that sepa- rate certificates of membership should be issued to each new member and to those active members who did not receive certificates after they were dis- continued. The Executive Committee is hopeful that suit- ably inexpensive editions of the Red Book and desirable but less expensive membership certifi- cates can be prepared so that they may be retained as annual budget items. Methods of preparation of certificates were discussed and will be investigated as to cost. The treasurer will include these as appropriate items in next year’s budget. There was a discussion of a letter from the National Science Foundation. The Foundation is not in a position to assist financially in the publi- cation of the Index. It was felt that the Academy should proceed without delay to publish the In- dex. The Committee on Monographs should prepare plans for widely circulating the announce- ment of publication of the Index, as this should prove helpful in recovering a fair proportion of the total cost through greater purchases by li- braries and other nonsubscribers to the JOURNAL. This report was approved. Chairman WELLs of the Committee on Meet- ings mentioned that the following meeting on January 15 was scheduled as the Annual Dinner Meeting of the Academy. It was decided to leave all arrangements in the hands of the Meetings Committee. Chairman Fenton of the Committee on Mono- graphs reported that he had been in touch with Mr. Oruser and that the galley proof of the Index has been received. It appears that on a double-column basis the Index will run about 330 to 400 pages. Jason R. SwALLeN, Chairman of the Com- mittee on Awards for Scientific Achievement, asked the Chairmen of his subcommittees who had been invited to attend this meeting to present nominations for the awards. Chairman Yocum of the Grants-in-Aid Com- mittee presented a report filed with the Secre- tary that recommended a grant of $200 for the purchase of radioactive sodium from the Atomic Energy Commission to Epwarp Hacskayuo for a mycorrhizal research to be carried out at the Institute of Physiological Research in Uppsala, Sweden, under Dr. Elias Melin, a world authority on this subject. This research will be made in completion of requirements for a Ph.D. degree at George Washington University. Mr. Dayton, Chairman of the Policy and Planning Committee, presented a report for his Committee which was filed with the Secretary. It included in addition to the items reported PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY O5 above as being adopted at the meeting of the Executive Committee the following paragraph: With regard to finances: There is general agree- ment among the Committee members that the Academy’s finances should be sound and that we should keep out of debt; that our annual income (about 90 percent) should be spent only for definite objectives—such as the JOURNAL, the Junior Acad- emy, appropriate meetings and conferences, and the stimulation and advancement of science in our area—with perhaps 10 percent held as a re- serve for contingencies. Majority sentiment is that permanent headquarters with a paid full-time executive secretary is ‘‘very far in the future’’ and should not be considered unless and until justified by the amount of business and income of the Academy. There was a discussion of the possibility of a paid secretarial arrangement by Messrs. WELLS, Dayton, and RappLeye that confirmed the con- clusion of this Committee. For the Committee on the Encouragement of Science Talent President RamMBERe reported for A. T. McPuHeERson that the announcements of ‘the Christmas Lecture of the Philosophical So- ciety of Washington were being sent to all mem- bers of the Washington Junior Academy of Sci- ences. He reported that up till then a total of $510 had been received from Affiliated and sey- eral other Societies in support of the District of Columbia Annual Science Fair. The Secretary reported the death of Dr. Epw1n F. Wenpt on September 30 and of Dr. CHARLES L. G. ANDERSON on December 10, 1952. The meeting adjourned at 10:00 p.m. 460TH MEETING OF BOARD OF The 460th meeting of the Board of Managers held in Room 304 of the Cosmos Club on January 12, 1953, was called to order by President Ram- BERG at 8:02 p.m. with the following in attend- ance: WALTER RAaMBERG, F. M. Serzimr, F. M. DeranporrF, H.S8. Rappers, J. A. STEVENSON, W. F. Fosuaa, A. T. McPHErson, F. W. Houes, H. G. Dorssty, Sara E. Branuam, W. W. DirsnwAsiG WVioNica: He W.-'Poos, A. Scort, R. 8. Dini, L. A. SprnpLerR, and, by invitation, E. H. Watker, H. W. WEetts, J. R. SwaAuuen, and J. P. E. Morrison. Chairman WELLs of the Committee on Meet- ings spoke of the final arrangements for the dinner meeting on January 15 at Hotel 2400. The Secretary expressed the regrets of Chair- man Dayton of the Committee on Policy and Planning that he could not attend the meeting. He reported for the Chairman the receipt of a letter from Past President NatHan R. SMITH recommending approval of affiliation with the Academy of the Society of Metals. Receipt of MANAGERS 96 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES this letter completes the unanimous approval by his committee. The Board on the basis of this recommendation instructed the Secretary to for- ward the required supporting material and ballot for affiliation of the Society of Metals to the membership. Chairman McPuHerson of the Committee for the Encouragement of Science Talent reported that members of the Junior Academy had been guests of the Philosophical Society at the first Christmas Lecture of a series of annual lectures. This lecture, by Dr. Epwin H. Lanp of the Polaroid Corporation, resulted in very favorable comments and constituted an excellent initiation of this project for increasing the interest of youth in science. Twenty teachers have requested ap- plications and examination blanks for the West- inghouse Science Talent Search. This year ar- rangements have been completed to include in this search the senior high schools in Virginia and Maryland within a radius of 25 miles from Wash- ington, the area encompassing resident members of the Washington Academy. Approval of this arrangement has been received from the Virginia Academy of Sciences; the Maryland Academy is not at present actively participating in this search. Chairman McPHrrRson mentioned that the Society of Chemical Engineers and the Wash- ington Section of the Chemical Society are plan- ning a demonstration lecture in February by Professor ALLEN of Princeton University. This meeting is designed to promote interest in science on a father-son attendance basis. Chairman McPHrERSON reported that the Sev- enth Annual Science Fair will be held at American University with one room devoted to Junior and another to Senior High School science exhibits. It is estimated that the cost of materials inci- VOL. 43, NO. 3 dental to operation of the fair will be $1000, whereas contributions from the affiliated societies and others now total only $540. He requested action by the Board on a contribution by the Academy, and $200 was approved as a logical expenditure by the Board for this purpose. The Secretary announced the deaths of the following members: Mirtam L. BomuHarp on December 16, 1952, and ArrHur B. Lamp on May 15, 1952. The Treasurer reported on estimates from the Waverly Press for printing a new abridged form of Red Book. One thousand copies as planned would cost approximately $806; if the Constitu- tion and Bylaws were omitted, the cost would be approximately $720. Senior Editor FosHaG submitted a preliminary report for the year, indicating an approximate unexpended balance of $204.05. Vice-President McNisH outlined the desira- bility of equipping the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club with a better motion-picture pro- jector. It is felt that the project is one for con- certed action by the Academy and its affiliated societies. This matter is to be considered as un- finished business for action at the next meeting of the Board of Managers. The Secretary suggested that the new Policy and Planning Committee give consideration to the affiliation of additional societies that have been suggested. The possibilities for affiliation of other societies have not been reviewed for about seven years. The formal meeting of the Board adjourned at 9:40 p.m. to partake of refreshments provided by retiring President RamMBErRG who thanked the Board and his committees for their cooperation. F. M. Dreranporr, Secretary. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences ESTE. SE NSE I ae rae em F. M. Serzier, U. 8. National Museum ereSeIeME-CICEL. 22 once ck ke es F. M. Dreranporr, National Bureau of Standards TNR e Oe bk Jason R. Swauuen, U.S. National Museum | _ OES oy | Howarp S. Rapretere, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey REE Me ka ke Se els we Joun A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications _ Haraup A. Renper, U.S. National Museum Vice-Presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Enuasophied! oociety of Washington................0.....0 60 e eee A. G. McNisH Anthropological Society of Washington..................... Wiuuiam H. GILBERT iolesrealoociety of Washington......................... Hucu Tuomas O’NEILL Ghemiesa! society of Washington. ....../................. GrorcE W. Irvine, JR. Paromolartcal society of Washington. .................0.0.0...05. 05 F. W. Poos Meine eorraphic SOCIeEtY............. 0.0.50. 00 cece eee ALEXANDER WETMORE Geoloeical pociety of Washington........................00.0.. A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................. FREDERICK O. CoE Mme EPISLOrICd! DOCICLY . 2... cece ew be ccc eee cee ees GILBERT GROSVENOR arses! pociety of Washington......-...........0.0.0..65. Harry A. BorTHWICK Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... GEORGE F. GRAVATT Wesmnerenmisociety Of Hngineers................ 006.0202 cee cee eee C. A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers.. ARNOLD H. Scorr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers RicHARD S. DILL Hehminthelostcal Society of Washington........................0-. LL. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists.......... GLENN SLOCUM Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fioyp W. Hove Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers....... HERBERT GRovE DorRsEY District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Sectien, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine N. R. Evuts Elected Members of the Board of Managers: Do 202i 52 Sara E. BRannam, Mitton Harris oo Loe Le R. G. Bates, W. W. DIEHL > TS US Se LS 7 ee eee ee M. A. Mason, R. J. SEEGER bere) WPGNaGeETS..........-....-----.-- All the above officers plus the Senior Editor Demme meaniers and Associate Editors....... 002... 66. cee tne ee [See front cover] Mreceuiive Commiitee..................- F. M. Setzer (chairman), F. M. DEFANDORF, J.R. SwaLuen, H.S. Rappteyve, W. W. RusBey Committee on Membership...... K. H. Waker (chairman), Myron S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE Cottam, C. L. Crist, Joon Fasber, ANcus M. Grirrin, D. BREESE JONEs, FRANK C. Kracex, Louris R. Maxwe tt, A. G. McNisu, Epwarp C. REINHARD, REESE I. Satter, Leo A. Sutnn, Francis A. Smita, Heinz Specut, Horace M. TRENT, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings................. Watson Davis (chairman), Joan W. ALDRICH, AustTIN CxuarK, D. J. Davis Committee on Monographs (W. N. FENTON, chairman) : 227 LST TI 2 S. F. Buaxe, F. C. Kracex Meaicnmiitty 1950... 22. ee ee eee 23: | ne 3 W.N. Fenton, ALAN STONE Per MIIE PODO cw eee eee G. ARTHUR CoopER, JAMES I. HorrMAN Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (A. V. ASTIN, general chairman): For Biological Sciences...... HERBERT FRIEDMANN (chairman), Harry A. Bortu- wick, Sara FE. BranuaM, Ira B. HANSEN, BENJAMIN ScHwaRTz, T. DALE STEWART For Engineering Sciences...... SaMuUEL LeEvy (chairman), MicnarL GOLDBERG, EK. H. Kennarp, E. B. Roperts, H. M. Trent, W. A. WILDHACK For Physical Sciences...... G. B. ScouBaAvER (chairman), R. 8S. Burtnerton, F. C. Kracex, J. A. SANDERSON, R. J. SEecER, J. S. WILLIAMS For Teaching of Science..M. A. Mason (chairman), F. E. Fox, Monror H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research............... Karu F. HerzFELD (chairman), Herpert N. Eaton, L. E. Yocum Committee on Policy and Planning: Mreplomtary 1954. 2. oc. esc e e k H. B. Cotuins, W. W. Rusey (chairman) PREG POS oy ls ee ews wees oso a ed L. W. Parr, F. B. SILSBEE lo) DSU AE ere ee E. C. CritteENDEN, A. WETMORE Commitiee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPHERson, chairman): 22 SEL TLL 2 a ae nee OP nee es J. M. CatpweE.u, W. L. ScHMITT Metanusary 1955......-.. FSA os Ope 4. A. T. McPuerson, W. T. Reap LO) . LECULAR LS 6 Oe ea nrg tee ser AUSTIN Ciark, J. H. McMILLEN memecsenraiive an Cownei of A. A. A. S.. 2.06 e ee cece cca ss eee Watson Davis Committee of Auditors....... Louise M. RussEuu (chairman), R. 8. Dru1, J. B. REESIDE Committee of Tellers...... C. L. Garner (chairman), L. G. Hensest, Myrna F. JoNEs CONTENTS Page PALEONTOLOGY.—Jedria, a new subgenus of Naticopsis. Eis L. YOCHBESON 0. 6.0.6 cou a UW so no oe dde%sle cs ale Soo alle ue ee 65 PAaLEONTOLOGY.—Cardiniferella, n. gen., the type of a new family of Carboniferous Ostraceda. I.G:Soun...:.........-00=0 eee 66 Borany.—Some new combinations in Guatemalan Bromeliaceae. LYMAN’ Be SMITH O37) Fanboy... ons tee ale ne oe ee 68 ENToMOLOGY.—Studies in Panama Culicoides (Diptera: Heleidae): I, Descriptions of six new species. Wuiiis W. WirTH and FRANKLIN SoH BUANTONG es oo cs clea we ls. nud ac hl RUE ee 69 EntToMoLocy.—Wenzella obscura, a new genus and new species of flea from Guatemala (Siphonaptera). RosBert TRAUB.............. LE ORNITHOLOGY.—A taxonomic study of the American dunlin (Erolia alpina: subspp.). W. H. Cuype-Topp.. .... <....+:-2.: 5 eee 85 ZooLocy.—Postmonorchis donacis, a new species of monorchid trema- tode from the Pacific coast, and its life history. R.T.Youne.... 88 PROCHEDINGS: THE ACADEMY... ... 2.00600 ee stteu cd es 2 93 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. Vout. 43 Aprit 1953 No. 4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS J. P. E. Morrison JOHN C. EwERS R. K. Coox U.8. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.8. NATIONAL MUSEUM NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. CHAcE, JR. ELBERT L. LITT xe, JR. ZOOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrMan Puitiep DRUCKER CHEMISTRY ANTHROPOLOGY Dean B. CowiEz Davip H. DUNKLE PHYSICS GEOLOGY ALAN STONE ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Roya & GuILForRD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate): Copies A pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13 .00 $16.25 $3 .00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haraup A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Kates for the JouRNAL.—Per yéar........\. .20-.25.s0e 42 eee $7 .50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*..............:. — — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)-——....- 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 42, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $356.00. Monoerapu No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,” by Herbert Friedmann. $4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete...............27.:-.-: 40s eee $25.00 Single volumes, unbound: 2.5455. 50: Oss. 6b ee oe Bern eee eee 2.00 Single: mum Derss noe is SE aed oda wean Dnckeds ke OR ee .25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’”’ and ad reer to the Treasurer, H. 8. Rappieye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12, De. Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 43 April 1953 No 4 GENERAL SCIENCE.—Science in the Department of State: J. W. Joycn, Deputy Science Adviser, Department of State. (Communicated by Walter Ramberg.) I am sure that this audience needs no reminder of the vital role that science and technology plays in shaping the affairs of our daily lives. We expect science and technology not only to take a major part in providing most of the material things we associate with modern civilization but also to produce a steadily increasing standard of living. We depend heavily upon science and technology to build strong military forces to safeguard our national security. It 1s not surprising therefore to find that science is becoming inevitably and inexorably inter- linked with the affairs of government. There are many indications of this. We find, for example, that scientists and engineers are to an increasing extent being placed in high positions in government—positions that in- volve broad policy planning, as distinguished from what might be termed tactical plan- ning. Other evidences are found in the marked increase in federal budget items designated for research and development since the pre-World War II period and in the creation of new agencies and establishments with responsibilities in the field of science since World War II. These include the National Science Foundation, the Interdepartmental Committee for Scien- tific Research and Development, the Re- search and Development Board in the Department of Defense, and the Office of the Science Adviser in the Department of State. This evening I should like to tell you a httle more about this last-named organiza- tion, outlining some of the factors which led to its establishment, recounting some of 1 Address delivered at the annual meeting of the Washington Academy of Sciences on January 15, 1953. 97 its accomplishments to date, and venturing some opinions regarding its future. The relationship between science and foreign affairs is, perhaps, less apparent than in a number of the more obvious cases just mentioned. E. M. Friedwald, writing in Impact, has put it as follows: The conduct of foreign affairs has always been a traditional preserve of conservatism. But science is not conservative. This perhaps explains in some measure why science, which has lately infiltrated into so many spheres of government activity, has made so little headway in penetrating into the field of foreign affairs. Few are the embassies and legations which do not have their military, naval, air, commercial, and press attaches; but science attaches of a comparable status could until re- cently be counted on the fingers of one hand. In 1947, in an effort to continue the excellent scientific haison with our British colleagues that had been built up through the war years, the Department of State embarked on what was then considered a rather unusual venture in Foreign Service operations. It placed in the American Embassy in London a small science group, staffed by American scientists of estab- lished reputation, each serving for a period ranging from three months to a year or more. This operation proved quite success- ful, and in all some 12 or more scientists served at various times on this staff, al- though usually there were not more than two in the Embassy concurrently. While the venture proved reasonably successful, the fact that even greater results were not realized was undoubtedly due to the lack of a formal supporting organization in the Department in Washington. It was only through the very commendable efforts of a small number of individuals in the Depart- oO Ue OS JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ment who undertook to backstop this opera- tion as more or less extra duties that any effective assistance was extended to the London staff. THE BERKNER REPORT In 1949 the Department of State made a series of studies to determine a_ suitable reorganization plan to bring its structure into conformity with recommendations made by the Hoover Commission. One of the task force groups that dealt with these matters reported that The Department is dealing on the one hand with foreign policy matters which have a great effect upon United States scientific policy and on the other hand with international scientific activities which have an impact on foreign policy. These matters are being handled at various points with- out adequate scientific evaluation... There followed a recommendation that the Department select a scientist of national reputation to serve as a temporary con- sultant to determine and made _ recom- mendations on, first, the role of the Depart- ment in national scientific policy, and second, appropriate organization and staff- ing required to carry out its responsibilities. Following the approval of this recom- mendation, Dr. Lloyd V. Berkner, of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, was appointed as a special consultant to the Department of State in October 1949. He was given the task of examining the whole question of science and foreign rela- tions and of making recommendations con-_ cerning the Department’s responsibilities in connection therewith. The resulting survey produced the Department of State report Science and foreign relations, which was re- leased in May 1950. The Berkner report, as this publication has since been called, sought to answer two important questions: the first, How can the potentialities of scientific progress be inte- grated into the formulation of foreign policy and the administration of foreign relations so that the maximum advantage of scientific progress and development can be acquired by all peoples?; the second, How can foreign relations be conducted in such a manner as to create the atmosphere that is essential to effective progress of science and tech- VOL. 43, NO. 4 nology? The report went on to recommend that United States foreign relations with respect to science and technology must take on a more positive and active character than had existed in the past. Policy makers must become aware of the scientific implications of their decisions as well as a means of obtaining sound evaluation of these implica- tions. The entire field of science and foreign relations was clearly too broad in its scope to permit effective exploration in a reason- able time and with available effort. It soon became apparent that a most important part of this whole field was the interchange of unclassified, openly available, scientific information. This, then, was to be the limited objective of the survey—and within this framework could be included exchange of publications and manuscripts, exchange of persons, attendance at international meet- ings, and similar operations through which scientific and technical information might be exchanged. It was further realized that perhaps the greatest need from the United States’ point of view lay in acquiring basic or fundamental scientific information from abroad and, accordingly, this aspect re- ceived initially the greatest consideration. OFFICE OF THE SCIENCE ADVISER AND SCIENCE STAFFS ABROAD In particular, the report recommended that a small office be established within the Department of State to be designated as the Office of the Science Adviser. It also recom- mended that small science staffs be estab- lished at certain American posts abroad. This report was adopted by the Department, and in February 1951 there came into existence on a formal basis the Office of the Science Adviser, reporting directly to the Under Secretary of State. In June and July of that year science staffs were placed in our missions in Stockholm and Bern, and the London staff, which had been continuing on an ad hoc basis since 1947, was aug- mented. In February 1952 a science staff was constituted in Paris, and in August of last year two science advisers were sent to the office of the United States High Com- missioner for Germany at Bonn. In the APRIL 1953 JOYCE: SCIENCE IN summer of 1952, the staff at Bern was with- drawn temporarily, leaving at the present time science attaches in our missions at London, Stockholm, Paris, and Bonn. The Office of the Science Adviser in the Department of State serves three functions: 1. It introduces science, through col- laboration with Department officers, where it is a factor to be considered in foreign policy formulation and administration. On some occasions it takes the initiative to encourage the Department to give proper consideration to the scientific implications of policies— implications that might otherwise go un- recognized. On other occasions it provides scientific evaluation and advice when re- quested for the development and effectua- tion of Department policies. Except for atomic energy matters, the Office of the Science Adviser alone within the Depart- ment carries these responsibilities and main- tains the necessary science liaison with government agencies, private scientific in- stitutions, industrial laboratories, and in- dividual scientists in this country and, through the science attaches, abroad. 2. It helps to conduct foreign relations for the advancement of science in this country through its familiarity with the objectives and interests of American scientists. As I have already said, our national well-being and security are largely dependent upon our scientific progress. This progress in turn depends mainly upon those results of fundamental scientific research that become available to American scientists from what- ever source. As Karl Compton observes, “Our outstanding American genius thus far has not been in scientific discovery, but has been in the combination of what is termed Yankee ingenuity and mass production and distribution ... When it comes to scientific discovery... America is not unique. Its achievements are respectable and its scien- tific stature has grown very rapidly. I would venture the statement that in the field of science the United States is the equal of any other nation, but this is very far indeed from saying that the United States has a scientific monopoly, or even a scientific majority.”’ By promoting the international exchange of scientific information, encouraging friendly STATE DEPARTMENT 99 relations with foreign scientists, helping to coordinate our scientific programs, and generally assisting scientists here and in friendly countries abroad through the con- duct of our foreign relations the Department contributes to the advancement of science and therefore to our national well-being and security. 3. It carries out coordinating functions. Thus, the Office of the Science Adviser. is responsive to the foreign scientific informa- tion needs of government agencies engaged in research, where such needs can be met from openly available sources. It is the central point in the Department for co- ordinating the foreign scientific activities of other government agencies, such as the National Science Foundation, within the framework of our foreign policy. Within the missions abroad the science staffs perform much the same functions as does the Office of the Science Adviser within the Department. The attache brings to the attention of the appropriate officers of the mission those scientific matters which should be given consideration. He also acts as adviser to the Chief of Mission and divisions of the mission on matters pertaining to science. In addition, he performs important representational functions. Essentially then, the Science Adviser and the attaches represent science as far as the State Department and the foreign missions are concerned, and at the same time, repre- sent the State Department in its relations ~ with science in this country and abroad. These functions serve to maintain a desirable closer relationship between foreign relations and science. RECENT ACCOMPLISHMENTS During the 20-odd months since the formal establishment of the Office of the Science Adviser a wide variety of problems have been dealt with. Experience has shown that there are indeed few areas within the Department of State that do not at some time or other deal with matters which include scientific aspects. Consider for example the field of traditional Foreign Service reporting. While a 2-man science staff in an embassy abroad cannot in any sense of the word hope to cover all fields of 100 JOURNAL OF THE science and technology in a given country, it can be most helpful in meeting a limited number of requests for specific information. These might include progress reports on certain projects prior to publication. In other cases, attaches may encounter items which they believe will be of interest to American science. In all such cases the attache would always first receive permis- sion from the investigator to return the information to this country for distribution to American science. The immediate postwar period witnessed distressing delays in scientific publication due to shortages of one kind or another, combined with imposing backlogs of manu- scripts. Under these circumstances spot reporting took on added significance in ex- pediting the exchange of scientific informa- tion. Now, however, publication has caught up, and reporting can therefore be confined to the more or less special cases. Even in these instances the operations are usually directed in such a manner that at the earliest possible moment the source and the end- user can be brought together directly so that normal exchange arrangements can be set up without the Department of State as an intermediary. In addition to the conventional exchange of printed or manuscript reports, there are the very important kinds of operations which brings scientists into direct personal contact with each other. These include all of the exchange programs involving professors, re- search investigators, and students, and the attendance at international scientific and technological conferences and congresses. In the exchange programs, the science attaches in the field have rendered valuable assistance in serving as members of the re- view boards which make the initial judgment on exchange projects. The Office of the Science Adviser has on numerous occasions helped to plan itineraries for visiting scien- tists coming from foreign countries. This office has also been able to notify our embassies and missions overseas When American scientists plan trips in those cases where we have been advised of such plans in advance. While, due to limited staffs, it is not possible to offer complete travel and WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 4 accommodation services for all scientific people going abroad, a certain amount of help can be extended in cases of real emer- gency. Another important operation of the science office is in serving as a focal point in the Department for the consideration of official representation at scientific international meetings. This has made it possible to assure the selection of groups of official delegates who are best suited professionally to represent American science at interna- tional meetings. There have been in the past unfortunate cases where the selection of candidates was made on the basis of their convenient presence at or near the meeting place at the time of the meeting rather than on scientific qualifications. A greater aware- ness of the needs of American science has resulted in a modest increase in the financial support given to official delegations to international non-governmental scientific meetings, although it is recognized that additional aid of this kind would be most desirable. Finally the Office of the Science Adviser and the science attaches overseas have done what they could to be of assistance to the officers in the Department and to consular officers in the field responsible for the ad- ministration of the visa laws to the end that the national interests can best be served in those cases which involve scientists. LIAISON WITH NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCES—-NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL At this point I should like to acknowledge the great assistance that the National Academy of Sciences—National Research Council has rendered to the Department of State in serving as the contact point with American science outside of government. During the writing of the Berkner report the Academy-Council, at the request of the Department, appointed a liaison member to the special survey group. It also appointed a special committee to critically review the manuscript of the report prior to its publica- tion. The Academy-Council clearly recog- nized its vital role as intermediary between State and American science, in general. To carry out this task, it expanded its facilities to include an Office of International Rela- APRIL 1953 tions. Through this office the Department receives, for example, recommendations for the selection of official delegations to scien- tific meetings; it obtains aid in dealing with specific problems through the availability of the services of individual members of the Academy-Council and its various divisions and committees; it makes possible the dis- tribution to American science outside of the government of unclassified scientific infor- mation received from science attaches over- seas. RECRUITMENT OF SCIENCE ATTACHES Now a word as to the staffing pattern that has been followed for the overseas missions. Traditionally, the ground for understanding between scientists has been a mutual recognition and respect for ability and accomplishment. This fact clearly sug- gested that to be most effective, producing scientists, preeminent in their field, should be selected for the overseas staffs. Such persons can expect to be accepted as col- leagues and equals by the foreign scientific communities. The senior science attache in each post should be a man, therefore, combining scientific stature, mature judg- ment, tact in working with his colleagues and associates, and wherever possible, pro- ficiency in the language of the country to which he is assigned. When one combines these characteristics in one person the result is a man whose services to his university or laboratory may almost be classed as in- dispensable and who is difficult to obtain even on a temporary basis. Our experience so far has shown that the most likely sources of such people are the universities. This has resulted in the acceptance of a 15-month tenure of duty, since it 1s usually possible to secure such people for a sabbatical year, with the preceding and succeeding summers. While this length of time is all too short to produce the maximum effectiveness from the overall point of view, we have felt that it is the most reasonable compromise, taking into consideration all of the aspects involved. If a producing scientist remains absent from his laboratory for a period of much more then two to three years, he may well lose JOYCE: SCIENCE IN STATE DEPARTMENT 101 touch with his field. This, then, sets the maximum limit as far as the scientist’s own interests are concerned. The whole problem of recruiting science attaches has proved to be a most difficult one during these first months of operation. Quite naturally a producing scientist is extremely hesitant to leave a laboratory for an assignment as a science attache unless he is convinced that he can do a useful job. The very high standards which have been set for science attaches add further to the difficulties of finding people. Nevertheless, the results obtained so far through the selection of such preeminent persons have, it is felt, completely justified the staffing pattern chosen. It is our hope that as the operation continues it will become better known among scientists, and further there will be built up an ‘‘alumni’”’ of science attaches who will be willing to return for reassignment during subsequent years. In addition, former science attaches who have found the assignment interesting and profit- able can pass the word to their colleagues. CONCLUSION In conclusion, I should say that the ac- complishments of the Office of the Science Adviser and the overseas staffs have more than justified their existence. Certainly, if work load is any measure of need, this is true. In addition to the day-to-day opera- tions which result in the transmission of specific items of scientific information, and the various other services described, there is, I believe, a much more valuable benefit which, at the moment, may be termed intangible, but which in later years can be extremely productive in terms of concrete results. I refer to the improvement in the traditional understanding between scien- tists in America and abroad which this operation will engender. In such an atmos- phere, we are far more likely to learn promptly from our colleagues in other countries of significant discoveries in science, discoveries which, combined with American initiative and production ability, can add materially to our national welfare and security. 102 JOURNAL OF THE ENGINEERING.— WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 4 Dynamic. stress-strain curves for mild steel using the tangent modulus procedure. WiLL1AM R. CAMPBELL, National Bureau of Standards. (Communicated by Walter Ramberg.) In this note the author wishes to report on some dynamic stress-strain curves for mild steel obtained by the tangent modulus procedure. This procedure was described in detail in a paper recently presented before the Society for Experimental Stress Analysis (1). Briefly, a long bar is subjected to longitudinal impact, and the strain traveling up the bar is measured directly as a function of time with wire strain gages. The stress can not be measured directly by any means known to the author. It is determined in- directly by integration of the tangent modulus or slope of the stress strain curve. This slope is proportional to the square of the velocity of propagation of the strain considered, as pointed out some years ago by Donnell (2) and von Karman (3). The velocity of propagation was measured d1- 90,000 80,000 70,000 60,000 50,000 Stress, /b/in? 40,000 30,000 20,000 10,000 O -OO! .002 -0O3 rectly by comparing carefully synchronized strain signals from wire strain gages spaced a known distance apart along the bar under impact. It should be noted that the pro- cedure of integration rests on the assump- tion that only one stress-strain curve applies at the strain rates of the test. Preliminary tests on copper reported in (1) were afflicted with a large scatter, but within this scatter the stress-strain curves under impact coincided with that obtained in the conventional static tensile test. In the meantime the testing technique has been improved and the tests have been extended to mild steel, which differs from copper in having an upper and lower yield point and in showing a peculiar delay in yielding under suddenly applied stress (4). Fig. | shows static and dynamic stress- Static tensile strength Pi Strain Fic. 1—Comparison of stress-strain curves for static loading and dynamic loading of mild steel. (Velocity of impact = 57 ft sec. Time to maximum ‘strain = = 3h) < Ire sae.) APRIL 1953 strain curves obtained by the above pro- cedures for three similar specimens of hot rolled mild steel. Two of the test bars were subjected to longitudinal tensile impact at an impact velocity of 57 ft/sec. Neither bar exhibited any plastic strain for the largest strains recorded or showed any discon- tinuity in the dynamic curve in the vicinity of the sharply defined static yield point. It is also significant that the maximum stresses generated did not cause failure in in either bar even though these stresses exceeded the static tensile strength. Obviously, rates of straining of the order of 150 per second applied in the longitudinal impact test have a pronounced effect on the stress-strain curve for mild steel. The shape of the stress strain curve of mild steel beyond the elastic range would be of great interest in view of the importance of this material. It would require not only further tests with impacts of various rise NICOL: NEW PRIONODONT PELECYPOD GENUS 103 times but also a generalization of the tangent modulus procedure to make _ it applicable to the determination of the family of stress-strain curves for various strain rates. Such work is being planned in the Engineering Mechanics Section of the National Bureau of Standards. REFERENCES (1) CampBELL, W. R. Determination of dynamic stress-strain curves from strain waves in long bars. Proc. Soc. Exp. Stress Anal. 10 (1). 1952. (2) DonnE tL, L. H. Longitudinal wave transmis- sion and impact. Trans. Amer. Soc. Mech. Eng. 52 (1). 1930. (3) KarMAN, THEODORE VON. On the propagation of plastic deformation in solids. National Defense Research Council Report No. A-29, OSRD 365. Feb. 2, 1942. (4) Cuarxk, D.S.,and Woop, D.S8. The time delay for the iniatation of plastic deformation at rapidly applied constant stress. Proc. Amer. Soc. Test. Mat. 49: 717. 1949. PALEONTOLOGY —A new prionodont pelecypod genus. Davin Nicou, U.S. Na- tional Museum. In 1944 Olsson (pp. 50-51) described a new species of pelecypod which he named Cardium (2) abnormalis. The description was based on one left valve from the Upper Cretaceous of the Paita region, Peru. The hinge was not exposed, and the specimen also lacked other diagnostic morphologic characters. Recently Dr. Olsson received two more left valves from Colombia which he gave me to describe. One specimen had a part of the hinge teeth and ligament exposed. Both of these parts of the shell resemble Glycymeris, but some other morphologic characters are unusual. After careful prep- aration and examination, I believe that the specimens represent an undescribed genus. Pettersia Nicol, n. gen. Type species—Cardium (2) abnormalis Olsson. Remarks——This genus is named for Dr. V. Petters, micropaleontologist for the International Petroleum (Colombia) Ltd., who released two additional left valves for study. Pettersia abnormalis (Olsson), 1944 Figs. 1-5 Cardium (2?) abnormalis Olsson, Bull. Amer. Pal. 28 (111): 50-51, pl. 17, fig. 3. 1944. Description.—Part of Olsson’s original descrip- tion is as follows: The shell is of medium size with a Fragum-like form and a thick, solid texture; umbo high, wide, ending above in a small prosogyrate beak; um- bonal ridge high, angled, the dorsal-posterior area well defined and divided by a groove in the middle, the outer portion being flattened while the inner or side next the hinge is arched or vaulted; a deep furrow or groove extends from the ventral margin upwards towards the beak but is only faintly indi- cated on the umbo; surface 1s smooth except for irregularly distributed growth lines which at in- tervals are grouped together in resting marks; ven- tral margin crenulated; hinge unknown. With the two additional left valves given me by Olsson, I can add the following information to the description: The duplivincular ligament consists of five symmetrical chevron-shaped grooves as in Glycymeris. The hinge teeth, 34 in number, are symmetrically arranged in an arc on a moderately heavy hinge plate, the side teeth being longer than the central teeth; these teeth are typically like those of a prionodont pelecypod (Glycymeris, Trigonarca). The anterior adductor muscle scar is small, situated just below and posterior to the anterior end of the hinge plate; the posterior adductor muscle scar is relatively small, situated on a prominent buttress or flange 104 JOURNAL OF THE below the posterior end of the hinge plate. Like the flange or buttress for the posterior adductor muscle of Cucullaea, this flange runs anteriorly toward the umbo. The ornamentation consists of small, closely spaced radial ribs which are some- what beaded. The most characteristic feature is the large suleus, which runs from the umbonal region to the ventral border. The sulcus is located along the posterior third of the shell. Posterior to the sulcus is a high ridge, and the posterior end of the shell is flattened and truncated. The sulcus is seen in other prionodonts, but it is rarely so prominent on mature specimens. Young speci- mens of Cucullaea and Anadara also show this feature. The sulcus is more prominent on species of Arca, where it is usually connected with the byssal notch. It is problematical whether Pettersia was attached by a byssus, and it will remain so until a specimen of a right valve is examined. The largest specimen has a high umbo and a tall ligamental area. The beak is located above and at approximately the center of the ligamental area. Olsson states that the beak is prosogyrate, WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, NO. 4 but the material I have examined does not defi- nitely confirm this; it appears to be orthogyrate or, at most, only slightly prosogyrate. The hinge teeth of Pettersia resemble those of Glycymerts, Peruarca, and Trigonarca. The liga- ment resembles that of Glycymeris and Tri- gonarca, and the crenulated margin is similar to that of Glycymerts. The buttress for the posterior adductor muscle, the ornamentation, the shape of the shell, and the crenulated ventral margin are like those of many of the Cucullaeidae. How- ever, Pettersia differs from these genera in having a very deep sulcus along the posterior third of the shell. Measurements.—As follows (left valves): Height Length Convexity Holotype, P. R. I. no. 4862...... 36.0 32.0 17.0 Hypotype, U. S. N. M. no. TO8690: 6 Pee ee ee Gate 40.4 41.8 19.0 Hypotype, Olsson Collection..... 53.9 48.2 pay Locality data—The holotype came from Tor- tuga, Paita region, Peru. The hypotypes (per- sonal communication from Olsson) came from Fias. 1-5.—FPettersia abnormalis: 1, Exterior view, hypotype, U.S.N.M. no. 108690; 2, exterior view, holotype, P.R.I. no. 4862; 3, interior view, same specimen as in Fig. 1; 4, exterior view, hypotype, A. A. Olsson Collection; 5, exterior view showing ornamentation, X 2, same specimen as in Fig. 4. All figures are of left valves. Figures 1-4 are all X 1. Holotype is from Maestrichtian of Paita region, Peru. Hypo- types are from Maestrichtian of upper part of Magdalena Valley, Colombia. Aprit 1953 the Upper Magdalena Valley, west side, south of Girardot, 3,300 meters east of El Valle and 7,900 meters north of San Luis, in a small affluent of the Rio Luisa, near a house called El Dinde, Tolima Province, Colombia. Age.—The holotype came from the Baculites zone, Maestrichtian stage, Upper Cretaceous. The hypotypes (personal communication from Olsson) were found in a shell bed in a band of sandy limestone 10 meters below a thin ridge of quartz pebble conglomerate. Pettersia abnormalis is associated with Foraminifera of the Maestrich- tian stage, including Szphogenerinoides bramletter Cushman and Hedberg. STRIMPLE: A NEW CARPOID FROM OKLAHOMA 105 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I am particularly indebted to Dr. A. A. Olsson, of Coral Gables, Fla., who sent me specimens for study and asked me to describe the new genus. Dr. Katherine V. W. Palmer kindly allowed me to borrow the holotype of Cardium (?) abnormalis from the collection at the Paleontological Re- search Institution, Ithaca, N. Y. Wm. T. Allen, of the U. S. National Museum, made the photo- graphs for the paper. REFERENCE Ousson, A. A. Contributions to the paleontology of northern Peru: Part VII, The Cretaceous of the Paita region. Bull. Amer. Pal. 28 (111): 146 pp., 17 pls. 1944. PALEONTOLOGY .—A new carpoid from Oklahoma. HARRELL L. STRIMPLE, Bar- tlesville, Okla. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) The new carpoid described below was found on a field expedition into the Criner Hills of southern Oklahoma made in the spring of 1950 by Mrs. Melba Strimple, Richard Alexander, and the author. An undescribed species of Archaeocrinus and Hybocrinus crinerensis Strimple and Wat- kins have been obtained from the same zone. Myeinocystites, n. gen. Thecea is compressed, slightly convex in mid- section of one side, and mildly concave on the opposite side. Following the morphological ter- minology of Bather (1900), the convex side is considered to be the right side and the apposing to be the left side. In the right side, there are 10 plates forming a marginal rim, or frame, and one is smaller than the others, being located in the extended lower right corner of the theca. Three of the marginal plates adjoin the stem. Within this marginal rim there are three large plates, and one small plate to the lower right. A small cluster of plates, resting in a notch between the two uppermost marginal plates, apparently marks an opening into the body cavity, probably a hydropore. - The left side is more complex. Marginal plates of the right side are curved sharply over to form the frame of the left side. Two additional plates are in contact with the stem, and 19 plates are present within the frame. A single small biserial arm rises in the marginal portion of the oral end of the theca and occupies a groove extending downward. To the left of its proximal extremity is found a long tubelike structure which appears to be an opening into the body cavity, though the function is a matter of conjecture. Immediately above the base of the arm there is a small cluster of plates, previously noted on the right side. A canal originates to the right of the arm base and follows the marginal rim past another opening to the right (probably the anus) and appears to terminate on a convex plate just below mid- height of the theca. The proximal portion of the above-mentioned convex plate terminates abruptly, forming a sharp notchlike structure which might represent another opening into the body cavity (? a primitive pore-rhomb). The opening which lies to the right of the arm is covered by seven minute plates which converge toward the center. The stem is wide, composed of thin columnals which do not form complete circlets owing to interruption by laterally directed sutures on the left side. Surface ornamentation consists of heavy gran- ules, or minute pustules, which do not form any definite pattern. They are more pronounced on the right side and are entirely absent on the arm, covering plates of the body openings, and in the canal of the left side. Genotype species.—M yeinocystites natus, n. sp. Occurrence-—Bromide formation, Ordovician; North America. Remarks.—The presence of a canal is not without precedence among the Anomalocystidae. In Trochocystites Barrande (1859) such a canal is reported running round the thecal cavity on the inside of the marginals. Three openings are pres- LO6 JOURNAL OF THE ent in that genus, one in the center of the oral end of the frame (? hydropore and gonopore) and one each to the right and left. Bather (1900) considered one to be the mouth and the other the anus, with question. Belemnocystites Miller and Gurley (1894) ap- pears to be more comparable to Myewnocystites than to other described forms. Unfortunately the specimens available to Miller and Gurley were damaged by silicification and the openings ob- literated. Under critical comparison significant differences are readily apparent. The plates of the marginal rim cover an equal portion of both the right (dorsal) and left (ventral) sides in Belemno- cystites, whereas in Myeinocystites only their edges are present on the left side. There are four large plates within the marginal rim of Belemnocystites in the right side, and no downward extension of the theca is present. In the present form there are three large plates within the frame, with a fourth, smaller plate in the downward extension of the theca. The plates within the marginals in the left side are more numerous in VM yeinocystites, which in itself indicates a more primitive form. Myeinocystites natus, n. sp. Figs. 1, 2 The theca is compressed, subovoid in outline, 18.3 mm in length by 14.4 mm wide. Midportion of the right side is mildly convex, and the left side is shallowly concave. Ten plates form the marginal rim of the right side, three of which are adjacent to the column. Four plates are present within the marginals. In the left side there are 21 plates within the frame. A single arm is com- posed of some 24 long, narrow, interlocking brachials and reposes in a groove in the upper portion of the left side of the theca. Just above the base of the arm there is a small pyramid of plates which probably marks an opening into the body cavity (? hydropore). A well-defined open- ing (? anus) is present to the right of the arm and is connected to the (?) hydropore by a narrow canal which follows the inner edges of the mar- ginals. The canal continues past the (?) anus which opening is covered by seven minute plates. A tubelike extension is present to the left of the proximal tip of the arm, and probably represent an opening into the body cavity. The entire surface of the theca and column is covered by minute pustules with the exception of the arm, covering plates of the body openings, and the canal. They are more pronounced on the WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 4 right side and tend to form small spines on the column. Remarks.—This species is more comparable to Belemnocystites wetherbyi Miller and Gurley than to other described forms. Intimate comparison is impossible due to the incomplete preservation of specimens referred to that species; however, some readily discernible differences are noted. Viewed from the right side there are nine plates in the marginal rim (excluding plates in contact with the stem) of B. wetherbyi, four to the left and five to the right. In M. natus there are only three to the left and five to the right, one of which is a Small plate in the downward extension of the theca. There is no extension of the theca in proxi- mal regions, either to the right or left, in B. wetherbyi. There are fewer plates, within the frame of B. wetherbyt, in the left side than found in the present species. It is interesting to note that Wetherby, as well as Miller and Gurley, noted the presence of a small node to the left of the arm and surmised the existence of an opening into the body cavity. It is almost certain that the tubelike extension of M. natus, which is in that area, represents an opening. Occurrence.—Bromide formation, Ordovician; bank of Spring Creek, a tributary of Hickory Creek, north of an exposure on Hickory Creek commonly known as ‘Rock crossing,” Criner Hills, southwest of Ardmore, Okla. Type.——Collected by H. L. Strimple. To be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. REFERENCES All cited references are listed in Bassler and Moody, Bibliographic and faunal index of Paleozoic Pelmatozoan Echinoderms, Geol. Soc. Amer. Spec. Pap. 45. 1943. Fies. 1-2.—Holotype of Myeinocystites natus, n. gen., n. sp., from right, and left sides, X2. Aprit 1953 HUI-LIN LI: GENUS SYMPLOCOS IN FORMOSA 107 BOTAN Y.—Critical notes on the genus Symplocos in Formosa. Hur-Lry Li, Morris Arboretum, University of Pennsylvania. The genus Symplocos is represented by over 20 species in Formosa. Some of the species are important elements of the broad- leaved forests at medium and high altitudes in various parts of the island. There are two recent works dealing with the genus as occurring in Formosa. Mori, Sylvia 6: 1-35. 1935, presents a classifica- tion of the species based on leaf-characters only, enumerating 34 species. Kanehira’s treatment, Formosan Trees, rev. ed. 579- 602. 1936, is the most extensive, and in it 30 species are keyed. Most of the species are described and illustrated, but a few in- adequately known species are listed by name only. The works of these and other Japanese authors are based mainly on local material, without adequate reference to the closely related floras of neighboring regions espe- cially the Chinese mainland and the Philip- pines. Consequently the incidence of endem- ism, as interpreted by these authors, is considered exceptionally high. For the same reason the nature of some of the widely distributed species is not properly under- stood, and thus too many species are recog- nized by slight and trivial variations of little or no taxonomic value. A critical study of the Formosan species was made with the aid of large reference collections of Asiatic plants in the herbarium of the U. 8S. National Museum, Smithsonian Institution, representing all the neighboring floras of Formosa, especially the closely re- lated ones of the Chinese mainland, Hainan Island, the Liukiu Islands, the Philippine Islands, and Japan. As a result, it is re- vealed that many of the widespread species of eastern Asia, particularly those of the Chinese mainland, extend also to Formosa. Many species are found to be not endemic to the Formosan flora but only synonyms of these species of wide ranges. The many du- plicate synonyms also prove that fewer spe- cies are actually to be found in Formosa. These taxonomic notes are herein presented. Cited specimens are selected from the U. 5. National Museum (indicated by US), the herbarium of the National Taiwan Uni- versity, Formosa (indicated by NTU), and the herbarium of the Taiwan Forestry Insti- tute (indicated by TFI). 1. Symplocos caudata Wall. List no. 4413. 1830, nomen; A. DC. in DC. Prodr. 8: 256. 1844. Symplocos prunifolia Sieb. & Zuce. in Abh. Akad. Wiss. Muench. 4(3): 133. 1846. Symplocos sasakit Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 5: 114. f. 36. 1915; Mori in Sylvia 6: 27. f. 27. 1935; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 598. f. 555. 1936. Syn. nov. Symplocos somai Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 9: 69. 1920; Mori in op. cit. 28. f. 28; Kanehira, op. cit. 599. f. 556. Syn. nov. Symplozes sozanensis Hay. op. cit. 9: 70. 1920; Mori in op. cit. 28. f. 29; Kanehira, op. cit. 599. f. 600. Syn. nov. Bobua sasalii Kanehira & Sasaki in Sasaki, List Pl. Formos. 332. 1928. Syn. nov. Bobua somai Kanehira & Sasaki in loc. cit. Syn. nov. Bobua sozanensis Kanehira & Sasaki in loc. cit. Syn. nov. Common and widespread in eastern Asia, from the Himalayas eastward to Japan; Formosa common in forests throughout the island. Formosa: Mount Syabozan, Taihoku-syu, G. Masamune 2762 (NTU); Zyukirin, Sinitiku, Soma 19770 (isotype of S. somai Hay. TFI, photo US); Sozan, Simada 19773 (isotype of S. sozanensis Hay. TFI, photo US). The reduction of the three species of Hayata to this widespread and common species of eastern Asia is based on type specimens as well as the original descriptions. 2. Symplocos cochinchinensis (Lour.) Moore in Journ. Bot. 52: 148. 1914. Dicalyx cochinchinensis Lour. Fl. Cochin. 663. 1790. Symplocos ferruginifolia Kanehira in Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Formos. 20: 383. 1930, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 585. f. 542. 1936. Syn. nov. Southern China and Indo-china; Formosa, northern part of the island. I have seen no isotype of Kanehira’s species, but his detailed descriptions and illustration clearly indicate the identity of his species with the widespread S. cochinchinensis of the main- land. 3. Symplocos congesta Benth. Fl. Hongk. 211. 1861. Symplozos adinandrifolia Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. ~ 108 JOURNAL OF THE 5: 93. 1915; Mori in Sylvia 6: 16. f. 1. 1935; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 579. f. 537. 1936. Syn. nov. Symplocos adinandrifolia var. theifolia Hay. op. cit. 95. f. 24. Syn. nov. Symplocos nakaii Hay op. cit. 110. f. 26e. Syn. nov. Symplocos phaeophylla Hay. op. cit. 111. f. 34. Mori in op. cit. 26. f. 25. Kanehira, op. cit. 739. Syn. nov. Symplocos hayatae Moriin Trans. Nat. Hist. Soe. Formos. 24: 193. 1934; in Sylvia 6: 21. f. 12. 1935. Syn. nov. Symplocos kudoi Mori in Trans. Nat. Hist. Soe. Formos. 24: 198. 1934; in Sylvia 6: 24. f. 18. 1935; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 594. 1936. Syn. nov. Bobua adinandrifolia Kanehira & Sasaki in Sa- saki, List. Pl. Formos. 330. 1928. Syn. nov. Bobua nakaii Kanehira & Sasaki in op. czt. 331. Syn. nov. Bobua therfolia Kanehira & Sasaki in op. cit. 332. Syn. nov. Bobua phaeophylla Kanehira & Sasaki in op. cit. 332. Syn. nov. Symploces prunifolia sensu Hay. in Journ. Coll. Sei. Tokyo 30(1): 188. 1911 (Mat. Fl. Formos.), non Sieb. & Zuce. Symplocos theifolia sensu Hay., Icon. Pl. For- mos. 6: 29. 1916, non D. Don. Widely distributed in southern China; For- mosa, common in forests, central to southern part of the island. Formosa: Rengechi, Taityu, S. Hibino & S. Suzuki, July 18, 1930 (NTU); Central Range, Mori 19755 (isotype of S. adinandrifolia Hay. TFI, photo US). Several of the above mentioned names such as S. nakaivti Hay. and S. hayatar Mori, were reduced to the synonymy of S. adinandrifolia by Kanehira and others. Symplocos kudoi Mori is known only from the type from central Formosa. Symplocos phaeophylla Hay. is based on a Kanehira collec- tion of unknown locality. The specimens have not been seen. Judged from the original descrip- tions and illustrations, these two names, together with A. adinandrifolia, all belong to S. congesta, a species of wide occurrence on the China mainland. 4. Symplocos lancifolia Sieb. & Zuce. in Abh. Akad. Wiss. Muench. 4(3) : 133.1846. Symplocos arisanensis Hay. in Journ. Coll. Sci. Tokyo 30(1): 187. 1911 (Mat. Fl. Formos.) ; Tcon: Pi. Formos. 22 120) 7. 19° 1912 Morr in Sylvia 6: 17. f. 2. 1935; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 582. f. 538. 1936. Syn. nov. Symplocos suishanensis Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 5: 116. f. 39. 1915; Mori im op. ct. 29. f- 20. 1935; Kanehira, op. czt. 601. 1936. Syn. nov. Bobua arisanensis Kanehira & Sasaki in Sasaki, List. Pl. Formos. 330. 1928. Syn. nov. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, No. 4 Southern China to Japan; in Formosa, at high altitudes in the central ranges. Formosa: Mount Taheizan, S. Suzuki, Aug. 4, 1928 (NTU); HE. H. Wilson 10173 (US), 10222 (US); Arisan, H. H. Wilson 9715 (US); Arisan, Kawakami & Mori 19653 (isotype of S. arisanen- sis Hay. TFI, photo US); Arisan, Suisyaryo, Hayata, Kanehira & Tanaka 19783 (isotype of S. suishanensis Hay. TFI, photo US). Type specimens and descriptions as well as illustrations have shown that Hayata’s two species are undoubtedly the same as Symplocos congestus Benth., widespread from southern China to Japan. 5. Symplocos laurina Wall. List no. 4416. 1830. Symplocos wikstroemifolia Hay. Icon. Pl. For- mos. 5: 119. f. 25b. 1915; Mori in Sylvia 6: 30 f. 34. 1935; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, 602. f. 506. 1936. Syn. nov. India to western and southern China; Formosa, in forests, central and southern parts. Formosa: Mount Taiheizan, S. Suzuki, April 1, 1928 (NTU), E. H. Wilson 12024 (US); Mt. Hassen, Taityu, Sasaki 19804 (photo, US). Reduction of S. wikstroemifolia is based on the original description. 6. Symplocos modesta Brand in Eng]. Pflanzenr. 6(IV. 242): 66. 1901; Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 2: 120. f. 20. 1912; Mori in Sylvia 6: 25. f. 21. 1926; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 595. f. 581. 1936. Symplocos eriostroma Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 5: 99. f. 25, c. 1915;Mori in op. ct. 19. f. &. 1925; Kanehira, op. cit. 583. 1936. Syn. nov. Bobua mcodesta Yamamoto, Suppl. Icon. PI. Formos. 4: 19. 1928. Bobua eriostroma Kanehira & Sasaki in Sasaki, List. Pl. Formos. 330. 1928. Syn. nov. Symplocos myrtacea sensu Matsum. & Hay. in Journ. Coll. Sci. Tokyo 22: 230. 1906 (Enum. Pl. Formos.) non Sieb. & Zuce. Endemic, in broad-leaved forests at high alti- tudes. Formosa: Arisan, EZ. H. Wilson 9648 (US), G. Nakahara, Nov. 1906 (US); Mount Noko, H. H. Bartlett 6180 (US); Taririku-syu, Taito, S. Sa- saki 19739 (photo US). Symplocos eriostroma Hay., based on young flowering specimens collected by Sasaki from Arisan, is reduced to S. modesta on the basis of the original description. 7. Symplocos mollifolia Dunn in Kew Bull. Add. Ser. 10: 163. 1912. Symplocos trichoclada Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 5: APRIL 1953 118. f. 25. 1915; Mori in Sylvia 6: 30. f. 32. 1935; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 601. f. 559. 1936. Syn. nov. Bobua trichoclada Kanehira & Sasaki in Sasaki, List. Pl. Formos. 332. 1928. Syn. nov. Symplocos trichoclada var. koshunensis Mori in Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Formos. 24: 195. 1934, in Sylvia 6: 30. f. 33. 1935. Syn. nov. Southern China: Formosa, mountains in cen- tral and southern parts. Formosa: Central Range, Kawakami & Sa- sakt 19801 (isotype, TFT). The type specimen and the original descrip- tions show that this Formosan plant is con- specific with S. mollifolia Dunn., a characteristic species from southern China. 8. Symplocos patens Presl. Rel. Haenk. 2: 61. 1830. Symplocos kotoensis Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 5: 106. f. 31. 1915; Mori in Sylvia 6: 23. f. 17. 1935; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 593. f. 584. 1936. Syn. nov. Bobua kotoensis Yamamoto, Suppl. Icon. PI. Formos. 4: 19. 1928. Syn. nov. Luzon; Botel Tobago. Formosa: Botel Tobago, Kawakami & Sasaki 19719 (isotype of S. kotoensis Hay. TF). The type specimen of Hayata’s species and his description and illustration clearly prove this to be conspecific with the Philippine species, S. patens, of the primary forests of Luzon. 9. Symplocos setchuensis Brand in Bot. Jahrb. 29: 528. 1900. Symplocos ilicifolia Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 5: M2729) 1915; Mor in Sylvia 6: 22. f. 14. 1935; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 589. f. 546. 1936. Syn. nov. Bobua ilicifolia Kanehira & Sasaki in Sasaki, List. Pl. Formos. 331. 1928. Syn. nov. Widely distributed from western to central China; Formosa, in northern part of the island. DRAKE AND DE CARLO: RANATRA ANNULIPES GROUP 109 Formosa: Mount Hakko-zan, Toyen, Mori 19702 (isotype, TFI). Symplocos wlicifolia is known from a single collection in Formosa. This proves to be the same as S. sefchuensis Brand of the mainland. 10. Symplocos stellaris Brand in Bot. Jahrb. 29: 528. 1900. Symplocos eriobotryaefolia Hay. Icon. Pl. For- mos. 5: 98. f. 10. 1915; Mori in Sylvia 6: 19. f. 7. 1935; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 084. f. 541. 1936. Syn. nov. Bobua eriobotryaefolia Kanehira & Sasaki in Sasaki, List. Pl. Formos. 330. 1928. Syn. nov. Widely distributed in central and southern China; Formosa, in forests at relatively high altitudes. Formosa: Mount Daibu, Takao, EL. Matuda s. n. (NTU). This species is very close to S. glauca (Thunb.) Koidz., but is readily distinguished by the lamel- late pith and the glandular-haired petals. The Formosan plant, showing also these distinctive characteristics, is in all respects identical with the species of wide occurrence on the mainland. 11. Symplocos theophrastaefolia Sieb. & Zucc. in Abh. Akad. Wiss. Muench. 4(3): 134. 1846; Mori in Sylvia 6: 29. f. 31. 1985; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed. 601. f. 558. 1936. Symplocos stenostachys Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 5: 115. 1915. China to Japan; Formosa, in broad-leaved forests, from low to high altitudes. Van Steenis, in Bull. Bot. Gard. Buitenz. III. 17: 432. 1948, considers S. stenostachys Hay. a synonym of S. confusa Brand. Symplocos steno- stachys,. described as having a long spicate in- florescence, is very distinct from S. confusa and has been correctly referred to the synonymy of S. theophrastaefolia Sieb. & Zuce. by Mori, Kane- hira, and others. ENTOMOLOGY .—A merican species of Ranatra annulipes Stal group (Hemiptera: Ranatridae). Cart J. Draken, Iowa State College, Ames, Iowa, and Jost A. DeCaruo, Museo Cientifico Natural, Buenos Aires, Argentina. Almost a century ago the eminent Swedish hemipterist Carl Stal (1854, p. 241) very briefly described a new species of water- scorpion of the genus Ranatra Fabricius from Brazil under the scientific name annulipes. Seven years later (1861, p. 204) he redefined the species from the type and en ee somewhat amplified his original description. In the latter article the length of the body and that of the respiratory filaments are given as equal. The characters employed in both descriptions are of little specific value in the separation of species. After a lapse of nearly 50 years, the re- 110 JOURNAL OF THE nowned aquatic hemipterist A. Montandon (1905, pp. 393-395) of Rumania redescribed at considerable length the male type of R. annulipes, which was communicated to him by the director of the Stockholm Museum. Among the more important char- acters mentioned Montandon pointed out that the metasternum was very strongly developed, very highly elevated, longly narrowly produced posteriorly, and then terminated in an almost vertical curve be- tween the hind pair of coxae. And from a lateral aspect, he also observed that the extremity of the last abdominal segment in the male was very strongly produced down- ward on each side so as to embrace the apex of the genital operculum. In the same article Montandon also determined as Ff. annulipes several specimens of water-scorpions from the widely separated regions of Novo Fri- burgo, Isthmus of Darien, Guadeloupe, and Jamaica. From the last three localities the writers have examined specimens bearing identification labels ‘‘Ranatra annulipes Stal” in Montandon’s own handwriting. The specimens from each of the localities represented a different and an undescribed species. In other papers Montandon (1907, p. 58; 1910a, p. 3; 1910b, p. 185), after studying the types (male and female) of Ranatra fabricit Guérin-Méneville from Cuba in the Museum of Zoology of the University of Naples, Italy, incorrectly synonymized this insect with R. annulipes. An examination of some Cuban material, determined and labeled by Montandon as R. annulipes, revealed that R. fabricia was a different species and readily distinguishable from the true R. annulipes from Brazil. On this ac- count the writers are resurrecting Ff. fabrica and are treating it herein on the species level. Despite this confusion in differentiat- ing species, Montandon (1907, p. 59) recog- nized and characterized a very distinct and closely allied species from Ecuador as R. camposi. In the same paper Montandon (1907, p. 58) also wrongly named a complex of several species from Panama, Colombia, Mexico, Guadeloupe, and Cuba as A. annulipes—none of which included the true annulipes. Since the publication of the original de- WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 43, NO. 4 scription of R. annulipes, the literature is replete with numerous species wrongly named and confused with this insect. Besides R. fabric and R. ecuadoriensis De Carlo, four of the five new species described and illustrated in this paper have been con- founded in the literature with R. annulipes. Thus for several decades aquatic hemipter- ists have been lumping and confusing in the literature several unnamed species with sim- ilar general categories as described for R. annulipes under that specific name. From a general aspect, all these species possess similar facies and likenesses in the general appearance of certain structures such as (1) a very high, narrow, and strongly de- veloped metaxyphus in both sexes, (2) large antennae, and (3) the extremity of the last abdominal segment in the male strongly produced downwards on each side in the side in the form of a large toothlike structure (Fig. 11) so as to embrace narrowly the en- tire apex of the genital operculum. The front femora are without apical tooth or marked sinuosity, and the premedian tooth on in- ferior edge is fairly large and prominent. The opercula of the females are similar in general appearance and at most only slightly surpass the extremity of the abdomen; the deep thick fringe of stiff, long, reclining, brownish hairs on the underedge of each side of the genital segment is also quite pro- nounced. As these striking features are shared by a number of American species of the genus Ranatra, the structures should be regarded in a general way as ‘‘group” characters, which clearly set the members of the annulipes growp apart from the rest of the species of the genus. Although of simi- lar general appearance, the metaxyphus, anterior femora, and antennae also provide good differential characters of specific im- portance in this distinctive group of species. The salient characters by which the species forming the annulipes group may be sepa- rated from one another melude such struc- tures as (1) form and size of body, (2) shape of antennae, (8) shape of anterior femora, (4) size and form of metaxyphus, and (5) shape of male parameres. The illus- trations in the text portray the discriminat- ing differences in the antennae, anterior femora, and male parameres of the species. APRIL 1953 The species as listed by Kirkaldy (1899, p. 29) from Jamaica and by Hungerford (1936, p. 149) from Yucatan, Mexico, are described herein as new to science. The specimens determined by Montandon (1907, p. 58) as annulipes from Colombia, Mexico, and other places represent a composite group of several allied species—all of which are members of the annulipes group. The geographics of R. annulipes as compiled by Bueno (1906, p. 58) and by Kirkaldy and Bueno (1909, p. 203) represent an aggregate of locality records of several different spe- cies. It is thus patent that a large number of the references in the literature to R. annu- lipes refer only in part or not at all to that species, but to complexes of one or more species confused with it, thus invalidating most of the published distributional record for R. annulipes. The tropical and subtropical nature of the members of the annulipes group is clearly indicated by the dispersal data of the new and described species. As most of the known records are based largely upon type localities, the species are undoubtedly much more widely dispersed than indicated under the descriptions. Apparently, the annulipes group of species occurs only in the Americas. De Carlo (1950, p. 526) was the first to recognize and separate the true A. annulipes Stal of Brazil from its closely related allies. In the foregoing article, he characterized both sexes (female theretofore unknown) and also described a new species of the group from Guayaquil, Ecuador. In his compre- hensive work on South American Ranatri- dae, De Carlo (1946, pp. 14-16) had con- fused the Ecuadorian species with Stal’s annulipes. These two papers by De Carlo contain detailed descriptions and many ex- cellent illustrations of the ranatrids of South America. In order to facilitate future work and to straighten out part of the confusion in the literature, a bibliography is given under the headings of the various species. If a citation includes more than one species, the word part is italicized and inserted in parentheses at the end of the reference. The disposition of the types is given Just beneath the description of each new species. DRAKE AND DE CARLO: RANATRA ANNULIPES GROUP Wali Unless stated otherwise, specimens of the described species are in the collections of the authors. The illustrations of Ranatra annulipes Stal and R. zetekz, n. sp., were made from the types (except R. fabriciz) by Mrs. Richard Froeschner and the rest by José A. De Carlo. Ranatra annulipes Stal (Figs. 1-2) 1854. Ranatra annulipes Stal, Ofv. Vet.-Akad. Forh. 11: 241. 1861. Ranatra annulipes Stal, Ofv. Vet.-Akad. Forh., no. 4: 204. 1905. Ranatra annulipes Montandon, Bull. Soc. Sci. Bucharest 14 (3-4) : 393-395 (part). 1907. Ranatra annulipes Montandon, Ann. Soc. Ent. France 76: 58 (part). 1946. Ranatra annulipes De Carlo, An. Mus. Arg. Cien. Nat. 42: 14 (part). 1950. Ranatra annulipes De Carlo, Rev. Bras. Biol. 10 (4): 526, figs. 14-18. The following notes are based solely on the male type of R. annulipes Stal in the Natur- historiska Riksmuseum, Stockholm (type kindly lent by Dr. René Malaise). The type (male) bears labels as follows: (1) “Brasil Osear”’, (2) ‘“‘typus’ (red label), (3) “Ranatra annulipes” (in Stal’s handwriting), and (4) “193” (on a pink label). The specimen, pinned with a large white pin, is in a fair state of preservation. The forelegs are represented by coxae, and the middle and hind legs are entirely wanting. The respiratory appendages are broken (apical part gone) with bases glued on the upper extremity of the last abdominal segment. The hemelytra and wings are partly opened, but otherwise the specimen is in a fairly good state of preservation. The body is in good condition with antennae and parameres fully exposed. Length of male type, 30.00 mm. Head.—Width across eyes, 3.00 mm. Eyes large, each as wide as interocular space (20:20). Interocular space moderately convex, finely trans- Frias. 1, 2.—Ranatra annulipes Stal: 1, Antenna; 2, left male paramere. 112 JOURNAL OF THE versely rugulose; jugae long, testaceous, scarcely more elevated than tylus, very feebly bowed out- ward. Rostrum testaceous with apical segment fuscous. Antennae as in Fig, 1. Prothorax.—Greatest length (measured on pleuron), 9.60 mm. Pronotum with median length, 8.10 mm; width at apex, 2.25 mm; at narrowest place, 1.22 mm; at widest part of hind lobe (near base), 3.20 mm; front part scarcely more than twice as long as hind part (measured on median line) (56:25). Median part of prosternum between shallow lateral sulci gradually more elevated anteriorly, distinctly tectiform in front. Scutellum with front part a little transversely rugulose, impressed on each side near the middle so as to leave between the two impressions a distinct median carina, pitted in the impressed areas; posterior part slightly convex, without distinct striae. Hemelytra extending on base of genital segment. Abdomen (measured on median line), 18.00 mm long; tergites (save last one) reddish, the connexiva yellowish brown. Parameres as in Fig. 2. Note.—For a detailed description of both sexes with illustrations of important structures, see De Carlo (1950). It should be noted that the prosternum between the shallow sulci is slowly raised anteriorly and quite tectiform in front. The writers have examined the type and three other specimens of FR. annulipes from Brasil. The left antenna and left paramere of the type are figured; note especially the shape of the paramere. Ranatra fabricii Guérin-Méneville (Figs. 3-5) 1857. Ranatra fabricic Guérin-Méneville, Sagra’s Nat. bist. Culoa (1(2)- 76; 1908. Ranatra fabric Kirkaldy and Bueno, Proc. Ent. Soc. Washington 10: 203 (part). 1910a. Ranatra annulipes Montandon, Ann. Mus. Zool. Della R. Univ. Napoli 3 (n.s.): 3. 1910b. Ranatra annulipes Montandon, Bull. Soe. Sci. Bucharest 28 (5-6): 185 (part). 1917. Ranatra annulipes Van Duzee, Cat. Hemip.: 463 (part). 1922. Ranatra annulipes Hungerford, Bull. Univ. Kansas 14: (17): 446 (part). Redescription (male and female) —Body little robust, moderately long, the respiratory tubes usually a little longer than body. Eyes large, the width of an eye scarcely greater than width of interocular space (20:19). Width of head across eyes, 2.95 mm; interocular space moderately convex, smooth. Antennae as in Fig. 3. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 4 Figs. 3-5.—fRanatra fabricit Guérin-Méneville 3, Antenna; 4, left male paramere; 5, part of fore- leg. Prothorax long, slender, greatest length (meas- ured on pleuron), 10.20 mm. Pronotum with posterior part a little dilated; widest near base, 3.10 mm; width of anterior part at apex, 2.25 mm; median length, 8.80 mm; anterior part scarcely more than twice as long as posterior part (61:29). Scutellum a little convex on anterior part, de- pressions well marked and separated by a median carina; posterior part with some transverse striae little marked. Metaxyphus moderately elevated, with in- ferior surface smooth, feebly convex, broad in front, then slowly narrowed posteriorly and cury- ing upward between the hind coxae. Metaxyphus a little less curved in female. Male parameres as in Fig. 4. Male operculum embraced at apex as in R. annulipes. Female operculum pointed at apex, slightly extending beyond extremity of abdomen, the lower edge curving gently upward as it nar- rows posteriorly. Anterior legs with coxae 7.00 mm long; femora (fig. 5) 10.80 mm long, moderately large, the inferior edge not very much narrowed in the vicinity of the tooth as may be observed in the illustration. Apex of hind femora not quite attain- ing the extremity of the hemelytral membrane. Size—Length of body of male described, 33.80 mm; respiratory tubes, 34.30 mm; female, 33.00— 30.00 mm. long; respiratory filaments, 34.00— 36.00 mm. Distribution Known only from Cuba, and widely disseminated on the island. Specimens have been examined from Havana, Nov. 1947, J. Ferrar (figured) ; Santiago de la Vegas, Havana, Jan. 6, 1940; Santa Clara, May 1911 (Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist.); ‘Cuba,’ Uhler Collection, U.S. Nat. Mus.; Matanzas, Feb. 6, 1946, San- tiago de las Vegas; May 22, 1933, collected by Mr. Marino. Affinities —Distinguished from R. annulipes by the form of antennae and male parameres. The metaxyphus is more narrowed posteriorly APRIL 1953 and the curvature more pronounced in R. an- nulipes. As R. fabricit has been wrongly sup- pressed as identical with R. annulipes, it is here treated as a valid species. The differences between the two species may be noted by the dimensions given in the descriptions and structures figured. R. sagrai, n. sp., from Cuba is a larger, stouter species with longer prothorax and fore legs. Ranatra sagrai, n. sp. (Figs. 67) Female —Long, robust, the caudal appendages a little longer than the body. Width across eyes, 3.25 mm. Eyes of median size; width of an eye and of interocular space subequal (20.5:21). In- terocular space moderately convex, smooth. An- tennae as in Fig. 6. Prothorax long, moderately robust, (meas- ured on pleuron) 11.85 mm long. Pronotum (measured on median line), 10.40 mm _ long; width at apex, 3.70 mm; width at widest part of base, 3.70 mm; front part practically twice as long as hind part (measured on median line) (69:36). Scutellum about the same as in R. fabricti. Female genital operculum scarcely sur- passing extremity of abdomen, with inferior edge narrowed and moderately curved upward api- cally. Metaxyphus moderately elevated, with in- ferior surface smooth, slightly convex, broad in front and then slowly narrowed posteriorly, curv- ing very little in the middle posteriorly. Anterior coxae 8.00 mm long, without mark- ings; femur (Fig. 7) 12.00 mm in length, robust, the inferior edge in the region of the tooth very little narrowed; tooth placed as in R. fabrici. Apex of hind femora not reaching to the ex- tremity of the membrane. Size —Length of female, 38.00 mm; respira- tory appendages, 42.00 mm. Type (male) —Santiago de las Vegas, Cuba, collected by 8. C. Bruner, in collection of C. J. Drake. Named in honor of Ramon de la Sagra, the author of Historia Fisica, Politica Natural de la Isle de Cuba. Affinities —Differs especially from R. annulipes by the form of the metaxyphus; from &. fabric by its larger body, longer caudal filaments, longer anterior coxae and form of metaxyphus. Ranatra zeteki, n. sp. (Figs. 8-11) 1905. Ranatra annulipes Montandon, Bull. Soe. Sei. Bucharest 18 (2-4) :394 (part; specimen from Panama). ° 1907. Ranatra annulipes Montandon, Ann. Soc. Ent. France 76: 58 (part; specimens from Pan- ama and Colombia). DRAKE AND DE CARLO: RANATRA ANNULIPES GROUP 113 Moderately long, moderately slender, respira- tory appendages a little longer than the body. General color yellowish brown with legs banded or mottled with testaceous. Female usually longer than the male, also with longer respiratory fila- ments. Size.—Length of body (male), 29.00-32.00 mm, the respiratory tubes, 31.00-34.50 mm; (female) length, 30.00-34.60 mm, the respiratory tubes, 35.00—40.00 mm. Eyes large, the width of an eye and width of interocular space nearly equal (19:18, male; and 21:22, female). Interocular space moderately con- vex, smooth; jugae prominent, a little more elevated than tylus, testaceous. Width of head across eyes, 2.80 mm in male and 3.25 mm in female. Antennae as in Fig. 8. Pronotum long, rather slender, the front part more than twice as long as hind part (52:27); length on median line, 8.10 mm in male and 9.00 mm in female; width of hind lobe near base, 2.25 mm in male and 3.25 mm in female; width at anterior end of front lobe, 2.05 mm in male and 2.35 mm in female; hind lobe not greatly widened in either sex, deeply roundly excavated behind. Prothorax (measured on pleuron) 9.00 mm long in male and 10.16 mm in female. Scutellum with anterior part feebly convex, smooth, indistinctly rugulose, strongly impressed on each side just in front of middle, there with a thick median carina separating the two impressions; hind part tri- angular, strongly narrowed posteriorly, without transverse striae. Metaxyphus high, wide in front, becoming strongly narrowed posteriorly, turning abruptly upward a little before hind margins of meta- coxae. Male operculum (Fig. 11) embraced at apex as in FR. annulrtpes. Male parameres as in Fig. 9. Apex of female operculum feebly sur- passing last abdominal segment. Legs long and slender, coxae and femora with pale testaceous spots or marks. Fore femora (Fig. 10) not very much narrowed on inferior edge in vicinity of the premedian tooth; length of male, 9.50 mm and female, 13.30 mm; length Fiaes. 6, 7.—Ranatra sagrai, n. sp.: 6, Antenna; 7, part of foreleg. 114 JOURNAL OF THE Fiaes. 8-11.—Ranatra zeteki, n. sp.: 8, Antenna; 9, left male paramere; 10, part of foreleg; 11, apex of male abdomen. of fore coxae, 6.00 mm in male and 7.60 mm in female. Hind femora barely reaching base of genital segment; length, 13.40 mm in male and 18.60 mm in female. Length of female operculum, 3.10 mm. Length of abdomen, 16.80 mm in male and 18.75 mm in female. Middle and hind legs with broad testaceous bands. Type (male) and allotype (female).—Panama, Canal Zone, Feb. 10-12, 1939, in Drake Collec- tion. Paratypes, 32 specimens, taken with type in sluggish, salty waters, near the mouth of small streams emptying in to the sea or Panama Canal, and also in deep stagnant water of a narrow drainage ditch (all by C. J. Drake). One paratype, Panama, Canal Zone, April 14, 1911, E. A. Schwartz, U. S. Nat. Mus. Several other speci- mens have also been examined from Colombia and Venezuela. Paratypes in collections of both authors. Affinities Separated from R. annulipes by the shape of the metaxyphus and male parameres. The eyes are also feebly wider than the width of interocular space. Ranatra acapulcana, n. sp. (Figs. 12-14) Male and female.—Long, slender, female a little stouter and longer than the male; respira- tory filaments a little longer than the body in both sexes. Width of head across eyes, 2.80 mm (male) and 3.00 mm (female); width of an eye shghtly greater than width of interocular space (19:18 in male and 20.5:19 female). Interocular space smooth, a little convex; jugae slightly more elevated than tylus. Antennae as in Fig. 12. Prothorax long and slender, greatest length (measured on pleuron), 9.20 mm in male and 10.15 mm in female. Pronotum not much dilated behind; greatest width of hind part (near base), WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 4 2.80 mm in male and 3.25 mm in female; median length, 7.80 mm in male and 9.70 mm in female; anterior part slightly more than twice as long as hind part (55:23 in male and 67:30 in female) ; width at apex, 1.90 mm in male and 2.15 mm in female. Scutellum a little convex in the middle of anterior part, depression well marked and separated by a thick median carina, which is as long as the depressions; posterior part without transverse striae. Male parameres as in Fig. 13. Male genital operculum enveloped at apex as in R&R. annulipes. Female genital operculum narrowed (slightly rounded) from near the base apically, the pointed apex scarcely surpassing extremity of the ab- domen. Metaxyphus moderately elevated, a little convex at the middle, with inferior surface smooth, broad at the base, then narrowed pos- teriorly, ending behind in a pronounced curve between the hind coxae but not as vertical as in R. annulipes. Anterior femora (Fig. 14) 10.00 mm long in male and 11.50 mm in female, a little narrowed on inferior edge in the vicinity of the tooth, the tooth placed as in R. fabric; anterior coxae 6.60 mm long in male and 7.60 mm long in female, the exterior surface with pronounced pale and obscure fuscous markings. Hind femora marked with fuscous-brown spots, the apex reaching the extremity of the hemelytral membrane. Size.—Length of male, 28.60—30.00 mm, and female, 36.00-39.00 mm; respiratory appendages, 29.00-32.00 mm in male and 36.00-39.00 mm in female. Holotype (male) and allotype (female)—Taken in a large salt water lagoon, near Acapulco, Mexico, July 23, 1950 (C. J. Drake), in Drake Collection. Paratypes, taken with type, also in large fresh water ponds, near the salt water lagoon, Aug. 3, 1951, Drake and Hottes, in collec- tions of both authors. : Fies. 12-14 —Ranatra acapulcana, n. sp.: 12, Antenna; 13, left male paramere; 14, part of fore- leg. Aprit 1953 Affinities —Differentiated from R. annulipes by the shape of male parameres, antennae and metaxyphus, also by the pale and obscure fuscous markings on femora and tibiae. R. zeteki, n. sp., has differently shaped male parameres. The meta- xyphus also separates it from other members of the annultpes group. Ranatra jamaicana, n. sp. (Figs. 15-17) 1899. Ranatra annulipes Kirkaldy, Entomologist 32: 29. 1903. Ranatra annulipes Montandon, Bull. Soc. Sei. Bucharest 14 (3-4): 393-394 (part). Male.—Body long, a little robust, the caudal appendages a little longer than the body. Width of head across eyes, 2.85 mm. Eyes of median size, width of an eye less than width of inter- ocular space (18.5:20). Interocular space mod- erately convex, smooth; jugae distinctly more raised than tylus. Antennae as in Fig. 15. Prothorax moderately long; greatest length (measured on pleuron), 9.20 mm. Pronotum slender, anterior part slightly more than twice as long as posterior part (58:27); width at ante- rior end, 2.20 mm; width at widest place in hind part (near base), 3.00 mm. Scutellum as in R. fabricix. Metasternum with the longitudinal pale stripes a little obscure, the lateral ones extending on metacoxae and median on metaxyphus. Male parameres as in Fig. 16. Male genital operculum enveloped at the extremity as in R. annulipes. Metaxyphus broad in front, rather slowly narrowed posteriorly to curvature, then strongly narrowed as it turns up between meta- coxae. Anterior femora (Fig. 17) 10.30 mm long, mod- erately thick, broad, with inferior edge in vicinity of tooth very little narrowed, the tooth situated as in R&R. fabricit. Marks on coxae and pale bands on middle and hind femora as in R. fabricit. IS 17 Fies. 15-17.—Ranatra jamaticana, n. sp.: 15, Antenna; 16, left male paramere; 17, part of fore- leg. DRAKE AND DE CARLO: RANATRA ANNULIPES GROUP 115 Fies. 18-20.—Ranatra absona, n. sp.: 18, An- tenna; 19, left male paramere; 20, part of foreleg. Size.—Length of body, 31.00 mm; respiratory tubes, 31.00 mm. Holotype male—St. Andrews, Constant Springs, Jamaica, C. P. Taylor, in collection of C. J. Drake. A flinities —Differs from R. annulipes in the form of male parameres, smaller eyes, antennae and characteristics of the metaxyphus. These same structures also separate it from R. absona, n. sp. The type bears a label in Montandon’s handwriting, which states that the specimen con- forms with the type except that the obscure bands on the sternum are less indicated. Ranatra absona, n. sp. (Figs. 18-20) Male.—Body a little robust, the caudal ap- pendages a little longer than the body. Width across eyes, 3.00 mm. Eyes large, the width of an eye slightly greater than width of interocular space (20.5:19). Interocular space moderately convex, smooth. Antennae as in figure 18. Prothorax long and slender; greatest length (measured on side), 9.70 mm. Pronotum a little dilated behind; width of anterior part at apex, 2.10 mm; width at widest point of posterior part (near base), 2.80 mm; length on median line, 8.40 mm; front part a little more than twice as long as hind part (60:24). Scutellum practically the same as in R. fabric. Mesosternum with the longitudinal stripes a little obscure, not extend- ing posteriorly on metaxyphus. Male parameres as in Figure 19. Apex of male operculum embraced as in R. annulipes. Meta- xyphus moderately elevated, with inferior sur- face smooth, slightly convex, broad in front, then narrowed posteriorly, very little convex at the middle, terminating in an almost vertical curve between the metacoxae. Anterior femora as in Fig. 20, rather thick medianly, with inferior edge bearing the tooth very little narrowed at the middle; 10.50 mm long; tooth situated as in R. fabric; length of 116 fore coxae, 6.60 mm. Apex of hind femora not attaining tip of hemelytral membrane. Inter- mediate and posterior femora with pale bands not very well marked. Size.—Length of body of male, 32.00 mm; respiratory appendages, 33.50 mm. Holotype (male).—Pinto Gordo, British Hon- duras, Feb. 1932, in collection of C. J. Drake, paratypes, 2 specimens, taken with type, one in collection of each author. A flinities.— Differs especially from R. annulipes in the form of the male parameres, anterior femora and antennae; these structures also separate it from R. fubricii. The metaxyphus is more ele- vated, more curved and narrowed on posterior part than in fabricii. Also, the metaxyphus is broader on the anterior three-fourths of inferior surface than in R. annulipes. Ranatra similis, n. sp. (Figs. 21-23) Male.—Long, body little robust, the caudal appendages a little longer than the body. Width of head across eyes, 3.00 mm. Eyes of median size; width of an eye slightly shorter than the shortest distance between them (21.5:19). In- terocular space moderately convex, with fine transverse striae. Antennae as in Fig. 21. Prothorax moderately long, slender, greatest length (measured on pleuron), 9.80 mm. Pro- notum widened a little behind, the front part scarcely more than twice as long as hind part (57:28); length on median line, 8.50 mm; greatest width of hind part, 3.40 mm; width at apex of front part, 2.35 mm. Scutellum very similar to R. fabricir. Metaxyphus moderately elevated, with in- ferior face slightly convex, a little widened in front, moderately narrowed from middle pos- teriorly, forming a pronounced curve behind. Apex of male operculum enveloped as in R. annulipes. Male parameres as in Fig. 22. Anterior legs with femora (Fig. 23) moderately broad, 11.00 mm long, with lower edge very little nar- rowed in vicinity of the tooth, which is placed as in R. fabric. Apex of hind femora not quite reaching extremity of hemelytral membrane. Type (male).—Satipo, Peru, July, 1940, col- lected by Pedro Paprachki, in collection of C. J. Drake. A flinities—Distinguished from R. annulipes by the form of the parameres, antennae and metaxyphus; from R. jamaicana, n. sp., by the same characters and besides there are no clear JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 4 or obscure bands on the mesosternum. The meta- xyphus in R. similis is narrowed posteriorly in its greatest part and then turns up more progres- sively between metacoxae. In R. absona, n. sp., and 2. annulipes the metaxyphus turns up al- most vertically between hind coxae. Figs. 21-23.—Ranatra similis, n. sp.: 21, An- tenna; 22, left male paramere; 23, part of foreleg. Ranatra camposi Montandon 1907. Ranatra camposi Montandon, Ann. Soc. Ent. France 76: 59. 1946. Ranatra camposi De Carlo, An. Mus. Arg. Cien. Nat. 42: 16-17, 4 figs. Female larger than male; respiratory filaments generally a little longer than the body, sometimes slightly shorter. Eyes large; width of an eye slightly greater than width of interocular space (20:19) interocular space moderately convex, smooth; Jugae prominent. Antennae as in figure 24. Prothorax moderately long, greatest length (measured on pleuron) 7.80 mm in male and 8.80 in female. Pronotum a little dilated behind, length (measured on median line) 6.90 mm in male and 7.80 mm in female; width at apex of anterior part 2.00 mm in male and 2.25 mm in female; width at widest point of hind part 2.70 mm in male and 3.10 mm in female. Scutellum very little convex, with some trans- verse rugulae in front, with a thick carina separat- ing the impressed areas just in front of tapering hind part; triangular hind part with transverse striae well marked. Metaxyphus large, characters about the same as in R. acapulcana. Apex of female operculum slightly extending beyond extremity of last ab- dominal segment. Anterior femora robust, with the upper edge near the tooth very little narrowed, 8.00 mm long in male and 10.20 mm in female, the tooth placed as in R. fabriciz. Tip of hind femora barely reaching apex of hemelytral membrane. Aprit 1953 Size —Length, 25.80-27.40 mm (male) and 28.00-31.00 mm (female); respiratory append- ages, 25.50-29.00 mm (male) and 26.85-3.20 mm (female). In most of our specimens the caudal filaments are slightly longer than the body. Montandon (1907) gives their length in the type as slightly shorter than the body. Distribution —The writers have examined more than 60 nymphs and adults from Guayaquil, Ecuador, all collected by Dr. Francisco Campos R. The types were also taken at Guayaquil by Dr. Campos. Affinities —The size of body, metaxyphus and male parameres separate R. camposi from R&. annulipes. The smaller form, shorter caudal ap- pendages and shorter fore legs separate it from R. ecuadoriensis De Carlo. Ranatra ecuadoriensis De Carlo 1946. Ranatra annulipes De Carlo, An. Mus. Arg. Cien. Nat. 42: 14-16, 3 figs. (part). KEVAN: PYRGOMORPHINE GRASSHOPPER LIL 1950. Ranatra ecuadoriensis De Carlo, Rev. Bras. Biol. 10 (4) : 525-526, figs. 9-10. For a detailed description and illustrations of this species, see De Carlo’s paper of 1950. The male is unknown. The following notes are based upon three females, Guayaquil, Ecuador, Jan. 26, 1952, taken in a temporary rainwater pool, Dr. F. Campos, in company with numerous speci- mens of R. camposi Kirkaldy. General aspect very similar to R. camposi, larger and with the anterior femora and pro- thorax longer. Length of body, 32.50 mm; respira- tory tubes, 34.50 mm; anterior femora, 10.30 mm; coxae, 7.10 mm; pronotum on median line, 8.80 mm. Antennae and anterior femora as fig- ured by De Carlo (1950). A fjinities—This species is most closely related to R. camposi, but is readily separated from it by the dimensions of the body, anterior legs, and respiratory appendages. ENTOMOLOGY .—An interesting new pyrgomorphine grasshopper (Orthoptera: Acrididae) in the U. S. National Museum. D. Kira McE. Kevan, University of Nottingham. (Communicated by Ashley B. Gurney.) In the course of an examination of acridid material of the sub-family Pyrgomorphinae kindly lent to me for study by the Smith- sonian Institution, I came across an interest- ing new species of Chlorizeina Brunner von Wattenwyl, 1893. Unfortunately it is known only from a few specimens but, since they considerably extend the known range of the genus, I do not think it inadvisable to describe it. Chlorizeina malabarensis, n. sp. Type: o’, India, Mangalore, June [1925], J. C. Bridwell. U. 8. National Museum No. 61121. Head.—Antennae longer than head and pro- notum together, filiform, the basal half slightly flattened. Eyes prominent, oval, a little longer than wide. Frons slightly rugose, strongly oblique, concave in profile. Frontal ridge strong, narrow, deeply sulcate throughout, not reaching the cly- peus. Lateral carinae strong, almost straight and only slightly divergent. Cheeks with minute scat- tered punctures and with a partial oblique row of small, weak, rounded tubercles extending from behind the eye to the anterolateral angle of the pronotum. Fastigium verticis rugoso-punctate, longer than wide, rounded apically (Fig. 1, A). Median carinula of head faint but distinct throughout. Dorsal surface of head finely punc- tured all over, with fine transverse rugae in the vicinity of the median carinula, especially in front of the eyes. Thorax.—Pronotum subcylindrical, strongly but finely punctured throughout,. less so in the posterior part of the metazona; anterior margin slightly coneave; posterior margin almost straight; median carina obsolescent; lateral cari- nae absent; transverse sulci fine, more or less straight, the median one placed at about the middle of the disc, the typical one at rather less than three-quarters (Fig. 1, A), anterior sulcus obsolescent, almost invisible; lateral pronotal lobes with anterior angle rounded, posterior angle forming a right-angle and inferior margin slightly sinuous. Mesonotum for the greater part con- cealed. Metanotum about equal to the metazona of the pronotum. Prosternal tubercle situated rather far forward, pyramidal, very slightly in- clined backwards, very strongly acute. Meso- sternal lobes about one and a half times as long as wide, their interspace of about the same dimen- sions as a lobe. Metasternal pits fairly large, 118 JOURNAL OF THE deep, and separated by a distance equal to about one-third of the greatest width of a metasternal lobe. Wings.—Tegmina abbreviate, almost reaching the posterior margin of the first abdominal ter- gum, ovate-lanceolate, about twice as long as wide, acutely pointed (Fig. 1, A), veins indistinct, costal margin slightly anal margin strongly so and distinctly punctured. Hind wings minute, scale-like. Genitalia.—Tenth abdominal tergum excised and carinate as illustrated (Fig. 1, B). Epiproct flat, tonguelike (Fig. 1, B). Cerci long, strongly inwardly and upwardly curved, extending to about the end of the epiproct, narrowed before the middle and shghtly thickened apically (Fig. 1, B, C). Subgenital plate obtuse. Measurements—Length 38; antenna 16.5; head 7.0; pronotum 7.5; tegmen 6.5; hind femur 20.5 mm. Coloration.—More or less uniform olive-green [somewhat discoloured] except for the dark brown antennae, brown eyes, dark green gular area above the diagonal row of yellowish cheek tuber- cles, and the pink inferoexternal area of the hind femur. ALLOTYPE: 2, India, Goa, Mormugao, Sept. 1925, J. C. Bridwell. Agrees with the type but is larger with a less cylindrical pronotum which is considerably wider behind than in front; the mesosternal lobes are scarcely longer than wide and their interspace is greater than the width of a lobe; metasternal pits separated by a distance equal to more than half a metasternal lobe. The tenth abdominal tergum is excised to the posterior margin of the ninth, the epiproct is broader than in the male and the cerci are short, straight and stout, about half as long as the epiproct. The ovipositor valves are short and stout. Measurements—Length 45; antenna 16.0; head 7.0; pronotum 9.5; tegmen 7.0; hind femur 20.5 mm. PARATYPE: co’, Same data as the allotype (British Museum). Agrees with the type but is a little smaller and paler. This new species is much larger than any of the three previously described. In build it resembles more closely C. wnicolor Brunner von Watten- wyl, 1893 (cf. Ramme, 1941, pl. 12, figs. la, 1b, 2), but the genitalia are more like those of C. ele- convex, WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 4 hae G Fic. 1.—Chlorizeina_ malabarensis, n.sp.: A, Head and thorax of male (type), dorsal; B, male’ genitalia, dorsal; C, male cercus, lateral. APRIL 1953 gans Ramme, 1941 (cf. Ramme, l.c.: 36, Abb. 13), although the ,cerci are distinctly more strongly curved. A third species, C. togulata Rehn (1951), de- scribed from the Southern Shan States, Burma, has much broader cerci than those of malabarensis. The genus was previously known only from Burma, and it is interesting to find that its range extends to the west coast of India. C. elegans is known from Upper Burma; C. wnicolor was THEODOR: PHLEBOTOMUS FROM THE YEMEN FE previously known only from Lower Burma but is now known to me from Upper Burma also. REFERENCES RamMeE, W. Bevtrdége zur Kenntnis der Acrididen- Fauna des indomalayischen und benachbarter Gebiete (Orth.) mit besonderer Bervicksichtigung der Tvrergeographie von Celebes. Mitt. zool. Mus. Berl. 25: 1-243, 21 pls. 1941. Rean, J. A.G. A new species of the genus Chlori- zeina (Acrididae; Pyrgomorphinae) from Bur- ma. Notulae Nat., no. 238: 1-7, 6 figs. 1951. ENTOMOLOGY —On a collection of Phlebotomus from the Yemen. Oskar THEO- poR, Department of Parasitology, Hebrew University, Jerusalem. (Communi- eated by C. W. Sabrosky.) The collection dealt with in the present note was made by Lt. Comdr. K. L. Knight, of the U. S. Naval Research Medical Unit No. 3, Cairo, Egypt, in January 1951 in southern Yemen. Practically nothing is known of the sandfly fauna of Arabia and these records may be considered as new. The collections made by Commander Knight are as follows: Coll. 304. Ta’izz, Yemen. Jan. 12, 1951. Elev. 4,100 feet. Trapped on oiled paper at base of stone walls at damp spots by cess-pit drainages, in the city proper. P. sergenti, P. langeroni var. orientalis, P. chinensis arabicus, n. subsp., S. tiberiadis. Coll. 306. Ta’izz, Yemen, Jan. 14, 1951. Elev. 3,590 feet. Trapped on oiled paper at entrances of rodent burrows (mostly Arvicanthus sp.) on an aloe-euphorbia hillside. Outside the town about 3 miles. P. papatasi var. bergeroti, P. roubaudt, P. langeront var. orientalis, S. africana, S. schwetzi., S. antennata var. cincta. Coll. 307. Ta’izz, Jan. 15, 1951. Same as coll. 304. Same species. Coll. 309. El-Hauban, Wadi el-Maleh, about 3 miles east of Ta’izz. Jan. 17, 1951. Elev. about 3,/00 feet. Trapped on oiled paper in rodent burrows at base of small rock cliff. P. rowbaudi, S. tibertadis. Coll. 15. Ta’iz, Yemen. Jan. 21, 1951. Caught bitmg a number of small boys sitting near our quarters in town. From dark until 19:45 hours. Bright moon. P. papatasii var. bergeroti, P. sergenti, P. langeroni var. orientalis, P. chinensis arabicus n. subsp. Genus Phlebotomus Rondani, 1840 Subgenus Phlebotomus Rondani Phlebotomus papatasii var. bergeroti Parrot, 1934 3 A, 1 2 coll. 306; 12 coll. 15, biting man in Ta’izz. The species has been recorded from Djanet in southern Algeria, from Abyssinia, and the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. Phlebotomus roubaudi Newstead, 1913 1 29,5 oc o coll. 306; and 1 2 coll. 309 from rodent burrows. This species was originally described from Akjoucht in Mauretania and has subsequently been found to occur in a belt south of the Sahara throughout Africa. It has been found by Kirk and Lewis west of Lake Rudolf in the Anglo- Egyptian Sudan. The absence of typical P. papatasii, which is closely related to these two species and which occurs commonly in the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan (together with P. papatasti var. bergeroti but not with P. roubaudi) is noteworthy. Subgenus Paraphlebotomus Theodor, 1948 Phlebotomus sergenti Parrot, 1917 Digi aor) coll. 304/307 kOe colle 15, biting man in Ta’izz. This species is known from the central Sahara, French West Africa, the southern Mediterranean, and from the Middle East, extending into North West India. It is very common in Bagdad, where it is the main carrier of Oriental sore and rare in Palestine. It has not been recorded from the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan or from Abyssinia, where 2 other species of the subgenus occur (P. alexandri and P. 120 JOURNAL OF THE sergenti var. saevus). It may therefore be assumed that P. sergenti reached Arabia from the north. Subgenus Laroussius Nitzulescu, 1931 Phlebotomus langeroni var. orientalis Parrot, 1936 38 2 @ coll. 15, biting man in Ta’lzz;5 oo coll. 304/307; 12 @o@ coll. 306 from rodent burrows. This is the most numerous species in the collec- tion. It was raised to specific rank by Parrot in 1946, but the differences from P. langeroni are so small that it is probably better regarded a variety or subspecies of P. langeroni. P. langeroni var. orientalis is known from Abyssinia and from the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, mainly in the area west of Lake Tana. It is the only common representa- tive in the area of the subgenus Laroussius (major group), which contains the principal car- riers of Kala Azar in the Mediterranean, and it is considered the carrier of Kala Azar in the Sudan. P. longipes, which also belongs to this subgenus, has, according to Kirk and Lewis, been found only in one locality in the Sudan, from which Kala Azar is not known. A few cases of Kala Azar have been recorded from Arabia. Two cases were recorded by Phillips (1904) in adults of 30 and 35 years of age from the Yemen and the Hedjaz. Whittingham (1937) mentions the case of a British officer who con- tracted the disease in Aden. Two further cases were recently recorded by Fawdry and Mazhar (1951) in children of 4 and 6 years, one from Ta’izz and the other from Beidha, 150 miles north of Aden. Two cases were recently diag- nosed in Jerusalem in immigrants (young adult males) from the Yemen (unpublished). Accord- ing to the age distribution of the few cases known from Arabia, the disease seems to be of the Su- danese type of Kala Azar, which according to Kirk “‘is chiefly a disease of late childhood and early adult life” and not as Mediterranean Kala Azar mainly a disease of young infants. Whitting- ham mentions that the sandflies from Aden were repeatedly identified as P. perniciosus. This spe- cies, which occurs only in the western Mediter- ranean, was not then distinguished from P. langeroni and its related forms. Presumably the sandflies from Aden were also P. langeroni var. orientalis. This species is thus apparently common in southern Arabia and bites man as the present records show. P. langeroni var. orientalis may therefore be considered also as the carrier of Kala Azar in southern Arabia. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 4 Subgenus Adlerius Nitzulescu, 1931 Phlebotomus chinensis arabicus, n. subsp 1 o,1 9 coll. 304/307; 1 9. coll. 15, Ta’izz, biting man. The occurrence of a form of P. chinensis in southern Arabia is very interesting. The species consists of 6 or 7 local forms, which are widely distributed throughout Asia, including northern India and China, the Middle East, and the eastern Mediterranean. None has been recorded so far from the Ethiopian region or North Africa. The various forms differ in the male mainly in the shape of the penis and the length of the genital filaments and in the armature of the pharynx in the female and in various measurements. The status of these forms has not yet been finally determined and a study of the whole group is required. They will probably have to be made into subspecies or even species. Female —Size 2.5 to 3 mm. Wing, length 2.5 to 2.9 mm; width 0.6 to 0.8 mm. Wing index a/8 = 1.8 to 2.3 mm. Palp formula: 1, 49(2, 3), 5. Rela- tive length of segments: 1-4-4-3.4-8. Antennae: Segment 3 > 4 + 5. A3/E = 1. Armature of pharynx rather similar to that of P. chinensis var. simici, extending forward about a quarter of the length of the pharynx. Spermatheca as in the other forms of P. chinensis. Male—Size 2.6 mm. Wing, length 2.5 mm; width 0.65 mm. Wing index a/8 = 1.7. Palp formula 1, 4, 2, 3, 5, . Relative length of segments: 1-3.3-3.8-3-9. Antennae: Segment 3 > 4 + 5. AS/Ee —— ES Genital filaments eight times as long as pump. Penis with a very shallow subterminal tubercle, which is rather far removed from the tip. The subspecies from the Yemen resembles most closely the form from Cyprus but differs in the antennal index A3/E, which is 0.7 in the 2 and 1.1 in the @ in the Cyprus form. The genital filaments are longer (6.6 times as long as the pump in the Cyprus form) and the subterminal tubercle is shallower and further removed from the tip than in the Cyprus form. Type at present in the author’s collection. Genus Sergentomyia Franca, 1920 Subgenus Sergentomyia Franca Group fallax Sergentomyia antennata var. cincta Parrot and Martin, 1944 3.22,4 ¢¢ coll. 306, from rodent burrows. The species occurs in the Anglo-Egyptian Su- APRIL 1953 dan, French Somaliland, and Uganda. It has 14 to 20 teeth in the buccal cavity and a rather narrow pharynx with relatively coarse teeth in the female. The specimens from the Yemen agree well with the description of the species. There are about 20 teeth in the buccal cavity of the female. Sergentomyia schwetzi Adler, Theodor, and Parrot, 1929 2 92,1 ¢ coll. 306, from rodent burrows. Group africana Sergentomyia africana Newstead, 1912 3 22 coll. 306, from rodent burrows. Kirk and Lewis (1951) propose to change the name of the species to S. freetownensis. This change, however, requires a ruling of the Inter- national Commission for Zoological Nomencla- ture, suppressing the name S. africana. The old name is therefore retained until the nomencla- torial position is clarified. Subgenus Sintonius Nitzulescu, 1931 Sergentomyia tiberiadis Adler and Theodor, 1930 Syn. S. subtilis Parrot and Martin, 1944 Peco eene whai77, coll. 304/307; 1. o' coll. 309, El-Hauban. The species was recorded from Abyssinia by Parrot in 1936 as P. tiberiadis. Later Parrot de- scribed the male of the species as P. subtilis, and in 1940 Parrot redescribed both sexes under WILSON AND MOORE: DIAPTOMUS FROM LOUISIANA 121 the name P. subtilis. Comparison of the type specimens of P. tiberiadis from Palestine with specimens of Parrot’s original series, with speci- mens from the Sudan, and with the specimens from the Yemen showed that there are prac- tically no constant differences between the mate- rial from the different localities. The characters on the basis of which Parrot separated S. subtilis from S. tiberiadis are so small and variable that they do not justify the retention of S. subtilis as a separate species. The Phlebotomus fauna of the Yemen is thus, as was to be expected, mainly Ethiopian in char- acter. Seven out of the 9 species recorded occur in Abyssinia and the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. Only one Mediterranean species, P. sergentt, and a new subspecies of P. chinensis were found, the various forms of which are widely distributed in Asia and the eastern Mediterranean. REFERENCES Fawpry, A. L., and MazHar, M. Two cases of Kala Azar in South Arabia. Trans. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. and Hyg. 45: 138, 1951. Kirk, R., and Lewis, D. J. The Phlebotominae of the Ethiopian Region. Trans. Roy. Ent. Soc. London 102: 383, 1951. Lewis, D. J., and Kirk, R. The sandflies of the Anglo Egyptian Sudan. Bull. Ent. Res. 41: 459. 1951. Puiuies, L. On the occurrence of the L.D. parasite in Arabia and Egypt. B.M.J. 195: 657. 1904. WHITTINGHAM, H. KE. Trans. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. and Hyg. 30: 403. 1937. BIOLOGY.—WNew records of Diaptomus sanguineus and allied species from Lout- siana, with the description of a new species (Crustacea: Copepoda). MiLpDRED STRATTON WILSON, Arctic Health Research Center, U. 8. Public Health Serv- ice, Anchorage, Alaska, and Water G. Moore, Loyola University, New Orleans, La. Marsh’s record of the occurrence in Louisiana of the fresh-water copepod Diapto- mus sanguineus Forbes appears to be based upon personal correspondence with Edward Foster (see Marsh, 1929, pp. 13, 15, and 17), whose manuscript records were published by Penn (1947). This lists the species as occurring near Slidell, in St. Tammany Parish, rather than near New Orleans as given by Marsh. Collections made in 1951 and 1952 by one of us (Moore) indicate that the species is very common in St. Tammany Parish, where it occurs in seasonal ponds and ditches, frequently in association with Diaptomus stagnalis and D. conipedatus. Collections made near Alton and Florenville from January to February 29 contained adults; most females collected on the latter date were ovigerous. The species also has been found in temporary pools and ponds north of Alexandria, Rapides Parish, in the central part of the State. Here most of the specimens found on December 28 were im- mature; only adults were present in collec- tions made on April 6. Two species allied to sanguineus have 122 JOURNAL OF THE been found in our Louisiana collections. The little-known Diaptomus virginiensis and a new species are described below from specimens collected in St. Landry and Evangeline Parishes. Diaptomus (Onychodiaptomus) virginiensis Marsh Figs. 11-12; 21-25 Diaptomus virginiensis Marsh, 1915, p. 457, figs. 1-5; 1929, p. 23. Specimens examined.—Type lot: from Marsh collection in U. 8. National Museum, Marsh nos. 4064, 4067, 4154. Great Falls, Va. Louisiana: 20 @ (4 ovigerous), 1 3, ditch pond on U. 8. Highway 71, south of Lebeau, St. Landry Parish, April 5, 1951, W. G. Moore; 6 2,same location (ditch ponds on opposite sides of highway—4 @ in one, 2 @ in other), December 27, 1951, W. G. Moore. The only record of this species in literature is that of the type locality in Virginia. The Loui- siana specimens agree very closely with the type material examined, so that there is no doubt of the identity of the species. The Louisiana specimens are a little larger than those recorded by Marsh: @, 1.41-1.61 mm, 2, 1.3 mm. (Marsh’s figures are: 9, 1.366, <6, 1.24 mm). The illustrations given here are all drawn from the Louisiana specimens. There are no differ- ences between the fifth leg of the Louisiana male and the type specimens from Virginia. Such dif- ferences as appear when Fig. 22 is compared with Marsh’s description and illustration (Marsh, 1915, fig. 5) have not been found to exist in the types. These include the greater length of the spine of the right basipod segment 1, the presence of the small sclerotized lamella of the distal outer portion of basipod 2, the presence of the prominent double- lined ridge of the second exopod segment, and the greater length of the lateral spine, which is placed at the middle of the segment and reaches to or beyond its apex. The proximal pad of the apical segment of the left exopod does not occupy half of the inner margin as stated by Marsh; he must have in- cluded a portion of the distal pad which covers most of the posterior face. The inner process arises near the distal part of this pad (Fig. 23) and forms a pincer with the distal process, as in WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 4 sanguineus. The distal process is stout and digiti- form, its length a little less than one-half that of the outer margin of the segment (7:16). Marsh has not described the urosome of the male, which is moderately asymmetrical. Groups of minute spinules such as those found on the dorsal face of the fourth segment in the Louisiana specimen (Fig. 21) are also present in the type material. These have not been found in any other species of the group. The important characters of the right anten- nule of the male have not been described. The Louisiana specimen agrees exactly with those of the type lot. The relative development of the spines of segments 10, 11, and 13 are unusual in North American diaptomids (Fig. 25). Those of 10 and 11 are very short, being only a little longer and stouter than the minute spines of segments 8 and 12. That of segment 13 is excessively large, reaching to about the middle of segment 15. The relative lengths of the spines are: Segment 8 10 11 12 13 Spine 3 4 5 3 46 Segment 15 has a moderately sized spinous proc- ess, segment 16 a minute process; both are placed at the middle of the segment. The setation of the left antennule agrees with that of the fe- male. The females of the Louisiana collection of virginiensis have a noticeable backwardly directed lobelike protrusion on the right side of the fifth metasomal segment (Figs. 11 and 12). The wings of the last segment are a little asymmetrical; the left may have the inner lobe well developed as shown in Fig. 12 or the entire margin may be nearly straight. The genital segment of the Loui- slana specimens agrees with the type in not having the pronounced asymmetry and great lateral ex- pansion found in the allied species; the lobe of the right side is usually only a little larger than that of the left, and there are no other expansions or modifications. The antennule is of the “‘little setaceous” type, with one seta on segments 11 and 13-19. The seta of segment 1 reaches to about the middle of segment 2, and is nonplumose. There is a cuticular lappet on the second segment of the endopod of leg 2. The general aspect of the fifth leg is much like that of the new species described below, from which it usually differs in having the setae of the endopod extremely short. ApriIn 1953 WILSON AND MOORE: DIAPTOMUS FROM LOUISIANA Zs : [ | ‘ Z Figs. 1-10.—Diaptomus louisianensis, n. sp., female: 1, Metasome segments 5-6 and urosome, dorsal; 2, dorsal outline of body; 3, leg 1; 4, leg 1, detail spines of exopod segments 1 and 3; 5, leg 2, endopod segment 2; 6, maxilliped; 7, leg 5, detail endopod setae; 8, leg 5, with detail of setae of exopod 3; 9, leg 5, showing variation in length of endopod; 10, antennule, detail of setae of segments 1-3; Figs. 11-12.—Diaptomus virginiensis Marsh, female (St. Landry Parish, La.): 11, Metasome segments 5-6, right side, lateral; 12, metasome segments 5-6 and urosome of ovigerous specimen, dorsal. 124 Diaptomus (Onychodiaptomus) louisianensis, W.A8D. Figs. 1-10; 13-20 Specimens examined.—Type lot: 6 2, 1 2, ditch in Chicot State Park, Evangeline Parish, La., December 27, 1950, W. G. Moore. Holotype 2 (whole, alcoholic), U. S. N. M. no. 93271. 7 &, ditch pond, south of Lebeau, St. Landry Parish, La., April 5, 1951, W. G. Moore. Female.—Length, about 1.85 mm (metasome, 1.40 mm, urosome, 0.45 mm). Dorsal view: head rounded (Fig. 2), cephalic segment behind anten- nal area greatly widened, its distal portion and segments 2—4 nearly parallel; the greatest width in segment 2, equaling about 30 per cent of the total body length. Segments 5 and 6 not separated dorsally, the right side of segment 5 differing slightly from the left, having the distal half more rounded. The wings of the last segment well de- veloped (Fig. 1), noticeably asymmetrical, that of the left side without lobes, the posterior mar- gin nearly straight; the right side having a con- spicuous lobe on both the outer and inner proxi- mal portion, the tip drawn out to a point. The urosome 3-segmented (Fig. 1). The geni- tal segment having each side of the proximal portion produced into conspicuous lateral lobes tipped with stout sensory spines, the lobe of the right side larger and more rounded than that of the left. Segment 2 short; segment 3 and the caudal rami subequal in length to one another; both margins of the rami armed with hairs. The inner dorsal seta nearly as long as the inner terminal caudal seta. Antennules reaching to near the end of the urosome. The seta of segment 1 reaching to a little beyond the middle of segment 3, its tip plumose (Fig. 10); that of segment 3 subequal to that of 1. The numerical setation as in other species of Onychodiaptomus: 1 seta on segments 11 and 13-19. The setae of segments 16, 18 and 21 of considerable length and stoutness, all con- spicuously plumose; that of 16 reaching to the middle of segment 20; that of 18 to the middle of 22. The short, modified setae of segments 17, 19, 20, 22 not particularly stiff, their tips straight and slender, each longer than or nearly as long as its segment. The maxilliped (Fig. 6) not stoutly developed; each basal segment and the endopod subequal to one another; the inner setae of the endopod all weakly developed, shorter than the endopod and the terminal and outer setae of the last JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 4 two segments, the longest of which are about as long as the endopod itself. The distal lobe of the basal segment conspicuously produced, with four setae. The relative lengths of the setae of the basal segment: lobe 4 15:9:7:10 lobe 1 lobe 2 20 17:20 lobe 3 15:10:23 Leg 1 (Fig. 3) having fine, inconspicuous hairs on the outer margins of exopod segments 2 and 3. The outer spines of segments 1 and 3 spiniform (Fig. 4), both relatively weak and short, propor- tions to one another, 5:7; both with minute marginal serrations and tipped with sensory hairs. The outer terminal modified seta not at all spiniform, longer than the total exopod (50:40), a little weaker and shorter than the other setae of the segment, its outer margin minutely serrate, its inner plumose. Leg 2 with a cuticular lappet on the second segment of the endopod (Fig. 5). Leg 5 (Fig. 8) rather stout, the spine of the basal segment large and flat. The first exopod segment broad, greatest width to length of outer margin about 17:30. Exopod 2 longer than exopod 1 (85:30), with long, slender spinules on the inner margin. Outer seta of segment 2 not present. Exopod 3 not developed, its setae present, very closely set; the outer a stout spine, the inner a more slender seta about twice the length of the outer, and reaching to near the middle of exo- pod 2. The endopod long, reaching a little beyond (Fig. 8), or considerably beyond the inner mar- gin of exopod 1 (Fig. 9); its inner margin pro- duced to a conspicuous protrusion armed with spiules which continue on to the face of the endopod. The apical setae sinuous (Fig. 7), their bases a little enlarged, one a little stouter than the other; their length usually less than half that of the endopod. Male—Length about 1.33 mm. The head rounded as in female, the rest of the metasome not so abruptly widened (Fig. 16). Segments 5 and 6 not separated dorsally, the posterior portions of segment 6 with 2 spines. The genital segment with a slender spine on the right side. The urosome conspicuously asymmetrical in the distal portion (Figs. 17 and 18). Segment 4 con- siderably produced dorsally on the right. side; segment 5 having the right side produced laterally into a large, backwardly directed, marginally sclerotized lobe. The left caudal ramus straight, ApRIL 1953 WILSON AND MOORE: DIAPTOMUS FROM LOUISIANA PAS Fries. 13-20.—Diaptomus louisianensis, n. sp., male: 13, Leg 5, posterior; 14, leg 5, detail left exopod segment 2, posterior; 15, leg 5, detail distal part of right basipod segment 2 and exopod 1; 16, dorsal out- line of body; 17, metasome segments 5-6 and urosome, dorsal; 18, detail of urosome segments 4-5 and caudal rami, dorsal; 19, right antennule, apical segments; 20, right antennule, segments 8-16. Figs. 21-25.—Diaptomus virginiensis Marsh, male (St. Landry Parish, La.) : 21, Detail of urosome seg- ments 4-5 and caudal rami, dorsal; 22, leg 5, posterior; 23, leg 5, detail left exopod segment 2, posterior; 24, right antennule, apical segments; 25, right antennule, segments 8-16. 126 the right narrowed proximally and widened dis- tally; both rami with inner marginal hairs. The left antennule with the same setation as in the female; the seta of segment | reaching only to the middle of segment 2. The right antennule (Fig. 20) with the spine of segment 8 not enlarged. The spines of segments 10, 11 and 13 all longer than the width of their segments, relative lengths of spines of two specimens: 18:23:24 and 16:21:25. The spine of 13 reaching to about the middle of 14. Segments 14-16 very swollen; seg- ment 15 with a large spinous process arising at the middle and reaching to near the end of the segment; segment 16 lacking a process. The modi- fied setae of 15-17 unusually stout, the tongue- like process very short and not arising close to the end of the seta. The twenty-third segment (Fig. 19) produced to a minute hook-like process, accompanied by a very narrow lamella. Maxilliped, leg 1 and leg 2 like those of the female. Leg 5 (Fig. 13) comparatively elongate and slender, the left ramus hardly reaching beyond the basipod of the right ramus. The sensory spines of both basal segments minute. The second basi- pod segment of the right leg elongate, its distal portion widened, but not conspicuously so, not swollen on the inner side, the outer portion pro- duced into a rounded lobe (Fig. 15); a large, crescent shaped ridge on the inner proximal posterior face. Exopod 1 longer than wide; with a narrow rectangular hyaline lamella on the inner distal margin. The second exopod segment elon- gate and narrow (length to width 50:15); with an inner marginal ridge. The spine of the outer margin reaching to the apex of the segment, placed below the middle of the segment at about 68 per cent of its total length. The claw thick throughout, subequal in length to the exopod, 52:50. Endopod indistinctly 2-segmented, reach- ing to the middle of exopod 1. The second basipod segment of the left ramus about as long as the first, broad throughout. The exopod set deeply into the basal segment, its width greatly reduced. The two segments sub- equal in length to one another (measuring to the base of the distal process). The apical segment (Fig. 14) having the proximal pad reduced in size, protruding medially but not extending dis- tally to the middle of the segment. The distal pad confined to the posterior face, its medial and distal boundaries outlined below by heavy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 4 TABLE 1.—CoMPARISON OF CHARACTERS OF Diaptomus sanguineus Group : : sangut- | virgint-| louist- Character A : ° neus ensis | anensis hes perus 2 Metlasome Segment 5 with right lateral | PIOUrUsiON..~........- —1 | -+!1 — — Segment 6 with elongate | SPINES hi aatee se co oe ee ee — _ “Wings” strongly asym- MS trics vs): ee yeeer ee ae —- | = + — Q Urosome S-seementedss-) eae osee ee + | + _ = Genital segment asymmetrical... 5. sss: i4-sF —_ 7 “= co Urosome Segment 4 strongly asym- Met Caley ye ee ae oe — | — ~ ae Segment 4 with dorsal spi-| Segment 5 strongly produced., right: sides, os.ee er oe ee ; = = == oe oS Right Aniennule Spines: Ssenlarged = se ees: ae _ == = <= 10-11: as long as or a little longerthansegmentwidth. + | — == + 13: reaching to end of 14 or be-| VOUG: 2 eS see eta | ee Processes: P5ssDTeSen bee eee ee ee eo IG: presents 22.5... | Nar- tri- nar- ton- row, an- row, gue- gular | rec- like ed tangu- lar Exopod 2, lateral spine below) middle of segment......... + — + + o Leg 35, left Distal pad posterior only) (not bulging medially)... .. = — Inner process arising below Proximal ap2d eee ee — = =e Inner process reaching to near end of distal (form- INP PINCeN) eee ee = + 9 Leg 5 Slender (length exopod 1 more than3 times width)... _- —- — —_ Inner seta of exopod 3 reach- ing beyond middle of CLAW ee ee eee! _ Bios — — Endopod setae more than half length ofendopod..... a —_ + 1+ refers to the presence of a character, — to its absence. AprRIL 1953 sclerotizations, the short stout hairs recumbent and curving toward the outer margin. The distal process continuous with but clearly demarcated from the segment, its length about one half of the outer margin of the segment, digitiform, curv- ing inwards, the cuticle at its tip notched so as to form a short spinous projection. The inner process arising below the distal pad, its base thickened but otherwise very slender, curving toward and reaching to near the end of the distal process so as to form a pincer; set thickly with spinules on the inner side only; the heavy sclerotized medial portion of the segment produced at its base into a characteristic point. The endopod reaching to about the middle of exopod 2; indistinctly 2-segmented, its anterior face and medial margins set thickly with stout spinules. COMPARISON OF SPECIES OF THE SANGUINEUS GROUP The subgenus Onychodiaptomus Light (1939) may be divided by the structure of the male right fifth leg into two convenient taxonomic groups: the birgez and the sanguineus. In Diapto- mus birgei, the only known species of its group, the second basipod segment and the exopod, including the claw, differ from the sanguineus group, except for the presence of a prominent hyaline lamella on the inner portion of exopod 1. In all other characters, both sexes of birger show unmistakable relationship to the sanguineus group. Coker (1926) and Kiefer (1931) have given useful descriptions of birger. The conspicu- ous ventral lobe found in the female distad to the genital protrusion, is not present in the other species of the subgenus. The sanguineus group includes four species: D. sanguineus Forbes, 1876; D. virginiensis Marsh, 1915; D. hesperus M. 8S. Wilson and Light, 1951; and D. lowisianensis, n. sp. These species agree in the similarity of pat- tern of the right male fifth leg which is charac- terized by modification of the second basipod segment and shortness of the claw. The species differ from one another most noticeably in the structure and armature of the second basipod segment and the shape and size of the lamella of exopod 1. There are definable differences in the left exopod. D. hesperus is strikingly diverse in that the inner process is so placed that it does not form a pincer with the distal process as in the other species; in this, it is more like D. birgev. WILSON AND MOORE: DIAPTOMUS FROM LOUISIANA 127 Diaptomus sanguineus is a well-defined species; its important diagnostic characters have been reviewed by Humes and Wilson (1951). Louisiana specimens show no significant differences from the Massachusetts specimens studied in that re- port. The female is easily distinguished from all other North American diaptomids by the unique development of the last metasomal segment, which is not expanded into the usual “wings” but instead has both sensory spines greatly en- larged. Throughout its wide distributional range there is no variation in this character, except for slight differences in the length of the spines. The male is distinguished by the elongation of the usual short spine on segment 8 of the right anten- nule and by the spiniform elongation of the outer distal corner of the right second basipod segment of the fifth leg. Though variable in length, this process is specifically distinct and differs from the modification or armature found in the other species. Table 1 gives a summary of the useful taxo- nomic characters separating the species. LITERATURE CITED Coker, Ropert E. Plankton collections in Lake James, North Carolina—copepods and Clado- cera. Journ. Elisha Mitchell Sei. Soe. 41: 228- 258, pls. 3444. 1926. Forses, S. A. List of Illinois Crustacea with de- scriptions of new species. Bull. Illinois Mus. Nat. Hist. 1: 3-25, 1 pl. 1876. Humes, ArTHUR G., and Witson, MILDRED STRAT- Ton. The last copepodid instar of Diaptomus sanguineus Forbes (Copepcda). Journ. Wash- ington Acad. Sci. 41: 395-399, figs. 1-24.1951. KUEFER, FRIEDRICH. Zur Kenntnis der freilebenden Siisswassercopepoden, insbesondere der Cyclo- piden Nordamerikas. Zool. Jahrb. (Abt. Syst.) 61: 579-620, 55 figs. 1931. Licut,S. F. New American subgenera of Diapto- mus Westwood (Copepoda, Calanoida). Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc. 58: 473-484, 24 figs. 1939. MarsH, CHARLES DwiGcHt. A new crustacean, Diaptomus virginiensis, and a description of Diaptomus tyrelli Poppe. Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 49: 457-462, 7 figs. 1915. Distribution and key of the North Amert- can copepods of the genus Diaptomus, w7th the description of a new species. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 75: 1-27, 16 figs. 1929. PENN, GeorcGE Henry. Branchiopoda and Cope- poda of the New Orleans area as recorded by Ed Foster in the early 1900’s. Proc. Louisiana Acad. Sci. 10: 189-193. 1947. Wiuson, Miuprep Srrarron, and Lieut, 8. F. Description of a new species of diaptomid cope- pod from Oregon. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc. 70: 25-30, figs. 1-11. 1951. 128 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 4 ICHTHYOLOGY —The blenniid fish genera Cirripectus and Exallias with descrip- tions of two new species from the tropical Pacific.: DoNALD W. STRASBURG, University of Hawaii, and LEoNARD P. Scuuutrz, U.S. National Museum. Schultz (Copeia 1941 (1): 17-20) recog- nized four species of Cvrrzpectus, among which were C. leopardus and C. brevis. Chapman (7n de Beaufort and Chapman, The fishes of the Indo-Australian Archi- pelago, 9: 246-255. 1951) recognized three species of Cirripectus: C. leopardus (Day), C’. variolosus (Cuvier and Valenciennes), and C. sebae (Cuvier and Valenciennes). In his discussion two extralimital species were recognized, C. quagga (Fowler and Ball) and C. brevis (KXner). Further study of these species, based on many additional specimens, indicates con- clusively that both Schultz and Chapman misinterpreted Kner’s description and figure of C. brevis. We now find that leopardus must be referred to the synonymy of brevis and that the species distinguished by Schultz (1.c., p. 19) as brevis is a new species. This contribution distinguishes as valid the genus Evallias and summarizes the chief differences between it and Czrrzpectus. Also two new species are described from the tropical Pacific. We do not consider this study as a review of the genera, since ade- quate material is not available. We lack specimens from the western Indian Ocean and from several island groups in the tropical Indo-Pacific Oceans. The following analysis indicates the chief differences between Cirripectus and Exallias: la. A pair of barbels on underside of throat, each side of middle of chin; teeth in upper jaw very numerous, fine, flexible, those in lower jaw numerous, moderately flexible, about twice as broad as those in upper jaw and about one-third as many; no canines; least distance between eye and nuchal fringe con- tained 214 or more times in postorbital length of head; soft rays of dorsal fin 12 or 13 and anal 14 or 15; upper lip with short barbels’. ==: Exallias Jordan and Evermann 1b. No barbels on underside of head; teeth in both jaws very numerous, fine, flexible, and of ap- proximately same size; one or two canine teeth present at each side of lower jaw; least distance between eye and nuchal fringe con- tained fewer than two times in postorbital 1 Contribution No. 28, Hawaii Marine Labora- tory. length of head; soft rays of dorsal 14 to 16 and of anal 15 to 17; upper lip crenulate or nearly so..............Cirripectus Swainson Because Hzallias has been confused with Cirripectus since it was proposed, a sum- mary of the nomenclature for the two genera is important as well as that for the single species referable to Hvallias. Genus Exallias Jordan and Evermann Exallias Jordan and Evermann, Bull. U.S. Fish Comm. 23 (for 1903): 503. 1905 (type, Salarias brevis Kner). Gloriella Schultz, Copeia 1941(1): 17 (type, Czrrz- pectes caninus Herre). Exallias brevis (Kner) Salarias brevis Kner, Sitz. Akad. Wiss. Natur. 58: 42, pl. 6, fig. 18. 1868 (type locality, Savaii, Samoa); Weber, Szboga Exped. Fische: 537. 1913 (Karakelang Island). Cirripectes brevis Fowler, Mem. B. P. Bishop Mus. 10: 432. 1928 (Hawaii; Marshall Islands; Kings- mill Islands). Salarias leopardus Day, Proc. Zool. Soc. London 1869: 518 (type locality, Ceylon). Blennius leopardus Day, Fishes of India 2: 325, pl. 68, fig. 5. 1876 (Ceylon). Cirripectes leopardus Schultz, Copeia 1941(1): 19 (Oahu); U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 180: 272-273. 1943 (Oahu and Rose Islands) ; Chapman (zn de Beau- fort and Chapman) Fishes of the Indo-Austral- ian Archipelago 9: 247-249, fig. 43. 1951 (Moluc- cas, Talaut, Marshalls, Hawaiian and Samoan Islands). . Cirripectes caninus Herre, Philippine Journ. Sci. 59(2): 284. 1936 (type locality, Ternate Island, Moluccas); 70(4): 342. 1939 (Ternate Island). Gloriella canina Schultz, Copeia 1941(1): 18 (Ter- nate Island). Genus Cirripectus Swainson Cirripectus Swainson, Nat. Hist. Fishes 2: 79-80 (Cirripectes on pp. 182, 275) 1839 (type, Salarias variolosus Cuvier and Valenciennes); Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (11)10: 810. 1948; Chap- man, Fishes of the Indo-Australian Archipelago Sie 2402 9b Cirripectes Schultz, Copeia 1941(1): 18 (type, Sa- larias variolosus Cuvier and Valenciennes). During the progress of this study numerous counts and measurements have been made on various species of Cirripectus and Exrallias. These are recorded in Tables 1 to 3 and should be used along with the keys. Aprit 1953 Our methods of counting fin rays and the number of cirri need describing. Each fin ray with a separate and distinct base was counted as one ray, those rays split to a single base were also counted as one. Females that are past the Ophioblennius stage have the first anal spine embedded in the tissue around the genital region. This spine was evident only by dissection. Sexu- ally mature males have the distal part of the two anal spines developed into a knob, consisting of convoluted spongy tissue. Each nuchal and supraorbital cirrus, including those forming double rows in certain cases, was counted as one cirrus if it had a single base; thus a cirrus deeply bifurcate distally or near its tip only was counted as one. The problem of interpreting the significance of a single supraorbital cirrus must be considered on the basis of variability for each species. The supraorbital cirrus of C. jennings: is simple, slender, and very, very rarely slightly bifurcate at its tip. This cirrus is never a broad flap as in certain other species. The supraorbital cirrus of C’. quagga has a constricted base, thence broaden- ing distally. It may be a simple dermal flap as in many young specimens, or the flap may be bi- fureate or with multifid cirri in adults; the po- tential cirri in this species may appear as fleshy ridges in the dermal flap later becoming separated into distinct cirri. In the young or juveniles of C. sebae, C. variolo- sus, and C. filamentosus the supraorbital cirrus occasionally may be simple but in the adults it is usually multifid. The above discussion indicates that some cau- tion must be used in connection with the supra- orbital cirrus for distinguishing certain species. In faded and in young specimens, jenningst and quagga may be confused but these two species may be distinguished respectively by the num- ber of times the snout length is contained in the least distance from eye to nuchal fringe, which is 0.7 to 0.8, and 1.0 to 1.3, respectively (see the key). Cirripectus jfilamentosus, based on specimens from Arnhem Land, Australia, might be con- sidered as a subspecies of C. variolosus on the basis of slightly more numerous rays in dorsal and anal fins and fewer nuchal cirri, if both sexes of adult specimens of filamentosus did not possess an elongate first dorsal spine. In variolosus only the adult males have an elongate first dorsal spine. We do not have sufficient material from STRASBURG AND SCHULTZ: BLENNID FISH GENERA 129 localities between the Marianas, Marshalls, Phoe- nix and Samoan Islands, and Australia to study this problem adequately. The following key does not include the Ophio- blennius stages of the genera Cirripectus and Exallias: KEY TO THE PACIFIC SPECIES OF EXALLIAS AND CIRRIPECTUS la. Teeth in lower jaw fixed or barely movable and about half as numerous and twice as broad as those in upper jaw; no lower ¢a- nines; chin with pair of barbels adjoining pair of pores on each side; length of snout into least distance from eye to nuchal fringe 0.3 to 0.5 times; dorsal rays XII, 12 or 18; anal II, 14 or 15 (rarely 15); nuchal cirri 30 to 36 (see table); edge of upper lip with 12 to 24 (usually 18 to 24) barbel-like lappets; color pattern of blackish spots on paler backerounde saan. Exallias brevis (Kner) 1b. Teeth in lower jaw freely movable, of about. same breadth and number as those in upper jaw; pair of lower canines present; chin without barbels; length of snout into least distance from eye to nuchal fringe 0.7 to 1.3; dorsal rays XII, 13 to 16 (rarely 13); anal II, 14 to 17 (rarely 14); edge of upper lip Gremulate s.r eels oes. (Cirripectus Swainson). 2a. Body and pectoral fins everywhere covered with dark spots on paler background; nuchal cirri 47 to 62; dorsal rays XII, 14; anal II,15..Cirripectus fuscoguttatus,n.sp. 2b. Body and pectoral fins not marked as in 2a; if dark spots are present they do not uni- formly cover the body and pectoral fins; nuchal cirri 43 or fewer. 3a. Anterior half of body pale, spotted with darker; posterior half of body blackish, spotted with pale; supraorbital cirrus slender and simple; dorsal rays XII, 15; anal II, 15 or 16 (rarely 15); length of snout into least distance from eye to nuchal fringe 0.7 to 0.8 times. Cirripectus jenningst Schultz? 3b. Color pattern not as in 3a. 4a. Color of head and body plain tan to dark brown, sometimes with scattered pale spots or dots on snout, cheeks, and upper lip; fins brown to blackish except sometimes anterodorsal part of spinous and soft dorsals and up- per lobe of caudal pale or whitish. 5a. Nuchal cirri totaling 24 to 30 (see ta- ble); dorsal rays XII (very rarely SOUUD)S 4b oe Ws gine! JUL, NS oie Ge first dorsal spine notably elongate 2 Curripectes jenningst Schultz, U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 180: 273-275, fig. 27. 1943 (type locality, Swains Island). 130 JOURNAL OF THE in adults of both sexes as short as 45 mm. standard length. Cirripectus filamentosus (Alleyne and Macleay)? 5b. Nuchal cirri totaling 29 to 37 (see ta- ble); dorsal rays XII, 14; anal II, 14 or 15; first dorsal spine elongate only in adult males. Cirripectus variolosus (Cuvier and Valenciennes) 4 4b. Head and body not colored as in 4a. 6a. Dorsal rays XII, 13 or 14; anal II, 14 or 15; background coloration hght tan to dark brown. Young, longitu- dinal dark stripe from behind eye to caudal fin base, sometimes broken into series of elongate blotches. Adults, with 5 to 12 vertical dark brown bars; throat, cheeks, and opercles usually with numerous roundish pale spots, size of pupil, enclosed in reticulated brown lines that resemble a honeycomb, some- times the brown pigment is so ex- tensive that hght spots appear on a dark background. Cirripectus sebae (Cuvier and Valenciennes)? 6b. Dorsal rays XII, 13 to 16 (rarely 13, 14); anal Wiel5 tomy Ganelyala). 7a. Head and body tan to dark brown with 8 to 15 vertical dark bars and frequently speckled with tiny black and white dots; narrow dark bar below center of eye, another behind lower rear edge of eye, the latter extending across lip and meeting its fellow on underside of head; narrow transverse dark streak across gill membranes on underside of head; streaks may be diffuse on large specimens; nuchal cirrl 25 to 36 (see table); length of snout into least distance from eye nuchal fringe 1.0 to 1.3 times. Cirripectus quagga (Fowler and Ball) 7b. Head and body dark brown or blackish; no vertical dark bars or streaks near eye or across gill membranes; color pattern con- sisting of conspicuous roundish pale spots, size of pupil, enclosed in reticulated brown lines that re- 3 Salarias filamentosus Alleyne and Macleay, Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 1: 337, pl. 14, fig. 1. 1877 (type locality, Cape York). 4 Salarias variolosus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss. 11: 317. 1836 (type locality, Guam). 5 Salarias sebae Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss. 11: 323. 1836 (type locality, East Indies). ® Rupiscartes quagga Fowler and Ball, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 76: 273. 1924 (type locality, Wake Island). WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 4 semble a honeycomb, sometimes brown pigment is so extensive that light spots appear on a dark background; this pattern confined to throat, breast and sides of head in males but sometimes ex- tending posteriorly as far as the fifth or sixth soft dorsal ray in fe- males; large males have the pos- terior half to two-thirds of sides of body with numerous white mark- ings that vary from round white dots or small spots to elongate ones or white lines that extend vertically, obliquely, or horizon- tally; some of elongate lines may run together; posteriorly both sexes may have scattered pupil- sized blackish spots or short lines on a dark background; nuchal cirri 32 to 42 (see table). Cirripectus stigmaticus, n. sp. Cirripectus fuscoguttatus, n. sp. Biecall Cirripectes brevis (non Kner), Schultz, Copeia 1941(1): 19-20; U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 180: 272- 273. 1943 (Enderbury and Tutuila Islands); Chapman, Fishes of the Indo-Australian Archi- pelago 9: 249 (note). 1951. Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 113634. Rongerik Atoll, Eniwetak Island, Ocean reef in surf, June 29, 1946, S-46-241, Schultz and Herald, standard length 68 mm. Paratypes (lots not bearmg U.S.N.M. num- bers have been distributed to other museums). —Bikini Atoll, Namu Island, Ocean reef, April 4, 8-46-51, Schultz, 5 specimens 42 to 53 mm in standard length; Bikini Atoll, Bokon Island, April 15, 8-46-94, Schultz and Brock, 9 speci- mens 34 to 80 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 1421038, Bikini Atoll, Airy Island, April 16, 8-46-96, Schultz, 16 specimens, 23.5 to 84 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 142102, Bikini Atoll, Eman Island, July 19, 1947, S-46-441, Schultz, Brock, Myers, and Hiatt, 10 specimens, 19 to 94 mm; Bikini Atoll halfway between Bikini and Amen Islands, July 21, 1947, S-46-442, Brock, Hiatt, and Schultz, 1 specimen; 72 mm; Bikini Atoll, Enyu Island, August 1, 1947, S-46-483, Schultz, Brock, and Hiatt, 2 specimens 73 to 76 mm; Bikini Atoll, Namu Island, August 6, 1947, S-46-508, Schultz, Brock, and Hiatt, 2 specimens, 91 to 95 mm; Bikini Atoll, Bikini Island, August 18, 1947, S-46-533, Brock and Schultz, 2 specimens, 93 to 99 mm; Bikini Atoll, Namu Island, August 7, 1947, S-1019, Brock, Hiatt, and Schultz, 2 speci- mens, // to 92 mm; US.N.M. no. 142100: AprIL 1953 Rongerik Atoll, Eniwetok Island, June 29, 5-46- 241, Schultz and Herald, 12 specimens, 21 to 81 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 142104, Eniwetok Atoll, Mui Island, May 28, S-46-186, Schultz, 35 specimens, 22 to 100 mm; Eniwetok Atoll, Giriinien Island, May 29, S-46-187, Schultz, 1 specimen, 81 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 142105, Kwajalein Atoll, Ennyla- began Island, September 1, 1946, S-46-397, 1 specimen, 72 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 115497, Tutuila STRASBURG AND SCHULTZ: BLENNID FISH GENERA 131 Island, Fagasa Bay, rock pools, June 5, 1939, Schultz, 1 specimen, 73 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 115498, Enderbury Island, reef, May 15 to 19, 1939, Schultz, 5 specimens, 73 to 89 mm; US.N.M. no. 164960, Gilbert Islands, Onotoa Atoll, July-August 1951, lagoon and ocean reefs, Randall and Strasburg, 2 specimens, 60 to 79 mm. Description —Certain counts were made of the holotype and paratypes and these data are Fig. 2.—Cirripectus stigmaticus, n. sp.: Holotype (U.S.N.M. no. 164962), 63 mm. in standard length. 132 recorded in Table 1. Detailed measurements were made on the holotype, and these data, ex- pressed in thousandths of the standard length, are recorded in Table 2. Dorsal rays XII, 14; anal II, 15 (first anal spine embedded in females); pectoral 15 (with lower 5 or 6 thickened); pelviecs I, 4; branched caudal rays 5 + 4; fringe of cirri on nape 47 to 62; nasal cirri 4 to 12, and orbital cirri 8 to 18 (more cirri on large adults). Head 3.0 to 3.2; greatest depth 3.2 to 3.5; longest dorsal spine 4.8 to 5.7; longest thickened pectoral ray 3.7 to 4.0; all in the standard length. Eye 3.0 to 5.0; snout 2.3 to 2.8; interorbital space 7.0 to 9.0; postorbital length of head 1.6 to 1.7; least depth of body 2.6 to 3.0; greatest depth of body 1.0 to 1.2; preorbital width 4.5 to 6.0; all in length of the head. Orbital tentacle with a broad flattish base, its distal edge somewhat folded with numerous long cirri, more in adults; nuchal band of cirri simple, those at middorsal line about same length as those laterally, nuchal band of cirri curving posteroventrally so that the distance between vertical lines thru ventrolateral basal tip and anterodorsal edge is contained 4.6 to 5.6 times in postorbital length of head; ventral basal end of nuchal band of cirri blackish, notably swollen even in young, extending ventrally to opposite pupil; snout profile nearly vertical; edge of upper lip with numerous very short papillae or crenulate in young; lower lip shallowly plicate; no cirri on chin; lateral line arched over pectoral fin then curving to midlengthwise axis of body, ending at caudal fin base; a vertical line thru dorsal origin passes just behind lower tip of base of nuchal fringe and just behind pelvic bases; pec- toral fin reaches a little past anal origin; anal spines two, first embedded in females, except juveniles; in adult males both anal spines with grayish crenulate and convoluted swollen dermal pads; a canine tooth present on each side of lower jaw; teeth in both jaws very numerous, of equal size, and moveable; sixth pectoral ray from lower- most edge of fin longest; distal edge of caudal fin a little rounded. Color in alcohol—Background color brown to light brown; body and head profusely covered with roundish black spots, usually absent from all fins except basally on pectorals; all fins very dark brown or blackish. The color pattern changes with size as follows: From 19 to 30 mm in stand- ard length the black spots are barely discernible and few in number, the background color is JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 4 chiefly plain brownish and dark and light bands on the head are becoming developed. In those 30 to 40 mm there is a prominent V-shaped brown mark on front of snout, which is separated by a narrow white band from next black band ex- tending from below eye across upper lip to meet its fellow on chin, there forming a triangular spot; just behind this is a wide white band extending from behind eye across cheek through rear of maxillary meeting its fellow under head; this pale band set off sharply by dark brown color of rear of head. From 40 to 55 mm the large black spots on head and body are prominent, and the pale and dark bands on head are still discernible. Between the lengths of 55 to 70 mm, the black bands on head begin to break up into dark spots, and in those longer than 70 mm, the bands are no longer distinct having broken into roundish to oblong spots. The nuchal fringe consists of black cirri, with a very blackish swollen basal area at lateral tips, even in the 19 mm specimen; the two anal spines on adult males have swollen dermal pads light grayish in color. Color when alwe—Background color dark brown, spots blackish; eye crimson (iris); upper edge of caudal fin orange. Ecology —This moderately common species was taken in the Lithothamnium ridge area where the surf was strong. Remarks.—The statement by Chapman (l.c., p. 249) that the two species “leopardus” and “brevis” (now fuscoguttatus) occur side by side in the Marshalls, Hawaii, and Samoa is incorrect. C. fuscoguttatus has not been collected in the Hawaiian Islands or at Johnston Island. The key to the species of Cirripectus gives the essential characters and distinguishes fuscogut- tatus from other related species in the genus. Named fuscoguttatus in reference to the pro- fusion of brown spots on body and fins. Cirripectus stigmaticus, n. sp. Fig. 2 Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 164962, Rongerik Atoll, Latoback Island, lagoon reef, June 28, 1946, S-46-238, Schultz and Herald, male, stand- ard length 63 mm. Paratypes—U.S.N.M. no. 164963, Rongerik Atoll, Latoback Island, lagoon reef, June 28, 1946, S-46-238, Schultz and Herald, 2 specimens, 62 and 66 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 164964, Bikini Atoll, lagoon reef half way between Bikini and Amen Islands, July 21, 1947, S-46-442, Brock, AprIL 1953 STRASBURG AND SCHULTZ: BLENNID FISH GENERA 133 | S | i TaBLE 2.—THE LENGTH OF THE SNOUT INTO THE | ae | -———., Least DistaNcE BETWEEN HINDBORDER OF M _— a 187 a Eyr anD NucHaL FRINGE Z Soe a Recon —_ Kt ; Ratio = a jo 3 Genus and species a eos (Sos _ 0.3) 0.4 |0.5)0.6)0.7)0.8/0.9) 1.0 }1.1/1.2]1.3 fe) a =) ps = = ouees | oaee ss |\ataal| sats | aaa eal wallace cole e | er = 3 =~ = Exzallias brevis........| 2.| 10 | 1 < Saas Bisees ey oa NM 5 amie ed aa — Oo Cirripectus: A Dae | = as) ~ fuscoguttatus, n. gi “S| ib =i Si Oba pa rettas tases 6 | 3 1 » | © GT cs a) VORVOLOSUSEp ee eae PN key | 22 a + | ~~ ClO SEDGE es Seat Seok oe ID Ayal a Sel oo re jilamentosus........ Onleaeliee S| 2 = = 2 = VENIMINGSI ee 41} 5 ee 3 Spe Ne © LAG GO ee tee esa e2e lel Paes ae | a sligmaticus, n. is me we 2 g Sa | SPrsee sean Are 2) 6 Wil & S LD | — fea} 5 _ tee, = |Z Bin | & aot” : S20, aie : = | Bin | 7 - = Sees z Alert eS | Fe A |= TABLE 3.—MEASUREMENTS, EXPRESSED IN THOU- b> bh = = a | i pea emnen SANDTHS OF THE STANDARD LENGTH, MADE g Ss | oo iy aed ON CERTAIN SPECIES OF CIRRIPECTUS B 22 | aaoce i 5 Sl Ce) Sv L ie oo aliecg C. stigmaticus, C. fuscoguttatus, 5 ste | © ie Te nN > E Nn. Sp. Nn. Sp. m qa | 00 = 60 1 s Characters a en| a Ss" aes 2 Holo- | Para-| Para-| Holo-| Para-| Para- S OQ | ats CO 1D a type | type | type | type | type | type = a | os 5 = ore l SSS 3 Standard length in mil- - eee a is pee], fo 3 limietens eer ype se 63.0 | 43.1 | 93.0 68 22 81 a Fa re een SCG INT 6000 1 t= oS A. - Head, tip of snout to 2 Se fea se rear 0 opercular m 2 see Reg ast 1 os Cte oO | eg membprane.-0-..25-..-) 291) 309) | 201 |316), 332 | 321 = Dea lee i (Sl ie lal = Greatest depth of 3 Swe (ol bo eles padiy.s Wee oak pees 307 | 320] 333 | 360] 282 | 348 & Reo || IDS ecore Ge Shes Least depth of body...| 113 | 114] 116] 129 | 109] 123 “= = aE a ROG CS too : 2 % Postorbital length of Oo Zs > ZooLtoey.—Valletofolliculina bicornis, a unique new genus and species of folliculinid (Ciliata: Heterotricha) from California. E. A. AROTOWS. =. occ ae pie Was Oo ots be Oe MammMatocy.—Three new lemmings (Dicrostonyx) from Arctic America, CHarurs O. HANDLEY, JR...00..2. 25.2 +... oe) eee This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. Page 169 179 182 185 189 194 Vou. 438 JuLy 1953 No. 7 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS J. P. E. Morrison JoHN C. EWERS Re Kk. Cook U.8. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. CuHacs, JR. EvsBert L. LITT es, JR. ZOOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrMan Puitiep DRUCKER CHEMISTRY ANTHROPOLOGY Dean B. Cowl1E Davip H. DUNEKLE PHYSICS GEOLOGY ALAN STONE ENTOMOLOGY - 7 oN ~S ee } eT A athe aa Va 9 A 7 A 102 AU G 4 love PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE a INDARY ~~ Sn f aes biped: e WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES >= ———— Mount Royat & GuILFoRD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 é Jif \ 4 | Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate): Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12) pp: 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.2 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13 :00 $16.25 $3 .00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29 .25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEpDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JOURNAL.—Per year...........-....se.2-se eee $7 .50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — _ Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 42, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $356.00. Monoecrapu No. 1, ‘“The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’? by Herbert Friedmann. $4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete........................-.-05- $25.00 Single volumes, unbound. . 4.0) ..02.5 2. od. . a ek ce ee eee 2.00 Single numbers. i... .5.5.4.2 2025s. deeb ka 8 eee eae oe ee 25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and aan to the Treasurer, H.S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12, DC. Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 43 July 1953 ING, 7 PALEONTOLOGY .—A new species of Carinocrinus from Oklahoma. HARRELL L. STRIMPLE, Bartlesville, Okla. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) I collected the specimens used in this study from the upper Pitkin formation (Chester) in the Cookson Hills, southeast of Muskogee, Okla. I consider the species to be referable to the genus Carinocrinus Laudon, though the arm structure is dif- ferent from that of C. stevens: Laudon, which is the genotype species and only form here- tofore known. According to the description and illustration of C. stevensi, the first bi- fureation does not take place before the fifth primibrachials (PBrBr;), whereas in C. eventus, n. sp., the first primibrachials are known to be axillary in at least four of the arms (the anterior ray has two known rami, but the point of branching is questionable). The arms of C. eventus are somewhat stouter than those of C. stevensz and the dorsal cup of the former species has a relatively greater length due mainly to the unusual length of the basal plates. Laudon considered Carinocrinus to have probably evolved through Culmicrinus and was no doubt influenced by the arm struc- ture of C. stevensi. The arms of Culmicrinus do not commence their isotomous branch- ing until several PBrBr are formed. As noted above, this is not the case in C. even- tus. I am inclined to consider Gilmocrinus Laudon as a possible ancestrial form based on the steeply conical dorsal cup and rela- tively stout anal sac. Gilmocrinus has only five arms; however, strong ramules are present and it is not unreasonable to suppose they could have evolved to regular arms. Carinocrinus eventus, n. sp. The dorsal cup is elongate, conical shaped, with infrabasals (IBB) readily visible in side view of the cup. The five IBB rise.evenly from the round columnar attachment. Five basals (BB) 201 are considerably longer than wide. Five radials (RR) are pentagonal, slightly wider than long. Three anal plates occupy the posterior inter- radius. Anal X is in full contact with post. B and extends above well into the interbrachial area. RA is almost vertical in attitude, and contacts r. post. B and post. B below, r. post. R to the right, anal X to the left, and the large RX above. It is possible to establish at least portions of the arm structure for all five rays by observing the three type specimens. PBrBr do not fill the distal face of RR, and all observed are axillary. The anterior ray is known to have at least two arms but the PBr is missing. A second isotomous branching usually occurs with the seventh to ninth SBrBr. Thereafter, isotomous branching has been observed in most rays with the sixth to seven- teenth TBr. In the right posterior ray, another division is found with the seventh QBr. The arms are becoming rather thin as_ preserved and most likely do not reach the termination of the massive, club shaped anal tube. Nonaxillary brachials are wedge shaped and apparently pin- nular. The arms have a well-rounded exterior. Near its base, and for a considerable portion of its length, the anal sac is composed of circlets of six plates. Along the lateral sides of each tube plate, a pore slit, or pit, is shared with the plate below and another with the adjoining plate to the right or left, as the case may be. The same is true at the upper corners. In addition, there is a pit at midlength of each lateral side which is shared by the apposing plate. This leaves a divergent ridgelike development which passes from one row of plates to the other rows. The slits first appear in the upper portions of anal X and RX, where they are more numerous than outlined above. They are present to a lesser degree in the uppermost portion of the sac; how- ever, in that area there are numerous smaller plates interposed amongst the original circlet of 202 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 six. Some tendency toward small spine like ae | "Clee ° : ° . eventus ar : protrusions has been observed on the terminating (holotype) eee plates of the sac, but they are relatively in- : = = conspicous. It appears that the anal tube rises Width of dorsal cup.... 32.2! 19 : ; Height of dorsal cup.. 37.0 22 and then reverses directions so that the anal — wiath of rBB... 89 4 opening is very likely low on the sac. Such de- — Height of IBB.. 12.0 5 velopment was found in C. stevensi pe ei bec sig : ot en tou a SeBeE St: Height of BB. 21.12 9 Remarks.—The outstanding differences be- Width of RR 12.63 10 . . Height of RR 8. 83 6 ‘een C. eventus and C. stevensi have | o1lV ; twee | tus an iC ter nst have been Given 4-5 sae, length Pp Fe in the preface to this description. It might be — Anal sac, width at midlength. 21.6 14 added that C. eventus is a more robust form but “22! S@¢ width at expanded distal , portion 28.5 19 has a slightly shorter anal sac than found in C. stevensi. Measurements in mm.—As follows: 1 Mildly distorted by compression. 2 Left posterior basal. 3 Left posterior radial. Frias. 1, 2.—Carinocrinus eventus, n. sp.: 1, Holotype from posterior, X 1; 2, paratype from right pos- terior 5< 2: JuLy 1953 STRIMPLE: Occurrence.—Shale break in the upper Pitkin formation, Chester, Mississippian; exposure in the bluffs overlooking the Arkansas River about 114 miles southwest of Cedar Creek Community, which is south of Oklahoma State Highway 10, between Greenleaf Lake and Gore, Okla. The exposure is the same as the type Jocality of such forms as Paianocrinus durus Strimple, Bronaugho- crinus figuratus Strimple, Telikosocrinus caespes Strimple, and others. NEW SPECIES OF CARINOCRINUS 203 Types.—Holotype and two paratypes are to be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. REFERENCES Laupon, LowEut R. Journ. Pal. 15: 390, pl. 57, fig. 5. 1941. STRIMPLE, HARRELL L. Journ. Washington Acad. Sei. 41: 260-263, figs. 1-13. 1951. Journ. Pal. 25: 669-676, pls. 98, 99. 1951. BOTANY —Studies of South American plants, XIII. A. C. Smiru, U. 8. National Museum. Continuing his study! of special families of phanerogams in South America, the writer here describes 11 new species in the families Myristicaceae, Monimiaceae, and Vacciniaceae, discussing various other note- worthy plants in these families and in the Hippocrateaceae and Ericaceae as_ well. The specimens upon which these notes are based were obtained in recent years by sev- eral collectors in the Andean countries from Colombia to Bolivia; most of them are deposited in the U. 8. National Herbarium. Mention should also be made of a very valuable series of specimens collected in Colombia and Peru by Christopher Sande- man, kindly forwarded for study by the Director of the Royal Botanic Gardens at Kew. The place of deposit of the specimens here cited is indicated as follows: BM (Brit- ish Museum [Natural History], London); Ch (Chicago Natural History Museum); Col (Instituto de Ciencias Naturales, Bo- gota); K (Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew); NY (New York Botanical Garden); and Us (U. 8. National Museum). MYRISTICACEAE Virola obovata Ducke in Bol. Técn. Inst. Agron. Norte (Belém) 4: 12. 1945. Cotomsia: Amazonas: Picada Cotuhé, Schultes & Black 46-359 (US) (open ‘“‘varial,’ stream- margin; tree 6 m high; fruit chestnut-colored). This appears to be the second recorded col- lection of the species, of which the type comes from the mouth of the Javary in adjacent Brazil. As compared with a duplicate of the type (Ducke 1509), our specimen has the leaf-blades ' No. XII of this series was published in Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 29: 317-393. 1950. narrowly elliptic rather than slightly obovate, and the indument of the lower surface evanescent; the fruit is less developed than that of the type. As mentioned by Ducke, the long hairs with conspicuous lateral spurs, which are persistent on inflorescences and to a certain extent on the branchlets and petioles, characterize the species. It is further distinguished from its apparent allies, V. calophylla Warb. and V. calophylloidea Markegraf, by its acute leaf-blades. Staminate flowers are still desired accurately to ally the species, but this would seem its probable rela- tionship. Virola micrantha, sp. nov. Arbor ad 20 m alta, ramulis juvenilibus gra- ciibus angulatis leviter flexuosis et partibus novellis copiose stellato-pilosis (pilis sessilibus ad 0.1 mm diametro, radiis 5-8), ramulis mox glabratis teretibus cinerascentibus; foliis pro genere parvis, petiolis leviter canaliculatis gra- cilibus 3-7 mm longis ut ramulis pilosis, laminis papyraceis vel tenuiter coriaceis in sicco fuscis, elliptico-oblongis, 4.5-7.5 em longis, 1.8-3.2 em latis, basi et apice obtusis (vel apice obscure mucronulatis), subtus pilis stellatis sessilibus circiter 0.1 mm diametro plerumque 4—6-radiatis inconspicue ornatis, costa supra leviter impressa subtus prominente, nervis secundariis plerumque utrinsecus 12-15 patentibus supra paullo im- pressis subtus subplanis, venulis utrinque saepe minute impressis; inflorescentiis & paniculatis multifloris 4-6 cm longis latisque, pedunculo 1.5-2.5 em longo et ramulis ut partibus vegeta- tivis novellis stellato-pilosis; bracteis sub florum fasciculis submembranaceis deltoideo-orbiculari- bus circiter 2 mm diametro stellato-pilosis mox glabratis et caducis; floribus sessilibus in fasciculis ultimis 1.5-2.5 mm diametro 6-10 aggregatis; 204. JOURNAL OF THE perianthio membranaceo circiter | mm_ longo extus stellato-puberulo fere ad basim 3-lobato, lobis oblongis obtusis; androecio 0.5-0.6 mm longo, stipite gracili utroque paullo contracto, antheris 3 minutis (haud 0.2 mm longis) omnino connatis; planta 9 ignota. CotompriA: Amazonas: Trapecio Amazénico, Quebrada Agua Preta, November 8, 1946, R. E. Schultes & G. A. Black 46-377 (US 1988362 TYPE) (tree 20 m high, in “varial’’). This well-marked species, with graceful in- florescences and flowers which are (even for Virola) minute, is probably best placed in my species-group Rugulosae (cf. Brittonia 2: 455 seq. 1937), where its closest ally is V. minutzflora Ducke. That species, however, has the _ leaf- blades with 30-38 pairs of secondaries and the flowers pedicellate, larger, and in ultimate clus- ters of 50-100. The new species also suggests some members of the species-group Surina- menses, in particular V. parviflora Ducke, but differences in foliage and in flower arrangement and size are obvious. Virola albidiflora Ducke in Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 26: 259. 1936; A. C. Sm. in Brittonia 2: 486. 1937. Cotomstia: Meta: Sierra de la Macarena, Cen- tral Mountains, Entrada Ridge, alt. 650 m, Philipson, Idrobo, & Jaramillo 2233 (BM, Col, US). The cited specimen, in fruit, agrees excellently with earlier known material from the Solimoes region of Brazil, thus extending the known range of the species into Colombia. The present col- lection is described as a tree 25 m high, with green fruits, occurring in dense forest. MONIMIACEHAE Siparuna oligogyna, sp. nov. Arbor dioica ad 8 m alta vel frutex, ramulis rectis gracilibus subteretibus ad nodos subcom- planatis apices versus sublepidoto-pilosis (pilis pallidis stellatis 0.15-0.3 mm diametro radiis 8-25 centrum versus adnatis); foliis oppositis, petiolis gracilibus leviter canaliculatis 8-17 mm longis ut ramulis pilosis, laminis papyraceis in sicco viridi-olivaceis, obovato- vel lanceolato- ellipticis, 9-18 em longis, 3.5-6.5 em latis, basi acutis et in petiolum decurrentibus, apice cuspida- tis (apice ipso obtuso ad 1.5 cm longo), margine integris et anguste recurvatis, supra glabris vel WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 secus nervos sparsim stellato-pilosis, subtus pilis eis ramulorum similibus saepe dispersis ornatis, costa supra leviter elevata subtus prominente, nervis secundariis utrinsecus 7-9 arcuato-ad- scendentibus supra prominulis subtus elevatis, nervis tertiariis transversis et rete venularum utrinque inconspicue prominulis; inflorescentiis co axillaribus solitariis vel binis cymosis 2-3 cm longis multifloris ubique ut ramulis juvenili- bus flavescenti-sublepidoto-pilosis, pedunculo 5- 10 mm longo, ramis paucis, pedicellis sub anthesi 1-1.2 mm longis; floribus circiter 2 x 1.5 mm, receptaculo obovoideo tenuiter carnoso margine apicali integro lato, tepalis et velo omnino nullis; staminibus 12-14 subaequalibus liberis leviter exsertis, filamentis membranaceis deltoideo-ligu- latis circiter 0.5 mm longis copiose glandulosis, antheris minutis apice obtusis; inflorescentiis 9Q similibus, floribus paucioribus sub anthesi cir- citer 2.5 mm longis, receptaculo ellipsoideo car- noso © simili, tepalis obsoletis; carpellis 3-5, stylis liberis filiformibus longe exsertis; drupis immaturis obovoideis ad 7 mm longis persis- tenter pilosis. Cotompia: Meta: Sierra de la Macarena, Rio Guapaya, alt. 500 m, January 21, 1950, W. R. Philipson, J. M. Idrobo, & R. Jaramillo 2195 (BM, Col, US 2026249 Type) (tree 8 m high, in dense humid forest; flowers yellow); same lo- cality, alt. 450 m, Philipson, Idrobo, & Ferndndez 1629 (BM, Col, US) (shrub, in dense forest on bank of river; flowers greenish; fruits green). The new species is characterized by its small flowers, with obsolete tepals and lacking a velum, and by its indument, which is composed of minute stellate hairs with 8-25 rays connate toward the depressed center. The trichome thus suggests a scale, but since its rays are free for most of their length it is probably best defined as a stellate hair. The closest ally of the new species is the Ecuadorian S. eggersit Hieron., which has a similar but sparser indument, leaf-margins usually obviously sinuate-dentate, larger flowers with obvious but small tepals, fewer stamens, and more numerous carpels. The type of S. oligogyna is from a staminate plant, while no. 1629 bears pistillate flowers and young fruits. Siparuna idroboi, sp. nov. Arbor. mediocris, ramulis teretibus copiose stellato-tomentellis (pilis stramineis, radiis plerumque 5-10 adscendentibus longitudine di- JuLty 1953 versis 0.4-0.8 mm longis); foliis oppositis, pe- tiolis gracilibus subteretibus valde diversis 2-6 em longis ut ramulis dense tomentellis, laminis papyraceis in sicco fusco-viridibus subtus _ pal- lidioribus, anguste ellipticis, 15-27 cm longis, 6-11.5 em latis, basi obtusis vel acutis, ad apicem circiter 1 em longum calloso-obtusum gradatim angustatis, margine inconspicue undulato-crenu- latis, ubique stellato-pilosis, pilis facie superioris radiis 2-5 adscendentibus 0.2-0.4 mm longis, pilis faciei inferioris et supra ad nervos lon- gioribus, radiis plerumque 5-12 ad 0.5 mm longis, costa supra paullo elevata subtus prominente, nervis secundariis utrinsecus 14-16 erecto- patentibus subrectis supra leviter subtus valde elevatis, rete venularum supra plano subtus prominulo, venulis nonnullis in dentes margi- nales terminantibus; inflorescentiis © axillaribus cymosis solitariis vel binis multifloris 2-3 cm longis ubique pilis 0.2-0.3 mm longis tomentellis, pedunculo gracili 5-8 mm longo, ramulis paucis basi pedicellorum delapsorum conspicue in- erassatis; pedicellis gracilibus sub anthesi 4-5 mm longis, floribus obconicis circiter 3 mm longis et 4 mm latis; receptaculo subcarnoso, limbo patente crenulato e tepalis plerumque 6 rotun- datis circiter 1 x 1.5 mm incrassatis composito apice circumdato, velo inconspicuo complanato circiter 0.5 mm lato, ore lato; staminibus 10-12 liberis 2- vel 3-serlatis leviter exsertis, extimis maximis, filamentis carnosis oblongo-deltoideis ad 1.2 mm longis latisque luteo-glandulosis, antheris magnis; inflorescentiis 2 non visis. Cotompra: Meta: Cordillera La Macarena (extreme northeast), Macizo Renjifo, eastern slopes, alt. 600-1300 m, December 30, 1950- January 5, 1951, J. M. Idrobo & R. E. Schultes 846 (US 2026030 TrPr) (medium-sized tree). The new species is characterized by its large, thin leaves, its copious stellate indument (the hairs of which, however, do not conceal the leaf- surface), its flowers with an inconspicuous crenu- late rim of small tepals, its flattened velum, and its 10-12 free stamens. It seems most closely related to the Bolivian S. cinerea Perk., from which it is readily distinguished by its large, long-petiolate, acuminate leaves and its more numerous stamens. Siparuna idrobor superficially suggests S. chiridota (Tul.) A. DC., but that species has the foliage-indument appressed to the leaf-surface rather than ascending, and its stamens are very different, the four marginal stamens surrounding a single central one. SMITH: SOUTH AMERICAN PLANTS 205 HIPPOCRATEACEAE Salacia opacifolia (Macbr.) A. C. Sm. in Brit- tonia 3: 434. 1940. Cotompia: Amazonas: Trapecio Amazénico, Loretoyacu River, alt. about 100 m, on varzea land, Schultes & Black 46-300 (US) (flowers vellow). This is the first Colombian record of a species known from several collections in Amazonian Peru and adjacent Brazil. Salacia gigantea Loes. in Verh. Bot. Ver. Brand. 48: 182. 1907; A. C. Sm. in Brittonia 3: 450. 1940. CoLtompiA: Amazonas: Trapecio Amazénico, Loretoyacu River, alt. about 100 m, Schultes & Black 8296 (US). The cited specimen is the third collection of the species known to me, the others being from Brazil (Rio Jurua, the type locality, and Rio Solim6es). Tontelea congestiflora (A. C. Sm.) A. C. Sm. in Brittonia 3: 496. 1940. CoLomsia: Vaupés: Rio Kananari and Cerro Isibukuri, alt. 250-700 m, Garcia-Barriga 13806 (US) (shrub 2 m high, the flowers red). This species has previously been known only from the two Krukoff collections from Amazonian Brazil cited by me. The morphology of the species is of particular interest because it represents a unique condition in Tontelea, being the only species of the genus that has entire stigmas oppo- site the stamens. The Colombian specimen agrees in every fundamental respect with those pre- viously known, its inflorescence (to 3 cm long) and petals (to 2.2 mm long) being slightly larger than those described. Peritassa laevigata (Hoffmanns.) A. C. Sm. in Brittonia 3: 508. fig. 11, a-h. 1940. Cotompia: Meta: Sierra de la Macarena, Central Mountains, North Ridge, alt. 1400 m., Philipson & Idrobo 1944 (BM, Col, US). Vaupés: Maviso, Romero 1257 (US). This widespread and rather variable species is here first recorded from Colombia. Romero notes the local name as “huevo de gato” and states that the fruit is edible. Cheiloclinium obtusum A. C. Sm. in Brittonia 3: 545. 1940. Brazit: Amazonas: Rio Vaupés, between 206 Ipanoré and confluence with Rio Negro, Igarapé da Chuva, Taracud, Schultes & Murca Pires 9071 (US) (lana, with small yellow flowers). The cited collection, the second known for the species, agrees excellently with the type, from the vicinity of Iquitos, Peru. ERICACEAE Befaria nana A. C. Sm. & Ewan in Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 29: 333. 1950. VENEZUELA: Zulia: Perijd, alt. 2800-2900 m, Bro. Ginés 1985 (US) (small shrub on pdramo; flowers red). Among the interesting specimens recently collected by Brother Ginés in Zulia occurs the second collection of B. nana, otherwise known only from the type, obtained in the adjacent Colombian portion of the Sierra PerijAé. The new material is somewhat the more robust and has a slightly different indument, but the deviation is not surprising in Befaria, of which the species are extremely variable. The original description may now be amplified as follows: Glandular hairs of the branchlets and pedicels up to 2 mm in length (hairs of this type also present on both surfaces of leaves, especially along the costa beneath), the softer, canescent indument of the type specimen completely lack- ing in Ginés 1985; leaf-blades up to 22 mm long and 3 mm broad; inflorescence similarly terminal but comparatively elongate, the rachis up to 3.5 cm long, the pedicellary bracteoles about 3 mm long. Tepuia speciosa A. C. Sm. in Contr. U. 8S. Nat. Herb. 29: 336. 1950. VENEZUELA: Bolivar: Mount Auyan-tepui, alt. 2,100 m, Cardona 2659 (US). The second collection of this very distinct species, from the type locality, agrees excellently with Cardona’s earlier material (no. 257) upon which the species was based. Of considerable interest also are additional specimens from the type locality of two of the original species of the remarkable genus Tepuia, based upon earlier collections from Auyan-tepui (cf. Camp in Brit- tonia 3: 178-184, fig. 4, 5. 1939). These collec- tions represent T. tatei Camp (Cardona 2667, US) and T. venusta Camp (Cardona 2666, US). Pernettya purpurascens (H. B. K.) comb. nov. ‘““Gualtheria’’ purpurascens H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 282. 1818. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 Cotomsia: Humboldt & Bonpland (type in herb. Paris; photo. of isotype in herb. Berlin, Chi. Nat. Hist. Mus. photo. no. 4759, in US, etc.); Cundinamarca: Pdéramo de Choachi, near Bo- gota, alt. 3300-3500 m., Pennell 2218 (NY, US) (shrub on dry pdéramo; fruit black-purple); Pdramo de Guasca, 8 km east of Guasca, alt. 3500-3600 m, Fosberg 21701 (US) (prostrate, occasional in open spots on ridges; lower surface of leaves purple; ripe fruit black). Gaultheria purpurascens is apparently a very rare plant, and perhaps for this reason the fact that it is referable to Pernettya has been over- looked. The three specimens known to me are all in fruit and in this condition unmistakably represent Pernettya, the calyx-lobes remaining small and free from the mature fruit. The species is not accounted for in Sleumer’s revision of Pernettya (in Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 12: 626-655. 1935), and it appears not to have been redescribed in either genus. Its position in Per- nettya is very distinct, the long, stiff, bristlelike hairs that cover both sides of the leaves and the distal parts of branches immediately distinguish- ing it; its relationship to the forms of P. pros- trata (Cav.) Sleumer that occur in the Andes seems remote. VACCINIACEAE? Gaylussacia cardenasii, sp. nov. Frutex ad 3 m altus, ramulis gracilibus sub- teretibus cinereis apices versus dense foliatis et copiose puberulo-tomentellis (pilis albidis ad 0.5 mm longis) mox glabratis; petiolis gracilibus canaliculatis 2-2.5 mm longis ut ramulis puberu- lis glabratisque; foliorum laminis subcoriaceis in sicco olivaceis oblongis, (2—) 2.5-4 em longis, 0.8-1.2 cm latis, basi obtusis vel subacutis, apice obtusis vel rotundatis atque glandula crassius- cula prominente terminatis, margine leviter recurvatis obscure crenulatis vel subintegris, junioribus utrinque copiose luteo-glandulosis et praecipue marginem versus parce puberulis, maturis glabratis glandulis obscuris, costa supra subplana (in foliis maturis impressa) subtus elevata, nervis secundariis utrinsecus 4-6 sub- adscendentibus et rete venularum utrinque primo prominulis demum subimmersis; racemis axil- laribus 8-12-floris basi bracteis circumdatis, 2 The genera of Vacciniaceae are discussed in the sequence proposed by Sleumer in Bot. Jahrb. 71: 386-389. 1941. JuLY 1953 bracteis imbricatis papyraceis margine brevi- ciliolatis, extimis semiorbicularibus, intimis obo- vatis ad 6 mm longis, rhachi gracili tereti pilis al- bidis 0.1-0.2 mm longis copiose puberula ac etiam dispersim luteo-glandulosa, glandulis mterdum brevi-stipitatis; bracteis sub floribus papyraceis oblongis vel obovato-ellipticis, 6-9 mm longis, 4-6 mm latis, saepe apiculatis, utrinque obscure puberulis etiam luteo-glandulosis; pedicellis gra- cilibus sub anthesi 2-4 mm longis ut rhachi puberulis et glandulosis supra medium bibrac- teolatis, bracteolis lineari-oblanceolatis 3-4 mm longis 0.5-1 mm latis pariter indutis; calyce sub anthesi 3-4 mm longo apice circiter 5 mm diame- tro, tubo breviter cupuliformi pilis patentibus 0.5-1 mm longis capitato-glandulosis copiose hispidulo etiam glandulis numerosis subsessilibus ornato, limbo campanulato-rotato dorso sessili- glanduloso intus glabro, margine puberulo- ciliolato etiam glandulis brevi-stipitatis copiose ornato, lobis 5 ovato-deltoideis obtusis 2-2.5 mm longis latisque; disco pulvinato centrum versus obscure puberulo; corolla submembrana- cea maturitate campanulata circiter 6 mm longa apice 6-7 mm diametro, utrinque glabra vel extus pilis paucis brevi-stipitatis glandulosis ornata, lobis 5 deltoideis obtusis circiter 3 mm longis latisque saepe recurvatis; staminibus 10 ad 3.8 mm longis, filamentis liberis ligulatis circi- ter 1.5 mm longis ubique adscendenti-albido- puberulis, antheris 2.5-2.7 mm longis, thecis circiter 1 mm longis basi obtusis, tubulis per rimas ovales introrsas dehiscentibus; stylo crasso tereti circiter 5 mm longo basim versus puberulo, stigmate minute peltato. Botivia: Santa Cruz: Samaipata, ‘El Fuerte,” alt. 1700 m, November 1950, M. Cardenas 4643 (US 2027184 Typr) (shrub 2-3 m high, on grassy slopes; flowers pinkish). The species here described is not closely allied to the known Andean species of Gaylussacia, being very different from those recently described by Sleumer as G. loxensis and G. peruviana (in Bot. Jahrb. 71: 384-385. 1941). It is more closely related to those few Brazilian species that have short, campanulate corollas and a glandular indument, perhaps especially to G. rugosa Cham. & Schlechtend., from which it differs in its narrower leaf-blades, which are subacute or obtuse at apex rather than prevail- ingly retuse. The new species, as compared with G. rugosa, has a shorter inflorescerice and a dif- ferent distribution of glandular hairs; in the SMITH: SOUTH AMERICAN PLANTS 207 Brazilian species such hairs are present on the branchlets, rachis, and pedicels as well as on the calyx, but in G. cardenaswi the glands are very nearly sessile except on the calyx-tube. Sphyrospermum haughtii, sp. nov. Frutex gracilis, ramulis elongatis teretibus inconspicue flexuosis apices versus 0.6—-0.8 mm diametro breviter villosis (pilis pallidis 0.5-1 mm longis) demum cinereis glabratisque; petiolis gracilibus subteretibus 0.5-1 mm longis ut ramulis pilosis et glabratis; laminis in sicco coria- ceis ut videtur in vivo carnosis opacis, ovatis, (2—) 2.5-38 em longis, (1.2—) 1.5-1.8 cm latis, basi rotundatis, apice gradatim acuminatis (apice ipso saepe 5 mm longo calloso-obtuso), margine integris incrassatis anguste recurvatis, utrinque primo inconspicue pallido-pilosis (pilis ad 0.5 mm longis) mox glabratis vel subtus pilos casta- neos glandulosos minutos dispersim gerentibus, costa et nervis secundariis plerumque 4 basim versus orientibus obscuris immersis, venulis immersis; inflorescentia axillari 1- vel 2-flora quam foliis breviore, rhachi subnulla, bracteis sub floribus lanceolatis 0.7-1 mm longis parce villosis, pedicellis gracilibus teretibus sub anthesi 7-10 mm longis ut calyce copiose villoso-puberu- lis (pilis albidis 0.2-0.4 mm longis) infra medium bibracteolatis, bracteolis linearibus circiter 0.7 mm longis; calyce sub anthesi 4-5 mm longo et apice diametro, tubo turbinato 2.5-3 mm longo et lato basi acuto apice leviter contracto, limbo erecto-patente papyraceo intus glabro 5-lobato, lobis late deltoideis acutis 0.6-1 mm _longis, sinubus rotundatis; disco annulari-pulvinato glabro; corolla carnosa urceolata sub anthesi circiter 6 mm longa et 4.5 mm diametro praeter lobos interdum puberulos ubique glabra, lobis 5 deltoideis acutis circiter 0.7 mm longis; stami- nibus 10 quam corolla paullo brevioribus alter- natim leviter inaequalibus, filamentis ligulatis alternatim circiter 1 mm et 1.5 mm longis su- perne pilis circiter 0.5 mm longis pallido-villo- sulis, antheris 3.5-4 mm longis, thecis circiter 1.5 mm longis basi rotundatis, tubulis quam thecis longioribus gracillimis per rimas ovales circiter 0.5 mm longas dehiscentibus; stylo gracili corollam fere aequante; fructibus juvenilibus obovoideis et calycis limbo persistenter pilosis. Ecuapor: Bolivar: Road above Balzapamba, alt. 2,400 m, May 3, 1942, O. Haught 3302 (US 1708049 Type) (rock plant, the shoots ascending 208 JOURNAL OF THE or trailing, the leaves rather thick; flowers very pale yellow). The new species is characterized by its thick, acuminate leaves, short-pedicellate flowers, uni- formly villose-puberulent calyx, urceolate gla- brous corolla, and stamens with very slender tubules. In general it seems most closely allied to S. sodirot (Hoer.) A. C. Sm., but that species has somewhat smaller, obtuse to subacute leaves, the corolla cylindric, at least 9 mm long and copi- ously villose, and stamens with comparatively long filaments. Sphyrospermum buesii, sp. nov. Frutex forsan epiphyticus et dependens, ramu- lis elongatis gracilibus apices versus hispidulo- puberulis (pilis pallidis ad 1 mm longis) demum glabratis, ad nodos incrassatis; petiolis gracili- bus subteretibus circiter 1.5 mm longis ut ramulis pilosis; laminis coriaceis ut videtur in vivo carnosis opacis, oblongo-lanceolatis, (2—) 2.5-3 cm longis, 0.8-1.2 em latis, basi obtusis vel anguste rotundatis, apice gradatim acuminatis et calloso-obtusis, margine incrassatis et anguste recurvatis, utrinque parce pilosis (pilis pallidis ad 1 mm longis) mox glabratis, e basi 3- vel 5- nerviis, nervis et venulis immersis; inflorescentia axillari 1- vel 2-flora quam foliis breviore, basi bracteis paucis ovato-deltoideis acutis 1-2 mm longis parce hispidulis cireumdata, rhachi sub- nulla, pedicellis gracilibus sub anthesi 4-7 mm longis mox glabratis; calyce sub anthesi circiter 6 mm longo et apice 4 mm diametro extus pilis pallidis 0.6-0.8 mm longis copiose tomentello, tubo ellipsoideo 2-3 mm longo 1.5-2 mm dia- metro, limbo suberecto tubum excedente papyra- ceo intus glabro profunde 4- vel 5-lobato, lobis lanceolatis 2—2.5 mm longis subacutis, sinubus acutis; disco annulari-pulvinato glabro; corolla tenuiter carnosa urceolata sub anthesi 7-8 mm longa et medium versus circiter 4 mm diametro, basi et apice valde contracta, superne pilis cas- taneis 0.1—-0.3 mm longis parce glanduloso-pilosa, lobis 4 vel 5 oblongis subacutis circiter 1 mm longis; staminibus 8 vel 10 similibus longitudine corollam fere aequantibus glabris, filamentis gracilibus ligulatis cireiter 3 mm longis, antheris circiter 3.5 mm longis, thecis 1.5-2 mm longis basi obtusis, tubulis gracilibus thecas subae- quantibus per rimas elongatas 1 mm vel ultra longas dehiscentibus; stylo gracili corollam sub- aequante. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Law A VOL. 43, NO. 7 Peru: Cusco: Yanatin Palmacocha, Alturas de Chaco, Prov. Convencion, alt. about 2700 m, August 15, 1928, C. Bues 2165 (US 1423528 TYPE) (collected in the “ceja de la montafia’’). Although the relationship of this new species appears to be with S. sodirot (Hoer.) A. C. Sm. and the above described S. haughtit, it is very distinct from both on the basis of its propor- tionately narrower leaves and its elongate calyx with lanceolate lobes and acute sinuses. It is further distinguished from SS. sodirot by its shorter, essentially glabrous corolla and_ its shorter filaments, and from S. haughtii by its shorter pedicels, slightly longer corolla and fila- ments, and short anther-tubules dehiscing by comparatively elongate clefts. Killipiella stereophylla A. C. Sm. in Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 29: 357. 1950: Cotomsia: Nariio: Rio Nembi, André 3399 (K) (May 23, 1876; scandent; flowers whitish rose). The second known collection of this recently described species comes from essentially the type locality, the Rio Nembi being a small tributary of the Rio Cuaiquer about 20 km west of Ri- caurte, the locality of von Sneidern’s type (no. 612). In floral characters the two specimens are nearly identical, but the leaf-blades of the André specimen are only 10-15 mm long by 3-6 mm broad, somewhat smaller than those of the type. Notopora cardonae, sp. nov. Frutex ad 2 m altus multiramosus, ramulis rigidis teretibus graciliibus purpureo-fuscis co- piose pubescentibus (pilis albidis debilibus paten- tibus 0.5-1 mm longis) demum glabratis cineras- centibus lenticellatis; foliis confertis saepe subim- bricatis, petiolis teretibus rugulosis 2-3 mm longis validis (circiter 1 mm diametro) ut ramulis juvenilibus pilosis (pils 0.2-0.5 mm _longis); folorum laminis rigide coriaceis in sicco fusco- olivaceis, plus minusve orbicularibus, 1.2-2 em longis latisque, basi rotundatis vel minute corda- tis, apice rotundatis (apice ipso obscure calloso), margine valde recurvatis vel subrevolutis, supra ut petiolis molliter pilosis, subtus sparsius vel secus costam pilosis, demum interdum subgla- bratis, subtus immerso-glandulosis, inconspicue pinnatinerviis, costa supra subplana subtus leviter elevata, nervis secundariis utrinsecus 3-5 JULY 1953 patentibus et rete venularum supra interdum inconspicue prominulis subtus planis vel im- mersis; inflorescentia axillari uniflora, rhachi sub- nulla; pedicellis teretibus validis, in sicco 0.7-1 mm diametro rugulosis, sub anthesi 3-5 mm longis, ut petiolis pilosis, basi bracteis pluribus imbricatis subcoriaceis deltoideis acutis ad 0.5 mm longis parce pilosis circumdatis, paullo supra medium bibracteolatis (bracteolis bracteis simi- libus 1-1.3 mm longis), cum calyce conspicue articulatis; calyce in sicco subcoriaceo, 5-5.5 mm longo, 4.5-5 mm apice diametro, extus ut pedicellis parce piloso mox glabrato, tubo cu- puliformi circiter 2mm longo ad sinus inconspicue 5-angulato, limbo campanulato quam tubo lon- giore margine pilis circiter 0.5 mm longis persist- enter ciliato 5-lobato, lobis deltoideis acutis 1-1.5 mm longis, sinubus rotundatis; disco carnoso annulari-pulvinato glabro; corolla cylindrico- subclavata tenuiter carnosa sub anthesi 22-25 mm longa et supra medium 5-6 mm diametro, utrinque glabra, lobis 5 sub anthesi patentibus oblongo-deltoideis obtusis 2-3 mm longis; stami- nibus 10 longitudine corollam fere aequantibus glabris similibus, filamentis subcarnosis ligulatis 15-17 mm longis primo corollam adhaerentibus mox liberis, antheras dorso apice thecarum ad- nexis, antheris validis 5-6 mm longis, thecis granulatis 3.5-4 mm longis basi obtusis, tubulis quam thecis brevioribus erectis liberis amplis per rimas ovales dorsales 1.5-2 mm longas dehiscenti- bus; stylo gracili tereti corollam subaequante, stigmate minute peltato; fructibus juvenilibus ellipsoideis coriaceis levibus 5-6 mm_longis ealycis limbo persistente coronatis. VENEZUELA: Bolivar: Summit of Mount Auyan-tepui, Alto Caronf, alt. 2500 m, January 1949, F. Cardona 2656 (US 1997672 TYPE) (shrub 2 m high; corolla red). The remarkable plant here described, another representative of the highly endemic flora of Mount Auyan-tepui, does not at first glance sug- gest the supposedly monotypic genus Notopora, which has been extended in range but not in number of species since its proposal in 1876 ook. im took. Ic.) Pl. 12: 53. pl. 1149). However, the stamens with elongate filaments and short, dorsally dehiscing anthers permit of no other disposition of Cardona’s plant. From N. schomburgkit Hook. f. our species is distin- guished by many striking characters, most ob- viously by its small, coriaceous, suborbicular leaves with a sparser and quite different indu- SMITH: SOUTH AMERICAN PLANTS 209 ment, its flowers lacking the persistent brown tomentum that covers both calyx and corolla in the older species, its comparatively small calyx, and its longer corolla and filaments. Psammisia fissilis A. C. Sm. in Contr. U.S. Nat. Herbs 2927372. 1950: Peru: San Martin: Almirante, Rioja [west of Moyobamba], Sandeman, August 1938 (K) (tall shrubby tree, growing in semi-shade in rain- forest; corolla bright red). This unnumbered Sandeman specimen repre- sents the third known collection of the species and the first from Peru; the species was described on the basis of two Steyermark collections from the Province of Loja, Ecuador. The present specimen agrees excellently with the type (al- though the Ecuadorean specimens were indicated as hanas or epiphytic shrubs), except that its inflorescence-rachis is less than 1 em long and bears only 4-6 flowers. In view of the similarity of foliage and floral parts, one cannot consider the compact inflorescence consequential. Thibaudia pachyantha A. C. Sm. in Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 28: 415. 1932. Cotompia: Nariio: Barbacoas, between Co- rregimiento Santander (Buenavista) and Barba- coas (mouth of Rio Telembf), alt. 200-840 m, Garcia-Barriga 13121 (US). The cited specimen represents the second col- lection of this very distinct species, which other- wise has been known only from the type, collected by Triana also in Narimo. The Garcfa-Barriga specimen is somewhat better preserved than the type and larger in some of its parts, having the lead-blades up to 18 em long and 12 em broad and gradually narrowed to an acuminate apex, while some of the pedicels are as long as 5.5 cm. The plant is said to be a small tree 3 m high, with red pedicels and corollas and yellowish-green calyces. Plutarchia monantha, sp. nov. Frutex parvus ubique plus minusve glaber, partibus novellis obscure puberulis, ramulis gracilibus apices versus circiter 2 mm diametro angulatis; stipulis intrapetiolaribus ovatis ob- tusis circiter 1.5 mm longis mox caducis; foliis parvis confertis, petiolis rugulosis canaliculatis 2-4 mm longis, laminis coriaceis in sicco olivaceis ovatis, (10—) 15-25 mm longis, (6—) 8-13 mm latis, basi truncato-rotundatis, apice calloso-acutis, 210 JOURNAL OF THE margine integris incrassatis, Juventute subtus interdum elanduloso-strigosis, pinnatinervils, supra leviter subtus elevata, nervis secundartis circiter 3 immersis; floribus axillaribus solitariis subsessilibus basi bracteis pluribus imbricatis circumdatis, bracteis extimis parvis reniformibus interdum glanduloso-marginatis, intimis maximis papyraceis ellipticis ad 11 mm longis et 7 mm latis margine scariosis et parce ciliolatis, omnino eaducis; pedicellis 0.5-1.5 mm _ longis primo minute puberulis ut videtur ebracteolatis; calyce sub anthesi circiter 11 mm longo et apice diame- tro, tubo coriaceo in sicco angulato basi truncato circiter 2.5 mm longo, limbo papyraceo erecto- patente fere ad basim 5-lobato, lobis lanceolatis acutis 7-8 mm longis, 2.6-3 mm latis margine glanduloso-ciliolatis; corolla carnosa ample cylin- drica sub anthesi 21-23 mm longa et circiter 8 mm diametro, lobis 5 deltoideis ‘acutis circiter 1.5 x 3 mm; staminibus 10 similibus longitudine corollam fere aequantibus, filamentis liberis ligulatis circiter 2.5 mm longis superne pilis ad 0.6 mm _ longis ciliolato-marginatis, antheris 17-18 mm longis, thecis 4—4.5 mm longis basi obtusis et incurvatis, tubulis quam thecis multo longioribus per rimas distales ad 2 mm longas dehiscentibus; stylo tereti corollam subaequante. CotompiaA: Caldas: Vicinity of Manizales, alt. about 3,300 m, January 1948, Christopher Sandeman 5694 (K typr) (subshrub, with coriaceous, bright green leaves; corolla cherry- red, greenish white at apex). The beautiful little Plutarchia here described is closely related only to the recently proposed P. minor A. ©. Sm. Gn Contr: U.S. Nat. Herb: 29: 380. 1950), differing in its ovate, larger, acute leaf-blades and its subsessile, somewhat larger flowers. From the only other species of this im- mediate alliance, P. rigida (Benth.) A. C. Sm., the new species is distinguished by its smaller leaves, solitary flowers, and smaller calyx-lobes, corolla, and stamens. obscure impressa utrinsecus parce costa Cavendishia porphyrea A. C. Sm. in Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 29: 3838. 1950. CotomsiA: Narifio: Barbacoas, between Co- rregimiento Santander (Buenavista) and Barba- coas (mouth of Rio Telembf), alt. 200-840 m, Garcia-Barriga 13125 (US). The cited specimen agrees excellently with the type and only other known specimen of this recently described species, from the Department WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 of Cauca at low elevation. The Narifio material has slightly larger leaves than those described, the blades being up to 8 em long and 2.5 em broad, proportionately somewhat narrower than those of the type but with the same abrupt and slender acumen (up to 25 mm long). The flowers of the Garcia-Barriga specimen are slightly smaller than those of the type, having the calyx about 6 mm long and the corolla about 30 mm long, with proportionately smaller stamens. These dif- ferences are no more than individual in an ex- tremely well-marked species. Cavendishia sandemanii, sp. nov. Frutex, ramulis subteretibus glabris apices versus stramineis circiter 3 mm diametro in- ferne purpureo-cinereis; petiolis semiteretibus rugulosis 2-4 mm longis supra paullo puberulis; foliorum laminis coriaceis in sicco olivaceis, oblongo-ovatis, (3.5-) 5-6 em longis, (2—) 2.5-3 cm latis, basi rotundatis vel subcordatis, apice obtusis vel obtuse brevi-cuspidatis, margine integris leviter recurvatis, supra glabris, subtus minute glanduloso-strigillosis mox glabratis, costa supra paullo impressa subtus elevata, nervis secundariis utrinsecus 2 vel 3 e basi vel paullo supra orientibus adscendentibus costa similibus, extimis saepe obscuris, rete venularum immerso; inflorescentia apices ramulorum versus axillari racemosa multiflora basi bracteis sub- coriaceis semiorbicularibus dorso subpuberulis intimis ad 4 x 5 mm circumdata, rhachi gracili glabra (3-) 4-6.5 cm longa, bracteis sub floribus papyraceis glabris obovato-oblongis ad 25 mm longis et 12 mm latis; pedicellis gracilibus tereti- bus rugulosis sub anthesi et fructu 12-15 mm longis, superne inconspicue _ sessili-glandulosis, basim versus manifeste bibracteolatis, bracteolis papyraceis lineari-lanceolatis 5-6 mm _ longis, 0.7-1 mm latis, glandulas paucas marginales gerentibus; calyce sub anthesi circiter 5 mm longo et 7 mm apice diametro, tubo coriaceo cupuli- formi 2—2.5 mm longo ruguloso glandulis pallidis dispersis sessilibus ornato, limbo subpatente pa- pyraceo tubum subaequante glabro 5- vel 6- lobato, lobis late deltoideis acutis circiter 1 mm longis glandulas lineares subapicales gerentibus, sinubus rotundatis; corolla tenuiter carnosa cylin- drica sub anthesi circiter 15 mm longa et 5 mm diametro extus pilis ad 0.5 mm longis albidis copiose puberula intus glabra, lobis 5 vel 6 oblongis obtusis 1-1.5 mm longis; staminibus 10 vel 12 longitudine subaequalibus circiter 14 mm JuLY 1953 longis, filamentis liberis ligulatis superne intus puberulis alternatim circiter 1.5 mm et 2 mm longis, antheris paullo inaequalibus, thecis 44.5 mm longis, tubulis 8-9 mm longis per rimas elon- gatas dehiscentibus; stylo tereti corollam subae- quante; fructibus juvenilibus subglobosis ad 6 mm longis glabris, pedicellorum bracteolis sub- persistentibus. Cotompta: Boyacd or Santander: Between Paipa (Boyacd) and San Gil (Santander), alt. about 3,000 m, May 1948, Christopher Sandeman 6015 (K TyPE) (shrub, growing in full exposure in moist places; corolla bright cherry-red). In foliage and fundamental floral characters the new species is very similar to C. cordifolia (H. B. K.) Hoer., but it seems to merit specific recognition because of its elongate racemes (the rachis in C. cordifolia being insignificant, only rarely approaching 3 cm in length) and its long, linear-lanceolate pedicellary bracteoles (those of C. cordifolia being usually 1-3 mm long and comparatively evanescent). The pedicels and calyeces of C. cordifolia are usually copiously pilose at anthesis and frequently persistently so, its vegetative parts are often white-pilose, and its pedicels only rarely exceed 10 mm in length. The occasionally 6-merous flowers of the new species are probably not significant. Caven- dishia cordifolia is now known from a great number of specimens from the Eastern Cordillera of Colombia and is quite homogeneous, so that the inclusion of the extreme form here described as C. sandemanii at present seems unwarranted. Cavendishia rigidifolia A. C. Sm. in Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 28: 500. 1932. Cotompia: Antioquia: Medellin, Rio Negro, alt. about 2,100 m, Sandeman 5660 (K) (tall straggling shrub, growing in full exposure and in semi-shade; corolla pink, tinged with white); Medellin, camino viejo al Alto de Santa Elena, alt. about 2,300 m, Uribe Uribe 2073 (US) (shrub; corolla red). The second and third known collections of this rare species, like the type, were obtained in Antioquia; they agree with the type in all es- sential characters, but the leaves are slightly smaller (petioles sometimes only 3 mm long; leaf-blades toward apices of branchlets as small as 10 by 2 cm, but more often at least 13 by 2.5 em, with the same proportions, texture, and venation as those of the type). SMITH: SOUTH AMERICAN PLANTS 211 Orthaea ferreyrae, sp. nov. Frutex ad 5 m altus, ramulis rectis sub- teretibus vel superne angulatis apices versus 1.5— 3 mm diametro puberulis (pilis patentibus albidis ad 0.4 mm longis) vel glabris cinerascenti- bus; stipulis intrapetiolaribus interdum _persis- tentibus lanceolatis 2-5 mm longis; petiolis semi- teretibus vel canaliculatis rugulosis 3-5 mm longis ut ramulis puberulis vel glabris, foliorum laminis in sicco subcoriaceis fusco-olivaceis, lanceolatis, (5-) 7-11 em longis, 1.5-3 em latis, basi obtusis, superne ad apicem 1-2 em longum mucronulatum gradatim angustatis, margine integris incrassatis saepe recurvatis, utrinque glabris vel subtus inconspicue glanduloso-strigo- sis vel secus costam breviter pilosis, costa supra impressa subtus prominente, nervis secundaris utrinsecus 2 vel 3 adscendentibus inconspicuis supra planis vel prominulis, intimis cum costa 5-20 mm interdum concurrentibus subtus paullo elevatis, aliis e basi orientibus interdum subim- mersis, nervis tertiarlis e costa paucis inconspi- cuis et rete venularum immersis vel supra sub- prominulis; inflorescentia axillari racemosa 10- 20-flora (floribus sub anthesi paucioribus) basi bracteis mox caducis circumdata, rhachi (2-) 3-7 cm longa ut ramulis parce puberula_ vel glabra, bracteis sub floribus lanceolatis circiter 2 mm longis caducis; pedicellis sub anthesi 15-20 mm longis superne incrassatis basim versus bibracteolatis, bracteolis mox caducis, ut calyce parce puberulis vel glabris; calyce sub anthesi 5-7 mm longo et apice diametro, tubo leviter apophysato in sicco ruguloso 2-3 mm _ longo, limbo erecto-patente papyraceo quam _ tubo longiore margine glandulas inconspicuas sessiles interdum gerente 5-dentato, dentibus deltoideo- apiculatis haud 0.5-1 mm longis, sinubus rotun- datis vel complanatis; corolla tenuiter carnosa glabra cylindrica sub anthesi 18-21 mm longa et circiter 5 mm diametro, superne contracta, lobis 5 oblongo-deltoideis obtusis 2—2.5 mm _ longis; staminibus 10 alternatim valde inaequalibus, filamentis membranaceis alternatim 3-4 mm et 5-8 mm longis inferne in tubum connatis, lon- gioribus distaliter gracilibus et ciliolatis vel puberulis, antheris 4-6 mm longis, tubulis thecas subaequantibus per rimas ovales 1-2 mm longas apertas dehiscentibus; stylo tereti corollam sub- aequante, stigmate minute peltato. Peru: Hudnuco: Carpish, crest between Hudnuco and Tingo Maria, alt. 2800-2900 m, 212 JOURNAL OF THE February 6, 1950, R. Ferreyra 6709 (US 2057842 TYPE) (shrub about | m high, in evergreen woods; corolla red, the apex white); Loreto: Divisoria, Prov. de Coronel Portillo, alt. 1,500-1,600 m, Ferreyra 1671 (US) (shrub 2-5 m high, in tropical forest; corolla scarlet, white at apex); Junin: Huacapistana, alt. 1,700-1,800 m, Sandeman, June 1938 (K) (shrub in semishade on edge of rain-forest; corolla deep rose), Sandeman 4514 (KX) (subshrub, in scrub on mountainside; corolla crimson), 4588 (kK) (shrub on overhanging rock in gully, in semishade; corolla crimson); Agua Dulee, Prov. Tarma, alt. 2,000 m, Woytkowski 35482 (Ch, US) (shrub 4 m high, in forest; calyx red; corolla vermilion with white tip). The cited specimens are not entirely identical, but there seems little doubt that they represent the same taxon, apparently localized in central Peru. The type has a fairly persistent indument on its branchlets, rachis, and pedicels, while the other specimens are essentially glabrous; Fer- reyra 1671 has slightly smaller calyces than the other collections. Orthaea ferreyrae is related to a group of three species of southern Peru and Bolivia, having flowers most similar to those of O. pinnatinervia Mansf., from which it differs in having its leaves with basally oriented, ascending secondaries, and in its elongate inflorescence, longer pedicels and calyx, more ample corolla, and stamens with much longer filaments and somewhat larger anthers. From O. weberbauert Hoer., which it resembles in foliage, the new species differs in obvious floral characters, namely its longer pedicels, its calyx-Lmb without marginal thick- enings and with rounded rather than acute sinuses, and its much larger stamens. As com- pared with O. ignea Sleumer, O. ferreyrae lacks the rufescent foliar indument and is further dis- tinguished by its elongate inflorescence and larger flowers, especially as regards the pedicels, calyx, and filaments. Satyria vargasii, sp. nov. Frutex ad 2 m altus, ramulis subteretibus stramineis vel purpurascentibus apices versus 1-2.5 mm diametro et minute albido-puberulis demum glabratis; foliis pro genere parvis, petiolis subteretibus rugulosis 1-2 mm longis ut ramulis WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 puberulis glabratisque, laminis in sicco sub- coriaceis fusco-olivaceis glabris, ellipticis, 2-3 em longis, 1.3-1.8 em latis, basi rotundatis vel late obtusis, apice rotundatis, margine integris incrassatis leviter recurvatis, e basi 5- vel 7- nervus, costa nervisque secundariis intimis adscendentibus supra prominulis subtus paullo elevatis, nervis secundariis inferioribus et rete venularum saepe immersis; inflorescentia 1- vel 2-flora basi bracteis paucis papyraceis deltoideis obtusis ad 1.5 mm longis ciliolatis caducis cir- cumdata; pedicellis teretibus in sicco rugulosis sub anthesi ad 12 mm longis et calyce minute puberulis basim versus bibracteolatis, brac- teolis lanceolatis acutis 1.5-2 mm longis; calyce sub anthesi circiter 4.5 mm longo et 5 mm apice diametro, tubo cupuliformi 1.5-2 mm longo, limbo papyraceo erecto-patente intus glabro profunde 5-lobato, lobis ovato-deltoideis apiculatis 2—2.5 mm longis, smubus acutis; disco annulari-pul- vinato glabro; corolla tenuiter carnosa cylindrica sub anthesi 10-12 mm longa et circiter 4 mm diametro extus minute puberula intus glabra, lobis 5 oblongis haud 1 mm longis; staminibus 10 leviter inaequalibus alternatim circiter 5.5 mm et 6 mm longis, filamentis membranaceis glabris in tubum circiter 2.5 mm longum connatis, antheris alternatim circiter 3.7 mm et 4.2 mm longis, thecis basi apiculatis incurvatis, tubulis longitudine thecas subaequantibus apice dila- tatis per rimas ovales 1-1.5 mm longas dehis- centibus; stylo gracili tereti corollam suhae- quante. Peru: Cusco: Prov. Paucartambo, between Sanamayo and Tambomayo, alt. 1360 m, May 4, 1947, C. Vargas C. 6493 (US 1997863 TYPE) (shrub about 2 m high, in open valley). Although the plant here described is super- ficially suggestive of such small-leaved species of Thibaudia as T. biflora (Poepp. & Endl.) Hoer., its staminal characters make its assign- ment to Satyria imperative. Here, however, it has no close allies, being perhaps most nearly related to S. polyantha A. C. Sm., from which it is immediately distinguished by its much smaller leaves, its 1- or 2-flowered inflorescence, its conspicuously lobed calyx, and its comparatively large floral parts. JULY 1953 DRECHSLER: DEVELOPMENT OF PYTHIUM DEBARYANUM 213 MYCOLOGY .—Development of Pythium debaryanum on wet substratum. CHARLES DRECHSLER, United States Department of Agriculture, Plant Industry Sta- tion, Beltsville, Md. In a recent paper (Drechsler, 1952) on swarm-spore development from oospores of Pythium ultimum Trow (1901) and P. debaryanum Hesse (1874) the two fungi were compared with respect to the morphology of their sexual reproductive apparatus as displayed in Petri plate cultures prepared with moderately firm maizemeal agar. Comparison in such cultures was deemed appropriate since both fungi are widely oper- ative as causal agents of damping-off, root rot, and stem rot in many phanerogamic crop plants and consequently are most often encountered by plant pathologists, by whom pathogenic microorganisms have long been studied on agar media. As the discussion and illustrations previously devoted to P. de- baryanum covered its morphology only in part, some additional aspects of develop- ment disclosed by that species on wet sub- stratum are given attention herein. Besides encouraging zoospore formation free liquid water makes for longer antheridial branches and narrower antheridia, so that sexual re- productive apparatus developed under wet conditions has a characteristic rangy appear- ance. To investigators of the aquatic micro- flora, who mostly have continued to study oomycetes in submerged or irrigated ma- terial, the rangier reproductive habit may even nowadays be more familiar than the somewhat compact habit usual in unwet substrata. The modifications resulting from aquatic conditions often appear here and there in Petri plate cultures, owing to con- densation of water within the covered dishes in quantities sufficient to form shallow pools or wet areas on the agar surface. Sometimes, indeed, when Petri plate cultures are stored during periods of hot weather in a refriger- ator equipped with an efficient temperature- control device the agar becomes wetted so extensively that indications of zoospore formation may be found almost everywhere. The same isolation that was used in preparing the illustrations of Pythiwm debaryanum in my earlier paper (Drechsler, 1952, figs. 7, 8) was used also in illustrating development of the species on irrigated slabs of maizemeal agar (Figs. 1-3). Another isolation, one obtained in May, 1922, from a softened pea (Prsum sativum L.) root taken near Madison, Wisconsin, was employed in illustrating development on irrigated slabs of Lima-bean agar (Figs. 4, 5). When they were tried out at different times in the greenhouse the two isolations showed moderate capabilities for the destruction of seedlings. In wound-inocula- tion experiments with plant products like cucum- ber (Cucumis sativus L.), squash (Cucurbita pepo L.) and watermelon (Citrullus vulgaris Schrad.) fruits they likewise showed effectiveness as agents of rapid decay in more mature fleshy vegetable tissue. A mycelium of Pythium debaryanum actively growing in a Petri plate of maizemeal agar often displays a branching habit generally similar to that of my P. anandrum (Drechsler, 1939, fig. 12), in that its long axial hyphae are rather markedly distinguished from the relatively short, some- what closely ramified lateral branches borne on them. The same branching habit is frequently recognizable also in P. mamillatum Meurs (1928) and P. spinosum Sawada (1927), whereas in P. ulttmum growth is more promiscuous, with the lateral branches more often elongating indeter- minately much like the hyphae from which they originated. Later, when mycelium of P. debaryanum is being emptied of contents to provide material for the production of sporangia (Fig. 1, A, t) and oogonia, successive stages in progressive evacuation of all hyphal components are marked by deposition, usually at compara- tively short intervals, of successive convex retain- ing walls (Fig. 1, A,a-s). The tubular membrane of the empty filaments often evanesce more rapidly than the cross-walls, with the result that the matted empty hyphae on the surface of agar plate cultures 10 to 15 days old are frequently visible under the microscope only by their in- numerable curved septa. Aging Petri plate cul- tures of P. mamillatum and P. spinosum similarly may show many crescentic cross-walls within tubular membranes that have largely vanished from sight. In P. ultimwm the matted aerial mycelium affords only a rather meager display of curved septa. Hesse, working with water cultures, described 214 JOURNAL OF THE the zoosporangia of Pythium debaryanum as being formed terminally both on the lateral branches and on the main hyphae; and, indeed, terminal zoosporangia are produced abundantly on myce- lium that has grown out from irrigated pieces of natural or artificial substratum. In agar plate cultures, however, zoosporangia of globose or prolate ellipsoidal shape are more often formed intercalanily (Fig. 2, A-E; Fig. 3, A-M; Fig. 4, E, a). Some sporangia develop close together on the same hypha (Fig. 2, F’, a, b; Fig. 4, Y, a-c). Here and there remnants of protoplasm are gathered into cylindrical cells (Fig. 2, G, a, b; Fig. 3, N-P) which despite their unmodified shape are capable of serving as zoosporangia. When slabs excised from agar plate cultures 10 to 15 days old are placed in a shallow layer of water under cool conditions—I have used temperatures near 10° and 17° C.—some of the sporangia present will often in less than 1 or 2 hours put forth an evacuation tube (Fig. 2, H, t; Fig. 3, Q, t; Fig. 4, A, t) that soon forms a cap of dehiscense at its tip. This cap suddenly yields, and after the manner usual in the genus becomes inflated into a vesicle (Fig. 2, I, v) as it receives the proto- plasmic materials discharged through the evacua- tion tube. Conversion of the protoplasm into laterally biciliate motile zoospores (Fig. 3, R, v, Fig. 4, B, v) ensues in about 20 minutes. Nor- mally the zoospores escape and swim away when the vesicle wall collapses under their collective battering, but where the supply of water is inade- quate the whole zoospore progeny (Fig. 2, J, a-r) may encyst without moving from its place of origin. The evacuation tube in Pythiwm debaryanum may arise from any position on the sporangium (Hie 2. Heosst> Mie oan Ne t. Hic. 4 AVE fy Its observed length in my cultures has varied from 2u (Fig. 4, V, t) to 135y (Fig. 3, U, t). Instances in which the tube is shorter than 5y or longer than 50u are, however, decidedly infrequent. Examples more than 100, long (Fig. 3, T, t; U, t) were discovered only by prolonged search in material displaying many thousands of empty sporangia in positions favorable for unambiguous observation. Hesse’s statement that the evacua- tion tube is longer than the radius and shorter than the diameter of the sporangium bearing it sets forth a dimensional relation that assuredly is frequent in the species. Although zoospore development often begins soon after a slab excised from an agar plate culture WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 has been transferred to water, only a small pro- portion of all the sporangia present will commonly participate in such development at the start. Swarm-spore formation usually continues for several days as more and more of the remaining sporangia, in apparently haphazard sequence, produce evacuation tubes and discharge their contents. After 2 or 3 days considerable numbers of zoospores, some in encysted condition (Fig. 3, Y, a-e; Fig. 4, Z, a-g), others in an actively germinating state (Fig. 3, Y, f), may be found strewn about. Here and there imperfect cleavage of discharged masses of protoplasm results in grouped encysted bodies (Fig. 3, Z, a-d) fre- quently larger than normal zoospores and often of irregular shape. The sexual reproductive apparatus of Pythium debaryanum formed on wet or submerged sub- stratum, much like that formed on unwet agar, may be of either monoclinous (Fig. 1, B-L; Fig. 5, A-L) or diclinous (Fig. 1, M; Fig. 5, M-O) origin. Often in monoclinous reproductive units a solitary male branch arising at some little distance from the oogonium supplies a single terminal antheridium (Fig. 1, B-K; Fig. 5, A-F), though occasionally it supplies 2 antheridia (Fig. 5, G, a, b). Frequently 2 male branches arise from the oogonial hypha, each supplying an antheridium (Fig. 5, H, a, b). In some instances, however, where 2 antheridia are present, only one is borne on a branch (Fig. 5, I, a), the other being composed of a hyphal segment immediately adjacent to the oogonium (Fig. 5, I, b). Some- times where 3 antheridia are present 2 of them (Fig. 5, J, a, b; Fig. 5, K, a, b) may be borne on separate branches arising from the oogonial hypha either on the same side (Fig. 5, J) or on opposite sides (Fig. 5, K) of an intercalary oogonium, while the third may consist of a cylindrical hyphal segment (Fig. 5, J, ¢; K, ¢) adjacent to the oogonium. Further variety in positional relationships of the male cells is pro- vided now and then in instances where an oogo- nium is supplied with 4 antheridia, 2 of them (Fig. 5, L, a, b) perchance borne terminally on separate branches, a third consisting of a sessile pouchlike outgrowth (Fig. 5, L, ¢) arising in im- mediate proximity to the oogonium, and a fourth composed of a hyphal segment (Fig. 5, L. d) ad- jacent to the oogonium. Fertilization of an oogo- nium solely by an antheridium composed of an adjacent hyphal segment is observable only somewhat rarely in P. debaryanum (Fig. 1, L), C. Drechsler del. Fic. 1.—Pythium debaryanum, on wet maizemeal agar; X 1000. A, Empty mycelium with curved cross- walls, a-s, and a conidium, t. B-K, Units of monoclinous sexual apparatus, each with a single antheri- dium borne terminally on a branch. L, Monoclinous reproductive unit with antheridium consisting of a hyphal segment adjacent to oogonium. M, Diclinous reproductive unit. (Oospore young in B, nearly but not wholly mature in C, E-M.) 215 216 JOURNAL OF THE but is exceedingly frequent in P. ultimum. In- deed, such cylindrica] antheridia as well as pouch- like sessile antheridia borne laterally in immediate proximity to oogonia are generally infrequent in P. debaryanum, and in many cultures are found only after some search. Since for the most part the longer antheridial branches in monoclinous reproductive apparatus of Pythiwm debaryanum formed on wet sub- stratum arise at no greater distance from the oogonium than the male branches in monoclinous apparatus formed in unwet agar cultures they necessarily follow more circuitous courses. In diclinous as in monoclinous reproductive appara- tus the antheridia borne terminally on branches are commonly longer and narrower on wet sub- stratum than in unwet agar cultures. A reciprocal relation between diclinous reproductive units comes to light in instances where two neighboring mycelial hypha (Fig. 5, O, a, b) each bear an oogonium (Fig. 5, O, c, d) that is fertilized by an antheridium (Fig. 5, O, e, f) borne on a branch given off by the other. Hesse (1874, p. 25, line 2) described the oo- gonial envelope of Pythiwm debaryanum as being smooth and in his several illustrations pertaining to sexual reproduction the oogonium is shown without protuberances. It seems possible that only 4 individual oogonia are represented in these illustrations since 5 of his figures (Hesse, 1874, figs. 15-19) show such resemblances that they might well have been prepared at successively later stages from the same unit of sexual ap- paratus as his 2 figures (Hesse, 1874, figs. 18, 14) of earlier stages. In the fungus best conforming to Hesse’s description smooth oogonia, as a rule, predominate strongly, yet if a considerable num- ber of them are examined closely, scattered examples are usually found that bear one, two, or three protuberances (Fig. 1, B, H; Fig. 5, D, G, K). Mostly these protuberances are of cy- lindrical shape, and are broadly rounded at the tip like the fingers of a glove. Frequently they are only 2 or 3u long, yet often, again, they measure 10 to 20u in length. The shorter protuberances usually remain continuous with the oogonium, though the longer ones often become delimited by a basal septum. This meager ornamentation might be disre- garded but for the circumstance that isolations are often obtained which while closely resembling those with mostly smooth oogonia will rather commonly show digitations in sufficient numbers WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 to be noticed even under cursory examination. The oogonia produced when such isolations are grown on Petri plates of maizemeal agar often vary markedly with respect to degree of orna- mentation, some being devoid of protuberances, and others bearing 1 to 7 digitations in their upper and equatorial aspects. Throughout a culture the average number of protuberances ex- posed to view hardly ever seems much in excess of 3. In some cultures the same isolations appear very nearly smooth, with the oogonia there dis- playing, on the average, considerably less than one digitation apiece. Nevertheless the tendency toward development of protuberances in readily noticeable quantity apparently persists in these isolations over many years as an inherent char- acter. It is difficult to hold very strong convictions as to whether the isolations with this character represent merely a variant of Pythium de- baryanum or a separate species. In the mono- graphs of Matthews (1931) and Middleton (1943) P. wrregulare Buisman (1927) is treated as a separate species with a circumscription that would evidently admit the noticeably digitate isolations under discussion and would exclude the nearly smooth isolations herein considered refer- able to P. debaryanum. This circumscription may not be strictly in agreement with the morphology of Buisman’s fungus. Through the Centraal Bureau voor Schimmelcultures a culture of P. irregulare given by Buisman was supplied to me a few years after the species had been described. When the culture was transferred to maizemeal agar and Lima-bean agar the resulting sexual reproductive apparatus (Fig. 6, A-I) displayed few oogonial protuberances (Fig. 6, C, D), the degree of ornamentation observed not exceeding that usual in the relatively smooth isolations assigned to P. debaryanum. In the very numerous monoclinous reproductive units the antheridium was commonly borne on a branch arising some distance from the oogonium (Fig. 6, A-F). Where 2 antheridia were present in monoclinous units each was most frequently borne on a separate branch (Fig. 6, G, a, b), though in occasional instances one was borne on a branch (Fig. 6, H, a) while the other developed from a segment (Fig. 6, H, b) immediately adjacent to the oogonium. Buisman stated in her account that she never had seen hypogynal antheridia, yet after some little search in subcultures of her fungus a monoclinous reproductive unit was found in which the oogo- Juty 1953 DRECHSLER: DEVELOPMENT OF PYTHIUM DEBARYANUM DAW, b_@J ate > ATVI. 4 Fie. 2.—Asexual reproductive apparatus of Pythiwm debaryanum as found produced on wet maize- meal agar, drawn with the aid of a camera lucida at a uniform magnification; X 1000 throughout. A-E Interealary zoosporangia. F, Two zoosporangia, a and b, formed near together. G, Two zoosporangia, a and b, formed in a wide hypha from remnants of protoplasm. H, Zoosporangium with unusually long evacuation tube, t, surmounted by hyaline cap. I, Newly discharged zoosporangium showing evacuation tube, t, with vesicle, Vat its tip. Jy Discharged zoosporangium with its progeny of zoospores, a-r, en- cysted near mouth of its evacuation tube, t. K-S, Empty zoosporangia, each with its evacuation tube, t. 218 nium had been fertilized by 2 antheridia formed in immediate proximity to it, one consisting of an adjacent hyphal segment (Fig. 6, I, a), while the other, of pouch-like shape (Fig. 6, I, b), was sessile on the oogonial hypha. Although Buisman distinguished Pythiwm ir- regulare from P. debaryanum mainly by the protuberances found on its oogonia, the 8 oogonia figured by her (Buisman, 1927, figs. 9, 10) show in all scarcely a dozen protrusions, and of these only 5 would seem of the digitate type. In some of her specimens the departures from a globose or ellipsoidal shape appear as if they might be at- tributable to collapse of portions of the oogonial envelope. Such collapse is considerably more pronounced in P. debaryanum than in P. ultimum since the oogonial envelope is noticeably thinner in the former species than in the latter, and consequently is more easily deformed either through mechanical disturbance or through loss of water. On the surface of agar cultures, where both P. debaryanum and P. ultimum often give rise to sexual apparatus most abundantly, the oogonial envelopes in mature reproductive units of P. debaryanum commonly show very marked deformation from collapse. As Buisman (1927, p. 10) apparently used no really efficient method for removing bacteria from her cultures itseems probable, besides, that at times the oogonia of her P. wregulare may have developed some of the promiscuous malformations often resulting from excessive bacterial contamination. Buisman gave no descriptive details concern- ing either the three isolations she dealt with under the binomial Pythium debaryanum or the one isolation she identified as P. debaryanum var. pelargoni Braun. A statement given in her dis- cussion of P. irregulare and reading ‘‘The an- theridia are usually of the same type as those of P. debaryanum, but I never saw hypogynal an- theridia’’ implies in its use of the adversative “but” that she recognized hypogynal antheridia as occurring in P. debaryanum, and thereby sug- gests that perhaps she applied Hesse’s binomial to the species herein treated as P. ultimuwm. Such application, approximately, was urged some years later by Van Luijk (1934) in his proposal to adopt for P. debaryanum the circumscription set forth in De Bary’s (188la, 1881b) publica- tions. Van Luijk believed this circumscription, which he intimated was supported by Butler, had governed usage until 1927 with complete satisfaction. He held that several faults in Hesse’s JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 paper discredited the original account of P. debaryanum so seriously that by itself it could not be regarded as providing a valid description. According to Van Luijk the faults in Hesse’s account were rectified by De Bary in a charac- terization accurately portraying a fungus that can be found any day. In view of the imputed corrections the authorship of the species was broadened, so that the familiar binomial ap- peared as P. debaryanum Hesse em. De Bary. Van Luijk regarded parasitism and the scope of asexual reproduction with respect to the presence or absence of zoospore development as being of no moment in distinguishing species; and he held it doubtful whether the differences in the antheridia of Pythium debaryanum and P. ulttmum were sufficient to separate these two fungi. These views are largely contrary to my observations on the parasites under discussion. In my collection of cultures sameness or other- ness has as a rule been indicated reliably by the capability of newly formed globose asexual re- productive bodies to produce zoospores and by the positional relation of the antheridium or antheridial branch in monoclinous sexual ap- paratus. The two features are most helpful, besides, in interpreting some of the early litera- ture on the species sharing the particular kind of parasitism here in question, including the pertinent descriptive writings of Hesse, De Bary, and Trow. These writings were all based on fungi ob- tained from seedlings that had succumbed to damping-off. Although this serious disease affects seedlings of many phanerogamic crop plants and is caused in rather considerable measure by species of Pythium the number of species effective enough in its causation to invite notice are few. In our middle and northern latitudes, where conditions of temperature and moisture during spring and early summer should not differ greatly from those in Alsace and Great Britain, the two species herein treated as P. ultimum and P. debaryanum, together with the somewhat digitate form treated by Matthews and Middle- ton as P. irregulare, are virtually the only damp- ing-off parasites found which like the fungi described by Hesse, De Bary, and Trow give rise to relatively smooth oogonia and subglobose zoosporangia or conidia. Through this fortunate circumstance the few species mentioned are indicated rather definitely as the ones with which the writings of Hesse, De Bary, and Trow were huny £953 DRECHSLER: DEVELOPMENT OF PYTHIUM DEBARYANUM 219 8 o. xe as) S iS) Fic. 3.—Asexual reproductive apparatus of Pythiwm debaryanum as found produced on wet maize- meal agar, drawn with the aid of a camera lucida at a uniform magnification; X 1000 throughout. A-M, Intercalary zoosporangia of various sizes and of globose or ellipsoidal shape. N-P, Small cylindrical zoosporangia formed in hyphae from remnants of protoplasm. Q, Zoosporangium with unusually long evacuation tube, t, surmounted by hyaline cap. R, Zoosporangium showing an evacuation tube, t, with a vesicle containing zoospores. S- V, Empty zoosporangia, each with an exceptionally long evacuation tube, t. W, X, Empty zoosporangia, each with an evacuation tube, t, of ordinary length. Y, Six encysted zoospores, a-f, of which one, f, is germinating. Z, Group of 4 encysted masses of protoplasm, a-d, resulting from frustrated development in discharged sporangial contents. 220 JOURNAL OF THE for the most part concerned. Thus De Bary’s firsthand account of the damping-off fungus he considered to be P. debaryanum can be safely understood as relating unambiguously to a species found operating very widely and destruc- tively as a causal agent of damping-off—to the species herein termed P. ultimwm—though the morphology it sets forth would apply almost equally well to a closely related congeneric species, P. paroecandrum Drechsler (1940), which so far has come to light only as a cause of root rot and rootlet-tip discoloration. In Hesse’s original and earlier description of P. debaryanum is set forth recognizably another parasitic species scarcely less widespread and efficient in the causation of damping-off than the one which De Bary presented under the same binomial. The differences whereby present-day isolations can be separated are detectable in the writings of the two pioneer investigators. Isolations in which very frequently the relatively smooth oogonium is fertilized by an antheridium borne terminally on a branch arising from the oogonial hypha at a distance from the oogonium about equal to the oogonial diameter—the relation of parts depicted by Hesse—will readily produce zoospores from zoosporangia of mycelial origin. On the other hand, damping-off isolations in which the oogo- nium is commonly fertilized by an antheridium consisting of an adjacent hyphal segment or of a lateral pouch-like cell arismg in immediate proximity to the oogonium—the positional rela- tionships most frequent in De Bary’s illustra- tions—are decidedly reluctant to produce zoo- spores from conidia of mycelial origin, and yet will form them rather consistently from germinat- ing after-ripened oospores or from sporangia borne on germ hyphae extended by after-ripened oospores. It is hardly surprising that De Bary, though a master of unsurpassed proficiency, found zoospores to be produced whereas Hesse with only the limited experience of a student would seem to have obtained zoospores abundantly during the first few weeks he worked with his fungus. Van Luijk’s success in obtaining zoospores from the isolations he referred to P. debaryanum Hesse em. De Bary may have been due primarily to his use of material from an old dried-up pure culture, for in such a culture the sparingly, oospores present would ordinarily have had ample time to undergo the changes of after- ripening. If, as seems probable, the isolations were WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 referable to P. ultimum they need not have been of exceptional reproductive behavior like the cultures that Ark and Middleton (1949) observed giving rise to zoospores from ordinary conidia. In his text Hesse gave no measurements for the hyphae and reproductive bodies of Pythium debaryanum. Apparently he relied entirely on his illustrations to convey metric information. Un- fortunately, at the magnifications given in the legends his figures show excessive approximate values for all dimensions: 13y for width of a main mycelial filament; 454 for diameter of zoo- sporangium; 20 to 23 for diameter of encysted zoospores; 75u and 50y for length and width, re- spectively, of an intercalary conidium; 45 to 48u for diameter of oogonium; 374 and 10, for length and width, respectively, of an antheridium; and 37 for diameter of oospore. Since in any of the damping-off species—and the damping-off species are among the coarsest members of the genus—13u is about twice the usual width of an elongating axial hypha a few hundred microns from its tip, the actual magnification would seem about twice that given in the legend. In- deed, if the magnifications given in all the legends were doubled the smaller dimensional values then derived from the figures would be in tolerably good agreement with the usual measure- ments for either of the damping-off fungi under discussion, which except for differences in thick- ness of oospore wall and in length of monoclinous antheridial branches are, in general, of nearly equal size. How the error might have come about is conjectural. It may perhaps be no mere coin- cidence that on the two folded plates of the published dissertation Hesse’s figures occupy rectangular areas about twice the width of the printed pages. Should the procedure for making lithographs 80 years ago have readily permitted reproduction of illustrations at reduced sizes the magnifications appearing in the legends might have been given in the expectation that the plates would be adjusted to the width of the page. In any case, the error, though most unfortunate in the original account of a species which with re- spect to its binomial has become one of the most familiar of all fungi, is so very obvious that it should not occasion any serious misunderstand- ing as to what damping-off parasite was the main subject of Hesse’s description. In sexual apparatus of Pythiwm debaryanum produced on wet or unwet agar substratum the antheridia borne terminally on branches are ° JULY 1953 DRECHSLER: DEVELOPMENT OF PYTHIUM DEBARYANUM 221 C. Drechsler del. “ Fie. 4.—Pythium debaryanum, on moist Lima-bean agar; X 1000. A, Sporangium shortly before dis- charge. B, Sporangium with active zoospores in vesicle, v. C-J, Empty terminal sporangia. E, a, K-X, Empty intercalary sporangia. Y Three empty sporangia, a-c, close together. Z, Encysted zoospores, a-g. (A-Y: t, evacuation tube.) 222 rather consistently applied to the oogonium by their tips. However in sexual apparatus formed on extramatrical submerged mycelium, termi- nally borne male cells are often observable in more varied postures. Postural relations infre- quent in agar cultures are shown in the illustra- tions not only of early workers like Hesse (1874) and Sadebeck (1875), who had only submersed material available for study, but also of later workers who have studied such material from preference. Thus, several of the figures of P. irregulare given by Matthews (1931, pl. 24, fig. 4; pl. 25, figs. 1, 3, 9) show antheridia applied laterally, and in at least two instances the male cell seems intimately in contact with the oogo- nium throughout its length (Matthews 1931, pl. 25, fig. 3, upper; fig. 9). In the few figures of sexual reproductive apparatus given by Hesse the antheridium is shown applied laterally, though the area of contact is rather well for- ward and of either small or only moderate extent. Hesse’s text does not mention what por- tion of the antheridium makes contact with the oogonium, his most directly relevant phrases (sich dieser innig anschmiegt; das Anlegen des Pollinodiums; lagert sich an die Membran; dem Momente ihres Anlegens; durch Anlegen an die Membran des Oogoniums) not specifying directly either lateral or apical application, even if the word “‘anschmiegt” might connote rather ex- tensive contact. Sadebeck (1875, p. 124) in discussing sexual development in his Pythium equiseti stated that the antheridium is most often applied by its tip, that sometimes it becomes attached laterally to the oogonium, that very often it enwraps the oogonium, and that therefore the fertilization tube is extended either apically or laterally. In one of the figures given by Sadebeck (1875, pl. 4, fig. 3) a longitudinally applied antheridium is shown extending a lateral fertilization tube into the oogonium. In another figure of Sadebeck’s, in which are shown two connected monoclinous reproductive units, the antheridium in one unit (Sadebeck, 1875, pl. 3, fig. 8, right) is narrowly applied to the oogonium with its tip, while the antheridium in the other unit (Sadebeck, 1875, pl. 3, fig. 8, left), is applied lengthwise, so that it enwraps the oogonium closely and rather ex- tensively. The circuitous male branch in the former unit arises from the oogonial stalk at a distance from the oogonium about equal to the width of that organ. The male branch in the latter unit arises from the same hypha as the JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY ;OF SCIENCES ? vou. 43, No. 7 oogonial stalk, its origin being separated from the oogonium by hyphal elements having a combined length approximately equal to twice the oogonial diameter. None of Sadebeck’s illus- trations show any antheridium formed in im- mediate proximity to the oogonium, and in his text the antheridia in monoclinous units are, with regard to their hyphal relations, discussed only as being borne terminally on branches. As might be expected from the arrangement of its mono- clinous sexual apparatus the fungus several times gave rise to zoospores following transfer of in- fected Hquisetum prothallia to water. Since in- fected prothallia always disintegrated completely without leaving any visible residue, the host sub- stratum used by Sadebeck for swarm-spore production must have been rather newly in- vaded, and thus presumably should not have contained any after-ripened oospores. Because of its ready parasitism on many host plants De Bary considered it likely that his fungus might have been observed by other workers besides Hesse. He stated that the de- scription of Pythiwm equiseti left scarcely any doubt that Sadebeck’s fungus was identical with the one he and Hesse had studied. All doubt as to the presumed identity was dispelled for him when some healthy Equisetum prothallia, after being inoculated with his fungus, were destroyed ‘“murderously” in a few days. Without the ad- vantages provided in collections of pure cultures— advantages accruing from opportunity not only to examine isolations wholly free of alien organ- isms but also to compare with respect to mor- phology, development, and pathogenicity isola- tions obtained from different host plants, in different regions, and at different times—it is not surprising that De Bary failed to uncover the correlated differences in antheridial morphology and zoospore production whereby the damping- off parasite figured by him is distinguished from the fungus corresponding better to the descrip- tions and illustrations of Hesse and Sadebeck. The latter fungus may well have been present in some of De Bary’s material, since he mentioned (De Bary, 1881 b, p. 526) that in some cultures zoo- sporangia were formed in relatively large num- bers, intermixed with resting conidia produced at the same time and under apparently similar conditions.. Besides, unless he had seen Hesse’s species now and then in his own material it appears unlikely that he would so readily have noted in the description and figures of P. equiseti JuLY 1953 DRECHSLER: DEVELOPMENT OF PYTHIUM DEBARYANUM es Seale in jl ? 10 20 30 40 C. Drechsler del. Fic. 5.—Mature sexual reproductive apparatus of Pythium debaryanum formed on moist Lima-bean agar; X 1000. A-F, Monoclinous units with single antheridia. G-I, Monoclinous units with 2 antheridia, a and b. J, K, Monoclinous units with 3 antheridia, a-c. L, Monoclinous unit with 4 antheridia, a-d. M, N, Diclinous units. O, Two connected diclinous units: a, b, parent hyphae; c, d, oogonia; e, f, antheridia. 224 JOURNAL OF THE any very persuasive similarity to the damping-off parasite depicted in his illustrations. His ready acceptance of Sadebeck’s account would seem to imply that lateral fertilization tubes and laterally applied antheridia—even clasping antheridia— were not regarded by him as features incongruous with the morphology of P. debaryanum. It ap- pears probable therefore that De Bary considered the treatment of antheridial morphology in Hesse’s dissertation less as being wrong and re- quiring correction than as being insufficient and requiring amplification. Unhappily the amplifica- tion he provided would seem to have been derived for the most part, if not wholly, from a closely related species with similar parasitic tendencies. Corroboration of Hesse’s illustrations show- ing laterally applied antheridia and_ lateral fertilization tubes has come mainly from studies carried out on submerged material in water cultures. The positional instability usual in such cultures and the ease with which the more delicate submerged parts may be pushed out of place or pressed out of shape are not to be disregarded. In Butler’s (1907) monograph the treatment of the sexual reproductive stage in Pythiwm debaryanum conforms closely to De Bary’s ac- count. Butler’s relevant firsthand observations then were limited to material obtained by causing cress seedlings to damp off at Freiburg im Sealein uw oO 10 20 WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, NO. 7 Breisgau, Germany. Although he found conidia and oospores produced abundantly, he saw no sporangia. His failure to obtain zoospores, to- gether with his description of antheridia in the species as “from the same or another hypha as the oogonium, often formed close below the latter, and not seldom hypogynal,” suggests strongly that the Freiburg fungus was the same as the one figured by De Bary. A later paper published by Butler (1913) on Pythium debaryanum presents a firsthand ac- count of a conspicuously different fungus he found at Pusa, India, in the caruncle of castor (Ricinus communis L.) seed that after being sown in pots of unsterilized soil had failed to germinate. In this fungus Butler did not observe any an- theridia that consisted individually of a cy- lindrical hyphal segment adjacent to the oogo- nium. Often the antheridium was borne terminally on a branch arising from the oogonial hypha at some distance from the oogonium, the distance in six monoclinous reproductive units pictured (Butler 1913, figs. 1-4) ranging from about 10u to 60u. Above the junction of the two sexual stalks the female stalk was often longer than the male stalk and consequently was often curved. The resulting postural relation mani- festly was the reverse of that shown in the sexual reproductive unit figured by Hesse, where the 8 $ z 3 8 S Fic. 6.—Mature sexual reproductive apparatus formed on moist Lima-bean agar inoculated with Buisman’s isolation of Pythiwm irregulare, X 1000. A-E, Monoclinous reproductive units, each with a single antheridium. F, Monoclinous reproductive unit with a terminal antheridium bearing a lateral] protuberance by which it is attached to the oogonium. G, Monoclinous reproductive unit with 2 antheri- dia, each borne terminally on a branch. H, Monoclinous reproductive unit with one antheridium, a, borne terminally on a branch, and another, b, formed in immediate proximity to the oogonium. I, Mono- clinous reproductive unit with 2 antheridia, of which one, a, consists of a hyphal segment adjacent to the oogonium, while the other, b, is laterally sessile in immediate proximity to the oogonium. omy £953 straight oogonial stalk is shorter than the longer curving antheridial branch; and assuredly was the reverse of the postural relation most usual in monoclinous reproductive apparatus of the damping-off parasite herein treated under Hesse’s binomial. Similar curvature of the oogonial stalk is found rather often in cultures of P. butleri Subr. and P. aphanidermatum (Eds.) Fitzp. (= P. deliense Meurs), and is conspicuous in Butler’s (1907, pl. 2, figs. 3, 5, 6) illustrations of his P. indigoferae. Although the text contains no com- ment on the shape of the antheridium, all eight of the antheridia figured show a distinctive out- ward form in that they consist of a somewhat enlarged clavate terminal part together with a lateral protrusion by which they are united to the oogonium. Antheridia of approximately such design are found somewhat infrequently in P. debaryanum (Fig. 6, F) but are very numerous in P. butleri and P. aphanidermatum. It is not known whether the curious resemblance between the Indian fungus and P. aphanidermatum with respect to the make-up of their sexual apparatus may have had some influence in leading Jochems (1927) to identify provisionally as P. debary- anum the stem-burn parasite that Meurs (1934) later described under the binomial P. deliense. Apart from its production of zoospores from globose rather than from lobulate zoosporangia the Indian fungus with its relatively delicate mycelium appears clearly alien to Hesse’s damp- ing-off parasite, as well as to the other widely distributed damping-off parasite herein dis- cussed, which after being set forth firsthand by De Bary was not described under a separate binomial of unambiguous application until Trow (1901) presented it somewhat mistakenly (Drech- sler, 1935) as a new saprophytic species, P. ulttmum. No species corresponding to the first- hand description and illustrations given by Butler has ever come to light among the cultures I have isolated from diseased plants and other materials. Since the Indian fungus was found in a locality where as high a temperature prevails as is ordinarily found in the tropics, its distribution may well be restricted to regions considerably warmer than central Maryland. LITERATURE CITED Ark, P. A., and MippLETon, J.T. Pythiwm black rot of Cattleya. Phytopathology 39: 1060- 1064. 1949. ; DRECHSLER: DEVELOPMENT. OF PYTHIUM DEBARYANUM 225 Bary, A. DE. Untersuchungen tiber die Perono- sporeen und Saprolegnieen und die Grundlagen eines nattrlichen Systems der Pilze. In Bary, A. de, and M. Woronin, Beitrige zur Mor- phologie und Physiologie der Pilze IV: 1-145, pl. 1-6. 188la. . Zur Kenntniss der Peronosporeen. Bot. Zeit. 39: 521-530, 537-544, 553-563, 569-578, 585-595, 601-609, 617-625. 1881b. BuisMAN, C.J. Root rots caused by phycomycetes. Meded. Phytopath. Lab. ‘‘Willie Commelin Scholten”? Baarn 11: 1-51. 1927. Butter, E. J. An account of the genus Pythium and some Chytridiaceae. India Dept. Agr. Mem. Bot. Ser. 1 (5): 1-161, pl. 1-10. 1907. . Pythium de Baryanum Hesse. India Dept. Agr. Mem. Bot. Ser. 5 (5): 562-567, pl. oe. SOLS DRECHSLER, C. Sources of difficulty in recogniz- ing, identifying, and describing species of phy- comycetes. Proc. Int. Bot. Congr. 2: 176-181. 1935. Several species of Pythium causing blos- som-end rot of watermelons. Phytopathology 29: 391-422. 1939. Three species of Pythium associated with root rots. Phytopathology 30: 189-213. 1940. Production of zoospores from germinating oospores of Pythium ultimum and Pythium debaryanum. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 79: 431-450. 1952. Hesse, R. Pythium de Baryanum ein endophy- tischer Schmarotzer in den Geweben der Kim- linge der Leindotter, der Riiben, des Spergels und einiger anderer landwirthschaftlichen Kul- turpflanzen. 76 pp., 2 pl. Halle, 1874. JocuEeMs, 8. C. J. Parasitaire stengelverbranding bij =Deli-Tabak. Meded. Deli. Proefstat. Medan, Sumatra, ser. 2, no. 49: 1-35, fig. 1-4. 1927. MatTtruews, Verma D. Studies on the genus Py- thium. 136 pp., 29 pl. Chapel Hill, N. C., 1931. Meurs, A. Wortelrot, veroorzaakt door schimmels uit de geslachten Pythium Pringsheim en Aph- anomyces de Bary. 94 pp. Baarn, 1928. Parasitic stemburn of Deli tobacco. topath. Zeitschr. 7: 169-185. 1934. MippieTon, J. T. The taxonomy, host range and geographic distribution of the genus Pythium. Phy- Mem. Torrey Bot. Club 20 (1): 1-171. 1948. SADEBECK, R. Untersuchungen vwiber Pythium Equiseti. Beitr. Biol. Pflanzen 1 (8): 117- £39) pls 4) 1875. SawapDa, K. Descriptive catalogue of the Formosan fungi, Part III. Dept. Agr. Gov. Res. Inst. Formosa, Japan, Rept. 27. 1927. Trow, A. H. Observations on the biology and cy- tology of Pythium ultimum n. sp. Ann. Bot. 15: 269-312, pl. 15, 16. 1901. Van Luisx, A. Pythium de Baryanum Hesse em. de Bary. Meded. Phytopath. Lab. ‘‘Willie Commelin Scholten’’ Baarn 18: 23-28. 1934. 226 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 ENTOMOLOGY .—New species of Olethreutidae from Illinois (Lepidoptera). J. F. GATES CLARKE, U.S. Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine. This paper is devoted to the description of species of olethreutid moths collected by Murray O. Glenn, of Henry, Ill. Only SIx species are treated here, although many more, chiefly represented by uniques, are in hand. Mr. Glenn deserves great credit for contributing so much to our knowledge of host associations and of the Micro- lepidoptera of the region. The photographs of the moths’ wings were taken by Robert Bonde, U. 8. Department of Agriculture. The drawings are by the author. Types of all the species are deposited in the U.S. National Museum, and paratypes are de- posited in the National Museum and in Mr. Glenn’s collection. Eucosma uta, n. sp. Figs. 1, la, 1b Alar expanse, 20-22 mm. Labial palpus with second segment very light buff, sprinkled with a few grayish scales; third segment very short, dark gray, buff-tipped. Head ochraceous-buff, face buff. Antenna ochraceous- buff with fuscous spot above on some segments; scape fuscous above. Thorax and forewing light buff; thorax strongly overlaid with fuscous and ochraceous-buff almost to the complete suppres- sion of the ground color; apex of tegula light buff; basal two-fifths of forewing fuscous, except costal third, with considerable olivaceous scaling on basal angle; from slightly before middle of costa an outwardly slanting fuscous fascia ex- tending to and broadening at tornus is preceded and followed by olivaceous; entire costa strigu- lated with short alternating pale buff and fuscous dashes, the former with a faint metallic luster; costal fold of male extending slightly beyond basal third; in terminal third, and in the dark fascia, several narrow metallic streaks; ocelloid patch obsolete, mainly indicated by two, short, metallic bars and a pair of faintly indicated longitudinal, black lines; cilia olivaceous strongly irrorate with blackish-fuscous basally. Hind wing fuscous; cilia buff with a grayish subbasal line, except in area of basal angle where they are almost wholly grayish. Legs buff overlaid and banded with fuscous. Abdomen buff below, fuscous above. Male genitalia.—Harpe as figured. Uncus prom- inent, broad, rounded apically. Socii moderately long, fleshy, pendant. Female genitalia.—Ovipositor with an anterior, ventral, prominent, evaginated opening. Re- mainder of genitalia as figured. Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 61481. Type locality —Putnam County, Ill. (July 10, 1939). Food plant.—Unknown. Remarks.—Described from the type male and two female paratypes all from the same locality. The females are dated ‘13. viii. 45” and ‘5. viii. 47.” The nearest relative of uta appears to be E. atomosana (Walsingham), from which it differs by the presence of the dark basal patch and the absence of the white costal area and the semi- metallic spotting of the forewing. In genitalia uta differs from atomosana by the evenly rounded uncus, more slender socil, and broader neck of harpe. No females of atomosana are available for a comparison of the genitalia. Epiblema naoma, n. sp. Figs. 2, 2a, 2b Alar expanse, 14-18 mm. Labial palpus with second segment buff, out- wardly marked with grayish fuscous; third seg- ment fuscous, buff-tipped. Antenna grayish fus- cous with paler, narrow annulations. Head with admixture of buff and fuscous, varying greatly in different specimens, some with the lghter color absent. Thorax marked with three pairs of alternating dark and light transverse bands; in some specimens the dark bands are blackish fuscous and the light bands vary from buff to pale vinaceous. Forewing blackish fuscous; outer margin of basal patch outwardly oblique from costa to middle of wing then straight to dorsum; basal patch followed by a pale transverse shade from dorsum to costa, broader on dorsum; this pale shade varies from buff to pale vinaceous, being more pronounced in the males, and is followed by an outwardly oblique, narrow bar of the ground color; this in turn is followed by a pale terminal portion of the wing; slightly before apex a transverse dash of the ground color, frequently interrupted by pale scaling, extends to vein 5; costa marked for its entire length with alternating light and dark spots; costal fold of male extending to middle of costa; terminal half Jury 1953 of wing marked with dull leaden-metallic scales; cilia dull leaden-metallic preceded by a fine, dark subbasal line. Hind wing pale to dark fuscous with base, in males, almost white; cilia light fuscous with darker subbasal line. Legs buff to pale vinaceous the ground color mostly obscured by fuscous suffusion and banding. Abdomen con- sisting of alternating dark and light bands the extent of each varying with the specimen. CLARKE: NEW SPECIES OF OLETHREUTIDAE 227 Male genitalia—Harpe as figured. Uncus bi- lobed. Clasper strong, sharply pointed. Female gentalia.—Ovipositor not shown; re- mainder as figured. Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 61482. Type locality—Putnam County, Ill. (June 25, 1950). Food plant.—Ratibida pinnata (Vent.) Barn- hart (roots). Fras. 1-6.—New Olethreutidae from Illinois: Left wings. (See explanation at end of text.) 228 JOURNAL OF THE Remarks.—Described from the type male and 8 male and 9 female paratypes all from the type locality. Dates of emergence range from April 28 to June 25 (1948-1950). As indicated in the description, naoma is an extremely variable species, difficult to describe. The wings figured represent an average male, but many of these exhibit much more light scaling. In the females the markings are usually more pronounced and clear-cut, and the majority of them appear much darker than the males. In general appearance and genitalia this species is nearest H. towana McDunnough. T. N. Freeman, of the Canadian National Museum, has kindly compared some of the speci- mens of naoma with McDunnough’s type of vowana and remarks as follows: E. cowana has “apex of uncus truncate; ventral edge of sacculus strongly arcuate; neck of harpe much deeper excavated ventrally so that the ventral part of the cucullus projects well beyond; juxta arcuate dorsally.”’ EH. naoma has ‘‘apex of uncus bilobed; ventral edge of sacculus less strongly arcuate; neck of harpe shallowly excavated; Juxta more truncate dorsally.” He further states that in iowana “outer edge of basal band runs straight to radius then obtusely angled to costa” while in naoma ‘outer edge of the basal band is irregu- lar and bends in the middle of the wing. Macula- tion is more distinct and the hind wings are whiter at base, otherwise quite similar.” Epinotia atristriga, n. sp. Figs. 3, 3a, 3b Alar expanse, 13-19 mm. Labial palpus sordid whitish suffused with gray exteriorly on second segment; third segment gray. Antenna dark gray with narrow, paler annulations. Head gray, the scales tipped with sordid white. Thorax and forewing ground color gray with scales tipped with sordid white; tegula with black spot at base; forewing with longi- tudinal, median, irregular black streak for entire length; on each side of the median streak, particu- larly dorsally, sordid-white scaling; costal fold of male extending to basal two-fifths and contain- ing expansible, whitish hair pencil; outer three- fifths of costa with some obscure dark spots; cilia gray with dark subbasal line. Hind wing pale grayish-fuscous; cilia lighter with dark subbasal line. Legs dark gray with pale annulations. Ab- domen dark gray, somewhat lighter ventrally and anal tuft with ocherous tint. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 Male genitalia.—Harpe as figured. Uncus long, curved, bifid. Socii long, narrow, dilated distally. Female genitalia.— Ovipositor not shown, re- mainder as figured. Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 61483. Type locality —Putnam County, Ill. (March 17, 1945). Food plant.—Unknown. Remarks.—Described from the type male and 14 male and 6 female paratypes all from the type locality. Dates range from March 17 to April 12 (1938-1946). Formerly confused with E. vertumnana (Zel- ler), to which it is closely related, but differing from it by the uninterrupted dark median streak and much less white scaling dorsally on forewing. The chief differences in the male genitalia are the much broader base of sacculus and narrower, longer spine cluster of vertwmnana. Polychrosis sambuci, n. sp. Figs. 4, 4a, 4b Alar expanse, 10-13 mm. Labial palpus pinkish buff; second segment with indistinct subterminal fascia and small basal spot fuscous. Antenna fuscous with paler annula- tions. Head pinkish buff shading to brownish posteriorly and with a fuscous spot on each side. Thorax cinnamon-buff; posterior tuft cimnamon; base of tegula and median transverse fascia fuscous. Forewing with basal two-fifths leaden- metallic the basal patch almost obliterated by this color and only indicated by a fine blackish-fuscous transverse line near base and another, outwardly curved fascia of the same color at one-fourth nearly obscured by cinnamon-buff scales; from slightly before middle of costa to middle of dorsum an outwardly curved, irregular, blackish- fuscous fascia with a prominent tooth extending well toward termen; dorsal half of this fascia largely overlaid with cinnamon-buff; on tornus a blackish-fuscous spot, overlaid with cinnamon- buff, and bordered by an inverted V-shaped leaden-metallic mark; between this and a smaller, similarly colored apical spot, a large blotch, also similarly colored, covers most of the subterminal area; on apical half of costa several alternating dark and light dashes; cilia mostly leaden-metal- lic with some cinnamon buff in tornal area. Hind wing fuscous; cilia grayish with dark sub- terminal line. Legs buff to pinkish buff overlaid and banded with blackish fuscous. Abdomen fuscous above, buff beneath. aye 1953 Male genitalia—Harpe as figured. Uncus broad, rounded. Soci small pads with long, coarse setae. Aedeagus slender, with curved distal end and single lateral tooth. Female genitalia.—Ovipositor not shown; re- mainder as figured. Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 61486. Type locality—Putnam County, Ill. (July 3, 1943). CLARKE: NEW SPECIES fl OF OLETHREUTIDAE 229 Food plant—Sambucus canadensis L. Remarks.—Described from the type male and 5 male and 8 female paratypes all from the type locality. The dates range from May 20 to Septem- ber 4 (1939-1949). This species is difficult to distinguish from P. monotropana Heinrich on color and markings except that in monotropana the dark markings are clearer and the leaden scaling is smoother. pts sy LL". Z J Le Fras. la-6a.—New Olethreutidae from Illinois: Left harpes. (See explanation at end of text.) 230 JOURNAL OF THE The genitalia immediately distinguish the two. The aedeagus of monotropana is smooth, that of sambuci is armed with a single tooth. The fluted genital plate of sambuct immediately separates it ‘from monotropana. Exartema comandranum, n. sp. Figs. 5, 5a, 5b Alar expanse, 15-18 mm. Labial palpus pale buff; second segment with small fuscous spot exteriorly at base and with smoky suffusion exteriorly at apex; third segment almost wholly overlaid with fuscous. Antenna blackish fuscous overlaid with olivaceous almost entire length above. Head fuscous with some tawny scaling in front. Thorax and basal three- fifths of forewing olivaceous, the latter with some admixture of buff; tegula with suffused fuscous spot at base; posterior tuft of thorax dark vina- ceous-tawny; basal patch almost obscured by the olivaceous scaling and reduced to an oblique mark from basal angle to slightly before middle of cell; outer two-fifths of forewing dark vinaceous-tawny crossed by several irregular leaden-metallic lines; from middle of costa a short, wedge-shaped, out- wardly oblique, blackish-fuscous dash, the dark color almost obscured by vinaceous-tawny scales; on tornus a similarly colored spot; from vein 8, slightly beyond end of cell, to termen at vein 5, an oblique bar of the same color; entire costa marked with short, alternating dark and light strigulae; cilia leaden-metallic mixed with dark vinaccous tawny and fuscous and preceded by a fine blackish-fuscous and tawny line. Hind wing light mummy brown; cilia fuscous mixed with buff with a dark subbasal line. Legs buff over- laid and banded with fuscous. Abdomen fuscous this color nearly obscured by buff beneath. Male genitalia.—Harpe as figured. Uncus broad basally, tapering to a slender point. Soci small oval pads. Female genitalia—Ovipositor not shown; re- mainder as figured. Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 61484. Type locality—Putnam County, Ill. (June 11, 1942). Food plant—Comandra umbellata (L.) Nutt. Remarks.—Described from the type male and 12 male and 4 female paratypes all from the type locality. Dates of both reared and field collected specimens range from May 27 to July 31 (1941- 1943). In appearance comandranum reminds one of merrickanum Kearfott but lacks the conspicuous WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 subterminal spot and long, pale, oblique line of that species. The genitalia, however, indicate a closer affinity with EH. foedanum (Clemens) from which it differs by the shorter digitus and longer, stouter spine of Spe’, and the presence of a small but well-defined signum. Endothenia microptera, n. sp. Figs. 6, 6a, 6b Alar expanse, 10-12 mm. Labial palpus buff with some fuscous shading exteriorly on second segment; third segment al- most wholly fuscous. Antenna fuscous; scape paler. Head grayish with some light brown mixed on vertex. Thorax and ground color of forewing grayish fuscous with darker and ligher markings, the whole appearing mottled; thorax and tegula with narrow, transverse, buff bands; posterior tuft of thorax fuscous; basal patch, an irregular, median, transverse fascia and a slightly curved, transverse bar from vein 8, near end of cell, to vein 5 before termen, fuscous; dark markings separated by leaden-metallic fasciae and spots; on dorsum, about middle of wing, a leaden-metal- lic spot preceded and followed by a slender buff line; costa with three pairs of short buff strigulae before the dark transverse fascia and three pairs of similar strigulae beyond; cilia leaden-metallic preceded by a narrow fuscous subbasal line. Hind wing fuscous; cilia grayish with dark subbasal line. Legs buff, overlaid and banded with fuscous. Abdomen fuscous above, buff beneath. Male genitalia.—Harpe as figured. Uncus very broad, tuberculate. Cornutus one, small, with large bulbous base. Female genitalia.—Ovipositor not figured; re- mainder as shown. Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 61485. Type locality—Putnam County, Ill. (August 14, 1949). Food plant.—Unknown. Remarks.—Described from the type male and 3 male and 4 female paratypes all from the same locality. Dates range from June 12 to September 2 (1946-1949). In size microptera approaches E. conditana (Walsingham), to which it ismost nearly related. The markings of microptera are more pronounced than those of conditana, and the former has six pairs of fine, well-defined, buff strigulae on costa of forewing not found in conditana. The uncus of microptera is about twice as broad as that of conditana, the aedeagus is broader and shorter, and the cornutus is less than half the size. Hony 1953 EXPLANATION OF FIGURES Figs. 1-lb.—Eucosma uta, n. sp.:1, Left wings; la, left harpe; 1b, ventral view of female genitalia with ovipositor removed. Fies. 2-2b.—Epiblema naoma, n. sp.: 2, Left wings; 2a, left harpe; 2b, ventral view of female genitalia with ovipositor ‘removed. Fics. 3-3b.—Epinotia atristriga, n. sp.: 3, Left wings; 3a, left harpe; 3b, ventral view of female genitalia with ovipositor removed. CLARKE: NEW SPECIES OF OLETHREUTIDAE Dem Fics. 4-4b.—Polychrosis sambuci, n. sp.: 4, Left wings; 4a, left harpe; 4b, ventral view of female genitalia with ovipositor removed. Fics. 5-5b.—Ezartema comandranum, n. sp.: 5, Left wings; 5a, left harpe; 5b, ventral view of female genitalia with ovipositor removed. Fics. 6-6b.—Endothenia microptera, n. sp.: 6, Left wings; 6a, left harpe; 6b, ventral view of female genitalia with ovipositor removed. Fias. 1b-6b.—New Olethreutidae from Illinois: Female genitalia. (See explanation at end of text.) 2a2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 i ENTOMOLOGY .—Eight new Neotropical chrysomelid beetles (Coleoptera). Doris H. Buaxe, Arlington, Va. This paper is composed of the descrip- tions of eight new Neotropical chrysomelids, two from the West Indies, one from Peru, one from Mexico, and four from Costa Rica. Phaedon barberi, n. sp. Fig. 8 Between 6.5 and 7.5 mm in length, shortly and broadly ovate, moderately convex, shining, very finely punctate, pale reddish brown with black antennae, scutellum, and undersurface, except prosternum, and legs. Head broad and flat across vertex, surface polished and finely punctate, a faint median line connecting with a V line running down on either side to the antennal sockets, lower front short, finely punctate, tip of jaws dark. Antennae short, dark, the five basal joints narrow, remaining distal joints much thickened and compressed. Prothorax more than twice as wide as long, with the sides curving forward so as to conceal the eyes from the sides partially, a rather coarse punctation along the lateral margins to basal margin and on anterior margin behind the eyes, more finely punctate on disc. Scutellum dark. Elytra broad, convex, a distinct humeral callosity, surface shining, distinctly but not coarsely punctate, the punctures not striate but with a tendency to- ward striation. Body beneath and legs shining, often with a bluish or metallic luster, pro- sternum pale except in the middle about coxae. First abdominal segment not a great deal longer than second. Hind tibiae a little curved. Claws simple. Length 6.5-7.5 mm; width 4.6-5.5 mm. Type male and 9 paratypes, U.S.N.M. type no. 61616, collected by R. G. Oakley at Yauco, Puerto Rico, February 9 and March 28, 1933. In the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam- bridge, Mass., 5 paratypes from Yauco, Puerto Rico, collected by R. G. Oakley in April 1934, and 12 from Lares, Puerto Rico, collected by Oakley in April 1934. Remarks.—This, the second species of Phaedon to be described from the West Indies, is not en- tirely typical, not having striate-punctate elytra. Leucocera ferruginea Chevrolat from Haiti is similar in its ferrugineous coloration but has the pale yellow antennae typical of the genus as well as pale legs and undersurface, and is definitely striate-punctate. This is a species that had been set aside for future description by H. 8. Barber. Diabrotica neoallardi, n. sp. Fig. 4 About 6.5 mm in length, elongate oval, moder- ately shiny although alutaceous, the prothorax finely and the elytra coarsely punctate, the head, undersurface, femora, borders of the prothorax and elytra, and scutellum pale yellow, two piceous spots on the prothorax nearly covering the an- terior half, the elytra, except the margin, deep blue, tibiae and tarsi and antennae except the apical joints dark. Head pale, orange-yellow on top and yellow on the lower front, smooth, faintly shining, alutaceous, frontal tubercles clearly marked with a median depression above them. Antennae ex- tending below the middle of the elytra, very slender and hairy, third joint a little shorter than fourth, remainder subequal, dark, the three distal joints mostly pale. Prothorax a little less than twice as broad as long with curved sides and a somewhat curved transverse depression below the middle, finely alutaceous and distinctly punc- tate, pale yellow with two broad piceous areas covering most of the anterior half of the pro- thorax except the margin and curving down towards the basal angles. Scutellum pale. Elytra wider toward apex, with a wide explanate margin that is pale, dark blue over disc, densely and coarsely punctate and alutaceous, slightly pu- bescent at the apex and about the apical margin. Epipleura pale. Body beneath entirely pale yel- low, femora pale, tibiae and tarsi piceous and very hairy. Length 6.7 mm; width 3.4 mm. Type male, U.S.N.M. type no. 61617, col- lected by H. A. Allard at Tinga Maria, Peru, winter of 1949-50. Remarks.—Except for the unusual dark mark- ings on the prothorax, this species resembles a number of species of Diabrotica with dark elytra having a pale margin, but I have hunted vainly through the types of Diabrotica in the British Museum for one like it. D. albidocincta Baly from Brazil has a dark head and thorax with a pale margin, and the elytra are black. D. limbatt- pennis Baly is smaller and similar in coloring except for the prothorax. D. ciactipennis Baly also from Peru has deep blue or green elytra, and NEOTROPICAL CHRYSOMELID BEETLES BLAKE Huny 1953 |. Physi merus melanchimu s Fat 3.0xygona limbata ropoda fuscomacu lat a 2.. Hadi 4 Diabrotica neoallardi 8. Phaedon barberi Fics. 1-8.—New Neotropical Chrysomelidae. TPanchrestus denticollis 234 JOURNAL OF THE the prothorax has a dark vitta on each side. There is also a dark spot on the head. D. digna Gahan from Brazil is very shiny and without dark tho- racic markings. D. flavocincta Baly from Colombia has a black head and the elytra are parallel-sided with impunctate surface. D. flavomarginata Baly from Colombia has minutely punctate elytra. D. staudingeri Baly from Colombia, a larger species, has the lateral margin of the prothorax alone pale and is coarsely punctate. has collected a great many botanical and zoologi- cal specimens not only in Peru but elsewhere. There is already a D. allardi Jacoby from Mexico, named for another Allard. Ophraea maculicollis, n. sp. Fig. 5 About 4.5 mm in length, oblong oval, feebly shining under the short, pale, appressed pubes- cence, densely and coarsely punctate, black with the lower front of head, prothorax and basal part of femora pale, the prothorax with a_ black longitudinal spot on each side extending from the middle to the base. Head coarsely punctate, a median groove down occiput, space between antennal sockets feebly carinate, tubercles poorly marked, lower front from antennal sockets to labrum pale and like- wise punctate, mouthparts and rest of head dark, with fine pale pubescence not concealing puncta- tion. Antennae entirely dark, third joint longer than succeeding joints which are subequal. Pro- thorax just about twice as wide as long, sides rounded, almost angulate, depressed deeply on each side and in the middle near the anterior margin; densely and coarsely punctate, pale yel- low with a spot on each side from the middle to the base. Elytra elongate, parallel-sided, with sutural edges a little raised, coarsely and con- tiguously punctate, with each puncture having a flat reflecting bottom, so that the whole sparkles somewhat; a fine appressed pale pubescence, not concealing surface. Epipleura wide, coarsely punc- tate and pubescent and extending nearly to the apex. Body beneath shiny, black, except the prosternum and basal half of femora, claws toothed. Length 4.5-4.6 mm; width 2 mm. Type, U.S.N.M. type no. 61618, taken at San Francisco, Calif., March 20, 1939, on orchids from Mexico. A second specimen, also on orchids from Mexico was taken at Laredo, Tex., January 29, 1945. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 Remarks.—None of the eight species described by Jacoby from Mexico and Central America, which constitute all the species previously known in the genus, has markings such as occur on the thorax of this species, although one, O. opaca, has a broad median black stripe, and O. subcostata has a broad central black band. Oxygona limbata, n. sp. Fig. 3 Between 8 and 9 mm in length, oblong oval, shining yellowish brown, the antennae, tip of jaws, legs, breast and abdomen, and the elytra except for suture and lateral margins deep red- dish brown, almost piceous. Head rounded and polished over occiput with a median groove down the front to the tubercles, the tubercles rounded and swollen, the interanten- nal area below them rather depressed without much trace of a carina, jaws large and dark. Antennae long, slender and dark, third joint shorter than fourth, joints 4 to 7 subequal, distal joints a little shorter. Prothorax more than twice as broad as long with curved sides and prominent toothing at anterior and basal angles, surface faintly alutaceous and very finely punctate with a row of coarser punctures along lateral margin, pale yellowish brown with faintly deeper brown traces of a transverse fascia. Scutellum reddish brown. Elytra broader than prothorax, shining, finely punctate, deep reddish brown, with the suture and lateral edges pale yellowish brown; epipleura pale. Body beneath shining, the breast, abdomen and legs deep reddish brown verging on piceous. Length 8-9 mm; width 2-4.5 mm. Type male and 2 paratypes female, U.S.N.M. type no. 61619, collected on Solanum torvum, Guadalupe, Costa Rica, May 25, 1936, by E. Marin. Remarks.—This is the third species of the genus to be described from the North American Continent. The dark color pattern of the elytra differs from the pale-yellow-colored O. acutangula Chevrolat, and O. bifasciata Jacoby, the second one from the North American Continent, is banded. O. adumbrata Clark, from the Amazon River, has the elytra clouded with dark ferru- gineous except at the margin, but the femora in this species are pale. _ Panchrestus denticollis, n. sp. Fig. 7 About 6.5 mm in length, broadly oblong oval, JuLY 1953 faintly shining reddish brown under a yellowish brown pubescence, the head and _prothorax coarsely and densely punctate, the elytra less coarsely and striately punctate, the antennae pale with joints 7 to 11 much thickened and dark; prothorax with three sharp lateral teeth on each side, hind tibiae appearing double spurred at apex. Head with interocular space a little more than half width of head, coarsely and densely punctate over occiput and with short yellow-brown pub- escence, frontal tubercles prominent with a deep groove between, space between antennal sockets wide and a little produced, this carina very short, a triangular depression below over labrum, the lower front unusually short, labrum large. Antennae not very long, basal joints pale, first and third longest, sixth joint shorter and thinner than fourth or fifth, about the length of second joint, joints 7 to 11 dark, very hairy, and fully twice as wide as basal joints. Prothorax short compared with the elytra, not twice as wide as long, moderately convex with an oblique depres- sion below the middle on each side, the sides 3-toothed, the sharp apical angle forming one tooth, the second below this before the middle, and the third not so sharp at the basal angle; the surface of the dise contiguously and coarsely punctate and with short erectish yellow brown pubescence, much rubbed in this specimen. Scu- tellum densely pubescent. Elytra much wider than prothorax, moderately convex and shining beneath the vyellowish-brown suberect pub- escence, the pubescence in this specimen probably rubbed from the central portion but on the sides and the apex the hairs tending to mat together at the tips forming little cone-shaped tufts. Striate punctures not coarse but darker in color- ing and toward the apex becoming somewhat mdistinet. Epipleura broad and extending nearly to the apex. Body beneath and legs shining red- dish brown, the posterior femora much thickened and with considerable yellowish-brown pubes- cence, posterior tibiae short and straight, end- ing in a sharp spur with another inserted before the end, the posterior first two tarsal joints thinner and shorter than the corresponding ones in the anterior legs. Anterior tarsal claws ap- pendiculate, with the basal tooth sharp. Length 6.5 mm; width 3.3 mm. Type, U.S.N.M. type no. 61620, collected on the western slope of the Irazu Volcano, Costa Rica, 1,500 to 2,000 meters, by T. Assmann, on April 30, 1926, from the Nevermann collection. BLAKE: NEOTROPICAL CHRYSOMELID BEETLES 235 Remarks.—The Rev. Hamlet Clark’s Cata- logue of Halticidae, part 1, has been criticized by both Jacoby and Weise because of the numerous genera that he has made. Anyone who has ex- amined the Neotropical Oediopodes is struck by their great diversity of form and the difficulty of cataloguing them under a few genera. Bowditch! wrote of attempting “to squeeze’? a number of species that he was describing into Clark’s genera, but apparently with no great faith that they belonged in those genera, rather than de- scribe any new genera. So I am placing this very distinct species under Clark’s Panchrestus, chiefly because Clark in describing P. pulcher from the Amazon wrote of that species as having a toothed prothorax and with the antennal joints much thickened and darker toward the end. This tooth- ing of the prothorax is unusual, and I know of no other species with it in this group. Hadropoda fuscomaculata, n. sp. Fig. 2 About 4.5 mm in length, oblong oval, faintly shining, pale yellow brown with pale yellowish pubescence, the elytra with a reddish brown area from the humerus across to the suture and down, a reddish-brown spot below in the middle and one near the margin halfway down the elytra. Head entirely pale, the interocular space about half the width of the head, occiput coarsely and densely punctate with a thin median ridge and on either side a ridge from near the eye to the tubercles, tubercles well defined, a narrow carina between antennal sockets running down the lower front, lower front long. Antennae pale brown, not extending much below the humeri, fourth joint longer than third and subequal to fifth and sixth, remainder shorter. Prothorax a little wider than long with nearly straight sides slightly con- stricted near the base, a seta-bearing nodule at each corner, disc uneven, the anterior middle being convex and below on either side with a hollowed out depression, surface densely and moderately coarsely punctate and with short fine pubescence. Scutellum reddish brown. Elytra much wider than prothorax, rather flat and with- out callosities or depressions, with moderately coarse striate punctures, faintly shining under the short pubescence, pale yellow-brown with reddish-brown spots, a brownish area from the 1 Bowditch, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. 41: 498. 1915. 236 JOURNAL humerus to suture and down, another spot slightly below in the middle and another on the side at the middle of the elytra; epipleura pale and wide and extending nearly to the apex. Body beneath pale, shining, lightly pubescent, the hind femora with more pubescence and greatly thickened, hind claw inflated. Length 4.6 mm; width 2.2 mm. Type, female, U.S.N.M. type no. 61621, taken at Miami, Fla., from a plane from Natal, Brazil, via Puerto Rico, January 15, 1943. Remarks.—Although there is no definite lo- eality for this beetle, the fact that it came from a plane that flew from Natal, Brazil, to Florida by way of Puerto Rico makes it pretty certain that the beetle came aboard in the neighborhood of the West Indies, and quite probably Puerto Rico, as it is a typical Hadropoda, a group of beetles that so far has been found only in the West Indies. It differs from any of those pre- viously described in its elytral markings. H. calua Blake, from the Dominican Republic, is a little smaller beetle with somewhat similar spot- ting but has longer antennae. Hylodromus clarki, n. sp. Fig. 6 About 4 mm in length, elongate oblong oval, very shiny, deep reddish brown with pale yellow anterior legs, hind femora reddish brown, paler at apex and on underside, antennae with the first eight joints deep brown, rest paler, joints 3 to 6 much enlarged; elytra finely striate punc- tate with coarser punctures in the depression below the basal callosity, hind femora with a prominent nodule in middle of lower surface and a tooth below that. Head with large protuberant eyes, the inter- ocular space about half width of head, occiput shining reddish brown, a single puncture in middle and a fovea on either side, frontal tu- bercles swollen, a deep groove above and _ be- tween them; antennal sockets very close and the space between them slightly carinate, this swell- ing very short and not extending down the lower front, the lower front short, labrum wide. An- tennae more than half the length of the beetle, joints 3 to 6 enlarged to twice the width of the first two and longer than the basal joint, joints 7 to 11 abruptly narrowed and short, joints 1 to 8 dark brown, 9 and 10 pale, 11 light brown. Pro- thorax seareely a third wider than long with large basal and apical toothing and concave OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 | sides narrowly margined, disc a little depressed in basal part, shining deep reddish brown, finely punctate. Scutellum a little deeper brown than the reddish-brown elytra, elytra with prominent humeri and deep intrahumeral depression, also a broad and deep depression below the basal callos- ity, finely and striately punctate except in the de- pression, toward the apex and on sides the pune- tures becoming faint and disappearing. Epipleura broad and extending nearly to apex. Body be- neath shining reddish brown, the anterior pairs of legs and underside and apex of hind femora pale yellow, hind femora with a prominent nodule at the middle on lower side and below this a tooth, hind femora slender, bowed and long, nearly glabrous, at the tip ending acutely and with a spur, thus making it appear two spurred, claw joint inflated. Length 4.3 mm; width 2 mm. Type male, U.S.N.M. type no. 61622, collected at Hamburgfarm, Reventazon, Ibene Limon, Costa Rica, on March 28, 1930, by F. Never- mann. Remarks.—I have not examined Clark’s spe- cies H. dilaticornis from the Amazon River, on which the genus Hylodromus is based, but have seen a cotype of H. basalis Jacoby from Panama. Possibly neither Jacoby’s species nor mine be- longs in Clark’s genus, in which the third to sixth antennal joints are dilated and flattened and in which the body is pubescent. In the first two species the antennal joints are dilated but not flattened, and the beetles are shining and nearly glabrous except for a few scattered hairs near the apex and along the apical margin and, as Jacoby himself stated, resemble a great deal Homam- matus nitidus Clark except for the antennal dila- tion and the peculiar curvature of the hind tibiae which is present in all three species. Whether Jacoby’s and my species are congeneric with Clark’s or not, I do not see any reason why Weise? should synonymize Hylodromus with Euphenges, and I hereby reestablish Clark’s genus Hylo- dromus and dedicate this species to him. H. basalis Jacoby closely resembles H. clarki but differs somewhat in coloring, having a darker head and prothorax. There is some difference in the color of the antennal joints, also; in H. clarkz the first eight instead of seven joints are dark. H. basalis also has a wider and deeper intra- humeral sulcus and stouter, more pubescent hind tibiae. 2 Weise, Ark. for Zool. 14: 153. 1921. JuLY 1953 Physimerus melanchimus; n. sp. Fig. 1 About 5 mm in length, oblong oval, shining black beneath the fine appressed pubsecence, prothorax narrow, constricted before the base, with a median callosity anteriorly, elytra with a basal callosity on each side of the scutellum, coarsely and striately punctate, the pubescence with paler areas in the form of traces of vittae and an interrupted fascia in the apical half. Head entirely black with large eyes, interocular space scarcely half the width of the head, occiput coarsely punctate and with a fine median ridge and on either side a groove from the eye to the tubercles, tubercles swollen, carina between an- tennal sockets short and narrowly produced, lower front long with large mouthparts. Antennae with third joint longest, joints 3 to 5 deep brown, joints 6 to 8 black and thicker, joints 9 to 11 brown and thin. Prothorax as long as wide with a tiny seta bearing nodule at each corner, con- stricted before the base, a callosity in middle anteriorly and a depression on each side below this near base, surface entirely dark, covered SETZER: A NEW HEDGEHOG FROM AFRICA 237 with fine appressed pubescence. Scutellum dark and pubescent. Elytra considerably wider than prothorax, entirely dark except for the pale pu- bescence in the pattern of interrupted vittae and an interrupted fascia below the middle in apical half, shinmg beneath the pubescence, rather coarsely striate punctate, the interstices raised in slight costae, a callosity on each side of the scutellum with a depression below it; epipleura black and shiny and wide to the apical curve. Body beneath shining black, with a light pub- escence except on the hind femora that are more pubescent, hind claws inflated. Length 4.4-5 mm; width 2—2.2 mm. Type male, U.S.N.M. type no. 61623, Las Mercedes, Costa Rica, October 30, 1922, from the Nevermann collection. One other specimen, a female, collected by N. L. H. Krauss at El Valle, Panama, January 1947. Remarks.—The antennae of this species, in having joints 6-8 thickened, resemble the anten- nae of Homammatus ntidus Clark, an entirely glabrous species that is much more robust. MAMMALOGY.—A new hedgehog from Africa. HENRY W. SerrzerR, U. S. National Museum. In cooperation with the United States Naval Medical Research Unit No. 3 and the Chicago Natural History Museum, studies have been started on the mammals of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan and Egypt. As a result of these studies the hedgehog from the Sudan has been found to differ from the kinds known to inhabit adjacent areas. It is with great pleasure that I name this in- teresting mammal for J. 8. Owen, District Commissioner, Torit, Equatoria Province, Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, who did so much to make the field work of the Unit a success. All measurements are in millimeters, and the capitalized color terms are from Ridg- way’s Color standards and color nomenclature. Erinaceus (Atelerix) pruneri oweni, n. subsp. Type.—Chicago Natural History Museum, no. 67047, adult female, skin and skull, from Torit, 2,000 feet, Equatoria Province, Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. Obtained April 9, 1950, by Harry Hoog- straal, original no. 5478. Specimens examined.—Seven, all from Torit. Distribution Known only from the type lo- eality. Diagnosis—Spines of upper parts longitu- dinally striated and marked with the following pattern: Army Brown followed successively by a band of pure white (2 to 4 mm), a band of Army Brown shading into black (5 to 6 mm), a band of grayish white (2 to 4 mm), and a black base (2 to 4 mm); a few spines are entirely white. The ears and the muzzle to immediately behind the eyes Olive Brown; dorsal surfaces of hands and feet Snuff Brown with a generous admixture of white hairs; mystacial vibrissae black; forehead, should- ers, sides of body, upper parts of limbs, and belly with pure white hairs. Palms and soles naked; hind foot four toed. Skull robust; rostrum rela- tively narrow; width across zygomatic arches relatively small; nasals rather wide and long; lambdoidal crest moderately developed; upper molars relatively massive. Measurements of type specomen.—Total length 215; length of tail 24; length of hind foot 32; 238 JOURNAL OF THE length of ear 29; condylobasal length of skull 43.9; length of palate 25.2; width of rostrum at level of infraorbital foramen 11.6; length of nasals 13.1; least width behind postorbital processes 11.4; width across zygomatic arches 26.7. Comparisons.—Erinaceus prunert owen differs from Erinaceus prunert hindet, as known from Ulukenia Hills and Kapiti Plains, British East Africa, as follows: Dorsal color somewhat darker but hands and feet lighter; rostrum decidedly narrower and longer; width across zygomatic arches less; nasals wider and longer; occipital region more nearly perpendicular; lambdoidal crest, in animals of comparable age, more de- veloped; molars more robust; P? decidedly larger; postpalatal bridge less developed. No specimens of Erinaceus pruneri atratus are available, but from the description, H. p. owent is lighter in color and larger in all measurements taken. Also, it is apparent that Erinaceus prunert WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 prunerv is different in that the area immediately below the eye is white whereas in F. p. owen this region is dark. Remarks.—There is some variation in color of these specimens, but this is probably owing to the manner in which the skins have been prepared. If the spines are laid flat in preparation the general tone, as observed from above, is a smoky color; if the spines are semierect the color is darker. Another contributing factor is the amount of pigment on the tip of the spines. If this is slight the general effect is lighter and conversely if there is a relatively wide band at the tip the color ap- pears darker. The only immature specimen in the series is decidedly darker in color than any of the adults. In all specimens except one, the maxillary bone touches the nasal on each side for at least 1.5 mm. All the specimens were obtained in savanna type country between January 7 and April 9. @bituary Ipa ALBERTINA BENGTSON.—A pioneer woman of science passed away on September 6, 1952. Born in Harvard, Nebr., on January 17, 1881, of parents who were Swedish immigrants, Ida A. Bengtson received a liberal education which led toan A.B. degree from the University of Nebraska in 1903. In those days few women were interested in the physical and biological sciences, and these subjects were not among Ida Bengtson’s interests. She majored in languages and mathematics. She was elected to Phi Beta Kappa. Shortly after graduation she came to Wash- ington to be a cataloger in the library of the U.S. Geological Survey. She became acquainted with one of the few women who at that time held Federal Civil Service positions in science. She compared her own professional life with that of her friend and decided that for her the life of a scientist would be more interesting than that of a keeper of scientific books and records. In Ida Bengtson ideas led to action. She re- signed from the U. 8. Geological Survey in 1911 and entered the University of Chicago to study bacteriology, with chemistry and physiology as minor subjects. She received the M.S. degree in 1913; held a university scholarship for two years; and received the degree of Ph.D. in 1919. After a year as bacteriologist in the Chicago Depart- ment of Health, she was appointed in 1916 to be an assistant bacteriologist in the Hygienic Labo- ratory (now designated the National Institutes of Health) of the United States Public Health Serv- ice, with an annual salary of $1,800. She was the first woman of science in U.S.P.H.S. Low as her entrance salary appears when compared with those of the present time, it was very good in those days. Dr. Bengtson told about the astonish- ment among her professors and fellow graduate students when she, a woman, received so attrac- tive an appointment. Within the next 20 years, eight or ten more women entered the Hygienic Laboratory as scien- tists. In obtaining their positions it was well for all of them that the pioneer woman, who by that time was a senior bacteriologist, was filling her position so ably. In scientific investigation Dr. Bengtson was painstaking and thorough; her conclusions were conservative. In teamwork she was capable and amicable. She was a good teacher, and for a few weeks annually for many years she had oppor- tunity to exercise that talent as one of the in- structors of the orientation class of incoming medical officers. Other evidence of her ability Sumy 1953 as a teacher remains in the competent dieners at the National Institutes of Health who were so fortunate as to receive training under her. Dr. Bengtson was the sole or senior author of many papers, most of which were published in Public Health Reports or in bulletins of the Hygienic Laboratory or National Institute of Health. She published a number of papers on miscellaneous bacteriological subjects, most of them appearing during the early years of her career. She made a prolonged study of three subjects: (1) anaerobes and their toxins; (2) trachoma, (3) rickettsial diseases. Dr. Bengtson’s work on anaerobes and their toxins covered two periods. During the earlier period (1920-1923) Clostridium botulinum was of especial interest to her. In the course of these studies she experienced the thrill of discovery when she identified a new variety, “‘C,” of the organism, which she obtained from a culture grown from larvae of the green fly, Lucilia caesar. The toxin was responsible for an outbreak of paralytic disease (limberneck) in chickens. Dur- ing the later period (1934-1939) she carried on basic studies which led to the establishment of the official U. S. and international units for standardizing the antitoxins specific for the four toxins most commonly involved in cases of gas gangrene—those produced by Clostridium per- fringens, C. oedematiens, C. septicum, and C. histolyticum. In 1924 Dr. Bengtson went to Rolla, Mo., to study the etiology of trachoma in the U. S. Public Health Service Trachoma Hospital. It was a difficult problem, not yet solved. The seven years spent in Rolla were marked by a slowing in the publication of scientific papers. The experi- ence in Rolla was, however, a good preparation for Dr. Bengtson’s later assignment, because among the various organisms which she con- sidered as a possible causal agent of tra- choma were the rickettsia. In 1937, as a member of the “‘typhus unit,” the study of rickettsial diseases became Dr. Bengt- son’s major assignment. This unit was comprised of a team which studied the rickettsial diseases of Rocky Mountain spotted fever, endemic and epidemic typhus. Later, ‘‘Q”’ fever and Tsut- sugamushi disease (scrub typhus) appeared and were included in the studies. An important problem for the bacteriologist in the study of rickettsial diseases was to find a OBITUARY 239 method of growing the organisms free of tissues in quantities sufficient for making serological diagnostic tests. In 1938 Herald R. Cox of the U.S.P.H.S. Rocky Mountain Laboratory discov- ered that the yolk sac tissue of the developing chick embryo provided a suitable medium for prolific growth of rickettsiae. Dr. Bengtson was in a position to put this discovery into immediate practical use, and she entered into the most productive period of her career. She modified the complement fixation test (a serologic test) adapting it for the detection and differentiation of rickettsial infections. It was also of great value in the study of serum from man and from rats (a species which harbors the typhus virus) for the purpose of detecting past infec- tions. Dr. Bengtson’s technique is now in wide use. She had done some of the early work in the tissue culture of typhus rickettsiae which was of great importance in the subsequent development of the vaccine which played such an important part in the protection of our troops against typhus, one of the major wartime diseases. As World War II progressed the demands upon Dr. Bengtson increased, with many questions constantly being raised regarding rickettsial in- fections in the Armed Forces. Dr. Norman Topping, who was chief of the Rickettsial Unit during World War II praised her in these words: “Dr. Bengtson was an indefatigable worker, a true disciple of the scientific method, and loyal to her country, her institution and her col- leagues.”’ She retired in 1946. Dr. Bengtson was a member of numerous scientific organizations including Society of American Bacteriologists; Society for Experi- mental Biology and Medicine; American Associa- tion for the Advancement of Science (fellow); Washington Academy of Sciences; Sigma Xi. She was president of the Washington Branch of the Society of American Bacteriologists in 1943— 44, and Councilor from the Branch to the Na- tional $.A.B. during 1945 and 1946. She was awarded the Typhus Medal of the American Typhus Commission in 1947. During the period of her greatest scientific activity, Dr. Bengtson found diversion on her farm, which with its big house of colonial archi- tecture is beautifully located in the foothills of the Blue Ridge Mountains of Virginia. She was 240 endowed with great endurance, and after a week of heavy duty she could turn with equal facility and skill to the management of her 370 acres. Although she had not had previous experience of living on a farm, she had inherited a love of the land from a long line of Swedish ancestors. During the ten years of her ownership she converted the status of her farm from nonproductive to pro- ductive. She was interested in historic homes and JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 7 made many trips around the country to see them, especially during garden week. Ida Bengtson was gentle, pleasant, friendly, rather reserved; she had a keen sense of humor which she tried to keep hidden, but a faint twinkle in her eyes usually gave her away. Her death brought sorrow and a feeling of deep loss to her friends. AuicE C. Evans. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences USAIN I eno vials oe Osis pais hn da oe bb F, M. Setzier, U. 8. National Museum RP PCHECIEEL. «5 oc dst ee be ete ees F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards LS ELE G0. 5 Sha, eae Jason R. Swauien, U.S. National Museum RECOSUTCT. ..2..... Howarp 8S. Rappers, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired) TESS JoHN A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haratp A. REHDER, U.S. National Museum Vice-Presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: iPadesopuieal society of Washington...................0..0ce cece ees A. G. McNisu Anthropological Society of Washington. .................... Wiuiiam H. GILBERT Biolozies! society of Washington...................-..3-- Hucu Tuomas O’NEILL @hemical Society of Washington. .....................05: Grorce W. IrRvING, JR. Buraumelorieal society of Washington. .................. 00s ee nese eee F. W. Poos MinamualGecorraphic Society............... 02sec cece ee eee ALEXANDER WETMORE Reomo-des) paciety of Washington..................5.seeecaeness A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................. FREDERICK O. CoE PMD EIISEOLICA! OOCICLY ... 0.6... ec ee ce etn e eed GILBERT GROSVENOR beramieatpeciety of Washington............2.....5662.000 Harry A. BorTHWICK Washington Section, Society of American Foresters......... .GEORGE F. GRAVATT Memmmienon pociety Of Hnpgincers....... 2.2.22... eee ep eee ee eee C. A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers. .ARNoLD H. Scott Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers RicHarpD 8. DILu Helminthological Society of Washington........................5. L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists.......... GLENN SLOCUM Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... FLtoyp W. HoueH Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers....... HERBERT GROVE DORSEY District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers ; Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Section, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine N. R. Eviis Washington Chapter, American Society of Metals............. JoHN G. THOMPSON Elected Members of the Board of Managers: (oo 8 oi s%6 062 See Sara HE. Branyam, Mitton Harris 05 LLG 0 LLC gS ae R. G. Bates, W. W. DIEHL Ln he LOG ee ene ee re M. A. Mason, R. J. SEEGER MEO EOMGGCTS..........-.---.-22-00- All the above officers plus the Senior Editor pm nariers and Associate Bditors...............00ccescucnnnescs [See front cover] Executive Committee................64. F. M. Serzuer (chairman), F. M. DEFANDORF, J. R. SwaLuen, H.S. Rapreteye, W. W. RuBey Committee on Membership...... EK. H. Waker (chairman), Myron §S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE Cottam, C. L. Crist, JOHN Faber, ANcus M. Grirrin, D. BREESE JONEs, FRANK C. Kracexk, Louis R. Maxwetu, A. G. McNisu, Epwarp C. REINHARD, REESE I. Sarner, Leo A. SHinn, Francis A. SmitH, Heinz Specut, Horace M. Trent, ALFRED WEISSLER Commuitiee on Meetings................. Watson Davis (chairman), Joun W. ALDRICH, AusTIN CuarRK, D. J. Davis Committee on Monographs (W. N. FENTON, chairman): EAM BE ora acu La scale pce ed bales Va ae Pats S. F. Buaxes, F. C. Kracex SU MATER Ao GD Sane clave, dus Gadd steed a «l6-4 3p W.N. Fenton, ALAN STONE emo 1956. 5. 2 see ce cede G. ARTHUR CoopPER, JAMES I. HOFFMAN Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (A. V. ASTIN, general chairman): ° For Biological Sciences...... HERBERT FRIEDMANN (chairman), Harry A. Bortu- WICK, SARA EK. BRANHAM, IRA B. HANSEN, BENJAMIN SCHWARTZ, T. DALE STEWART For Engineering Sctences...... SAMUEL LEvy (chairman), MicHarEL GOLDBERG, E. H. Kennarp, E. B. Roserts, H. M. Trent, W. A. WILDHACK For Physical Sciences...... G. B. ScouBAUER (chairman), R. 8. Burtneton, F. C. Kracex, J. A. SANDERSON, R. J. SEEGER, J. S. WILLIAMS For Teaching of Science..M. A. Mason (chairman), F. E. Fox, Monrore H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research............... Karu F. HerzFevp (chairman), HERBERT N. Eaton, L. E. Yocum Committee on Policy and Planning: Peer eriary 1954 ke eek eee eee H. B. Couturns, W. W. Rusey (chairman) SuMMPREME RIN oe asc kw ig «3s tome vein wl ws 80 x L. W. Parr, F. B. SILSBEE i 2D a ee ee ee E. C. CritTENDEN, A. WETMORE Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPHERSON, chairman): (od UCT ee en eae J.M. Catpwe tt, W. L. Scumitt PME UTEEPR Vere oi) hepa e oc ols idle he Wee's weed A. T. McPuerson, W. T. Reap 2 LEE) 0 eee a a AusTIN CuarK, J. H. McMILLEN memmrnrrave ainicouneny of A. ALAS. occ bcs kc waa ca cee obec tee eace Watson Davis Committee of Auditors....... Loutsse M. Russet (chairman), R. 8. Drut, J. B. REEsSIDE Committee of Tellers...... C. L. Garner (chairman), L. G. HEnspest, Myrna F. JONES CONTENTS PALEONTOLOGY.—A new species of Carinocrinus from Oklahoma. Har- RELL L. SPRIMPLE. . .. 6 6-2 bas cs nee ee ee Botany.—Studies of South American plants, XIII. A.C.SmirH..... Myco.tocy.— Development of Pythium debaryanum on wet substratum. CHARLES DRECHSLER, - 5. eicss 266 aba cle ne ces eee 2 Entomo.tocy.— New species of Olethreutidae from Illinois (Lepidop- tera). J..F. Garms Coarge. 02.2 we ee ENToMOLOGY.—Eight new Neotropical chrysomelid beetles (Coleop- tera). Doris Hy BLAKE... 2... 00000224. dee oe Mammatocy.—A new hedgehog from Africa. HENRY W. SErzer.... Opnrruary.—Ida Albertina. Bengtsson. .....522...........- eee This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. 237 VoL. 43 Aucust 1953 No. 8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS J. P. E. Morrison JOHN C. EWERS R. K. Coox U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. CHacsg, JR. ELBERT L. LITTLE, JR. ZOOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrMan Puitie DRUCKER CHEMISTRY ANTHROPOLOGY Dean B. CowiE Davip H. DUNKLE PHYSICS GEOLOGY ALAN STONE ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royaut & GuiLrorp AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourRNat is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices Sapna | Copies 4 pp. i: 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $650 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.50 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26 .00 32.50 7.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 10.50 400 13.00 26 .00 39.00 52.00 65.00 14.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subsertption Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year. .....-.....-.---=--5255eeee $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vet Per Number Vol. i to vol. 10, inel —not available* 3" 4 ee — — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 42, inel.) available for sale to libraries at $356.00. Monocraps No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann. $4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13. (1899-1911) complete..................... 62s $25.00 Single-volumes, unbound. 246 os... RSs ok ee ee 2.00 Single numbers................ Bilis a GEOR chee ele tue SS ee .29 Missing Numbers will be replaced ‘ithout charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences” and added to the Treasurer, H.S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12, D Exchanges.—The Academy does not a its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 43 August 1953 No. 8 PHYSICS.—Looking ahead in mechanics.! WALTER RAMBERG, National Bureau of Standards. Mechanics is an old science. It derives its name from the Greek word for machine, unxavn,’ where the ‘‘machine’”’ may be any means for applying forces to a_ body. Mechanics was the science to Kepler when he described the motion of the heavenly bodies. It was the science to Newton when he explained these motions by his universal law of gravitation. Mechanics was _ the science to mathematicians and physicists like Euler, Lagrange, Cauchy, Poisson, Green, and Lord Kelvin, who worked out the relations between loads and displace- ments in elastic bodies (ref. 1, p. 1-31), and the propagation of waves in elastic media, including the elastic ‘‘aether’”’ which filled the void between the stars and transmitted the vibrations of light between them ac- cording to the physicists of a hundred years ago (ref. 2, p. 89-103). Mechanics ushered in the _ industrial revolution with Watt’s steam engine, Stephenson’s locomotive, and Fulton’s steamship. It continued to advance man’s productivity and to speed him and _ his goods ever faster from place to place during the last half of the nineteenth century, but it gradually lost to electricity its hold on the imagination of the young. It could not match the speed and agility of the electron in carrying messages around the globe in one-fifth of a second and in carrying out commands of infinite variety with practically no inertia or delay. The age of the electron started with Morse’s telegraph in the 1840’s, and it is still with us. Its position as the ‘“‘prima donna” of the sciences has not been challenged until a 1 Retiring address as President, Washington Academy of Sciences. Presented before Academy on February 19, 1953. 241 few years ago when the nucleus showed its explosive possibilities. Mechanics is taken for granted today by the public, and it is remembered by its shortcomings rather than by its accomplish- ments. It is remembered when an airplane crashes because of mechanical failure or when our advance into the “‘push-button”’ age is delayed because we do not have the materials which retain their strength and rigidity at the high operating temperatures contemplated for some of the engines and missiles of the future. These mechanical failures and _ short- comings have made us painfully aware of the need for keeping research in mechanics abreast of that in the other branches of the physical sciences. They illustrate once again the interdependence of the physical sciences, the fact that no one branch can advance far without requiring added support from the other branches. As one who has been interested in research in mechanics for most of his professional life, I propose to review briefly present trends in the mechanics of solid materials and structures and to extrapolate these trends for some years ahead. We all know the dangers of extrapolation, but as human beings we all share a passion for forecasting the future, whether it 1s about a better world or about the outlook in our _ pro- fession. NEW MATERIALS Let us consider new materials first. Man’s state of civilization is often charac- terized by the materials from which he fashions his tools and armor. We speak of a stone age, a bronze age, an iron age. The iron age extends into the beginning of 242 JOURNAL OF THE our century. It has not come to an end, but aluminum alloys have shown that they can provide a lighter structure than steel alloys. Today we have aluminum alloys which are more than four times as strong as structural steel of the same weight. These alloys have acquired a monopoly position in the struc- tures of aircraft and they are invading other fields of engineering formerly reserved for steel. We now have busses, railroad cars, ships, tall buildings, and even _ bridges constructed of aluminum alloys. The alu- minum alloys with their density of 2.7 are being jostled at the lower end of the scale of densities by the magnesium alloys with their density of 1.8. These alloys have already proved their advantages in applica- tions such as airplane passenger seats, the skin of high-speed research airplanes, and liquid fuel tanks, in which adequate flexural rigidity as well as strength at minimum weight is required. We may expect an extension in the use of magnesium alloys as better alloys are developed which will equal the best aluminum alloys in values of strength-weight ratio as well as flexural rigidity-weight ratio. Densities still lower than 1.8 are possible with structural plastics. There were those who expected that these plastics would revolutionize airplane construction with the coming of the brave new world after the end of World War II. They have been disappointed. Structural applications have been confined to a few types of small air- craft in which most of the wing, fuselage, and tail structure consists of panels molded from reinforced plastic, and to certain special cases such as airplane canopies and radomes in which adequate structural strength had to be combined with other requirements such as transparency to light and to radio waves. However, it must be emphasized that plastics are making a vital and growing contribution to the structural performance of aircraft in a very different manner. Plastics in the form of synthetic adhesives of surprising strength, adhesion, and sta- bility have been developed for the bonding of metals to metals as well as metals to non-metals (3). These adhesives have made possible the so-called “sandwich construc- tion”? (4) in which two thin sheets of high WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 8 strength metal are bonded to a light weight core to form a stiff plate. This is used as a structural element in the control surfaces in flooring, and in other places on aircraft. Synthetic adhesives of British manufacture have been used extensively in England to replace rivets on aircraft resulting in definite savings in weight and corresponding gains in performance. An example of this is the “Comet” jet-propelled airliner (4). Perhaps the greatest disappointment of all new materials to date has been the beryllium alloys. L. B. Tuckerman pointed out in a remarkable paper about 18 years ago (6) that structural materials regardless of density had roughly the same value for the ratio of Young’s modulus to density E/p, with the one notable exception of the berylium alloys. Fig. 1 is a plot of values of EF and p for the materials con- sidered by Tuckerman and for a good many other materials besides. It is apparent from the figure that, with the exception of quartz, E/p for beryllium is more than four times as great as for the other ma- terials. Apparently the beryllium alloys should be favored over all other materials for applications where high rigidity at minimum weight is paramount. The quantity E/p is also the square of the velocity of longitudinal sound waves in the material. Hence beryllium is singularly favored as an element in dynamic pickups in which the speed of response is limited by the speed of sound in the material. We may expect many applications for beryllium for small parts requiring high rigidity at minimum weight if it becomes available at relatively low cost and ina workable condition. In the meantime there is a great demand for beryllium be- cause of its excellence as an alloying element with copper to produce spring materials with a‘’wide elastic range and because of its importance as a neutron source in atomic-energy work. Steel alloys retain their position in engine parts subjected to temperatures which are too high for aluminum with its relatively low melting point. But even there new materials such as the titanium alloys (7) challenge its position. Titanium takes the lead in the challenge with a density of only 4.5 as compared to 7.9 for iron and with a Aueust 1953 D 1S) “ eS. RAMBERG: LOOKING AHEAD IN MECHANICS 243 50 vA Ss ax 7 «RA ‘© 40 | S Be 2 > Ni_alloys 3 JO Fe alloys ae = a °To pe, = i Monel “Pr S es 20g Quartz ” Cu alloys aes = °7/ *Pd Dd S Gh lz ; ‘i Ve a S/O BOO ee Peel Mg. Al alloys oO Sn ood —.Concrete ° Pb O Plastics i \ l O Ol O02 O3 O4 OS O6 O7 O8 Density, Ib/in> Fig. 1.—EHlastic modulus and density for solid materials. melting point of 3300°F as compared to 2800°F for iron. Ores containing titanium in combination with other elements are plentiful and the cost of producing the metal has dropped from $1,000 per pound to $5 per pound during the past five years. Titanium alloys are available now with a tensile strength of about 65,000 lb/in? at 800°F, which is comparable, on a strength- weight basis, to the tensile strength of special steel alloys for service at elevated temperatures, Fig. 2. Alloys of iron, nickel, and cobalt, such as 2400 Ceramels Ceramics Temperature, F O 20 40 stellite and hastelloy, have been developed (Fig. 2) which retain some strength and rigidity at temperatures as high as 2000°F. (8). For example the tensile strength for stellite (9) is reported as 28,000 Ib/in? at 1800°F. An intensive search is going on for materials which retain some strength and rigidity at temperatures as high as 2500°F. It appears that the most promise in this field hes with the ceramels or cermets. These are sintered mixtures of powdered ceramics and metals. The ceramic provides Cobalt Base Alloys Hastelloys Austenitic Steels Nickel -Chrome Alloys Stainless Steels Titanium Aluminum Alloy Low Corbon Stee/s 60 80 Tensile Strength, OAT SO Fia. 2.—Static tensile strength of structural materials used at high temperatures. 244 the strength at high temperature and the metal is added to give the combination some ductility. Cermets have been re- ported (/0) which have a tensile strength as high as 14,000 lb/in? at a temperature as high as 2200°F. We may count on great advances in this field as we learn more of the mechanism of adhesion and cohesion in sintered materials, as more combinations of materials are tried, and as better tech- niques of fabrication are developed. NEW METHODS FOR DETERMINING PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS Until a few years ago it seemed adequate to describe a material mechanically by its Young’s modulus, or stiffness in tension, its yield strength, or stress at which it begins to flow appreciably, its ultimate strength, or stress for fracture; the elongation in two inches preceding fracture in tension or ductility. Today materials are used under conditions of two-dimensional stress, low temperature, high temperature, vibration and impact, and more complicated me- chanical properties must be determined. A generally adequate description of static behavior of metals at room temperature is obtained from the complete tensile stress- strain curve and the compressive stress- strain curve up to stresses well beyond the yield strength. The tensile and compressive stress-strain curves should coincide for an isotropic material; the difference between the two can be taken as a measure of anisotropy. For isotropic materials the stress-strain relations in states of combined stress can be estimated on the assumption that the octahedral stress-strain curve is independent of hydrostatic pressure (//). This condition has been verified for a number of materials (12, 13, 14) which were loaded under combined stress and in which the ratio of principal stresses was kept constant during the test. It is not valid if the direction of the principal stress is changed during the loading (ref. 13, p. X9-X138). A knowledge of the compressive stress- strain curve is of practical importance for estimating the buckling strength of columns and plates. The buckling strength is gen- erally proportional to an effective modulus (15) which is a known function of the tangent modulus or slope of the compressive JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 8 stress-strain curve of the material, the Young’s modulus or initial slope, and, in the case of a column the shape of cross section. Approximate values of tangent modulus can be obtained for many materials by approximating the stress-strain curve with a simple formula involving three constants (16, 17). Fig. 3 indicates that this formula gives a very good approximation even to stress-strain curves with a relatively sharp ‘“‘knee”’ beyond the elastic range. The ductility of the material is a property which is only roughly described by the elongation over a prescribed gage length. In most materials the elongation is con- centrated in the region of fracture and hence the percentage elongation increases rapidly with decreasing gage length (18). Measure- ments of local elongation and of strain distribution over local regions have been made possible by photographing accurately prepared networks, or ‘‘photogrids” (79) on the surface of the specimen in its unstrained / De Ee € Fria. 3.—Comparison of experimental values of strain e plotted against stress o for 248-T alu- minum alloy (indicated by A) with computed curve (indicated by heavy line). Computed curve is obtained by inserting in formula given on figure values of E equal to the initial slope of the stress- strain curve and values of K, n obtained from the intersection with the empirical stress strain curve of lines with slopes equal to 0.85E and 0.70E respectively (see ref. 16). August 1953 Fie. 4.—Photogrid around circular hole in tensile specimen at load near fracture load (ref. 20). state and observing the distortion of the network after straining the specimen up to fracture. It is likely that this technique will be exploited in the future to study strain distributions near points of strain concentration, such as that around a hole in a tensile specimen (20) illustrated in Fig. 4. The dynamic behavior of materials at room temperature covers a much greater range of properties and only spot checks are possible. The elastic constants of solids under very rapid (adiabatic) loading are practically identical with those under static (isothermal) loading (2/). Hence these constants may be determined either from static strain measurements in the elastic range or (sometimes more rapidly and conveniently) from the frequencies of known modes of vibration (22). The dynamic test has the advantage of giving, in addition, another property of the material, its internal friction or internal damping capacity. This may be computed from the logarithmic decrement of the vibration, from the half- width of the resonance curve, from the peak of the resonance curve, or from the decay of a pulse of ultrasonic vibrations. The ultrasonic pulse technique is being RAMBERG: LOOKING AHEAD IN MECHANICS 245 studied in many laboratories because of its possibilities for studying the polycrystalline structure of metals as well as determining elastic constants and internal friction at elevated temperatures. As a result of this activity we can count on advances leading to improved apparatus and to more reliable interpretations of the sometimes puzzling patterns of pulses and their echoes on the recelving screen of the cathode ray tube. Pronounced differences between static and dynamic behavior will appear as we go up along the stress-strain curve. Methods for testing metals under controlled rates of loading or of straining have been developed (23), but the technique is still in its infancy and there is a need for better methods which will give the stress-strain curve under dynamic conditions. Several difficulties must be overcome and these difficulties will in- crease as we go to very high rates of strain- ing, rates of straining that become com- parable to the velocity of propagation of plastic strain waves in the material (24, 25, 26, 27). In the case of some important materials, such as mild steel we have to cope, In addition, with the phenomenon discovered by Clark and Wood (28) that yielding may require the application of the load over a definite and appreciable interval of time. Other materials, including certain plastics and rubber (26), show “memory” and “recovery” effects. The tests so far made indicate that the yield strength under dynamic conditions may greatly exceed the static tensile yield strength (26, 29) and that the material may be less ductile than under static conditions. Particularly great differences between static and dynamic behavior are found for the ultimate strength of metals. Metals may be “fatigued” to fracture under re- peated loads at a stress as little as 40 per cent of the static tensile strength of the material. The fatigue crack or fracture originates, in general, in a region of stress concentration due to a flaw, hole, scratch, notch, or other discontinuity. The basic nature of the fatigue phenomenon is still a mystery. Fatigue seems to start by forming dislocations (30) on a submicroscopic scale. After many cycles of loading the dislocations grow and coalesce into minute cracks. 246 JOURNAL OF THE Only the last stage of the failure is visible. During this last stage one or more of the small cracks spreads through the structure, unless stopped by a reduction in stress, until the structure breaks completely. Repeated loads are common in _ the operation of modern machinery, perhaps more common than steady loads, and fatigue failure has become the most common type of failure in service. It is also the most ageravating since the “‘fatigue strength” of a structure cannot be predicted from the fatigue strength of the material with the same accuracy as the static strength of a structure can be predicted from the static strength of the material. The fatigue strength of materials is estimated by subjecting a large number of specimens to alternating axial stress, bending stress, or torsional stress of constant amplitude and determining the number of cycles to failure for each amplitude of stress. The tests are time-consuming in that they require far more specimens than static tests and usually more testing time per specimen. An appalling amount of fatigue testing is going on in the mechanical testing laboratories of the earth, but the data obtained from these tests do little more than tell us that one material has greater or smaller fatigue strength than another. The data tell us little of the mechanism of fatigue failure and they do not answer the practical question of how to predict fatigue failure in a structure from the fatigue strength of the material. The engineering fraternity is much disturbed by this shortcoming in our testing tech- niques and much work is under way to study the phenomenon of fatigue failure on the one hand (3/) and to devise new fatigue tests, which can be tied in with service conditions (32), on the other. We can hope to see within the next decade or two, methods for determining fatigue dam- age on a given material and methods for accelerated fatigue test. We can expect to see more methods for fatigue tests under variable stress amplitude, under combined stress, and in the presence of a known stress concentration. At least as puzzling as the fatigue strength of materials is their strength under shock loads. These are defined as loads which WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 8 vary appreciably during a time interval comparable to the time required by elastic waves to spread through the body. Shock loads, like alternating loads, may lead to premature failure at a point of stress con- centration. The resistance of materials to shock loads is usually determined from the energy required to fracture, by transverse impact, a specimen with a standard notch (Fig. 5) such as a Charpy, an Izod, or a Schnadt specimen. The mechanics of this test is complicated and unsuitable for analysis. There is a need for the develop- ment of a shock test with a much more clearly defined state of stress. The range of properties of materials of interest is increased if operating tempera- tures other than room temperature have an important effect. At low temperatures cer- tain metals such as mild steel (33) and zinc become brittle and notch sensitive. This property is usually determined by tear tests on specimens with prescribed notches (34, 35) or by transverse notched-bar impact tests on notched bars over a range of tem- peratures. Brittleness at low temperature shows up in transverse impact tests by a rapid transition from appreciable values of impact energy to very low values as the temperature is decreased. Unfortunately, Wy Fic. 5.—Transverse impact specimens: 4a, Charpy; b, Izod; c, Schnadt. AuGust 1953 the “transition temperature” indicated by these tests depends not only on the ma- terial, but also on the stress concentration around the notch. It rises, in general, with increasing stress concentration (36). At elevated temperatures creep appears as an additional material property to confound the user of metals. Creep can be disregarded in measurements at elevated temperatures only if the strains are applied very rapidly. This puts a premium on the determination of elastic constants at high temperatures by measurements of natural frequency of a mode of vibration or of the speed of propagation of ultrasonic pulses (37). Under more sustained loads the strain due to creep may be comparable or even greater than the strain produced by the first application of the load. Creep like fatigue is a field where a great deal of test- ing has been done but, so far, it has not been possible to fit these data into a theory which would enable one to determine the creep in a structure from the load-time- temperature program of the structure and the creep properties of the material. Most creep tests are made today in tension and in torsion (ref. 38, pp. 45-49). These have generally shown three stages of creep, Fig. 6, a first stage of rapid transient creep, a second stage of sustained linear creep, and a third stage of accelerated creep to failure. In the field of creep, as in the field of fatigue, we may expect distinct advances during the next decade both in our understanding of the phenomena and in the development of accelerated creep tests and tests in the presence of stress gradients. In all this work of determining the properties of materials under combined stresses, at elevated temperatures, under oscillatory loads and under impact loads, one is faced with the problem of eliminating the effects of other variables such as varia- tions in properties and dimensions of nominally identical specimens, variations in testing machines, and differences in the technique of the persons making the tests. Careful selection of the specimens and careful planning of the test schedule are required to eliminate the effect of the extraneous variables as far as_ possible. Statisticians have been concerned with RAMBERG: LOOKING AHEAD IN MECHANICS 247 t Fic. 6—Schematic of strain e due to creep under constant load as a function of time f. this problem of ‘‘randomizing” tests for some years and they have worked out definite procedures (39, 40). The possi- bilities of obtaining adequate test results with fewer specimens by these statistical procedures are being realized increasingly. Ultimately they should lead to the consult- ing of statistically trained engineers in the planning stages of any extensive test pro- eram on properties of materials. NEW METHODS OF DESIGN Design can be regarded as the utilization of material with known properties to ac- complish a given task such as the transmis- sion of known forces in the operation of a piece of equipment or structure. The structure is designed efficiently if its weight is reduced to a minimum compatible with adequate performance throughout its serv- ice life. Efficient design is. important in bridges, vehicles, and ships, but it is of paramount importance in aircraft where every pound of structural material saved adds a pound to the pay load. The needs for precise stress analysis in aircraft design are responsible for most present-day ap- plications of the theory of elasticity and they have inspired a phenomenal growth in the number of new contributions to elastic theory and in the number of text books and treatises on this subject. Most present day design is based on the assump- tion that the material is elastic and follows Hooke’s Law, tempered by the recognition that high stress concentration near points of contact and around notches will be reduced 248 by local yielding at these points. Stress analysis under these conditions is the principal topic in textbooks on the strength of materials. It is a major activity in the design offices of aircraft companies, bridge builders, and structural designers in general. It has the supreme virtue of linearity so that the stress components due to various systems of loads can be superposed. This makes it possible to build up complicated solutions from simple elements and makes it convenient to apply computing machines, which are adapted most readily to the solution of linear systems. Linearity disappears as we leave the elastic range and go into the plastic range. It is not surprising, therefore, that we are only beginning to cope quantitatively with plastic yielding in structural design. The foundations were laid by Nadai (4/) in his classic book on ‘‘Plasticity’’ published twenty years ago. Most present day ap- plications are confined to an ideal plastic material which is elastic up to the yield strength and then yields indefinitely at that stress (Fig.7). Fortunately for structural engineers, structural steel approaches this idealized stress-strain relation. Thus it has been possible to take account of certain types of plastic yielding in steel structures by the “limit design” or “plastic hinge design’ procedures of Van den Broek (42), J. F. Baker (43), Wm. Prager (44), and their associates. By these methods it is now possible to estimate the capacity of steel frame structures to sustain loads and to absorb energies during explosions (45) far in excess of those given by the conventional linear stress analysis. A particularly suc- cessful example of ‘‘plastic hinge” design is the Morrison air raid shelter constructed in large numbers in Great Britain during World War II. This consists of a 2.5 by 4 by 6.5 ft. box framed by angle section beams rigidly joined at the corners and covered with a )<-inch steel plate on the top and with a mesh of steel wires or strips on the bottom and the sides. The shelter is designed to withstand not only collapse against the loads imposed by falling debris but also against permanent deflection be- yond a point at which the occupants of the shelter would be in danger of being crushed. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 8 é Fic. 7.—Stress strain curve for ideal plastic material. Reference 46 contains descriptions of spec- tacular instances in which this shelter saved lives by behaving plastically as intended during the destruction by bombing of the house in which it was located. The theoretical bases for estimating plastic flow and fracture in more compli- cated and more general cases have been studied thoroughly by a group of mathe- maticians working under Prof. Wm. Prager’s direction at Brown University (47). A great deal of experimental work must be done during the next few years to test their conclusions and to make them of practical use for design. Design procedure may be affected bas- ically by this work on plastic flow of solids in so far as it has shown that it is shear stresses rather than tensile stresses that are primarily responsible for deformation. Shear stresses are more important in the elastic range as well. Hetenyi (48) has pointed out how much more damaging shear stresses are than normal stresses in the contact and friction between two solid bodies and he has even proposed an ingenious procedure for estimating stress concentration factors around notches in elastic rods under axial load by considering the shear stresses only. All this may lead ultimately to a shift from tensile stress to shear stress as the principal quantity to be computed in the stress analysis of structures. Further complications appear in design when we bring in time as a variable in de- signing against creep, as in a turbine oper- ating. at elevated temperature. In such machines it is essential that the creep during the lifetime of the machine should be small Aueust 1953 enough to maintain a safe clearance be- tween stationary and moving parts. Design against creep is generally based on the rate of creep during the second or “‘linear’’ stage (Fig. 6). More refined methods taking account of the transient creep during the first stage have been proposed by Nadai (49) and Odqvist (50). We may expect further development along these lines during the coming years since creep will become of increasing importance as materials have to be used at temperatures closer to their melting point. This will create a demand for design procedures which allow for creep under tensile, compressive, and combined stresses, and in the presence of stress con- centration. But the greatest advances in design procedures are to be looked for in the design against fatigue failure, i.e., failure under alternating loads. Service failures have taught us the very important lesson to avoid as far as possible any stress concentra- tions by a notch, a hole, or sudden change in section as these might favor the initia- ation of a fatigue crack. However, we are still far from a quantitative understanding on which a design procedure could be based, except for isolated cases such as ball and roller bearings (52). As mentioned above we know too little about the factors _ that control the start and the finish of the fatigue crack. We know that both are subject to large statistical variations even under ideal laboratory conditions. In service the conditions are far from ideal and there are large uncertainties in the loads to which the structure is subjected. It is clear that the difficulties are great, but the challenge of working out an adequate method for design against fatigue failure is perhaps the greatest challenge in mechani- cal design, since fatigue failures predominate among mechanical failures in service. An adequate design procedure against fa- tigue failure would have to start from a knowl- edge of the loads imposed on the structure during its service and would consist of computing the response of the structure to these loads and then estimating its “‘life”’ in the presence of this response. Strain, acceleration, and displacement pick- ups for measuring loads in service are coming RAMBERG: LOOKING AHEAD IN MECHANICS 249 on the market in increasing numbers.. A prodigious volume of data under service conditions is being accumulated with these pickups. These data remain to be digested, with the help of statistics, to give an ade- quate picture of loads in service. Fortunately, the picture looks brighter when it comes to computing the response of a structure to impact loads. The procedures in this field have been well developed thanks to the work of Biot (43), Bisplinghoff (53), and others (4, 55). The problem is treated as one more case of the transient response of a structure regarded as a linear system (56). The re- sponse is usually computed in terms of the normal modes of vibration of the system which are excited by the impact. This in turn has put a new incentive behind the solution of normal modes by rapidly con- verging numerical methods such as the matrix iteration method of Duncan and Collar (57). A tremendous field remains to be cultivated to accomplish the last phase, the estimate of the life of the material under the imposed cycles of stress. I have mentioned the application of statistics in the design against fatigue failure. There are many other applications of statistics in design. Statistics should be used in estimating the probable life of a structure just as it is used to estimate our personal life span for the computation of our life insurance premium. Statistics provides the only rational basis for estimating margins of safety against failure. For ex- ample, it enables one to’ estimate the probability of failure of a part subjected to loads P with a scatter described by p,(P) oe Fic. 8—Schematic distribution p; of load P acting on structural element in service and dis- tribution ps of strength P of element. 250 when the strength of the part under this type of load is described statistically by p(P), Fig. 8. The probability of failure in a given period of time is then proportional to _ are | Pi | | Pe uP | dP. ‘0 0 Statistics provides the only sound estimate for the probability that a given complicated mechanism, such as a missile, consisting of elements each with their own characteristic scatter of properties, will function as a whole in service. For all these reasons we may expect a large scale invasion of design procedures by statistical considerations. Designers in general should become con- scious of the basic function of statistics in placing their estimates on a sound basis, properly related to the scatter in the external loads and in the properties of the material. I have said nothing about one class of design problem that has fascinated mathe- maticians, physicists, and engineers from the days of Euler in 17938, that is, the problem of instability, whether static as in columns or dynamic as in flutter. This problem will continue to engage the attention of the best brains among us and we can count on specific solutions for much more complicated structures as the new high speed computing machines are drafted for the laborious computations that are involved (58). Solu- tions by the mathematical theory of elas- ticity for the stresses at the base of notches (59) or near a hole in a shaft or structure have taken on added practical value with the realization that these stresses are a major factor in determining fatigue strength. Another class of problems which has not been mentioned, but which is nevertheless on the minds of the best analytical talent in mechanics is that of the nonlinear phe- nomena in mechanics. Von Karman has given an excellent exposition of some of these problems and of the special techniques developed to cope with them in his notable paper entitled ‘““The engineer grapples with nonlinear problems” (60). Practically any physical phenomenon becomes nonlinear as one refines its analysis beyond the first approximation. The elastic stress-strain re- lation becomes nonlinear when the strains JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 8 are no longer negligibly small compared to 1, as in the case of rubber. Resonant vibra- tions frequently lead to amplitudes that are far from infinitesimal, consequently the resonance curve may deviate greatly from the classical shape based on the linear theory. Phenomena such as the buckling of thin shells, the bowing of a violin string, water hammer, the galloping of a trans- mission line loaded with sleet, can not be explained even qualitatively without taking account of the nonlinear relation between the exciting forces, restoring forces, and friction forces involved. Nonlinear phenom- ena plague us also in the analysis of control systems which have small but definite amounts of backlash or play in them. Very few of these problems can be solved with any generality because of the nonlinearity and complexity of the equa- tions for the problem. A great deal of numerical computation is usually required to get a specific solution for a given set of conditions. The more general solutions con- fine themselves to questions such as the determination of boundaries between stable and unstable operation in a given system (61). The chances for general analytical solu- tions are diminished still further if we deal with problems which require more than one differential equation for their description. An example is the phenomenon of plastic impact (62) in which we have to deal simultaneously with advancing and re- flected waves, which cannot be super- posed as in the elastic range. In such problems we can expect little more, for years to come, than specific solutions by numerical methods of specific relatively idealized cases which can be checked in the laboratory. I have said nothing about an entirely different field of design, the field of bio- mechanics. Biomechanics appears uncon- sciously in all our thinking because we have through thousands and tens of thousands of generations adapted ourselves to the me- chanical forces about us such as the force of gravity. As stated so eloquently by d’Arcy Thompson (63): Gravity not only controls the actions, but also influences the forms of all save the least of or- Aueust 1953 ganisms. The tree under its burden of leaves or fruit has changed its every curve and outline since its boughs were bare, and a mantle of snow will alter its configuration again. Sagging wrinkles, hanging breasts and many another sign of age are part of gravitation’s slow relentless handiwork. We realize that modern civilization 1m- poses upon man forces that were unknown to him three generations ago, and we know that these forces are sometimes too much for him. We can predict that the field of biomechanics is in for a great expansion because the designers of modern equipment, particularly aircraft operating at high speeds and accelerations, are becoming increasingly concerned with man’s limitations as the guiding operator in a machine, his finite time of response, the limits to his vision, his finite dimensions, his need for oyxgen, his abhorrence of acceleration, and his many other limitations as a pilot. TESTS The development of a new design must be accompanied by tests at many stages along the way to check on the predictions of the analysis which is based on simplifying assumptions. The first tests are made on coupons cut from the material to determine mechanical properties. Next there are tests of simple components of the structure, the simple beams, struts, plates, hinges, to check on the stress distribution and strength of these elements. Faper base Felt covering | | | | RAMBERG: LOOKING AHEAD IN MECHANICS 251 A vigorous new field of engineering, termed experimental stress analysis, has organized itself during the past ten years to cultivate the many special techniques re- quired for this purpose. For many years photoelasticity was the leading technique for the experimental stress analysis of ele- ments that were too complicated for a theoretical stress analysis. Strain gages, such as the Tuckerman strain gage, were used to measure strains on the structure itself particularly in cases in which photoelastic models could not be used because of the limitation of photoelasticity, as then known, to two-dimensional states of stress inside the elastic range. Unfortunately, strain gages were usually too limited in number and too cumbersome to be used at many points of a structure. All this changed with the arrival of the wire strain gage about ten years ago. The wire strain gage (Fig. 9) is nothing more than a fine wire which is glued to the structure and is strained along with the structure. The wire changes resistance in proportion to the strain and this change in resistance may be amplified and recorded. The wire strain gage is small, light, and inexpensive. It may be fastened by the hundreds to a compli- cated structure to measure strain on that structure as it 1s proof loaded. Its lightness and consequent lack of inertia together with its electrical output makes the wire strain gage a nearly ideal pickup for dynamic lead-in wire Strain-sensitive wire, dia.= O.OO/” Fic. 9.—Construction of wire resistance strain gage. 252 JOURNAL measurements, such as strain and vibration measurements, on engines in operation, on aircraft in flight, on structures under im- pact. It is not surprising, in view of all these advantages that the consumption of wire strain gages is of the order of magnitude of one million per year. The wire strain gage has a few serious shortcomings. Its output is small and re- quires expensive apparatus for amplifica- tion. Its resistance changes appreciably over long periods of time because of creep in the bonding medium. The resistance of most wire strain gages changes with changes in temperature. No adequate method is known to calibrate an individual gage and hence establish the precision with which strain is measured with it. Most gages fail to func- tion at elevated temperatures, again because of creep in the bonding medium. Investiga- tions are under way here and abroad to improve the wire strain gage in all these respects and to develop gages which can be used far beyond the elastic range. Evapo- rated coatings of carbon and of metals are being studied (64) because of their promise to provide us with strain gages of very large output and gages which will function at high temperatures. Major improvements are also well under way in the field of photoelasticity. It is possible now to determine stress distribu- tions for three-dimensional as well as two- dimensional states of stress by using the “freezing technique” (65). Some years ago Hetenyi (66) tried out this technique on an important three-dimensional problem, the stress distribution in bolts with various threads. Recently Leven (67) and Frocht (68) showed that excellent results can be obtained with the technique using certain relatively inexpensive new plastics. Qualitative surveys of strain distribution on structural elements are often possible by coating the element with a brittle lacquer (ref. 38, pp. 636-662) and observing the crack pattern in the lacquer as the element is subjected to load. We can count on im- provements in this technique and its ex- tension to strain surveys at high temper- atures as the characteristics of existing coating materials are controlled more closely and as new ceramic coatings are tried out (69). OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 8 After checking on the structural elements, these are assembled into more complicated structures, such as built-up beams, airplane wings and fuselages. The structures generally undergo a proof test, usually under static loads to check on the design up to that stage. Certain structures such as landing gear of aircraft are drop-tested; others sub- ject to vibration in service, are tested under alternating loads for 50,000 or more cycles to indicate any weaknesses which might lead to premature fatigue failure. Finally the complete’ structure is assembled from its major components and it goes through a series of tests under service conditions. We have the shake-down cruises for ships and test flights for aircraft to show up weaknesses that escaped notice in the laboratory tests. Some weaknesses will not develop until after a long period of service. Hence a careful investigation should be made of any failures in service of a structure, such as an abplane, a crankshaft or a ship’s hull, in order to prevent similar failures in the future. The failed structure should be examined for clues which might establish the sequence of causes and effects leading to the failure. Tests should be made on the parts to check the structure for weaknesses in the material or in the design. The value of this sort of autopsy is being realized increasingly and several collections (41, 70, 71) of typical service failures have been assembled to aid the engineer in this detective work. Service failures have been traced down occasionally, though rarely, to internal cracks or flaws in the material. This, in turn, leads to a demand for inspecting a large number of similar structures for the pres- ence of flaws. Inspection is possible today by several techniques, leading among them is the magnetic powder method (72), radiography (73) with high voltage X-rays or other sources of penetrating radiation, and the use of ultrasonic pulses (74). Many of the inspection methods, such as the magnetic induction method to inspect tubes for flaws (75), have found their way into the producers’ plants and their adoption has, no doubt, greatly reduced the number of cases in which failures can be traced to faulty material. As mentioned earlier, the most common mechanical cause of failure AucGust 1953 appears to be not faulty material, but in- adequate design against fatigue failure. CONCLUSION We have seen that mechanics is far from being a dead science. It has many frontiers and many problems to solve. Most of the problems come from the demands of combat. It was that way from the time of the first bowman through Leonardo da Vinci to the present day of conflict on a global scale. However, the benefits of mechanics tran- scend the immediate needs of war. They are at the basis of our prosperity. The war planes of yesterday lead to the passenger planes to today. Lamé’s (76) equations for designing gun barrels to withstand the internal pressure of the powder blast pro- vided us with a basis for designing pressure vessels of other types for use by the chemical industry. The solution of almost any war- time need may bear fruit someday in peacetime. It is for this reason that most of us working in the field of mechanics feel that we have a real part to play in bettering the material standards of our civilization, even though most of our salaries may come directly or indirectly from the demands for national defense. REFERENCES (1) Love, A. E. H. The mathematical theory of elasticity, 4th ed. Cambridge University Press, 1934. (2) Bucktey, H. A short history of physics. London, 1929. (3) De Bruyne, N. A., anp Houwink, R. (ed). Adhesion and adhesives. Amsterdam, 1951. (4) Sandwich Construction for Atrcraft: Part 4, Fabrication, inspection, durability and re- pair. Issued by Subcommittee on Air Force- Navy-Civil Aircraft. Design Criteria of the Munitions Board Aircraft Committee, 120 pp. Washington, 1951. (5) Povey, H. Planning and production methods used in the construction of the De Havilland Comet. Journ. Roy. Aeron. Soc. 55: 459- 517. Aug. 1951. (6) TuckeRMAN, L. B. Aircraft materials and testing. Edgar Marburg Lecture. Proc. Amer. Soc. Test. Mat. 35: (pt. 2): 46 pp. 1935. (7) The Titanium Seminar. Report of Engineer Research and Development Laboratories, 95 pp. Fort Belvoir, Aug. 1952. ° (8) Van Ecuo, J. A., Pacs, L. C., Srmumons, W. C., Cross, H. C. Short-time creep properties of structural sheet materials for RAMBERG: LOOKING AHEAD IN MECHANICS 253 aircraft and missiles. U.S. Air Force Tech. Rep. 6731 (pt. 1): 65 pp. Aug. 1952. (9) Preston, D. Exploratory investigation of high temperature sheet materials. Amer. Soc. Test. Mat. Preprint 85. 1952. (10) Boprowsxy, A. R. The applicability of ceramics and ceramels as turbine blade ma- tervals for the newer aircraft power plants. Trans. Amer. Soc. Mech. Eng. 71: 621-629, 1949. (11) Napatr, A. Theories of strength. Amer. Soc. Mech. Eng. Trans. App. Mech. 1(8): 111- 129. 1933. (12) Oscoop, W. R. Combined stress tests on 24 S-T aluminum alloy tubes. Journ. Appl. Mech. 14: A1l47—A153. June 1947. (13) DruckER, D.C. Stress-strain relations in the plastic range—A survey of theory and experiment. Brown Univ. Rep. Contr. N7onr-358 T.O.I. NR-041-032. Dec. 1950. (14) RaMBERG, W., AND MILLER, J. Stress-strain relation in shear from twisting test of an- nulus. Nat. Bur. Standards Journ. Res. 50: 2, R.P. 2389. Feb. 1953. (15) TrmosHEenKo, 8S. Theory of elastic stability: 156-165, 384-390. New York, 1936. (16) RamBere, W., and Oscoop, W. R. Descrip- tion of stress-strain curves by three param- eters. Nat. Adv. Comm. Aeron. Tech. Note 902: 13 pp. July 1948. (17) Osacoop, Witt1aM RR. Stress-strain formulas. Journ. Aer. Sci. 13 (1): 438-48. Jan. 1947. (18) Miiier, James A. Stress-strain and elonga- tion graphs for Alclad Aluminum alloy 24S- T 86 sheet. Nat. Adv. Comm. Aeron. Tech. Note 2094: 31 pp. May 1950. (19) Brewer, GIvEN A., and Guassco, RoBERT B. Determination of strain distribution by the Photo-grid process, Journ. Aer. Sci. 9(1): 1-7. Nov. 1941. (20) Miuuer, JAMES A. Improved photogrid tech- niques for determination of strain over short gage lengths. Proc. Soc. Exp. Stress Analysis 10(1): 29-34. 1952. (21) Poyntine, J. H., and THomson, J. J. 302-3805. London, 1906. (22) Fine, M. E. Dynamic methods for deter- mining elastic constants and their tempera- ture in metals. Symposium on Determina- tions of Elastic Constants. ASTM Special Tech. Publ. 129: 43-67. 1952. (23) CLARK, DE S:, and Duwzz, PB. BE: The-in- fluence of strain rate on some tensile proper- ties of steel. Proc. Amer. Soc. Test. Mat. 50: 560-576. 1950. (24) Duwnz, P. E., and Cuark,D.S. An experi- mental study of the propagation of plastic deformation under conditions of longitudinal umpact. Proc. Amer. Soc. Test. Mat. 47: 502-522, discussion 523-532, 1947. (25) CAMPBELL, W.R. Determination of dynamic stress-strain curves from strain waves in long bars. Presented before Soc. Exp. Stress Analysis, May 1951 (to be published). (26) Kousky, H. An investigation of the mechani- Heat: cal properties of materials at very high rates of loading. Proc. Phys. Soc. (B) 62: 676- 700. 1949. (27) CAMPBELL, J. D. An «investigation of the plastic behaviour of metal rods subjected to longitudinal impact. Journ. Mech. and Phys. Solids 1: 1138-1238. Jan. 1953. (28) (CLARK, D. S.,e9nGd) WooD, 5D). so: he time delay for the initiation of plastic deforma- tions at rapidly applied constant stress. Proc. Amer. Soc. Test. Mat. 49: 717-737. 1949. (29) CaMpBELL, W. R. Dynamic stress-strain curves for mild steel using the tangent modu- lus procedure. Journ. Washington Acad. Sei. 43: 102-103. 1953. (30) Macuuin, E. 8. An application of disloca- tion theory to fracturing in fatigue. Proc. A.S.M. Chicago Seminar 1947: 282-289. Cleveland, 1948. (31) Pererson, R. E. Review of the fatigue of materials field. Rev. Appl. Mech. 5: 1-3. amie 1952: (32) Smita, F. C., Howarp, D. M., Smits, Ira, and HarRwELu,R. Fatigue testing machines for applying a sequence of loads of two ampli- tudes. Nat. Adv. Comm. Aeron. Tech. Note 2327. March 1951. (33) WittiamMs, M. L. Brittle fractures in ship plates. Nat. Bur. Standards Cire. 520 on Mech. Prop. Metals at low Temp.: 180- 206. May 1952. (34) Kaun, Noan A., and ImBempo, Eit A. Notch sensitivity of steel evaluated by tear test. Welding Res. Suppl. 14(4): 1538-1658. April 1949. (35) VANDERBECK, R. W., and GENSAMER, M. Evaluating notch toughness. Welding Journ. 29(1): Research Suppl.: 378-488. Jan. 1950. G6) Sioun, who De and MecGramyomtinws = itive meaning and measurement of transition temperature. Welding Journ. Res. Suppl. 27 (6) : 2995-3028. 1948. (37) SCHNEIDER, Witiiam C., and Burton, CHARLES J. Determination of the elastic constants of solids by ultrasonic methods. Journ. Appl. Phys. 20: 48-58. Jan. 1949. (88) Heteny1, M. Handbook of experimental stress analysis: 1077 pp. New York, 1950. (39) CocHRAN, WM. G., and Cox, GERTRUDE. Experimental designs: 454 pp. New York. 1950. (40) Witson, E. B., JR. An introduction to scientific research: 375 pp. New York, 1952. (41) Napat,A. Plasticity. New York, 1931. (42) VAN DEN Broek, J. A. Theory of limit de- sign: 144 pp. New York, 1948. (43) Baxer, J. F., RopEericx, J. W., and Horne, M. R. Plastic design of single bay portal frames. Brit. Weld. Res. Ann. Rep. FE 1/2: 24 pp. Aug. 1947. (44) Symonps, P. 8., and Pracrer, W. Elastic- plastic analysis of structures subjected to JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 8 loads varying arbitrarily between prescribed limits. Journ. Appl. Mech. 17(3) : 315-323. Sept. 1950. (45) Newmark, N. M. Analysis and design of structures subjected to dynamic loading. Univ. Illinois Civ. Eng. Studies, Struct. Res. Ser. 37. Nov. 1952. (46) Baker, J. F. Plasticity as a factor in the design of war-time structures. The Civil Engineer in War, Inst’n. of Civil Engineers, 3: 30-52. London, 1948. (47) Prager, Wiuuiam. Recent developments in the mathematical theory of plasticity. Journ. Awol. Phys. 20(3): 235-241. Mar. 1949. (48) Herenyr, M. Investigation of the effects of surface shear loadings. Techn. Inst. North- western Univ. Interim Report. July 1952. (49) Napai, A. Strain hardening and softening with time in reference to creep and relaxation in metals. Amer. Soc. Mech. Eng. Advance Paper 50- A121 for meeting Nov.—Dec. 1950, 24 pp. (50) Opevist, F. K. G. Influence of primary creep on stresses in structural parts. Paper presented before 8th International Con- gress for Applied Mechanics, Istanbul, August 1952. (51) Svrarr or BatTTreELLE Memorial INSTITUTE. Prevention of the failure of metals under re- peated stress. New York, 1941. (52) LunpBERG, G., and PanmMGREN, A. Dynamic capacity of roller bearings. Acta Polytech- nica 96: 32 pp. 1952. (53) Brot, M. A., and BispuincHorr, R. L. Dy- namic loads on airplane structures during landing. Nat. Adv. Comm. Aeron. War- time Report W-92. Oct. 1944. (54) RamBerc, Wattrer. Transient vibration in an airplane wing obtained by several meth- ods. Journ. Res. Nat. Bur. Standards 42: 437-447. 1949. (55) Pian, T. H. H., and Fiomensort, H. I. Analytical and experimental studies on dy- namic loads in airplane structures during landing. Journ. Aeron. Sci. 17: 765-774. 1950. (56) Levy, SamuEL. Computation of influence co- efficients for aircraft structures with discon- tinuities and sweepback. Journ. Aero. Sci. 14(10) : 547-560. Oct. 1947. (57) Duncan, W. J., and ConuAn; AS Boe method for the solution of oscillation prob- lems by matrices. Phil. Mag. 115: 865-900. May 1934. (58) Levy, S. Influence coefficients of tapered cantilever beams computed on SEAC. Journ. of Appl. Mech. 20(1): 131-133. March 1953. (59) Neuser, H. Kerbspannungslehre. Berlin, 1937. (See also Translation 74, David Tay- lor Model Basin, 180 pp. Nov. 1945.) (60) Karman, Tu. von. The engineer grapples -with non-linear problems. Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 46(8) : 615-683. Aug. 1940. (61) Minorsxy, N. Introduction to non-linear | Avueust 1953 mechanics. David Taylor Model Basin Re- ports 534, 546, 558, 564. 1944-46. (62) tee BH; and Woir, H. Plasive wave propagation effects in high speed testing. Brown Univ. Grad. Div. Appl. Math. Tech. Rep. 48, 33 pp. April 1950. (63) THomerson, D’ARcY WENTWORTH. On growth and form: 1116 pp. Cambridge University Press, 1948. (64) CamMpBELL, W. R. A preliminary investiga- tion of the strain sensitivity of conducting films. Proc. Nat. Bur. Standards Sym- posium on resistance strain gages. Nov. 1951. (To be published as NBS Circular.) (65) Frocut,M.M. The growth and present state of three-dimensional photoelasticity. Ap- plied Mech. Rev. 5(8): 337-340. Aug. 1952. (66) Herenyr,M. A photoelastic study of bolt and nut fastenings. Journ. Appl. Mech. 10(2): 93. June 19438. (67) Leven, M. M. A new material for three-di- mensional photoelasticity. Proc. Soc. Exp. Stress Analysis 6(1) : 19-28. 1948. (68) Frocut, M. M. A new cementable material for two- and three-dimensional photoelastic research. Presented at 8th International Congr. Theor. Appl. Mech. Istanbul, Turkey, Aug. 1952. STONE: NEW TABANID FLIES 250 (69) StnepaLe, F. M. Improved brittle coatings for use under widely varying temperature conditions. Presented before Soc. Expr. Stress Analysis, New York, Dec. 1952. (70) Lipson, C. Why machine parts fail. Machine Design 22(5): 95-100, May 1950; (6) 111- 116, June 1950; (7) 141-145, July 1950; (8) 157-160, Aug. 1950; (9) 147-150, Sept. 1950, (10) 97-100, Oct. 1950; (11) 158-162, Nov. 1950; (12) 151-156, Dec. 1950. (71) Wyss, Tu. Die Sachschaeden an Motor- fahrzeugen: 418 pp. Zurich, 1951. (72) Doanz, F. B., and Maces, M. Magnaflux procedures. Iron Age 149: 47-52, Mar. 12, 1942; 56-58, Mar. 19, 1942. (73) CARPENTER, O. R. Some results of advances in welding and radiography on the welding of pressure vessels. Welding Journ. 25(6): 531-542. June 1946. (74) De Lano, RaupH B. Supersonic flaw de- tector. Electronics 19(1): 1382-136. Jan. 1946. (75) Knerr, H.C. Electrical detection of flaws in metals. Metals and Alloys 12(4): 464-469. Oct. 1940. (76) Lams. Lecons sur la Paris, 1852. theorie d’elasticité. ENTOMOLOGY .—New tabanid flies of the tribe Merycomyuni. ALAN STONE, U. S. Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine. The tribe Merycomyiini (Diptera) was proposed by Philip (Can. Ent. 73: 4. 1941) to include the single genus Merycomyza Hine, 1912. This genus contains two described species from eastern United States, M. mixta Hine and M. whitney: (Johnson). The purpose of the present paper is to de- scribe from the collection of the U. S. Na- tional Museum two new species of Mery- comyia and a new genus and species in the tribe. The tribe Merycomyiini falls into the sub- family Pangoniinae because the hind tibiae each bear a pair of spurs, although in the genus Merycomyia these are reduced in size. The tribe is separated from other members of the Pangoniinae by having only three flagellar segments in the antenna. Merycomia haitiensis, n. sp. Figs. la-c Predominately brown species of medium size; frons broad, distinctly narrowed above. Female: Length 17 mm, wing 14.5 mm. Head grayish brown with darker brown hairs. Frons as high as width at lower margin of eyes; width at vertex about 0.8 width below. Eyes with dense, short hair, when relaxed uniformly green. Ocelli on a prominent tubercle, the hairs behind the tubercle somewhat stouter, curving forward: frontal callus diamond-shaped, about 0.4 width of frons; a very slender darker line extends dor- sally, about halfway to ocelli. Subeallus dis- tinctly swollen, yellowish brown, this and the upper part of genae without hairs; a distinct median groove from lower angle of callus to interantennal area. Genae and clypeus with long dark hair. Antenna: Scape and pedicel both grayish brown, short, stout, with long black hairs; flagellum orange brown, with a few short hairs; first segment about twice as long as broad, the dorsal margin nearly straight, the ventral margin distinctly convex; second and third segments subequal, the third tapering. Palpus short and stout, the first segment subglobular, the second swollen, and curved to an acute apex; both with long hairs. Proboscis less than 1 mm long, the labellae large. Dorsum of thorax reddish brown and grayish, subshining, the gray forming five narrow stripes, the outermost one on each side 256 JOURNAL OF dividing just behind the transverse suture; humeri yellowish; sides of scutellum paler than middle; pleura brown; hairs of thorax dark brown to blackish. Halteres light brown. Wings pale brown all the veins broadly margined with dark brown, venation unmodified. Legs uniformly yellow-brown, with brown hairs; hind _ tibial spurs small but distinct, dark. Abdomen dark brown, the sides of segment one and basal half of tergite four grayish brown; hairs mostly blackish brown, with some admixture of paler hairs. Holotype, female, U.S.N.M. no. 61675. Type locality: Haitien. (This is presumably Cap Haitien on the north coast of Haiti.) The only other data on this specimen are “June 25/28”’ and the number 5. The collector is unknown. The shape of the frons and frontal callus distinguish this from all other known spe- cies of the genus. Merycomyia brunnea, n. sp. Figs. 2a-c Small for the genus; the entire body, pilosity, and wings uniformly brown. Female: Length 12 mm, wing 11.5 mm. Eyes bare, when relaxed uniformly green. Frons twice as high as width across lower margin at inner angles of eyes, very slightly narrowed above. Ocelli prominent, yellow, each one narrowly ringed with blackish; frontal callus about two- thirds width of frons, slightly wider than high, with a short, acute dorsal projection that merges into a narrow groove reaching nearly to ocelli; the frontal callus very weakly shining, scarcely differentiated from the rest of the frons in this respect. Subeallus slightly protuberant, pollinose, without hairs. Antenna: Scape short, stout, tri- angular in profile, the angles rounded; pedicel short, stout, somewhat narrowed above; first flagellar segment oval in profile, slightly longer than broad; second slightly broader than long; third twice as long as broad, tapering; scape, pedicel, dorsum of first flagellar segment, and last two flagellar segments with hair. Palpus short and stout, the second segment about twice as long as broad, tapering to a blunt apex and with long hairs. Proboscis very short, the labella not exceeding palpi. Genae slightly swollen, with long brown hair. Thorax, abdomen, halteres, and legs entirely brown, with brown hair; thorax with very thin pollen; abdomen distinctly shining. Wing almost uniformly brown, the anal cell THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 8 slightly paler, the stigma slightly darker; wing venation unmodified. Tibial spurs not as long as some of the adjacent hairs. Holotype, female, U.S.N.M. no. 61676. Type locality: New Smyrna Beach, Fla. The single specimen was collected by C. M. Jones, July 20, 1951, from grass. Its small size and uniformly brown color readily separate it from the previously described species, as well as the one described above. A KEY TO THE FEMALES OF THE GENUS MERYCOMYIA 1. Frons more than twice as high as width at lower margin; frontal callusa denuded area tapering above and extending nearly to ocellar tubercle. ...... 22 see 2 Frons not more than twice as high as width at lower margin; frontal callus much shorter, scarcely higher than wide....... 3 2. Abdominal tergites 4 and 5 each with a pair of prominent white-pollinose patches whitney: (Johnson) Abdominal tergites 4 and 5 without promi- nent white patches. . .mizta Hine 3. Frons broad and distinctly narrowed above; larger species, the length 17 mm haitiensis, n. sp. Frons narrower, with nearly parallel sides; smaller species, the length 12 mm brunnea, Nn. sp. Asaphomyia, n. gen.! Small, rather stout, dark. Head very short. Ocelli on a very prominent tubercle in both sexes. Eyes nearly bare. No frontal callus in female. Antenna with scape and pedicel short; first flagellar segment short and stout, the second and third very slender and the third much longer than the second. Palpus stout, densely haired. Proboscis very short. Wing rather broad; vein Ry with a stump, the venation otherwise un- modified. Hind tibial spurs small, but distinct. Type of genus: Asaphomyia texensis, n. sp. Asaphomyia texensis, n. sp. Figs. 3a-c Female: Length 8 mm, wing 7.5 mm. Almost uniformly dark brown, the head and thorax tinged with grayish, the abdomen darker, sub- shining. Frons about 1.5 times as high as width below, at vertex about three-fourths as wide as below. Ocelli very prominent on a nearly black, shining tubercle, bearing short dark hairs pos- teriorly; hairs on frons sparse, short. Eyes with a few short hairs, when relaxed uniformly green. 1 From asaphos, uncertain, baffling, obscure + myta, fly. c, antenna. c, antenna. c, antenna. (Draw- ) ’ w of head , of head no) es ® =| <= oO Ped Pe D) ao, cere ~20 eS) eee oe a nie) O55 as SOS Om 1.0 ae a aH a cee) fas} BLL eR ee Sao [= oT a =) ES 2a en i ‘fy © by Si 2 55 3 1) : oD Sys q 7 “s fs 2 vay 2 ss it 1a ha ycomyia Fic. 2—Merycomyia brunnea, n. sp. Fig. 3.—Asaphomyia texensis, n. sp.: a, Front view of head Fig. 1.—Mer No frontal callus but a pair of curved grooves, deepest and narrowest above, weakly outline a central raised area; subcallus small, flat, with a median groove and without hairs. Antenna: Scape and pedicel small, dark brown, with short dark hairs; first flagellar segment small, nearly round in profile, the extreme base slightly paled; second and third flagellar segments straw yellow, the second segment very short, the third long, narrowest at base, with a few pale hairs at tip. Clypeus and genae dark brown, with black hair. Palpus short, stout; second segment distinctly longer than first, curved and tapering distally. Proboscis very short, the palpi extending well beyond the labellae. Thorax brown, the dorsum tinged with gray, but with no stripes. Halteres brown. Wings brown, somewhat darker along anterior margin; vein Ry with stump parallel to vein R45. Legs dark brown with concolorous hair; hind tibial spurs short but distinct. Ab- domen stout, dark brown, subshining. Male: As in female except: Length 9 mm; JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 8 head large, holoptic, the facets above level of antennae distinctly enlarged; ocelli on an even more prominent tubercle. Abdomen somewhat tapering posteriorly. Hind tibial spurs slightly longer. Holotype, female, paratype male: U. S. Nat. Mus. no. 61677; paratypes, 2 females, 2 males, American Museum of Natural History. Type locality: Columbus, Tex. The type bears no further data. The male in the U. S. National Museum was collected at Victoria, Tex., on May 3, 1913, by Mitchell and Coad. The two pairs in the American Museum of Natural History, lent me by C. H. Curran, were collected at Weser, Goliad County, Tex., May 11, 1952, by Cazier, Gertsch, and Schrammel. The generic name was suggested to M. D. Leonard in 1921 by E. A. Schwartz. At that time the family position of the species was very uncertain, but it is quite evidently closely related to Mery- comyia in spite of its small size and unusual antennae. ZOOLOGY —A new genus of bonelliid worms (Hchiuroidea). WALTER K. FISHER. Associate in Zoology, Smithsonian Institution. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) The new genus and species described herein belongs in the phylum Echiuroidea, order Echiuroina, family Bonelliudae, and was taken from the depths of the central lagoon of Onotoa, Gilbert Islands, by Dr. PoE Cloud; Jr som Aucust: 25, 19aie Achaetobonellia, n. g. Diagnosis.—Differing from typical Bonellia in the absence of setae; in the presence of a thick-walled bulbous expansion of the neck of the nephridium between the subbasal nephro- stome and body wall, functioning as a specialized androecium; in having an extraordinarily long segment of the gut between the mouth and point of attachment of the neurointestinal blood vessel to gut; siphon apparently rudimentary; anal vesicles numerous. Type, Achaetobonellia maculata, 0. sp. Achaetobonellia maculata, n. sp. Description.—Body form a broad ellipsoid, 45 mm long; body wall thin, translucent; skin smooth with slight rugosities at ends of body; skin marked by small dark brown spots, most numerous on proboscis. The latter is 95 mm long and about 6 mm broad when flattened; each terminal branch is about 20 mm _ long. The mouth is inconspicuous, in the base of proboscis the margins of which do not fuse to form a definite lower lip. The nephridiopore is very inconspicuous. The alimentary canal is very long, about 400 mm, the first 150 mm being the segment be- tween mouth and attachment of neurointestinal blood vessel (B*). Pharynx subspherical, thin- walled, distended by white coral mud. A rather short esophagus follows, beyond the end of which the entire gut is filled with chalk-white pellets. There is no clear differentiation into gizzard and stomach. At certain places on the badly preserved intestine traces of what may be a rudimentary siphon can be seen, but there is not observable a definite beginning at or near the attachment of the neurointestinal vessel as is normal in bonelliids. A portion of the intestine just anterior to the small, very thin- walled cloaca is enlarged but there is no trace of a ciliated groove such as is obvious in the “hind gut”’ of Nellobia eusoma (Fisher, 1946, pl. 29) fie 3). The anal rather vesicles are numerous August 1953 FISHER: NEW GENUS arborescent structures on the walls of the cloaca rather than 2 definite elongate sacs with branches. They are not so voluminous as in Nellobia eusoma. The elements are similar to those of Eubonellia valida (Fisher, 1946, pl. 28, fig. 2), but the ciliated funnels have dis- appeared. The gonads could not be found. The single, left, nephridium, about 25 mm long, has a subbasal nephrostome on a short stalk directed toward the nerve cord. Its dis- tinctive feature is a thick-walled proximal chamber between the nephrostome and body wall, functioning as an androecium. One male was found with its posterior end immersed in the soft glandular lining, to which it may be permanently attached. Distal to the nephrostome Fig. 1.—Achaetobonellia maculata, 1.5: Map of the anatomy from above, to show especially the single nephridium or ‘‘uterus’’ and the very long segment of gut anterior to attachment of dorsal blood vessel, B!. Between X and Y 300- 350 mm of intestine have been removed. (An, andro- ecium; AV, anal vesicles; B!, B?, B‘, dorsal, neu- rointestinal, ventral blood vessels respectively; CF, nephrostome; Cl, cloaca, E, eggs in nephri- dium; HG, enlarged terminal part of intestine; I, presiphonal segment of gut; m, anterior part of a male taken from androecium; N, nephridium; NC, nerve cord; O, esophagus; P, proboscis; Ph, pharynx; +, position of male in the andoecium.) OF BONELLIID WORMS 209 the walls are translucent and small eggs occupied the middle portion. The male is without hooks, and is slenderer than that of Bonellia viridis. The posterior part is missing; possibly it remained attached to the tissue of the androecium. The spermatheca is relatively small. Its duct opens at or close to the anterior end. Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 24618. Type locality—Onotoa, Gilbert Islands, in deep central part of lagoon. P. E. Cloud, col- lector, August 25, 1951. Remarks.—lt is regrettable to have to add another monotypic genus to the Bonelliidae, but until we learn the value of the characters available for taxonomic purposes analysis will have to precede synthesis. In my review of the Bonelliidae (1948) I gave a synopsis of the 16 genera into none of which the present species fits, although it seems to be nearest Nellobia. If Nellobia eusoma has a typical Bonellid proboscis it may be possible to squeeze Achaetobonellia maculata into that genus but there will remain the big discrepancy in structure of the gut, for Nellobia has a normal siphon, does not have the same nephridial structure, nor the exces- sively long ‘“‘foregut”’. It has about the thickest body wall of any known Bonellid. The new genus will fall into section a’, b? of my synopsis, as follows: cl. Two nephridia; no setae—Hamingia Koren and Danielssen c?. One nephridium. d'. Two typical setae; no specialized andro- ecium. Bonellia Rolando d2. Setae numerous, seated in two muscular pads from which muscles radiate; no androecium. Acanthobonellia Fisher d?. No setae; a specialized androecium at base of nephridium. Differing also from d! and d? in having an abnormally long fore- gut and rudimentary siphon, and more diffuse anal vesicles. Achaetobonellia, n.g. LITERATURE CITED Fisoer, W. K. Echiuroid worms of the North Pacific Ocean. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 96: 215- 292, pls. 20-37. 1946. A review of the Bonelliidae (Echiurordea). Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (11) 14: 852-860. Dec. 1947 (= Aug. 1948). 260 JOURNAL OF THE MALACOLOGY .— WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 8 The gross anatomy and occurrence in Puerto Rico of the pelecypod Yoldia perprotracta. GERMAINE L. WARMKE, Mayagiiez, Puerto Rico, and R. T. Asport, U.S. National Museum. (Communicated by Harald A. Rehder.) Yoldia (Adrana) perprotracta Dall, hitherto believed to be extinct, was first collected by D. F. MacDonald near Mount Hope, Canal Zone, and described by Dall (1912, p. 1) as a new species from the Pleistocene. This species was also reported as a Pleistocene fossil from the oyster shell layers of the Black Swamp near Mount Hope by Brown and _ Pilsbry eae 0: 496). Live specimens of Yoldia perprotracta were collected by the senior author on August 15, 1951 while dredging between the city of Mayagtiez and the mouth of the Afiasco River, Puerto Rico. Many speci- mens came up in from 10 to 25 feet of water from a muddy bottom. Since then, scores of live specimens have been dredged from three other localities on the west coast of the island (Punta Arenas; Boquerén; and off Pinero Island). Our Recent specimens closely match those from the type lot (holotype: U.S.N.M. no. 214350; paratypes: 605551). The type was figured by Dall (1925, pl. 18, fig. 3) and described (Dall, 1912, p. 1) as thin, elon- gated, inequilateral, rather bluntly pointed at the posterior, and more rounded at the anterior end; beaks depressed and incon- spicuous. Exterior polished, showing regular concentric striae with wider interspaces; hinge with about 38 anterior and 48 pos- terior teeth separated by a small, subtri- angular pit. Length 29 mm., height at the beaks 8, maximum diameter 5 mm. In d i Recent specimens, the number of posteiorr teeth ranges in number from 45 to 51, anterior teeth from 31 to 34. Fossil para- types have from 44 to 51 posteriors, 35 to 38 anteriors (5 specimens). Fic. 2.—Yoldia ares nerneees Dall (1 inch), Mayagitiez, Puerto Rico. The general gross anatomy of Yoldia perprotracta is very similar to that described for Yoldia limatula Say (Drew, 1899a and 1899b). Our preserved specimens did not show the presence of a siphonal tentacle. The postero-ventral margins of the mantle bear a series of from 30 to 37 small, swollen papillae, each of which bears three tiny, fleshy protuberances. The papillae and protuberances are largest at the posterior end. The palp-appendages (used as food gatherers) appear to be _ proportionately larger than those found in Y. lzmatula. The gills are typical for the genus and con- tain about 90 closely packed lamellae. LITERATURE CITED Brown, A. P., and Pirspry, H. A. Two collec- tions of Pleistocene fossils from the Isthmus of Panama. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 1913: 493-500. 11?) DEY DPIVIDDDDDYIII I BBE OLE EC LICE ( } mm, Fic. 1—Main anatomical features of Yoldia (Adrana) perprotracta Dall: f, Foot; g, gills; is, in- halant siphon; lp, right labial palp; pap, palp-appendages. | Aueust 1953 Dati, W. H. New species of fossil shells from Panama and Costa Rica. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 59(2) : 1-10. 1912. Illustrations of unfigured types of shells in the collection of the United States National Museum. Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 66(2554): 1-41. pls. 1-36. 1925. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 261 Drew, G. A. Yoldia limatula. Mem. Biol. Lab. Johns Hopkins Univ. 4(3): 1-87, pls. 1-5, 1899a. Some observations on the habits, anatomy and embryology of members of the Proto- branchia. Anat. Anz. 15(24) : 493-519. 1899b. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES 55th ANNUAL MEETING The 55th Annual Meeting, concurrently with the 360th monthly meeting of the Academy, was held as a dinner meeting in the ballroom of Hotel 2400 on the evening of January 15, 1953. President WALTER RaMBERG presided. After the dinner President Ramberg called the meeting to order at 8:15 p.m. No changes were suggested for the minutes of the 54th Annual Meeting as published in the Journal 42(6): 198- 204, June 1952. Excerpts from the following reports by officers and committee chairmen were presented: REPORT OF THE SECRETARY During the Academy year—January 17, 1952, to January 15, 1953—62 persons were elected to regular membership, including 59 resident and 3 nonresident (62 were elected last year). Of these, 52 resident and 3 nonresident have as of this date qualified for membership. Three resident mem- bers elected in the preceding Academy year qualified during the year just ended. Two elected to membership on January 12, 1953, have not yet been notified of their election. The new members were distributed among the various sciences as follows: Physics 11; chemistry 9; entomology 5; 4 each in zoology and anthro- pology; biology 3; 2 each in astronomy, astro- physics, bacteriology, biochemistry, geology, mathematics, medicine, physiology, and _ psy- chology; and 1 each in aeronautics, archeology, anatomy, botany, histology, philosophy, pathol- ogy, and mycology. Eight members, having held membership for over 10 years and having retired from the gainful practice of their professions, were placed on the retired list entitled to privi- leges of active membership without further pay- ment of dues. Nine resident and 2 nonresident members resigned in good standing. No members were dropped for nonpayment of dues, as the list has not been reviewed by the Board. Deaths in 1952 of 21 members were reported to the Secretary. as follows: Matcoim M. Harine, on January 1 T. WAYLAND VAUGHN, on January 16 Wa.tTeR T. SWINGLE, on January 19 WiuuiaM §. EICHELBERGER, on February 3 CuHarRLes E. CHAMBLIss, on February 10 JOSEPH S. CALDWELL, on February 18 GrEoRGE W. McCoy, on April 2 JAMES L. PETERS, on April 19 RayMonpD A. KELSER, on July 15 EUGENE C. AuUcHTER, on August 12 Ipa A. BEN@TSON, on August 15 Pau F. NEMENYI, on August 29 ALBERT E. McPHERSON, on September 6 Epwarp F. WEnpT, on September 30 Haroutp E. McComs, on October 11 Pau A. NEAL, on October 13 Harvey N. Davis, on December 3 CHARLES L. G. ANDERSON, on December 10 MrrraM L. BomMuarp, on December 16 ARTHUR B. Lams, on December 18 M. C. MERRILL, on December 22 On January 15, 1953, the status of membership was as follows: Dao F Hono- \Regular |Retired Tay Patron | Totals Resident... 626 55 Oye 0 681 Nonresident........ 186 36 10 0 232 otal woes tees 812 91 10 0 913 The net changes in membership during the past year are as follows: Regular|Retired spices pion Totals ry Residents eect od +1 0 0 +38 +4 +1 Nonresident. ....... | —3 0 0 During the Academy year 1952 the Board of Managers held 8 meetings, with an average attendance of 17. The following summarizes inci- dental items, not covered elsewhere in this annual report, pertaining to activities of the Academy and its Board of Managers. A Committee on Science Education was ap- pointed to cooperate on behalf of the Academy with the D. C. Council of Engineering and Architectural Societies in an effort to achieve in the high schools in the metropolitan area ade- quate courses and interest among qualified stu- dents in mathematics and science. This committee consists of Wallace R. Brode, Chairman, W. T. Read, and N. L. Drake. A special committee for Considering the Estab- lishment of a Junior Academy of Sciences was appointed consisting of Martin A. Mason, Chair- man, A. T. McPherson, and EK. H. Walker. Subsequently by vote of the members of the Academy sponsorship was approved, and the Bylaws of the Washington Academy were amended to provide that a member shall be appointed annually by the President to serve as Chairman of the Governing Board of the Wash- ington Junior Academy of Sciences. The Academy has continued its support of publication of the weekly Science Calendar in local newspapers. In April the District of Columbia Section of the Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine by vote of the Academy members became the 20th Affiliated Society of the Academy. N. R. Ellis was named Vice-President of the Academy representing the D. C. Section. Grants-in-Aid for Research totaling $400 were made to Freeman A. Weiss and to Edward Hacskaylo. This allocation is from funds received by the Academy from the American Association for the Advancement of Science on the basis of the number of Academy members who also belong to the AAAS. The Board approved publication of the Red Book in an abbreviated form. It will contain material descriptive of the Academy and its objectives, together with the Bylaws and Stand- ing Rules of the Board of Managers. A page each will be devoted to the Affiliated Societies. This will contain a brief statement on the history, purpose, and operations of the Society and a list of current officers. Other members of the Affiliated Societies will not be listed unless they are also members of the Academy. During the Academy year, Academy were held, as follows: On February 21, 1952, L. I. Barrer, chief of the Division of Forest Management Research, U.S. Forest Service, delivered a lecture on The status and development of the Federal program of forest genetics research. On March 20, 1952, the 1951 Academy Awards were presented to Epwarp WILLIAM Baker, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, for 7 meetings of the 2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 8 work in the biological sciences; Max A. Konumr, Weather Bureau, for work in the engineering sciences; MitToN SEYMOUR SCHECHTER, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, for work in the physical sciences; and Howarp B. OwEns, a special award for the teaching of science. On April 17, 1952, Witi1am L. Wuitson, deputy director, Operations Research Office, Johns Hopkins University, delivered a lecture entitled Can scientists diagnose the most important maladies of the nation? On May 15, 1952, M. H. Trytrsn, director, Office of Scientific Personnel, National Research Council, spoke on Significant aspects of scientific personnel problems. On October 16, 1952, the Academy held a joint meeting with the Entomological Society of Wash- ington at which Carrott M. WriiaMs de- livered an illustrated lecture on The ae de and metamorphosis of insects. On November 20, 1952, Joun P. Hacen, of the Naval Research Laboratory, delivered a (oe on Radio astronomy. On December 18, 1952, HENRY RANDALL, of the Research and Development Board, spoke on The Activities and responsibilities of the Research and Development Board. The Annual Dinner meeting was held at Hotel 2400 on January 15, 1953. J. W. Joycr, deputy science adviser, Department of State, spoke on Science in the State Department. (Published in this JOURNAL 43(4): 97-103, April 1953.) F. M. DEFANDORF. REPORT OF THE TREASURER The Treasurer submitted the following report concerning the finances of the Washington Academy of Sciences for the year ended De- ember 31, 1952. RECEIPTS Dues, OAS ee pee ae $ 6.00 BOAO T See eta eee 11.00 QSOS Ke ee eee 57.00 TQS 1 net aa see sree tet 167.00 LOPS V220 5 ae Peele Ean ea ys 4,153.25 NOS Sie agkle Pe cde ee eee 133.00 TCG Ya i RTE AO S28 6.00 $4,533.25 Journal, Subscriptions, 1950... 15.00 15 Ee 150.00 QOD see 717.41 O53 ee 819.91 1954...... 18.56 1,720.88 Aveust 1953 PROCEEDINGS: Reprints, QAO 29.28 1950. . 7.44 1951.. 556.86 NO S2 a. 2S. 547.24 1,140.82 Sales, 1952 Miscellaneous; Journals, Proceedings and Direc- EOIPCCE ME Cea... 169.47 Journals in sets......... 100225 lag2 Cine raya ING Le re 137.90 Interest and Dividends, IGE IL cues at a rr 167 .00 (382.4 4a 2,360.84 2,527.84 Annwal Dimmer Jian. 1952)........... 346 . 50 Meetimes Committee................. 31.50 Derenpaymmemis:......-..-.62-.--2--- 1.00 Grants-in-Aid from A.A.- AUSo:) 365) 400.00 Grants-in-Aid returned.... 170.00 570.00 Contributions for Science Calendar... 5.70 Contributions for Science Fair....... 480.00 JUSTO? ACG2C Enthie tae 104.00 Motalmecerpus, 1952. 2.........-.. snl Tactile 1! Cash book balance as of Jan.1,1952.... 4,078.07 $16,849.18 DISBURSEMENTS 1951 1952 Total Secretary’s Ofitce... J... MemEono2 =o 4ol.87 % 505.39 Treasurer’s @iice oS... 164.38 85.46 249 .84 Subscription Manager and Cus- todian of Publica- MOMS n ss). 25.70 25.70 Arehivist..... 9.00 9.00 Meetings Committee.. 108.49 343.27 451.76 Membership Committee.. 9.72 9.72 Journal Printing and mail- AION wee Hoo sOON ss o020592 5,575.92 Illustra- IOMGs 5... 38.47 459 .07 497 .54 Reprints.... 164.45 637 .33 801.78 Office Ed. Asst 25.00 425.00 450.00 MiSG.. © 1. 1.53 44.51 46 .04 Monograph NGe 1 aa 5.96 5.96 Refund, over- payment.... ICO 1.00 Refund, sub- scription... 6.75 6.75 THE ACADEMY 263 Bad check.... 30.00 30.00 Annual din- Newer eee 395.70 395.70 Grants-in-aid. 630.00 630.00 Science Calen- dare 89.09 89.09 Science Fair. . 189.20 189.20 Junior Acad- CMY a ae 50.98 55.58 Charges against sales, 1952... 2.50 2.50 Academy Conference A.A.A.S 5.00 5.00 ARO aleaseeen $1,130.84 $8,952.63 $10,083.47 Cash book balance as of Decem- ber 31, 1952. 6,765.71 Total ac- counted TOG oe $16 , 849.18 RECONCILIATION OF BANK BALANCE 1952 T otal Cash book balance, Decem- DerolelO ness ran Se we a te ne $6,765.71 Balance as per Amer. & Trust Co. Statement of IDCs Gs MOBY Se a Se ORI Receipts undeposited. ...... 1,810.36 $6 , 960.65 Checks outstanding as_ of December 31, 1952 No. 1018 $ 5.41 1263 5.00 1596 6.75 1598 63 .00 1599 1.75 1600 2.01 1601 36.75 1602 59.04 1603 19.23 194.94 $6,765.71 INVESTMENTS Potomac Electric Power Co. Certificate No. TAO 1977— 40 shares 3.6% pref. at $48.50.... $1,740.00 City of New York 3% (Transit Unification) Due June 1, 1980 Certificate No. OAV 5 Mies: ame $ 500.00 CamlOssae ey os 100.00 Cxl0soe ee ee 8 100.00 CrlOlO teeters. 2. 100.00 800 . 00 Northwestern Federal Savings & Loan Association Certificate No. $4 , 500.00 500.00 $ 5,000.00 264 United States Government Series G Bonds: No. M332990G..... _. $1,000.00 M332991G.... 2.5... 1,000.00 M332992G........ 1,000.00 M332998G. 222... 1,000.00 M1808741G....... 1,000.00 M2226088G..... . 1,000.00 M2982748G....... 1,000.00 M4126041G....... 1,000.00 M5141346G....... 1,000.00 M5141347G2 ; . 1,000.00 $10,000.00 Massachusetts Investors Trust S30 Shares @ $20 4245". See $17 ,050.70 Investment Company of America 400 shares @ $12 S3e5= 2s kee 4,932.00 State Street Investment Corporation 100 shares @ $68. 502s... 2 ee: 6,850.00 American Security & Trust Co. SAVIN -ReECOUNnL Ho eee cee 161.52 Rotel so eee se $46 , 534.22 Cash book balance as of December 531 Peat! 57a, et aeaespcene Ce pene mae 6,765.71 Potala. 5.2 ek: are ee ee $53 , 299 .93 Total as of December 31, NOS is a iS oe $48 301.19 Total as of December 31, NOB 2s a au nes ee 53,299.93 TRETERSE.: 52... 5 eee $ 4,998.74 At the close of business December 31, 1952, there were a total of 69 members who were de- linquent in dues—an increase of 11 over the number reported a year ago. Howarp S. RappLEYE. REPORT OF AUDITING COMMITTEE The accounts of the Treasurer of the Washing- ton Academy of Sciences for the year 1952 were examined by the auditing committee on January i, 1953. The Treasurer’s report attached was found to be in agreement with the records. All disburse- ments had been authorized and were found to be supported by vouchers and canceled checks. The securities of the Academy were inspected and found to be in agreement with the list given in the report and to have all coupons attached that are not yet due. The committee is unanimous in its commenda- tion of the Treasurer, Mr. Rappleye, for the efficient and orderly way in which the records are kept. C. L. Gazin, Chairman. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 8 REPORT OF THE ARCHIVIST The highlight of the year was the discovery of the minutes of the proceedings of the Joint Com- mission of Scientific Societies of Washington from its organization on February 25, 1888, until it adjourned sine die with the formation of the Academy on March 22, 1898. Included also was a set of directories of the members of the scientific societies of Washington 1889 to 1898. These records in three volumes were found by J. G. Thompson, chief of the Metallurgy Division, National Bureau of Standards, in the course of a clean-up operation at the Bureau and were turned over to President Ramberg for the Academy’s files. The minutes provide a valuable historical background to the history of the Academy and a very human document on the workings of politics in local scientific circles for the period involved. The Joint Commission was set up by formal action of the Washington scientific societies of 1888, the Chemical Society, the National Geo- graphic Society, the Anthropological Society, the Philosophical Society, and the Biological Society to care for matters of ‘‘“common interest.” At a later date the Geological and Entomological So- cieties were admitted to the sacred circle, al- though not without considerable maneuvering. The Commission during its existence sponsored the 1891 meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science in Washington, collecting for the purpose about $2,700 of which $1,600 was expended for program printing, a free trip to Mount Vernon for the visitors and other expenses. The balance after lengthy discussion was left in the Treasury to finance the Commis- sion’s other activities. Annual directories of the membership of the affiliated societies were pub- lished as forerunners of the Academy Red Book series. A series of Saturday afternoon scientific lectures were sponsored and for a brief time the Commission managed the meetings at which addresses of retiring presidents of the several societies were presented. These records have been added to the Archives of the Academy. JoHN A. STEVENSON. REPORT OF THE BOARD OF EDITORS Volume 42 of the JourNat brought out during 1952 includes 396 numbered pages, 8 less than volume 41 for 1951. Published papers include 46 in zoology and its branches; 22 in geology, paleontology, and mineralogy; 8 in botany; 3 in Avueust 1953 anthropology and ethnology; 2 in biochemistry; and 1 each in physics and meteorology. Distri- bution of subjects did not differ greatly from that of the previous volume. Also published were 10 obituaries; the proceedings of the Academy for 1951 and 1952 and of two affiliated societies; and a list of newly elected members. The disbursements for the JournaL during 1952 were: Printing, engraving, wrapping, mailing, etc.... $6,473.44 LRSM TTI) ee Beene 5 bo} aca SS Se ee eee 824.60 Office—editorial assistance... ................... 465.00 Cii@E— DOSER. 2 es Bae oe ee a eee 31.28 TOG, | o..2asecsueeee eee ee $7,794.32 CIDSTRE TD DIVE OOS Aa ise eee ee eee 1,154.73 Net cost of volume 42 to the Academy........ $6, 639.59 WituraM F. Fosnaa, Senior Editor REPORT OF CUSTODIAN AND SUBSCRIPTION MANAGER OF PUBLICATIONS Subscriptions Nonmember subscriptions in the continental “UEC, S20 =i 149 Nonmember subscriptions in U.S. possessions POEUN AMES. 5... cs. OL ee ee 15 We ig. . 5 i225 ee 224 Inventory of stock as of December 31, 1952 Reserve sets of the Journal Gamplete sets, vols. 1-42............... 1 set OO) Rnenes, ao. 5 ee 6 sets Lie? 3 rr 9 sets luSe. oe 7 sets Total sets more or less complete......... 23 sets Back numbers of the Journal Numbers held in complete sets......... 687 Numbers held in reserve for complete S208... 2... 02 ee 8,839 Numbers held for individual sale....... —* Hovalmumbers on hand.............. = * A complete count has not been made. Proceedings Complete sets (volumes 1-13).......... 47 sets (the individual volumes outside of the complete sets, and the copies of the separate articles that appeared in the Proceedings have never been counted. ) Monograph No. 1 BercaseisSle se es sss. 1,010 Copies sold or distributed in pre- PO ISOVCALES:. Sebo oe SSP Ai) PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 265 Copiesssoldiani 1952-2 sions. oo See. 30 “otalisoldvormdistributeds. 255... ae e203 Number of copies on hand............ $07 Sales During the year 1952 one complete set of the Journal and of the Proceedings was sold to the Humble Oil & Refining Co., of Houston, Tex. Of the numbers of the Journal 186 were sold, either individually or as volumes. Seventy-five numbers of the Proceedings were sold this year, the largest number in many years. The sales of the Monograph showed a con- tinuing decline, although the decrease from sales in the previous year was small. Thirty copies were sold in 1952, as against 32 in 1951. I feel that in order to sell more of these books the price will have to be reduced considerably. This year again many members and _ insti- tutional libraries very generously turned over to the Custodian unwanted back numbers of the Journal. For these donations the Academy is very grateful. The income from sales of individual numbers and volumes of the Journal and Proceedings was $169.47, and from sales of the Monograph was $137.90. Payment was received for three complete sets of the Journal and one set of the Proceedings, two of these having been sold in 1951 and one last year; this amounted to $1,002.25. The total income from sales was $1,309.62. Expenditures Supphicas cee ee ee hi eee $ 4.24 Purchase of directories (Red Book)....... 6.75 Expenses in connection with Journal, Cet oe geet ae. si oe eee arama 10.21 Expenses in connection with Monograph... 2.29 IC TN TAR SR AS Re x) RO ec oe nee $23 .49 Storage Further progress was made in the rearrange- ment of the storage facilities that we have in the Smithsonian Institution Building. I hope that this present year will see the completion of this project, so that a complete count and rearrange- ment of the stock of the Journal and the Pro- ceedings can be made. Haratp A. REHDER. 266 REPORT OF COMMITTEE ON MEMBERSHIP The membership committee during the past year has received, examined, questioned, and finally accepted and recommended to the Board of Managers for membership in the Academy 61 nominees. All have had such high qualifications that none were turned down by the committee or the board. Hence, the committee may be accused of lowering the Academy’s traditional high stand- ards. However, we are willing to let the records speak in our defense. I wish to take this opportunity to advance our work and the welfare of the Academy by bringing to your attention the way this committee operates and what is needed to make it better serve its ends. The function of the committee is: (1) To re- ceive and evaluate nominations and to recom- mend approved names to the board; (2) to prepare nominations for other eligible scientists; and (3) to encourage and aid Academy members at large to prepare nominations. There are 16 members of the committee repre- senting about that same number of organizations which contain members and potential members in this community. But there are in our midst more than 16 organizations with scientists on their staffs. Hence, during the past year we have broadened our contacts by soliciting the active participation of 38 additional Academy members in the same number of additional organizations. Many of the 61 nominations received during the past year have been submitted by these special representatives. Others have been submitted by members not connected with this committee and the rest by committee members. I am sure that we as well as these new members are all grateful to these sponsors for taking the trouble to bring into the Academy so many highly qualified people. But the committee is not satisfied as long as there are vacancies in the Academy and there are qualified scientists who have not been invited to accept membership. And both of these condi- tions currently exist. In spite of our 16 committee members and 38 other representatives there are overlooked offices and scientists with no one to nominate them. Some of our special workers have been too busy and procrastination exists in all of us. Therefore we need active participation by all Academy members. It is the privilege and responsibility of each member who values his membership in this JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 8 organization to see that no qualified associate of his is overlooked. I consider it an honor to belong to this organization and believe my qualified as- sociates will appreciate the same privilege. It is my responsibility to see that they are nominated. Let me outline briefly the procedure in case it is unknown to some of you. First, any member of the membership committee or the secretary can supply you with nomination forms. The names of all committees are published in each issue of the Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences. Secondly, the form should be filled out in full. This is sometimes not a simple task, es- pecially since it is generally considered advisable not to seek directly the participation of the nominee. Thirdly, the signatures of three Academy members are needed for sponsors on each nomination. The nomination when com- pleted may be turned over to any member of the membership committee or to the secretary of the Academy. The committee then reviews the nominee’s qualifications and presents acceptable names to the Board at its next meeting. At the Board’s following monthly meeting names are voted on, after which the secretary sends an invitation to the nominee to accept membership. We have just instituted the practice of notifying at the same time the chief sponsor that his nominee has been accepted. Eepert H. Waker, Chairman REPORT OF COMMITTEE ON AWARDS FOR SCIENTIFIC ACHIEVEMENT The recommendations of the Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement for 1952 were presented to the Board of Managers of the Washington Academy of Sciences at its regular December meeting. The recommendations were unanimously approved, and awards were granted as follows: For the Biological Sciences, to ERNest A. LACHNER, of the United States National Museum, in recognition of his distinguished service in ich- thyology, especially in the taxonomy of apogonid and mullid fishes. For the Engineering Sciences, to Wiuu1AmM R. CAMPBELL, of the National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his distinguished research in the strength of materials of structures. For the Physical Sciences, to Harotp Lyons, of the National Bureau of Standards, in recogni- tion of his achievement in using the absorption Avueust 1953 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 267 SOReOONTAS ERENT SSSss SS Ernest A. LAcHNER, United States National Wiii1aAM R. CampBety, National Bureau of Museum, for the Biological Sciences Standards, for the Engineering Sciences Haroitp Lyons, National Bureau of Stand- Keita C. JoHNSON, District of Columbia Pub- ards, for the Physical Sciences lic Schools, for the Teaching of Science Washington Academy Award Winners, 1952 268 JOURNAL OF THE of microwaves in developing the first atomic clock. A special award for the Teaching of Science was granted to Keira CuHarues Jonnson, De- partment of Science, District of Columbia Public Schools, for his achievements in attracting and encouraging the interest of our youth in science and providing through the Science Fair the recognition and encouragement so necessary to continued activity in science by youth. JASON R. SWALLEN, General Chairman REPORT OF COMMITTEE ON ENCOURAGEMENT OF SCIENCE TALENT The organization of the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences on June 13, 1952, was the culmination of plans that had been in process of development for about six years. The present membership of the Junior Academy consists of 65 regular members who are pupils in the local secondary schools, 19 alumni members, and 29 fellows who are either teachers or scientists par- ticularly interested in young people. Election to membership is based on demonstrated accom- plishment in science, just as membership in the Academy proper. With pupils this accomplish- ment consists in winning an award or substantial recognition in a science talent search or the science fair; teachers are elected on the basis of the accomplishments of their pupils. The Junior Academy is governed by a council made up of its officers together with other elected representa- tives and the Committee on the Encouragement of Science Talent. Funds are handled by the treasurer of the Academy. An important function of the Junior Academy consists in bringing students into touch with professional scientists in fields of their interest. The George Washington University was host at a conference on September 19 at which, after a general program, ten teams of well-known scientists met with the Junior Academy members in small groups to aid in the selection and plan- ning of projects to be worked on during the current year. As a further means of stimulating interest in science in the schools, the Committee on the Encouragement of Science Talent has joined with a similar committee of the D. C. Council of Engineering and Architectural Societies in as- signing the local Junior and Senior High Schools to teams of scientists and engineers for the pur- pose of arranging assembly programs and con- WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 8 ferences with science clubs and other small groups of interested students. The Philosophical Society of Washington in- stituted this year an annual Christmas Lecture for Young People patterned after the Christmas Lectures of the Royal Society. The first lecture was given on December 30 by Dr. E. H. Land, of the Polaroid Corporation, on The réle of science in the technique of wimnvention—a demonstration lecture in the fields of two-dimensional and three- dimensional photography. The Junior Academy gave the lecture publicity in the schools and pro- vided much of the audience. The Committee on the Encouragement of Science Talent conducted, as in previous years, a District of Columbia Science Talent Search among students who had entered the national competition conducted by Science Service for the Westinghouse Educational Foundation. Six students were found to have done work of out- standing originality and were recommended for Certificates of Merit which were awarded by the Academy. In the future this local science talent search will include all schools in Maryland and Virginia within a radius of 25 miles, which is the territory of the Washington Academy. While the Science Talent Search is an activity restricted to pupils graduating from Senior High School, the local Science Fair is open to all pupils of both Junior and Senior High Schools, and hence reaches a much larger number. The Sixth Annual Washington D. C. Science Fair was sponsored by the Science Clubs of America, the Washington Academy of Sciences, and its affiliated societies, and was held at the Gymnasium of the Catholic University on April 23-27, 1952. Many members of the Academy participated as judges. The ex- penses of the Fair, amounting to $906, were met by a benefit performance of the documentary mo- tion picture, Kon-Tiki, and by gifts. Plans are well under way for the Seventh Annual Science Fair to be held April 30 to May 3, 1953, in the two gymnasiums of the American University. ae A. T. McPHERson, Chairman The President on behalf of the Academy spoke appreciatively of the work during the year (1) of the Meetings Committee, Harry W. WELLS, Chairman; (2) of the Committee on Grants-in- Aid, L. E. Yocum, Chairman; (3) of the Policy and Planning Committee, W. A. Dayton, Chair- man; (4) of the Committee on Monographs, W.N. Fenton, Chairman; and (5) of the Special AueGust 1953 Committee on Science Education, W. R. Bropg, Chairman. After a report of G. P. Walton, Chairman of the Committee of Tellers, the President declared the following elected: Francis M. Deranporr, President-Elect JASON R. SwWALLEN, Secretary Howarp S. RAppLeye, Treasurer Martin A. Mason and Raymonp J. SEEGER, Elected Members Board of Managers to Janu- ary 1956. The following members of the Academy, nomi- nated by the Affiliated Societies, were duly elected Vice-Presidents of the Academy: Anthropological Society of Washington— WituiaM H. GILBERT Biological Society of Washington—HucGcu Tuomas O’NEILL Chemical Society of Washington—GrorcE W. IRVING, JR. Entomological Society of Washington—F. W. Poos National Geographic Society—ALEXANDER WETMORE Geological Society of Washington—A. NELSON SAYRE Columbia Historical Society—Gitpertr H. GROSVENOR Botanical Society of Washington—Harry A. BoRTHWICK Washington Section, Society of American ForESTERS—GEORGE F.. GRAVATT Washington Society of Engineers—C. A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers—ARNOLD H. Scorr Washington Section, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers—RicHarp §. DILu Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists—GLENN SLocuM Washington Post, The Society of American Military Engineers—FLoyp W. Houcu Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engi- neers—H®RBERT GROVE DORSEY District of Columbia Section, American So- ciety of Civil Engineers—Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Section, Society for Ex- perimental Biology and Medicine—N. R. SE ALTES As a consequence of this annual meeting taking place earlier than executive committee meetings of the following Affiliated Societies, their nomina- tions for Vice-Presidents were not yet available and will therefore await action at a later meeting of the Board of Managers: Philosophical Society of Washington, Medical Society of the District of Columbia, Helminthological Society of Washington. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 269 President Ramberg introduced J. W. Joyce, deputy science adviser of the Department of State and also a member of the Academy, as the speaker of the evening. Mr. Joyce outlined developments that led to the establishment of the Office of the Science Adviser to the Department of State. He cited the need for better and prompt inter- change of scientific information on new develop- ments in various fields and explained how this need was being met by having individuals with scientific backgrounds as attaches in foreign offices. Missions have been established in London, Paris, Rome, and Stockholm with the necessary provisions for travel and liaison work. Thus it is now possible through this facility for travelling scientists from this country to obtain help in establishing prompt connections with others ac- tive in similar fields. Several members mentioned the desirability of publishing the material pre- sented in the Journal. President Ramburg thanked the Academy members for their willing cooperation in the work of the Academy during the year and then intro- duced the new President, FRANK M. Srerzuer, who had served as President-Elect during 1952. After appropriate remarks the new President sug- gested adjournment of the meeting at 9:57 p.m. F. M. Dreranporr, Secretary. 461ST MEETING OF THE BOARD OF MANAGERS The 461st meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Library of the Cosmos Club on Febru- ary 16, 1953, was called to order by the President, FRANK M. SETZER, at 8:05 p.m., with the follow- ing in attendance: J. R. SwWALLen, J. A. STEVEN- son, J. P. E. Morrison, A. G. McNisu, W. H. GitpertT, F. W. Poos, G. F. Gravart, C. H. Betts, A. H. Scott, L. H. SpinpLER, GLENN Stocum, F. W. Houen, N. R. Eis, R. J. SEEGER, and, by invitation, E. H. Wa.kmr, W. W. Rupry, A. T. McPuHerson, anp J. C. EWERS. The following Vice Presidents who were not nominated in time for action at the Annual Meeting were unanimously elected: A. G. McNisu for the Philosophical Society of Wash- ington, F. O. Con for the Medical Society of the District of Columbia, and L. H. Sprypuer for the Helminthological Society of Washington. The President announced the following ap- pointments for 1953: 270 JOURNAL OF THE Board of Editors of the Journal: Senior Editor, J.P. EK. Morrison; R. K. Cook (to January 1956). Associate Editors: D. B. Cow1r, Davin H. DUNKLE, and ALAN STONE (to January 1956); K}. L. Lirr.e (to January 1954), replacing Miriam L. BoMHARD. Executive Committee: F. M. Serzuer (Chair- man), F. M. DeranpvorF, H. 8. RAppLeEYeE, W. W. RuBEY, JASON R. SWALLEN. Archivist: JoHN A. STEVENSON (to January 1956). Committee on Meetings: Warson’ Davis (Chairman), Joun W. Aupricu, AUSTIN CLARK, ID ais IBVaaisy Committee on Membership: E. H. WALKER (Chairman), Myron S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE Cottam, C. L. Curist, JoHN FaspEerR, ANGuS M. GRIFFIN, D. BREESE JONES, FRANK C. KRACEK, Louis R. MaxwE.u, A. G. McNisu, Epwarp C. REINHARD, REESE I. SarLER, LEO A. SHINN, Francis A. SmirH, Heinz Specut, Horace M. TRENT, ALFRED WEISSLER. Committee on Monographs: W. N. FENTON (Chairman). To January 1956—James I. Horr- MAN, G. ARTHUR COOPER. Committee on Awards for Scientific Achieve- ment: A. V. Astin, General Chairman. For the Biological Sciences: HERBERT FRIED- MANN (Chairman), Harry A. BorTHwickK, SARA E. BranyuamM, Ira B. HANSEN, BENJAMIN Scowartz, T. Date STEWART. For the Engineering Sciences: SAMUEL LEvy (Chairman), MicHaEL GoupBerG, EK. H. KeEn- NARD, EK. B. Roperts, H. M. Trent, W. A. WILD- HACK. For the Physical Sciences: G. B. ScHUBAUER (Chairman), R. S. Burineton, F. C. Kracex, J. A. SANDERSON, R. J. SrrcER, J. S. WILLIAMS. For the Teaching of Science: M. A. Mason (Chairman), F. E. Fox, Monror H. Martin. Committee on Grants-In-Aid for Research: Karu F. Herzretp (Chairman), HrRBERT N. Eaton, L. E. Yocum. Committee on Policy and Planning: To January 1954—W. W. Ruspey (Chairman). To January 1956— EuGENE C. CRITTENDEN, ALEXANDER WET- MORE. Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: A. T. McPHERsoN (Chairman). To Janu- ary 1956—AusTINn CiarK, J. H. McMILien. Committee of Auditors: Louise M. RussELuL (Chairman), R. 8S. Dri, J. B. REESIDE. Committee of Tellers: C. L. GARNER (Chair- man), Luoyp G. Henssst, M. F. JongEs. The report of the last meeting of the Executive Committee was read: A meeting of the Executive Committee was held at the home of Mr. SETzuER, on February 5, at 8:00 p.m., with F. M. Serzuer, F. M. Deran- porF, H.S. RAPpPLEYE, and J. R. SWALLEN present. Mr. SETZLER reported on the progress of the index to the Journal. The first galley proof has been received and is being corrected by Pau. H. OEHSER, of the Index Committee. It is estimated WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 8 that the index will contain about 350 pages and that the cost of printing will be about $4,500 for 1,000 copies, and $6,000 for 2,000. The price to be charged and the number of copies to be ordered was discussed at length. It was the general opinion that 1,000 copies would be sufficient and that $6 would be a fair price. Some felt that asking a higher price might curtail sales. Every effort will be made to recover the cost of publication through select mailing list advertisement. It is hoped that the Red Book, in charge of the Executive Committee, will be ready for the printer by the end of April. It will contain data of the Academy and affiliated societies, an alphabetical list of Academy members only, and lists of mem- bers under institutions and geographical areas. Data of most of the affiliated societies have already been received, and cards requesting information will be sent to all members in the near future. The Treasurer presented the tentative budget for 1953, showing estimated receipts of $9,050. After considerable discussion, the proposed budget was approved by the Committee, and is now recommended to the Board of Managers for ap- proval. The breakdown and allotment of these funds are shown on the statement prepared by the Treasurer, copies of which are available for the members of the Board of Managers. Copies of the proposed budget presented by Mr. Rappleye were distributed to members of the Board of Managers. Receipts 1952 1953 (Estimated) Duest: 2tee ets Ree $4,533.25 $4,600.00 Journal subscrip- GONG Se So ele 1,720.88 1,800.00 Interest and divi- dend sts: ae 2,527 .84 2,500.00 Sallesen te wc Hee eo 169.47 150.00 TBO WAS tes ee Sate erie $8,951.44 $9,050.00 Expenditures Journal and Journal Oca. eee ee $6 ,569.50* $7,250.00* Secretary’s Office....... 555.39 550.00 Treasurer’s Office....... 249 .84 300.00 Meetings Committee.... 451.76 550 .00 Membership Committee. 9.72 20.00 Anchivistess sn oe 9.00 20.00 Science Fair (1953)..... 189.20 200.00 Science Calendar (1953- DA) cota Baers, NALD epee 89.09 75.00 Certilicatesse se ee 85.00 TOMAS Ja See a $8,123.50 $9,050.00 * Plus charges to authors. The 1953 budget as recommended to the Board of Managers by the Executive Committee was unanimously approved. In commenting on the report of the Executive Committee, it was suggested that printing the Avueust 1953 Red Book by the offset process be considered and that several bids be obtained. The President indicated it was his desire to recover as much of the cost of the Index as possible from sales and that steps are being taken in regard to advertising. Chairman A. T. McPHERson presented the following report: The Committee on the Encouragement of Science Talent examined all papers entered by students of the Washington area in the Twelfth Annual Science Talent Search conducted by the Science Clubs of America for Westinghouse Educa- tional Foundation. This year, for the first time, students from Maryland and Virginia schools within a 25-mile radius of Washington were in- cluded. This arrangement was cleared with the Maryland and the Virginia Academies of Science. On the basis of original work in their science projects, the following five students are recom- mended for Certificates of Merit: JAMES WoopwortH CoNLEY, age 17, 4406 Coles- ville Road, Hyattsville, Md. Northwestern High School, Project: Application of Modern Principles of Design to Automatic Computa- tions. Wituiam ALAN FULLARTON, age 17, 6609 West- moreland Avenue, Takoma Park, Md. Mont- gomery-Blair High School, Project: Experi- ments in Paper Chromatography. Rosser A. RupoupH, JR., age 17, 2017 North Illinois Street, Arlington, Va. Washington-Lee High School, Project: A Study of E. coli Bac- teriophage. WaLTER SELDEN SAUNDERS, age 17, R.F.D. 3, Gaithersburg, Md. Bethesda-Chevy Chase High School, Project: A Study of Human Reaction in an Audio Visual Loop. BENJAMIN BRENEMAN SNAVELY, age 16, 1314 Erskine Street, Takoma Park, Md. North- western High School, Project: Measurement of Velocity of Light. On the basis of having gained Honorable Men- tion in the national competition, the following two students are recommended for Certificates of Merit: IRENE ADELAIDE BEARDSLEY, age 17, 3215 Van Hazen Street, NW., Washington 16, D. C. Woodrow Wilson High School, Project: Culture and Curing of Tobacco. Loretta Mat ReEEvEsS, age 17, 2115 Branch Avenue, SE., Washington 20, D. C. Anacostia High School, Project: Synthesis of Mauve and its Use in Cancer Research. The Committee recommends that these students be invited to set up demonstrations of their projects in the rear of the assembly room at the time their awards are presented. The Committee has been asked by the Washing- ton Daily News to obtain a news release from the Academy regarding these awards and would like to have instructions from the Board regarding the handling of press relations. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY Pfal The following members of the Committee participated in reviewing papers and recommend- ing students for the Certificate of Merit: Austin He Clark We. E- Read, A. IT. McPherson, and Frank M. Setzler, ex officio. The Board approved the seven students recom- mended by the Committee to receive the Certifi- cate of Merit. Publicity for meetings of the Academy was discussed, especially in connection with the Academy awards. It was suggested that press releases be prepared and cleared through the Chairman of the Committee on Meetings. Letters were read from ARTHUR C. CHRISTIE and GEorRGE P. WALTON requesting that they be placed on the retired list. The requests were ap- proved as of December 31, 1952. A letter was read from Davip Minarp, who was elected in March 1952. Because of extenuating circumstances he was able to complete his membership and asked that he be reinstated. The completion of his membership was approved. A letter was read from the Washington Section of the International Association for Dental Re- search, through H. J. Caul, chairman of the section, applying for affiliation with the Academy. The application was referred to the Committee on Policy and Planning for recommendation of action by the Board of Managers. Senior Editor Morrison reported that suffi- cient manuscripts were on hand for at least six issues of the JouRNAUL. He said that priority will be given to articles on the physical sciences. A brief discussion followed on ways and means of improving the JouRNAL. The Board approved a suggestion by the President that the matter be referred to the Committee on Policy and Plan- ning to determine whether a special committee should be appointed. Vice President McNisx urged that action be taken by the Academy to equip the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club with a moving-picture projector. He suggested the appointment of a special committee to approach the affiliated so- cieties for suggestions and donations. JASON R. Swauen, Secretary. ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY The Anthropological Society of Washington held its annual business meeting on January 13, 1953, and elected the following officers: President, MarsHatu T. Newman; Vice-President, WILLIAM H. GinBert; Secretary, Cari F. Mruuer; Treas- ore ay rs JOURNAL OF THE urer, Lucite E. Hoyme; Councilors to the Board of Managers, Joun A, Jones (to Jan. 1955), JoHN C. Ewers (to Jan. 1955), Marran L. VANDERBILT (to Jan. 1954), Sipnry ApaAmMs (to Jan. 1954), Jonn H. Cox (to Jan. 1956), and Puitip Drucker (to Jan. 1956); Representative to the Washington Academy of Sciences, WILLIAM H. GILBERT. A report of the membership and activities of the Society since the last meeting follows: The total membership on January 1, 1953, was 106, a net increase of 8 over a year ago. New members elected during the year totaled 16 and were: Dr. Paut L. Garvin, Dr. Epwarp T. Hatt, Jr., J. Nrxon Hapiey, Dr. Harvey C. Moors, JoHN M. Ecuots, Dr. Frank G. ANDERSON, Marra Scuirr, Mrs. Barpara B. Hyatt, Dor- oTHy Lipsy, MarsHatyt D. Moopy, Grace I. Bove, ARTHUR J. JELLINEK, THEODORE H. Haas, Dr. Marcus §8. Go.pstein, Dr. WItLiaM NEGHERBON, and Myron F. Lewis. Dr. CHARLES L. G. ANDERSON, a former President of the So- ciety, died on December 10, 1952, and 7 mem- bers resigned because of their moving from the area. The report of the Treasurer for the year ended December 31, 1952, follows: Credit: Balanceviorward!cr cen eee see Se ousead Duesicollectedsteeess sane ee ee 140.88 Dividends, Investment Co. of America... 113.30 Dividends, Mass. Investor’s Trust........ 121.89 Dividends, Washington Sanitary Housing COE Sn ng ee = ey OR cen. 20.00 Dividends, Perpetual Building Association 16.20 Cosmos Glubmetundees eee. oe 10.00 ol Wa 1) Pe eee eS a 5 PRs oe ee ame eee $ 986.14 Expenditures: Meetings and speakers...............-.... $ 106.20 Printing and mailing notices............. 94.39 AAA dues for Secretary and Treasurer... 15.00 SecretanyisieXpensesee eats eee The use of Lyttonia Waagen, 1887, in place of Leptodus Kayser, 1883, is without warrant. In the past 50 years a number of impor- tant papers, notably by Fredericks (1925), Watson (1917), Wanner (1935), and Licha- rew (1932), have not only substantiated Waagen’s conclusions but also added greatly to our knowledge of the diversification and derivation of the group so that now there is no doubt that although the oldhaminids are exceptional in a number of characteris- tics they were derived from the normal strophomenoids and are but unusual mem- bers of that group. Oldhaminid peculiarities are manifold. The shell is disproportionately inequivalve, the hinge-line together with the articula- tory apparatus is rudimentary and the muscles (as judged from the muscle scars) were correspondingly degenerate and often asymmetrically developed, the brachial valve 280 is typically highly lobate and the pedicle valve equipped with a complementary septal apparatus. But unusual as these features are the shell structure of the brachial valve appears to be the most radical departure from that of normal brachiopods. SHELL FORM AND STRUCTURE In all articulate brachiopods the shell, ex- cluding the periostracum, is composed of two layers, an outer lamellar layer of constant thick- ness consisting of a mosaic of calcitic platelets and an inner fibrous layer of variable thickness built up of fibrous caleite. Work on the relation- ship between the shell and mantle in modern Terebratulina to be published jointly with G. Owen in the near future has shown that the dif- ferentiation of the shell layers begins at the mantle edge (Pl. 1, Fig. 1). The lamellar layer is deposited only by a few epithelial cells forming the tip of the outer lobe, the deposition of the fibrous layer begins immediately behind this narrow lamellar zone and is carried on to a vary- ing degree by the outer epithelial layer of the mantle over the entire shell surface. Thus all internal processes and protuberances such as the terebratuloid loop are composed only of fibrous calcite and are deposited by enveloping invagina- tions of the outer epithelial layer of the mantle. The shell of the oldhaminid pedicle valve (PI. 2, Figs. 6, 7) is like that of any other brachiopod. It consists of an outer lamellar layer, and an inner fibrous layer traversed as in all strophomenoids by spicules of eryptocrystalline calcite which do not penetrate the lamellar layer but protrude through the innermost fibrous layers to give the internal shell surface a tuberculate appearance. The brachial valve (Pl. 2, Fig. 2) however appears not to possess this twofold differentiation of the shell, for the outer lamellar layer is almost completely absent, the entire shell anterior to a small apical triangular area being composed only of fibrous calcite so that the external and internal surfaces are pierced by spicules. The absence of the lamellar layer over so large an area is not known in any other brachiopod and calls for a reinterpretation of the nature and growth of the brachial valve. If analogy with modern terebratuloids is valid and in strophomenoids, too, those structures which are composed only of fibrous material were deposited within invaginations of the outer JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 9 epithelium, then that part of the oldhaminid brachial valve which is also composed of fibrous calcite was strictly internal and formed no part of the protective shell. In this event most of the structure hitherto identified as the brachial valve is no more than an internal skeletal sup- port to a highly lobated mantle infold. The brachial valve which in normal brachio- pods is a part of the enclosing protective covering to the viscera and mantle is thus vestigial and obsolescent. It is represented by the small obtusely triangular portion of the shell situated apically and consisting of the usual outer lamel- lar layer and inner fibrous layers. It forms only the lobes of the degenerate cardinal process and the posterior part of the denticular sockets (PI. L eweSs 59) This interpretation is not as far-fetched as first impressions convey. Comparable develop- ments in the strophomenoids are found in both the thecideids and the plectambonaceids whose strongly elevated platforms, deposited by the outer epithelium, are developed for the support of the lophophore. In the plectambonaceid Lep- telloidea musca Opik (ef. Figs. 6, 7 of Pl. 1) the lophophore platform is so pronounced that it protrudes well into the interior for over half the length of the shell as a bilobed pseudopunctate plate diverging from the brachial valve just anterior to the cardinala. The difference be- tween such a development and that of the oldhaminids les in the disproportionate size of the oldhaminid internal plate in comparison with the brachial valve the growth of which was arrested at an early stage of development. The extraordinary development of the old- haminid brachial valve and internal plate pos- sibly occurred in the following manner. During the earliest stages of growth both lamellar and fibrous layers were laid down by the mantle which advanced from an initial locus of growth lying immediately posterior to the cardinal proc- ess and expanded laterally to cover an obtusely triangular area. Such a structure is reminiscent of an obsolescent interarea and chilidium but hardly homologous with them for the direction of growth was the reverse of that governing the deposition of a true interarea and chilidium. The mantle edge did not advance beyond the base of the triangular lamellar layer; but as growth proceeded the outer epithelial layer continued the enlargement of the incipient cardinalia and an inwardly directed plate-like ridge, the latter PLATE 1 Fic. 1.—Radial section through the mantle edge of Terebratulina sp., Crinan Loch, Seotland, show- ing the relationship between the shell and the mantle lobes: F, fibrous layer; I, inner epithelium; IL, inner lobe; L, lamellar layer; N, setal groove; PE, periostracum; O, outer epithelium; OL, outer lobe. Fig. 2.—Structure of a lobe of the brachial internal plate of Oldhamina decipiens Koninck as recon- structed from serial sections of specimen BM. 18646, Permian, Salt Range, India: I, internal surface; E, external surface. (x 10) Figs. 3-5.—Internal, external, and lateral views respectively of the posterior portion of brachial valve and internal plate of Leptodus sp. Permian (Word), W. Texas: B, vestigial brachial valve; D, sockets for dental areas; IP, internal plate. (Xx 3) Fic. 6.—Enlargement (X 6) of Fig. 5 for comparison with Fig. 7 representing a lateral view of Lep- telloidea musca Opik, Middle Ordovician, Baltic Provinces (X 7): BV, brachial valve; CP, cardinal proc- ess; D, socket for dental areas; IP, internal plate; L, lobe; LP, lophophore platform; 8, socket; X, external profile of brachial valve. 281 282 encased in an epithelial sac, expanding anteriorly to form the internal plate. General oldhaminid morphogeny would lead in the subsequent de- velopment of the internal plate to the early appearance of a median incision by the ac- celerated growth of the submedian areas, and later, in phylogeny as well as ontogeny, the ap- pearance of the lateral lobes. In addition to imparting rigidity to the infold of the dorsal mantle, the internal plate probably gave support to the lophophore, a conclusion already advocated especially by Watson (1917) and Wanner (1935). The most primitive old- haminid known is the upper Pennsylvanian Potkilosakos Watson, immature specimens of which possess a subcireular internal plate with a median incision (cf. Cardinocrania Waagen). If the lophophore was adherent to the periphery of such a plate it closely resembled the schizo- lophus so characteristic of many brachiopods. Moreover if the lobation of the internal plate was accompanied by a corresponding lobation of the lophophore it assumed the familiar pat- tern of the ptycholophous stage. The shell composition of the oldhaminid brachial valve then, suggests that the brachial valve proper is a vestigial apical triangular structure, whereas the greater part of the shell consists of a lobated plate ensheathed in mantle tissue and giving support during life to a schizo- lophous or ptycholophous lophophore. The old- haminid brachiopods were therefore functionally univalves (Pl. 2, Fig. 8). JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 9 The oldhaminid pedicle valve was normally developed to form a protective covering to the viscera and the ventral mantle lobe by which it was deposited; although it must be noted that, since the brachial valve and associated internal plate lay well within the periphery of the pedicle valve, a considerable area of the mantle must have been exposed. The structure of the posterior portion of the pedicle valve is however exceptional. The apex of the valve is usually malformed through at- tachment, but it is evident that in place of an interarea there existed a small triangular patch of lamellar calcite which lay immediately poste- rior to the vestigial brachial valve (Pl. 2, Figs. 3, 4). This triangular patch forms the postero- median area of an enormous flap of fibrous and lamellar shell material apparently representing an extension of the posterior part of the pedicle valve and invariably sharply reflexed just dorsal of the base of the triangular lamellar layer. The shape of the flap varies considerably: speci- mens attached to a regular surface possess a flap which resembles a pair of expanded ears extend- ing laterally from the median reflexed area (PI. 2, Fig. 5); in those which lay free on the sea floor throughout most of their lives the flap is greatly extroverted so that the distal edge is usually in contact with the external surface of the pedicle valve (Pl. 2, Fig. 1); in those attached to ir- regular surfaces or crinoid stems the flap is closely adherent and moulded to the base (PI. 2, Fig. 3); and in two distinct stocks, Chaoella and Adriana, the flap grew forward and is anky- Prarn 2 Fic. 1.—Submedian portion of the posterior flap of Oldhamina decipiens, reconstructed from serial sections of BM. 18646, Permian, Salt Range, India: 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are successive layers of shell de- posited by the posterior flap, the circles (R) represent the minimum point of retractibility of the mantle flap necessary for the deposition of each succeeding layer; D, dental area; L, lamellar layer; P, pseudo- punctate fibrous layer; PV, pedicle valve; T, triangular area of lamellar calcite. (X 9) Fic. 2.—Submedian view of interior of pedicle valve of Chaoella sp., Permian (Leonard) W. Texas: L, lamellar layer; P, pseudopunctate fibrous layer; PF, posterior flap; PV, pedicle valve; T, triangular area of lamellar calcite. (x 2.5) Fries. 3, 4.—Submedian and posterior views of the apical part of the pedicle valve of Leptodus sp., Permian (Word), Texas: D, dental area; L, lamellar layer; P, pseudopunctate fibrous layer; PF, pos- eS flap; PV, pedicle valve; R, reflexed region of posterior flat; T, triangular area of lamellar calcite. x 3 Fie. 5.—Apical part of pedicle valve of Leptodus sp., Permian (Word) Texas: D, dental area; PF, posterior flap; PV, pedicle valve. (X 3) Frias. 6, 7.—Portion of septal apparatus of Leptodus ef. richthofeni Kayser, Permian (Sosio), Sicily and Oldhamina decipiens, Permian, Salt Range, India respectively, reconstructed from serial sections: L, lamellar layer; F, pseudopunctate fibrous layer. (x 8) Fic. 8—Submedian view of a reconstruction of a Leptodus to show the relationship between the mantle and the shell (portrayed in solid black in section): C, cirrus of schizolophous lophophore; EM, exposed part of the ventral mantle lobe (M); IP, internal plate enveloped by an infold of the dorsal mantle lobe; PF, retractible posterior flap; V, visceral region. = WS pS D SAAN 0 lf sg I UGA Wie SARS WF <9) DSS ay Wg Wwe f S I 7 SW ill (ifr 4 Meret! f\ ASSESSES pi A YS SMO PLATE 2.— (See opposite page for legend). 284 losed to the sides of the pedicle valve to form a deep cone (PI. 2, Fig. 2). The posterior flap, although apparently an integral part of the pedicle valve, lies dorsal to the brachial valve and was the prime organ of fixation (indeed the only one in those oldhami- nids attached to crinoid stems). It is envisaged as having been laid down by a posterior exten- sion of the mantle capable of a rapid deposition of cementing shell material and disposed in such a way that the inner epithelial layer was in- variably exposed. This posterior mantle flap was highly variable in shape, moulding itself closely to the base of attachment and it must be con- cluded that the mantle was greatly retractible so that paper-thin layers of shell consisting of both fibrous and lamellar calcite could be plas- tered one on top of another (Pl. 2, Fig. 1). The origin of the posterior mantle flap is un- known, for no homologue is known to exist in other brachiopods; but it is a constant feature of all oldhaminids and is as prominent in primitive forms like Poikilosakos as it is in later Permian forms. THE ARTICULATORY APPARATUS If these conclusions on the form of the shell are acceptable it is not surprising to find that the leptodid articulatory apparatus is degenerate. The cardinal process is undoubtedly bilobed but is usually rather inconspicuous in marked contrast to the pronounced development of the structure among strophomenoids generally. An- terolaterally to the cardinal process le a pair of concave surfaces oval in outline and extend- ing down to the first pair of lateral lobes. These surfaces are usually striated and represent sockets for the reception of a pair of similarly striated slightly convex surfaces (dental areas of Watson, 1917, p. 213) in the apical region of the pedicle valve. The fact that the muscle scars are usually asymmetrically and sporadically impressed has been fully discussed by paleontologists. Well preserved interiors of the brachial valves some- times bear a pair of variably defined impressions anterior to the cardinal process which have been taken to be the adductor scars. Occasionally too a full complement of diductor and adductor scars may be seen in the postero-median region of the interior of the pedicle valve (e.g., Potkilosakos variabile Wanner and Sieverts, 1935); and _ it JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 9 seems that the diductors, when normally dis- posed, were inserted in a pair of narrowly di- vergent depressed areas sometimes bounded by ridges and lying lateral to submedian adductor scars. These scars however are frequently un- equally developed and asymmetrically disposed. In Poikilosakos petaloides Watson and Old- hamina decipiens (de Koninck) as figured by Noetling (1905) the left adductor sear is rudi- mentary compared with the right adductor and the right diductor appears to have atrophied: this indicates, according to Watson (1917, p. 215), that the brachial valve was moved laterally rather than dorsally in response to diductor con- traction, although such movement must have been impossible in those oldhaminids having convex pedicle valves. In general it is safe to assume that the old- haminid musculature was degenerate to a degree of almost total atrophy and, although muscle fibres probably separated the epithelial layers of the mantle infold enveloping the internal plate, it is likely that the brachial structures were never elevated or slewed laterally as in normal brachio- pods. This lack of movement was not detrimental to the living animal: the internal plate was ele- vated above the floor of the pedicle valve by the septal apparatus: a steady flow of nutrient water, circulated by the lobated lophophore, could have entered the brachial cavity by way of the distal ends of the lateral lobes and left by the median incision. MORPHOGENY OF THE OLDHAMINID SEPTAL APPARATUS The development of the septal apparatus in the oldhaminid pedicle valve corresponding to the lobation of the internal plate has been fully discussed by Fredericks (1925) and Wanner (1935) and needs but a brief review here. In the primitive Potkilosakos a low ridge (flange of Watson, 1917), lying well within the pedicle valve margin completely surrounds the median area of the interior. The flange is roughly subcircular in outline and is indented to form a median loop only, but in adult forms the outline is more irregular, the flange being thrown into a small number of asymmetrically disposed lateral loops in addition to the median one. These loops are not greatly constricted and consequently in- clude medianly a narrow strip of the valve floor bounded by an indented segment of the ‘YOB[G Ppoe1o[Oo SI SNUdS B JO BABA o]dIped ‘Auasoydiou prourmeyplo jo [uoeyuesoided o1yeurUeIse tq oy} ul yuoudoyaAop [eydos 10 dooy ayy Jo uol4I0d vATYeYUVSaIda1 B JO aTyOId oy ¢ ALVIg BLSNWAS — == == == ae YLINWASY YOLSSONV AIONSWOHdOULS NOllvgO1 w>) a= &@P a= OlLvgO7 Iw) yo worsns $4001 ‘Iwu3.Lv7 40 LN3INdON3A3Z0 “SONWVSOTMIOd a DNs Ne = w/ ' a \ IONVIg “a wolval VNI JSA3N \ Cd ws Ae VINOLLAIOS asvnaNvT duwHs \ BOR EREDAR 3ATWA $d0O1 NVIGaN@Ns - 31903d TWINOD INaNdO13Az0 \ oe ‘Sas wr 301 GaLsauuy \ ert > VINVUDONIGUVD VNVINOV eae VINOLLAIVYVd ahs VT13NINVHO70 286 flange. The internal plate of the brachial valve corresponds in outline to the disposition of the flange so that it is irregularly lobate and lies so close to the pedicle valve that each lobe is seem- ingly isolated distally from its neighbour by a loop of the pedicle valve. In later oldhaminids like Keyserlingina and Paralyttonia the loops begin to close by an in- crease in the size of the flange boundaries and their encroachment onto the median strip of the valve floor until in extreme forms like Oldhamina and Leptodus the flange boundaries to each loop are completely united into one solid septal struc- ture. In this manner the looped flange of the earlier and more generalized oldhaminids is transformed into a series of variously fashioned septa constituting the septal apparatus of more specialized stocks. These views on the evolution of the septal apparatus are generally accepted but there seems to be disagreement on the systematic value of the modifications resulting from loop and_ septal morphogeny (see Wanner, 1935, pp. 265 et seq.) which appear to have been gradually introduced during the ontogeny of the various stocks as well as phylogenetically. Thus in one specimen of Leptodus from the Permian of Texas the high sharp septa of the earlier formed posterior region of the septal apparatus are replaced by lower, weaker septa in the later stages of growth, and the initially undifferentiated interseptal strips of the valve floor become elevated into low broad ridges in the anterior part of the shell. These changes were first introduced at the distal ends of the earlier formed septa and gradually en- croached anteriorly on to the median line as the animal grew, in such a way that the changeover, which is quite sharply demarcated, occurred along a front convex to the anterior and roughly concentric with the growing edge of the valve. Other modifications usually associated with the evolution of the septal apparatus included an increase in the number of septa and a closing up of the median incision of the internal plate; but the most important appears to have been a reorganisation of the disposition of loops and septa so that during Permian times two main stocks existed—one characterized by asymmetry the other by symmetry in the development of loops and septa. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 9 OLDHAMINID CLASSIFICATION The placing of the oldhaminids within the framework of the existing brachiopod classifica- tion has been a matter of considerable specula- tion. Fredericks (1925) considered the group to be derived from the productid Marginifera, but more accurate comparative morphology has caused the rejection of this belief. Other paleon- tologists including Waagen and Wanner have been impressed by the apparent similarity (es- pecially in lobated nature of the lophophore sup- port) between the oldhaminids and the theci- deids, and have considered them to be related groups. Both Watson and Noetling, however, have attributed the superficial lkenesses to convergence and thus have regarded the stocks to be entirely independent, an opinion supported by the writer. The various opinions expressed on the af- finities of the oldhaminids is a reflection of the profound morphological differences separating them from all other brachiopods, and while most paleontologists place them within the strophomen- olds no cogent reason has yet been put forward for allocating them either to the Strophomenoidea or to the Productoidea. That they are stroph- omenoids is left in little doubt when reference is made to the pseudopunctate shell, the absence of a functional pedicle and the presence of a bilobed cardinal process. But it is impossible to recognise in any of the Upper Carboniferous productoids and orthotetaceids any one stock displaying the characteristic oldhaminid features apart from the ordinal characters listed above. In view of these fundamental differences and the consequent unique nature of the oldhaminid morphology it is proposed to erect a new sub- order Oldhaminoidea to embrace Oldhamina and its associates. The oldhaminoids include a wide variety of forms (Pl. 3) but appear to be divisible, as a result of a basic and early divergence, into two distinct suprageneric groups dependent upon the disposition of the septa and loops and it is pro- posed to recognise these differences by the erec- tion of a new family, Poikilosvkidae, in the man- ner Ceye od = OLDHAMINOIDEA, n. suborder Pseudopunctate brachiopods without a fune- tional pedicle, usually cemented throughout ontogeny, shell surface without radial ornament, SEPTEMBER 1953 shape often highly irregular. Brachial valve vestigial occupying a small posterior triangular area of a large plate of fibrous calcite presumed to have been deposited by an infold of the mantle and to have given support to a ptycholophous or more usually a schizolophous lophophore. Pedicle valve extending posteriorly as an enormous flap intimately connected with the pedicle valve apically and posterolaterally and invariably retro- flexed along a narrow median zone lying imme- diately dorso-posteriorly to the brachial valve, posterior flap highly variable in form, usually the principal organ of fixation and moulded to the base affording anchorage, less frequently strongly retroflexed to come in contact with the external surface of the apical part of the pedicle valve or growing anteriorly and ankylosed to the sides of the pedicle valve to form with it a deep cone. In early stocks the median area of the pedicle valve interior surrounded by a low ridgelike flange indented to form a median loop and a variable number of lateral loops; in later stocks the sides of loops coalesced to form solid septa; internal plate of brachial valve lobated to cor- respond to the loops or septa. Upper Carbonif- erous to Permian. Family OLDHAMINIDAE Schuchert and LeVene, 1929 Oldhaminoids with the loops or septa and hence the lobation of the brachial internal plate ROSS: PHYLOGENY AND DISPERSAL OF ATOPSYCHE 287 symmetrically disposed about the median line. Upper Carboniferous to Permian. Type genus Oldhamina Waagen. POIKILOSAKIDAE, n. fam. Oldhaminoids with the loops or septa and corresponding lobes of the brachial internal plate developed in an irregular fashion. Upper Carboniferous to Permian. Type genus Porkilo- sakos Watson. BIBLIOGRAPHY FREDERICKS, G. New Lytteniinae from Upper Palaeozoicum of the Oural. Bull. Soc. Oural Amis Sci. Nat. 11 (1). 1926. LicHarEW, B. Fauna of the Permian deposits of northern Caucasus: Brachiopoda family Lyft- toniidae Waagen. Trans. United Geol. and Prosp. Serv. U.S.S.R. 215. 1932. Noetiine, F. Untersuchungen wiber die Familie LyttoniidaeWaag. Palaeontographica 51 : 129— 153. 1905. WaacEN, W. Salt-range fossils: Productus lime- stone fossils. Palaeont. Indica, ser. 13, 1. 1887. WANNER, J., AND SIEVERTS, H. Zur kenntnis der permischen Brachiopoden von Timor: 1. Lyft- toniidae und ihre biologische und Stammes- geschichtlich Bedeutung. Neues Jahr. fiir Min. 74: 201-281. 1935. Watson, D. M. S. Poikilosakos, a@ remarkable new genus of brachiopods from the Upper Coal Measures of Texas. Geol. Mag. 54: 212-219. 1917. ENTOMOLOGY —A dditional material on the phylogeny and dispersal of Atopsyche (Trichoptera: Rhyacophilidae).1 Hprpert H. Ross, Illinois Natural History Survey, Urbana, IIl. The intermingling of elements of South American and North American biotas across the Central American region is a study full of fascination. The fossil record for any terrestrial group in this critical area is very scanty, so that pertinent evidence from biogeography may be our best source of information on certain phases of the sub- ject for some time to come. Since Dr. King and I prepared our first paper on the dispersal pattern of the genus Atopsyche, known only from this area, I have been fortunate in obtaining several additional lots of material and -in being _ 1 This study was aided by a grant from the John Simon Guggenheim Memorial Foundation. able to study the type of A. amplexa (Navas). Although the new material adds only eight species to the 21 previously analyzed, it brings out several points of biogeographic interest. These fit well the concepts and postulates set forth in the earlier paper on the genus (Ross and King, 1952, Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. 45: 177-204) extending some ideas and suggesting modifications of others. In the first place, the new species ulmerz from Peru is a close relative of cera from Costa Rica and demonstrates a spread of this otherwise northern group from Cen- tral America into South America. This was probably a post mid-Phlocene dispersal. 288 JOURNAL OF THE It was originally suggested that at this time two South American lines spread into North America, and we wondered why we had no evidence of a complementary spread of a North American form into South America. Here it is. Two items concern the zkonnikovit com- plex, here renamed the kingi complex. We thought this complex originated in South America in the Miocene, but had no really primitive South American species as evi- dence. The new species king: from Peru proves to be such a primitive member. In addition, a new subgroup of the king: com- plex has been discovered, typified by a pair of curious, setose, oval bodies on the third and fourth tergites of the males, fig. 5C. This subgroup contains three known species—a primitive one, vatucra, from Peru; a more specialized species, banksz, from Colombia; and the hitherto misplaced spe- cles implexa from Costa Rica. This dis- tribution pattern complements that of the kingi, dampfi, and boneti triad. A fourth point is the finding of a very primitive member of the batesz group in Peru, the new species alconura. It was postulated on phylogenetic evidence that this lne originated from South American ancestors, although the known members came from Mexico and the West Indies. The discovery of a primitive form, alconura, in Peru sug- gests that the progenitor of the group may have differentiated in South America be- fore dispersing to other areas. The other two new species involve no controversial points. A. explanata from Peru is a close relative of kamesa, from Bo- livia. A. serica from Brazil is the most primitive member yet known of the longi- pennis group, and emphasizes the relation- ship between the different lines within the group. Unless otherwise stated, types of the new species are deposited in the collection of the Illinois Natural History Survey. Subgenus Atopsyche Banks The opportunity to study the type male of Ventrarma implera Navas, the genotype of Ventrarma Navas, shows that it is a member of the typical subgenus Atopsyche and not a member of the group considered as the distinctive sub- WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 9 genus Ventrarma by Ross and King, 1952. Ventrarma must therefore be placed as a synonym of the subgenus Atopsyche. A new name, Atop- saura, is proposed later in this paper for the other segregate. Atopsyche ulmeri, n. sp. Male.—Length 5.5 mm, front wing 5mm. Color light brownish yellow with darker areas on the mouthparts, front legs, and thorax; wings varie- gated with irregular light and medium spots of brown. General structure typical for genus. Abdomen with third tergite bearing a faint basal band of minute setae, fifth sternite with a small dorsal projection near base of segment. Male genitalia as in Fig. 1. Paracercus elongate with a high sharp point in middle, apical portion elongate, narrow, and curved sharply laterad at apex. Filicercus short, with a few setae at or near tip. Clasper very elongate and slender, with apical segment short, hooked at apex, with the ventral margin rounded. Aedeagus short and broad, with a narrow lateral flange. Holotype-—Male, Paucartambo, Ccosnipata Valley, Cusco, Peru, November 15, 1951, Felix Woytkowski. Paratypes—Same data, but No- vember 26, 1951, 307. This species is most closely related to cira (Mosely), differing in the slender apex of the paracercus and the undivided apex of the aedea- gus. Atopsyche explanata, n. sp. Male.—Length 7.5 mm, front wing, 7 mm. Color yellowish brown below, darker brown above, the wings a light shade of chocolate brown. Abdomen simple, without setal bands on segment three and with only a small process on the fifth sternite. Male genitalia as in Fig. 3. Paracercus slender and elongate, apparently with only the apical point, and bearing at the apex a cluster of long, stout setae. Filicercus of moderate length, with an irregular scattering of setae on the apical half. Clasper with basal segment twice as long as wide, apical segment slightly more than half length of basal one, curved and constricted in middle so as to form a clavate apex and a bulbous base. Aedeagus with a large, high, bilobed central portion, and produced on each side of this into a wide, up- curved flange. In repose the paracercus fits be- tween the flange and the central high portion of the aedeagus. SEPTEMBER 1953 Holotype-——Male, Paucartambo, Ccosnipata Valley, Cusco, Peru, November 17, 1951, Felix Woytkowski. This species is a close relative of kamesa Ross and King, differing in the shorter apical segment of the clasper and the shallower lateral flange of the aedeagus. The true division between the two segments of the clasper is sometimes dif- ficult to see and in the original description of kamesa was not truly shown. A corrected drawing ROSS: PHYLOGENY AND DISPERSAL OF ATOPSYCHE 289 of the clasper of kamesa is included here for reference, Fig. 2A. Atopsyche kingi, n. sp. Male.—Size and color almost identical with the preceding except that the color is slightly darker and the tibiae and tarsae are covered with brownish hair. Abdomen with third tergite bearing an irregular, somewhat oval, corner patch of minute hairs on anterolateral angle; Fies. 1-6.—Male genitalia and associated structures of Atopsyche: A, Genital capsule, lateral aspect; B, aedeagus, lateral aspect; C, oval body on fourth abdominal tergite. 290 JOURNAL this same corner of the segment on the third and fourth tergites is produced into a_ short internal sclerotized band ending in a_ broader, rounded apex, Fig. 7F. Fifth sternite with only a short process. Genitalia as in Fig. 7. Paracercus with a high middle projection and a lower point at apex. Filicercus elongate and clavate. Clasper with basal segment moderately long and stout, with a somewhat angulate mesal shoulder near middle; apical segment short, broad, and curved ventrad at tip. Aedeagus with apical portion di- vided into two pairs of processes, the ventral pair shorter and dark, the dorsal pair longer and asymmetrical. Holotype—Male, Paucartambo, Ccosnipata Valley, Cusco, Peru, November 27, 1951, Felix Woytkowski. Paratypes—Same data, including dates November 20, 26, and 27, 17%. This spezies is a primitive member of the king: complex differmg from the other mem- bers of the complex in lacking the basal tooth on the paracercus and from other species of the genus in the elongate pair of processes on the aedeagus. The internal straplike appendage at the base of the third and fourth tergites is a most useful character in this complex. It occurs in all the members of the king: complex which are avail- able for study. In these complexes also the in- ternal rod appears to have moved from the ventral end of the basal angulation to the dorsal end, and the apex of the aedeagus is divided into several foliatious lobes. These are at variance with the available description of tkonnikovi, in which the internal rod of the aedeagus is illus- trated as being attached at the ventral end of its basal angulation, and the apex of the aedeagus is simple as in the bolivart complex. For this reason the exact placement of ikonnikovt is open to question. If it is indeed related to kingi and its relatives, then tkonnikovt would seem to be a more primitive member of the same line. On the other hand the two pre-apical processes on the paracercus are most unusual in that the basal one is the larger instead of being the smaller as in members of the king: complex. Until actual material is available for study, ikonnikovi can be placed only tentatively, and perhaps best at the base of the kingz line. Under these condi- tions it seems better to use a new complex name for the aggregation of species boneti, dampfi, kingt and the three following, and I am using OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 9 the term king complex, naming it after the most primitive known member. Atopsyche vatucra, n. sp. Male.—Length 6.5 mm, front wing, 6 mm. Color identical with the preceding, being a moderately dark brown for the genus. Abdomen with tergite three and four each bearing a curious oval body, Fig. 5C, on the antero-lateral corner of the tergite, and also the internal spatulate strap as in Fig. 7F; process of fifth sternite small. Genitalia as in Fig. 4. Parace cus with three points, the middle one large and high, the basal one smaller and spur-like, the apical one small. Filicercus elongate and slightly clavate. Basal segment of clasper almost rectangular, the ventral margin slightly incised and the apico-dorsal corner slightly produced on the mesal side; apical segment with the apical por- tion slender, finger-like and hooked. Aedeagus with three pairs of lateral processes as shown in Fig. 4B. Holotype——Male, Paucartambo, Ccosnipata Valley, Cusco, Peru, November 26, 1951, Felix Woytkowski. Paratypes—Same data, 20”. This and the following two species form a dis- tinct subgroup of the kingi complex in which the third and fourth abdominal tergites have the odd oval bodies shown in Fig. 5C. Of the three, vatucra is the most primitive as shown by the three distinct points on the paracercus. Atopsyche banksi, n. sp. Male.—Length 10 mm, front wing 9.5 mm. Color fairly dark brown with the usual mottling of various colored hair on the front wings. Abdomen with structures of the third and fourth tergites and fifth sternite identical with the pre- ceding. Genitalia as in Fig. 5. Paracercus trian- guloid, the apical point not evident, the middle point small but on a high triangular crest, the basal point short and stubby, its tip divided into several minute points. Filicercus elongate and clavate. Clasper with basal segment somewhat rectangular, the ventral margin slightly incised, and bearing a short mesal pointed projection near apex and a broad shoulder near base; apical segment with basal portion round, apical portion narrow, fingerlike, and curved sharply ventrad. Aedeagus with apical portion divided into three pairs of lateral lobes shaped as shown in Fig. 5B. Holotype.—Male, Colombia, San Antonio, SEPTEMBER 1953 1,800 meters elevation, February, Fassl. coll. (Museum of Comparative Zoology). This species is a close relative of vatucra, the two being obviously grouped together on the basis of the odd clasper. From vatucra, banksi differs in the shape of the point on the paracercus and the lobes of the aedeagus. Atopsyche implexa (Navas) Thanks to the courtesy of officials of the Paris Museum, the type male of this species was studied in detail and compared with a second specimen, also labeled ‘‘Costa Rica’’ which was identical with the type and was made available for further study. To supplement the original description the following is added, together with illustrations of parts in Fig. 6. Male—Length 8 mm, front wing 7.5 mm. Structures of abdominal tergites three and four and sternite five, identical with those of the preceding two species. Male genitalia as in Fig. ROSS: PHYLOGENY AND DISPERSAL OF ATOPSYCHE 291 6. Paracercus high and trianguloid, with no apical point but with middle and basal points spurlike. Filicercus elongate and almost clavate at apex. Clasper fairly broad, with apico-ventral corner produced into a long fingerlike projec- tion which extends two thirds along the apical segment; apical segment almost triangular but also sinuate, tapering to a sharp point. Aedeagus with three pairs of lateral processes, the upper pair very long, the middle pair fairly long, and the ventromesal pair very short and _ scarcely visible from lateral view. The resemblance of the clasper to that of majada is quite striking, and on this evidence alone the species was originally considered a possible close relative of majada. Details of ab- dominal tergites three and four, of the various structures of the aedeagus, and the paracercus, however, demonstrate clearly that this species is not at all close to majada but instead belongs in the kingi complex. SERICA Fics. 7-9.—Male genitalia and associated structures of Atopsyche: A, Genital capsule, lateral as- pect; B, aedeagus, lateral aspect; C, apex of aedeagus, ventral aspect; D, apical portion of paracercus. ventrolateral aspect; #, anteroventral corner patch on fourth abdominal tergite; F, inner view of op- posite anterior corner showing spatulate process; G, apex of aedeagus, dorsal aspect. 292 To date this species is known only from the type, bearing the data “La Caja, Costa Rica, Paul Serre 1920,” and specimen here studied, labeled “‘Costa Rica.” Atopsyche dampfi Ross and King Previously known only from Mexico, a record for another country may be added: Rosario Mines, Honduras, April 30, M. Bates, | male. (Museum of Comparative Zoology) Subgenus Atopsaura, n. subgen. As explained earlier, the genotype of Ven- trarma actually does not apply to the group which was called the subgenus Ventrarma by Ross and King. For this latter segregate I am proposing the name Atopsaura. The genotype is hereby designated as Atopsyche hamata Ross and King. Atopsyche alconura, n. sp. Male.—Length 6.5 mm, front wing 6 mm. Color fairly light brown, intermediate between the yellowish brown of ulmert and the darker brown of the other species. Abdomen with tergite three having a very faint basal band of minute hairs, and with process of fifth sternite small. Genitalia as in Fig. 8. Paracercus elongate and curved dorsad, the apex divided into two sharp processes, with no projections basad of these. Filicercus elongate; its apex is almost capitate, and is irregular due to the wartiness of the bases of the setae. Clasper with basal segment some- what bowed, its apico-ventral corner slightly produced into a rounded extension overlapping the corner of the apical segment, apical segment moderately slender, largest in middle, the ex- treme apex produced into a short ventral point, and the mesal margin armed with several long sharp setae. Aedeagus simple, except for the dorsal spine typical of the batesi group. Holotype-——Male, Paucartambo, Ccosnipata Valley, Cusco, Peru, November 26, 1951, Felix Woytkowski. Paratype—Same data, 10; Can- gallo, south Peru, 2,600 meters elevation, 107 (Hamburg Museum). Judged by the short apicoventral process of the basal segment of the clasper, this species seems to be the most primitive known member of the batesi group. It is readily distinguished from the other members by this character and by the curious bifurcate tip of the paracercus. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 9 Atopsyche serica, n. sp. Male.—Length 8.5 mm, front wing 8 mm. Color dark brown with the usual mottling. Ab- domen without special structures on the third and fourth tergites and with only a small process on the fifth sternite. Genitalia as in Fig. 9. Paracercus very short, directed more dorsad than posteriad, and with neither middle nor basal point. Filicercus slightly shorter, fingerlike. Ventrad and mesad of these two structures is a short thumblike projection. Between the filicerci and below the tenth tergite is a curious horse- shoe-shaped structure beneath which the aedea- gus protrudes. In lateral view this appears as an inconspicuous hoodlike structure between the paracerci. Basal segment of clasper bowed and directed more dorsad than usual; its ventral mesal margin is apparently produced into a long, narrow flange which extends along the inner side of the apical segment, which is grooved to receive it; apical segment elongate, oval, widest near base, and rounded at apex. Aedeagus very simple, the internal rod coiled as in longipennis. Holotype—Male, Nova Teutonia, Brazil (27°11’ B, 52°23’ L) October 471939) shar Plaumann (Museum of Comparative Zoology). This species is closest to longipennis but the claspers are a little more suggestive of hamata. It is distinguished from all other members of the group by the extra pair of short lateral processes below the filicercus and the sclerotization of the structure above the opening for the aedeagus. This species emphasizes the unusually rapid rate of morphological differentiation which has occurred between species of the longipennis group in contrast with the species of other groups in the genus. It is also interesting to note that in this species unusual pairs of processes have been added which are reminiscent in both position and appearance of structures in some of the Australian and New Zealand genera which are only distantly related to Atopsyche. This demon- strates the tendency toward the parallel de- velopment of similar genitalic structures in the tribe. Atopsyche falina Ross and King An additional record has been received from Argentina, the only country for which this species is known: El Tuncho Catanarea, Ar- gentina, 2500 meters elevation, May 5, Jorgan- sen, 2o7 (Museum of Comparative Zoology). SEPTEMBER 1953 Atopsyche mexicana (Banks), n. comb. Philopotamus mexicanus Banks, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. 27: 370. 1901. The type, in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, was examined in 1951 and found to be without abdomen, so that it is not possible at present to identify the specimen beyond genus. BEECHER: FEEDING ADAPTATIONS IN PICIFORMES 293 The venation indicates definitely that it belongs to Atopsyche. Atopsyche callosa (Navas) I had an opportunity to study the type in the Paris Museum. Although labeled and recorded in the original description as a male, the specimen actually is a female, and could not be identified except to genus. ORNITHOLOGY —Feeding adaptations and systematics in the avian order Pici- formes. WiLLIAM J. BeecuErR, Chicago Natural History Museum. (Communi- cated by Herbert Friedmann. ) Recently Dr. Herbert Friedmann of- fered for my study some spirit specimens of honeyguides (Indicatoridae), together with other members of the order Piciformes. It was hoped that such an investigation as I carried out for the Neotropical honey- creepers (Beecher, 1952) might cast further light on both the feeding adaptation and systematic position of these birds so well studied by Friedmann (in MS.). Checking the systematic position of the honeyguides required a somewhat hasty completion of a long-time survey of jaw musculature in the class Aves which I will publish elsewhere. The present paper simply deals with the food adaptations in the head region of the piciform honeyguides, barbets, puffbirds, jacamars, toucans, and woodpeckers, which seem to occupy an interesting position be- tween the perching birds (Passeriformes) and the remaining avian orders. Specimens used are from the collections of the United States National Museum and Chicago Natural History Museum. For their use or for advice, I am indebted to Herbert Friedmann, Austin L. Rand, Emmet R. Blake, and D. Dwight Davis. SPECIMENS EXAMINED Although a limited number of anatomical specimens was studied, the use of numerous skulls of related species considerably swells the list of material examined. This material is sufficient to suggest very strongly that the same constancy of muscle pattern found to hold for the species of passerine families holds for non-passerine families as well. Species dissected are: (Indicatoridae) Indicator minor conirostris, I. exilis, I. maculatus, I. minor minor; (Ramphastidae) Pteroglossus torquatus, Ramphastos cuviert, Selenidera spectabilis; (Capitonidae) Lybius leucocephalus, Megalaema haemacephala, M. raffles, M. zeylanica, Trachyphonus purpuratus; (Buc- conidae) Chelidoptera tenebrosa; __(Picidae) Colaptes auratus, Dryocopus pubescens, Melaner pes carolinus, M. erythrocephalus, Piculus chryso- chloros, Picumnus squamulatus. No specimens of jacamars were on hand to dissect, unfortunately, but skulls strongly suggest their close alliance with the barbets. INVESTIGATION TECHNIQUES In undertaking this study I have pursued es- sentially the plan laid out in my paper men- tioned above and in the more comprehensive work on the phylogeny of the Oscines (Beecher, 1953). This consists in comparing various systems throughout the groups considered, as illustrated in the figures for the families. In each of these the jaw musculature is illustrated in side view and oblique view (with eye removed), as indicated in black on the accompanying skull drawings. The tongue is drawn on the right above and the ectethmoid plate with its foramina (separating the orbital and nasal cavities), on the left. In the center is figured the horny palate pattern and the bill. The logic behind the comparison of systems is that it should be possible in an avian order to establish a ground plan from which the groups (families) are adaptively specialized. Special em- phasis was placed on jaw muscle pattern as a family trait in the Oscines because song-bird families appear to be diverging from such a ground plan under the selection pressure of dif- ferent food types and because each family tends to have a very constant pattern. In the present 294 JOURNAL OF THE order the muscle patterns seem to exhibit con- servative differences between the families that prove ideal both for emphasizing their adaptive differences and at the same time encompassing them within the diagnosable ground plan of Piciformes. The other characters illustrated serve to safeguard against erroneously including a con- vergent species, occasionally possible if a single character is used blindly—and to further point up functional differences between the families in these less conservative parts. These systems will now be taken up below to see how well they support the current ornithological opinion that the piciform families are closely related and to show the extent to which they are differently adapted for food-getting. THE JAW MUSCLE PATTERNS No systematic account of muscle origins or in- sertions will be included here. This is well covered in Moller (1931) and Fiedler (1951); the ab- breviated account in Beecher (1951b) should suffice for the understanding of muscle function stressed in the present paper since the same mus- cles are concerned. A strong facies resemblance between the jaw muscle patterns of the piciform families persists through their quite different food adaptations, which constitutes one of the best arguments for close relationship. The far posterior position of the flattened pterygoid bones where they articu- late with the palatines along the sphenoidal rostrum causes M. pterygoideus dorsalis posterior (M3b in Figs. 1 and 2) to be nearly obscured from view, suggesting relationship with Trogoniformes and Coraciiformes. M. pterygoideus dorsalis an- terior (M3a) is correspondingly enlarged to make up the needed power for retracting the pterygoids, its broad insertion on the sphenoidal clasp, formed by the articulation of the palatines and ptery- goids, covering M. pterygoideus ventralis posterior (M46). The functional result is unusual emphasis on palate retraction in the kinetic bills of all of these families. Since this retraction is translated by the nasofrontal hinge into a downward drag on the upper mandible, the unusually heavy con- struction of this part is clearly functional in feeding. Along with this is a considerable emphasis on the adductors. In Capitonidae and Ramphastidae M. pseudotemporalis profundus (M5) is powerfully developed for dragging on the orbital process of the quadrate and rocking this important bone backward on its articulation WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 9 with the cranial part of the skull, initiating palate retraction and adduction of the upper mandible. This emphasis on the palatine retractors and the adductors is about proportional to the mass of the bill in the several families studied. In Capitonidae, and particularly in Lybius with its stout, notched bill, M. pterygoideus ventralis pos- terior (M 4b) originates all along the outer surface of the mandibular ramus posteriorly, as well as on the customary inner surface. This is also noted in Ramphastidae and Picidae in progressively lesser degree (the former with M4a and 6 fused) but not in Indicatoridae. The adductors are also most strongly stressed in the Capitonidae and Ramphastidae, the temporal slip of M. adductor mandibulae externus superficialis (M7a), particu- larly, showing a deep incursion to the dorsal midline of the skull posteriorly. This is not met with in the Oscines but is characteristic of the Suboscines and a vast majority of other avian orders. | The Picidae have a good expression of both palatine retractors and adductors but are out- standing for the extreme emphasis on the pro- tractors of the mandibles, M. depressor mandibulae (M1) and M. protractor quadrati (M2). This is especially so in the latter, which originates over most of the area of the interorbital septum which (unlike most birds) is thoroughly ossified in woodpeckers to protect the brain and un- usually ossified in the other piciform families. This arrangement, which is met in the piculets as well as in the more highly-adapted wood- peckers, is also found among passerines in the nuthatch Sitta. Its effectiveness in prying is evi- dent, and it is seen (with M2 less well expressed) in Numerous species of prying birds (Beecher, 1950; 195la and b); but in woodpeckers it prob- ably serves as part of an interesting shock ab- sorbing mechanism. I disagree with Burt (1930) that the woodpecker bill is immovably joined to the skull in even the most highly adapted forms. The only unkinetic bird skull is seen in the lizard-like subclass Archaeornithes. In all other birds the upper mandible joins the skull at the naso-frontal hinge and the jugal-palatopterygoid armature joins its base to the quadrate in a frame that slides along the sphenoidal rostrum under the control of the jaw musculature. The key bone in this process is the movable quadrate which permits these antero-posterior movements of the armature to be translated into elevating and depressing movements of the upper mandible SEPTEMBER 1953 BEECHER: FEEDING ADAPTATIONS IN PICIFORMES 295 HONEY GUIDE ~lndicatoy minox ~ INDICATORIDA- = | — = = = = = zZ a g 2 4 2 Zz eS Zp Fig. 1.—Detail drawing of jaw muscle pattern of the honeyguide (Indicatoridae). Protractors. 1 depresses the lower mandible; 2 elevates the upper mandible. 1. M. depressor mandibulae 2. M. protractor quadrati Palatine retractors. Combined action draws upper mandible downward. 3. M. pterygoideus dorsalis: a) anterior; b) posterior (underlies 2) 4. M. pterygoideus ventralis: a) anterior; b) posterior (underlies a) 5. M. pseudotemporalis profundus Mandibular adductors. Combined action draws lower mandible upward. 6. M. pseudotemporalis superficialis 7. M. adductor mandibulae: a) externus superficialis; b) externus medialis; c) externus profundus; d) posterior In the shock-absorbing mechanism of wood- peckers and nuthatches the antagonistic action of the enormous M2 against the retraction of the pterygoid musculature probably holds the bill in a state of resilient rigidity as it rains its blows on a tree trunk. Woodpeckers also have a special nasal mucous gland (Technau, 1936); this is visible in the floor of the orbit just ventral to the ectethmoid plate and is less well expressed in sapsuckers (Sphyrapicus) than other genera. Since this may serve to trap dust raised by peck- ing (an occupational hazard of woodpeckers like silicosis among humans!) sapsuckers, habitually working soft, green wood, may not need it so much. This has nothing to do with the enormous sub-lingual mucous gland which serves to make the woodpecker tongue sticky. The Indicatoridae, strange to say, show no specializations of the jaw musculature or salivary glands at all. The bill, too, is more generalized than that possessed by any other piciform family, except for the unusual feature that the tips of the peculiarly blunted mandibles meet without notable overlap of the upper—an adaptation, possibly, for biting off bits of wax and honey. But the general facies of the order is recognizable in the jaw muscle pattern which is more gen- eralized than in any of the other families. This is clearly seen in the simple M. pseudotemporalis superficialis (M+) which, in the other families, shows a slight approach to the Suboscines and to Coraciiformes and possibly Trogoniformes. The honey-guide musculature is, in fact, the nearest seen in any of these families to the ideal ground plan for the order. This is not to state that this family is actually ancestral to the others but only that it may more nearly resemble the less spe- cialized common ancestor. In other respects I am inclined to think the basic stock might have been more like the barbets but these have now, in process of developing a massive musculature for power, sheathed much of the musculature in tough aponeuroses to which shorter fibers fuse in semblance to the pinnate muscles so important in the higher Oscines. This is an arrangement found in_ primitive shrikes like Cracticidae, Prionopidae and Vangidae. The only muscles that could class as pinnate in Piciformes are the temporal slip of M7a and M7c. This supports the general opinion as expressed in Wetmore (1940; 1952) and in Mayr and Amadon (1951) that the group is somewhat more primitive than Passeriformes. oscinine 296 JOURNAL OF THE THE TONGUE The tongue is not generally a very reliable index of relationship in birds (Beecher, 1951a) because it 1s apparently so readily modified in conjunction with an extreme feeding adaptation. This is true in Piciformes. The tongues of barbets are the generalized tongues of insect eaters, not distinguishable by any reliable characters from those of some passerine insect eaters, except that, like the other piciform families, the papillae of the posterior surface of the tongue are unusually abundant. The moderately frayed out horny tip is unspecialized in barbets and the tongues of honey eaters are very similar. The tongues of the toucans are simply elongate and narrow, with the fringe extending well posterior; such a tongue would be useful in lapping juice from pulpy fruits as well as in the usual process of biting out pieces. The woodpecker tongue is so vastly modi- fied from the ground plan of the order that little external evidence of relationship remains here. The frayed horny fringe is directed backward as a battery of barbs and the papillae of the posterior border are directed inward to permit withdrawal of the tongue within a skin sheath. The long hy- oids of woodpeckers and the great extensibility of the tongue need no special description. HORNY PALATE The horny palate is in large measure dependent on the tongue and does not always provide direct evidence of relationship where adaptive re-ar- rangement has been extensive, as in the Picidae. In the other four families dissected there is a notable resemblance in the thin cutting edge of the tomium in the upper mandible, combined with the vaulting of the palate itself. This is so pronounced that little evidence of a lateral palate ridge, generally present in passerines, can be seen. The central ridge is strong in all families. Pos- terior palate relief is rather non-descript. ECTETHMOID PLATE The ectethmoid plate is convincingly similar in all of the piciform families and all have the foramen double. This condition is considered advanced in my work on the Oscines, primitive forms having a single foramen which is larger the more primitive they are. In Galliformes, a possible ancestor, the foramen may be said to occupy the entire plate which is not closed ventrally at all. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 9 THE BILL The bill is similar in ground plan in all but the woodpeckers and jacamars, with a very strongly bowed culmen and rather massive upper mandible. The nostril is far posterior, non- operculate and (in honeyguides) raised into a membranous tube. In barbets the bil! may be long or short with the tomium sometimes notched as in Lybius, a feature that seems to be multiplied with length in the toucan bill. Barbets have abundant narial and chin bristles as do puffbirds, but the elongate, straightened bill of jacamars shows reduction of bristles. Puffbirds generally have narrowed, hooked bills. Toucans, wood- peckers, and honeyguides have the bristles virtually lacking and the bills without hooks, except for a slight tendency in toucans which are also much notched. The toucan bill is, of course, unique in the degree of lightness achieved with its cancellous internal structure. In connection with the bill the barbets seem to be fruit and insect eaters, often expert flycatchers; puffbirds are lethargic flycatchers; jacamars, graceful and swift flycatchers. Toucans are fruit and insect eaters. Woodpeckers are specialized insect eaters, eating many wood-boring insects, but also anteaters and flycatchers, some taking sap and flower juices as well as fruit. Honey- guides are insect eaters that evidently have be- come specialized for eating honey and even getting nutrition out of beeswax. This adaptation will be discussed further. PLUMAGE Barbets generally have brilliant plumage— barring and streaking on a ground of yellow or green with flashmarks of crimson—which is clearly similar to that of some woodpeckers. Puffbirds, with barred and streaked plumage also, are duller in color and jacamars are more often coppery green and iridescent brown in solid masses. The puffbirds Nystalis and Malacoptila (and the woodpecker, Jynx) resemble owls and nightjars in plumage, the jacamars resemble hummingbirds. This resemblance is not taken as evidence of direct relationship but other lines of evidence suggest that these orders and many others may be springing independently from Galliformes which I am inclined to regard as our most primitive, unspecialized bird stock. Toucans have plumage patterns of solid greens and yellows and reds suggestive of barbets. Honeyguides re- BEECHER: FEEDING ADAPTATIONS IN PICIFORMES 297 SEPTEMBER 1953 BARBET~ \yous \eucocepnalus ~ CAPITONI DA 2 1) WOODPE-CKER~Ma\anevpes evytnvocephalus ~ PIC [DA- CL ~} Fig. 2.—Detail drawing of jaw muscle pattern in the barbet (Capitonidae), toucan (Ramphastidae) and woodpecker (Picidae). 298 JOURNAL OF THE semble certain dull-patterned barbets like Lybtus leucocephalus. On the basis of plumage, in fact, one would be inclined to say that all piciform families may have originated from the barbets. If so, it would have been before the bills became as specialized as they are now, in all probability. OTHER CHARACTERS The idea that the barbets may be the ancestral piciform family is supported by other characters which might be preadaptive to traits highly expressed in the other families. All these families have zygodactylous feet in which the second and third toes are directed forward, the first and fourth, backward. This arrangement of toes is particularly advantageous for birds climbing about on tree trunks as barbets and woodpeckers do or for perching. Toucans and honeyguides may have largely abandoned this trait without the toes being under any selection to return to the usual condition. Barbets have many of the woodpecking traits of Picidae with highly ossified interorbital septum, a feature found throughout the order, but especially in Picidae. Barbets excavate holes as do woodpeckers. Toucans nest in hollow trees. Honeyguides are parasitic on hole-nesting birds, often members of Piciformes, according to Bannerman (1933). In the pelvic appendage, the re-arrangement of the toes has resulted in changing the position of tendons and loss of the ambiens muscle, considered of im- portant diagnostic value by Garrod (1873). WAX-EATING IN THE HONEYGUIDES As to the honey- and wax-eating adaptation in honey guides, no notable specialization of di- gestive organs was found. There is no sign of enlarged palatine salivary glands such as are found in all the nectar-eating groups of the world (Beecher, 1953)—Dicaeidae, Nectarinidae, Meliphagidae, and the New World humming- birds and honeycreepers. If only honey were taken this would not be surprising because the bulk of this is immediately assimilable and there would be little need for invertase or any enzyme for breaking down sucrose. But Friedmann (MS.) has evidence that honeyguides are able to derive nutrition from beeswax, implying a rather com- plex enzyme action. With the specimens available I could carry out only the crudest sort of sampling technique aimed at studying wax digestion. I removed food material from the oral cavity, stomach, and hind gut of the species studied and WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 9 heated it on a scalpel blade. A wax residue was ob- tained on the blade from contents so treated of oral cavity and stomach of J. ezilis and TJ. maculatus in some samples—never from the hind veut. This might suggest wax digestion in the stomach or small intestine were the sampling adequate. As it stands these results are merely suggestive. This trait of the honeyguides is the more interesting because of their general flair for parasitism. They lay their eggs in the nests of other birds, often close relatives, and they have learned to get animals more capable than them- selves to uncover the honey combs they prefer to feed on. They must have started this specializa- tion in habit by leading animals, perhaps the honey badger (Mellivora) to hives. Chapin (1939) suspects other mammals, including squirels and monkeys, of aiding the birds in getting at honey. The discovery, apparently only by Indicator indicator, that man could be led to bee trees with satisfactory results is necessarily a recent spe- cialization of the trait. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS An investigation of feeding adaptations in the head region of the piciform bird families, Capitonidae, Bucconidae, Ramphastidae, Picidae and Indicatoridae, was undertaken to study their morphological and systematic relationships. The jaw muscle pattern shows a strong facies re- semblance in all, suggesting that the order Pici- formes is a real unit. The honeyguides have the least specialized pattern and may represent the ground plan from which the other families have been derived, though other indications are that the barbets are nearer the ancestral stock. From this ground plan the barbets diverge by having more massive adductors and palatine retractors, the toucans by fusing the slips of M. pterygoideus ventralis and sheathing the musculature increas- ingly in aponeuroses for increased palate retraction. The woodpeckers extend enormously the origins of the mandibular protractors, par- ticularly M. protractor quadrati, a powerful antagonist to the muscles of palate retraction, to produce a shock absorber for the bill. The tongue is so far modified in toucans and wood- peckers as to offer little positive evidence of rela- tionship but the horny palate is less modified and the ectethmoid plate is similar in all. Bills and feeding habits suggest close but disjunct relation- ships in a single series and plumage suggests origin SEPTEMBER 1953 of piciform families from the barbets or an an- cestral group with a somewhat less-pronounced bill. Zygodactylous feet and the hole-nesting habit, taken in combination with the above, sup- port present ornithological thought as to the unity of the order. The trait of honey guides of leading animals to bee hives seems to be part of a general parasitic complex which includes brood parasitism as well. No digestive abnormalities were noted but enzymes for wax digestion may be produced in stomach or small intestine. LITERATURE CITED BANNERMANN, D. A. The birds of tropical West Africa 3: 1-487. Edinburgh and London, 1933. BEECHER, W. J. Convergent evolution in_ the American orioles. Wilson Bull. 62: 51-86. 1950. Adaptations for food-getting in the Ameri- can blackbirds. Auk 68: 411-440. 195la. . Convergence in the Coerebidae. Wilson Bull. 63: 274-287. 1951b. HOFFMAN: PSAMMODESMUS 299 A phylogeny of the Oscines. Auk 70: 270- goo. 1953. Burt, W.H. Adaptive modifications in the wood- peckers. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 32: 455-524. 1930. CuHapPin, J. P. The birds of the Belgian Congo. Part 2. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 75: 1-632. 1939. FrepLerR, W. Beitrage zur Morphologie der Kiefer- muskulatur der Oscines. Zool. Jahrb. (Anat.) T: 235-288. 1951. FRIEDMANN, H. The honey-guides. (MS.) Mayr, E., and AmMapon, D. A classification of Recent birds. Amer. Mus. Nov. no. 1496: 42 pp. 19ol- Mouter, W. Uber die Schnabel- und Zungen- mechanik. bliitenbesuchender Vogel. TI. Biol. Gen. 7: 99-154. 1931. Tecunatu, Gert. Die Nasendriise der Vogel. Zugleich ein Beitrag zur Morphologie der Nasenhohle. Journ. fiir. Orn. 84: 511-617. 1936. WeTmorRE, A. A revised classification for the birds of the world. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 117: 1-22. 1951. ZOOLOGY —Psammodesmus, a neglected milliped genus (Polydesmida: Platyrhaci- dae). RicHARD L. Horrman, Clifton Forge, Va. (Communicated by H. F. Loomis.) It is unfortunate that much of the pre- vious work on diplopod taxonomy has been of rather poor quality. Far too often one finds himself obliged literally to revise a genus or tribe before feeling sate in placing an undescribed species. This is precisely the situation I encountered on endeavoring to place a new platyrhacid milliped found in the collections of the U. 8. National Mu- seum. Fortunately, however, the problem has been of fairly easy resolution although depending upon some rather extensive nomenclatorial changes. Although the group directly involved is a South American one, it has been necessary to consider the entire family of the Platyrhacidae. This has been made possible by the exceptionally useful treatise by Carl Attems, in Das Tierreich, Lief. 69, 1938. Despite the value of this reference, I believe that Attems’s somewhat conservative treatment does not give proper recognition to the numerous species-groups whose characters seem clearly to be of generic level. Attems recognizes a_ single genus—divided into six subgenera—with the characters which I ascribe to the family Platyrhacidae. (The other six genera of “Platyrhacidae” treated in his monograph are referable to the family Euryuridae in the sense of Pocock and Chamberlin. ) Interestingly enough, the first contribu- tion to the systematics of the tropical Amer- ican platyrhacids, by O. F. Cook (1896), still appears to provide the most logical arrangement of the species! Cook was the first worker to break up the large wide- spread genus Platyrhacus (Acanthodesmus or Stenonia of early writers) with the pro- posal of numerous generic names. His ar- rangement, although reasonable, was never generally accepted, and the most authorita- tive recent workers have reverted to the use of the name Platyrhacus tor the majority of the species. There are, however, within the family a great number of diverse types which, if they occurred in the temperate regions where faunas are better known, would long ago have been recognized as well- marked genera. Cook’s paper ‘‘New American Platyr- rhacidae”’ (Brandtia, 1896, no. 12) included the diagnoses of nine new American genera. Four of these (Nyssodesmus, Tirodesmus, Nanorrhacus, and Rhyphodesmus) have been recognized at one time or another by Ameri- can workers. Various others were accepted 300 JOURNAL OF THE by Silvestri in his papers on the neotropical forms and one of these, Psammodesmus, be- comes the subject of the present paper. The genus is redefined on the basis of gonopod structure and a new species is proposed. The type species designated by Cook has not been examined,! but the characters of the genus, as stated in Cook’s description, seem to be quite adequate for at least a generic recognition. The specimens at hand keyed out readily to Psammodesmus on the basis of nonsexual characters; somewhat later it was found that in gonopod structure they are very close to the two species which Silvestri described in that genus in 1897. APPLICATION OF THE NAME PLATYRHACUS The primary difficulty involved in the systematics of the American species is the identity of the type species of Platyrhacus. Concerning this matter, Cook wrote (op. Gli. pawl): The genus Platyrrhacus was based by C. L. Koch on a Brazilian species, Polydesmus scaber Perty, or at least on a specimen so determined, and described as being slightly convex, densely granulate, and with a row of distinct, pearl-like tubercules along the posterior margin of each seg- ment. There are said to be two other rows of some- what smaller tubercules placed wider apart. Al- though the carinae are said to be strongly toothed, they appear from the plate that the teeth are broad and rounded. After studying the descrip- tion in connection with that of another American species described by Koch, Platyrrhacus rufipes, the opinion has been gained that it would not be safe to identify it, even generically, with any of the material which has come into my hands for study. Since no types of Koch’s species have ever been found, to my knowledge, and since it was not customary in his time to designate and retain type specimens, it seems to me that some sort of arbitrary action may be needed to resolve the matter satisfactorily. About the only tangible information for a starting point is the likelihood that since 1 Psammodesmus cos was based on a specimen lent to Cook by the Academy of Natural Sci- ences of Philadelphia. Dr. J. A. G. Rehn, curator of insects at that institution, informs me that it is not now in their collection and probably was not returned. I have not been able to locate it in the National Museum collection, wherein most of Cook’s material was deposited. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 9 Perty’s original animal came from Brazil, the specimen identified as scaber by Koch most probably had a like provenance even though we can never be sure it was even congeneric with Perty’s species. If Platyrhacus as used by Attems is to be divided into more natural genera, the generic name in its restricted sense must be applied to one of the South American genera. At- tems disregarded this necessity in designat- ing Polydesmus pfeifferae Humbert and Saussure, 1869, an East Indian species, as type of the genus. There is a considerable number of recog- nizable American genera, distinguished for the most part by the structure of the gono- pods. Of these genera, Tvzrodesmus and Aymaresmus are disqualified, so far as ap- plication of the name Platyrhacus is con- cerned, because of the shape of the keels in those two groups. Of the remainder, it seems best to apply the name to that genus which is most numerous in species and has the widest range; and thus would be most likely encountered by early collectors. The group which most readily qualifies is that including clathratus, bilineatus, propinquus, tenebrosus, and their close relatives. It ex- tends from Nicaragua into western Brazil. There is nothing in Koch’s description and plate to preclude association of his generic name with this group (of which Cook ap- parently had seen no specimens—cf. the last sentence of his paragraph quoted above). It is felt that an eventual decision regard- ing the identity of P. scaber, involving a redescription and designation of type speci- mens, will be desirable and necessary for a final settlement of this issue. At the present time this step can not be taken, in the lack of adequate material for study. Should the present allocation meet with general approval, it will become necessary to select one of the numerous generic names already available for the group of Indonesian species treated by Attems in his subgenus Platyrhacus. Ten such names (proposed by Cook, Pocock, and Silvestri) are listed as synonyms in Attems’s account. Since his “subgenus” seems clearly to be heterogene- ous, itis probably advisable to delay nomen- clatorial settlement until at least a partial SEPTEMBER 1953 restudy of the East Indian forms has been made.? Genus Psammodesmus Cook Psammodesmus Cook, 1896, Brandtia, no. 12: 52.— Silvestri, 1897, Boll. Mus. Torino 12 (305): 15. Platyrhacus subgenus Tzirodesmus Attems, 1938, Das Tierreich, Lief. 69: 229 (in part). Ernostyx Chamberlin, 1941, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 78: 497 (type, EH. moyobambus Cham- berlin). Type species—Psammodesmus cos Cook, by original designation. Generic diagnosis—Platyrhacid millipeds * characterized by the following combination of features: Dorsum slightly arched, keels set high on sides; lateral edges of keels almost smooth, bearing only two or three small teeth (somewhat emarginate in moyobambus) ; tergites divided into three transverse rows of poorly defined polygonal areas, each of which has a tiny median tubercule; repugnatorial pores small, removed from the edge of the keels by a distance of from 2 to 6 times the diameter of the peritreme area; collum with an anterior row of large tubercules, behind which is a distinct transverse depression. Male gonopods with the prefemur and femur coalesced into a rather stout, straight, and un- modified trunk, terminating distally in a large flattened tibiotarsal blade and a tapering, slender solenomerite branch. The genus is especially characterized by the fact that these terminal ele- ments are bent in a direction away from the coxal portion of the gonopod. The impression given is that of an arm bent at a right angle at the elbow, with the thumb and opposed cupped fingers pointing away from the shoulder. In the genus Platyrhacus the tibiotarsus and solenomerite are 2 Attems’s treatment of the Platyrhacidae leaves much to be desired in the way of consist- ency. Despite his inclination to reduce the number of supraspecific categories as much as possible, his own groupings are not always defensible. A case in point is the subgenus Ozorhacus, proposed in Das Tierreich (69: 253) for the inclusion of 10 species. As shown by the illustrations of the gono- pods, none of the referred forms are closely related to the type species (katantes Attems). Rather, of them, amblyodon and coelebs are very close to singulus and microporus, resvectively, which At- tems places in the subgenus Platyrhacus; mortonz, postumus, tetanotropis, and sarasinorum are allied with the group of species (particularly mediotaent- atus) placed by Attems in Psaphodesmus. Further- more, fecundus and sterilis on the one hand, and arietis on the other, cannot be allocated to any currently recognized grouping; doubtléss generic names will have to be proposed for them. HOFFMAN: PSAMMODESMUS 301 bent in the opposite direction—back toward the coxa. Synonymy.—Attems (op. cit., p. 226) grouped almost all the American platyrhacids in a sub- genus to which he applied Cook’s name Tirodes- mus (type, fimbriatus Peters). It is felt that this species is quite worthy of generic distinction from the other Neotropical forms (because of the char- acteristic shape of the lateral carinae as well as the male gonopods) ; Tvroedesmus is at present con- sidered to be monospecific. Chamberlin has recently described several new genera of the family from northeastern Peru. It is apparent from his paper that he did not con- sider the known diplopod faunas of immediately adjacent countries such as Ecuador and Brazil; furthermore the drawings given for his genus Ernostyx are strongly suggestive of the sort typical of Psammodesmus. At my request, Dr. Willis J. Gertsch very generously lent the holo- type of Ernostyx moyobambus from the collection of the American Museum of Natural History. Examination of this specimen disclosed that it is congeneric with the new species of Psammodesmus to be described (cf. Figs. 4, 5), and that if my understanding of that genus is correct, Ernostyx must fall as a junior synonym. Species.—KHight. Range.—Cordilleran region of northwestern South America; from northeastern Peru to the isthmus of Panama. Psammodesmus schmitti Loomis and Hoffman, Mer siee Figs. 1-4 Type specuomens.—Male holotype in the collec- tion of the U. S. National Museum; collected at Port Obaldia, Province of Darién, Panama, by H. Pittier (around 1914). Two male paratypes, also in the National Museum, from Cana, Province of Darién, collected by E. A. Goldman in June 1912. Diagnosis.—Characterized primarily by the shape of the tibiotarsal lamina of the male gonopod. Its distal edge is gently arcuate, only slightly extended beyond the level of the soleno- merite. In the other known species the distal 3 This species was recognized as new and a de- scription was prepared by H. F. Loomis from the Port Obaldia specimen. On learning of my interest in Psammodesmus he kindly forwarded the speci- men and his description and drawings. All these have been utilized in the above text, and it seems appropriate to consider the species as described jointly by Loomis and myself. 302 margin of this part is produced upwards into a pronounced angulation. Description of type —Body 53 mm long and 9.5 mm wide. Dorsum moderately convex; lateral carinae projecting from above the middle of the body, slightly deflexed and extending far from the sides, decidedly broader than long, anterior margin with a prominent square shoulder at the base. Head with the ridges of the vertex broad, tortuous, converging backward but not quite meeting at the groove; shining-coriaceous clypeal area triangular with the upper angle opposite the lower margin of the antennal sockets; re- mainder of surface finely tubercular. Antennae relatively long, reaching caudad to middle of the third tergite; articles sparingly hirsute, 2nd to 5th similar in size and shape, 6th very slightly longer. Collum with the median two-thirds of the anterior margin broadly rounded, the outer sixth on each side straight and bent sharply JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 9 ectocaudad and with 6 to 8 rounded crenations or nodules; outer fourth of the posterior margin on each side slanting obliquely inward to the trans- verse median half. Surface of the segment densely beset with small tubercules and a row of 10 to 12 large, rounded, pearllike ones just behind the median portion of the front margin; another row of 8 to 10 similar tubercules near the posterior margin, and the disk with 8 to 10 large scattered tubercules. Behind the depression following the anterior row of tubercules the surface of the segment is raised into a reniform swelling, having the emargination in front. Succeeding segments with the surface sculpture ~ as on the collum, having large tubercules in a row in front of the posterior margin and scattered ones in front, except on the posterior segments where these tubercules are arranged in two rows in addition to the marginal series. On the posterior segments the smaller tubercules are much less distinct than toward the front of the body. Lateral carinae considerably broader than WAST TN 0 nn f Z << Fies. 1-5.—1, Gonopods, in situ, of male holotype of Psammodesmus schmitti, n. sp., Port Obaldia, Panama; 2, lateral carina of tenth segment of same, dorsal view; 3, last tergite of same, dorsal view; 4, left gonopod of same, mesial view (abbreviations: c, coxa; pf, prefemur; ti, tibiotarsus; s, soleno- merite); 5, left gonopod of male holotype of Psammodesmus moyobambus, Moyobamba, Peru, mesial aspect. SEPTEMBER 1953 HOFFMAN: long, with a distinct shoulder in front just ectad of the base; posterior angles very gradually in- creasing in length toward the back. Nineteenth segment with the keels bent caudad and their posterior margins almost longitudinal. Pore for- mula normal; the pores surrounded by a broad, flat rim (peritreme); pores remote from the margins of the keels—being 4 to 7 times the diameter of the pore area from the outer margin, and 3 to 4 times its diameter from the posterior margin. In the drawing of the carina of segment 10 (Fig. 2) the pore appears about equidistant from the outer and posterior margins. However the downward slant of the carina causes a fore- shortening effect and the pore is actually much more remote from the outer than from the pos- terior margin. Last segment elongate-rounded; below and at the base of this dorsal production the surface on each side is produced into a distinct setiferous tubercule (Fig. 3). Anal valves with each raised margin bearing a setiferous tubercule above, and another tuber- cule on the disk of each valve close to the margin below the middle. Preanal scale with the anterior production covering a considerable portion of the ventral posterior margin of the last segment; setiferous tubercules of the posterior margin long, closely placed, divergent, the margin between them short, rounded-acute. Ventral surfaces and legs generally very smooth and shining. Prozonites somewhat longer than metazonites. Legs attached to a small raised area that is noticeably elevated above the level of the prozonite. Spiracles opening through small rounded tubercules, one above the insertion of each leg. Legs moderately long (apical third of third joint visible from above when legs are extended) and slender, sparingly bristled. Length of joints, in decreasing order of length, 3-6-5-2-4-1. Third joint slightly longer than the basal two. Anterior legs without processes. Tubercules of the sterna between legs 4, 5, and 6 distinctly compressed from side to side, other sterna with rounded tubercules at the bases of the legs. Gonopods projecting from a rounded-ovate sternal aperture, the posterior margin of which is strongly elevated. Seen in ventral aspect, the gonopods (Fig. 1) appear nearly straight for two- thirds of their length, with the distal third bent at a 45 degree angle mesiad and away from the PSAMMODESMUS 303 sternites. Coxae of gonopods rather small, some- what ovoid, without projections or large hairs. Prefemur and femur inseparable, unless the point of their coalescence is indicated by an indenta- tion on the side near the coxa (this indentation is also present in moyobambus). Setose area along outer margin extends about two-thirds the length of the joimt, which is robust and relatively straight. Course of seminal channel indicated by a long gently arcuate groove. Tibiotarsus repre- sented by a large, somewhat crescent-shaped blade, the terminal end of which points away from the coxa. The distal margin of this part is arcuate, the free proximal margin concave, as shown in the drawing. Arising at the base of the tibiotarsus is a slender, unbranched, somewhat sinuate solenomerite. After 40 years of preservation the specimen is completely bleached, and no conjecture can be made concerning the color of the living animal. Remarks.—The two paratypes from Cana differ slightly in that sternal spines are so faint as to be easily overlooked. In them, too, the tergites show a tendency to be divided into three transverse rows of polygonal areas which are, however, perceptible only with the specimens dried. The gonopods of all three specimens are identical in every respect. The species is named for Dr. Waldo L. Schmitt, head curator of zoology in the U. S. National Museum, in recognition of his con- tributions to the knowledge of Middle American Crustacea and in appreciation of his cooperation and assistance which have greatly facilitated my work at the U. 8. National Museum. | THE SPECIES OF PSAMMODESMUS Eight species are at present referable to the genus. It is a matter of some regret that males of the type species are as yet unknown; however, it is believed that P. cos can read- ily be distinguished on the basis of non- sexual characters. Another species is like- wise known only from the female sex. This was described by Chamberlin (op. cit) as Platyrrhacus cainarachus. The description and figures given, however, agreed so well with the characters of Psammodesmus that the type specimen of cainarachus was re- examined. I am again indebted to Dr. Gertsch for making this specimen available for examination. It is clearly a species of 304 Psammodesmus, and very close to moyobam- bus. In order to summarize what is now known about the genus, I subjoin a tentative key for identineanion of the species, and a list indicating pertinent literature and distri- bution. 1. Repugnatorial Bones removed from edge of keel by a disteace of 5 or 6 times the diameter of Cook REDUEHaNEL pores removed from edge of keel by a distance generally not exceeding 4 times diameter of the peritreme. . 2 . Lateral margin of midbody keels excavated or indented adjacent to the pores............ 5) Lateral margins of keels not excavated or in- ented schist Ge Sei tnt cyan | ite ee See ete 4 3. Dorsal tubercules of normal, moderate size, at most hemispherical in shape moyobambus (Chamberlin) Dorsal tubercules enlarged, higher than wide and very prominent cainarachus (Chamberlin) 4. Solenomerite short, simply arcuate . chuncho (Chamberlin) Solenomerite longer, definitely bisinuate or Somewhat sigmoid in, Shape... 2.0... 5.5... 5 5. Tibiotarsus of gonopod semicircular or nearly so in shape, its inner edge straight and in- dented from inner edge of femur, thus expos- ingsbase ol Solemomentte ge yore ee 6 Tibiotarsus not semicircular, its inner (or dis- tal) margin continuous with that of femur, not exposing base of the solenomerite...... 7 6. Dorsum dark brown, with the keels lighter . camerani Silvestri Dorsum dark gray with two paramedian longi- tudinal light gray stripes fasciolatus Silvestri i) JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 9 7. Tibiotarsus subcrescentic in shape schmitt Loomis and Hoffman Tibiotarsus subtriangular in shape dasys (Chamberlin) PSAMMODESMUS cos Cook: Brandtia, Colombia. no. 12:52; 1896s cameranit Silvestri: Boll. Zool. Mus. Torino 12 (305): 15, fig. 41. 1897. Ecuador: San José, Gualaquiza, San Antonio. fasciolatus Silvestri: Boll. Zool. Mus. 1898. Ecuador: Rio Peripa. cainarachus (Chamberlin) : Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 78 (7): 491, figs. W167, Oda Peru: Dept. of Loreto, Rio Cainarachi. chuncho (Chamberlin) : Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 78 (7): 497, fig. 197A. 1941. Peru: Dept. of Loreto, Iquitos. dasys (Chamberlin) : Bull. Amer. Mus. figs. 193-96. 1941. Peru: Dept. of Loreto, Contayo Hills, Rio Tapiche. moyobambus (Chamberlin) : Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 78 (7): 498, figs. 188-92. 1941. Peru: Dept. of Loreto, Moyobamba, sapuerto Trail. schmitti Loomis and Hoffman Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. figs. 1-4. 1953. Panama: Prov. of Darién; Cana, Port Obaldia. Torino 13 (824): 4, fig. 6G. Nat. Hist:, 78°): 43 Bal- 43: 301-303, Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences NPRM ER Go eed cae ewan nee wou F. M. Serzuer, U. S. National Museum Wercotdemt-Clect. =... ee tee ee F, M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards ETS). . ee ese are “Jason R. Swauuen, U.S. National Museum PREMSUTER 2 4... :- .'- Howarp S. Rappuere, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired) Pe Ee gs Sone ee eee Joun A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haratp A. REupDER, U.S. National Museum Vice-Presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Pnilosopnical Society of Washington................ 0.2... c ee eens A. G. McNisH Anthropological Society of Washington..................... Wi.i1amM H. GILBERT Biolosical Society of Washington.................5....... Hueu THomas O’NEILL Ghemies! society of Washington. ................000..00 GEORGE W. IRVING, JR. Entomological Society of Washington. ................0.6. 00sec eee F. W. Poos miaitona! Geographic Society............5-....-c.cee es ceees ALEXANDER WETMORE meaiarical society of Washington................ 05.505 0..0s0 es A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................. FREDERICK O. CoE Samia eiistorical Society... 2... 0.052. eas cece cece wee dee GILBERT GROSVENOR Potanies| society of Washington.....................6..5.- Harry A. BorTHWICcK Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... GEORGE F. GRAVATT iesmmmnton Society Of Mngincers.... 222. 0... ee a ca ene n wenn eas C. A. Bretts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers..ARNoLD H. Scotr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers RicHarD §. Diruu Helminthological Society of Washington.......................... L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists.......... GLENN SLocuM Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fiorp W. HoucH Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers....... HERBERT GROVE DORSEY District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers j Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Section, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine N.R. Evxis Washington Chapter, American Society of Metals............. JoHN G. THOMPSON Elected Members of the Board of Managers: oS gL So Soa Sara E. BrannamM, Mitton Harris RR Me il fae oy ac sine bp n'a wk ole hn otha grtces 0 R. G. Batges, W. W. DIEHL MRE EMEP A PS os as Sted sie ain gee Rees ee M. A. Mason, R. J. SEEGER MriaE ay NECUAQETS... 2»... 2. eee ees All the above officers plus the Senior Editor marae Hatters and Associate Hditors... ... 0... ww. ee ees [See front cover] mircemme COmmillee,...:........-...4% F. M. Serzuer (chairman), F. M. DEFANDORF, J. R. Swatuen, H.S. Rappieve, W. W. Rupey Committee on Membership...... E. H. Wax.xker (chairman), Myron §S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE Cottam, C. L. Crist, JoHN Faser, ANaus M. GrirFin, D. BREESE JONEs, Frank C. Kracex, Louis R. Maxwe.u, A. G. McNisu, Epwarp C. REINHARD, REESE I. SaiterR, Leo A. SHINN, Francis A. Smita, Heinz Specut, Horace M. TRENT, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings................. Watson Davis (chairman), JoHN W. ALDRICH, AusTIN CuarkK, D. J. Davis Committee on Monographs (W. N. FENTON, chairman): REID ee yd Sala we alareanae ib Ste gay c's 34s S. F. Buaxke, F. C. Kracex URIPEEUAN TS Soa wiv cca Ski musa ven bw ree egiga xe eae we W.N. Fenton, ALAN STONE Meomary 19567 sce ce eek G. ARTHUR CoopPER, JAMES I. HOFFMAN Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (A. V. ASTIN, general chairman): For Biological Sctences...... HERBERT FRIEDMANN (chairman), Harry A. Bortu- WICK, Sara E). BRANHAM, [RA B. HANSEN, BENJAMIN SCHWARTZ, T. DALE STEWART For Engineering Sciences...... SAMUEL Levy (chairman), MicHaEL GOLDBERG, K. H. Kennarp, EK. B. Rosperts, H. M. Trent, W. A. WiLpHAcK For Physical Sciences...... G. B. SchuBavuER (chairman), R. 8S. Burtneton, F. C. Kracex, J. A. SANDERSON, R. J. Srreaer, J. S. WILLIAMS For Teaching of Science..M. A. Mason (chairman), F. KE. Fox, Monror H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research............... Karu F. HerzFrevp (chairman), HERBERT N. Eaton, L. E. Yocum Committee on Policy and Planning: Meoebamany 1954 oo ke oa leases H. B. Couuins, W. W. Rusery (chairman) ce PESTER LADS en RE 0 pe L. W. Parr, F. B. SILsBEE Prem PIE, WONG. eile see ews a oR Ma eee sale « E. C. CritTENDEN, A. WETMORE Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPueErson, chairman): Midna Wont ae 4s ofr ound cchoa edge oe aes a 6 J. M. CatpweE .u, W. L. Scumittr Mr ienmary A955 oo ak ew de we SN Aaa A. T. McPuerson, W. T. READ parE Ey iy ete AL oss i i's oar ie abe Austin Cuark, J. H. McMILLEN meanesemiative on Council.of A. A. AL S.y ooo wees lee. wc csc cence eae Watson Davis Committee of Auditors....... Loutsse M. Russe (chairman), R. 8. D111, J. B. REESIDE Committee of Tellers...... C. L. GarNnzER (chairman), L. G. Henspest, Myrna F. JoNEs CONTENTS ARCHEOLOGy.—Additional information on the Indian pottery from Pis- saseck (Leedstown), Westmoreland County, Virginia. Cart F. WEB oo ee ace Se ae ee PALEONTOLOGY.—The morphology and classification of the oldhaminid brachiopods. ALWYN: WILLIAMS ......:.)....%...1.9>. a3 EntTomoLocy.—aAdditional material on the phylogeny and dispersal of Atopsyche (Trichoptera: Rhyacophilidae). Hrrspert H. Ross.... ORNITHOLOGY.—Feeding adaptations and systematics in the avian order Piciformes. Wi.iraM J.beECHER ... 2) ..2)-25)..5 Pee ZooLocy.—Psammodesmus, a neglected milliped genus (Polydesmida: Platyrhacidae). Ricnarp L. HoFFMAN ...........2...... 53a This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. Page 273 279 287 299 Sf fee ee ee Ss $06.73 ae PAward VoL. 43 OcToBER 1953 No. 10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS J. P. E. Morrison Joun C. EwrErRs R. K. Coox U.8. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. CuHaceg, JR. EvBertT L. LIrtyez, JR. ZOOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrMan Puitie DRUCKER CHEMISTRY ANTHROPOLOGY DEAN B. CowlIE Davip H. DUNKLE PHYSICS GEOLOGY ALAN STONE ENTOMOLOGY a wee NOVS 1953 LIBRARY — PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royat & GuILFoRD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND it Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925 Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.2 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 .50 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 7.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 10.50 400 13.00 26 .00 39.00 52.00 65.00 14.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. ReHnpER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JoURNAL.—Per year............--.c-.-0+2+-se5eee $7 .50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — _— Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 42, inel.) available for sale to libraries at $356.00. MonograPu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann. $4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete... .........+......-eseeeeeeee $25.00 Single volumes, unbound .:\...25 0 0i00k. Capea e wat ek cent oss. oe eee er 2.00 Sins@le MuMBers. . sacs co aw oe cite Jake. cael Sees Ameen ee eee .25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and addressed to the Treasurer, H.S. RappLeye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12, D.C. Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 43 October 1953 No. 10 BIOLOGY .—Speculation on the cosmic function of life. A. A. Witttamson, Wash- ington, D. C. (Communicated by Waldo L. Schmitt.) “«..the demonstration of the existence of a general trend which can legitimately be called progress, and the definition of its limitations, will remain as a fundamental contribution of evolu- tionary biology to human thought.’’—JULIAN HUXLEY. The principles or laws of thermodynamics have been variously stated. The most suc- cinct formulation of the so-called first law of thermodynamics was given by Rudolf Clausius in 1850: that the energy of the universe is constant. This is the principle of the conservation of energy: it can be neither created nor destroyed. Clausius also formulated what is known as the second law of thermodynamics: that the entropy of the universe tends to a maximum. This is the principle of the dissipation of energy, theoretically ending in the ‘‘heat-death”’ of the universe when all energy will be uni- formly distributed at a dead level of ineffec- tiveness. At first sight, these two laws seem con- tradictory. For if cosmic energy, however indestructible, tends to reach a common dead level at which it can perform no more work, then is it not thereby reduced to zero? Is not that what the theoretic ‘“‘heat- death”’ of the universe actually means, and can it mean anything else? The answer is, of course, that the first law remains theoret- ically true even after the second has robbed it of practical meaning: the potentiality is still there but it is not ‘‘available.”’ Since the discovery of radiation the theory has been advanced that the effective energy of the universe is constantly being replen- ished or restored by radiation changing back to matter just as matter is known to change into radiation. Millikan, Smuts, and the mathematician Bishop C. W. Barnes have held this view. It is a ‘‘mechanical”’ theory which, in characteristic fashion, excludes as needless all consideration of animate nature, that world of life of which man is a part. So does Maxwell’s proposed sorting of mole- cules except that it would involve control by intelligence. One of the greatest if not the most im- portant of the problems of philosophy is to discover and define man’s relation to the universe. To explain how he is able to know about it, to perceive and to theorize, is the particular problem of epistemology. Many answers to these problems have been pro- pounded since the early Greeks wrestled with them, and—in the Western World— they have had or lost validity commensur- ately with their conformity to the scientific knowledge of their time. As advancing scien- tific knowledge has required readjustments of thought when new and better concepts superseded older, less adequate ones, so have the philosophical and epistemological an- swers had to change. Science forced it upon them. And so, what with modern advances in science, philosophy may find itself com- pelled to seek new readjustments in its an- swers, perhaps even of a basic character. These matters are not of academic interest only. The vital part played by systematic philosophy in the life of man is now well known. As F. 8. C. Northrop has pointed out in The Meeting of East and West, the world has come at last to realize, through World War II and its aftermath, that our present ‘“‘time of troubles” has its roots in conflicts of ideologies or philosophical under- standings. By and large, such conflicts have lain close to the roots of war throughout history. ad oO 306 JOURNAL OF THE It is the purpose of this paper to outline— to sketch in impressionistic manner almost to the complete neglect of supporting argu- mentation and therefore dogmatically— a schematic concept, philosophical in char- acter, which, despite its ultimate reliance on speculation, suggests in a new and differ- ent way how the energy of the universe may be in a constant process of restoration in effectiveness despite its dissipation. This novel concept may have a special interest because it does include the world of animate nature and finds a specific, even a necessary place for humanity in its philosophical dis- course. And lest there be doubt as to the power of biological science to profoundly affect philosophical understandings, it may be well to recall that it was Aristotle, the very father of biology as a science, whose philosophy, powerfully influenced by his bio- logical studies, became basic through St. Thomas Aquinas to the present or later (post-Augustinian) Roman Catholic ortho- dox doctrine, while it was Darwin who forced basic ideological change upon the modern world. Through Darwin’s insistence upon natural selection as a causative force in speciation, we now have a general acceptance of evolu- tion in lieu of specific spontaneous creation. But—despite shifts away from and back to Darwinism—evolution still has no prophetic meaning. It looks backward, not forward, and few can derive much satisfaction from it as explanatory of man’s place in nature’s scheme of things and the course of human history, past, present, or future. While some authorities see evolution as a progressive process, their definition of progress (that it consists in greater control over or independ- ence of environment) defines what is actu- ally only a corollary of progress. They also deny that evolution has or can have any End, Purpose, or Objective, thus disregard- ing the difference between progress and mere progression. Other authorities hold that evo- lution is not progressive at all but is, on the contrary, regressive. Others, again, look upon it as nothing more than mere change. Evolu- tion thus has its optimistic, pessimistic, and neutral schools of thought. The uncertainty and confusion of thought thus evident comes, it would seem, from the WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 10 fact that all three schools fail to take into consideration what has the appearance of being the master biologicals phenomenon of this planet. That phenomenon is the so-called “pyra- mid of life,’ but especially the great mam- mahan pyramid to which man belongs and in which he finds his place. This figure of speech is a one-time well known expression epitomizing a biological truism. But, because it was as useless or merely curious an item of knowledge as the equally well known fact that (with only three known constant ex- ceptions) all mammals have seven cervical vertebrae, it fell into disuse and is now so seldom employed as to make it require ex- planation, which will be made as brief as possible here. The pyramid of life phenomenon results from two basic facts, with a supplementary third: (1) all living things require food or sustenance for their growth and mainten- ance; and (2) only vegetable forms of life can manufacture their own food, they having the power to transmute inorganic substance into organic. Therefore all other forms of life depend for their existence upon the green things of the earth, with such negligible exceptions as the sulphur and the iron bac- teria as chemoautotrophs. The supplementary third fact is that ani- mal life evolved in two main, general classes with respect to food sources: herbivores and carnivores.! Hence a very large number of plants is required to sustain the necessarily smaller but still large number of herbivores which must die in order that one single carnivore may live. There is thus a diminu- tion of number as life rises, level by level from plant to herbivore and from herbivore to carnivore. The second (herbivorous) level is superimposed upon the first (vegetal) level and the third (carnivorous) level is super- imposed upon the second. This superimposi- tion of level on level, together with the necessarily consequent diminution of num- ber, is what gives the pyramid its figurative name. 1“Tn general, land animals fall rather sharply into herbivores and carnivores, and omnivorous tvpes are exceptions rather than the rule.’’ ALLER, Emerson, Park, O., Park, T., and Scumipt: ee of Animal Ecology, p. 241. Philadelphia, 49, : OcToBER 1953 Each individual carnivore is the capstone of its own pyramid, but the phenomenon is world wide and so all those little, individual pyramids may be envisioned as components of one grand pyramid of worldwide extent. It is, however, a truncate pyramid, having no apex of numerical singularity. Since there are many carnivore-including categories of lifeforms—birds, reptiles, fishes, insects, mammals, and so on—there are a corresponding number of particular pyra- mids, at least one for each such category, and the more primitive the category is, the less distinctly formed is its pyramid. But the only one which concerns us here is that one to which the mammals, including man, be- long. For it alone has carried pyramid con- struction beyond the carnivorous level in such a way as to give promise of eventually producing an apical capstone for that world- wide structure. In so doing, it will more surely confirm what is here contended: that biological evolutionary progress is factual; that its perpetual landmarks are the succes- sively superimposed levels of the grand, mammalian pyramid of life; and that the End toward which that progress marches is that pyramid’s adumbrated eventual apex. By and large, wherever there are plants, there also are feeders upon them; and wherever there are enough such feeders to sustain it, even briefly, there will carnivorous life be also. Thus the areas of aggregate territorial dominion are, in effect, the same for all three levels, and by identity. But each individual member of a superimposed (evolutionarily superior) level will, on an average and as compared with individual members of its imposed-upon level, exercise a greater expanse of that territorial dominion the assertion and maintenance of which is the price of existence among the living, a universal law of life with a wide range of application but no exceptions. This succes- sive augmentation of individual territorial dominion, level by level, follows necessarily from the domination of the same territorial ageregate by a diminished aggregate of dom- inators. It is, indeed, simple arithmetic, for when the same dividend of aggregate domin- ion 1s divided among a decreased number of dominators as divisor, the quotient of average individual dominion must increase WILLIAMSON: COSMIC FUNCTION OF LIFE 307 in inverse proportion. (Halving the divisor doubles the quotient.) Now, the atoms of physical matter are emergents in the sense of William Morton Wheeler’s definition, which states that emer- gence in the scientific sense is “‘a novelty of behavior [new properties] resulting from the specific interaction or organization of a num- ber of elements, whether inorganic, organic or mental, which thereby constitute a whole as distinguished from their mere sum or ‘resultant’.”’? For atoms are constituted of electrons, protons, neutrons, and so on, all specifically interacting to form a whole.” The physical organisms of animate nature are also emergents in the same scientific sense, for they are constituted of cells, whether they be plants or animals and in- cluding biological man, the herbivorous and carnivorous levels of the pyramid being most fundamentally differentiated by their mode of securing sustenance. But the habits of predators require of them the constant exer- cise of superior mental powers. “It takes brains to stalk a prey; if the would-be eater is more stupid than his potential dinner, his chances are poor,” says Alfred 8S. Romer in Man and the \ ertebrates. Thus, it appears to be in carnivorous animal life that mind be- gins to assume particularly significant evolu- tionary value in the pyramid-building proc- ess, It becoming highly significant in man. There are anatomical and historical rea- sons for beheving that man had a carniv- orous ancestry, and that he did not ‘‘come down from the trees,” for he never was in them, as (among others) the African fossil primate known as Proconsul appears to indi- cate (W. E. Le Gros Clark). Man’s erect posture seems to have been made possible by the shorter, less bulky and ponderous intestines characteristic of carnivores in gen- eral, as is also the frontal eye-placement permitting stereoscopic vision and favoring brain-case enlargement. These useful effects of the predatory habit, to which they are especially valuable, seem to be man’s by inheritance. Not just meat-eating, but the morphological effects of the hunting habit 2 Emergence, sometimes called epigenesis, vio- lates the maxim that there can not be in the con- sequent anything more than or different in nature from that which was in the antecedent. 308 JOURNAL OF THE helped materially in making man the dom- inant physical organism that he is, and on a world wide scale. All physical organisms——plants, animals, and human beings—when they die, make a final return to the general ‘“‘atom bank’ of the universe, that return consisting of the chemical elements composing their bodies at the time of death. This is a residual reversion back to matter by the disintegra- tion of produced effects. Expositions of the biological evolutionary process commonly carry it up to man and there they stop. There, “natural history”’ ends and ‘‘human history” begins. The gen- eral biologist is through, and the experts of the various disciplines which (in English- speaking countries) come under the omnibus heading of anthropology take over. In one way or another they all study man as what Aristotle said he is: namely, ‘‘a political ani- mal,’ which means one given to social or- ganization. Man shares with certain insects the dis- tinction of being able to create societies which are just as much emergents in the sense of Wheeler’s definition as are atoms and physical organisms, being wholes‘ or -in- dividualizations resulting from the specific interaction or organization of their consti- tuting, living elements and exhibiting new properties as a direct consequence, in cul- tures and civilizations. It is worthy of note that the power of a human culture to ad- vance to civilization seems to hinge upon its ability to accumulate and exploit conserv- able, need-supplying surpluses. These have been called ‘‘margins of vitality,’ and they may be of a material or an ideational char- acter. The greater their number and diver- sity, the higher and more complex may be the stage of civilization attained. In all societies the family appears to be the basic unit, comparable in that respect to the cell of physical organisms and to the atoms of matter. But the societies of the social insects are only grandiose families, and, being fiercely hostile to strangers even of their own kind, they have never produced more broadly constituted societies, whereas man has. The most stable large-scale human social organization is the nation, and the $3 HasKINS, Caryu P.: Of Societies and Men, p. 231. New York, 1951. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 10 position here taken is that nations, however constituted politically, are true organisms which, in aggregate, form a new and higher level in the mammalian pyramid of life, thus carrying the evolutionary process on beyond man as an accomplished fact. In the pyramid of life so viewed, national societies constitute a level higher than and superior to man by the same general, source-of-sus- tenance criterion of superiority valid with respect to other levels in it, that sustenance now being the aggregated, composite mental activity of the human sustainers, institu- tionally embodied and organized. But indi- vidual man, in the role of sustainer, has an ey- olutionary priority which cannot be reversed and which steadily becomes increasingly significant, even from the strictly evolu- tionary point of view, as the sustenance- supplying value of cultivated human intel- lects is more and more heavily accented in the course of history and democracy as a political system (which alone it is) ap- proaches the ideal of private liberty and public order successfully maintained in bal- ‘ance, one against the other.‘ Analytical study of the mammalian pyra- mid of life up to and including the level of the carnivores reveals the following princi- ples, which appear to be universal with respect to it: I. The law of territorial dominion. (In one or more of a great variety of possible ways, every individual must rule the source of its sustenance or lose its liberty if not its life.) II. All evolutionary superiors depend for their existence upon the prior and continued existence of their evolutionarily inferior sus- tainers. (A lower level must precede a higher. ) III. Diminution of number, level by level. IV. Identity of aggregate territorial do- minion for all levels. (Each level must finally establish worldwide dominion.) V. Increased individual territorial do- minion in inverse proportion to diminution of * Public order (governmental organization) is essential to community life, while the greatest degree of private liberty consistent therewith alone can give effective expression to those superior, creative mentalities which may appear sporadically in all levels of society by whatever criterion and which cannot be predicted. Only democracy can well assure both these desirables. OcTOBER 1953 number. (A necessary consequence of III and IV as previously noted.) All these principles apply with full force to societies, both insect and human, and, in this paper, nations, as true organisms, are held to constitute a new level of existential reality: the mental or psychozoic. It was when man, adopting systematic agriculture, began to form sedentary socie- ties that he was forced to become definitely omnivorous, just as were the nesting ants despite their carnivorous ancestry, they hav- ing evolved from wasps. For only vegetable sources can furnish the abundant and de- pendable food supply required by a populous, permanently located. society, while meat- hunger persists for both phylogenetic and physiological reasons, meat still being man’s most perfect natural food. It has been argued (among other reasons) that nations do not qualify as organisms because they have no natural span of life. But there are arguments, not adducible here, which, in rebuttal, suggest that should na- tions actually have such a life span, history is still too brief to reveal it. Nations do, however, cease to be, and when they do they may leave archeological remains comparable to the fossil remains of physical organisms. Here, too, there appears to be a residual reversion to the ‘“‘atom bank” of the uni- verse, also by the disintegration of produced effects. In recent years the vision of a unitary World Order has risen once again as it has risen repeatedly in the mind of man through the ages. There is reason to believe that realization of that vision is at last approach- ing the possible but that it is contingent upon the prior formation of (cultural?) re- gional supranational organizations if not or- ganisms. Only when they first shall have been constituted in permanence does it seem probable that the vision of One World can later be realized. And in that realization, far in the future though it now may lie, our planetary mammalian pyramid of life will find its apex. One of the greatest obstacles to such reali- zation is that only democratic nations as known in the West seem able to cooperate in harmony, wherefore they alone appear to give promise of carrying the process to its apical End, its Final One of diminution of WILLIAMSON: COSMIC FUNCTION OF LIFE 309 number, and democracy is still only a West- ern phenomenon. But back of that lies the still greater difficulty that One World can- not permanently eventuate until one basic philosophy is common to the nations. The pyramid of life concept—giving meaning to the evolutionary process such as it does not now have and stressing the cooperative, or- ganizing impulse as primary therein—could become the cornerstone of such a philosophy, rooted in natural law and growing logically from it as all valid philosophies must, or must appear to in the light of the scientific knowledge of their time. The pyramid of hfe concept, however, will not be adequate if it can be said that it is valid for our planet alone. No matter how much its present faults (the inevitable con- comitants of innovational incipiency) may be corrected and its truths elaborated and confirmed, even to the point of gaining for it a general acceptance, it will still remain a fact that the earth is but an infinitesimal part of the universe. What happens here may be quite insignificant as measured against the immensity of the cosmos. And modern scientists are cosmic minded. There has lately been a veritable spate of matihemati- cally conceived cosmologies: Einstein’s, de Sitter’s, Le Maitre’s, Tolman’s, and others. Latest of all is Hoyle and Lyttleton’s. Astronomical science no longer asserts that the earth is the only inhabited planet. Most of our leading astronomers now agree that there are literally thousands of planets scat- tered through the cosmos on some of which life as we know it not only can but probably does exist. And that is interesting indeed, for life as we know it means pyramid-bualding life! Perhaps those ‘‘dark companions,”’ espe- cially those planets which are life-bearing planets, may have greater significance than we yet realize. The very numerosity of them would seem to suggest some cosmic relation in life’s evolutionary process. These are problems whose answers we may never know with any degree of cer- tainty. But the mind reasons. It imagines and theorizes. Indeed, the first step toward the formulation of scientific theory often is the use of the imagination to make tentative, exploratory guesses. It is legitimate so to use the imaginative faculty if it is logically employed and its fruits subjected to such 310 JOURNAL OF THE experimental or observational tests as can be devised. Should that be impossible, there can be no more than a hypothesis, not even a working hypothesis but merely speculation pure and simple. Yet that, too, can serve if it must. So let us consider. One of the characteristics of the pyramid of life as we know it is that there is an evident successive refinement and concen- tration of energy in the form of sustenance and ‘‘margins of vitality” as life rises through its realms and levels, its source-of-suste- nance-determined fields of actuality. It may therefore not untruthfully be said that by the worldwide pyramid-building process life gathers and builds up energy stores in more and more concentrated-by-refinement form: from gross vegetable matter to animal; from animal to self-conscious, perceptive mental- ity. Thus are created the vegetable kingdom, the animal kingdom, and the kingdom of the mind. And always there appears to be a residual reversion back to the universal “atom bank.” If, now, this is not merely an isolated phenomenon but is a cosmic one, then may it not be possible—and here imagination takes wings indeed !—that as planetary pyra- mids evolve their apical capstones there is another, a fourth transmutation, by which energy is still further refined and concen- trated, to be sent forth to sustain some Ultimate Unity of the Universe, the Final One of cosmic diminution of number, a cosmic Final One whose area of territorial dominion is the cosmos itself? And if again there is that residual reversion after use, would it not most probably be in the form of the stuff of which the ‘‘dead”’ matter of the physical universe 1s made? Wild as this speculation may seem, there may be more than a little truth in it. It might, for example, account for that new hydrogen which Hoyle and _ Lyttleton’s mathematical cosmology postulates as con- tinually appearing but coming from they know not where. For hydrogen is the com- monest, most plentiful and, at the same time, the most basic of all the chemical elements. It is out of hydrogen ‘‘pennies” that the larger ‘‘coins” of the ‘“‘atom bank” of the universe are made, releasing the ‘‘packing fraction’? energy of fusion in the process. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 10 Should all this be indeed true, then it would seem that life has a cosmic function by which the operation of the second law of thermodynamics is offset and counteracted, reminiscent of Newton’s law of action and reaction. Thus may the ‘‘heat death” of the universe be made forever impossible. Here we are dealing with something akin to the postulated existence of God: no one can prove it, but neither can anyone dis- prove it. Yet the charge of insufficiency of theoretic range of applicability of the pyra- mid of life concept can at least be met and challenged. Objections to this speculative conclusion can, of course, be raised. Only two will be noticed here. First, the expanding universe theory based on Hubble’s observed shift to the red end of the spectrum, increasing with distance, is now seen to require the continual appear- ance of new hydrogen in order to keep the average density of the matter of the universe constant despite that expansion, and the velocities involved are so great that far more hydrogen is required to appear than any conceivable number of planetary life pyra- mids could possibly supply by any process of transmutation and residual reversion. Any such speculative conclusion is therefore com- pletely negated by the expanding universe theory. In rebuttal, it can be said that the ex- panding universe theory is only one of sey- eral scientifically satisfactory explanations of that ‘“‘Doppler effect.’ It might, for ex- ample, actually be a sort of “Compton effect’ produced by the passage of the light rays through the intervening ‘‘cosmic dust,” re- ducing their energy and lengthening them, an. effect also increased by distance. The expanding universe theory objection is of questionable validity. Second, no reference to life is necessary since the newly appearing hydrogen is held to bea true creation, being made out of nothing, says Sir Harold Spencer Jones, British As- tronomer Royal.® This is indeed a_ bold, almost an outrageous assumption. How des- perate must the case be when such measures have to be resorted to! One is reminded of 5 The Listener (July 17, 1952), London. Con- densed in Science Digest, November 1952, p. 56. OcToBER 1953 DUNKLE AND Bertrand Russell’s remark: ‘It is the privi- lege of pure mathematicians not to know what they are talking about.’’ Compared to this, the demands upon credulity made by the speculative conclusion advanced in this paper as to life’s cosmic function are mild indeed! And it does not require nullification of the first law of thermodynamics, as this postulation of such newly created hydrogen . does. What it does require is merely that the evolutionary process should continue to op- erate precisely as it has through countless millennia and follow the same general pattern with that consistency for which nature is famous. Brushing aside now the thousand and one objections of detail which can be raised against the pyramid of life concept (most of which seem to have their satisfying answers), let us turn to an aspect of it which may es- cape notice. It is that through that concept we can have an idea of how the mechanical, chemico-physical world of matter and the MALDONADO-KOERDELL: MESOZOIC FOSSIL FISH oll world of animate nature are joined at—so to speak—both ends of the latter. Their differ- entiation begins when inorganic substance is transmuted into organic. Then the process of building up the grand, mammalian pyra- mid, supported by lesser, subsidiary ones, proceeds in an ordered manner, gathering and concentrating energy as it rises. It ends in the pyramidal finality of numerical singu- larity and the fulfillment of its cosmic. func- tion by (the electromagnetic forces of?) life. Then, by residual reversion, matter returns to its condition at the starting-point, closing the cycle of this continuous process. Thus do we obtain an idea of the animate and inani- mate worlds as complementary phenomena, two interacting, reciprocal parts of one great whole. Is it not time for cosmologists, mathe- matical or otherwise, to take notice of the fact that life, too, may be of cosmic signifi- cance, and to admit consideration of it into their calculations? It would seem so. PALEONTOLOGY .—Notes on some Mesozoic fossil fish remains from Mexico. Davip H. Dunkin, U.S. National Museum, and M. Matponapo-KoERDELL, Petroleos Mexicanos. The remains of two identifiable fossil fishes have been recovered recently from horizons in the sequence of upper Jurassic and lower Cretaceous rocks near Taman, San Luis Po- tosi, Mexico. The surprisingly deficient rec- ord of marine fishes of these ages in the Western Hemisphere has prompted study of the present materials and suggested the desirability of publishing the following ob- servations. The region about Tamazunchale and Taman in the State of San Luis Potosi has attracted the attention of several geologists during the past 30 years. Heim (1926, pp. 84-87, 2 figs.) was the first to offer a gross ~ account of the rock formations outcropping between Tamazunchale, Tamdén, and Pi- mienta, a village on the Rio Moctezuma a short distance southwest of Taman. In the geologic column elaborated from his field 1 The original fish specimens herein described are retained in the private collection of the Junior author. Replicas, however, have been deposited in the U. S. National Museum. observations, Heim recognized a thick se- quence of Jurassic sediments overlain by a limestone which although very similar to the Tamasopo limestone was given the new name Tenestipa formation and considered, accord- ing to the ideas of the time, of lower middle Cretaceous age. The Jurassic section was conceived as of two parts; a lower formation called the Taman beds assigned a Kimmer- idgian age on the basis of fossils collected in the valley of the Rio Moctezuma at and east of Taman; and an upper unfossiliferous formation named the Pimienta beds tenta- tively referred to the Portlandian stage of the upper Jurassic. Burkhardt (19380, pp. 90-91, fig. 28) in speaking of the Tamazunchale-Taman sec- tion, stated that the Jurassic strata there were simply the northwestern extremity of outcrop of the Liassic and “‘suprajurassic”’ formations of the Huasteca region. In addi- tion he considered the highly folded and faulted Tamadn beds, reported by Heim as measuring more than 1,000 m in thickness, 312 JOURNAL OF THE to be equivalent to the rocks at Mazapil, Zacatecas, containing Haploceras fialar (Op- pel) and the bivalve genus Awlacomyella. No reference is made by Burckhardt to the unfossiliferous Pimienta beds of supposed Portlandian age. In Muir’s work (1936, pp. 13-15) a tran- scription of Heim’s interpretation of the geol- ogy of the area was given with additional information on some cephalopods which had been collected on the newly opened Mexico- Laredo Highway some 10 km. southwest of Tamazunchale and studied by W.S. Adkins. Following this latter contribution, Heim (1940, pp. 332-334) published a second de- scription of the section which was, in general, a repetition of his original conclusions. Imlay shortly thereafter (1948, p. 1513) expressed the opinion that the region was worthy of thorough investigation in order to determine whether or not valid names for stratigraphic units had been used or if new names should be introduced along with correlations with well established zones else- where in Mexico. He subsequently discov- ered numerous cephalopods in the brown tuffaceous and calcareous beds containing thin bands of black chert along the highway southwest of Taman. In his opinion (Imlay, 1952, p. 971) these fossils, derived from part of the Pimienta beds of Heim and identified as Paradontoceras, Substeuroceras, Himalay- ites, Corongoceras, Hildoglochiceras, Pseudo- lissoceras, and Durangites, served to confirm the presence of the Portlandian in the Tamazunchale-Taman region. In regard to the Taman beds, Imlay (1952, p. 971) also accepted their Kimmeridgian age as evi- denced by fossils (Haploceras fialar (Oppel), Sutneria sp., Aspidoceras sp., and Aulaco- myella sp.). In the same year Maldonado-Koerdell (1952, pp. 234-239) gave an account of the stratigraphy of the Tamazunchale-Taman section, as a result of a systematic search for fossils along the Rio Moctezuma and the Laredo highway. Cephalopods, bivalves, and fishes, two of which are described in this paper, were collected, indicating the pres- ence of several levels of Cretaceous and upper Jurassic beds. The following descrip- tion 1s a summary of his interpretation of the geologic column between Tamazunchale and WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 10 Taman, including a few kilometers of the highway to the southwest of Taman. 1. Méndez shales. Along the highway in Tamazunchale, and northeast of that town, shales of upper Cretaceous age, with Globo- truncana cretacea, Globigerina sp., Marsso- nella oxycona, Gumbelina excolata, G. globosa and Gyroidina sp., outcrop in exceedingly well preserved condition. The basal portion of the formation, with a certain amount of calcareous beds, should be considered as transitional with underlying strata. The age of the shales is Maestrichtian and Cam- panian, according to the general consensus of opinion among oil geologists in Mexico. 2. San Felipe limestone. Very characteristic layers of uniform thickness, between Kms. 358 and 357 of the Laredo highway, to the southwest of Tamazunchale, are shown in a quarry. Their basal portion is highly folded and faulted. The San Felipe limestone is Senonian in age. 3. Agua Nueva limestone. Exposed in the same quarry with the overlying San Felipe and similarly folded and faulted, there are some 15 m of a black, shaly limestone, with pyrite concretions and badly preserved im- pressions of Jnoceramus labiatus, of Turonian age. 4. Tamaulipas limestone. Underneath shales and limestones of upper Cretaceous age, a thick sequence of a gray, finely grained crystalline limestone, with thin bands of black chert in the higher portion, and a certain amount of shaly and other impurities in the lower portion, outcrops along the highway and the river for more than 20 kms. The limestone is tremendously folded and faulted, but after some familiarity with the section 1s acquired, it is not difficult to follow downwards the sequence of beds, and to recognize at least two levels or portions in the rocks. The higher portion shows.a tend- ency to maintain the typical lithology of the upper Tamaulipas limestone, while the lower portion is mixed with impurities of diverse nature, and has rounded or flattened con- cretions of variable dimensions, in more or less abundance, in the lowest levels. Fossils like aptychi of at least two cephalopods, bivalvés, and one of the fishes here described, were found in this portion of the limestone, which provisionally has been ascribed to the OcToBER 1953 Neocomian, in view of positional relation- ships. The interval between the lower portion of the limestone and the Taman beds is every- where covered in the near vicinity of Taman, on the highway and the river. Should the Pimienta beds of Heim and Imlay be found close to the village, and their Portlandian age confirmed, their place would come between nos. 4 and 5 of this column. 5. Tamdn beds. On the bottom of the Moctezuma canyon, east and west of Taman, well-defined beds of a black-gray limestone of variable dip and strike crop out on the south side of the river. They represent the top of an anticline, oriented from southeast to northwest, and also contain aptychi, cephalopods, and the other fossil fish of this report. Their age is Kimmeridgian. Order PYCNODONTOIDEA Family Pyenodontidae Genus Gyrodus Agassiz, 1844 (Refer to A. S. Woodward, 1895, p. 233, for generic synonymy and diagnosis.) Gyrodus cf. G. macrophthalmus Agassiz An incomplete right mandible with complete splenial dentition illustrated in Fig. 1, exhibits well the fundamental characteristics of the as- signed genus. , The presence of an associated dentary element is uncertain. As incompletely preserved and ex- posed in ventral aspect, the splenial bone has an over-all length of 48 mm and a maximum width of 14 mm. The dorsal surface is occupied for about two-thirds of its extent by the tooth studded area. This dentigerous portion appears flat without either transverse or frontal flexure and presents an elongate, trapezoidal outline only slightly broader behind than anteriorly and with the posteriorly diverging mesial and lateral borders of about equal length. Although showing some small irregularities, all the teeth are generally circular in coronal outline. Each exhibits either an apical pit or tubercle surrounded concentrically by two elevated and mammilated rings. They are set in four regular longitudinal rows. In each of these four linear series the structures show a progressive increase in diameter from front to back. As usual, count- ing from the symphysis laterally, the second row DUNKLE AND MALDONADO-KOERDELL: MESOZOIC FOSSIL FISH 313 contains the largest teeth. The fourth or labial row is made up of the next to the largest. This greater size causes the crowns of the teeth in these two rows to project noticeably above the levels of those of the symphysial and third rows. The symphysial row is composed of 11 well spaced teeth; the second, 8; the third, 10; and the fourth, 9. It is of interest to note that the lateral fourth row has the shortest longitudinal dimension of any in the dental battery. Its com- ponent teeth are all flattened on their labial side and the crowns above these lateral points are raised into cusplike eminences which interrupts the continuity of one or both of the concentric mamumilated rings. Geologic horizon and locality.—Collected from the type section of the Taman beds (Kimmerid- gian) (Heim, 1926 and 1940) on the right bank of the Rio Moctezuma at the village of Tamdn, San Luis Potosi, Mexico, by M. Maldonado- Koerdell and D. H. Dunkle, October 1951. Discussion.—Numerous species of pycnodontid fishes, varying in age from the middle Jurassic to upper Cretaceous, have been referred to the genus Gyrodus. The majority of these, unfortu- nately, have been based on unassociated splenial and vomerine dentitions and defined without adequate information on the quality and quantity of variation shown by the few species known by series of complete skeletons. For the purpose of this report, therefore, no attempt at detailed specific comparisons has been made. The present assignment of this Mexican specimen to the contemporaneous genotypic species macrophthal- mus is entirely arbitrary although -the generic reference cannot by current criteria be questioned. Two occurrences of Gyrodus in the Western Hemisphere are listed by Romer (1945, p. 580). Of these two, the questioned upper Cretaceous occurrence in North America has not been located in the literature. However, the other, upper Jurassic one refers to Gyrodus macrophthalmus cubensis Gregory (1923) from the Jagua shales of Western Cuba. This latter pycnodontid fish is very poorly known but extensive series of speci- mens now available, while showing tremendous variation in dental characters, seemingly differs constantly from the Mexican type, as follows: the labial row of splenial teeth is the longest of the four linear series present and contains the greatest number of component denticles which never appear appreciably enlarged; and the teeth, especially those of the principal row, tend toward Fig. 1.—Gyrodus ef. G. macrophthalmus A Bp 314 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Bases. Lingual (A) and VOL. 43, NO. 10 Se {Oa © , ga (fj, ty, B Yay, crown (B) views of fragmentary right mandible from the type section of the upper Jurassic (Kimmeridgian) Tamdén formation at Taman, San Luis Potosi, Mexico. X 2. an ovoid outline through increase of the transverse diameter of the crowns. Order ISOSPONDYLI Suborder Clupeoidea Family Leptolepidae Genus Leptolepis Agassiz, 1832 (Refer to A. S. Woodward, 1895, p. 501, for generic synonymy and diagnosis.) Genotype: Leptolepis coryphaenoides (Bronn). Leptolepis tamanensis,? n.sp. Diagnosis.—A leptolepid as shown by anteriorly attenuated frontals and characteristically de- veloped mouth parts which differ from the genotype and all adequately known Jurassic leptolepids from the Western Hemisphere by pos- session of the following combination of struc- tural features: vertebrae, with minute notochordal perforation, heavily ossified and generally longer than deep; only the last four centra involved in support of the externally homocereal tail; no demonstrable urostyle or uroneurals; the five hypurals supporting the dorsal lobe of caudal fin abutting directly on the last reeumbent neural 2 Named for the village of Tamdn, San Luis Potosi, which is near the occurrence of the holo- type. arch and two spineurals; the four hypurals sup- porting the ventral lobe arising from the last three vertebrae; and all 20 of the articulated and branched caudal fin rays hypaxial, and preceded directly both dorsally and ventrally by series of small fulcra-like spinelets. Holotype.—An incomplete fish on slab of tuffa- ceous matrix showing major visceral components of the head and an articulated series of vertebrae with attached caudal fin; from the lower Creta- ceous (Neocomian) beds at Kilometer 342 + 650 on the Mexico-Laredo Highway, above the village of Taman, San Luis Potosi, Mexico; collected by M. Maldonado-Koerdell, August 1951. Description.—The structural details of the one known specimen on which this type description is based are somewhat obscured by secondary mineralization. Accurately discernible, however, are the major visceral components of the head, a cleithrum, and an articulated series of vertebrae with attached caudal fin. Compared with the averaged dimensions of several species of Lepto- lepis an elongate fusiform fish is indicated with head occupying perhaps 20 mm of a standard 'ength estimated as about 90 mm. The form and disposition of determinable skull elements are illustrated in Fig. 2. Characteristic OcTOBER 1953 of the family to which the form is referred are the anteriorly attenuated frontals; the small pre- maxillary; the maxillary with anteriorly con- stricted neck and posteriorly convex oral border; and the distinctive, dorsally produced dentary. The orbit appears to have been large and situated DUNKLE AND MALDONADO-KOERDELL: MESOZOIC FOSSIL FISH 315 centrally in the length of the head. The angle of the lower jaw lies below the middle of the orbit. The maxillary was probably of normal leptolepid size, although as preserved overlain by the man- dible, its observable extent scarcely equals the preorbital length of the skull. Teeth are not to Fra. 2.—Leptolepis tamanensis, n. sp. Habit sketch (A) and photograph (B) of specimen as found, in here interpreted lower Cretaceous strata, at Kilometer 342 + 650 above Taman, San Luis Potosi, Mexico. x 2. (Legend of abbreviations: Br, branchial arch elements; Bstg, branchiostegal rays; Chy, ceratohyal; Clt, cleithrum; Deth, ?mesethmoid plus dermethmoid; Dn, mandible; Ebr?, paired epibranchial ele- ments; Epn, epineurals; f, spinelets in advance of both dorsal and ventral caudal rays; Fr, frontal; Hhy, paired hypohyals; Hyp, hypurals; Mx, maxillary; Na, nasal; Ne, neural arches; Pmx, premaxillary; and 1, 2, 3, & 4, respectively, the last and anteriorly preceding 3 vertebrae centra involved in support of caudal fin.) 316 JOURNAL OF THE be seen on any of the mouth parts. An undoubt- edly incomplete series of eight strongly. arched and rodlike branchiostegal rays lie adjacent to the ventral border of the right ceratohyal. Long, slender, and closely set parallel rods extend from the surfaces of several of the branchial elements and seem best interpreted as gill raker supports. The cleithrum exhibits a prominent longitudinal ridge and a relatively large postero-ventral ex- pansion. Preserved vertebrae number 11. All possess an average length of 2mm, with the exception of the last three centra which are shorter. This length is greater than the depth anteriorly in the series, but progressively toward the rear is equalled and then exceeded by the dorso-ventral dimension. Each centrum appears to have been heavily ossified, with markedly constricted dorsal and ventral margins, and some present evidences laterally of pits above and below a longitudinal strengthening rib. The internal notochordal per- foration is minute. The structure of the tail is externally homo- cereal. Apparently only the last four vertebrae take part in the support of the caudal appendage. The neural and haemal arches of this region are robust and are inclined backwardly in acute angles from free articulation with the centra to almost parallel the longitudinal axis of the verte- bral column. Each possesses a strong forward process which abuts on the next preceding arch. A total of nine hypurals are present. Neither a urostyle nor paired uroneural elements can be discerned. In consequence, the five upper hy- purals supporting the dorsal lobe of the fin appear in direct contact with two epineurals and the last neural spine. Of the four hypurals sup- porting the ventral lobe, two arise from the last centrum and 1 each from the second and third vertebrae from the back. The fourth forwardly succeeding centrum also bears an enlarged haemal arch, which, however, is directed only to the spinelets preceding the fin rays, ventrally. Observable caudal! rays total 20. These, regu- larly articulated and branching as many as three times, are presumably all hypaxial. The first ray dorsally and the twentieth ventrally are preceded anteriorly by an incompletely preserved series of fulera-like spinelets. The fin, in all probability, was equilobate and relative to the degree of posterior emargination, the middle rays have indicated lengths exceeding one-half those of the longest rays. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 10 Discussion.—The widely recognized genus Leptolepis is comprised of numerous species of fossil fishes from all parts of the world and from strata ranging in geologic age (Romer, 1945, p. 581) from lower Jurassic to the middle Cretaceous. Despite this apparent commonness of occurrence, it is impossible to obtain from an extensive literature either the detailed morphology of most defined forms or the range of structural variation within the population of any given species. In view of such incomplete knowledge and absence of adequate comparative series of specimens, the erection of new species on fragmentary specimens may well appear to be ill advised. However, on the basis of currently employed taxonomic criteria, the present definition of L. tamanensis seems warranted. The characters listed in the above diagnosis readily distinguish this Mexican species from the genotype L. coryphaenoides (Bronn) (Rayner, 1937). Excluding the Argentine Lepto- lepis australis Saez as too poorly described for comparison, only two other Jurassic leptolepids are known from the Western Hemisphere: Lepto- lepis schoewet Dunkle (1942) from the Todilto limestone (Oxfordian) of New Mexico and Luwisi- chthys vinalesensis White (1942) from the Jagua shales (Oxfordian) of Cuba. Affinity between these two and L. tamanensis is suggested by the common absence of a demonstrable urostyle and direct abutment of the hypurals supporting the dorsal lobe of the caudal fin on the neural ele- ments. L. tamanensis differs specifically from Luisichthys in the details of caudal fin structure. It is distinguishable from L. schoewer on the same basis but also noticeably in vertebral structure: all available specimens of the species from New Mexico exhibiting poorly ossified diplospondylous ring centra. REFERENCES BurckHarpt, C. Etude synthétique sur le Méso- zoique Mexicain. Mém. Soc. Paléont. Suisse 49-50: 280 pp., 32 figs. 1930. DE Sanz, M. D. Noticias sobre peces fosiles Argen- tinos. Notas Mus. La Plata 4(Paleont. 19): 423-432, figs. 1-5. 1939. DunxKiE, D. H. A new fossil fish of the family Leptolepidae. Sci. Publ. Cleveland Mus. Nat. Hist. 8 (5): 61-64, pl. 6. 1942. GreGorY, W.K. A Jurassic fish fauna from western Cuba, with an arrangement of the families of holostean ganoid fishes. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 48: 223-242, 6 figs. 1923. Heim, A. Notes on the Jurassic of Tamazunchale (Szerra Madre Oriental). Eclog. Geol. Helvetiae 20 (1): 84-89, 2 figs. 1926. OcTOBER 1953 . The front ranges of Sierra Madre Oriental, from Ciudad Victoria to Tamazunchale. Eclog. Geol. Helvetiae 33 (2): 313-363, 10 figs., 1 geol. map and sects. 1940. Imuay, R. W. Jurassic formations of Gulf Region. Bulle Amer. Assoc. Petrol. Geol. 27 (11): 1407-1533, 14 figs. 1943. . Correlation of the Jurassic formations of North America, exclusive of Canada. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 60 (9) : 953-992. 1952. MaALpoNaDO-KoERDELL, M. Contacto Jurdsico- Cretdcico entre las formaciones de Tamdn y Tamazunchale, Estado de San Luis Potosi, en sus relaciones con la presencia de yacimientos petroleros. Mem. Primera Conven. Interame- CLARKE: AMERICAN GELECHIIDAE 317 ricana Rec. Miner., Mexico, 1951; 234-239, 1 pl. 1952. Murr, J.M. Geology of the Tampico Region, Mexico: 280 pp., 15 pls., 40 figs. Tulsa, Okla., 1936. Rayner, D. H. On Leptolepis bronni Agassiz. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 10, 19: 46-74, figs. 1-14, 1937. Romer, A. 8. Vertebrate paleontology, ed. 2: x + 687 pp., 377 figs. Chicago, 1945. Waite, T. E. A new leptolepid fish from the Jurassic of Cuba. Proc. New England Zool. Club 21: 97-100, pl. 1. 1942. Woopwarp, A. 8S. Catalogue of the fossil fishes in the British Museum (Natural History) 3: xlii + 544 pp., 18 pls., 54 figs. 1895. ENTOMOLOGY —Notes, new synonymy, and new assignments in American Gele- chudae. J. F. Gates CLARKE, U.S. Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quaran- tine. August Busck’s excellent paper on the restriction of the genus Gelechia! is limited in scope to the treatment of North American species, although a few from Europe that concerned him are included. His studies were further limited by the unavailability of material, particularly specimens of species described by the late Edward Meyrick. Moreover, he made no attempt to include species from South America, which are an important part of the American fauna. Since Busck’s paper was written, the present writer has had the opportunity to examine the types of many of Meyrick’s species and those of other authors. The study of these types has revealed previously unrecognized facts which are recorded in the following notes. The new assignments and other changes indicated below are based on a study of the genitalia. Extensive revisionary studies in the family are necessary, but the present paper makes possible the proper assign- ment of the species treated. The genus Chionodes Hiibner has not previously been recorded from South Amer- ica, although one species, C. leucocephala (Walsingham), is recorded from St. Croix, West Indies. The genus is holarctic in dis- tribution and also occurs as far south as southern Chile. Genus Aroga Busck Aroga Busck Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 47: 13. 1914. 1 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 86: 563-5938, pl. 58-71. 1939. Aroga bispiculata (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia bispiculata Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 23. 1923. Type locality—Congress, Ariz. Remarks.—Meyrick compared this with Lita variabilis (Busck) to which it bears a_ slight resemblance but from which it is structurally distinct. The genitalia of bispiculata are charac- teristically those of an Aroga and leave no doubt as to its assignment here. Aroga speculifera (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia speculifera Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 4: 59. 1931. Type locality—Hope, Ark. Remarks.—Known only from the type. Aroga trachycosma (Meyrick), n: comb. Gelechia trachycosma Meyrick, Exotic Microlepi- doptera 3: 21. 1923. Type locality —Venice, Calif. Remarks.—In this species the harpe is re- duced to a mere nodule emitting a moderately strong seta. The aedeagus is unusually robust and the vesica armed with many strong, short cornuti. Aroga xyloglypta (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia xyloglypta Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- WELa on 22— 1925 Type locality—vVenice, Calif. Remarks.—When he described this species Meyrick stated, ‘“‘Probably allied to trichostola.” The latter, however, is referable to Chionodes as shown by Busck. 318 JOURNAL OF THE Genus Chionodes Hiibner Chionodes Hiibner, Verzeichniss bekannter Schmetterlinge: 420. 1825. Chionodes agriodes (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia agriodes Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 350. 1927. Type locality —Dividend, Utah. Remarks.—This species is very near C. secu- laella (Clarke) but appears to be distinct. Chionodes clistrodoma (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia clistrodoma Meyrick, Exotic Microlepi- doptera 3: 21. 1923. Type locality —Nogales, Ariz. Remarks—The female genitalia of clistrodoma are somewhat atypical for the genus but cer- tainly the species belongs here, rather than in Gelechia. The anterior margin of the ovipositor is clothed with dense, long hairlike setae and the posterior margin bears about 10 long, stout, hooked setae. Chionodes consona (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia consona Meyrick, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lon- don, 1917: 50. Type locality—tLima, Peru. Remarks—Meyrick believed this to be allied to the North American unifasciella, but the lat- ter species is referable to Aroga. Chionodes dryobathra (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia dryobathra Meyrick, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lon- don, 1917: 49. Type locality—La Crumbre, Colombia, 6,600 feet. Remarks——A typical Chionodes except for a somewhat aberrant genital opening in the female which, I think, may be regarded only as cf spe- cific Importance. Chionodes eburata (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia eburata Meyrick, Trans. Ent. Soe. Lon- don, 1917: 50. Type locality—La Crumbre, Colombia, 6,600 feet. Remarks.—Examination of the male genitalia leaves no doubt as to the proper assignment of this species in Chionodes. Chionodes halycopa (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia halyccpa Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 350. 1927. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 10 Type locality —Alpine, Brewster County, Tex. Remarks.— Despite the rather abnormal palpi the female genitalia are typical of this genus and no doubt the species is referable here. Chionodes icriodes (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia icriodes Meyrick, Ann. Mus. Nac. Hist. Nat., Buenos Aires, 36: 384. 1931. Type locality.—Peulla, Llanquihue Province, Chile. Remarks.—The occurrence of this species in southern Chile represents the southernmost point at which a Chionodes is known to exist. Chionodes lacticoma (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia lacticoma Meyrick, Trans. Ent. Soe. Lon- don, 1917: 48. Type locality—Chosica, Peru, 2,800 feet. Remarks—This small species is similar in aspect to the North American C. xanthophilella (Barnes and Busck). Chionodes litigiosa (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia litigiosa Meyrick, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lon- don, 1917: 49. Type locality —Huigra, Ecuador, 4,500 feet. Remarks—In size and general appearance litigiosa is similar to the California lupine-feeding C. lophosella (Busck) but may be distinguished from it at once by the absence of raised scales on the forewing. Chionodes perissosema (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia perisscsema Meyrick, Exotic Microlepi- doptera 4: 351. 1932. Type locality—Alta Gracia, Argentina. Remarks.—The genitalia of perissosema leave no doubt as to its assignment here. Genus Filatima Busek Filatima Busck, Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 86: 575. 1939. Filatima asbolodes (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia asbolodes Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 349. 1927. Type locality —Alpine, Brewster County, Tex. Remarks.—A distinct species belonging in the group without sex scaling on the underside of the hindwing of the male. OcToBER 1953 Filatima collinearis (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia collinearis Meyrick, Exotic Microlepi- dotpera 3: 349. 1927. Type locality —Alpine, Brewster County, Tex. Remarks.—There are no described North American species which appear to be closely related to collinearis. Filatima isocrossa (Meyrick), n. comb. Gelechia isocrossa Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 346. 1927. Filatima virgea Clarke, Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 37: 272, figs. 10-10b, 13. 1947. (New synon- ymy.) Type localities—Alpine, Brewster County, Tex. (isocrossa); Presidio, Tex. (virgea). Remarks—The genitalia of this species are distinct, and there can be no doubt virgea is a synonym. Filatima monopa (Meyrick) Gelechia monopa Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 350. 1927. Filatima monopa (Meyrick), Busck, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 86: 576. 1939. Gelechia epigypsa Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 351. 1927. (New synonymy.) Type localities—Alpine, Brewster County, Tex. (monopa, epigypsa). Remarks.—I have examined the types of both species and the genitalia are identical. Meyrick’s epigypsa is only a strongly marked specimen. Filatima nucifer (Walsingham), n. comb. Gelechia nuzifer Walsingham, Biologia Centrali- Americana 4: 69. 1911. Type locality—Sonora, Mexico. Food plant—Mesquite (leaves). Remarks—I have compared a series of 12 specimens, from South Airport Road, El Paso, Tex., with paratypes of Walsingham’s species in the U. S. National Museum collection and they are identical. This is the first record of the occurrence of nucifer in the United States but it will undoubtedly be found throughout the southwest wherever its food plant occurs. In addition to the above there are five specimens from San Benito, Tex. (April 1952; P. A. Glick). The El Paso specimens were reared by J. A. Baker and show the emergence date of August 16, Pol. Filatima sperryi Clarke Filatima sperryi Clarke, Journ. Washington Acad. Sei. 37: 270. 1947. CLARKE: AMERICAN GELECHIIDAE 319 Type locality—Barton Flats, Calif. Remarks.—Since describing this species I have been able to examine six specimens from Mojave County, Ariz. Only one of these, a fe- male, shows the contrasting brown costal area of the forewing and this not so conspicuously as in the type specimens. In one male the brown is slightly indicated but in the others there are only occasional scattered scales or none at all. Filatima tephrinopa (Meyrick), n. comb. Nothris tephrinopa Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 496. 1929. Type locality—Fort Davis, Tex., 5,000 feet. Remarks.—The brush of second segment of palpus is expanded more than usual for this genus but the male genitalia of tephrinopa leave no doubt as to its proper placement. Filatima ornatifimbriella (Clemens) Gelechia ornatifimbriella Clemens, Proc. Ent . Soc. Philadelphia 2: 420. 1864. Filatima ornatifimbriella (Clemens), Busck, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 86: 575. 1939. Gelechia xanthuris Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 346. 1927. Type localities—‘Tlinois” (ornatifimbriella); Dividend, Utah (xanthuris). Remarks.——This common, variable, lupine- feeding species is found throughout western United States and Canada. The only other described species with similar genitalia is lepidotae Clarke, but there are abundant specific differences. Genus Gelechia Hiibner Gelechia Hiibner, Verzeichniss bekannter Schmet- terlinge: 415. 1825. Gelechia gracula (Meyrick), n. comb. Nothris gracula Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidoptera 3: 495. 1929. Nothris diaconalis Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 495. 1929. (New synonymy.) Type localities—Alpine, Brewster County, Tex., 7,000 feet (gracula); Fort Davis, Tex., 5,000 feet (diaconalis). Remarks.—Aside from size I can see nothing substantial on which to base specific separation. The genitalia match perfectly. Gelechia bianulella (Chambers) Oeseis bianulella Chambers, Cincinnati Quart. Journ. Sci. 2: 255. 1874. . JOURNAL OF THE Nothris melanchlora Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 496. 1929. (New synonymy.) Type localities—‘‘Texas” (?) (bianulella); Fort Davis, Tex., 5,000 feet (melanchlora). Remarks.—The two agree in every respect, including genitalia, and must be considered synonymous. The shape of the tuft of second segment of palpus, on which Chambers based his genus Oesis, led Meyrick to describe this and other species of Gelechia in Nothris. As pointed out by Busck, the genitalia of the latter genus are of an entirely different type. Gelechia mundata (Meyrick), n. comb. Nothris mundata Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 495. 1929. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 10 Type locality —Mescalero, N. Mex., 7,000 feet. Remarks.—This species is very close to gracula and may even be a form of it, but more material from the type locality will be necessary to deter- mine that point. Gelechia thymiata (Meyrick), n. comb. Nothris thymiata Meyrick, Exotic Microlepidop- tera 3: 497. 1929. Type locality —Nogales, Ariz. Remarks.—This, like the three foregoing species, clearly belongs in Gelechia and, on the structure of palpus, is allied to the branulella- monella group of the genus. ENTOMOLOGY .—Two new species of mosquitoes from the Yemen (Diptera: Culi- cidae).!| KenNetH L. Knicut, U. 8. Naval Medical Research Unit No. 3, Cairo, Egypt.? This paper describes the new species oc- curring in a collection of mosquitoes made by the author while a member of a medical survey team to the Yemen from U.8. Naval Medical Research Unit No. 3. A complete account of this collection is being prepared for a subsequent paper. The larval chaeto- taxal nomenclature used in this paper is that of Belkin (1950). Culex (Culex) mattinglyi, n. sp. 1941. Culex (Culex) laticinctus Edwards. Edwards, Mosq. Ethiopian Region 3: 313. The record from San’a, Yemen (Scott and Britton). Adult—A brown species of medium size with sparsely haired male palpi and broad straight pale basal bands on the tergites. Mate: Wing length approximately 4.5-5.0 mm. Head: Proboscis dark. Palpus approximately equal to proboscis in length; dark, a variable amount of pale scaling laterally along apical portion of III and baso-ventrally on IV and V; very sparsely-haired, most of those present being confined to IV; IV and V not markedly uptilted. Vertex with narrow white scales dorsally and 1 The opinions or conclusions contained herein are those of the author and are not to be construed as official or reflecting the views of the Navy Department or of the Naval Service at large. 2 Now officer-in-charge, U. S. Navy Preventive Medicine Unit No. 1, Naval Air Station, Jackson- ville, Fla. ‘pale-scaled, broad white scales laterally, upright-forked scales pale brownish. Thorax: Scutum with brownish- golden narrow scales, the scales paler in color along the scutal margins and on the prescutellar space. Scutellar scales narrow, pale. Apn and ppn with some white scales present, usually both broad and narrow. Each of the following pleural areas with a patch of broadened whitish scales: propleural, dorsal sternopleural, medio-posterior sternopleural, dorsal mesepimeral (confluent with hair tuft), and medial mesepimeral. A single lower mesepimeral bristle present (two on one side of each of two specimens). Legs: Coxae each with an anterior patch of white scales. Fore and mid femora anteriorly dark except for an apical line of yellowish scales; hind femur with basal half pale except for the dorsal margin and apically, apex with a line of pale scales. Tibiae anteriorly dark except for apical pale patches. Tarsi dark. Fore and mid tarsal claws unequal, each unidentate; hind equal, simple (from slide mount). Wings: Dark-scaled. Halter knobs at least partially pale. Abdomen: Tergites III-VII with broad straight basal whitish bands. Sternites scattered dark scaling may be present. Genitalia (Fig. la, b): Basistyle dis- tinctly swollen; tergal surface bearing a dense covering of short and long setae, outer and sternal surface -bearing the usual elongate setae; ap- pendage a (terminology of Edwards, 1941: 280 and fig. 103a) markedly proximal to appendages OctToBER 1953 b and ¢ and strongly bent medially, appendage c distinctly shorter than b, appendages d, e, and f absent (possibly represented by three short setae near base of b and c), leaflet (g) and appendage h present. Dististyle extremely broadened, with a distinctive recurved portion near apex. Paraproct KNIGHT: NEW SPECIES OF MOSQUITOES 321 with an elongate curved basal arm. Phallosome relatively simple in structure. FEMALE: Wing length approximately 6.0 mm. Differmg from the male as follows: Palpi ap- proximately one-sixth to one-fifth length of pro- boscis, dark. Some pale scaling present basally on Fie. 1.—Culex (Culex) mattingly:. Male genitalia: a, Mesal spect of right basistyle; b, sternal aspect of mesosome and paraprocts. Larva: c, Head, d, terminal segments; e, pecten tooth; f, comb scale. 322 JOURNAL OF THE costa. Upper fork cell approximately 3.8-4.3 times longer than its stem. Tarsal claws equal, simple (from slide mount). Larva (described from 10 skins, representing five separate collections).—Antenna: Shaft rather evenly pigmented throughout, densely spiculate from base to level of hair tuft, slenderer and nearly smooth from there to apex. Antennal hair tuft (hair 1) inserted slightly distad of the middle (0.56-0.64 from base), with numerous elongate frayed branches, hairs 2 and 3 distinctly subapical and extending anteriorly slightly further than hair 4. Head (Fig. 1c): Clypeal spines single, long, slender; hair 4 single; 5 with 3-7 branches; 6 with 3-6; 7 with 6-9; 8 with 2-4; 9 with 2-6; 10 with 2-5; 11 with 2-5; 12 with 2-3; 13 with 2-4; 14 single; 15 with 2-4. Mentum with 10-12 teeth on each side of median tooth. Thorax: Integument with distinct spiculation. Abdomen, I-VII: Hair 6 of I with 2-5 branches, hair 7 with 2-3. Hair 6 of II, III, and IV with 2-5 branches, of V and VI with 2-3. Abdomen, VIII (fig. 1d, e, f): Hair 1 with 5-7 branches, hairs 2 and 4 single, hair 3 with 9-14, hair 5 with 4-5. Comb consisting of a patch of 34-44 scales, each scale with an evenly-expanding lateral and apical fringe. Siphon: Pale; index 3.4-4.5; acus present; 11-16 more or less paired multiply-branched elongate hair tufts present, all latero-ventral except the subapical pair which is lateral, several of the tufts inserted basad of pecten apex; pecten composed of a line of 14-19 teeth, each tooth with 1-3 baso-ventral denticles. Anal Segment: Anal plate complete; hair 1 (lh) with 2-3 branches; hair 2 (zsc) with 2-3 branches (once single); hair 3 (osc) single; hair 4 (ventral brush) with 12 tufts (twice with 13), each tuft arising from the barred area. Anal gills elongate, sub- acutely tapered, the dorsal pair 1.2-1.5 the length of the anal plate and 1.0-1.3 the length of the ventral pair. Types.—Holotype: Male (coll. no. 330), geni- talia mounted on a slide, U.'S.N.M. no. 61658, Birket Shiekh Kunnaf, San’a, Yemen, February 13, 1951, elevation 7100 feet, collected as a pupa from a cement animal-watering trough by a well just outside the city walls. Paratypes: Five males, 18 females, 1 set associated skins, same data as for holotype (coll. no. 330); 3 females, 1 set associated skins, Wadi Dhahr, 8 miles north- west of San’a, Yemen, February 13, 1951, eleva- tion 7,000 feet, collected as larvae and pupae from a broad open well in which the water level WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, No. 10 was 15 feet below the surface (coll. no. 331); 18 larval skins (10 slides), 1 set associated skins, Wadi Dhahr, February 11, 1951, collected as larvae from a large cement basin (coll. no. 328); 1 larval skin, Rouda, 3 miles north of San’a, February 15, 1951, elevation 7100 feet, collected from a large cement tank (coll. no. 333). The holotype and a portion of the paratypes are deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. The remainder of the paratypes are in the collections of the British Museum (Natural History) and of the author. Discussion.—According to the classification of Edwards (1941: 282), this species is a member of the pipiens series of Group B (pipiens group). Based on both adult and larval characters, it is most closely related to Culex laticinctus Edwards. In the adult stage laticinctus differs mainly in possessing two or more mesepimeral bristles and in many details of the male genitalia. Two specimens of the new species possess two lower mesepimeral bristles on one side but none were observed with this number occurring on both sides. The larva of laticinctus differs from that of the new species in that the antenna is not uni- formly colored, the mentum has only 7-8 lateral teeth on a side, the dorsal surface of the siphon is straight from near the base when seen in lateral view, the pecten teeth are of quite a different form; the upper caudal seta (hair 2 or isc) has - four or more branches, the anal gills are shorter than the anal plate, and the ventral brush usually has 14 hair tufts. Since the only specimens of laticinctus col- lected by me in the Yemen were from Ta’izz, a locality which lies at the much lower elevation of 4,100 feet, it seemed quite reasonable to assume that the record of laticinctus from San’a given by Edwards (1941: 314) actually refers to this species. Upon request Mr. Mattingly of the British Museum kindly checked these specimens and found them indeed to be mattinglyi. In Edwards’s (1941: 284) key to the Ethiopian species of the subgenus Culex, this species goes to ninagongoensis Edwards and calurus Edwards (couplet 35). However, it differs markedly from them on the basis of male genitalia. Also, the larva of ninagongoensis is strikingly different in that the comb is entirely composed of spines. The larva of calurus is unknown. In the larval key of Hopkins (1952: 246) this species will not completely pass the second bracket in that, like C. (Neoculex) stellatus van OcToBER 1953 Someren, it has the thoracic integument rather densely spiculated. It is believed that the unusual development of the dististyle alone adequately distinguishes this new species from all other known Ethiopian Culex. This species is dedicated to P. F. Mattingly, Department of Entomology, British Museum (Natural History), who has contributed so much to the modern taxonomy of mosquitoes and who has so generously and unceasingly made available his time for the help of others. KNIGHT: NEW SPECIES OF MOSQUITOES 323 Culex (Neoculex) jenkinsi, n. sp. Adult—A rather small species with sparsely haired male palpi, pale yellowish scutal scales, postspiracular and prealar scales, and apical pale abdominal bands. Mave: Wing length approximately 3.5 mm. Head: Proboscis dark, apical portion darker than the remainder. Palpus longer than the proboscis by nearly the length of segment V; dark; a few short hairs arising apically on III, along IV, and basally on V. Vertex with narrow white scales dorsally and broad white scales laterally; up- Fic. 2—Culex (Neoculex) jenkinsi. Male genitalia: a, Mesal aspect of right basistyle; b, lateral aspect of paraproct; c, ninth tergite; d, sternal aspect of mesosome. O24 JOURNAL OF THE right-forked scales pale brownish in color, some- what darker laterally. Thorax: Scutum with pale yellowish narrow scales, the scales paler in color around the margins and on the prescutellar space. Seutellar scales narrow, pale. Apn with a few broadened pale scales; ppn usually with some narrow white scales. Pleural integument brown- ish, without obvious markings. Each of the following pleural areas with a patch of broadened whitish scales: propleural (very few), postspiracu- lar (very few), prealar knob (very few, on lower portion of knob), dorsal sternopleural, medio- posterior sternopleural, dorsal mesepimeral (con- fluent with hair tuft), and medial mesepimeral. Prosternum without scales. One lower mesepimeral bristle present (one specimen with two bristles present on either side). Legs: Coxae each with an anterior patch of white scales. Fore and mid femora anteriorly dark except for an apical line of pale scales; hind femur pale, a dorsal dark line from near base that apically widens across the anterior surface, an apical line of pale scales. Tibiae dark except for apices. Tarsi dark. Fore and mid tarsal claws unequal, each unidentate; hind equal, simple (from slide mount). Wings: Dark-sealed. Upper fork cell approximately 2.2— 2.5 times longer than its stem. Cross veins separated by somewhat more than twice the length of posterior one. Abdomen: Tergites II-VII with distinct apical pale bands. Sternites pale- scaled, baso-lateral dark scaling usually present on the more apical segments. Genitalia (fig. 2): Tergal surface of basistyle bearing a distinctive clump of long apically-twisted setae; subapical lobe with two stout rods (probably a and 6) and about 5—6 short setae. Dististyle enlarged basally. Paraprocts with a subapical lobe. Phallosome with lateral plates smooth. Lateral lobes of ninth tergite prominent, each bearing from 3-7 promi- nent setae; no prominent median lobe. FEMALE: Wing length approximately 3.9-4.4 mm. Differing from the male as follows: Palpi approximately one-fourth the length of the pro- bosecis, dark. Torus and first flagellar segments with white scales. Propleural and postspiracular areas with more scales than in male. Upper fork cell approximately 2.8 times longer than its stem. Tarsal claws equal, simple (slide mount). Larva—Not known. Types: Holotype. Male (coll. no. 308), genitalia mounted on a slide, US.N.M. no. 61659, EI- Hauban, Wadi el-Malah, about 3 miles east of Ta’izz, Yemen, January 16, 1951, elevation about WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 10 3,700 feet, collected as larvae from emergent vegetation in the quiet marginal water of a drying wadi stream. Paratypes: Two males, 5 females, same data as for holotype (coll. no. 308); 1 male, 1 female, Wadi Mal el-Ghail, about 14 miles west of Ma’bar, Yemen, February 7, 1951, elevation about 6,500 feet, collected as larvae from pools along small stream flowing from mountain spring (filamentous green algae present) (coll. no. 325). The holotype and a portion of the paratypes are deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. The remainder of the paratypes are in the collections of the British Museum (Natural History) and of the author. Discussion.—Based on the classification of Ed- wards (1941: 249), this new species is a member of Group B (Neoculex s. str.). In the Ethiopian region Group B includes the following species: peringueyt Edwards, seyrigi Edwards, salisburi- ensis Theobald, andreanus Edwards, kingianus Edwards, kilara Van Someren, and rubinotus Theobald. Culex coursi Doucet, 1949, described from the larva from Madagascar, may belong here since the larva resembles that of salis- buriensis. In Edwards’s key (1941: 253) to the Ethiopian species of Neoculex, this species keys to seyrigt (female unknown). The adult is similar to the description of seyrigi by Edwards (1941: 256) except that the scales of ppn are mostly narrow, no mention is made of the dorsal mesepimeral patch, and all of the tibiae have pale apices. The male genitalia differ in having the dististyle humped sub-basally instead of straight and taper- ing, the two bristles on the dististyle are not as near to one another as shown by Edwards (1941: fig. 82b), the ninth tergite is not as strongly lobed medially and the lateral lobes have 3-7 bristles each instead of 8-10, and the tips of the lateral plates of the mesosome are not tuberculate. The larva of seyrigi is unknown but possibly courst Doucet (Madagascar) is the larva of this species (Hopkins, 1952: 253). C. seyrigi is known only from Madagascar. Although distinct, this species shows a close relationship to published descriptions of Medi- terranean material of Culex (Neoculex) apicalis Adams. A re-evaluation of European apicalis has been made by P. F. Mattingly and is to be published soon. The exact relationships of the new spécies described here will be elaborated in that paper. This species is dedicated to Dr. Dale W. Jen- OcTOBER 1953 kins, Medical Division, Army Chemical Center, Maryland, who has contributed so materially to our knowledge of medically important insects. LITERATURE CITED BELKIN, J. N. A revised nomenclature for the chaetotary of the mosquito larva (Diptera: Culi- cidae). Amer. Midl. Nat. 44(3): 678-698, 1950. GURNEY: TAXONOMY OF GRYLLOBLATTA 325 Epwarps, F. W. Mosquitoes of the Ethiopian Re- gion. III. Culicine adults and pupae, 499 pp. British Museum (Natural History), London, 1941. Hopkins, G. H. E. Mosquitoes of the Ethiopian Region. I. Larval bionomics of mosquitoes and taxonomy of culicine larvae, ed. 2, 355 pp. British Museum (Natural History), London, 1952. ENTOMOLOGY —Recent advances in the taronomy and distribution of Grylloblatta (Orthoptera: Grylloblattidae). ASHLEY B. GuRNEy,' U.S. Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine. This paper summarizes the important de- velopments regarding the genus Grylloblatta which have come to my attention during the past five years. In 1948 I brought together the principal taxonomic and distributional data on these unusual insects (Gurney, 1948) and it is a tribute to the zeal of numerous diligent collectors that several extensions of the generic distribution have recently been made, and at least two new species have been found. Best of all, both sexes of the two new species here described are known, and the great importance of the male terminalia as specific characters is now evident. The con- tents of the alimentary canal have been removed from specimens of three species (rothi, bifratrilecta, sculleni), and notes on the results of the examination appear in the discussion of those species. Annotations are included on several important papers which have appeared since my 1948 catalogue was ' The cooperation of the following persons, who have assisted by making specimens and notes available, is gratefully acknowledged: Henry K. Townes, North Carolina State College; Vincent D. Roth, Oregon State College; J. W. MacSwain, E. G. Linsley, and Paul D. Hurd, Jr., University of California (Berkeley); E. Philip Pister, U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Berkeley, Calif.; Harry P. Chandler, California Division of Fish and Game; John A. Chapman, Montana State Uni- versity; and W. L. Nutting, Harvard University. Thanks are also given to the following University of California students who made a special and highly successful attempt to find Grylloblatta at Sonora Pass, Calif., while engaged in summer field activities with Dr. MacSwain: O. R. Ali, C. A. Downing, J. J. Drea, S. M. Kappos, S. Katana, J. L. Mallars, and B. Puttler. For several days these men worked very hard at a task which was difficult and sometimes dangerous, and as a result the specimens of bifratrilecta. are more numerous and complete than the original series of a previously described species of Grylloblat- tidae. written. Special interest is attached to a related new genus from Siberia described by Bei-Bienko (1951), whose paper has been translated by Miss Ruth Ericson, of the Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quaran- tine. KEY TO SPECIES OF GRYLLOBLATTA 1. Dorsal valve of ovipositor reaching to middle of cercus, or at least to apical half of fifth segment; antenna of adult composed of 36 segments or less, of nymph not over 30... .2 Dorsal valve of ovipositor not reaching to middle of cercus, or beyond base of fifth segment; antenna of adult often composed of 39 or more segments, of nearly mature nymph usually more than 30 (northern California, CIRER OME fy et area e so eas PREP sae ot 5 2. Apical half of male supra-anal plate symmetri- cal or nearly so (Fig. 3) (Washington to Mon- fa0a, and norkoward) 920). 2249.) ahs 2 oe Bi} Apical half of male supra-anal plate asym- metrical (Figs. 4, 5) (Oregon, California). .4 3. Stylus of male about three times as long as wide (Fig. 8); antenna of adult with an average of less than 30 segments (Alberta, British Columbia, Montana) campodeiformis campodetformis Walker Stylus of male about four times as long as wide (Fig. 8a); antenna of adult with an average of more than 30 segments (Washing- ton, British Columbia) campodeiformis occidentalis Silvestri 4. Stylus of male attached laterally (Fig. 6); male supra-anal plate with left apical corner conspicuously developed, lobelike (Fig. 5); segments of cerci comparatively short (Figs. Pf AG) (Oremonm)y 82 fon. for rothit, n. sp. Stylus of male attached basally (Fig. 7); male supra-anal plate with left apical corner angu- lar rather than lobelike (Fig. 4); segments of cerci comparatively elongate and slender, especially the more apical ones (Fig. 15) (Gahftoruragy 8) 20 30 bifratrilecta, n. sp. 5. (Adult unknown), antenna of nymph composed of 36-40 segments; compound eye prominent, proportion of greatest length of eye to width 326 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES of head about as 1:4.4; color of body grayish brown (northern California) barbert Caudell Antenna of nymph normally containing 31-32 segments; compound eye distinctly smaller than above, proportion of greatest length of eye to width of head about as 1:5.8; color of body light amber, paler than in barberi (Oregon) Gotou. ssea-e. 5. J HSCILLICni eal ner. Giylloblatta rothi, n.sp. Figs, 15,167 10-125 14716 Male (holotype): Size small for genus; body clothed with fine pubescence; major body setae less conspicuous than usual for genus. Antennae with 29 segments (left), 19 (right, broken); com- pound eye large (Fig. 1), longer with respect to head size than in C. campodeiformis; pronotum with lateral margins noticeably converging pos- teriorly, more so than in holotype of scullenz; legs comparatively short and stout; leg ratios (length divided by width) as follows: front femur, 2.8; hind femur, 4.8; front tibia, 5; hind tibia, 9. Supra-anal plate borne asymmetrically, so that base of left cercus is posterior to right cercus (Fig. 5); plate with highly distinctive lobelike development of left posterior apical corner; left coxite more elongate than in c. campodeiformis, oblique mesal margin decidedly rounded rather than nearly straight as in latter, pubescent but lacking distinctive major setae; right coxite with usual pubescence, but lacking strong lateral setae such as those of befratrilecta; left and right styli each borne laterally on basal half (Fig. 6); phallic sclerites of same pattern as in campodeiformis, but differing in details; main phallic sclerite with dorsolateral lobe (Fig. 10, dll) about half as long as lateral margin below the dorsal cap, unlike much shorter lobe in campodezformis; ven- trolateral lobe (vill) not as produced as in c. campodeiformis; apical lobe of accessory sclerite vou. 43, No. 10 of right phallomere (Fig. 12) rounded and lobe- like, less elongate and tapering than in c. cam- podeiformis (Fig. 13). Cerci without dark major setae such as occur in other species, though pale delicate counterparts appear to occur amid pu- bescence; segments relatively short, basal seg- ments as in female (Fig. 16), terminal segments (Fig. 14) much shorter than usual for genus. Coloration: General coloration very pale, much of body antimony yellow (Ridgway), grading to dark yellow ocher (Ridgway) on dorsal surface of abdomen and the posterior half ventrally; anten- nae, legs, coxites, and cerci lighter (warm buff, Ridgway); eyes black. Measurements (lengths in millimeters): Body, 14.5; antenna, 8; eye, 0.53; pronotum, 2.35; hind femur, 3.3; hind tibia, 3.2; cercus, 3.4; width of head, 2.4; of pronotum, 2.18; of hind femur, 0.7. Female (allotype) (specimen relaxed and trans- ferred to alcohol after being dry on a pin): Differing from male in somewhat larger size, proportionately more slender hind tibia, much darker color (possibly due to method of preserva- tion), and the usual sexual features. Antennae with 23 segments (left, broken), 29 (right); leg ratios (length divided by width) as follows: front femur 3, hind femur 4.9, front tibia 5.7; hind tibia 11. Abdominal appendages (Fig. 16) with three terminal segments of cerci missing, dorsal valve of ovipositor apparently reaching to segment seven, with weakly developed setae on basal half; several transverse fracture lines on middle and lower valves (apparently due to breakage). Coloration: General body color brown, legs, abdomen and its appendages paler. and about cinnamon; antennae prout’s brown (Ridgway), with some irregular paler areas. Measurements (lengths in millimeters): Body, Fies. 1-16.—1, Grylloblatta rothi, male holotype, lateral view of head; 2, G. campodeiformis campodei- formis, male from Gallatin County, Mont., lateral view of head; 3, Same specimen as Fig. 2, dorsal view of supra-anal plate; 4, G. befratrilecta, male holotype, dorsal view of supra-anal plate; 5, G. rothz, male holotype, dorsal view of supra-anal plate; 6, G. rothi, holotype, lateral view of right coxite and stylus; 7, G. bifratrilecta, holotype, lateral view of right coxite and stylus; 8, G. c. campodeiformis, male specimen from Gallatin County, Mont., lateral view of right coxite and stylus; 8a, G. c. occidentalis, male topotype from Mount Baker, Wash., lateral view of apex of right coxite and stylus; 9, G. c. campodeiformis, male specimen from Gallatin County, Mont., oblique view of main phallic sclerite; 10, G. rothi, holotype, ob- lique view of main phallic sclerite; 11, G. roth, holotype, lateral view of main phallic sclerite; 12, G. rothi, holotype, apical lobe of right phallomere; 13, G. c. campodeiformis, Gallatin County, Mont., apical lobe of right phallomere; 14, G. rothz, holotype, terminal three segments of cercus; 15, G. bifratrilecta, female allotype, terminal structures of abdomen; 16, G. rothi, female allotype, terminal structures of abdomen, (three terminal segments of cerci missing) same scale as Fig. 14. (dll-dorsolateral lobe of main phallic sclerite; e—apex of copulatory process; st—stylus; vll—ventrolateral lobe of main phallic sclerite.) OcToBER. 1953 GURNEY: TAXONOMY OF GRYLLOBLATTA BT 16; antenna, 9; eye, 0.5; pronotum, 2.5; hind feet, about 2,000 feet below lowest snowfields. femur, 3.4; hind tibia, 3.4; width of head, 2.4; of | Collected September 12, 1948, by Vincent D. pronotum, 2.2; of hind femur, 0.7; of hind tibia, Roth. Found in the center of a rotten log about O:31: 216 to 3 feet in diameter while Mr. Roth was Type—U.S.N.M. no. 61656. A male from collecting spiders. ‘“‘The wood was almost com- Happy Valley, on Century Drive about 15 to pletely decayed and it was fairly damp in the 20 miles south of Sisters, Oreg. Altitude, 6,450 center. The area around was typical for the oa LS. i leh Fias. 1-16.—(See opposite page for legend). 328 country, small pine with not too much under- growth. There was a stream about 100 feet away and a meadow about the same distance” (V.D.R..). Mr. Roth also wrote that the specimen was ex- posed to the sun but moved slowly. Then it was placed in a vial with some damp organic matter, and when removed from his pocket a few minutes later it had died. Fragments of unidentifiable insect material were in the digestive tract. Allotype— A specimen in the U. S. National Museum, one of two females reported by Elsea (1937). They were found beneath a stone at 6,500 feet altitude at Crater Lake, Oreg., on November 27, 1936. The location of Elsea’s second specimen is unknown. Crater Lake is approximately 90 miles south of Happy Valley, and both localities are situated along the eastern margin of the Cascade Mountains. The shortness of the cercal segments separates rothi from all other species except possibly barberi, and the character is so distinctive that the association of sexes is believed correct. Judged by nearly mature nymphs, which appear to give a satisfactory indication, barber has a much larger number of antennal segments than rothz. The latter is the first of the genus to be found with a highly asymmetrical male supra-anal plate. The type locality of rothi, Happy Valley, is only some 20 miles southeast of McKenzie Pass where scullent occurs, but the nature of the cerci leaves no doubt regarding the distinctness of the two species, though the male of scullenz is still un- known. It is a pleasure to name this new species for Vincent D. Roth, who for several years has shown a remarkable and persistent interest in collecting Grylloblatta. Grylloblatta bifratrilecta,? n. sp. Figs. 4, 7, 15 Male (holotype): Size medium for genus; fine body pubescence and major setae moderately conspicuous, more so than in rothi; antennae with 28 segments (left), 30 (tight); compound eye proportionately smaller than in rothi, about as in c. campodetformis; pronotum with lateral margins moderately converging posteriorly; legs much as in c. campoderformis, ratios (length divided by width) as follows: front femur, 3.1; hind femur, 5.7; front tibia, 6.2; hind tibia, 10.8. Supra-anal plate borne asymmetrically; plate > Meaning ‘‘collected by two brothers,” with reference to Henry K. and George Townes. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 43, No. 10 with apical half moderately asymmetrical, with apical corners angular, the left corner more pro- duced than the right (Fig. 4); left coxite with mesal margin broadly rounded, unlike c. campo- deiformis, but less produced than in rothi, a major seta on disc of coxite slightly laterad of and a little posterior of the middle, another major seta near mesal margin at about middle; right coxite (Fig. 7) with two major setae; styli each borne basally, more elongate than in ec. campodeiformis; main phallic sclerite with apical lip of copulatory process (e) stouter in lateral view than in rothz, dorsolateral and ventrolateral lobes much as in rotht; apical lobe of accessory sclerite of right phallomere differing from rothi in having the lateral margins nearly parallel. Measurements (lengths in millimeters): Body, 20; antenna, 12.5; eye, 0.5; pronotum, 2.8; hind femur, 4; hind tibia, 4.3; cercus, 5.9; width of head, 2.7; of pronotum, 2.45; of hind femur, 0.7; of hind tibia, 0.4. Coloration: Body mainly ochraceous buff (Ridgway); the terga slightly darker than sterna; coxites, cerci, and tarsi paler; head and antennae darkened to zinc orange (Ridgway), latter paler in apical third; eyes black. Female (allotype) : Differing from male in some- what more robust body and slightly more elon- gate legs, in addition to usual sexual characters. Antennae with 31 segments (left), 30 (right); leg ratios (length divided by width) as follows: front femur, 3.1; hind femur, 6.6; front tibia, 6.4; hind tibia, 12.3. Abdominal appendages (Fig. 15) with short, stout setae well represented on basal half of dorsal valves and basal half and ventral margin of ventral valve; dorsal valve reaching to seg- ment 6 of cercus; major setae of cercus con- spicuously developed. Coloration: As in male. Measurements (lengths in millimeters): Body (rather contracted), 17; antenna, 12.5; eye, 0.5; pronotum, 3.1; hind femur, 4.6; hind tibia, 4.9; cercus, 6; width of head, 3.1; of pronotum, 2.7; of hind femur, 0.7; of hind tibia, 0.4. Type.—U.8S.N.M. no. 61132. Male from Sonora Pass, Calif., elevation 9,000 to 10,000 feet, col- lected July 20, 1951, by J: W. MacSwain. (Sonora Pass is on California Highway 108 about 50 miles southeast of Lake Tahoe and about 10 to 15 miles north of the northern boundary of Yosemite National Park.) Allotype—U.S.N.M. Female from two miles OcToBER 1953 west of Sonora Pass, Calif., elevation about 8,600 feet, collected by Henry K. Townes and George Townes, July 7, 1948. There are 13 paratypic adults, 12 females and 1 male. Five rather large and 25 small nymphs are not considered paratypes. All are from Sonora Pass, though differing in exact spot, elevation, date, and collector. In addition to the allotype, the Townes brothers collected one adult female and 12 nymphs on July 4, 1948, and 7 females and 9 nymphs on July 7, 1948. Dr. MacSwain collected one nearly mature female on August 4, 1948, and the remainder of the series was taken by him or his associates in 1951, as follows: June 27, three nymphs; July 11, one male, two females, four nymphs; July 13, one nymph; July 20, two females. In addition to the U. 8. National Museum, paratypes will be deposited at the following institutions: Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia; Museum of Zoology, University of Michigan; University of California; California Academy of Sciences. The body length of the male paratype is 19 mm, pronotal length 2.7 mm. Female paratypes vary in body length from 17 to 20 mm, in pronotal length from 2.7 to 3 mm. The antennae of the paratypes which clearly are unbroken (16 anten- nae) range in the number of segments from 27 to 32, with an average of 30.2. Two paratypes have the ovipositor reaching only to the apical half of the fifth segment of the cercus. Two females and a male taken July 11, 1951, are noticeably redder than the others, being reddish cinnamon-rufous (probably due to some differ- ence in preservation). Other adults are com- parable to the type and allotype in color. The nymphs are paler, the smallest one whitish ex- cept for the black eyes. Females of bifratrilecta may easily be confused with those of campodeiformis campodeiformis, though the leg proportions are slightly different. The front tibia of c. campodeiformis is propor- tionally stouter, with the several pairs of spine- like setae along the ventral margins closer to each other than in bifratrilecta. The terminal segments of the cercus of bifratrilecta are less elongate than those of scullent. The Townes specimens were found on the north-facing slope of the canyon which walls Chipmunk Flat near the main highway that crosses the Sierras at Sonora Pass. The slope includes many cliffs and talus rock slides. The erylloblattids occurred by an isolated patch of GURNEY: TAXONOMY OF GRYLLOBLATTA 329 snow, about 50 by 20 feet located in a depression. The majority of specimens were taken near one side of the snow patch, where both large rocks and gravel occurred. Small nymphs were fairly common in the wet gravel, but large nymphs and adults were mainly under the larger rocks. The zone from about a foot away from the snow to about 4 inches in from the margin beneath it was preferred habitat. The Towneses also observed a good deal of decaying organic ma- terial—including a few patches of dead grass and blown pine needles, and they found that Collem- bola, centipedes and millipedes were common. Dr. MacSwain’s 1948 nymph was found just below the 9,000-foot level under the retreating margin of a snow field on a north-facing slope. Specimens taken in June 1951 were at about 10,500 feet and either were at the margin of snow or under large rocks protruding through or near the snow. Other 1951 collections were made in several situations. Several specimens were under large rocks on either side of a stream running beneath a snow field. By digging away the loose rock and soil, Dr. MacSwain observed but was unable to capture two nymphs under a large boulder. This boulder was easily 15 feet from a large snowfield. A night collecting trip was made July 20. Four students (Katana, Kappos, Puttler, and Downing) accompanied Dr. MacSwain to the 9,000 foot level by car, from where they climbed before dark to the base of some high cliffs. Just before darkness, which fell at 8:30 p.m. (daylight saving time), one female and two nymphs were found in a rocky crevice in the cliffs. They occurred under rocks on the moist side of the crevice a distance of several feet from snow and running water. Insect fragments found near the female suggested that she may have been feeding. After dark various patches of snow were ex- amined and three adults were taken separately, one under the margin of a snow field, and two moving over the surface above. The holotype was taken at 10 p.m. running over the snow about 18 inches from the margin of a large snow- field. All the other specimens were either more closely associated with the retreating margins of snow patches or with places from which snow had disappeared. The temperature was warm enough so that sweaters were not needed and the moon was full but the sky overcast. An adult female collected July 20, 1951, had many fragments of insects in the digestive tract, 330 especially broken sclerites and parts of legs. Pieces of an ovipositor and of a wing from a small hymenopteron, possibly a braconid, were recognized. Three other adults yielded fragments of a spider, of beetles, and the scales of a moth. In two small nymphs, 8 and 9 mm long, re- spectively, were found fragments of a tiny beetle, possibly one of the Pselaphidae, and of a spider. Dr. MacSwain informed me that specimens kept alive in a refrigerator at a constant temperature of 8°C. were fed freshly collected moths which were first immobilized by pinching. These speci- mens have been noted briefly by MacSwain (Pan- Pac. Emnte292°625 1953): An attempt to induce matings in captivity was abandoned by Dr. MacSwain because the male and female concerned tried to chew each other and had to be separated to prevent injury. Grylloblatta spp. What may prove to be an undescribed form of Grylloblatta occurs in Mono County, Calif., near the Mammoth Crest. Available material consists of a single adult female collected July 8, 1950, by Norman Reimers, a University of California student then engaged in making a biological survey for the U. 8. Fish and Wildlife Service. The specimen was found at an altitude of about 12,000 feet, at the base of a snowfield adjacent to a small pool in which water temperature was about 36°F. The pool is near Lake Dorothy in the Upper Convict Basin. On the Mount Mor- rison Quadrangle of the U. 8. Geological Survey topographic maps of the area, the pool is ad- jacent to a tiny lake southwest of Lake Dorothy ~ on a direct line between Lake Dorothy and Lake Virginia, and about three-fourths of the distance from Lake Dorothy to the county line between Mono and Fresno Counties. The specimen is much like bifratrilecta in general appearance, but the femora are more slender than in Sonora Pass females. There are 34 (right) and 33 (left) antennal segments, re- spectively, which is slightly more than have been found in bifratrilecta. Until more material is available, preferably including a male, it is de- sirable to postpone any definite judgment regard- ing the status of this population. The Mammoth Crest is located in the area of the Mammoth Lakes and Devil’s Postpile Na- tional Monument, and it forms an offshoot from what is considered the main crest of the Sierra Nevada Range. It is about 70 miles southeast of JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 10 Sonora Pass, suggesting that the distance and more especially the location rather apart from the main Sierra Nevada Range may have con- tributed to the development of a form at least subspecifically distinct from bifratrilecta. Thanks to Harry P. Chandler, of Red Bluff, Calif., I have learned that he and his associates have collected Grylloblatta at several localities in the area surrounding Mount Lassen, and it is to be expected that they will publish on their discovery. It would naturally be suspected that the population might represent G. barberi Caudell, - the type locality of which is some 25 miles or more south of Mount Lassen.* Unfortunately, the type series of barberi consists of nymphs only, though several specimens are nearly mature. Through Mr. Chandler’s kind cooperation, I have examined some of the new material, in- cluding both male and female, but I am un- certain whether the specimens represent barbert. The discovery of a mature male at the type locality of barber: is highly important to a thorough comparison and resulting sound deci- sion regarding the identity of populations in northern California. Grylloblatta sculleni Gurney Grylloblatta scullent Gurney, Pan-Pac. Ent. 13: 164, figs. 7-11. 1937. Type locality by original designation: Scott Camp (6,600 feet altitude), Three Sisters, Cascade Mountains, Oreg. One adult female and 48 nymphs, collected at the type locality October 11-12, 1952, by Vincent D. Roth, have been examined. The adult is much paler than the holotype. The ovipositor extends to the base of the fifth segment of the cercus, slightly longer than in the holotype, and both specimens have 39 segments in the right antenna and 32 in the apparently unbroken left antenna. Regardless of the contraction or extension of the terminal terga, which accounts for some difference in the respective positions of the ovipositor and cerci, the cerei of sculleni proportionally are distinctly longer than those of bifratrilecta. The nymphs here recorded include numerous specimens of both sexes. The antennae of two pairs of nymphs ranging from 13 to 15 mm in body length have 35 to 38 segments. The smallest nymph is 4 mm long. 3'The type locality of barberi is about 20 miles southwest of Westwood, Calif., near an entrance of the Sunnyside Mine, on the North Fork of the Feather River just above the junction of Butte Creek and about 3 miles below Seneca. OcTOBER 1953 The type locality consists of talus slopes which terminate a small valley a hundred yards wide and a few hundred yards long just above the Sunshine Shelter on the slope between the North and Middle Sister. The valley faces south and the talus slopes are mainly on the westerly part and present a very rocky path to the treeless sides of the Middle Sister. Mr. Roth writes regarding his collection: ‘‘The majority of the specimens were obtained from under rocks within 114 feet from the snow and ice, and one specimen was collected on the snow under a large rock. The microhabitat most suit- able for the insects seemed to be one which was damp but not wet, cold but not freezing, and where there were loose rocks and some soil. At the base of one talus slope where the rocks were partly silted in, no specimens were found. Since the grylloblattids are considered to have nocturnal habits, I visited the talus slope from which I collected most of the specimens about 7 p.m., after the sun had disappeared. Only one specimen was seen during a half hour searching and that was on a rock about 4 inches from the snow.” Several arthropods were found by Mr. Roth in the same environment with scullenz, either on or beneath rocks at the snowline. A fungus gnat which occurred .in fairly large numbers on the rocks and which did not seem inclined to fly, has been identified by Alan Stone as a new species of Boletina (Fungivoridae), a staphylinid by M. H. Hatch as Phloepterus sp., and a centi- pede by R. V. Chamberlin as Linatenia chionophila (Wood), ‘‘a characteristically northern form, wide- spread across Canada and the northern United States.’’ M. C. Lane identified an elaterid larva as Hypolithus nocturnus (Esch.), and Clarence J. Goodnight identified two phalangids as Sabacon crassipalpe (lu. Koch) and referred to them as a cireumboreal form often found in cold areas. A nymph 8 mm long had many insect frag- - ments in the digestive tract, imcluding pieces appearing to be from the wing of a fly, and the antenna apparently from a tiny beetle. It seems quite possible that Boletuna sometimes serves as food for G. sculleni in this locality. Grylloblatta campodeiformis campodeiformis Walker ise 2300, JS Grylloblatta campodeiformis Walker, Can. Ent. 46: 93-99, figs. 1-7. 1914. Type locality by original GURNEY: TAXONOMY OF GRYLLOBLATTA Soll designation: Sulphur Mountain, near Banff, Alberta. New distribution records: Missoula, Missoula County, Mont., 3,700 feet, February 11, 1950 (1 female); same, about 3,500 feet, April 12, 1953 (1 male, 1 female), (taken separately under surface rocks at base of rock slide, temperature 34°F .); Mission Mountains, Lake County, Mont., 7,000 to 10,000 feet, September 14, 19, 20, 1952 (1 female, 9 nymphs); vicinity of Holland Look- out, Swan Valley, Lake County, Mont., at sum- mit and localities between there and three miles to the north, elevations from about 6,500 feet to 10,400 feet at summit, October 4, 1952 (5 males, 7 females, 14 nymphs). All collections were made by John A. Chapman, of the Depart- ment of Zoology, Montana State University. Previous Montana records have been sum- marized and the localities shown on a sketch map (Gurney, 1948, pp. 90-91). Until now, Montana records from west of the Gallatin Can- yon have been limited to one large male nymph taken on the snow January 26, 1947 by W. L. Jellison along the East Fork Road, 10 miles east of Sula, Ravalli County. Three counties in a vertical tier along the Rocky Mountains of west- ern Montana are now represented. The wide- spread character of the distribution is shown by the individual localities in the Mission Moun- tains area at which Mr. Chapman found speci- mens, as follows: McDonald Peak, about 10,000 feet; North Branch of the Mission Basin, about 8,000 feet; in the Duncan Lake Drainage, about 7,500 feet. Mr. Chapman found an adult female beneath a board in the yard of his home near Missoula on April 12, 1953. The 16 adults here recorded have a total of 24 unbroken antennae which range in number of segments from 26 to 29 (average, 28.5). As many as 30 segments appear to be uncommon in c. campodeiformis. ANNOTATED LIST OF REFERENCES 1. Ber-Brenko, G. Ia. A new representative of orthopteroid insects of the growp Grylloblat- toidea (Orthoptera) in the fauna of the USSR. Ent. Obozr. 31 (3-4): 506-509, 4 figs. 1951. (In Russian.) Grylloblattina djakonovi, n. gen., n. sp., described from a single female found Sept. 20, 1934, by A. M. Djakonov in a rot- ting tree stump in woods at [? Island] of Petrov in the [? bay] of Siaukh near the mouth of the river Sudzukh, southern Maritime Provinces [of Siberia]. (The locality, ascertained through the cooperation of consultants in the Slavic Room of the Library of Congress, is approximately 90 miles east of Vladivostock, at latitude 42° 52’ N. This first locality for the Grylloblattidae JOURNAL OF THE from the Asiatic mainland is about 200 miles farther north than localities in northern Honshu at which Galloisiana has been taken, but some 400 miles south of British Columbian habitats of Grylloblatta. The genus is most closely related to Galloisiana and is especially distinguished by 5-segmented cerci, the apical segment of which is specialized. The latter is widened toward the apex, but is conically and strongly narrowed and finally is cylindrical to the apex.—A.B.G.) 2. CAMPBELL, Marruew G. Notes on Grylloblatta at Kamloops. Proc. Ent. Soc. British Colum- bia 45: 1-5. 1949. Presented posthumously, with editorial notes by G. J. Spencer. Detailed notes from the personal observations of an amateur entomologist who collected numerous specimens at Kamloops, B. C., and maintained cultures in the basement of his home. The conditions of the natural habitat and those of the culture containers are carefully explained. It is suggested that in cul- tures soft rotted humus among loose stones is a good medium, with temperatures between 30 and 40° F. It is emphasized that the Kamloops population can survive higher temperatures than the one in Alberta (typical campodeiformis), and that exposure to 26° F. is fatal. (It is important that the taxonomic status of the Kamloops population be re-examined by carefully com- paring Kamloops males, when available, with those of G. c. occidentalis.—A.B.G.) 3. CHOPARD, LucIEN. Notoptéres, pp. 587-5938, figs. 232-235. In Traité de Zoologie 9: 1117 pp. 1949. Edited by Pierre P. Grassé. A brief summary in keeping with the reviews of other groups in this basic French text and reference book. No original data apparently. One of the best summaries to be found in a general book. 4. Epwarps, GrorGcE A., AND NutTTING, WILLIAM L. The influence of temperature upon the respiration and heart activity of Thermobia and Grylloblatta. Psyche 57: 33-44. 1950. The oxygen consumption, heart rate, and activity at various temperatures were determined, in the case of Grylloblatta based on specimens from Montana. ‘“‘Grylloblatta is normally active from —2.5 to 11.3 degrees C. At lower temperatures activity is decreased and at higher temperatures activity is increased until at 18 degrees the animals become stuporous and at 20.5 degrees become irreversibly damaged by heat.’’ These insects are “strictly poikilothermal in that they make no metabolic adap- tations to offset unfavorable temperatures.”’ 5. Eusgea, J. E. A new locality for Grylloblatta. Pan-Pacifie Ent. 13: 57. 1937. 6. GuRNEY, ASHLEY B. The taxonomy and distribu- tion of the Grylloblattidae. Proc. Ent. Soe. Washington 50: 86-102, 11 figs., 4 text-figs. 1948. 7. Jupp, W. W. A comparative study of the pro- ventriculus of orthopteroid insects with refer- ence to use in taronomy. Can. Journ. Res. (sect. D) 26: 93-161, 98 figs. 1948. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, No. 10 The proventriculus of Grylloblatta is compared to that of other orthopteroids. In Grylloblatia it is described as of globular shape, with t2 longitudinal folds in the intima and two ranks of 12 pyramidal ‘‘teeth’”’ each at its posterior end. 8. Nurrinc, WiLuiam L. A comparative anatomical study of the heart and accessory structures of the orthopteroid insects. Jour. Morph. 89: 501-598, 21 pls. 1951. A valuable, basic study of the heart in all principal groups of orthopteroids. The position of Grylloblatta at the base of the saltatorial Orthoptera is strongly suggested. The incurrent- excurrent system in this insect “illustrates the basic ancestral plan from which all of the orthopteroid variations may well have been derived,”’ though the author does not conclude that Grylloblatta is the ancestral orthopteroid. 9. Pietscu, D. J. The alpine rock crawler, Gryllo- blatta campodeiformis Walker, in Montana. Proc. Montana Acad. Sci. 5 and 6: 17-20. 1947. Grylloblatta collections made in Montana are reviewed, the first specimen having been found by Fred Skoog in 1936 in the Gallatin Canyon south of Bozeman. Nearly all Montana speci- mens have been taken in the fall, suggesting that the conditions of spring and summer are unfavorable for G. campodeiformis in the portions of rock slides and other habitats that are near the surface. In the extreme northwestern corner of Yellowstone National Park, Wyoming, a single specimen was found in May 1939. An ecology class from Montana State College established a study plot of 119 square yards at 7,500 feet altitude in the Bridger Mountains 20 miles north of Bozeman. It is moderately wooded, with a coarse rock slide on an incline of 20 degrees from the horizontal. The total specimens resulting from one visit during each of five years (October or early November, 1938- 42) was 121 (18 adults, 103 nymphs). One specimen occurred at least a foot above ground level in a rotten stump. Rarely does more than one specimen occur under the same stone, and ants and other insects seldom are found with Grylloblatta. Adults seldom occur under small stones, though rarely they have been found beneath stones as small as 2 x 3 x 4 inches. 10. WALKER, E. M. On the anatomy of Grylloblatta campodeiformis Walker. The organs of di- gestion. Can. Journ. Res. (sect. D), 27: 309- 344, 1 pl., 14 figs. 1949. A detailed description of digestive organs, with special at- tention to the proventriculus. The latter is much different from that of the Ensifera in that there are 12 longitudinal divisions characterized by flexible, backwardly directed lamellae instead of six divisions armed with columns of complex sclerotized teeth. The Ensifera have the most powerful and elaborate system of hard toothlike structures on the internal lining of the proven- triculus of any group of orthopteroid insects. The proventricu- lus of Grylloblatta is believed to serve as a regulatory valve and also possibly as a propulsive organ for the movement of food through the digestive tract. It is concluded that (1) the gryl- loblattids are the nearest relatives of the Ensifera, but differ too widely to be included within that group, and (2) the salta- torial habit has been independently evolved in the Ensifera and Caelifera. OcTOBER 1953 SETZER: FOUR NEW MAMMALS 333 MAM MALOGY.—Four new mammals from the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. Henry W. SETZER, U.S. National Museum. Through the efforts and cooperation of the United States Naval Medical Research Unit No. 3 and John S. Owen, formerly district commissioner of Torit District, Equatoria Province, a large collection of mammals has been made available through the Chicago Natural History Museum for study. The specimens, here designated as types, are a part of a larger collection pur- chased by Harry Hoogstraal from John 8. Owen for the Chicago Natural History Museum. The only specimens previously reported from this province were obtained by the Smithsonian Roosevelt African Ex- pedition of 1909-1910 near Nimule and Lado, which were then politically a part of Uganda. The bulk of the present collection was made near Torit and in the Imatong Mountains, both of which le on the east side of the province. Capitalized color terms are from Ridgway’s Color standards and color nomenclature. All measurements are in millimeters. Graphiurus murinus sudanensis, n. subsp. Type.—Chicago Natural History Museum, no. 79429, adult female, skin and skull, from Torit, Equatoria Province, Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. Ob- tained December 4, 1951, by J. 8. Owen; original number, 2143. Specimens examined.—Twelve, from Equatoria Province; Torit, 11; Obbo, 1. Distribution —Known only from the above localities. Diagnosis.—Hairs of upper parts with a broad basal plumbeous band, a narrow subterminal band of Clay Color, and then finely tipped with black; color darkest on top of head; hairs of shoulders with a basal plumbeous band and a broad terminal band of Cinnamon-Buff, thus giving the animal a ‘‘collared”’ appearance; black orbital rings conspicuous; cheeks, belly and dorsal surface of hind feet whitish; chest, throat and inside of forelimbs strongly washed with Mikado Brown; tail brownish gray, most hairs white tipped; dorsal surface of hands brownish. Brain- case vaulted; width across zygomatic arches greatest at middle; upper toothrows parallel; auditory bullae strongly inflated ventrally; ex- ternal pterygoid processes widely flaring. Measurements of type specimen.—Total length 175; length of tail 82; length of hind foot 18; condylobasal length of skull 22.2; greatest zy- gomatic width 14.6; least interorbital width 4.2; crown length of upper toothrow 3.1; condyloin- cisive length 23.8; length of nasals 9.6; width of rostrum at level of infraorbital foramen 5.6. Comparisons.—Graphiurus murinus sudanensis differs from G. m. griseus from the Isiola River, British East Africa, in that the brainease is less vaulted; the width across the zygomatic arches is greater; the rostrum is wider; the nasals are more rounded anteriorly; the auditory bullae are smaller but more inflated ventrally; the upper toothrows are parallel instead of divergent anteriorly. The color is lighter throughout and the hairs of the tail are white tipped and not concolor. From Graphiurus murinus saturatus, as known from Kaimosi, British East Africa, G. m. sudanen- sis differs in that the bullae appear larger antero- posteriorly but equally inflated ventrally; width across zygomatic arches less, the widest point being, in general, near the middle of the arch and not near the temporal root; the rostrum is narrower; the least interorbital width is generally less. Dorsal color is lighter; the tail is brownish eray instead of brownish; there is more white on the cheeks; and the belly instead of being strongly washed with buff is whitish. From Graphiurus parvus parvus and G. p. dollmant, G. m. sudanensis differs in being de- cidedly larger and darker in color. From Graphiurus christyt, as known from Medje, Belgian Congo, G. m. sudanensis differs in having the braincase less vaulted; the width across the zygomatic arches less; the rostrum narrower; the nasals not projecting so far pos- teriorly; the auditory bullae larger and more inflated; the upper toothrows parallel and not diverging anteriorly. The color is lighter; the white markings of the face are present; and the hairs of the belly are more broadly tipped with white. No specimens of Graphiurus butleri are avail- able for comparison, but on the basis of published measurements it appears that G. m. sudanensis is smaller; the skull is shorter and narrower; the interorbital constriction is less; the nasals are 334 JOURNAL OF THE markedly shorter; and the upper toothrow 1s shorter. Specimens of Graphiurus orobinus are not avail- able for comparison, but it seems to me that because of its extremely short hind foot this species is in no way related to G. m. sudanensis. From the type of Graphiurus personatus, G. m. sudanensis differs in being markedly larger and erayer. Remarks.—Even though actual intergradation cannot be demonstrated with allied races of Graphiurus murinus, the majority of the charac- ters of the Sudanese specimens place them in that species. It may well be that as additional specimens are acquired, the species christy: and butlert will be shown to intergrade with adjacent races of murinus. It is interesting to note that all the specimens except two were taken in native huts. The two exceptions were taken from a tree in the savanna. Otomys orestes giloensis, n. subsp. Type.—Chicago Natural History Museum, no. 73901, adult female, skin and skull, from Gilo (long. 32° 50’ 38” H., lat. 4° 2’ N.), Imatong Mountains, 6,500 feet, Torit District, Equatoria Province, Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. Obtained 10 November 1952 by J. 8. Owen; original number, 2278. Specimens examined.—Nine, all from Gilo. Distribution —Known only from the type lo- cality. Diagnosis.—Over-all coloration of upper parts Olive Brown shading into the plumbeous belly; no sharp line of demarcation between upper parts and belly; plumbeous of belly washed with buff. Tail black above, buffy gray below, the colors not sharply separated. Rostrum of skull relatively long and narrow; nasals not greatly expanded at tip; interorbital region relatively wide; bullae relatively large; upper toothrow relatively long. Measurements of type specumen.—Length of head and body 161; length of tail 71; length of hind foot 28; length of ear from crown 17; condyloincisive length of skull 34.7; alveolar length of upper toothrow 8.8; length of anterior palatine foramina 6.6; width across zygomatic arches 18.5; least interorbital width 4.6; length of nasals 15.7. Comparisons.—From the type of Otomys orestes dollmani, O. o. giloensis differs in darker color, larger body, and longer hind foot. The rostrum is longer and narrower; the nasals less expanded WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 10 distally; the interorbital region wider; the upper toothrow longer; the auditory bullae larger and more inflated; the width across the zygomatic arches greater; and the wings of the mesoptery- goid less flaring. From Otomys orestes orestes as known by speci- mens from Mount Kenia, British East Africa, O. o. giloensis differs in generally darker colora- tion and somewhat smaller hind feet. The skull differs in wider interorbital region; nasals less flaring anteriorly; anterior palatine foramina shorter; auditory bullae smaller but relatively more inflated ventrally; and upper toothrow shorter. Remarks.—This new subspecies is well marked both in color and in cranial characters. In mor- phological characters it is closer to O. 0. dollmani than to the nominate race. All of the specimens in the type series show the six laminae of M*, which appear to be typical of the orestes, irroratus, kempi section of the irroratus group as defined by Ellerman in The families and genera of liwing rodents, vol. 2. Mus triton imatongensis, n. subsp. Type.—Chicago Natural History Museum, no. 79535, adult male, skin and skull, from Gilo (long. 32° 50’ 38” EH. lat. 49°27 NG) ioien= Mountains, Torit District, Equatoria Province, Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. Obtained January 18, 1952, by J. S. Owen. Specimens examined.—Twelve, all from Gilo. Distribution —Known only from the type lo- cality. Diagnosis.—Upper parts Warm Sepia in over- all tone; hairs finely tipped with Saccardo’s Umber; belly, throat, chin, upper lips, and ventral surfaces of forelegs whitish with hairs plumbeous- based and lightly washed with buffy; dorsal surfaces of hands and feet blackish. Skull with narrow interorbital region; auditory bullae rela- tively large; upper toothrow relatively short; interpterygoid space relatively wide. Measurements of type specimen.—Length of head and body 69; length of tail 53; length of hind foot 16; length of ear from crown 7; con- dyloincisive length of skull 19.5; width across zygomatic arches 10.3; length of nasals 7.8; least interorbital width 3.9; length of upper toothrow out Comparisons.—Mus triton imatongensis differs from M. t. triton, as represented by the type and type series of Mus naivashae Heller, from the OcToBER 1953 Aberdare Mountains, British East Africa, in: Color generally darker, that is with less yellow in the pelage; skull with markedly larger bullae; shorter maxillary toothrow and narrower in- terorbitum; more vaulted and less laterally ex- panded cranium. The only other form with which Mus triton imatongensis might be confused is Mus muscu- loides, from which it may be distinguished by the plumbeous instead of pure white belly. Remarks.—The specimens in the type series were all taken in grassy situations either in coffee plantations or along forest streams. The outstanding characters separating M. t. imaton- gensis from the nominate race are in the develop- ment of the auditory bullae and the vaulting of the cranium. These two characters may be of specific importance, but I feel that it is better to refer these animals to Mus triton to which they are closely related. Mus bellus aequatorius, n. subsp. Type—Chicago Natural History Museum, no. 79510, adult female, skin and skull, from Torit, Torit District, Equatoria Province, Anglo-Egyp- tian Sudan. Obtained by J. 8. Owen, March 1, 1952. Specimens examined.—Thirty-one, from: Torit, 29, Ikoto, 1; Obbo, 1. Distribution Known only from the above localities. Diagnosis—Coloration of upper parts Clay Color strongly intermixed with black; Clay Color purest on cheeks, above eyes, a thin band on upper arm, and a thin line between the dorsal color and the belly. Dorsum with conspicuous wide blackish stripe, almost lacking Clay Color, from tip of nose to base of tail. Belly, hands, feet, throat, chin, hips, and postauricular and sub- auricular spots pure white. Rostrum and _ in- terorbital region of skull relatively narrow; maxil- lary toothrow short; sides of anterior palatine foramina not flaring. Measurements of type specimen.—Total length SETZER: FOUR NEW MAMMALS 339 82; length of tail 32; length of hind foot 11; length of ear 7; condyloincisive length of skull 15.9; crown length of upper toothrow 2.8; width across zygomatic arches 8.8; least interorbital width 3.1; length of nasals 6.2; width of rostrum at level of infraorbital foramen 2.2. Comparisons.—From the type of Mus bellus gondokorae, M. b. aequatorius differs in darker, more Clearly defined dorsal stripe; less yellow in pigmented areas; pronounced subauricular and postauricular spots as opposed to a minute sub- auricular and no postauricular spot in M. 6. gondokorae; rostrum narrower; toothrow shorter; lateral margins of anterior palatine foramina nearly straight rather than bowed laterad; in- terorbital region narrower. Mus bellus aequatorius differs from the type of M. b. enclavae in: Color lighter in all respects but with the dark dorsal stripe more pronounced; postauricular and subauricular spots conspicuous (there is only a suggestion of the subauricular spot in WM. b. enclavae); rostrum narrower; upper toothrow shorter; auditory bullae larger; in- terorbital region narrower; width of skull at level of temporal root of zygomata narrower; wings of pterygoid less flaring. Remarks.—Most of the specimens examined came from savanna, but a few were taken in buildings occupied as a laboratory at Torit. One specimen from Obbo is intermediate in color between M. b. aequatorius and M. b. en- clavae and has only a faint subauricular spot as in the latter. The skull, however, is like that of aequatorius in all critical characters. This speci- men is, therefore, referred to aequatorius but is not considered to he within the normal range of variation of the typical form. The most outstanding character of this new subspecies is the pronounced white band below and in back of the ears. This one character alone separates M. b. aequatorius from M. b. enclavae and M. b. gondokorae. In none of the subspecies from British East Africa does this white spot show so conspicuously. 336 JOURNAL OF THE ZOOLOGY. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 10 Three new species of coccidia from the Canada goose, Branta canaden- sis (Linné, 1758). Marion M. Farr, U.S. Bureau of Animal Industry. (Com- municated by E. W. Price.) For several years the Zoological Division of the Bureau of Animal Industry and the Disease Section of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service have been cooperating in a study to determine the cause or causes of mortality among Canada geese overwintering at Pea Island National Wildlife Refuge, which is located in North Carolina. During this in- vestigation three species of coccidia, appar- ently not heretofore described, were recov- ered. The descriptions of these species, as well as notes on the life cycle of one of the species, are given in this paper. Critcher (1950) reported Eimeria truncata (Railliet and Lucet, 1891) from the Canada goose on Pea Island National Wildlife Refuge and suggested that this parasite might be a factor in mortality among Canada geese there. Levine (1951) described Ezmeria mag- nalabia from Branta canadensis interior on Horseshoe Lake Game Refuge, Illinois. In 1952, he gave a brief description of another new species, Hzmeria brantae,! from the lesser Canada goose, Branta canadensis leucopareia. Eimeria hermani, n.sp. Figs. 1, 2 Sporulated oocyst—17.5 to 19.5u by 24.3 to 27.64; most frequently 18.9 by 25.6u. Shape index (width divided by length) 0.64 to 0.76; most frequently 0.71. Shape ovoid, slightly flat- tened at one end. Micropyle prominent, 3.2u in diameter, located at narrower flattened pole of oocyst. Oocyst wall colorless, thick, smooth; composed of two layers which are not easily distinguished unless wall is broken as shown in Fig. 2. Outer layer 0.95u thick, slightly thinner at micropyle; inner layer 0.44 thick, expanding around micropyle into irregular lobes which hang down into oocyst. A dark line of refraction is visible within wall of sporulated oocyst, par- ticularly at end opposite micropyle; this may represent an inner membrane, although none was seen when wall was broken. No oocystic residual body and no polar body seen. Sporocysts 7.6 to 94u by 13.5 to 14.1u; each slightly pointed at 1 After this paper was submitted, a description and figure of the unsporulated oocyst of #. brantae from the feces of Brantac. parvipes were published: LEVINE, N. D. A review of the coccidia from the avian orders Galliformes, Anseriformes and Charadrit- formes, with descriptions of three new species. Amer. Midl. Nat. 49 : 696-719. 1953. ends, with thin wall, an inconspicuous Stieda body, and finely granular sporocystic residuum dispersed around sporozoites. Each sporozoite elongated, rounded at one end and pointed at the other, and doubled over within sporocyst. Nucleus of sporozoite almost centrally located, being a little nearer rounded posterior end. A large ellipsoidal refractile body fills rounded end of sporozoite and a smaller spherical, refractile body is just anterior to nucleus. Under favorable conditions (e.g., when slide is gently warmed) sporozoites move about vigorously within sporo- cyst. Sporulation is completed within 48 hours at room temperature. Prepatent period.—F ive days. Hosts.—Branta canadensis (type host); Anser anser (experimental host). Location.—Throughout small intestine. Localities —Pea Island National Wildlife Ref- uge, North Carolina (type locality); Seney National Wildlife Refuge, Michigan. This species is named in honor of Dr. Carlton M. Herman, U. 8S. Fish and Wildlife Service. Table 1 is a chart of the species of Eimeria reported from ducks and geese. Reference to this chart shows that E. hermani is readily differen- tiated from all other species, except, perhaps, #. brantae Levine, 1952. However, the oocysts of EL. hermani are in general larger than those of E. brantae.2 Since the description of EL. brantae is too inadequate for identification, the present species is considered as new. Eimeria striata, n.sp. Fig. 3 Sporulated oocyst—13.7 to 18u by 18.9 to 23.64; majority varying between 15.5 to 17.5u by 20.2 to 22.9u. Shape index 0.65 to 0.86, majority 0.72 to 0.78. Shape elliptical to ovoid; micropyle prominent, 2.74 in diameter. Oocyst wall thick, composed of two layers; outer layer pale yellow, finely striated and pitted, about 0.95u thick, slightly thinner at micropyle; inner layer smooth, colorless, about 0.4u thick, expand- ing slightly at micropyle. One or more refractile polar granules present but no oocystic residuum observed. Sporocysts 7 to 8u by 10 to 12u, each with a. small Stieda body at one end; the other > At the micropyle the oocyst wall of EF. hermani is slightly flattened, and the inner layer of the wall is expanded into irregular lobes, while E. brantae is not flattened and the expanded portion of the inner wall is apparently smooth. OcTOBER 1953 FARR: THREE NEW end rounded or slightly pointed; coarsely granular sporocystic residuum present. Sporozoites elon- gated and doubled over within sporocyst, at least 2 refractile bodies within each sporozoite. Spor- ulation completed within 72 hours at room tem- perature. However, polar bodies do not usually appear until a day or two after sporulation has been completed. Prepatent period.—A few oocysts on fifth day, major shower on sixth day. Hosts —Branta canadensis (type host); Anser anser (experimental host). SPECIES OF COCCIDIA 337 Location.—Small intestine. Localities —Pea Island National Wildlife Ref- uge, North Carolina (type locality); Seney Na- tional Wildlife Refuge, Michigan. Eimeria striata most closely resembles Eimeria magnalabia Levine, 1951. However, the oocyst of E. striata has one or more polar bodies, each sporocyst has a small Stieda body, the pale yellow outer layer of the oocyst wall becomes thinner around the micropyle and the colorless inner layer becomes thicker around the micropyle. On the other hand the EF. magnalabia oocyst has neither polar bodies nor Stieda bodies, the brown- S Figs. 14.—1, Eimeria hermani, un. sp., sporulated oocyst; 2, Eimeria hermani, n. sp., broken oocyst showing the two layers of the wall; 3, Eimeria striata, n. sp., sporulated oocyst; 4, Eimeria fulva, n. sp., sporulated oocyst. —) r= © qi oD = 4 2 - SCIENCES [MY OF ACADE WASHINGTON . 4 THE OF | — a~ > Zz ~ ja ; _— -_~ ~" = SABP G SABP SAP 6 SARD 1 potiad Juayedaig SARP Z SAup fF OF € SAG) F | SABDP 2.07 awit} uonrpni0ods JuOsqy }UOSqy JUosoad Aqyensy) SUOTSN]O -ul 1G] -Od Mog] Apoq 1P|[Od A|WO ysA00.10d8 UT A[UO ysAov010ds Uy AyUO ysA0010dS UT A]UO ysA0010dS UT ysA0010ds8 . pues 4s ADVOO uy Apoq [enptsoy juosqy OBIL] 7, aE JUOSOL | ODI] y yar JUDSOA J OBIE] ‘JUOSOL | Od1V] (3, Ar JUDSOL | MOLIBU Ioyye ‘, nae }UOSOA JUST | yuou -1ur104d “JUOSOA | a ACO. 1 yy OPBOTTOP “SSo]Lo]or yor) “UMOLET, éLOAV] LOU -UL SSopLOTOO SorAd -OADTUL YR SOQO] OFT yosiuvjue ‘pod poole] POT O[JOA YSUMOAE oyAd -OLOTU YR Posrepuo IOAV] LOUUL SIOAR] Z ‘YJOOUS “SSopLO[OO, o[ACO.L91UL YB SOQO] YIM JOAR] LOUUT YJOOUIS SSop1o;oOo ‘poyjid puv poyeiys ‘LOA LOJNO UMOLE pommydynos Apouy ALOA SUMOLQ YOST] SO[ TOTO) SO[LO[OC) | TUM [wordy -[9 40 punoy, ojod az01.104 “Uv poyRouNnAy ‘podvys-335] Ploao ATVYSYG a] Adou.t0 “1 YB pou yy ATIYBYS *Ploagd of Ado. -IUI 48 pouoy “yey ALS “ULLO JIA YSOUr -|@ SOUILPOUIOS ‘ploaod A[pworg pojyuopul oq ABU opts ouo Syeplosdiy -[O JO plOaA() PIlOAQ podvys-avog advys "GT-OL me bTL-OL MEE-GZ x MPS-LT "C-L 1G x OS AU Waa M9" LG-E' PG Mh‘ SE-9' GS x NZ GS-% 0% 66-9 x 06-€1 noe X 81 mEZ-91 x NSI-€E1 9218 A[ULeU TOTY -1od 101104 -sod ‘oury “SOUT [BUG uot} -Lod O10} -sod ‘oury -SOPUL [RUG SO00)] our) -SoOJUL [[RUIG our} -SOJUL |[BUIG OUTJSOJUI [[VUUIS OLY U] UMOUYUL) uo1ytod Lo1oysod Ayureu “oury -SoJUL []BUg UOL}VIO'T dso003 OLSOULOC] ®& OS003 OLSOULO CT LOWWAIJUL SISUAP “DUDI DIJUDLGE ylOSUD lasuy ‘sisuap -DUDI DIUDLE aSUn MOSUY ‘SUsUap -DUDI DIJUDLE DULISS1)JOUL DIMIIDUWOS piaipd -O0NA] SIsUap -DUDI DIUDLE Osoo3 OLSOULOC] SOP] ASadY) GNV SMOOC, WOU AULHOdHyY VIUUININ, TO SHIOMdG WO SLSANO() ONILVIENGUOATC, SULOVAV He )—" | OTA J, EEG “UBTIOS ‘pynaiod * hy C861 UEOM ‘SUdIOU * iT IGG] “outaoy ‘PIQD)DUBDUL * iT ‘ so lis| 01 “VUDULMOY * ‘ds cu ‘ayn (SP61) uospRyyy pus UdSUBIYSLIYS) ‘opypydaong fy ZGG | “OULAOT] ‘ODJUDLG * HT SE61 ‘URTJOS, “PUoUto (GE61) UBTOM ‘ L 4 . OSUD * HT sorods 339 IA ‘CID Coc OF IES , SPEC NEW S BE Je RE - TH JES FAR 53 195 ER OB Oct | is val sty Cys OOC) 1e f tl r layer o e 7 out vellow ish-vel ish v | vle, nicrop) t he 1 ly a 1 t on OUne Mae le U b ; aro Visl jel = thi - Jay bene ae the mic © he Cc ° . ite Sp and t d oppos ia fulva, n 5.6 to he en K eria = 25: Z : re eee 2u by Shape = O.4 ad ZR = — to 2 F 29.7 veen 0.2 ty ae 2 6 by ine be a eg 2 & YS Oe varying ovold, g a a d 00C tly itxr Wee) dly d a. late uentl) jority broadh tene See 42 = oru freq z= 1a) r r flat oF gc a Sp ost 85, 1 sually ightly 3 to S12 = ss Sanat to 0. eu sligh nt 3: a = oo — m ) ~ » ) 28 g22e36 ee te: ae ee See ear oo = c : : fu ° ae aos index nd 0.7 10st a pyle p rer pole trams a 2 ccasiona or pole. ted at puted elon, er = c re a rer faann inn = £ narrow ter, loc ter laye Tellow ; yle; ae X- oD at in diame d: ou mish y rerODy and e3 S oA rall 2- : ‘jated, thinn 0.6u ‘ound ithin 5 2 9 wa , str ightly ‘less, idge aro wit 2 sely ighth lor ‘idg nt t = z 2. - © Wels ‘andl : nd co ooth 1 is prese ident a Oo mS ° ‘ek th a oe n is , evi al = 8 thi 100 ‘athe ‘actio ially nt Bec * sn ra ‘efra ecl ‘ese ee el into a f re esp ‘eDI le 5 So lay ing int < line o veal ee Cl Sern 2 So SS P ne. A c of 00¢; le; ‘actile | JOY. iS 2 GS zo vle. ‘face : ropy efra of ST} 14 Su, 2. — aS : n 1 ; Cc Te Z = 1 2 in Os f TOW ian it = nd opp ibrane. at aa Tu by cyst Ww ular = = e anon ee Se ranal sporo Beg ane 2 inne ’ pl s 8. ach s sely g ratec R Sp vi lly ‘sts ea arsely nga > gi is usually ‘ocys ds COe s elong ‘0- re — is us Spor ends, A ures oro Die a= mst. t both dy. - obse ithin sp 6 2 & o0cy ae ade hg Pails sae D to.9 oe = ~ = ie Stie a Vi y D, as a pointe nt S iduum p bled ae hin 7 = O — J ine sidu lou wit PS g25 Le site mucin rleted fections g a z aE 3 eee ites we ee re. imental in howed =) aS 5 a = = JOTOZO ‘ulatio yeratu sperm SCESE S the z ee Qo SI} Spot tem} —Exy la ge shout o = = < o 5 BS) 5 urs a venta ; and irred ngest n- a _ 3 5S a 2 O "oO ho velopn 1estie : ite OCCL and EO ee gree ~ o = so = : aA re > ¥ os = He a0 De th be € paras kening vulation | n. The Lg.5 ro) : ot 0) ic n lon. e a s& in b at A thi accu infect ife cycle =e gross ce es all a . se fee = © ll Inte al wal anied ion of fi 23 Z near sti mp p lay ° _ inte acco com ur day tal Ss the cus for the last fo men — = o : h mu ired 0 the velop NOr- S os - e BELL rg ced on he de rr J 5S z O° time : e days. sue fix that t he ante rs after = 5 rasan f tis red in t hou ch =e 3 = wa so how nt 144 ea, Bas © ~ tudie le s nda ut izonts, a < z= x S ; evele abu Abo hizon r 16 to i) cx x Oo) he life és most testine. ai SC taining the A x ae cee ee oer ‘1 x l - tag sn bers 5m an red w ill. = > = SS) he al -VeC \ Lxd ion of t nui by 15u bsery f the f i oO tion tion, t 13 2 rere oO ides O TS O > = Z la u ve 1 be a 5 inocu ing abo ites, i and i tes hum [5 2 TSU 1eroz0 e tips lation, HORSE R os 3 nee mall n lls of th inocu in the ep which g s = 2 s s ter t1 S r — és 1 te ? = Z=4 30 1 ce 's af esel . 5, = és = ep t 169 ts were ture 2g f 2. 3; chi tips qs Sie Abou hizon f imma oups of 1 of the the ea = 2 mall se bers o in gro itheliun Seo WL he = § S ZN NE 1 eS oS an d sing A in t wel func S = Rn o & ~ = rre withi i: some nd S = S| Soe lees O un 711 | ec Sea: oe 5 = fo the v the n 3 ~” a aD o = were : of Lin s 3 = as and s ropria = ® 3 2 7 p oti fee | 8 panics Sas ea z Sa7 ; M =} . ~ _ a = SS S S -e3 3 — = \ SSN Fig. 2.—Culex marquesensis, n. sp.: A, Head of Larva; B, end of abdomen of larva. Fia. 3.—Culex atriceps Edwards: A, Head of larva; B, end of abdomen of larva. 358 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Society Islands) in the following types of breed- ing places: tree holes, coconut husks, and various types of artificial containers. The larvae are frequently found in association with those of A. polynesiensis. The adults have been observed to attack man at night, but rarely in considerable numbers. They are sometimes seen resting in houses but are more commonly found in natural resting places such as tree buttresses. The junior author has shown that occasional specimens of the species are capable of allowing complete development of Polynesian strains of ENTOMOLOGY —Laelaps oryzomydis, n. voL. 43, NO. 11 Wuchererta bancroftt. C. atriceps would not seem to be an important vector of this parasite in nature because of its inefficiency as a host and the rarity with which it attacks man. LITERATURE CITED BELKIN, JOHN N. A revised nomenclature for the chaetotary of the mosquito larva (Diptera: Culicidae). Amer. Midland Nat. 44(3): 678- 698. 1950. Marks, EvizaBetH N. Mosquitoes from south- eastern Polynesia. Occ. Pap. Bernice P. Bishop Mus. 20(9): 23-30. 1951. sp., with a key to some American species of Laelaps (Acarina: Laelaptidae). H. D. Pratrr and JoHn E. LAng,} U.S. Public Health Service, Atlanta, Ga. A new species of mite in the genus Laelaps has been collected in several States in southeastern United States. The species name oryzomydis here assigned to it refers to the fact that the type series was collected on rice rats (Oryzomys palustris). Female (Fig. 1).—Length, exclusive of gnatho- soma, about 0.6 mm, width about 0.4 mm. Chelicera with basal segment about as long as apical segment without chelae, fixed chela with two fine teeth and a seta, and movable chela with two teeth opposite seta of fixed chela. Jugularia absent but a differentiated jugular area present which extends across the sternal plate. Sternal plate widest between coxae II and III, posterior margin moderately, irregularly concave, anterolateral corners pointed, the usual six setae present with slightly expanded sternal pores behind the four anterior setae. Endopodal plates distinct and small. Genito- ventral plate with anterior margin faintly striate, strongly expanded behind fourth coxae, bearing four pairs of setae which are longer than the interval between adjacent setae. Anal plate similar in shape to that in Haemolaelaps glasgow (Ewing), the anterolateral corners rounded, anus about three-fourths its length from the 1 The writers wish to acknowledge the construc- tive criticism of Dr. E. W. Baker, of the U. S. Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, during the preparation of this paper. They are also grateful to Drs. S. W. Simmons, H. P. Nichol- son, and C. M. Tarzwell, of the Technology Branch of the Communicable Disease Center, and B. A. Barrington and C. B. Worth, who made available these collections of ectoparasites upon which the new species is based. anterior margin of anal plate, the paired setae tangential to posterior margin of anus and distinctly more slender than the posterior seta. Coxa I has the internal spine distinctly stouter than the external spine; coxa II has a slender anterior and stout posterior spine; coxa III has a long slender anterior and stout, short, posterior spine; coxa IV has a single minute seta near the coxaltrochanteral articulation. Dorsal shield nearly covering dorsal surface, the majority of the seta almost as long and strong as those on the genito-ventral plate. Laelaps oryzomydis is closest to Laelaps nuttallt Hirst, which is collected in large numbers by workers of the U. S. Public Health Service Typhus Control Program. It differs from this last species in having the internal spine on the forecoxa stouter than the external spine, while the reverse is true in nuttalli. The anal plate is more triangular in nutallz than in oryzomydis. The two setae on the posterior margin of the genito-ventral plate are more widely separated in nuttalli, being tangential with the anterior corners of the anal plate, while in oryzomydis these setae are placed closer together, being definitely median to the corners of the anal plate. There are expanded pores behind the two anterior and two middle setae on the sternal plate in oryzomydis. These are reduced and slit-like in nuttallz. Male.—About 0.5 mm long. Very similar to other male Laelaps. It falls in the group having the sternal, genitoventral, and anal plates all fused into one arrowhead-shaped holoventral plate and the dorsal plate with long, slender NOVEMBER 1953 setae. Chelicera with chelae long and slender, smooth, apparently twice as long as the segment which bears them. The second and fourth tarsi with slender setae, peritreme extending to middle of coxa II. Holotype—Female, Jasper County, 8. C., December 8, 1948, H. P. Nicholson. Collected from rice rat (Oryzomys palustris palustris (Harlan)). U.S. National Museum no. 2073. Allotype—Male, same data as above, in the U. S. National Museum. Paratypes.—Tampa, Fla., March 1949, C. B. Worth, host Oryzomys palustris natator Chap- man, 8 paratype females; Gainesville, Fla., November 17, 1946, B. A. Barrington, host PRATT AND LANE: LAELAPS ORYZOMYDIS 309 Oryzomys palustris natator Chapman, 8 paratype females; Jasper County, 8. C., from March 5 to December 10, 1948, all on Oryzomys palustris palustris (Harlan), 50 paratype females mounted on slides. Holotype, allotype, and paratypes in the U.S. National Museum collection. Paratypes in the U. $S. Public Health Service, Communicable Disease Center collection, Atlanta, Ga.; Rocky Mountain Laboratory at Hamilton, Mont.; and Western Communicable Disease Center Laboratory, San Francisco, Calif.; Texas State Department of Health collection, Austin, Tex.; and the private collection of Dr. R. W. Strandtmann, Lubbock, Tex. Fia. 1.—A-C, Laelaps oryzomydis, n. sp.: A, Chelicerae; B, ventral aspect of female; C, dorsal plate of female. D, E, Laelaps nuttalli Hirst: D, Forecoxa of female; E, genitoventral and anal plate of female. 360 This species probably breeds throughout the year on rice rats, various subspecies of Oryzomys palustris. The biggest collection, from Jasper County, 8. C., game refuge, contained at least 46 Laelaps oryzomydis. The rice-rat louse (Hoplo- pleura oryzomydis Pratt and Lane) and the following mites were also found in collections from rice rats: Gigantolaelaps cricetidarum Morlan, Haemolaelaps glasgowi (Ewing), Haemo- laelaps megaventralis Strandtmann, Bdellonyssus species near bacoti, Androlaelaps species, and often hundreds of mites of the family Listro- phoridae on a single rice rat. The cotton-rat flea (Polygenis gwynt (C. Fox)) was also found in these same collections. The following keys to male and female Laelaps are modified from those of Grant (1947): A KEY TO SOME SPECIES OF MALE NORTH AMERICAN LAELAPS — . Dorsal plate with long, hairlike setae; sternal, genitoventral, and anal plates all united into zsmeole holoventEaltolates:--..-:. see ee. 2 Dorsal plate with short, spiniform setae; sternal and genitoventral plates united, but separatectrom analeplate.. 72:2... Aes ss. 5) 2. Second tarsus with some short curved spiniform setae near tips (on microtine mice) L. alaskensis Grant Second tarsus without curved spiniform setae, allastraiwhie nena ches fis oo eee eee 3 3. Peritreme tube extending to coxa II; second tarsus with slender setae only (on rice rats, genus Oryzomys)......... L. oryzomydis, n.sp. Peritreme tube extending forward beyond coxa II; second tarsus with some stout SQUAG cae Soest ee ee A ye. PC eee eee ar + 4. Larger species at least 0.9 mm long (on domes- tic rats, genus Rattus)..L. echidninus Berlese Smaller species 0.5 to 0.8 mm long (on domestic TAUSh EMMIS TUGLEES) © oe Lee L. nuttalli Hirst 5. United sternal and genitoventral plate widely separated from the anal plate and with pos- terior border slightly concave (on microtine MICE) CAG ee L. kochi Oudemans JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 43, NO. 11 United sternal and genitoventral plate with posterior border proximal to the anal plate (on muskrats, genus Ondatra) L. multispinosus Banks A KEY TO SOME SPECIES OF FEMALE NORTH AMERI- CAN LAELAPS — . Anal plate contiguous with genitoventral plate and fitting into a strong concavity in genito- ventral plate (on domestic rats in genus TOLRIS) At etl ee L. echidninus Berlese Anal plate separated from genitoventral plate, which is usually convex or straight on poste- rior margin, not strongly concave.......... 2 2. Dorsal setae long and slender) 2 3372 3 Dorsal setae small and short.) 22-225) 30 ee 5 3. Internal spine on forecoxa distinctly stouter than external spine (on rice rats in genus Onyzomiys): sa eee L. oryzomydis, n.sp. Internal spine on forecoxa more slender than external spine...... Bg oe: 4. Genitoventral plate widely separated from anal plate; anal plate with anterior margin rounded (on microtine mice) L. alaskensis Grant Genitoventral plate extending posteriorly al- most to anal plate; anal plate with anterior margin truncate and definite angular an- terolateral corners (on domestic rats in FENUS- LOWS). .: ee cee L. nuttallt Hirst 5. Anal plate subtriangular; posterior border of sternal plate deeply arched; coxal spines not greatly enlarged basally (on microtine TICE) B45 pe eG ees Se L. kochi (Oudemans) Anal plate suboval; posterior border of sternal plate poorly defined, not greatly arched; coxal spines greatly enlarged basally (on muskrats of genus Ondatra) L. multispinosus Banks REFERENCES GRANT, C. Donatp. North American mites of the genus Laelaps (Arachnida: Acarina: Parasiti- dae). Microentomology 12(1): 1-21. 1947. Hirst, 8. On the parasitic acari found on the species of rodents frequenting human habitations in Egypt. Bull. Ent. Res. 5(3): 215-229. 1914. ZOOLOGY .—Two new semiparasitic harpacticoid copepods from the coast of New Hampshire. ARrHUR G. Humes, Department of Biology, Boston University. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) Two new species of semiparasitic harpac- ticoid copepods were found in the summer of 1952 during routine classroom study of living invertebrates at the University of New Hampshire. One, belonging to the genus Nitocra Boeck (Ameiridae), inhabited small pits in the exumbrellar surface of a scypho- zoan medusa. The other, a memebr of the genus Mesamphiascus Nicholls (Diosacci- dae), occurred on the first maxillipeds of the American lobster. Nitocra medusaea, n. sp. Approximately 1,030 individuals of this cope- pod were discovered on the exumbrellar surface NOVEMBER 1953 of a living medusa of an unidentified species of Aurelia, about 3 inches in diameter, collected by Dr. Mary D. Rogick on July 17, 1952, off Fort Stark, in the harbor of Portsmouth, N. H. When undisturbed, the copepods remained in flask- shaped pits in the exumbrella, the largest pit being about 1-1.5 mm deep and 1 mm in diame- ter. There were more than thirty pits on this medusa, each with 10-30 or more copepods. Since the bodies of the copepods massed together in the pits were opaque or slightly cream-colored, the medusa appeared to the unaided eye as though there were sand grains embedded in the jelly. One might presume that the pits resulted from the presence of the copepods, but whether or not the copepods excavate the pits is not known. When examined under intense illumina- tion or when disturbed with a needle, the cope- pods became active and crawled in and out of the pits and over the exumbrellar surface, clinging tenaciously to bits of debris and jelly fragments. The type material consists of more than 1,000 individuals, representing both sexes. The holo- type female (No. 95305), allotype (No. 95306), and paratypes (300 females and 100 males, No. 95307) have been deposited in the United States National Museum. Other paratypes are in the author’s collection. Female.—tIn life the body (Fig. 1) is trans- parent, without distinct color. The eye is bright red. The total length (measuring from the tip of the rostrum to the posterior end of the caudal rami), based on five specimens, is 0.79 mm (0.75- 0.82 mm). The ratio of length of the head (plus rostrum) and the first five leg-bearing thoracic segments to the genital segment and abdomen (plus caudal rami) is 49:30. The genital segment has a slight indication of subdivision into two segments, especially visible on the dorsal side. The abdomen is 3-segmented. The actual and proportional lengths of the rostrum, body seg- ments, and caudal rami are: a Head os- plus = Caudal trum | somite| 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | © | 1) 2) 3 rami of leg 1 | 2% «| 177 79 3 22 10 66 |109 | 68 | 54 | 50 |23 4S ee Oe eee Oe ou OO ~I 70 9 The greatest body width is at the level of the first leg-bearing thoracic segment where it is 206u. The length of the inner long seta on the caudal ramus is 419u. HUMES: TWO NEW HARPACTICOID COPEPODS abl The rostrum (Fig. 2), curved slightly ventrally, narrows to a rounded point distally, and bears two small setae dorsally. The head and first four leg-bearing thoracic segments bear minute setae (Fig. 3) whose number and arrangement are difficult to discover because of the opacity of the body in preserved specimens. The fifth leg-bear- ing thoracic, genital, and abdominal segments are armed as indicated in Figs. 1, 3, and 4. The dorsal subdivision of the genital segment is marked by a medially interrupted transverse row of small setae as well as by the cuticular furrow. The anal operculum has a row of dentiform setae along the free edge. On either side of the operculum there 1s a row of spines which continues around on the ventral surface, becoming progressively smaller. The caudal ramus (Figs. 5 and 6), slightly wider than long, bears distally two long setae of unequal length. These setae show a distinct “Joint” near their bases of slightly different ap- pearance in dorsal and ventral views. Four shorter setae are also associated with the caudal ramus, two on the outer distal corner, one on the inner distal corner. and one with a jointed base on the distal dorsal surface of the ramus. In a single individual the two long setae on the left caudal ramus were retracted by a double folding near the bases, as shown in Fig. 7, while the setae on the corresponding right caudal ramus were in the usual extended position. The egg sac (Figs. 3 and 8), flattened dorso- ventrally and measuring about 262 x 157u, by 85, in thickness, reaches well beyond the caudal rami. It contains 28-30 eggs arranged in two layers, each egg about 5lyu in diameter. The first antenna (Fig. 9) has eight podomeres with the actual and proportional lengths as follows: ty eta wae) A | 5 | euler | 8 | | | | | | 19 | 38 | 18 | 2 | 13 | 16 | 13 | 2 12 | 2b | 12 | 1b Se | 8 14 = 100 | | The entire antenna exclusive of setae is about 160u long. On the fourth podomere there is an aesthetask or sensory filament 110 in length, extending beyond the tip of the antenna. The first podomere bears a longitudinal row of small slender spines and a feathered seta at the inner distal corner. There is a small feathered seta about midway on the inner edge of the second podo- mere. The second antenna (Fig. 10) has a short basipodite, an endopodite of two podomeres, 362 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. I1 e 0.5 MM. SCALE A, 0.) MM. SCALE 8B, so WN we ss Dd Fies. 1-16.—Nitocra medusaea, n. sp., female: 1, Body segments, dorsal view; 2, rostrum, dorsal view; 3, lateral view of body, thoracic and head appendages omitted; 4, genital segment and abdomen, ventral view; 5, caudal ramus, ventral view; 6, caudal ramus, dorsal view; 7, caudal ramus with retracted setae, ventral view; 8, egg sac; 9, first antenna; 10, second antenna; 11, mandible; 12, first maxilla; 13, second maxilla; 14, maxilliped; 15, first swimming leg, anterior view; 16, second swimming leg, anterior view. (All figures were drawn with the aid of a camera lucida. Scale A applies to Figs. 1, 3, 4, and 21; scale B to Figs. 2, 5, 6, 9, 15-18, 23, 25-27, and 42-46.) NovEMBER 1953 HUMES: TWO NEW HARPACTICOID COPEPODS 363 0.05 MM. FAA = = 7 4 SSF DiGA\s Ear IZLE EE RE 26 + Pap Figs. 17-27.—Nitocra medusaea, n. sp., female: 17, Third swimming leg, anterior view; 18, fourth swim- ming leg, anterior view; 19, fifth leg; 20, sixth legs and opening of reproductive system on ventral surface of genital segment. Same, male: 21, fifth legs, genital segment, and abdomen, ventral view; 22, first antenna; 23, first swimming leg, anterior view; 24, spine on inner distal corner of basipodite of first swim- ming leg; 25, second swimming leg, anterior view; 26, third swimming leg, anterior view; 27, fourth swim- ming leg, anterior view. (Scale C applies to Figs. 7, 24, and 31; scale D to Figs. 10-14, 19, 20, 22, 28, 36, 37, 60, and 62.) 304 and an exopodite of a single podomere bearing three terminal setae. The mandible (Fig. 11) has a swollen basi- podite with a long slender masticatory lobe and a palp of two podomeres. The first and second maxillae are as illustrated in Figs. 12 and 13. The maxilliped (Fig. 14) consists of an elongated basipodite bearing a single feathered seta distally and a single endopodite podomere having a long prehensile claw at the distal end. The first four pairs of swimming legs have rami of three podomeres. The first pair of legs (Fig. 15) is somewhat smaller than the succeeding pairs. The coxopodite is armed on the outer anterior surface by a group of spines, on the outer pos- terior surface by two groups of fine hair-like setae (present on all four swimming legs), on the mid-anterior surface by a transverse row of fine setae, and on the inner lobe by a row of small spines. The basipodite bears externally a finely denticulate spine, with a row of spines near its base, another row of spines along the distal edge of the basipodite between the bases of the two rami, and a large spine with smaller spines at its base on the inner distal corner. The middle podo- mere of the exopodite bears an inner seta. The first podomere of the endopodite bears an inner distal seta and is about as long as the first two exopodite podomeres together. The distal two endopodite podomeres combined are shorter than the first podomere, so that the entire endopodite is slightly shorter than the exopodite. The coxopodite of the second pair of legs (Fig. 16) lacks the group of spines on the outer an- terior surface and the transverse row of setae. The spines on the inner lobe are very slender and hair-like. There is no spine on the inner distal corner of the basipodite. The endopodite is distinctly shorter than the exopodite. The coxo- podite of the third pair of legs (Fig. 17) is armed only with two groups of fine hair-like setae on the posterior outer surface. The outer corner of the basipodite bears a seta raised on a short pedicel, instead of a spine. The coxopodite and basipodite of the fourth pair of legs (Fig. 18) are armed like the third pair. The setal formula for the first our pairs of legs is: Bees aie hers 2 Leg 3 Leg 4 Exp. |End Exp.| End Exp. | End Exp. | End } | Ist podomere..... f= 0)5 | cO2 1 ehO 0: LO Os AlsO Oat 2d podomere...... A500: fA Oat Gala | O:1 | 1:1 | 0:1 3d podomere...... Deiae Ole eee ies are) (Es JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 11 The proximal podomere of the fifth pair of legs (Fig. 19) has an outer pedicellate seta and an inner swollen lobe bearing five setae, the three inner ones being shorter and of about equal length. Adjacent to the outermost seta on the lobe there is a row of 2-4 short spines. Along the almost straight inner edge of the lobe there are several small spines. The inner lobes of the two fifth legs are not united medially. The distal podomere is slightly longer than wide, with the outer edge nearly straight and the inner edge expanded. Distally there are five setae, the next to the innermost one being over twice as long as any of the others. Along the outer edge there are two groups of small spines, and on the inner edge there is a row of 5-6 slender spines. The sixth pair of legs is represented by a single small seta at either side of the opening of the oviduct (Fig. 20), visible on the anterior ventral part of the genital segment. Male.—In general appearance the male re- sembles the female, but the body is distinctly smaller. The total length, based on five specimens, is 0.62 mm (0.60-0.64 mm). The ratio of length of the head (plus rostrum) and the first five leg- bearing thoracic segments to the genital segment and abdomen (plus caudal rami) is 37:25. The abdomen is 4-segmented. The actual and pro- portional lengths of the rostrum, body segments, and caudal rami are: Head plus | Rostrum somute of |2|/3/4/5]6]1/2|3]4] Caudal rami eg 1 22u | 140 57/|50/52/49|53/52/48/43 |38 18 3 23 9| 8} 8} 8} 9} 8} 8] 7| 6 3 = 100 The greatest body width is 157» at the level of the first leg-bearing thoracic segment. The length of the inner long seta on the caudal ramus is 337 yu. The head and first four leg-bearing thoracic segments have a setal ornamentation much like that in the female. On the fifth leg-bearing thoracic and genital segments (Fig. 21) a row of small setae passes around the posterior dorsal area from the base of one leg to the correspond- ing leg on the opposite side, leaving the area be- tween the bases of the legs free of setae. Both first and second abdominal segments have a transverse row of setae encircling the posterior region of the somite. The third segment has a similar transverse row and in addition a short row on each side of the somite. The last abdominal NOVEMBER 1953 HUMES: TWO NEW HARPACTICOID COPEPODS 365 ee ec WV ANVWVY. vt] WVV Pry Wy SCALE G, 0.1 MM, SCALE E, 0.5 MM, SCALE F. O MM. t Fig. 28.—Nitocra medusaea, n. sp., male: fifth and sixth leg. Fias. 29-45.—Mesamphiascus ampullifer, n. sp., female: 29, lateral view; 30, rostrum, dorsal view; 31, a seta from the posterior border of a thoracic segment; 32, genital segment and abdomen, dorsal view; 33, genital segment and abdomen, ventral view; 34, part of last abdominal segment and caudal ramus, ventral view; 35, part of last abdominal segment and caudal ramus, dorsal view; 36, caudal ramus, showing partly retracted flask-shaped seta, ventral view; 37, caudal ramus, showing partly retracted long terminal seta, dorsal view; 38, egg sac with 6 eggs, lateral view; 39, egg sac with 7 eggs; 40, egg sac with 8 eggs; 41, first antenna and rostrum; 42, second antenna; 43, mandible; 44, first maxilla; 45, second maxilla. (Scale E applies to Figs. 29, 32, 33, and 54-56; scale F to Figs. 34, 35, 41, 47-53, 57-59, 61, and 63; scale G to Figs. 38-40.) 3606 JOURNAL OF THE segment has two lateral rows and a transverse ventral row. The armature of the anal operculum and caudal rami is like that of the female. The first antenna (Fig. 22) has eight podo- meres of the following actual and proportional lengths (measuring along the outer margins): 4 5 6 7 8 22u 25 7 28 21 21 11 10 15 18 4 | The first and second podomeres both bear a single feathered seta as in the female. The inner margins of podomeres three, four, and five are thickened _ and irregular, the last two with processes bear- ing a row of small spines. From the distal edge of the fourth podomere arises an aesthetask 118 x 6yu, extending far beyond the end of the antenna. When the antenna is bent in the usual geniculate position, the aesthetask is equal in length to the antenna from its base to the outer angle of flexure. The second antenna, mandible, first maxilla, second maxilla, and maxilliped are like those of the female. The first pair of swimming legs (Fig. 23) is armed in most respects like that of the female, except for the coxopodite lacking the transverse row of small setae on the anterior surface and the basipodite having the inner spine modified. The form of the spine (Fig. 24) might be described as subchelate. There is no indication, however, that the finger is movable. A row of small spines occurs near the base of this modified spine. The second pair of legs (Fig. 25) is in all important features of armature like that of the female. The third pair of legs (Fig. 26) is also similar to that of the female, except that the middle seta on the end of the last endopodite podomere is less than half as long as in the female. The fourth pair of legs (Fig. 27) resembles closely that of the female, even to the extent of having the next to the inner- most seta on the last podomere of the exopodite characteristically spined, whereas in the second and third legs it is coarsely feathered. The setal formula for the four pairs of swimming legs is identical with that given for the female. The proximal podomere of the fifth pair of legs (Fig. 28) bears an outer pedicellate seta and an expanded inner lobe bearing three feathered setae in a row. The inner lobes of the two fifth legs are not united medially. The distal podo- mere is slightly longer than wide, of a somewhat WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, No. 11 irregular shape, bearing six setae along the distal edge as indicated in the figure. A group of small spines occurs on the inner edge and two larger spines on the outer edge. The sixth pair of legs (Fig. 28) is represented by a low expansion bear- ing two unequal setae at the outer distal corner. Remarks.—According to Lang (1948) there are eighteen certain species in the genus Nitocra. Nitocra medusaea, with the first endopodite podomere of the first leg of the female shorter than the exopodite, differs from N. typica Boeck, N. pontica (Jakubisiak), N. pusilla Sars, N. mediterranea (Brian), N. hibernica (Brady), N. affinis Gurney, N. elegans (T. Scott), and N. minor Willey, which have that podomere at least as long as the exopodite. Having the termi- nal podomere of the endopodite of the first leg of the female about as long as the middle podo- mere, it differs from N. bdellurae (Liddell), in which the terminal podomere is twice as long as the middle one. In having six setae on the distal podomere of the fifth leg in the female, it is unlike N. fallaciosa Klie and N. fragilis Sars, which have five. With the first podomere of the endopodite of the first leg of the female about as long as the first two exopodite podomeres, it differs from N. lacustris (Schmankevitsch), N. spinipes Boeck, N. dubia Sars, and N. platypus Daday, in which it is distinctly shorter than the two exopodite podomeres. In having three setae on the inner expansion of the proximal podomere of the fifth leg in the male, it differs from JN. malaica Kiefer and N. sewelli Gurney, which have only two. With the caudal rami slightly wider than long, it is unlike N. divaricata Chappuis where they are 1.5-2 times longer than wide. Other differences are also to be found, but the single characters selected above serve to dis- tinguish each already known species from JN. medusaea. Nitocra chelifer Wilson (1932) is thought by Lang (1948) to represent a mixture of at least two species, the male being a Nztocra perhaps identical with hibernica, and the female being probably a Proameira. The taxonomic uncer- tainty is difficult to clarify because of the ex- istence of only two known specimens, a holotype male and a paratype female, both undissected, in the U. 8. National Museum. The female, how- ever, differs from N. medusaea in having the terminal podomere of the endopodite of the first leg narrow and more than twice as long as the middle podomere. The male differs from the new NovEMBER 1953 HUMES: TWO NEW HARPACTICOID COPEPODS 267 ' A\ Sey Fies. 46-52.—Mesamphiascus ampullifer, n. sp., Female: 46, maxilliped; 47, first swimming leg; 48, second swimming leg; 49, third swimming leg; 50, abnormal exopodite of third swimming leg; 51, fourth swimming leg; 52, fifth leg. 308 species in having the first podomere of the endo- podite of the first lez much longer than the first two exopodite podomeres and in having five setae on the inner expansion of the proximal podomere of the fifth leg. Members of the genus Vitocra occur in fresh, brackish, or salt water. Two species are known to be semiparasitic. V. bdellurae lives in the egg capsules of Bdelloura propinqua Wheeler and B. candida (Girard), flatworms which live upon the carapace of the horseshoe crab, Limulus. There it feeds on the embryos of the worms, ac- cording to Liddell (1912). N. divaricata lives in the gill chambers of crayfishes, Astacus fluviatilis according to Chappuis (1926) and A. lepto- dactylus according to Jakubisiak (1939). Nitocra medusaea is thus the third species in the genus known to have definite semiparasitic relation- ships. Mesamphiascus ampullifer, n. sp. Several hundred specimens of this copepod were recovered from the mouthparts of eight small adult American lobsters, Homarus amert- canus Milne-Edwards, purchased alive on July 30, 1952, from a lobster market at Portsmouth, N. H. Except for the statement of the proprietor that all the lobsters had been caught locally in the vicinity of Portsmouth, their origin is un- certain. The copepods, including nauplii, cope- podids, and adults, were found clinging to the many hairlike setae on the flattened inner edges of the proximal endite lobes (presumably belong- ing to the coxopodites) of the first maxillipeds. They occurred nowhere else unless disturbed by probing with a needle or intense light. Then they crawled actively over the other mouthparts, reminding one very much of lice as they crawled among the setae of these appendages. When re- moved to a watch glass of sea water, they swam vigorously at first, but soon came to rest on the bottom of the dish, from which they would then only sporadically arise to swim freely. Their behavior toward light seemed to be slightly nega- tive. The type material consists of a holotype female (No. 95308), an allotype (No. 95309), and para- types (150 females and 100 males, No. 95310), all deposited in the United States National Mu- seum. Other paratypes are in the author’s col- lection. Female.—The body (Fig. 29), excluding the intestinal contents, is colorless except for a bright red eye. The intestine of specimens freshly re- moved from the host is pale yellow and may con- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 11 tain reddish or orange droplets, conferring a tinge of color to the animal. The total length (measur- ing from the tip of the rostrum to the posterior end of the caudal rami), based on five specimens, is 1.041 mm (0.975-1.081 mm). The ratio of length of the head (plus rostrum) and the first five leg-bearing thoracic segments to the genital segment and abdomen (plus caudal rami) is 60:44. The genital segment shows a slight indica- tion of subdivision into two segments, marked by weak lateral furrows and a row of setae. The abdomen is 3-segmented. The actual and pro- portional lengths of the rostrum, body segments, and caudal rami are: ee Ros- plus = Cauda trum | somite} 2 | 3 | | 5} ©] 2 Pile rami | of leg 1 | 73u 268 78 | 79 | 66 | 34 130 | 97 | 85 | 65 (65 7 26 8] 8] 6| 3} 18) 9) 8) eae The greatest body width is 188 at the level of the first leg-bearing thoracic segment. Length of longest seta on caudal ramus is 430xz. The rostrum (Fig. 30) curves slightly down- ward, tapering to a blunt, rounded end and bear- ing two small setae on the dorsal surface. The head and first four leg-bearing thoracic segments bear minute setae (many only 10u long) as shown in Fig. 29. Many of the setae on the posterior borders of these segments arise from slender pedicels (Fig. 31). The fifth leg-bearing thoracic, genital, and abdominal segments are armed with setae as indicated in Figs. 29, 32, and 33. The anal operculum bears a row of fine setae distally. The caudal ramus (Figs. 34 and 35), about twice as long as wide, bears two flask-shaped setae at the outer distal corner. The base of the longest terminal seta is slightly swollen. On the dorsal surface of the ramus there is a small seta with a 2-jointed pedicel. Three oblique rows of small spines pass around the inner margin of the ramus. Both the flask-shaped setae and the longest terminal seta may be partially retracted as in Figs. 36 and 37 respectively. The remaining setae of the ramus are indicated in the figures. The two egg sacs (Fig. 38), each about 47 x 32u, are laterally flattened and extend only to a little beyond the middle of the first abdominal segment. Each sac usually contains six eggs, each egg about 50u in diameter. Occasionally there are seven eggs (Fig. 39) or eight eggs (Fig. 40). The first antenna (Fig. 41) has eight podomeres NOVEMBER 1953 HUMES: TWO NEW HARPACTICOID COPEPODS 369 SAAMAARAP AL ANY a . FEE EERE s SSS SSSA HSHAQINSYS SS SAS SSS Figs. 53-63.—Mesamphiascus ampullifer, n. sp., female: 53, Genital segment, ventral view, showing reproductive opening and sixth legs. Same, male: 54, lateral view, head and thoracic appendages omitted; 55, fifth legs, genital segment, and abdomen, ventral view; 56, genital segment and abdomen, dorsal view; 57, part of last abdominal segment and caudal ramus, ventral view; 58, first antenna; 59, first swim- ming leg; 60, inner basipodite spine and associated spines on first leg; 61, second swimming leg; 62, dis- tal endopodite podomere of second leg; 63, fifth and sixth legs. 370 JOURNAL OF THE with the actual and proportional lengths as follows: 1 Head Oe IP eral in| Tal fs a 8 | | = | Gan 4) “ey=-| 3gR leer | 18 | 20 27 16 14 | 14 | | 9 | 9 | 10 14 = 100 | The entire antenna is 197 long. On the fourth podomere there is an aesthetask 73 long, reach- ing to about the tip of the antenna. On the distal podomere there is a second aesthetask, slenderer than the previous one, and about 38 long. There are no feathered setae. The second antenna (Fig. 42) bears an exopodite of three podomeres, the middle one of which has a single seta. The mandible (Fig. 43) has a small exopodite and endopodite, both of a single podomere. The first and second maxillae are as shown in Figs. 44 and 45. The maxilliped (Fig. 46) bears a pectinate claw distally. The first four pairs of legs have rami of three podomeres. In the first pair (Fig. 47) the exopo- dite is only one-half as long as the endopodite. The coxopodite bears a row of spines on the outer distal area. The basipodite bears an inner and an outer seta, with smaller spines as indicated in the figure. The middle podomere of the exopodite bears a single seta. The first podomere of the endopodite is much longer than the entire exopo- dite, while the two distal segments are short, the proportions of the three being about 77:9:14. The basipodite of the second pair of legs (Fig. 48) lacks the inner spine, there being a row of slender setae near that point. The third pair of legs (Fig. 49) is in most respects similar to the second, except for an increase in the number of setae on the endopodite as indicated in the table below. In a single specimen an abnormal exopodite (Fig. 50) with only six setae instead of seven on the terminal podomere was noted, the exopodite of the opposite side being normal. The fourth leg (Fig. 51) closely resembles the third except for one less seta on the terminal endopodite podomere. The setal formula for the first four pairs of legs is: | | Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg3 | Leg 4 ‘Exp. | End lExp. | End |Exp. | End Exp. | End Ist podomere..... | EOD POs eee BOS speed | 2d podomere...... TEA | OS) ateliey OF25), alta O: 11 | 0: 3d podomere...... | & | 3 7 4 7 GO 78) bres | | | | WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 11 The proximal podomere of the fifth pair of legs (Fig. 52) has an outer pedicellate seta and an elongated lobe bearing five setae plus a row of small spines along its distal edge. The two lobes of the right and left sides are not fused medially. The distal podomere is in the shape of an elongated oval, with the length to width as 15:9. There are six setae along the distal edge, the two nearest the innermost seta being slender and without lateral spines. Of these two slender setae the outer one is characteristically only a little more than one-half as long as the inner one. Both inner and outer edges of this podomere proximal to the large distal spines are armed with groups of small spines. A sixth pair of legs (Fig. 53), each leg consisting of a minute base bearing three setae, is present on either side of the genital opening. Of these three setae the innermost is the longest and the outermost is relatively short with long lateral hairs. Male.—In general appearance the male re- sembles the female, except for the smaller body size and the modified first antennae. The total length, based on five specimens, is 0.88 mm (0.87— 0.89 mm). The ratio of the head (plus rostrum) and the first five leg-bearing thoracic segments to the genital segment and abdomen (plus caudal rami) is 52:36. The abdomen (Fig. 54) is 4- segmented. The actual and proportional lengths of the rostrum, body segments, and caudal rami are: Head plus | Rostrum | somite of |2/3)4/5|6/1|2|)3|4]| Cauda! rami leg 1 62u 238 67 |64/56/30/54|66|68/66|57 49 7 27 8] 7| 6} 3] 6] 8} 8} 8| 7 6 = 100 The greatest body width is 157» at the level of the first leg-bearing thoracic segment. The length of the inner long seta on the caudal ramus is 415y. The head and first four leg-bearing thoracic segments bear small setae as indicated in Fig. 54. These setae are arranged in general like those of the female. The fifth leg-bearing thoracic, genital, and abdominal segments are armed as shown in Figs. 54, 55, and 56. The arrangement of the seven major setae on the caudal ramus (Fig. 57) is like that of the female. Instead of the two flask-shaped setae on the outer distal corner, how- ever, there are two tapering setae with minute lateral spines. NOVEMBER 1953 The first antenna (Fig. 58) has eight podomeres of the following actual and proportional lengths (measuring along the outer margins) : 1 2 3 | 4 5 6 7 8 29u 34 39 13 29 30 13 19 14 17 19 6 14 15 6 9 = 100 On the inner edge of the fourth podomere there is a minute feathered seta. From this region there arises also an aesthetask about 77u long. A second aesthetask much slenderer and about one-half as long is borne on the end of the distal podomere. Podomeres 3-6 have irregular chitinized proc- esses along their inner surfaces. The third podomere is noticeably swollen. The second antenna, mandible, first maxilla, second maxilla, and maxilliped are like those of the female. The first swimming leg (Fig. 59) has propor- tions and armature much like the female. The inner basipodite spine, however, is hooked at its tips and bears a row of minute spines along the edge (Fig. 60). Near its base there are two smaller spines. The second swimming leg (Fig. 61) differs from the first, third, and fourth in that the endo- podite has apparently two podomeres, the second and third podomeres having become fused. The six setae on the distal endopodite podomere (Fig. 62) may be homologized with the setae of the second and third podomeres of the female endopodite. The two setae on the middle inner edge correspond to the two belonging to the second podomere in the female. The long feath- ered seta distal to these two corresponds to the seta arising from the middle inner edge of the third podomere of the female. The three greatly modified terminal setae correspond to the three terminal setae of the female. The third and fourth swimming legs are like those of the female. The setal formula for the first four pairs of legs is: Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3 Leg 4 Exp. | End Exp. | End Exp. | End ‘Exp. | End Ist podomere..... 1:0 weil | Oeil) Weil | Oeil |) Tsth | Oar 2d podomere......| 1:1 : isi 6 sil | Osi) isit | We 3d podomere......| 5 3 7 7 6 7 5 The proximal podomere of the fifth leg (Fig. 63) bears an outer pedicellate seta and an inner lobe with two setae and a row of small spines. The distal podomere is slightly wider than long, the HUMES: TWO NEW HARPACTICOID COPEPODS oil two dimensions being in the proportion of 11:9. It bears four setae, the seta next to the outer- most being longest and without lateral hairs. The sixth leg (Fig. 63) consists of three setae arising from a low ridge along the posterior mar- gin of the genital segment. Remarks.—Although M. ampullifer has certain very distinctive features, such as the sexual dimorphism of the two outer setae on the caudal rami, its generic position may be subject to at least two interpretations of the species in the Diosaccidae. Lang (1948) described sixteen new genera in the family, bringing the total to twenty-seven. M. ampullifer possesses charac- teristics which seem to be of taxonomic im- portance equal to those used to separate genera within the family. It does not seem possible, therefore, to place this new species in any of the genera recognized by Lang. It is possible, however, to place the new species in the genus Mesamphiascus Nicholls. In his re- vision of the Diosaccidae Nicholls (1941) erected the subfamily Amphiascinae, basing his concept upon the setation of the middle podo- meres of the second and third endopodites. In this subfamily he placed Robertsonia Brady, Schizopera Sars, Amphiascopsis Gurney, Amphi- ascus sens. str., and the new genera Amphiascoides and Mesamphiascus. The last named genus he described as having two inner setae on the middle podomere of the second endopodite and one inner seta on the middle podomere of the third endo- podite. Mesamphiascus as thus defined by him included twenty-six species, the type selected being Amphiascus parvus Sars. Until more is known about the species of the Diosaccidae and their true generic relationships can be inter- preted, it seems better to place this new species from the lobster in Mesamphiascus Nicholls than to erect a new genus for it. M. ampullifer may be distinguished from the recognized species of Mesamphiascus by the flask-shaped setae on the caudal rami of the female. Only one other species in the genus M. bulbifer (Sars) has setae on the caudal rami modified in a similar manner. In this species, however, it is the outer of the two long setae which is modified, not the two setae at the outer distal corner as in M. ampullifer. Whether or not this modification is sexually dimorphic as in M. ampullifer is not known, since only females of M. bulbifer have been described. Sexual di- morphism, however, is known in a few other ate JOURNAL OF THE harpacticoid genera, such as Attheyella and Huntemannia. Basal swelling or expansion of the setae on the caudal rami has been described in many harpacticoids, as discussed by Sewell (1940), but usually the two long setae are the ones affected and often it is not clear whether the condition is sexually dimorphic. Swollen setae on the outer distal corner of the caudal ramus are not entirely unknown in other harpacticoids, one having been described by Klie (1929) in the female of his Paramesochra holsatica. M. ampullifer differs further from all other species in the genus in the character of the inner basipodite seta of the first leg of the male and in the armature of the endopodite of the second leg of the male. It seems also to be unlike most other known species in having a small aesthetask on the terminal podomere of the first antenna. This feature, however, may be common to other species. Such an aesthetask is apparently figured by Sewell (1940) in his new species Amphiascus calcarifer, f. major, though not mentioned in the text. The aesthetask is so small that in the group of terminal setae it might easily be overlooked. The majority of the members of the Dio- saccidae for which ecological information is avail- able are free-living, in salt, brackish, or fresh water. Numerous species of marine harpacticoids have been found by Jakubisiak (1932 and 1936) among the algae and animal colonies attached to the carapace of the crab, Maia squinado (Herbst), among them Dvosaccus tenwcornis (Claus), Amphiascopsis phyllopus (Sars), Mesamphiascus parvus (Sars), Amphiascoides debilis (Giesbrecht), and Amphiascoides hispidus (Norman MS, Sars). These five species of Diosaccidae also occur, however, in sand and among algae, being found normally in the latter habitat, according to Monard (1935). They probably live not as true commensals or as semiparasites but as free animals in the ecological niche provided by the thick growth on the crab carapace. Another species, Amphiascoides commensalis (Seiwell), lives as a commensal in the branchial chamber of the ascidian, Amaroucium, according to Seiwell (1928). M. ampullifer thus appears to be the second species in the Diosaccidae known to have definite relationships with a host animal, al- though its morphological modifications for cling- ing to the host are not highly developed. The only other harpacticoid known from the lobster is Unicalteutha ovalis Wilson, 1944 (Pelti- WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 11 diidae). This copepod occurs commonly on lob- sters in Newfoundland (Templeman and Tibbo, 1945), where it is found chiefly in restricted areas on the chelipeds. After the above description had been com- pleted, twelve preserved lobsters, comprising nine females and three males, were found para- sitized by M. ampullifer. These lobsters had been used for class study for five years and their collection locality is unknown. Three of the females and two of the males had many nauplii and copepodids as well as adults. All stages of the copepods were confined to the setose flattened edges of the proximal endite lobes of the first maxillipeds. Nine live lobsters, including four males and five females, collection locality unknown, pur- chased from a Boston fish market in March, 1953, were also parasitized by these copepods. Over 100 copepods, including nauplii, copepo- dids, and adults, were removed from each. From one female 370 adult copepods were recovered. When it is considered that the combined area of the flattened edges of the two endite lobes where they were clinging was not more than about 28 square millimeters, the heavy degree of infesta- tion may be appreciated. M. ampullifer seemed to be particularly hardy when removed from the host, since some indi- viduals survived for 41 days at about 70 degrees F. in a watch glass of sea water changed weekly but without special aeration. M. ampullifer thus appears to be a common parasite of lobsters in the New England area, since it has been found on all 29 thus far ex- amined. This, together with the fact that it occurs in such large numbers and on such a re- stricted part of the host’s body, would tend to support the conclusion that it normally lives upon the lobster. LITERATURE CITED Cuappuis, P. A. Harpacticiden aus der Kiemen- hohle des Flusskrebses. Arch. Hydrobiol. 17: 515-520. 1926. JAKUBISIAK, S. Sur les harpacticoides hébergés par Maia squinado. Bull. Soc. Zool. France 57: 506-513. 1932. . Matériaux a la faune des harpacticoides de Roscoff (cétes bretonnes, France). Fragm. Faun. Mus. Zool. Polon. 2: 315-321. 1936. . Sur le copépode Nitocrella divaricata (Chappuis) commensal de l’écrevisse. Arch. Hydrobiol. i Rybactwa 12: 117-121. 1939. Kure, W. Die Copepoda Harpacticoida der stidlichen NOVEMBER 1953. TOMLINSON: BURROWING BARNACLE OF GENUS TRYPETESA und westlichen Ostsee mit besonderer Beruck- sichtigung der Sandfauna der Kieler Bucht. Zool. Jahrb., Abt. Syst. 57: 329-386. 1929. Lane, K. Monographie der Harpacticiden, 2 vols. Lund, Sweden. 1948. LippELL, J. A. Nitocrameira bdellurae, nov. gen. et sp., a copepod of the family Canthocamptidae, parasitic in the egg cases of Bdellura. Journ. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., 32: 87-94. 1912. Monaprp, A. Etude sur la faune des harpacticoides marins de Roscoff. Trav. Stat. Biol. Roscoff, fase. 13: 5-88. 1935. Nicuouts, A. G. A revision of the families Dio- saccidae Sars, 1906 and Laophontidae T. Scott, 1905 (Copepoda, Harpacticoida). Rec. South Australian Mus. 7: 65-110. 1941. Sars, G. O. An account of the Crustacea of Norway 303 with short descriptions and figures of all the species. 5 and suppl. Bergen, Norway, 1911. SEIWELL, H. R. Two new species of commensal copepods from the Woods Hole region. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 73 (art. 18): 1-5. 1928. SEWELL, R. B. 8S. Copepoda, Harpacticoida. The John Murray Expedition 1933-34 Scientific Reports 7: 117-882. 1940. TEMPLEMAN, W., and T1Bso, 8. N. Lobster investi- gations in Newfoundland 1938 to 1941. New- foundland Govt. Dept. Natural Resources, Res. Bull. 16 (Fisheries): 1-98. 1945. Witson, C. B. The copepods of the Woods Hole re- gion Massachusetts. U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 58: 1-635. 1932. . Parasitic copepods in the United States National Museum. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 94: 529-582. 1944. ZOOLOGY —A burrowing barnacle of the genus Trypetesa (order Acrothoracica).! Jack T. Tomuinson, Department of Zoology, University of California. (Com- municated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) A previously unreported acrothoracican barnacle has been found burrowing in Tegula shells occupied by hermit crabs in the intertidal zone of central California. A description and certain aspects of the life history of this form are given. A more de- tailed morphological study is in preparation for future publication. Subclass CirripEpiIA (Lam.) Burmeister, 1834 Order AcrotTHoracica Gruvel, 1905 Diagnosis.—Boring cirripeds with soft mantle without calcareous plates; cirri reduced, con- centrated toward posterior end of body, one pair in vicinity of mouth (‘mouth cirri’), and widely separated from other pairs, remaining pairs 2, 3, or 4 in number. Three pairs of mouth appendages. Abdomen lacking (?). Hermaphro- ditic or sexes separate. Males dwarf. Ovaries in a more or less flattened part of mantle (‘‘disk’’), which serves at same time to anchor it in the hole. Development always includes a cypris stage, with a nauplius stage in most of the species studied. Live buried in chiton and barnacle plates, gastropod shells, and corals. Suborder Apygophora Berndt, 1907 Diagnosis——Sexes separate. Female: An ex- ternal chitinous mantle ‘sack’? more or less 1 This work was completed in partial satisfac- tion of the requirements for the degree of master of arts in zoology at the University of California, under the supervision of Dr. Willard D. Hartman, to whom I am indebted for encouragement and assistance. regularly rounded or oval serving to fix the animal in a burrow in a shell; one pair of bira- mous mouth cirri; three pairs of quadriarticu- lated and uniramous thoracic eirri, the first two pairs possessing small prickly pads on second articulation; two lateral folds on inside of mantle which are perhaps ovigerous frenae; alimentary canal a sacculated system without an anus; esophagus spineless; nervous system consists of brain and one ventral ganglion. Rudimentary (dwarf) males: Small, fixed on upper part of disk of female or grouped on cavity in shell; in the form of an elongated bag, naked and transparent; with a small opening for passage of a well-developed probosciform penis; only eyes, testis, seminal - vesicle, and penis are developed. Cyprid larvae with six pairs of thoracic appendages biramous and natatory; abdominal segment with two large appendages. Family Trypetesidae Kruger 1940 (=Alcippidae Gerstacker, 1866; Gruvel, 1905). With the characteristics of the suborder Genus Trypetesa A. M. Norman, 1903 (= Alcippe Hancock, 1849; Darwin, 1854; Berndt, 1903, 1907; Genthe, 1905; Kuhnert, 1935; Al- cippoides E. Strand, 1928. Non Alcippe Blyth, 1844.) Trypetesa lampas (Hancock) ‘Capitulum’’ laterally compressed, perpen- dicular to surface of the shell, with ‘‘disk’’ or ovigerous portion dorsoventrally compressed and ol parallel to surface of host shell; nauplius free- swimming; adult exceeding 8 mm; bilaterally sym- metrical; male attached only to disk of female; reported from the sublittoral of the northern Atlantic Ocean and the Mediterranean Sea. Trypetesa lateralis, n. sp. Laterally compressed throughout; no _ free- swimming nauplius; adult does not exceed 5 mm; not bilaterally symmetrical in mantle structure (lips of mantle opening asymmetrical; with a large external flap on left side of mantle only); male attached to disk of female or to the cavity wall near the external flap; found in littoral zone of central California. Diagnosis —Female laterally | compressed throughout and situated laterally to right of slit in host shell, relative to point of attachment; “horny knob” of disk relatively small, on a recognizable stalk or peduncle; size not in excess of 5 millimeters; flap on the left surface of the mantle extends in adult to external surface of host shell, which it minutely perforates; retains young to cyprid stage; body proper resembles that of Trypetesa lampas, but much smaller; mantle sac not bilaterally symmetrical (Fig. 1); males may be numerous and attached to horny disk or knob of female or grouped on wall of cavity near external mantle flap. The species is named for the wholly laterally compressed body and the orientation of the animal within the shell, laterally from the aperture. DORSAL JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 43, No. 11 Type specimen.—U. 8. National Museum no. 93450. Type locality.— Moss County, Calif. Dimensions of type.—Maximum diameter, 3.2 mm; right lip length 1.1 mm; dimension “A” (see Fig. 7), 1.85 mm; dimension ‘“B”, Zul HO. Repositories of other type material.—California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco, Calif., no. 9857; Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, Calif.: University of California Museum of Paleontology, Berkeley, Calif., no. 32960. Distribution.—Point Arena, Mendocino County, Calif., to Shell Beach, San Luis Obispo County, Calif. (search for it was made at inter- vals from San Juan Island, Wash. to Ensenada, Baja California, Mexico. See Fig. 5). Intertidal. In Tegula shells occupied by all species of Pagurus within the range (all were in shells of Tegula brunnea and T. funebralis except for 3 Calliostoma costatum and 1 Acanthina spirata. Hermit crabs: Pagurus granosimanus, P. hem- phillii; P. hirsutiusculus, and P. samuelis). A significant preference in the total sample for 7. brunnea shells and for those occupied by P. samuelis. (This latter preferred association may result from the fact that P. samuelis is more abundant at the higher levels of the intertidal region where the barnacle itself is more abundant. Beach, San Mateo LATERAL iN SITU LATERAL DORSAL IN SITU TRYPETESA LAMPAS TRYPETESA LATERALIS Fig. 1.—Trypetesa lampas (after Genthe) and 7. lateralis. ABBREVIATIONS USED IN FIG. 1 a—point of attachment. ap—aperture of shell cavity. e—capitulum. e.m.f.—external mantle flap. h.d.—horny disk. h.k.—horny knob. lip—lip or edge of mantle. s.s.—shell surface (approx. relative position). s.—slit (early aperture) NOVEMBER 1953. TOMLINSON: BURROWING BARNACLE OF GENUS TRYPETESA 200; 180° 90° COLUMELLA O° (INNER LIP OF APERTURE) 0° TEGULA SHELL SECTION A—A (APICAL VIEW) Fig. 2.—Plan of the body whorl of a Tegula shell to show the location of burrows of Trypetesa lateralis. Barnacles of different ages are shown. At Haven’s Neck, Mendocino County, P. hemphillia replaces P. samuelis in the higher zones, yielding evidence that the vertical zonation of the barnacle is dependent upon intertidal position rather than upon the species of hermit crab.) Specimens found in shells measuring from 7 to 16 mm in length of aperture; no correlation between size of shell and incidence of barnacles within the size range (over 1,000 shells examined). Distribution within the shell: Of 1,315 bar- nacles 98.5 per cent were found in the body whorl with a slightly higher concentration at about 255° from the edge of the aperture (Fig. 2). They burrow on the posterior surface inside the shell (in the ‘floor’? of the shell as viewed with the apex upward). The larvae apparently attach at random, but burrow with the point of attach- ment away from the columella. They may burrow entirely within the columella. The flattened mantle is oriented parallel to the surface of the shell with its left side, bearing the external mantle flap, more deeply buried. The ovigerous “disk’’ extends to the right of the opening in the shell when viewed from the point of attachment (Fig. 1, 2). Methods.—The study of this barnacle requires certain special methods because of its habit of living inconspicuously on the inside of the shell. The shell has to be broken to check for the presence of the barnacles, which are found to be almost totally confined to the body whorl. They are situated largely on the ‘floor’ of the inside of the shell (with the apex upwards). Thus the tip or apex of the shell can readily be removed with a geologist’s pick or chipping hammer without injury to the occupants. It is most satisfactory to remove the apex gently with the hermit crab alive and still in the shell. The crab is then pushed out of the shell with a bent wire or other probe. If the shells cannot be opened soon after collection, they may be placed in 10 per cent formalin and kept for a short time. After such treatment the crabs may be removed most easily by pulling them bodily from the shell with curved forceps. Detached portions of abdomen may be removed after chipping off the apex of the shell. If the barnacles are to be saved, the crabs should be removed as soon as possible to allow the fixing fluid to penetrate to the barnacles. The barnacles are located by a ‘‘candling”’ process in which the shell is illuminated from the apertural side by a narrow beam of light and viewed from the removed apical end. The bar- nacles appear as yellow, orange, -or at times reddish areas with a definite outline, the latter depending upon their age. Very small ones appear as slitlike spots of light. The adult barnacles adhere quite firmly to the shell, in part because they are cemented to it and in part through the action of the ‘“‘teeth”’ or ‘‘thorns” by which they abrade the shell. The barnacles can be freed from the shell by placing them in a dilute (1 per cent or less) solution of hydrochloric acid in 70 per cent alcohol for a few days. Von Ebner’s decalcifying fluid is also satisfactory. In a few days the overlying shell can be carefully picked away and the barnacle lifted out. Bouin’s fluid is excellent for removing the larger barnacles in perfect condition, but many of the smaller animals are lost. In using this fixative the shells are covered with fluid 376 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 11 VENTRAL ANTERIOR CARINAL POSTERIOR LEFT RIGHT DORSAL Fig. 3.—The orientation of Trypetesa lateralis. until they are quite soft, which may require The collecting of the shells in the field was several changes of fluid. Jeweler’s forceps are done under varying conditions of tide level and valuable in removing the smaller barnacles. of depth at which the crabs were found. All LAR ae ee ‘ SREY — Fic. 4.—Trypetesa lateralis, n. sp. A mature female with three males attached. Left lateral view. Camera lucida drawing, X 92. 23 ABBREVIATIONS USED IN FIG. 4. M!2.3—Muscles (numbered). BR—Brain. MC—Mouth cirrus. BRIS—Bristles on the side of the head. MG—Manxillary gland. EMF—External mantle flap. MP—Mouth parts. ES—Esophagus. RL—Right lip. H—Head. STO—Stomach. HK—Horny knob. T—Thorax L—Lip of the mantle. TC@—Ehoracie cirri: LAR—Larva. ~ TO—Tooth. LL—Left lip. VG—Ventral ganglion. LMF—Left internal mantle flap. o'—Males. NOVEMBER 1953 TOMLINSON: BURROWING BARNACLE OF GENUS TRYPETESA hermit crabs were collected at random, with no selection for crab or shell types. The differences in the composition of these collections may be seen in Table 1. Several hundred living Tegula brunnea and T. funebralis were collected at Moss Beach, San Mateo County, and inspected for specimens of Trypetesa, but none were found. Likewise examination of several hundred Mytilus cali- fornianus shells, living and dead, and of several specimens of large balanoid barnacles from the Monterey Peninsula revealed no Trypetesa. The life cycle—An analysis of the numbers and sizes of Trypetesa lateralis from collections at Moss Beach, San Mateo County, at different times of the year has been made to determine the life cycle. The percentage infection of shells, the average number of barnacles per infected shell, the percentage of larvae in the population, and the average size of the barnacles has been plotted (Fig. 6). Larval-sized barnacles have a. slit length of 0.25 mm; when the barnacle starts to mature the slit rapidly becomes longer. The results seem to indicate that the period of greatest larval settling is during the months of November, December, and January, and again to a lesser degree in June. An increase in the numbers of barnacles per infected shell and the percentage of larvae, with a concommitant decrease in the average barnacle size, give evi- dence for this larval settling. The drop in the percentage infestation of shells may indicate the breakdown of older shells with larger bar- nacles, resulting in a decrease in the average size and the increase in the percentage of larva. In the latter case the number of barnacles per infected shell should not increase, which it does. This increase favors the argument for the actual influx of larvae rather than the breakdown of shells. The recruitment of young barnacles must be very rapid, for during the period of study the percentage of larval-sized barnacles did not fall below 50 per cent. This would imply a very high mortality of barnacles in proportion to the rate of growth. The data are not adequate for a determination of this factor. The life cycle of this barnacle is intimately associated with the length of time that the host shell remains intact. Information on this subject would be of great interest. The growth of the females of Trypetesa lateralis is accompanied by molts, but distinct molt stages or instars are not evident from Byes available data. The results of measurements of 152 barnacles along two axes have been plotted (Fig. 7). The diameter of the lips and disk was CANADA = SAN JUAN ISLAND (164) WASHINGTON SEASIDE (435) YACHATS OREGON coos HEAD (721) HARRIS BEACH (297) WILSON CREEK (2i!) TRINIDAD BEACH (22) CALIFORNIA HARDY CREEK (307) 2 POINT ARENA (550) \ HAVENS NECK (238) DUXBURY REEF (301) MOSS BEACH (3237) PIGEON POINT (625) MONTEREY PENINSULA (II7!) MILL CREEK (i02) \\ PIEDRAS BLANCAS (520) =m CAYUCAS (289) sy SHELL BEACH (121) PERCENTAGE INFESTATION (SHELLS COLLECTED) LAGUNA BEACH (540) LA JOLLA (226) MEXICO ENSENADA (210) Fig. 5—Distribution of Trypetesa lateralis in the western United States littoral. The shaded area indicates the range. The figures at the left indicate the percentage of infestation, while the figures in parentheses at the right denote the num- ber of shell specimens collected. The double line at the Monterey Peninsula indicates extensive collections at several points. 378 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 11 48 a 85 5l 4 aT hy, 3 . em Ness 4 ~- Aaa PERCENT INFESTATION /. z br 2 - nae ‘sig? OR ASHELLS : my 80 a. ee a w as \ a F 4 e = Ww re) at) my o rg “ 2 z ° = ploy CMC) 75~ 45 ve x z fo) ne = — a o oA ” w ° aa 36 TOM, 42 eA - oO a ie ° BARNACLES PER < < e . INFECTED G @ = Ww o FE IC ; / z x f / - Ww & FA if = N oO WwW a x ae PERCENT OF 69: 0.5 |faaee a z. \ ‘ Vs LARVAL SIZE w as N \ eS a oO 5 8 \ / P < Ww a Bs arf 55 ee z \ Ve \ fe) 0 ee ee eee rs .30 7-28 8-17 10-14 12-10 1-25 3-9 4-6 7-8 Fre. 6.—Analysis of barnacle numbers and sizes at Moss Beach at different times of the year. The per cent larval size is the percentage of the total barnacle sample which was of larval size, or 0.25 mm in slit length. The numbers on the abscissa indicate the month and day, 1951 to 1952. = fo) DIMENSION "a" SPECIMENS 62! e 5 3 al 1LOMM. 2.0 DIMENSION "B" ~2 4.0 Fie. 7.—Bidimensional growth. A growth curve obtained by plotting lengths ‘“‘A’”’ and ‘‘B”’ on 2 axes. In all, 152 specimens (a mixed sample) were measured. Different areas, plotted separately, did not give a significant difference. NOVEMBER 1953 TOMLINSON: BURROWING BARNACLE OF GENUS TRYPETESA measured from the distal (carinal) notch of the mantle slit to the furthest corner of the horny knob (dimension ‘“‘A’’). The body diameter was measured perpendicular to the plane of the outside edge of the lip and knob to the opposite edge of the reproductive fan at the widest point (dimension ‘B’’). The growth curve obtained by plotting these two measurements shows that the slit (dimension “‘A’’) grows rapidly at first during the juvenile stage, while the reproductive TABLE 1.—ANALYSIS 379 fan (dimension “B”) grows markedly during adulthood. No grouping of the results is obtained, however, to warrant the designation of larval instars. LITERATURE CITED BERNDT, W. Zur Biologie und Anatomie von Al- cippe lampas Hancock. Zeitschr. Zool. 74: 396- 457. 1903. . Uber das System der Acrothoracica. Arch. Naturg. 73: 287-289. 1907. oF INFECTED AREAS 2 3 3 | ee eet g Se |e Same ales woe [eae ot) ote SSL OES MCR | Gite Se cc we ieee oe yee he he |e Point Arena 2/24/52 | | ] a NGM ics ed. naga Fels aa Ge alt acO age eel g ene se 3 0 0 Bap es DESIRED 0 0 OF) ele 2aels St 0 56 4 7 Sele Oe 0 2 0 Gurl GON es Agi aeG S210 | 230,12 5 6 31 haooy || a6 OF Hiss G0) 2420 CesT Sia NG CEI elit 0 0 3 Zale Gian ei aC Ae Ole Mach: ye 4 a tA | 462 | 19 | 14 Ee PA CO 0) oe0 e334 laeG Havens Neck 8/7/51 l | l san). oe Pe '67 0 0 11 6 | 55 1 0 0 ou 1G ules np. SOUPS | AT Yea! © 34.0). 78 0 0 O| 94] 42 | 45 Ho Presa 25s Poel OF.) 0 275) <0 Ons 2243 Pes cca 2 fe eeOF| 2 Oe ea 3 1c 25 2 0 Oi 28 aa esearch | | 143 Raheacs 90| 43 | 48 5 0 Ta ORE) || SUES el) Oe Moss Beach mesh... Sets 26n4) L1G) 306). 260 2 Ol Ore “Os t74- le 45 i936 8/17 Low gran...... ae Olea’ OS otse | 18 0 Oe 105) 102s 18" 57 RESP... pes Onis «0 17 (ing ae 0 0 0 19 Neey Gr nO 0) Wes op tienoe CO OM SOM Pe oh alo High gran...... 1 0 50 1Scies soe Pl OF Oa MUe OY We s19 seis) ate on 41 ea) O7 hy 32 33 0 0 On rEsSa lies aoe 42 Sipe ee NS Su ke dO 0 0 Ola 4055 Tin 48 On 250) MerGOl: 26 DC 0 | 2781 65 | 23 | M5... .........: 126s Ged eotee | AI OME SOM IL TELS 2 0 0 | 540] 106 | 20 Po. 5... 10) |e tc Ou 23981) 56h ot Da 0 0 | 251) 56 | 22 200) Ch are 2a ee ees ee NO 52k aoe OFT a 0 O | 194] 56 | 29 renin oul ois: || 406 MIOSsG 7 a eel. © 0 0 | 445 | 112 | 25 380 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. I1 TABLE 1—Continued | o zr 7 ek 3 D | rc a See o rs) n 3 | rs) a) = ss 5) Oo =| 3) Oo | rs) | Oo ee: = 5 Sv — = =o a 4 ° oS a = Pets o So = S 5 = & 2 = 5 “3 » lect a) =o a = ~~ wn = +2 < 235 a D \sa| 22 |2¢! 21.2 |45 | 2) 2 | =o Rs Rog AV ofa ees WW A eh Yi o | 3 aoe ae sr © oo is o a” = a ° °F on = = Ay w = os = rae & & & ‘ an a / 1/20 (02 STAM Aina 14 0 401 | 52 | 13 3 1 33 418. | So eiaeS | | Say tae 10 1 10 15 | A |) 2a 0 0 25 | 39 | 20 | | | } ; Unkn' We. eee se 0 0 20 onli 0 0 0) PA) 7 | 30 27| 1| 37 | 436) 63 | 14 | 3) 1 | 33 | AGgueeeeeee CE IY aioe cae 104 | 916° |, aie. lease: 2 78h) ene eet nO 0} 593| 94 | 16 YR ca haere o9| 12 | 12 | a2} 4] 1 5 | 0 | 0 tees | 11 TRL AEE 120 | 23.) 19. | ta5,| 297] “Se “ot | 0 0 | 255| 52 | 20 Total.............| 619| 102 | 16 | 2602| 489 | 19 | 16 | 1 | 6 | 3987] soa) Monterey County, July 1951 Pomt Pimese sess 5280 | SOM a alg Lz 20 16 1 0 0 656'.| “110 ieee Point. Joes + Aen tee oO 3) jaw 40 10 25 0 0 0 67 18 | 27 Fan Shell Beach..... 26 QF 239 20 1 ao 1 0 0 47 | 16 | 34 Pescadero Point..... ee Ss 0 0 12 3 25 2 2 100 By Am Mapes So | Mission Point....... kh. gerd 1 4 5 0 0 0 i) 0 30 | 1 = Fa etits 2 eae ee keg otsit|, «259: 0 18: a/eeto2ae moze 60 1 | 0 | 0 | 29e;eaemeiiee BAT es ee ea. 168,| 280% AS Soule a ot 0} 0 | 0 | 26) sons inl aitegh Sele ne, ee 10: |. 6 | 60s | 9) eee sat 0} 0 0 | 19 | 10s Ee me ees i = ale | 309 | 109 | 35. us229.|" 148, | srGa) Spool pal 0 | 539) 257 | 48 Cayucas 9/16/51 278 | 54 | 19 9) 0] 0 | 2 | o | © | 2am Riera \ | I Shell Beach 8/6/51 ee eee eee e457: tie eek 5 ale Oe tO aes all 93 | 53 )) onus Sar |i 2 aes be 60 ka 28 ey 6 ales 2S 0 0 | 68] 30 | 44 105 | 35 | 33 | 4136-1. 5 | 1-| 90 | aes Tiobal, Babee | 1875 | 387 | 21 | 2278| 608 | 27 | 24 | 4 | 17 | 4177 | gggmieeem ABBREVIATIONS USED IN TABLE 1 ber—Pagurus beringanus. sam—P. samuelis. gran—P. granosimanus. unkn—Unknown. bemp—P. hemphillii. * —Whelk type of shell. hirs—P. hirsutiusculus. 7 —Tegula ligulata. NOVEMBER 1953 Biytu, Epwarp. Mr. Blyth’s monthly report for December meeting, 1842. Appendix to Mr. Blyth’s report. Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal 13: 384. 1844. Burmeister, H. Beitrage zur Naturgeschichte der Rankenfusser. Berlin, 1834. DaRWIN, CHARLES. A monograph on the subclass of Cirripedia: 529-586. Ray Society, 1854. GenTHE, K. W. Some notes on Alcippe lampas and its occurrence on the American Atlantic shore. Zool. Jahrb. Anat. 21: 181-200. 1905. GruvEL, A. Monographie des cirrhipedes: 310-335. Paris, 1905. GerstAckEeR, A. Arthropoda, in Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen 5: 406-589. 1866. WOODWICK: POLYDORA NUCHALIS 381 Hancock, A. Notice of the occurrence, on the British coast, of a burrowing barnacle belonging to a new order of the class Cirripedia. Ann. Mag. Nat: Hist. 4(2): 305-314. 1849. KRuGER, PAUL. Cirrepedia. in Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen 5:1:3:3. 1940. KuHNERT, L. Beitrag zur Entwicklungeschichte von Alcippe lampas Hancock. Zeitsch. Morphol. Okol. 29: 45-78. 1934. Norman, A. M. New generic names for some En- tomostraca and Cirripedia. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 11(7) : 367-369. 1903. STRAND, E. Miscellanea nomenclatorica zoologica et palaeontologica. I-II. Arch. Naturg. 92A Crustacea: 40-41. 1926. ZOOLOGY —Polydora nuchalis, a new species of polychaetous annelid from Calt- fornia.! Keira H. Woopwicx, Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California. (Communicated by Waldo L. Schmitt.) The spionid worm described herein is the tenth species of Polydora to be reported from California (for others see Hartman, 1941). Although resembling several other species in some characteristics, the worm is clearly and consistently different; it is there- fore described as a new species. Polydora nuchalis, n. sp. The body is generally depressed; it is most so at the modified fifth segment where it is more than twice as wide as deep. It is less depressed in front of and behind this segment. The body tapers posteriorly just before the terminal flaring pygidium. The range observed in the number of segments is 80 to 110; in millimeters of length 15 to 20. In life this polydorid is trans- lucent yellow in color, some individuals having a smoky surface pigmentation in the anterior two-thirds of the body and in the pygidial region. The palpi lack pigment granules but are colored bright red by the blood as are the mid- dorsal and midventral lines and the branchiae of living specimens. The prostomium is bifid anteriorly and ex- tends posteriorly as the caruncle to the forward margin of the third setigerous segment [third segment below] (Fig. 1, b). A median nuchal tentacle, on which the specific name is based, arises from the prostomium at the level of the 1 Contribution no. 119 from the Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, Calif. This study was aided by the personnel and made possible through the use of the facilities of the Allan Hancock Foundation. first segment. Two pairs of eye spots in a trape- zoidal arrangement are found near the palpal bases. The posterior ones are closer together and slightly smaller than the anterior pair. The palpi are long and extend back to the twentieth segment in preserved specimens. The peristomium flares to each side of the prostomium; it is bounded above by the latter and in front and ventrally by the oral aperture. The first segment lacks notosetae; the para- podia are represented by notopodial and neuro- podial lobes and a neuropodial fascicle of setae (Fig. 1, a). The neuropodial lobe and setae are oriented on a line with the notopodial lobes of the succeeding segments. The short, first noto- podial lobes are located dorsally just behind the palpal bases. The next three segments have well-developed notopodial and neuropodial postsetal lobes and fascicles of long slender setae. The notopodial fascicle has two rows of setae including an anterior row of short limbate and a posterior one of longer capillary setae. This notopodial arrange- ment continues through segments 6 to 9. The neuropodia of segments 2 to 4 have capillary setae. Segment 5 (Fig. 1, a) is larger than either the fourth or the sixth segment; it lacks postsetal lobes. Its notopodium has a bundle of anterior dorsal capillary setae and a slightly curved single series of large spines alternating with as many companion setae. The spines are largest anterodorsally and are gradually reduced in size posteriorly. They are weakly falcate in shape (Fig. 1, d); the companion setae are h Fig. 1.—Polydora nuchalis, n. sp.: a, Anterior end, in left lateral view, X 53; 6, anterior end, in dor- sal view, X 53; c, pygidium, in posterior dorsal view, X 53; d, stout spines of the modified fifth segment showing new, worn, and developing spines, X 122; e, companion seta of the modified fifth segment, xX 529; f, ventral hooded hook from the seventh segment, X 710. NOVEMBER 1953 plumose (Fig. 1, e). The neuropodium of segment 5 is vestigial; it has a fascicle of short capillary setae. Segment 6 resembles segments 2 to 4. Seg- ment 7 differs abruptly in having the beginning of the branchiae dorsally and the hooded hooks ventrally (Fig. 1, a). The vertical series of hooded hooks vary in number from 8 to 6; the anterior segments have the greater number. The hooks are distally bidentate. The main tooth forms an angle with the shaft of approximately 90° and an acute angle with the accessory tooth (Fig. 1, f). (See Séderstrém, 1920, p. 41, for method of angle measurement.) The notopodial lobes decrease in size from segment 7 to 15. They are small, papillar behind segment 15. The branchiae are finger-shaped and overlap at the middorsal line. They are full-sized from segment 7 to the posterior fourth of the body There is a gradual reduction in size from this point. There are no specialized posterior noto- podial spines or hooks. The pygidium is broad and flaring; it has a wide dorsal notch (Fig. 1, ¢). The anus is situated slightly dorsal of center. This species resembles Polydora cirrosa Rioja (1948, pp. 233-238, figs. 8-25) in many characteristics but varies from it in the following features: (1) The caruncle extends only to the third instead of the fifth segment; (2) a neuro- podial fascicle is present, not absent, in the fifth segment; (3) the notopodial lobes of the first segment and the median nuchal tentacle are short, never cirriform, even in mature specimens; (4) the stout spines and companion setae of the fifth, and the ventral hooded hooks are different. Polydora nuchalis is also close to Polydora lignt Webster (1886, pp. 148-149, pl. 8, figs. 45-47) from which it differs by the following characteristics: (1) It lacks, instead of has, an accessory tooth on the stout spines of the modified segment; (2) the caruncle extends only to the third, instead of to the fourth, segment; (3) the hooded hooks differ. It also resembles Polydora websteri Hartman (1948, pp. 70-72, figs. 1, a-h) but varies from it in that: (1) The caruncle extends only to the third, instead of to the fourth, segment; (2) it WOODWICK: POLYDORA NUCHALIS 383 has a median nuchal tentacle; (3) the stout spines and companion setae of the fifth segment are different. Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 24724, from Playa del Rey, Calif. Distribution.—P. nuchalis occurs abundantly in the lagoon at Playa del Rey, Los Angeles County, Calif. | Biology—The water of the lagoon at Playa del Rey varies considerably in salinity owing to alternate seasonal rains and evaporation. This. species tolerates these varying salinities. It constructs mucus-lined tubes that are externally covered by a thin layer of sand; they penetrate the substratum to a depth of one or two inches. Associates in the lagoon are Streblospio benedicti Webster, Capitella capitata (Fabricius), and the amphipod Corophiwm insidiosum Crawford. A fiddler crab, Uca crenulata (Lockington), is abundant near the water’s edge. The eggs of P. nuchalis are deposited in trans- parent mucous capsules. The capsules are oriented in rosarylike chains and are individually attached to the wall of the tube by two strands which are continuations of the capsular material. Each capsule has as many as 100 eggs. Only one to eight of the eggs in each capsule develop into larvae; the remaining ova serve as food for the encased larvae. The latter ordinarily reach the 9-12 segmented stage before being freed from the capsule. A short planktonic life may precede settling and tube building. LITERATURE CITED Hartman, OuGa. Some contributions to the biology of Spionidae from California. Allan Hancock Pacific Exped. 7: 289-324, 4 pls. 1941. ———, Description of Polydora websteri, n. sp. In Loosanoff, V. L., and J. B. Engle. Biol. Bull. Woods Hole 85: 70-72, fig. 1, a-h. 1948. Riosa, E. Estudios anelidologicos VIII. Datos acerca de las especies del genero Polydora Bosc. de las costas Mexicanas del Pacifico. Anal. Inst. Biol. Mexico 14: 229-241, 25 figs. 1948. SopverstrROM, A. Studien tiber die Polychaeten Fami- lie Spionidae. Dissertation. 286 pp., 1 pl., 174 figs. Uppsala. 1920. WesstTER, H. The Annelida Chaetopoda of New Jersey. Annual Report New York State Mus. Nat. Hist., 39: 128-159, 7 pls. 1886. 384. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, NO. 11 ZOOLOGY A new species of polychaete worm of the family Ampharetidae from Massachusetts. MArtAN H. PertTrBoneE, University of New Hampshire, Dur- ham, N. H. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) In working over the polychaetous annelids in the Woods Hole region, a new species of ampharetid was found in a salt pond—James Pond on Martha’s Vineyard, Mass. It is re- ferred to the genus Hypaniola Annenkoya, which previously contained a single species, namely, Hypaniola kowalewskiz, known from the Caspian Sea. Hypaniola, as well as the closely related Hypania Ostroumov and Parhypania Annenkova, includes species noted for their euryhaline properties. The new species is named in honor of Milton Gray. who collected the specimens. The types are deposited in the U. 8. National Museum (no. 24734). Family AMPHARETIDAE Genus Hypaniola Annenkova, 1927; char. emend. Type species: Hypaniola kowalewski (Grimm, 1877) Annenkova, 1927, in Caspian Sea. Pro- stomium trilobed, with or without glandular crests (without in type species; a variable char- acter depending on amount of folding?), with two eye spots. Retractile oral tentacles smooth (not pinnate). Paleae present but poorly de- veloped, delicate, inconspicuous. Branchiae three or four pairs, fused basally. Without pair of dorsal hooks posterior to branchiae (as in Melinna). Notosetae begin on segment 3, present on 17 thoracic segments. Notopodia without cirri. Thoracic uncinigerous pinnules begin on segment 6 (setigerous segment 4). Thoracic uncini with a vertical row of teeth. Abdominal uncini with three vertical rows of teeth (type species) or a single row (H. grayi). Abdominal uncinigerous pinnules without cirri (type species) or with cirri (H. grayz). Pygidium without anal cirri. Nephridia 3 pairs, in segments 4-6 (seti- gerous segments 2-4). Hypaniola grayi, n. sp. Fig. 1, A-M Size.—Length 9-15 mm., greatest width I- 1.5 mm. Description —Body inflated anteriorly, tapered gradually to a narrower posterior end (Fig. 1, A). Body wall thick, opaque, and distinctly seg- mented on ventral side; very thin, transparent, iridescent, and indistinctly annulated on dorsal side. Prostomium trilobed, the median lobe widest anteriorly, may be flat (in life, Fig. 1, E) or somewhat folded so as to form a more de- pressed median part and lateral longitudinal crests (Fig. 1, B); basal part a transverse raised area with a pair of lateral eyespots; lateral lobes encircle the median lobe laterally and posteriorly. First achaetous or buccal segment extended ventrally forming a rounded lobe under the prostomium, as long as the next three segments (Fig. 1, B—C). Oral tentacles may be completely retracted within the mouth or more or less extended; they are digitiform, smooth, up to 20 in number, in paus arranged dorsoventrally on a somewhat folded tentacular membrane, longest and largest near midline, gradually becoming smaller and shorter laterally (Fig. 1, D). Second or paleal segment with a raised ridge into which the prostomium and buccal segment may be partially withdrawn, the ridge being especially prominent middorsally (Fig. 1, B—-C, F); with first pair of branchiae and weakly developed paired lateral bundles of paleal setae. Paleae in each bundle seven or eight in number, forming a spreading bundle, small, very delicate, iridescent, tapering gradually to slender capillary tips, as long as the thoracic notosetae but more delicate (easily overlooked). Segments 3-5 (thoracic setigerous segments 1-3) _ short, crowded, with cylindrical notopodia bearing notosetae, and with the next three pairs of branchiae. Branchiae four pairs, subequal, long, tapering, subulate, first pair on paleal segment, second pair more laterally on first setigerous segment, third pair more dorsally on second setigerous segment (second and third branchiae almost in transverse line due to crowding of setigerous segments 1-2), fourth pair on seti- gerous segment 3, in line with the first pair (Fig. 1, A-C, F). The bases of the four branchiae form a close group, with their basal portions distinct but fused to one another on the paleal segment. Thoracic region with cylindrical notopodia containing bundles of notosetae on 17 segments (beginning on segment 3; Fig. 1, A, C, H-J). Notosetae widest basally, tapering gradually III (set 1 f ) set 15 IV (set 2) uss II jj Eg mold i) 0.5 mm VII (set 5) we? H Py~ 2 -\---VI (set 4) G fe the E 1F=TN ep 3 pai f 8 eo ee * M L-M a Fie. 1.—Hypaniola grayi, n. sp.: A, Lateral view entire animal; B, dorsal view prostomium, first two segments, and bases of branchiae; C, lateral view anterior end, with bases of branchiae only shown; D, dorsal view prostomium and extended oral tentacles; E, dorsal view prostomium (sketched in life) ; F, dorsal view right group of branchiae and first few thoracic segments; G, lateral view posterior end; H, parapodia of first few segments from right side; I, parapodia of last few thoracic segments and first few abdominal segments from right side; J, parapodium from thoracic region; K, parapodium from ab- dominal region; L, thoracic uncinus, (a) lateral view, (6) frontal view; M, abdominal uncinus, (a) lateral view, (6) frontal view. (abd, abdominal uncinigerous segment; br, branchia; neC, neuropodial cirrus; nep, nephridial papilla; nePz, neuropodial uncinigerous pinnule; no, notopodium; pa, paleal setae; pr. prostomium; py, pygidium; set, setigerous segment; th, thoracic setigerous segment; J, first or buccal segment; J7, second or paleal segment; ///, third or first thoracic setigerous segment, etc.) 386 JOURNAL OF THE to slender capillary tips. Thoracic neuropodial uncinigerous pinnules begin on segment 6 (setigerous segment 4); pinnules without cirri or may be short cirri on upper parts of pinnules on few of more posterior thoracic segments (Fig. 1, H-I). Thoracie uncini pectiniform, with four teeth in a single row above the rounded basal part (Fig. 1, L). Abdominal region with achaetous remnants of notopodia on about first six abdominal segments (Fig. 1, I), with uncinigerous pinnules on 22-25 segments (may have one or two achaetous posterior rings; Fig. 1, G), with neuropodial cirri on upper parts of pinnules (Fig. 1, I, K); abdominal uneini pectiniform, with five teeth in single row above rounded basal part (Fig. 1, M). Pygidium short, rounded, without papillae or cirri, may be somewhat lobulated (Fig. 1, G). Anus terminal. Posterior end, including pygidium and last few uncinigerous segments, may be turned inside. Nephridial papillae 3 pairs, posterior to notopodia on segments 4-6 (setigerous segments 2-4; Bice at is Color: in life, greenish with whitish spots; in alcohol, colorless or shghtly brownish. Tube several times the length of the animal, rather straggly, composed of debris and few lght- colored sand grains or may be composed mostly of light-colored sand grains and a small amount of debris. MALACOLOGY .—Review of the living U.S. National Museum. A few months before the publication of my paper on Hchinochama (1952), I received 10 specimens of the genus from Dr. H. 8. Lopes, of the Instituto Oswaldo Cruz, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, and Dr. C. N. Gofferjé, of the Museu Paranaense, Curitiba, Brazil. The material was collected on the coast of the State of Santa Catarina, Brazil. Besides the fact that these specimens extend the recorded range of the genus considerably, they are also distinctive enough morpho- logically to be considered a heretofore un- described species. This paper contains a de- scription of the new species and a review of the living species of the genus as well as its geographic distribution. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 11 Remarks.—Hypaniola grayi differs from H. kowalewskii (Grimm, 1877; see Annenkova, 1927, 1929; known from the Caspian Sea) as follows: The prostomium is shaped differently; there are four pairs of subequal branchiae (//. kowalewskii has three or four pairs of branchiae; when the fourth pair is present, it is rudimen- tary); the abdominal pinnules have cirri (with- out in the Caspian species); abdominal uncini with five teeth in a vertical row (in H. kowalew- sku, uncini with 15 or 16 teeth in three vertical rows). Locality.—James Pond (salt pond), Martha’s Vineyard, Mass., found by digging in sandy mud under water, collected by M. B. Gray, August 8, 1950, August 25, 1951, and August 21, 1952. It was found along with other poly- chaetes, Haploscoloplos fragilis (Verrill), Heteromastus filiformis (Claparéde), and Poly- dora lignt Webster. as REFERENCES ANNENKOovVA, N. Uber die pontokaspischen Poly- chaeten. I. Die Gattungen Hypania Ostrowmov und Hypaniola, n. gen. Ann. Mus. Zool. Acad. Sci. URSS. 28: 48-62, 1 pl. 1927. —_——. Uber die pontokaspischen Polychaeien. if. Die Gattungen Hypaniola, Parhypania, ¥a bricia und Manayunkia. Ann. Mus. Zool. Acad. Sci. URSS. 30: 13-20, 2 pls. 1929. species of Echinochama. Davip NIcou, Genus Echinochama Fischer, 1887 Type species—(Monotypy) Chama arcinella Linné, 1767. Recent, Caribbean Sea. Echinochama brasiliana Nicol, n. sp. Figs. 1-4 Description.—Shell thick, large; generally higher than long; ratio of convexity to height 0.80; number of spine rows from 18 to 29, averaging 24 for 10 specimens; spine rows closely spaced and most spines small and closely spaced; largest specimen 61.6 mm high, 54.3 mm long, convexity 52.6 mm; smallest specimen 40.5 mm high, 39.7 mm long, convexity 32.0 mm; average height 51 mm; average length 46 mm, average con- vexity 41 mm. NOVEMBER 1953 NICOL: REVIEW Comparisons.—Echinochama brasiliana is most closely related to H. arcinella arcinella but differs from the latter in the following ways: It is larger and has a thicker shell; it is more obese (ratio of convexity to height 0.80 in EF. brasiliana as compared with 0.75 in FE. arcinella arcinella); the spine rows are more numerous, and there are more and smaller spines on each row in E. brasiliana; the height and length are about equal in E. arcinella arcinella, whereas E. brasiliana is higher than long. EL. brasiliana differs from E. arcinella californica in the same ways. E. brast- liana differs from E. cornuta in having a larger OF LIVING SPECIES OF ECHINOCHAMA 387 number of rows of spines (average 24 as compared to average 10 in EF. cornuta); E. brasiliana also has more numerous small spines. Types.—The holotype is in the U. 8. National Museum, no. 605546; one lot containing two paratypes, no. 603965, and one lot containing one paratype, no. 605771, are also in the U. S§S. National Museum. Five paratypes have been sent to the Museu Paranaense, Rua Buenos Aires, 200-Curitiba, Paranda, Brazil, and one paratype has been sent to the Instituto Oswaldo Cruz, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. Fias. 1-4.—Echinochama brasiliana Nicol, n. sp. Holotype, U. 8. N. M. no. 605546; Recent, Ilha do Francés, Santa Catarina, Brazil; X 1;1, Exterior view, right valve; 2, exterior view, left valve; 3, poste- rior view, both valves; 4, anterior view showing lunule, both valves. 388 JOURNAL OF THE KEY TO THE RECENT SPECIES OF ECHINOCHAMA | Average number of spine rows 10... cornuta Average number of spine rows 20 or more. .2 Height and length equal, umbones low, spines general lwalargees ect et E. arcinella Higher than long, umbones high, many rows OLMAMIAL| Spies ost. eln ae E. brasiliana Geographic distribution.—The new species oc- curs at the extreme southern end of the range of Echinochama in the western Atlantic, and it has been found only off the Ilha do Francés, which is 1,200 meters north of Ilha de Santa Catarina, Santa Catarina, Brazil. According to Dr. Gofferjé (1950, p. 262, and also personal communication), E. arcinella arcinella is found on the coast of Paranda, Brazil. Additional collecting may extend the range of the genus still farther south. The accompanying map (Fig. 5) shows the distribu- tion of the living species of Echinochama, and a rae ~~ - REVILLA GIGEDO 18. (Mexico) oS Clarion I= " HONDURAS — , J) orecucigat Cres Lo.™- #ChppertonI (Fr) ‘Arch.de Colon) , %s. GALAPAGOS 16 “\\*o (Ecuador) ss Paits o Sala Gomez Easter Ie Fone hile) Fig. 5.—Map showing distribution of living species of Echinochama. Hexagons WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 11 more detailed account of the distribution of the genus is given in my paper (1952, pp. 811-813). ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I am greatly indebted to Dr. H.S. Lopes, of the Instituto Oswaldo Cruz, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, and to Dr. C. N. Gofferjé, of the Museu Para- naense, Curitiba, Brazil, for the gifts of specimens for study. William T. Allen, of the U.S. National Museum, made the photographs for the paper. REFERENCES GorrEeRJE, C. N. Contribuicgdéo a zoogeografia da malacofauna do litoral do Estado do Parand. Arq. Mus. Paranaense 8 (7): 221-282, pls. 31-35. 1950. Nicot, Davin. Revision of the pelecypod genus Echinochama. Journ. Pal. 26 (5): 803-817, pls. 118-119, 15 figs. 1952. WEST INDIES ; sors os ak: a USS & tAntigna (er) we oe oo |” Oy m2 §Dominicais-) ami que (Fr) t Lucia (6r) f | *Barbadosie) & f%PGrenada(e-) = ta - em "> SLA PAZ gos e*Mollendo ° 5 <\ Bs (O 2h) I Ni at eA: ye oSucre —. ? = eASUNCION i iF: : 5 7 Pa aa 770 apo ee a ~ 2 Echinochama cornuta (Conrad). downward pointing triangles—Echinochama arcinella arcinella (Linné). Upward pointing triangles—Echinochama arcinella californica Dall. Squares—Echinochama brasiliana Nicol. a Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences PIRI a Ss 5g wes wie ode «<0 Uns os F. M. Serzurr, U.S. National Museum Soe EE F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards on Ly 2 oe ee JASON R. SWALLEN, U.S. National Museum SeGSUrer....-.... Howarp S. Rappuere, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired) PUREE re Se ee ec os Joun A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haraup A. REupDER, U.S. National Museum Vice-Presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Pamasepaical pociety of Washington......:..5.........20- 0 cece cee A. G. McNisH Anthropological Society of Washington..................... Wiuu1amM H. GILBERT Biological Society of Washington....... ee ete ee Core Hues Tuomas O’NEILL Chemical Society of Washington........... Soe he Aes esi) a GEORGE W. IRVING, JR. Bapemeleries! Society of Washington. ..............0..000 000. eee F. W. Poos Matsa! Georraphic Society.................00000eecccncee ALEXANDER WETMORE Geolevical Society of Washington.........................-2... A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................. FREDERICK O. CoE Samm s tictories! Society. ................00ceccceceecase GILBERT GROSVENOR Botames! pociety of Washington..........................:. Harry A. BorTHwick Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... GrorGeE F. GRAVATT Washington Society ‘of CEN Seon sete ng aera ced Soe Tn Rael C. A. Brtts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers.. ARNOLD H. Scorr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers Ricwarp §8. DIuu Helminthological Society of Washington.......................... L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists.......... GLENN Sitocum Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fioyp W. HoucH Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers....... HERBERT GROVE DORSEY District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Section, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine N.R. Evuis Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals............ Joun G, THOMPSON Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research Epwarp G. Hamp Elected Members of the Board of Managers: ME IOMIN OGL. oon oe cee eee eee eee ees Sara E. BRannamM, Mitton Harris EE ES LES A ee R. G. Bates, W. W. DIEHL EMEP os os ke ee eee ce eas M. A. Mason, R. J. SEEGER pum MIEAGCTS. 22... 2. ee ee ee All the above officers plus the Senior Editor faery, Pstors and Associate Editors................0.00.000.0000 ees [See front cover] Wiemeurve Commitice...............:... F. M. Serzuer (chairman), F. M. DEFANDoRF, J. R. Swatuten, H. S. Rappteye, W. W. Rusey Committee on Membership...... K. H. Waker (chairman), Myron S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE Cottam, C. L. Crist, JoHN Fasper, ANcus M. Grirrin, D. BREESE JONES, FRANK C. Kracex, Louis R. Maxwetu, A. G. McNisu, Epwarp C. REINHARD, REESE I. Sater, Leo A. SHINN, Francis A. SmitH, Heinz Specut, Horace M. Trent, ALFRED WEISSLER Commitiee on Meetings................. Watson Davis (chairman), JoHN W. ALDRICH, AusTIN CuarRK, D. J. Davis Commitiee on Monographs (W. N. FENTON, chairman): NR MNGEEY Cr ys ol So. Ss a Vee eee awe’ S. F. Buaxs, F. C. Kracrex Co) LOE RSI Si ee SS ain ne one W.N. Fenton, ALAN STONE Oo DTS Doi 5 re G. ARTHUR CoopER, JAMES I. HOFFMAN Commitiee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (A. V. ASTIN, general chairman): For Biological Sciences...... HERBERT FRIEDMANN (chairman), Harry A. Bortu- Wick, SARA ): BRanHAM, IRA B. HANSEN, BENJAMIN SCHWARTZ, T. DALE STEWART For Engineering Sciences...... SAMUEL Levy (chairman), MicHaEL GOLDBERG, . H. Kennarp, E. B. Roperts, H. M. Trent, W. A. WiLpHAcK For Physical Sciences...... G. B. ScHUBAUER (chairman), R.S. Burtneton, F. C. Kracex, J. A. SANDERSON, R. J. Seeqer, J. S. WILLiaMs For Teaching of Science..M. A. Mason (chairman), F. E. Fox, Monroz H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research............... Karu F. HeRzFELD (chairman), HERBERT N. Eaton, L. EK. Yocum Committee on Policy and Planning: Peeriamtitey 1954 oe oe es ee ee ka. H. B. Couuins, W. W. Rusey (chairman) LoD, LID EDS SS a er ee cee oe LW. Parr, ©. B. SiseEer EAP STON 2 HY IRSA a a Pe E. C. CriftrenDEN, A. WETMORE Commitiee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPHERsON, chairman): MPS OE acide da sw ae oe Memes we J. M. CALDWELL, W. L. Scumitt Peper ICMILe ta ey 8 oe haw PSs Sn os 7: all McPuHERSON, W.T. Reap SCMUPEBBLE VI OE, 00. 2s Sees Ae Wo Seca eit eS a AUSTIN CLARK, J. H. McMi.ien Representative on Council of A. PASO R re Sai em oc ho aN Watson Davis Committee of Auditors....... LoutsE M. Russe (chairman), R. 8. Dix, J. B. REEsIpE Committee of Tellers...... C. L. GaRNER (chairman), L. G. Henpest, Myrna F. JoNEs CONTENTS GroLocy.—The Geological Society of Washington. RoLanp W. BROWS 6 505, cn un alee ne BENE BAe tO PALEONTOLOGY.—A new pelecypod from Upper Triassic strata in Peru. Davin Nicon.and Winniam TT. AMLEN >... ......). 2.) Entomo.ocy.—Hollandipsylla neali, a new genus and new species of flea from North Borneo, with comments on eyeless fleas (Siphon- aptera). RoBeRT TRAUB...........0-..5.5.:5+¢: eer EnTomo.Locy.—A new species of Culex from the Marquesas Islands and the larva of Culex atriceps Edwards (Diptera: Culicidae). ALAN STONE. and Leon ROSEN)... Ya. 2 oS oe Entomo.tocy.—Laelaps oryzomydis, n. sp., with a key to some American species of Laelaps (Acarina: Laelaptidae). H. D. Pratr and Jorn DAN) ee OP as 2 StS es ne ZooLoGy.—Two new semiparasitic harpacticoid copepods from the coast of New Hampshire:. Artour G; HuMES........<.... 5 9eeeee ZooLtocy.—A burrowing barnacle of the genus Trypetesa (order Acro- theracitca): \JACcK T...TOMLINSON: «o>... J)... 2.2.2 ee Zootocy.—Polydora nuchalis, a new species of polychaetous annelid from California. Kerra Eh: Woopwick..........2 ... 2.) eee ZooLocy.—A new species of polychaete worm of the family Amphareti- dae from Massachusetts. Martian H. PETTIBONE.............. / Matuacotoey.—Review of the living species of Echinochama. Davin INICOG 6 Ss by SR ak Se Ok. tne 6 natn ee ee This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. 346 304 358 Vou. 43 DECEMBER 1953 No. 12 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS J. P. E. Morrison JoHn C. EwrErs R. K. Coox U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. Cuace, Jr. EvBEertT L. Littus, JR. ZOOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrMan Puitie DRUCKER CHEMISTRY ANTHROPOLOGY Dean B. Cow1E Davip H. DUNKLE PHYSICS GEOLOGY ALAN STONE ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royat & GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925 Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JourRNAtL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper, Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprinis.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices areas Copies 4 pp. p. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $650 $ 9.75 $13 .00 $16.25 $3.50 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 7.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 10.50 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 14.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PrRocEEpDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. ReEHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U.S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year.................+--+s:eeeeeee $7 .50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 . 88 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JourRNnaL (vol. 1 to vol. 43, inel.) available for sale to libraries at $363.50. MonoarapPu No. 1, ‘“The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’? by Herbert Friedmann. $4.50 INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PRocwEDINGS. ........:...... 2.5522 0n ee $7.50 PRocEEDINGS, vols. 1-138 (1899-1911) complete. .....)... 2... ....2.02. eee $25.00 Single volumes, unbound... 04s. cna) eh way ad ee eee lee 2.00 Single numbers. <24..00000 V2 Ss eg Vn ed ok way ete ee oe ee .25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and ei to the Treasurer, H.S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12, D Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. Changes of Address Members are requested to report changes of address promptly to the Secretary. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 43 December 1953 INOn 2 ARCHEOLOGY Site patterns in the eastern part of Olmec territory. PHiwip DRUCKER and EDUARDO CONTRERAS. During the spring of 1953, from February to the middle of May, the writers carried out an archeological reconnaissance of the eastern and southern borders of Olmec territory, in the states of Tabasco and Vera- cruz, Mexico. The study was made possible by a grant from the Wenner-Gren Founda- tion for Anthropological Research, through which field expenses were provided, and through the cooperation of the Bureau of American Ethnology, Smithsonian Institu- tion, which made the senior author available for the work and provided various items of equipment. In addition, the courteous co- operation of the Instituto Nacional de Antropologia e Historia, of Mexico, whose officers granted the necessary work permit and gave letters of introduction to civil and military authorities in the region in- vestigated, is gratefully acknowledged. The purpose of the work was to attempt to define the extension, on the east and south, of the territory occupied by the arche- ological culture known as “Olmec.’’ It was essentially a continuation of the archeologi- cal program begun a number of years ago by Stirling, in much of which the senior author participated.! In the course of that work, during which several major sites were thoroughly tested, a previously unknown Mesoamerican culture was identified, its internal history and relative chronological placing was determined through analysis 1 Stiruine, M.W. Stone monuments of southern Mexico. Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. 138. 1943; Stone monuments of the Rio Chiquito, Veracruz, Mexico. Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. 157, Anthrop. Pap. 43 (in press). Drucker, Puiuip, Ceramic sequences at Tres Zapotes, Veracruz, Mexico. Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. 140, 1948; La Venta, Tabasco: A study of Olmec ceramics and art. Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. bos. 1952. of its ceramic sequences, and its highly dis- tinctive art style was defined. Nonetheless, the actual geographical extent of the culture had not been determined, except that in its developed phases, at least, it appears not to have extended north of the Papaloapan.? The question of territorial extent of the culture during its several periods was brought into relief by recent recognition of obvious Olmec stylistic influence in carved monuments in other parts of Mesoamerica, notably at San Isidro Piedra Parada, Guate- mala, and in the Mexican highland, in Morelos and the ceramic and figurine pat- terns of Tlatilco.* If the Olmec patterns, as identified at sites tested in the southern Veracruz-western Tabasco region, could be shown to have extended back from the coast into the adjoining highlands, the dis- tant apparent manifestations of the culture could be more easily accounted for. The problem thus bears on the larger one of the inter-relations of the several Mesoamerican culture centers or focz, and the means by which they influenced each other at various periods of their development to bring into being the overall high civilization of the area. In short, the survey here reported on was undertaken in an attempt to contribute to the understanding of basic areal problems. The survey was designed to cover as much territory as possible in the course of the field season. On the basis of past knowledge 2 DruckER, Puitie. Ceramic stratigraphy at ‘Cerro de las Mesas, Veracruz, Mexico. Bur. Amer. EKthnol. Bull. 141. 1943. 3THompson, J. E. 8S. Some sculptures from southeastern Quetzaltenango, Guatemala. Carnegie Institution, Notes on Mid-American Archaeol. and Hthnol. 1: (17), 1948; Porter, Murrie. N., Tlatileo and the pre-Classic cultures of the New veoniee Viking Fund Publ. in Anthropology No. 19. 389 Aahas A» AAG » 390 of the region and its routes of communica- tion, it was decided that the most eff.cient means of transport would be use of saddle and pack animals, utilizing watercraft occa- sionally. Sites found would be test-pitted sufficiently to obtain small ceramic samples, on the basis of which they might be classi- fied as to cultural affiliation, and, where there were features such as complexes of mounds that seemed to have significance, they were to be sketch-mapped. The loca- tions of sites found were to be pinpointed by celestial observations, since available maps of the region show lttle topographic detail and are often inaccurate. The field party consisted of Drucker and Contreras, with two Tabascan arrieros and laborers, plus various local guides and laborers. In the course of just over 100 days in the field, the party traveled an estimated 1200 kilometers of trail and river, located 80 archeological sites, and collected ap- proximately half a ton of ceramic samples. The pottery collections were crated and shipped in small increments as frequently as the occasion offered, to the Museo Na- cional de Mexico, to relieve the burden on the pack animals. Special thanks are due the director of the museum, Dr. Eusebio Davalos H., for his kindness in receiving these small-lot shipments and having them stored pending our return to Mexico. Con- treras took charge of the mapping part of the project, as well as a good share of the test-pitting; his sketches will be presented in the final report on the work. The least successful part of the project was that re- ferring to determining site locations by celestial observations. Probably because of the mode of transport, the two watch- chronometers carried refused to settle down to uniform rates during the trip, thus adding a variable error factor to the observations. The procedure followed was to establish temporary quarters, usually at some ranch or in some village, where pasturage could be obtained for the livestock and the party’s gear left in someone’s custody, and then visit the sites in the vicinity in the course of the next couple of days. Often, to save time, we split our small force, Drucker ex- amining some sites and Contreras the others. One of the chief reasons for making our JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 bases at modern villages and ranches was the constant need for local information. It is probable that archeologists who have not worked in this type of terrain do not appre- ciate how dependent one must be on local euides, to find sites. A great part of the area surveyed is covered with heavy vegetation, either virgin jungle or second growth bush. One could easily ride within a few meters of a second La Venta, or a second Uaxactun, for that matter, and never know it was there. We did find a few sites that were situated in cleared pasture lands, or that lay squarely across the trail, but we were taken to most of the archeological zones by local people. We found this information to be for the most part accurate and freely given. Only in a few instances did people, apparently suspicious of our motives, refuse to tell us of sites or to show them to us. The track of the party is shown on the accompanying map. We set out from Hui- manguillo, Tabasco, heading westward out of the Grijalva basin, then proceeding downstream along the Rio Zanapa, with the general plan of circling to the northward of the Laguna Rosario. At one point we doubled back to visit some localities on tributaries of the Zanapa, then crossed into the watershed of the Rio San Felipe, which we followed to the Laguna del Carmen, on the Gulf coast. Retracing our course, we returned to the Zanapa, then turned south- ward, west of the Laguna Rosario, to the town of San Francisco Rueda, on the rail- road. From this point we crossed overland to the Rio Pedregal, and proceeded upstream into the mountains. On our return from this jaunt, we crossed overland to San José del Carmen, on the Rio Tancochapan (which farther downstream becomes the Rio Tonala), then traveled up the Rio de las Playas to the foothill country. We also made a couple of short trips by launch down- stream from San José. Next, we crossed overland to the Rio Uzpanapa, followed that river up to the edge of the foothills, then back down to the village of Chichiga- pan. Leaving the Uzpanapa, we crossed overland to the Coatzacoaleos drainage. We traveled upstream to the tributary Rio Jaltepee and the railroad town of Jestis Carranza, then back downstream, terminat- ing the trip at Minatitlan. o91 PATTERNS - 4 TERN OLMEC SITI Ss DECEMBER 1953. DRUCKER AND CONTRERAS: EA T 914 iwuuwo Snsar WE Ny TLILOSTVGINf Erp NBNYV9 i} 130 3sor NVS NVONAVOV © NVILILVNIW O IWLIHINVN QAJNN O18 341133 NVS -J @ 307NG vnov : 4 4 ; pl ee ee OE snd, (Pall PIVNOL DWwWwILyYD 30 ASAYAMS SS61 JO HOVYL ONIMOHS AYOLIYYSL DSW10 4O NOILYOd NY3Z1SV3 o92 While this coverage seems fairly exten- sive—and in the course of the trip 1t seemed a long, long road at times—it must be recog- nized that the coverage is by no means complete. For one thing, we did not cover the coastal area and the lower reaches of the rivers between the Laguna del Carmen and the Coatzacoalcos. Much of this region is, and was, uninhabitable swamp, but there are undoubtedly elevated areas on which archeological sites occur. Nor did we in- vestigate the low but rugged hilly region between Las Choapas and Nanchital, al- though we had some reports of sites there. These two stretches were left out of the itinerary as we came to realize that the allotted time would not permit us to tra- verse them and the area to the south as well. Consequently, since our problem related to searching for the boundaries of the Olmec area, and not just finding sites in what was probably the heartland of the culture pat- tern, we deliberately bypassed these sec- tions to concentrate on what seemed to be the border region. Another sector that was slighted is that lying between the middle courses of the Uzpanapa and the Coatza- coalcos. There are probably a good many sites in the section, but because of the sparse population and few trails, it is diff- cult of access. It seemed advisable, owing to the lateness of the season, to by-pass this region and to concentrate, instead, on the middle course of the Coatzacoalcos. In effect, we by no means pretend to have located all the sites in the region covered. We do believe, however, that we secured a good sampling of sites, especially in the zones critical to our problem. The region west and northwest of the Coatzacoalcos, including the San Juan and Tesechoacan drainages, according to the original plan was left for another season. A brief sketch of the regional geography must be given, since there are so few data published on it. Most of the coastline in this part of Mexico consists of sandy beaches behind which les a belt of high dunes, al- though this dune belt may be quite narrow, as for example at the Laguna del Carmen. Neither beaches nor dune belt offer much inducement to human habitation, the former because of the pounding they get by heavy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 12 seas during the ‘‘nortes” or northerly storms, the latter because of soil poverty and scarcity of water (although in recent years there has been considerable increase in settlement in the dunes, connected with coconut plantations). South of the dune belt lhe the swamps, bordered by dense erowths of mangrove along the water- courses. Here and there elevated areas occur, islandlike, amid the swamps, and such places are commonly occupied today, and were also used for human habitation in the past. Intermediate between the swamps and dry- land areas are the locally termed “ac- aguales.’’ These are tracts that flood during the wet season, and dry out, or partly dry out, during the dry half of the year. The natural vegetation is a dense tangle of scrub and vines, a prominent member of which is a small palm armed with quantities of vicious spines, mixed with large trees. These acaguales, when cleared, become the “‘po- treros”’ or dry season pastures (in this part of Mexico, at least, the term potrero in- variably refers to pastures that flood part of the wet season), but probably had little utility except as hunting areas prior to the introduction of animal husbandry in the area. As one proceeds inland, and to the westward as well, elevated hilly lands be- come both more frequent and larger. La Venta, of course, 1s situated on such a struc- ture; there is a larger and quite broken area farther down the Tonala where the oil town of Agua Dulce is, and the entire stretch transected by the road from Las Choapas to Nanchital consists of low but quite rough hills. In other places the swamps extend in- land much farther. From the railroad be- tween Rueda and San José del Carmen one can see an immense stretch of swamp to the northward, interrupted only by the man- grove galleries along the Zanapa and the Blasillo rivers. Beginning a short distance west of Huimanguillo, between the Zanapa and the Pedregal, is a strip of arid plains, locally termed ‘‘sabanas.’’ These are char- acterized by a thin layer of dark gray sur-. face soil, apparently containing a large pro- portion of very fine sand, overlying clays with great amounts of gravel and sand mixed into them. Apparently this soil profile is so porous that the soils have extremely poor DEcEMBER 1953. DRUCKER AND CONTRERAS water-holding capacity, and are totally un- suitable for agriculture, either modern or ancient. The terrain is gently rolling, with numerous streamlets bordered by narrow gallery-forests. These savannahs are now used for grazing for the weeks or months that the potreros are flooded but they will not even support good pasture grasses; cattle lose considerable flesh during the few weeks they are kept there. This discussion of soils and agricultural qualities of the savannahs is stressed, be- cause we believe that this strip formed a barrier to Olmec expansion southward in this part of the region. We could find no trace of archeologic remains in the plains, with the exception of two small sites (one visited, and one only reported) on the north- ern shores of the Laguna Rosario. South of the savannahs are a series of hills and ridges, and then a low-lying belt of acaguales (and now mostly potreros) that extends to the rather abrupt edge of the foothills. South of San José del Carmen, between the Rio de las Playas and the Rio Uzpanapa, there is a strip of savannah that merges into hilly country as one proceeds inland. This is a somewhat peculiar section for it is for the most part very poorly watered, and consequently, seems to have been sparsely inhabited in the past, and has only few in- habitants today. It may be that the two rivers and their tributaries, ike the Arroyo Mancuernillas which is said to head far back in the mountains, cut off the drainage from the mountains. The area between the Uzpanapa and the Coatzacoalcos, at least as much as we saw of it, is quite rugged, but has more year-around brooks and streams. Along the major stream courses, above the edge of the swamp lands, there are exten- sive stretches of potreros, interrupted at intervals by ridge systems that parallel the course of the river. Many of these suggest remnants of older eroded structures; many have, in places, but shallow soil with fre- quent outcrops of sandstones and limestone. Others consist of coarse gravels, and perhaps are old gravel-bars. Modern settlements are almost invariably situated on and along such ridges where they occur close to the river bank, the rivers providing the chief >: HASTERN OLMEC SITE PATTERNS 393 communication routes of the region. It is only the newer villages established along rail lines and the new highways that are to be found any distance from the rivers. In the course of the survey, 80 sites were located, and of these, 71 were tested. Ce- ramic samples were not collected at all the 71 sites tested, however, for at some of them no sherds could be found. At others, sherds were quite scarce; at still other sites they were abundant. This varying frequency of sherds raises a number of questions as to occupation patterns and/or duration of occupation which will be discussed in subse- quent paragraphs. Wherever possible, the samples were taken from what appeared to be normal depositional areas, between and around the mounds. Testpits were dug in mounds only as a last resort, when occupa- tional zones could not be found. The point to avoiding mound samples where possible was of course that one can never be sure just how much of the ceramics included in the mound-fill was contemporaneous with the construction, and how much of it came originally from earlier occupational deposits scraped up to get aggregate for the mound. At the present writing, the pottery sam- ples are somewhere en route from Mexico to Washington. Until they have been ana- lyzed, nothing can be said as to cultural and temporal affiliations of the sites. However, there were certain variations in site patterns which were revealed by the survey that have interesting implications. These will be described and discussed briefly. Previous investigations of Olmec sites have made clear that the major centers are characterized by earth mounds, including both conical (originally pyramidal?) and long forms, some of which are scattered about apparently irregularly, but some, and usually the larger structures, are arranged according to some obviously preconceived plan. Frequently, sets of long and conical mounds form quadrangular enclosures, or ‘plazas.”’? At La Venta the arrangement is not quite so obvious, but nonetheless exists: the major features, mounds and stone monu- ments, are oriented along a single line, which is just a few degrees off true north. The sites Stirling has called ‘“‘Rio Chiquito,” and “San Lorenzo,’ near Tenochtitlan, 394 Veracruz, have several large quadrangular “plazas”? and so do several subsidiary sites in the vicinity of Tres Zapotes. Presumably, such arrangements had some ceremonial significance or function. Other sites occur in which earth mounds of various sizes were built in no obvious relationship to each other, that is, they appear to be arranged without any plan. Whether this interpretation as to lack of planning is correct, or whether the structures were spaced according to some abstruse scheme, these sites certainly present an appearance quite different from those of the preceding class. Mention should be made of the small mounds usually found in the vicinity of the larger structures. These are usually roughly elliptical in plan (perhaps they were more or less quadrangular originally), 10 to 14 m long by 5 to 8 m wide, and from 0.3 m to about 1 m high. Such structures have not been observed to occur in obviously planned arrangements, but are scattered about ir- regularly, often to one side of, or surround- ing, the larger structures. While we cannot offer definite proof, we are of the opinion that these small structures were platforms for dwellings. Many of them are built on today, because of the excellent drainage they provide. We found no sizeable aggregation of these small mounds that did not have one or more larger (ceremonial) mounds associated with it, although the opposite occurs in a few instances: several sites con- sist of a single conical mound of moderate size with no ‘Shouse mounds” anywhere about. | Borrow pits are frequently associated with mound groups, particularly in certain parts of our region. These are irregular in shape, and probably were originally rather deep since they have not been filled in by accumulation of vegetal matter and aggra- dation during the rains. A third type of site, distinct from the preceding ones, is that which we character- ized as a defensive position. This interpreta- tion has not been proved, but is strongly suggested by the nature of these sites: they are usually small, and situated on the very top of some steep little knoll or ridge. The structures consist principally of low long JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 mounds, from just under a meter to about two meters in height, arranged in a rec- tangle that encloses the flattish top of the hill or ridge. In at least one instance, several flanking mounds had been built on what appeared to have been small prepared ter- races some few meters down the slopes. Another distinctive feature of these sites is that the few that we examined were situated at some distance from a river or navigable arroyo. In fact, In no case was there even a non-drying brook, that could have provided water for domestic purposes throughout the dry season, very near at hand. It is conceivable that these may have been seasonally occupied (during the rainy season, of course). Once again we can bring no direct proof, but it seems reasonable enough that a group or groups pushing into a frontier region might begin by establish- ing seasonally used outposts away from routes of water-communication, in easily defensible positions. A fourth variety of site encountered was the occupation area, as marked by more or less extensive distributions of sherds on and in the top layers of the soil, with no mounds or other structures. Such deposits occurred consistently in hilly areas, along the slopes and less commonly on top of ridges. Only one example was found of the fifth type of site, but at least one other is known to occur in the region. This is a non-Olmee pattern, with rectangular house platforms of dry masonry, complexes of earth mounds faced with stone, usually river cobbles, and features that appear to have been _ ball- courts. In our opinion, these traits indicate afhliation to the cultures of the Chiapas highland, and represent intrusions toward the coastal lowland. The site on the Rio de las Playas that Stirling named ‘‘La Ceiba”’ is of this type, according to information and notes that he made available to us, and so 1s Pueblo Viejo del Pedregal, which we examined. There are strong suggestions of regional patterning in the distributions of these types. Almost all the sites located along the Rio Zanapa, and along the traverse made to the Laguna del Carmen, in other words, along the eastern border of our region, were of one or the other of the first two types DECEMBER 1953. DRUCKER AND CONTRERAS described, that is, of earth mounds including obviously planned complexes, or of mounds in no observable relationship. Sites of these two types were found elsewhere, but along with other types. A distinctive feature noted in some of the sites with planned complexes, both on the Zanapa and elsewhere in the region, not heretofore observed, is that the long mounds forming a quadrangle are some- times joined, so that the effect is that of a continuous mound forming two or three sides of the enclosure. Sites with no mounds whatsoever were most common along the Uzpanapa. In four instances a few house mounds were asso- ciated with such localities, but the majority of the Uzpanapa sites had no structures of any kind. A few moundless occupational areas were found in the Coatzocoalcos drainage, but were outnumbered there by sites with earth mounds. The few sites classed as ‘“‘defensive’’ were limited to the foothill country of the Pe- dregal, the Playas, and one locality between the last-named river and the Uzpanapa. If they really were frontier outposts, their locations fit well with known distribution of highland Chiapanecan centers up the Pe- dregal and the Playas. Little more can be added to what has already been said about the supposedly high- land sites, except to point out that both those presently known (there may be more, for example, up the Uzpanapa and its tribu- taries), are major centers in every sense: they are quite extensive, and include nu- merous complexes of structures. Such diversity of pattern suggests at first glance cultural or temporal differences, or both. However, field inspection of the ce- ramic samples gave the impression that the majority of the mound sites, with and with- out obviously planned complexes, and many of the moundless localities, will probably turn out to belong to the Middle Tres Za- potes (or La Venta) horizon. (There appear to be one or more new, hitherto undefined, ceramic complexes at certain of the sites found, also.) If this field impression proves to be correct, it hints that the Olmec must have had, at that time, an extremely com- plicated ceremonial system, with hierarchies of ceremonial centers serving and being : EASTERN OLMEC SITE PATTERNS 390 supported by subsidiary communities. At least, it seems reasonable to assume that there was some correlation between size and numbers of ceremonial mounds and the importance of the site. The sites that lacked ceramic remains present another problem. We encountered most of these localities along the Zanapa. No sherds could be found despite intensive search for them in adjacent land, where occupational debris might have been ex- pected, nor in either the ceremonial nor the house mounds. Absence of sherds in the mounds may have been due in part to heavy reliance on borrow pits as sources of aggre- gate; borrow pits are fairly common in this part of the region. However, we believe it highly possible that the builders of these structures may have been the first pottery- making occupants of the region. It 1s essen- tial to add that we do not believe that these sites are particularly early; they probably belong to the same La Venta time horizon as neighboring sites from which we collected ceramics. The lack of occupational debris suggests a short period of habitation. Per- haps the people moved to the neighboring localities which for some reason proved to be more suitable for occupancy. To extend our hypothesis a bit further, the foregoing may mean that this Zanapa drainage was a no-man’s land into which the Olmec ex- panded at one phase of their history. How long they utilized it cannot be determined until the collections have been studied. The fact that all the ceremonial sites (to differentiate them from the clusters of house mounds) are small, and the ceremonial mounds themselves tend to be small, seems to indicate that the maximum occupation may have been relatively short. To summarize, it appears that Olmec culture, through most of its history, was confined to a somewhat smaller region than had been anticipated. Apparently it ex- panded as far eastward as the middle course of the Rio Zanapa only for a brief period. The savannahs inhibited expansion inland, up the Zanapa and up the Pedregal, and as far westward as the Rio de las Playas. Our present impression, still to be confirmed or disproved by study of the sherd samples, is that at the time of its maximum extent the 396 culture pushed only relatively short dis- tances up the Playas, the Uzpanapa, and the Coatzacoalcos. Whatever the impor- tance of its influences on other Mesoameri- ean patterns, the Olmec civilization seems JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 to have been restricted to a relatively narrow strip of coast from about the Laguna del Carmen across the swampy lowlands and the rugged Tuxtla mountains to the mouth of the Papaloapan. BIOCHEMISTRY —Investigations concerning the hatching factor of the golden nematode of potatoes, Heterodera rostochiensis Wollenweber.! Lours M. Massey, Jr.,2 and A. Lesytiz Neau, Department of Biochemistry and Nutrition, Cornell University. (Communicated by G. Steiner.) The golden nematode of potatoes or po- tato eelworm (Heterodera rostochiensis Wol- lenweber) is a_ plant-parasitic nematode which is responsible for the condition of soil known as ‘‘potato sickness.’’ The nematode attacks the roots of the plant causing stunt- ing and a reduction of yield which may be as great as 70 percent. It ranks among the most difficult pests to control. As yet, there is no known method of eradicating this organism once it has become established in a soil. The life history of the golden nematode is described in Filipjev and Schuurmans Stekhoven, 1941. In brief, subsequent to the organism’s invasion of and growth within the roots, the female body is transformed into a small round cyst which may contain from about 10 to 400 eggs. The cysts remain in the soil in a dormant state until exposed to an unidentified substance excreted by the potato root, which serves to stimulate hatching. The first investigator to study the nature of the stimulant was Triffitt (1930) who found it to be non-volatile and moderately heat resistant. Hurst, as reported by Calam, Raistrick and Todd (1949), prepared a con- centrate of the factor from potato soil leach- ings by evaporation and ethanol extraction procedures and with it was able to induce 1 Supported in part by grants from the New York State Agriculture and Market Golden Nema- tode Control Funds (Department of Plant Pathology, Cornell University). A preliminary report was presented at the meeting of the Ameri- can Society of Biological Chemists at Cleveland, April 1951 (Federation Proc. 10: 222. 1951). The authors wish to express their appreciation to W. F. Mai and B. F. Lownsbery, Jr., for the cyst material and for their many helpful suggestions. 2 Present address: Chemical Corps Biological Laboratories, Camp Detrick, Frederick, Md. nematode hatching at a_ dilution § of 1/500,000. Hurst concluded that the factor was an amino acid. Todd and coworkers in a series of publications (Calam, Raistrick, and Todd, 1949; Calam, Todd & Waring, 1949; Marrian, Russell, Todd, and Waring, 1949; Russell, Todd, and Waring, 1949a, 1949b; Marrian, Russell, and Todd, 1949) report attempts to isolate the active ma- terial and to synthesize active compounds. These workers concluded that the factor ‘Ys an acid probably containing a lactone group” and ascribed the name eclepic acid to this substance. The ‘high acidity and probable lactonic nature” led them to de- termine the activity of a number of tetronic acids and related compounds. Among those tested, anhydrotetronic acid was found to possess slight activity. Investigations dealing with the hatching factor have been undertaken in this labora- tory for the purpose of concentrating and identifying the active substance. EXPERIMENTAL Collection of leachings—Tomatoes have been shown to excrete a golden nematode hatching factor which appears to be similar to that ex- creted by the potato plant (Russell, Todd, and Waring, 1949a). Since it was more convenient to use the former plant our studies have dealt with concentrating the factor from tomato leach- ings. The collection of relatively small volumes of leaching was accomplished by placing quart size “‘Sealright”’ cardboard containers under four- inch pots in which tomato plants were growing and allowing the leachings to drip directly into the containers. The contents of each container were frozen as soon as possible after collection. Frozen leachings have been found to retain their activity after storage periods of at least one year. DECEMBER 1953 MASSEY AND NEAL: GOLDEN NEMATODE HATCHING FACTOR Assay method.—A comparison of the number of larvae hatched when cysts are immersed in solutions containing varying concentrations of the factor has served as a basis for estimating the relative concentration of the active substance (Fenwick, 1949, 195la, 1951b, 1952; Lownsbery, 1951). The method used in this study is a slight modification of that developed by Lownsbery (1951) for testing the viability of larvae con- tained in nematode cysts. A crude preparation of cyst material was ob- tained from heavily infested soil by flotation methods. The product was then air dried at room temperature and stored in a 50 percent relative humidity atmosphere. This crude preparation contained in addition to chaff, seeds, etc., ap- proximately 7,000 cysts per g. Aqueous extracts of this crude cyst. material possessed slight hatching activity which ap- peared to be associated with the chaff constitu- ent. Therefore, the chaff was removed by rolling the crude cyst material down a glass tube of 3 cm inside diameter and approximately 1 m in length. The tube which was fitted with a glass baffle about 10 em from one end was inclined approxi- mately 10° from horizontal, baffle end upper- most. Approximately | g of the crude cyst mate- rial was introduced into the upper end of the tube and the cysts and other spherical objects rolled out of the chaff by slowly rotating the tube around its longitudinal axis. The resulting mate- rial contained approximately 15,000 cysts per g and was found to be free from chaff. Twenty mg of the chaff-free cyst material con- taining approximately 250 cysts were placed in a petri dish, and 20 ml of the solution to be assayed were then added. After an incubation period of 14 days at 21°C., the number of cysts present and the larvae which hatched were counted with the aid of a low power microscope. Since the number of cysts per dish is variable and a few larvae hatch from cysts placed in water, a distilled water blank as well as a solution of the initial leachings were incorporated in each assay for comparison purposes. A single source of cysts was used for an individual assay. The results are expressed as the number of larvae hatched per 100 cysts. Concentration of the hatching factor —Leachings were lyophilized at approximately 70 microns pressure and the residue extracted five times with 400 ml portions of absolute ethanol each time. The combined ethanolic extracts were then con- centrated to 25 ml under 25 mm pressure. A 397 white crystalline precipitate which formed during the concentration was removed by filtration and found to possess no activity. Upon the addition of 5 volumes of peroxide-free diethyl ether to the ethanolic filtrate additional inactive impurities were precipitated. After removal of the precipi- tate, evaporation of the ethanol-ether solution to dryness under 25 mm pressure left a residue which was not completely soluble in water. Ex- traction of this residue with 10 ml of distilled water and subsequent lyophilization of the aque- ous solution yielded a yellow amorphous sub- stance which is referred to as “‘concentrate-A.”’ Paper chromatography.—A study of the dis- tribution of the hatching factor on paper chro- matograms was made. Five ul of a solution (192 ug of solids per ul) of concentrate-A was applied to each of several strips of Whatman No. 1 paper (114 x 25 inches). The strips were developed at 25°C. immediately after the spots had dried. Both ascending and descending developments were tried using 80 percent aqueous phenol, 50 percent phenol in 10 percent aqueous ethanol, and n-butanol saturated with water. After de- velopment, the strips were dried at room tem- perature in forced air for a 24-hour period. Be- ginning at one-quarter inch below the point of application for ascending developments, or one- quarter inch above the point of application for descending developments, the strips were cut into 1 inch segments and numbered consecu- tively. Each segment was eluted with 40 ml of distilled water which was subsequently divided into two equal portions for duplicate assays. For comparison purposes, a “crude concen- trate” of the hatching factor was prepared ac- cording to the method of Calam, Raistrick, and Todd (1949). Two ul of a solution of this product containing 180 ug of solids was subjected to paper chromatography using 80 percent aqueous phenol as the solvent. The distribution of ac- tivity on paper chromatograms of a mixture of the concentrates obtained by the two above pro- cedures was also determined. Leaf and root tissue preparations —One hun- dred leaf punches (1 em diam.) taken at random from ten six-week old tomato plants were floated upon 250 ml of distilled water in suitable con- tainers and illuminated for periods of one and two days. At the end of each of these periods 20 ml aliquots of the water from each dish were assayed for activity. One gram samples (fresh weight) of leaf and 398 JOURNAL OF THE root tissues were homogenized in a Potter-Elve- hjem homogenizer under the following conditions. 1. Homogenized in distilled water at room tem- perature. 2. Homogenized in temperature. 3. Homogenized in absolute ethanol at 0°C. 4. Steam blanched for 2 min. subsequent to homogenization in absolute ethanol at room temperature. 5. Lyophilized subsequent to homogenization in absolute ethanol at room temperature. absolute ethanol at room After homogenization the samples were centri- fuged and the supernatant solution decanted. Each sediment was thoroughly extracted with absolute ethanol, centrifuged again and the su- pernatant added to the first extract respectively. These solutions were then evaporated to dry- ness under 15 mm. pressure and the residue taken up in 25 ml of distilled water for assaying. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION The cysts used for any individual assay were from a composite sample obtained from a single source in order to eliminate the difference in the viability of larvae in cysts collected at different times. Generally, during the hatching season duplicate assays did not vary from the mean by more than 10 percent. All preparations of concentrates obtained pos- sessed activity equivalent to or greater than that of the original leachings when diluted the appro- priate amount with distilled water. For example, using duplicate assays the following average number of larvae hatching per 100 cysts were ob- tained: Distilled water, 200; original leaching, 600; concentrate-A (concentrated 4 x 104 times) diluted 4 x 104 times with distilled water, 805. Since a reliable quantitative assay for the factor was not available at the time these experiments were conducted the extent to which the prepara- tions could be diluted and still exhibit hatching activity was not determined. It has been observed that caution must be exercised during the process of concentrating solutions of the factor because of its lability to- wards heat and alkali. These properties are in ac- cordance with those reported for eclepic acid. The hatching factor was further concentrated by the technique of paper chromatography. Aqueous phenol, 80 percent, was found to be a satisfactory solvent for developing the chromato- WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 grams. Ascending developments with this solvent gave considerably sharper separations than did descending developments. Fig. 1 shows the dis- tribution of activity on a typical strip when con- centrate-A was developed for a distance of 1914 inches at 25°C. using the ascending technique with the above solvent. The highest activity was found in the seventeenth segment, corresponding to a Ry value of 0.84. The average Rp value of six determinations was 0.84 + 0.066. Weight determinations of the dried eluates from the various segments indicated that most of the solids remained in segments 2 to 5, inclusive. For example, after applying 950 yg to a strip, less than 10 ug of active residue was found to be eluted from the seventeenth segment. The activity on the dry chromatograms was found to be quite rapidly destroyed upon expo- sure to air at room temperature. Elution imme- diately following the 24-hour air-drying period resulted in very little if any loss of activity. How- 800 700 600 500 400 NUMBER of LARVAE per 100 CYSTS 300 OO” O!}2° 04 OG. OCS R- VALUES bye a el ee O 5 lO iS 20 Segment Number Fig. 1.—Distribution of activity on paper chromatogram of concentrate-A. A total of 950 ug of crude concentrate in 5.0 ul of water was applied to the paper. After development in 80 per cent phenol at 25° C. for a distance of 1914 inches, the paper strips were dried and cut into one inch seg- ments for elution and assaying. The values repre- sented by X and Y indicate the activity of the most active segment after exposure to the labo- ratory atmosphere for 2 and 4 days, respectively, following the air-drying period. DECEMBER 1953 MASSEY AND NEAL: GOLDEN NEMATODE HATCHING FACTOR ever, approximately 50 to 100 percent loss of ac- tivity from the most active segment occurred when the strips were permitted to remain exposed to the laboratory atmosphere for two and four days, respectively, after the drying period (see Mand Y, Fig: 1). The distribution of activity obtained when the crude concentrate prepared according to the method of Calam, Raistrick and Todd (1949), was chromatogrammed is shown in Fig. 2. The peak of highest activity corresponds to a Rp value of 0.83. When mixtures of this preparation and concentrate-A were chromatogrammed there was no change in the Rx value. Concentration of the factor by continuous ether extraction of an aqueous sulfuric acid solu- tion has been used by previous workers (Calam, Raistrick, and Todd, 1949). From the data pre- sented in Table 1 it is apparent that the ex- tracted material from concentrate-A possesses about the same activity as the non-extracted residue. However, the activity of more purified preparations obtained from paper chromato- grams does not appear to be extracted with ether either from an aqueous sulfuric acid solution or directly from the paper chromatogram. The data presented in Table 2 are from a typical experi- ment in which the most active segments from four paper chromatograms were used. In this experiment 0.98 mg of concentrate-A was applied to each strip. In each treatment where ether was employed it was evaporated off after the extrac- tion and the residue, if any, taken up in 40 ml of distilled water for duplicate assays. For con- tinuous ether extraction the segments were eluted with 7.5 ml water and the solution acidified with 1.5 ml of 2N H,SO,. After the extraction period the aqueous phase was neutralized with NaOH and diluted to 40 ml for assaying. The inhibitory effect of Na»SOx is shown by the lack of activity of solutions 2 and 3b (Table 2). This effect was not noted above due to the dilution employed. It is of interest to note the inactivity of the ether extracts (3a and 4a) and the high activity of the aqueous eluate (4b) from the strip which had previously been extracted with ether in a Soxlet apparatus for a period of 12 hours. The presence of a hatching agent in tomato leaf tissue is indicated by the fact that water upon which leaf punches were floated was found to possess hatching activity. About twice the number of larvae were hatched in the presence of the water upon which illuminated leaf punches ¢ 399 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 NUMBER of LARVAE per |OO CYSTS 200 0.6 VALUES OS} |) 00 O02 O04 Re fe) 5 10) 15 Segment Number Fig. 2.—Distribution of activity on paper chromatogram of the product prepared by the procedure of Calam, Raistrick and Todd (1949). A total of 27 ug of crude product in 2.1 yl of water was applied to the paper. After development in 80 percent aqueous phenol at 25°C. for a distance of 163g inches, the paper strips were dried and cut into one inch segments for elution and assay- ing. were floated for a period of one day as was hatched by an equivalent volume of leachings (see Table 3). At the end of two days illumina- tion there was about an eight fold difference in the number of larvae hatched. The occurrence of a hatching stimulant in to- mato leaves was further established by assaying extracts of the homogenized tissue. A comparison of the activity of leaf homogenates prepared under different conditions is presented in Table 4. The activity of root tissue homogenates prepared under the same conditions is also shown. AI- though the values for the number of larvae TaBLe 1—ActTivity oF ETHER ExTRACTED MaTE- RIAL FROM AQUEOUS SULFURIC ACID SOLUTION OF CONCENTRATE-A @oncsitea: thekeise in ‘ tg ° number of Fraction Weight ee larvae hatched eed above that of the blank grams ug/ml per ug/ml of solids Hither, phase............ 0.15 15 61 Aqueous phase......... 0.23* 3.5" 71 * Corrected for the Na2SO. formed by neutralizing the H2SO; previous to assaying. 400 hatched are quite low due to seasonal variations, there is a definite significant difference between several of the treatments and the distilled water blank. In the case of treatments 38, 4, and 5 (Ta- ble 4) the activity of the homogenates of both leaf and root tissue was equal to or greater than that of leachings. Steam blanching or lyophilizing TABLE 2.—E THER SOLUBILITY OF CONCENTRATES OBTAINED FROM PAPER CHROMATOGRAMS Larvae per Treatment of most active segment 100 cysts* 1. Eluted with 7.5 ml distilled water............... 273 2. Eluted with 7.5 ml distilled water, 1.5 ml of 2N H2SO,. added and solution immediately neutral- izedwath? Na Ol. ¢ s.yc4to see: Sees cee nee 12 3. Eluted and acidified as in 2, then continuously extracted with ether for a period of 12 hours: ae Hithenwpbase ae nance eee eee ran 26 b. Neutralized aqueous phase................... 10 4. Extracted in Soxlet apparatus for a period of 12 hours: asthenia tte eee OD ANE ns a alee Ae Mia 2 i b. Water eluate of segment after ether extraction. 244 Distiledswaternblanksyawa a) eascee ORe eet: 24 * Average of duplicate assays. TABLE 3.—ActTIvITY OF WATER UPON WHICH ILLUMINATED Tomato LEAF PUNCHES WERE FLOATED Assay solution ih ee IDistilledinatere teaser 5 Aare ern Aa ee 15 sRomatonles chine chee einer ie 16 Water upon which leaf punches were floated: il Gkayy WI WoOMTOAHOMs soococeeaceosoeseeneome 30 D Clays WhisanssNGOI...o2b0csccnccasseoccecn 130 * Average of duplicate assays. TaBLE 4.—Activity oF Tomato TIssuk HoOMOGENATES Larvae per 100 cystst Treatment* Leaf tissue | Root tissue JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 1. Homogenized in distilled water at LOOM" temlperakuUnesassaee eee ne 155 Bain 2. Homogenized in absolute ethanol at room temperature............. 5 8 . 3. Homogenized in absolute ethanol VERO RO tae supe rae hy (oP ee 11 35 4, Steam blanched, homogenized in absolute ethanol at room tem- DERACUTC aebenh ees tae ores Bera: 16 19.5 5. Lyophilized, homogenized in abso- lute ethanol at room temperature. 16.5 11 Tomato leachings; 11 larvae per 100 cysts.t Distilled water; 2 larvae per 100 cysts.t * One gram (fresh weight) of tissue used in each preparation. }+ Average of duplicate determinations. VOL. 43, NO. 12 the leaf tissue previous to homogenizing in abso- lute ethanol at room temperature appeared to be the most satisfactory treatment for this tissue. By far the most active root homogenates were obtained when the roots were homogenized in absolute ethanol at O°C. Homogenates of the tissues in distilled water at room temperature showed no activity in the case of leaf tissue and a slight, if significant, activity in the case of root tissue. SUMMARY A method for obtaining a concentrate of the golden nematode hatching factor has been de- scribed. By employing the technique of paper chro- matography the factor was found to have a Rp value of 0.84 when 80 percent aqueous phenol was used as the solvent. In a fairly pure state the factor was found to be ether insoluble. A hatching agent has been shown to be present in leaf tissue as well as in root tissue of the to- mato plant. LITERATURE CITED CALAM, C..T., Raistrick, H., andailoppyyaeeie The potato-eelworm hatching factor. 1. The preparation of concentrates of the hatching factor and a method of bioassay. Biochem. Journ. 45: 513-519. 1949. ——, Topp, A. R., and Wartive, W. Ss) Lhe potato-eelworm hatching factor. 2. Purification of the factor by alkaloid salt fractionation. Anhydrotetronic acid as an artificial hatching agent. Biochem. Journ. 45: 520-524. 1949. Fenwick, D. W. Investigations on the emergence of larvae from cysts of the potato-root eelworm Heterodera rostochiensis. 1. Technique and variability. Journ. Helminth. 23: 157-170. 1949. Investigations on the emergence of larvae from the cysts of the potato-root eelworm Hetero- dera rostochiensis. (4) Physical conditions and their influence on larval emergence in the laboratory. Journ. Helminth. 25 : 37-48. 195la. Investigations on the emergence of larvae from the cysts of the potato-root eelworm Hetero- dera rostochiensis. (8) A shortened method for the conduct of hatching tests. Journ. Hel- minth. 25: 49-56. 1951b. . The bioassay of potato root diffusate. Ann. Appl. Biol. 39: 457-467. 1952. FitipsEvV, I. N., and ScHUURMANS STEKHOVEN, J. H., Jr. A manual of agricultural helmin- thology: 495-642. Leiden, 1941. LownsBeEry, B. F. Larval emigration from cysts of the golden nematode of potatoes, Heterodera rostochiensis Wollenweber. Phytopath. 41: 889-896. 1951. DECEMBER 1953 MaArsran, D. H., Russeiu, P. B., Topp, A. R., and WARING, W.S. The potato eelworm hatch- ing factor. 3. Concentration of the factor by chromatography. Observations on the nature of eclepic acid. Biochem. Journ. 45: 524-528. 1949. Bewcsenn. » Band Topp, A. R. The po- tato eelworm hatching factor. 6. Attempts to pre- pare artificial hatching agents. Part II. Some active arylidene -AB:y-butenolides and related compounds. Biochem. Journ. 45: 533-537. 1949. RuSSELL, P. B., Topp, A. R., and WaRING, W. S. SMITH AND PITTENDRIGH: REALIGNMENTS IN TILLANDSIOIDEAE 401 The potato eelworm hatching factor. 4. Solanum nigrum as a source of the potato eelworm hatch- ing factor. Biochem. Journ. 45: 528:-530. 1949a. . The potato eelworm hatching factor. 5. Attempts to prepare artificial hatching agents. Part I. Some furan derivatives. Biochem. Journ. 45: 530-532. 1949b. Trirritr, M. J. On the bionomics of Heterodera schachtii on potatoes with special reference to influence of mustard on the escape of larvae from cysts. Journ. Helminth. 8: 19-48. 1930. BOTANY —Realignments in the Bromeliaceae subfamily Tillandsioideae. LYMAN B. SmitH, Department of Botany, U. 8S. National Museum, and Co Lin 8. PITTENDRIGH,! Department of Biology, Princeton University. It has long been evident that no author has been consistent or logical in delimiting the genera of the subfamily Tillandsioideae of the Bromeliaceae. Virtually all useful phylogenetic characters are limited to the petals, stamens, and pistil, yet available material is so frequently inadequate in these parts, that there is a tremendous temptation to base genera on other characters. The assumption has been that certain habital characters are correlated with floral ones. This is true in a single instance, the absence of spines on the leaves of the Tillandsioideae. All other correlations in the subfamily are in- complete to begin with as in the case of the distichous arrangement of flowers that par- tially characterizes Tillandsia and Vriesia, or else they have broken down with the discovery of additional species. We do not believe in making changes on well established systems such as the latest monograph of the family (Mez in Engler, Das Pflanzenreich IV. 32) unless something demonstrably better can be offered, but the three genera noted below, Thecophyllum André, Czpuropsis Ule, and Chirripoa Suesseng., are now useless even in an arti- ficial system. Although the generic position of many species must remain in doubt until good flowers are obtained, we are transfer- ring all species on the basis of such evidence as is available. We preface our treatment of Thecophyllum and Cipuropsis by a concept of Vriesia Lindley emended appropriately to include these entities in the sense used 1This author acknowledges assistance in the course of his work from the Eugene Higgins Memo- rial Fund, Princeton University. by Mez in his last monograph. Guzmania requires no emendation to accommodate Thecophyllum in the original sense of André. Vriesia Lindl. emend. Smith & Pittendrigh Inflorescentia simplex vel paniculata, ea pani- culata cum bracteis primariis vel parvis et in- conspicuis vel conspicuis et ramos plus minusve obtegentibus; sepalis liberis; petalis vel in tubum brevem sepalis valde superatum connatis vel omnino liberis, appendiculatis; ovario supero vel paulo infero. Lindley’s type species, V. psittacina, is gamo- petalous, but this fact has been overlooked and the genus characterized as polypetalous, as will be detailed in another paper. As defined above, Vriesia contains all the species of the Tilland- sioideae with a primary type of gamopetaly, that is, with petals truly fused or connate and not merely agglutinated and more or less interlock- ing as in the secondary type that characterizes Guzmania and Mezobromelia. Since it also con- tains polypetalous species, its basic character remains its appendaged petals. Thecophyllum André (Structure of corolla noted where known) Theccophyllum André, Bromel. Andr. 107. 1889 = Guzmania R. & P. Fl. 3: 37. 1802, in all prob- ability. Of the two original species, the first, T. wittmackiz, is undoubtedly a Guzmania, while the second, T. poortmanit, very likely is also although its corolla is still unknown to us. See below. Thecophyllum André emend. Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. IL. 3: 131. 1908 = Vriesia Lindl. Bot. Reg. 29: pl. 10. 1848. T. acuminatum L. B. Smith, Contr. Gray Herb. tT POO te Die 2 (tgs 2c, 29s, 198K s —. (Vriesia attenuata Sm. & Pitt. nom. nov. Not Vriesia acuminata Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. Il. 4: 868. 1904. Petals appendaged—LBS. 4()2 T. angustum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. Il. 4: 1121. 1904 = Guzmania donnellsmithii Mez ex Donn. Smith, Bot. Gaz. 35: 9. 1903. Petals naked, agglutinated—LBS. T’. balanophorum (Mez) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 131. 1908. Guzmania balanophora Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 918. 1896 = Vriesia bala- nophora (Mez) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. Petals appendaged, free—LBS. T. balanophorum var. subpictum Suesseng. Bot. Jahrb. 72: 291. 1942. From the description this appears to be the same as 7’. lineatum Mez & Wercklé. See below. T’. bracteosum Mez & Wercklé, Repert. Sp. Nov. Fedde 14: 246. 1916 = Vriesia bracteosa (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. Not Vriesia bracteosa Beer, Bromel. 263. 1857, nomen in synonymy. T. capitatum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 873. 1904 = Vriesia capitata (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. capituligerum (Griseb.) L. B. Smith, Contr. Gray Herb. 98: 14. 1932. Tillandsia capituligera Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 254. 1886 = Vriesia capi- tuligera (Griseb.) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. Petals connate—CSP. T. comatum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 871. 1904 = Vriesia comata (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. cornuaultit (André) Mez, Engl. Pflanzenreich IV. 32: 423. 1935. Tillandsia cornuaulti André, Enum. Bromél. 8. Dec. 13, 1888; Rev. Hort. 60: 568. Dec. 16, 1888 = Tillandsia turneri Baker, Journ. Bot. 26: 144. 1888. See L. B. Smith, Contr. Gray Herb. 104: 82. 1934. Petals naked, free—André sketch. T. crassiflorum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 138. 1903 = Vriesia crassiflora (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. cylindraceum Suesseng. & Goeppinger, Bot. Jahrb. 72: 292. 1942 = Vriesia cylindracea (Suesseng. & Goeppinger) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. The specific name is uncomfortably close to that ot Vi cylindrica Vic B. Smith, Contr: U.S. Nat. Herb. 29: 445. 1951, but we believe it is enough different to obviate the use of a new name. T. discolor Mez & Wercklé, Repert. Sp. Nov. Fedde 14: 246. 1916 = Vriesia discolor (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. dussit (Mez) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 131. 1903 = Guzmania dussii Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 923. 1896. See L. B. Smith, Contre sGraneellerby 90/2150) Plat LOSa Lo. al 1932. Petals naked, agglutinated—LBS. T. fastuwosum (André) Mez, Engl. Pflanzenreich IV. 32: 423. 1935. Tillandsia fastuosa André, Enum. Bromél. 8. Dec. 13, 1888; Rev. Hort. 60: 568. Dec. 16, 1888 = Vriesia capituligera (Griseb.) Sm. & Pitt. See above. Petals con- nate—CSP. T. gloriosum (André) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. IT. 3: 131. 1903. Caraguata gloriosa André, Enum. Bromél. 5. Dec. 13, 1888; Rev. Hort. 60: 565. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 Dec. 16,1888 = Guzmania gloriosa (André) André ex Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 922. 1896. See André, Brom. Andr. 48, pl. 17C. 1889, where the corolla is described as ‘‘breviter trilobata’’; L. B. Smith, Caldasia 3: 240. 1945. Petals naked, agglutinated—André figure. T’. hygrometricum (André) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 1381. 1903. Caraguata hygrometrica André, Enum. Bromél. 6. Dec. 13, 1888; Rey. Hort. 60: 566. Dec. 16, 1888 = Vriesia hygro- metrica (André) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. insigne (EK. Morren) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. Il. 3: 131. 1903. Pepinia insignis E. Morren ex Baker, Handb. Bromel. 142. 1889 = Tillandsia insignis (HE. Morren) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. Petals free, naked—LBS. T. trazuense Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 138. 1903 = Vriesia irazuensis (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. johnstonii Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 872. 1904, as johnstonet = Vriesia johnstonii (Mez) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. Petals appendaged, free—CSP. T. kraenzlinianum (Wittm.) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 131.1903 = Guzmania kraenzliniana Wittm. Bot. Jahrb. 11: 62. 1890, where the co- rolla-tube is noted. T. kuppert Suesseng. & Goepping. Bot. Jahrb. 72: 292. 1942 = Vriesia kupperi (Suesseng. & Goepping.) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. According to the International Rules, the above combina- tion is not invalidated by Vriesia kupperiana Suesseng. Bot. Archiv Leipzig 39: 384, fig. 1. 1939. Petals originally described as free and appendaged. T. latissimum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 1122. 1904 = Vriesia latissima (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. lacum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 1123. 1904 = Vriesia diffusa Sm. & Pitt. nom. nov. Not Vriesta laxa (Griseb.) Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 578. 1896. T. lehmannianum Mez, Repert. Sp. Nov. Fedde 16: 72. 1919 = Guzmania mosquerae (Wittm.) Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 924. 1896. See below. T. lineatum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. Il. 4: 875. 1904 = Vriesia lineata (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. Petals ap- pendaged, free—LBS. T. longipetalum (Baker) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. Il. 3: 131. 1903. Tillandsia longipetala Baker, Journ. Bot. 26: 142. 1888 = Guzmania longi- petala (Baker) Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 919. 1896. See L. B. Smith, Contr. Gray Herb. 104: 75. 1934. Petals naked, agglutinated—LBS. T. montanum L. B. Smith ex Yuncker, Field Mus. Pub. Bot. 17: 319, pl. 7. 1938 = Vriesia montana (L. B. Smith) Sm. & Pitt. Journ. Washington Acad. Sei. 48: 69. 1953. T. mosquerae (Wittm.) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 131. 1903. Caraguata mosquerae Wittm. Bot. Jahrb. 11: 58. 1889 = Guzmania mosquerae (Wittm.) Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 924. 1896. See L. B. Smith, Caldasia no. 5: 6. 1942. DECEMBER 1953 SMITH AND PITTENDRIGH: REALIGNMENTS IN TILLANDSIOIDEAE Petals naked, agglutinated—LBS. Long corolla- tube noted in original description. T. orortense (Mez) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 131. 1903. Guzmania ororiensis Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 917. 1896 = Vriesia ororiensis (Mez) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. Petals described by Mez as free and appendaged in making the combination and in emending Thecophyllum. T. palustre (Wittm.) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 131. 1903. Caraguata palustris Wittm. Bot. Jahrb. 11: 58. 1889 = Guzmania palustris (Wittm.) Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 923. 1896. Corolla-tube noted in original description. T. paniculatum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. Il. 4: 1123. 1904, as panniculatum = Vriesia triflora Sm. & Pitt. nom. nov. Not Vriesia paniculata (i.) Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 614. 1896. T. pauperum Mez & Sodiro, Bull. Herb. Boiss. IT. 4: 876. 1904 = Vriesia paupera (Mez & Sodiro) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. pedicellatum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 136. 1903 = Vriesia pedicellata (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. pennellit (L. B. Smith) Mez. Engl. Pflanzen- reich IV. 32: 422. 1935 = Guzmania pennellii i. B. Smith, Contr. Gray Herb. 98: 30, pl. 6, fig. 3. 1932. Confirmed as a Guzmania by a subse- quent collection (Cuwatrecasas, Schultes & E. Smith 12748). T. pictum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 874. 1904 = Vriesia picta (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. Petals appendaged— Mez. ipenvecernd we, Bull: Herb. Boiss. Il. 3: 137. 1903 = Vriesia notata Sm. & Pitt. nom. nov. Not Vriesia pittiert Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 135. 1903. Petals free, appendaged—Mez. T. poortmanit André, Brom. Andr. 108. 1889, as poortmani; Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 131. 1903 = Guzmania poortmanii (André) André ex Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 922. 1896, as poort- mani. Long corolla-tube noted in _ original description. T. rubrum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. IT. 4: 878. 1904 = Vriesia leptopoda Sm. &«& Pitt. nom. nov. Not Vriesza rubra (R. & P.) Beer, Bromel. 98. 1857. T. sceptrum Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 139. 1903 = Guzmania gloriosa (André) André ex Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 922. 1896. See L. B. Smith, Caldasia 3: 240. 1945. T. singuliflorum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. Il. 4: 870. 1904 = Vriesia singuliflora (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. sintenisit (Baker) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 131. 1903. Caraguata sintenisii Baker, Handb. Bromel. 145. 1889, as sintenesit = Vriesia sin- tenisii (Baker) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. Petals appendaged, free—LBS. T. spectabile Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 873. 1904 = Vriesia spectabilis (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov.- T. splitgerbert. (Mez) Pittendrigh, Evolution 2: 60. 1948. Guzmania splitgerbert Mez in DC. 403 Monogr. Phan. 9: 930. 1896 = Vriesia splitger- beri (Mez) Sm: & Pitt. comb. nov. Petals appendaged, connate—CSP. T. squarrosum Mez & Sodiro, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 877. 1904 = Guzmania squarrosa (Mez & Sodiro) Sm. & Pitt. comb. noy. See L. B. Smith, Caldasia no. 5: 7. 1942. T. standley: L. B. Smith, Contr. Gray Herb. 117: 30, pl. 2, figs. 30, 31. 1937 = Vriesia standleyi (L. B. Smith) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. Petals appendaged—LBS. T. stenophyllum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 875. 1904 = Vriesia stenophylla (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. turbinatum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. IT. 4: 1122. 1904 = Vriesia turbinata (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. urbanianum (Mez) Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. Il. 3: 1381. 1903. Guzmania urbaniana Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 920. 1896 = Vriesia antillana Sm. & Pitt. nom. nov. Not Vriesia urbaniana Harms, Notizblatt 12: 532. 1935. Petals appendaged—LBS. T. violascens Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 877. 1904 = Vriesia violascens (Mez. & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. viride Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. IT. 4: 872. 1904 = Vriesia viridis (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. Petals appendaged, free—LBS. T. vittatum Mez & Wercklé, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 871. 1904 = Vriesia vittata (Mez & Wercklé) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. T. werckleanum Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 139. 1903 = Vriesia nephrolepis Sm. & Pitt. nom. nov. Not Vriesia werckleana Mez. Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 136. 1903. T. wittmacki André, Brom. Andr. 107, pl. 39B. 1889: Mez, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 131. 1903 = Guzmania wittmackii (André) André ex Mez in DC. Monogr. Phan. 9: 921. 1896. Petals naked, agglutinated—LBS. André based Thecophyllum on two species with free sepals and fascicles of flowers in the axils of large primary bracts. On the basis of a subse- quent collection (Haught 2897), we know that the first of these, 7. wittmackit, has the flowers of a Guzemania. The description of the second species, 7’. poortmani, was based on Poortman’s sketch of the plant, and as this indicated a long and exserted corolla-tube, there is little doubt that it also is a Guzmania. In 1896, in his first monograph of the Brome- liaceae (DC. Monogr. Phan. 9), Mez reduced Thecophyllum to a subgenus of Guemania, adding 12 more species to the concept and dropping the character of free sepals. In 1903, Mez discovered that one of these ad- ded species, G. ororiensis, had the flowers not of a Guzmania but of a Vriesia. Whereupon he re- 404 moved them all from Guzmania and resurrected Thecophyllum as a genus related to Vriesia but differing in its aborted branches. From then until his second monograph (EKng- ler, das Pflanzenreich IV. 32), Mez added 33 more species including 15 with “ramulis mani- festis.’” These last contradicted André’s original basis and required a complicated redefinition of the genus. Although L. B. Smith had reduced the comparably artificial genus, Sodiroa (Contr. Gray Herb. 104: 73), and demonstrated that several supposed species of Mez’s Thecophyllum were in reality Guzmania, he continued with consider- able inconsistency to follow Mez’s lead in main- taining Thecophyllum as a genus (Pflanzenreich IV. 32: 599-600). In reducing Mez’s concept of Thecophyllum to Vriesia, we note that so far as flowers are avail- able, all species show the included stamens of the section Xzphion, and most of them have also the thick coriaceous sepals so common in this section. As it does not seem possible to separate Mez’s Thecophyllum as a whole from the previously recognized species of section Xzphion, there is no point in trying to maintain it in an infrageneric category. Its merging with section Xzphion is logical from a geographical standpoint also, as that is the only section whose area completely surrounds it. Cipuropsis Ule Cipuropsis Ule, Verhandl. Bot. Ver. Brandenburg 48: 148. 1907; Mez, Engl. Pflanzenreich IV. 32: 598. 1935 = Vriesia Lindl. Bot. Reg. 29: pl. 10. 1848. C. subandina Ule, Verhandl. Bot. Ver. Branden- burg 48: 149. 1907. Tillandsia subandina (Ule) Mez ex L. B. Smith, Contr. Gray Herb. 98: 16. 1932; in Macbride, Fl. Peru, Field Mus. Pub. Bot. 13: 556. 1936. = Vriesia subandina (Ule) Sm. & Pitt. comb. nov. The genus Cipuropsis was erected by Ule to accept his species subandina which he observed had not only petal-appendages but also a gamo- petalous corolla. We show above that no real justification existed for such action since Vriesza psittacina, the type of Lindley’s genus, has the petals both appendaged and joined. Ule clearly took at face value Mez’s polypetalous definition of Vriesza. L. B. Smith’s transfer of the species to Tal- landsia was according to Mez’s supposed distine- tion between petal-scales of Vriesta with a hori- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 zontal line of attachment and vertical calli with auricled apices found in some species formerly placed in Tillandsia (see Contr. U. 8S. Nat. Herb. 29: 430). The character of gamopetaly was either overlooked or attributed to faulty observation. Later, in his last monograph, Mez accepted Cipu- ropsis as a distinct genus. As Ule’s specimen is not available it is not pos- sible to decide which type of gamopetaly is in- volved, the primary or true fusion which would make Cipuropsis a synonym of Vriesia or the secondary or agglutination type which would cause it to replace the later Mezobromelia. Two characters of Cipuropsis incline us to place it with Vriesia rather than with Mezo- bromelia, the shortness of its corolla-tube and the distichous arrangement of its flowers. In Vriesia the corolla-tube, when present, is much shorter than the sepals, in Cipuropsis it is described as little more than a fourth as long as the sepals, but in Mezobromelia it equals them. In Vriesia the flowers are two-ranked with very few excep- tions and they are two-ranked in Czpuropsis, but not in Mezobromelia. Chirripoa Suesseng. Chirripoa Suesseng. Bot. Jahrb. 72: 293, pl. 4, fig. 11, 1942 = Guzmania R. & PJ PIS Peres: 37. 1802. C. solitaria Suesseng. Bot. Jahrb. 72: 293, pl. 4, fig. 11, 1942 = Guzmania polycephala Mez & Wercklé, Repert. Sp. Nov. Fedde 14: 254. 1916; L. B. Smith in Woodson, Fl. Panama, Ann. Mo. Bot. Gard. 31: 116. 1944. The genus Chirripoa is a prime example of the confusion involved in making genera on habital characters, since the author in noting its affini- ties, compared it to genera in all three subfamilies of the Bromeliaceae. In fact he was so much in doubt that he published it as ‘‘nov. genus ad interim” indicating that the name was merely a means of noting the species until its genus could be discovered. We find that the description and plate of Chirripoa solitaria agree closely with Guzmania polycephala with one exception. The description gives a greater length for the sepals than for the floral bracts. However, the illustration does not show exserted sepals and we can only suppose that through some error only the exposed apex of the floral bract was measured, disregarding the base covered by the bract below. DECEMBER 1953 SOHNS: CHABOISSAEA LIGULATA 405 BOTANY .—Chaboissaea ligulata Fourn.: A Mexican grass, ERNEST R. SoHNs, U.S. National Museum. (Communicated by Agnes Chase.) Chaboissaea, a monotypic genus of the tribe Festuceae, is relatively unknown. The genus was described by Fournier (1886) from material collected by Virlet in San_ Luis Potosi. A portion of the type in the U. 58. National Herbarium bears these data: “Chaboissaea ligulata Fourn. Mexique. Prov. de San Luis. Coll. Virlet d’Aoust 1851.’ This species was collected a second time in 1910 by A. 8. Hitchcock “No. 7693, along railway, Sanchez, Chihuahua, Oct. 12, 1910. Alt. 8000 ft.” The writer collected this grass at three stations near San Felipe, Guanajuato, in October 1952 (Fig. 1). These plants were growing in hard, rocky, clay soil on the banks of dry irrigation ditches and on the rocky slopes of Cerro del Fraile. Associated species were Hragrostis diffusa Buckl., L. plumbea Scribn., Panicum vaseya- num Sceribn., and Andropogon hirtiflorus var. feensis (Fourn.) Hack. In its natural habitat this grass suggests a species of Muhlenbergia or Eragrostis. Perhaps this is the reason it has been infre- quently collected. The purpose of this paper is to review the history of the genus and, with additional data from new material, to supplement the original description. It is hoped that this species will be represented more frequently in grass collections from Mexico. Most taxonomists, after Fournier, treated the genus as a member of the tribe Agrosti- deae. Chaboissaea belongs in the tribe Fes- tuceae. Hackel (1890) listed the genus at the end of his work among the doubtful genera, and he assumed that the Festuceae was the correct tribe. Lamson-Scribner and Merrill (1900) misapplied the name and transferred it to Muhlenbergia ligulata, citing two Palmer specimens, nos. 731 and 948 from Durango, these later described as Muhlenbergia subbiflora Hitche. Hitchcock (1913) accepted Lamson-Scribner and Mer- rill’s relegation of Chaboissaea ligulata to synonymy under M. ligulata. Bews (1929) lio? +i Fic. 1.—Map of northern Mexico. Collection localities are indicated by black dots. Type material was collected in San Luis Potosi, no precise locality given. 406 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 Ol VER a a ore oo LOL TY LET g GA ELLIE SA _ Fes. 2-16.—Chaboissaea ligulata Fourn.: 2, Habit sketch of plant; 3, branch of inflorescence; 4 ligule; 5, 6, and 7, spikelet, floret, and palea, respectively, from the type specimen; 8, 9, and 10 one-, two-, and three-flowered spikelets; 11, floret; 12, floret showing rachilla and aborted floret; 13, anther: 14, pistil; 15, base of floret showing one lodicule (lod), palea (pa), rachilla (ra), and aborted floret (ab): 16, caryopsis. (Wig. 3-1, X0;:8-16; X22.) (Drawn from Sohns, nos. 411 and 446, deposited inthe U.S Nae tional Herbarium.) DECEMBER 1953 lists the genus as a synonym of Muhlen- bergia. Conzatti (1946) placed the genus in the Agrostideae and referred the species to Muhlenbergia ligulata. Fournier’s (1886) generic description was brief: ‘‘Spiculis bifloris, flore inferiore her- maphrodito, superiore minori sterili, paleis integris.’”’ One species, C. ligulata, was de- scribed (and illustrated) as follows: ‘‘Culmi glabro filiformi, foliis linearibus medio- eribus, ligula lanceolata exserta longa fissa; panicula 10” longa, contracta, radiis longis compositis alternis remotis basi nudis, spi- culis bifloris; glumis inaequalibus, superiore majore; flore inferiore in callo insidente, hermaphrodito, palea inferiore ampla acu- minata superiorem superante, margine ci- liata, superiore breviter mucronata, sta- minibus 3, stylis longis, stigmatibus plumosis; flore superiore pedicellato, breviore et angustiore, palea inferiore acuta.” The following emended description is based on my collections from Guanajuato. It is evident that the genus belongs in the tribe Festuceae. Perennial, caespitose (Fig. 2); culms 10-45 cm tall, glabrous; nodes glabrous; leaves mostly basal; sheaths keeled, glabrous, striate, margins hyaline, shorter than the upper internodes; ligule prominent (Fig. 4), membranous, up to 1 em long, tip attenuated and splitting when dry; blades 3-12 em long, glabrous on the lower and seabrous on the upper surface, folded when dry; inflorescence exserted and standing out prominently above the basal blades (in small plants), 6-12 em long, branches appressed- ascending at first, later spreading; spikelets . appressed and clustered along the branches, base of branches naked for 0.3-1 em, margins scabrous (Fig. 3); lowermost branches longest (2-3.5 cm long), hence inflorescence pyramidal, branches distant, lower two 1-2 cm apart; spikelets 1-3 flowered (if 1-flowered the rachilla prolonged as a minute stipe), plumbeous, lowermost spikelets with one floret (and an aborted floret (fig. 12 and 15) or sometimes only a rachilla joint), those spikelets in center of branch and toward the end with two or three florets, 2—3.5 mm long (average length of 30 spikelets: 3 mm); first glume 1I- 2.2 mm long (average length of 30 first glumes: 1.4 mm), 1I-nerved, thin, plumbeous, scaberu- SOHNS: CHABOISSAEA LIGULATA 407 lous; second glume 1.2—2.3 mm long (average length of 30 second glumes: 1.7 mm), otherwise like the first glume; lemma of the first floret 2.1-3.3 mm long (average length of 30 lemmas of first florets: 2.8 mm), 3-nerved, lateral nerves indistinet, scabrous on the keel and scaberulous over the back, sparingly pilose on the margins (margins of the lemma of the first floret more pilose than the margins of lemmas of the second and third florets); palea about 1 mm shorter than the lemma, 2-keeled, scabrous on the keels toward the tip, in mature spikelets clasping the caryopsis and standing out prominently from the lemma (Fig. 12); lodicules 2, 0.5-0.8 mm long (Fig. 12); stamens 3 (Fig. 13), about 1.5 mm long (measurements made on stamens of the first floret); styles relatively thick, short, sepa- rate at top of ovary; stigmas 2, plumose and curly (Fig. 14), exserted laterally during an- thesis; caryopsis light brown, 1.4 mm _ long, oblong (Fig. 16). Summary.—Chaboissaea ligulata Fourn., a little known grass from Mexico, is re- described and illustrated. The species was described from material collected in San Luis Potosi in 1851, precise locality not given. It is represented by a single collec- tion from Sanchez, Chihuahua (1910) and by three collections from San Felipe, Guana- juato (1952). The grass belongs in the tribe Festuceae. Significant additions to the original description are the following: Perennial; spikelets 1-3 flowered; glumes I-nerved; lemmas 3-nerved, and florets with 2 lodicules. LITERATURE CITED Bews, J. W. The world’s grasses: 205. London, 1929. ConzatTti, C. Flora taxronomica Mexicana 1: 254. 1946. FourRnNiIER, EH. Mezicanas plantas, pt. 2: 112. Ex Typographeo Republicae, Parisiis, 1886. HackeE., E. The true grasses: 211. [Translated from Die natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien by F. Lam- son-Scribner and E. A. Southworth.] New York, 1890. Hitrcucock, A. 8. Mexican grasses in the United States National Herbarium. Contr. U. 8S. Nat. Herb. 17: 291. 1913. LAMSON-SCRIBNER, F., and MERRILL, E. D. Stud- zes on American grasses. I. Some recent collec- tions of Mexican grasses. U.S. Dept. Agr. Div. Agrost. Bull. 24: 19-20. 1900. 408 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 ZOOLOGY .—Thysanopoda spinicaudata, a new bathypelagic giant ewphausiid crustacean, with comparative notes on 'T. cornuta and T. egregia. EDWARD BRINTON, Scripps Institution of Oceanography,! La Jolla, Calif. (Communi- cated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) The bathypelagic giant euphausids are taken here to include Crustacea belonging to the order Euphausiacea which live plank- tonically at great depths in the ocean, com- monly below 2,000 meters. These giants among euphausids are little known, prob- ably owing to the fact that they are not abundant and live below the range of sam- pling of ordinary plankton-collecting gear. It is also possible that they are fast swim- mers and are able to escape most nets. Together with Thysanopoda spinicaudata, n. sp., described below, the group includes at present only Thysanopoda cornuta Llhig, 1905, and 7. egregia Hansen, 1905. These euphausids comprise a subdivision, ‘‘“Group B,” of the genus Thysanopoda, which was observed by H. J. Hansen (1912) to consti- tute a morphologically related unit. Four characters define this unit: a well-developed cervical groove separates the head area of the carapace from the thoracic region; the pseu- doexopod of the first maxilla scarcely over- reaches the outer margin of the joint, or does not overreach it at ali; the endopod of the first maxilla is very long; the sixth abdomi- nal somite is shorter than the fifth. Euphausiids of this group are readily distinguished from other euphausiids, espe- cially by means of the short sixth abdominal somite. Among the other species of Euphau- siacea, only Thysanopoda cristata G. O. Sars, a midwater form which appears to be closely related to the giant euphausiids, possesses a sixth abdominal somite which is nearly as short as the fifth. The euphausids which live above a depth of about 500 meters are relatively small in size, reaching a maximum length of about 20 mm. There are two exceptions: the Ant- arctic Huphausia superba Dana which some- times attains a length of 60 mm, and Me- ganyctiphanes norvegica (M. Sars) of the North Atlantic which reaches 40 mm. The euphausuds of the upper strata include 1 Contributions from Scripps Institution of Oceanography, new ser., no. 652. numerous species belonging to nine genera, including one species 7’. aequalis Hansen, of Hansen’s ‘Group A” of Thysanopoda. The population which normally inhabits waters between about 500 and 2,000 meters is characterized by fewer genera and species, and by somewhat larger euphausids. The largest of these, which sometimes attain a length of 50 mm, are Thysanopoda acutifrons Holt and Tattersall, and J. cristata G. O. Sars, both of which belong to Group A of Thysanopoda, and the monospecific Bentheu- phausia amblyops (G. O. Sars). The typical euphausids below 2,000 meters are the bathypelagic giant euphau- suds which belong to Group B of Thysano- poda. Bentheuwphausia, and some other spe- cies whose major concentration 1s In upper layers, may, however, be present in this deep zone from time to time. The largest specimen in the Scripps Institution collections of the bathypelagic giant T. egregia is an adult female 62 mm long; the female specimen of T. spinicaudata measures 84 mm, and the largest known specimen of 7’. cornuta, a male collected by the Scripps Institution vessel Horizon in the southeastern Gulf of Alaska, is 95 mm long. These euphausiids not only attain a somewhat greater length than the Antarctic surface form Huwphausia superba, but are also more broad. It is of interest to note, however, that both H. swperba and the bathypelagic giant euphausiids inhabit | waters which are colder than 2-3°C. It has been necessary to describe 7. spini- caudata from a single specimen. This is felt to be justified in view of the extreme scarcity of animals of this group. 7. egregia Hansen (1905), was described from a single specimen captured near the insular slope of the Ma- deira Islands, while 7. cornuta Lllig (1905), was described from one animal from the Wallfisch Ridge of the Southeastern Atlan- tic. [lig (1905, 1930) and Hansen (1905, 1915) -figure some of the features of T. cornuta, while Hansen (1905) has drawn the anterior part of T. egregia. I am indebted to Prof. Martin W. John- DECEMBER 1953 son, under whose supervision a study of the Pacific euphausiids is being carried out, for his criticism and suggestions. Thysanopoda spinicaudata, n. sp. haes. 013: 6; 10, 11 Holotype —Female; length 84 mm. Diagnosis—The carapace is without lateral denticles in the adult. A cervical groove crosses the dorsal part of the carapace. Lateral furrows (Fig. 1) are continuous with the cervical groove A longitudinal submarginal ridge extends along the lateral margin of the carapace posterior to the subvertical grooves. The lateral limits of the carapace are thickened to form marginal ridges. Viewed dorsally (Fig. 3), the anterior margin of the carapace is slightly convex. The dorsal an- BRINTON: NEW BATHYPELAGIC EUPHAUSIID 409 terior end of the frontal plate is armed with a strong vertical spine 1.4 mm in length. A low middorsal keel is present on the carapace, ex- tending from the vertical spine to the cervical groove. The keel is interrupted near its midpoint by a short, obtuse prominence. Viewed laterally, the thickness of the frontal plate is less than the length of the dorsal spine. The anterior margins of the frontal plate, lateral to the spine, are slightly upturned. The proximal end of the lower flagellum of the first antenna carries a dense tuft of long, color- less setae. The heavily setose, raised dorsal area of the first article of the peduncle of the first antenna (Fig. 1, 3) is equipped terminally with an acute tooth which is bulbous at its base and which is directed upward and laterally. The setose 2 I, lappet on first article of antennular peduncle; s, spine on sixth abdominal somite. 3, T. spinicaudata, anterior region, dorsal view. anterior region, dorsal view. anterior region, dorsal view. So 4 Fries. 1-4.—1, Thysanopoda spinicaudata, adult female: k, Keels on fourth and fifth abdominal somites; 2, T. egregia, A ie connuta. 410 JOURNAL OF THE part of the lappet of the first article is not pro- duced posteriorly beyond its point of junction with the main part of the article; hence it does not overhang the trunk of the article. The scale of the second antenna is truncated distally (Fig. 3). A denticle is present at the antero-lateral angle. T. spinicaudata derives its name from a heavy spine which is directed posteriorly and laterally from each side of the sixth abdominal somite (Fig. 1, s.). This spine orginates a short distance forward of the posterior margin of the somite and, together with that part of the pleuron ad- jacent to it, is situated so as to serve as a pro- tective socket for the articulated base of the uropod. The pleura of the second abdominal segment are very slightly produced at the anterolateral angle, while those of the third and fourth seg- ments are distinctly lobed. The pre-anal spine curves upward distally. Viewed laterally (Fig. 6), Aaa ° [mm. \\u E 3mm. 4 if 8 Fias. 5-13.—5, Thysanopoda cornuta, pre-anal spine. 8, T. cornuta, left second maxilla. egregia, pre-anal spine. T. spinicaudata, left second maxilla. en., endopod. pod; ps, pseudoexopod. 12, 7. egregia, left second maxilla. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 its lower margin traces a simple arc from the base of the spine to the acute tip. The endopod of the first maxilla (Fig. 11) is slightly convex in outline along its inner longi- tudinal border and concave on its outer margin. The pseudoexopod of the first maxilla bears no indentation on its slightly thickened outer margin. The endopod of the second maxilla is very elongate (Fig. 10). The terminology for the mouthparts is that employed by Hansen (1925). T. spinicaudata is brilliant red in color except for black eyes; white, richly arborescent gills, and tufts of fine, colorless setae at the bases of the outer flagella. Type specimen.—The type specimen is de- posited in the U. S. National Museum, no. 95677. Remarks.—The frontal plate of this proposed new species is not produced anteriorly to the extent that it is in 7. cornuta (Fig. 4), nor is it so obtuse, when viewed dorsally, as in T. egregia. en= ==, /2 6, 7. spinicaudata, pre-anal spine. Gaya 9, T. cornuta, left first maxilla. 10, 11, T. spinicaudata, left first maxilla; en., endo- 13, T. egregza, left first maxilla. DECEMBER 1953 A small tubercle, comparable to but much smaller than the dorsal spine of T. spinicaudata, is present on the frontal plate of T. cornuta. Seen laterally, the thickness of the frontal plate of T. cornuta is much greater than the length of the tubercle. The frontal plate of T. egregia is curved downward. The middorsal keel on the carapace of 7. cornuta, anterior to the cervical groove, is higher and more massive than in 7’. spinicaudata, while in 7. egregia it is lower, broader, and poorly defined. The proximal end of the lower flagellum of the first antenna of the males of T. cornuta and T.. egregia is much thicker than that of the females of these two species and of 7. spinicaudata. How- ever, in each of the species the end carries a tuft of long setae which is more dense in males of T. cornuta and T. egregia than in females. In T. cornuta and T. egregia the setose lappet of the first article of the peduncle of the first antenna is produced posteriorly, and slightly overhangs the trunk of the article. In the same two species, the distal margin of the scale of the second antenna is convex, when viewed dorsally (Figs. 2, 4), while in 7. spinicaudata it is obtuse or truncated. The fourth and fifth abdominal somites in all three species each bear three abbreviated keels: a mid-dorsal keel, flanked by a pair of subdorsal keels (Fig. 1). The posterior dorsal surface of the sixth somite is hollowed, forming a dorsolateral ridge along each side of the posterior half of the somite. The ventral margins of the pre-anal spines of T. egregia and T. cornuta are indented (Figs. 5, 7), while in 7. spinicaudata this margin is convex. The spines in the two former species show no sexual dimorphism. Distinctions between these allied species are found also in details of mouthpart structure. The pseudoexopod of the first maxilla of T. egregia (Fig. 13) is, as in 7. spinicaudata, slightly thickened along its outer margin. It is also in- dented near the midpoint of that margin, while the same margin of the pseudoexopod of T. spinicaudata is entirely convex. The pseudo- exopod of the first maxilla of 7. cornuta (Fig. 9) is flat and reaches to the outer margin of its joints. The endopod of the second maxilla of T. egregia (Fig. 12) and of T. cornuta (Fig. 8) is half again as long as it is wide. The entire margin is BRINTON: NEW BATHYPELAGIC EUPHAUSIID 411 convex in outline in 7’. egregia, while the inner margin of the same endopod of TJ. cornuta is concave in profile. Larvae tentatively assigned to 7. cornuta by Ilhg (1930) and Zimmer (1914) possess spiniform processes at the subdorsal posterior margins of the sixth abdominal somites. Compared with the latero-ventral spines which are subterminal to the sixth segment of 7. spinicaudata, these are dorsolaterally situated and are present only in the larval (furcilia) stages of JT. cornuta. The Seripps collections contain a series of the larvae which have the spiniform processes. Observations upon the development of the lateral groove complex on the carapace and of the tubercle on the frontal plate of the carapace indicate that these larvae belong to 7. cornuta. Type locality and collecting gear—T. spini- caudata was collected by use of the Isaacs-Kidd Midwater Trawl at 2,260 meters in 4,070 meters of water, between 25°52’N, 114°40’W, and 26°00’N, 114°24’W. This is 75 miles west of the Baja California continental slope, adjacent to the southern shoulder of Rosa Bank. Distribution.—T. cornuta and T. egregia have been taken at depths of 1,100-6,000 meters in the Atlantic, Pacific, and Indian Oceans. Larvae are known from 150-1,500 meters. T. spinicau- data, taken at 2,200 meters, probably has ecologi- cal requirements similar to those of the other two species. Extensive sampling in the North- eastern Pacific by Scripps Institution vessels indicates that the giant forms occur in deep waters seaward of continental shelves and border- land areas. REFERENCES Hansen, H. J. Preliminary report on the Schizo- poda collected by H. S. H. Prince Albert of Monaco during the cruise of the Princesse-Alice in the year 1904. Bull. Inst. Oceanogr. Monaco, no. 30: 32 pp., 24 figs. 1905. . The Schizopoda. Reports on the scientific results of the expedition to the tropical Pacific, in charge of Alex. Agassiz, by the U. S. Fish Commission steamer Albatross .. . Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 35: 173-296, pls. 1-12. 1912. . Studies on Arthropoda II (Crustacea): 1-176, 8 pls. Copenhagen, 1925. Inuia, G. Eine neue Art der Gattung Thysanopoda. Zool. Anz. 28: 663-664, 3 figs. 1905. . Die Schizopoden der Deutschen Tiefsee- Expedition. Deutsche Tiefsee Expedition, 1898-99, 22(6) : 379-625, 215 figs. 1930. TATTERSALL, W. M. Crustaceans of the orders Eu- $12 JOURNAL OF THE phausiacea and Mysidacea from the Western Atlantic. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 69(8): 1-31, pls. 1-2. 1926. ——. The Euphausiacea and Mysidacea of the John Murray Expedition to the Indian Ocean. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, No. 12 The John Murray Expedition, 1933-34, Sci- entific Reports 5(8): 203-246, 21 figs. 1939. ZIMMER, ©. Die Schizopoden der Deutschen Siid- polar Expedition, 1901-1903. Deutsche Siid- polar-Expedition 15(4): 377-445, 4 pls. 1914. ZOOLOGY .—On the ranges of certain crayfishes of the Spiculifer group of the genus Procambarus, with the description of a new species! (Decapoda: Astacidae). Horton H. Hosss, Jr., University of Virginia. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) Six species of crayfishes belonging to the Spiculifer group of the genus Procambarus are known to inhabit lotic situations in Ala- bama, Florida, Georgia, and South Carolina. Of these, three have been described: P. spiculifer (LeConte, 1856:401), P. versutus (Hagen, 1870:51), and P. suttkus: Hobbs (1953:173). A description of the fourth is given below; however, before those of the other two are made larger series of both are needed. Plotted on the accompanying map are the locality records available for the four de- scribed species. Since P. spiculifer and P. versutus are known from so many localities, a listing of the localities from which they have been collected seems superfluous; how- ever, exact locality data have been given for P. suttkusc and are listed for the species described below. The greatest gap in our knowledge lies in the region of the middle Chattahoochee and in the Alabama River system. It will be noted from map | that P. spiculifer is known from headwater streams of the Alabama River in Georgia as well as from localities near its mouth, but whether it occurs in the region between is not known. Specimens of P. spiculifer from over its entire known range have been examined rather carefully, but variations are few, and in no place where adequate series are available do any of these variations seem to be confined to local popu- lations. A study of variations in P. versutus has been deferred until more specimens from central Alabama become available. 1 Contribution from the Samuel Miller Biologi- cal Laboratories. I wish to thank Dr. E.C. Raney and Dr. D.C. Scott for their kindness in collecting for me the specimens on which this description is based, as well as for those on which many of the locality records indicated on the map are es- tablished. Genus Procambarus Ortmann (1905) Procambarus raneyi,” n. sp. Diagnosis.—Rostrum with lateral spines and without a median carina; areola relatively broad and short (about four times as long as broad and about 28 per cent of entire length of carapace); two lateral spines on each side of carapace. Male with hooks on ischiopodites of third and fourth pereipods; palm of chela of first form male not bearded but bearing a row of 7 to 9 tubercles along mesial margin. Post- orbital ridges terminate cephalad in spines. First pleopod of first form male (Figs. 1 and 3) without a shoulder on cephalic margin and ter- minating distally in three distinct parts. Mesial process subspiculiform and directed caudodistad; cephalic process absent (as in P. spiculifer); cau- dal element consists of a small corneous curved tooth lying at the caudal base of the central projection; the compound central projection, the most conspicuous of the terminal elements, beaklike, corneous, and with its tip directed caudad; as is usual the centrocephalic process is much larger than the centrocaudal one. Annulus ventralis partially hidden by tuberculate ex- tensions from the sternum anterior to annulus (Fig. 2). Holotypic male, form I.—Body subovate, somewhat compressed laterally; abdomen slightly shorter than carapace (53.2-55.2 mm). Height and width of carapace in region of caudodorsal margin of cervical groove subequal; greatest width of carapace a little cephalad of caudo- dorsal margin of cervical groove (25.3 mm). Areola relatively broad and short, about 4.4 >IT name this species in honor of my good friend Dr. Edward C. Raney, of Cornell Univer- sity, who has so graciously donated to me large numbers of crayfishes which he has collected while studying the fishes in the eastern part of the United States. Without his aid our knowledge of the crayfishes of the Atlantic slope would have been considerably hampered. Frias. 1-12.—Procambarus raneyt, n. sp. (Pubescence removed from all structures illustrated): 1, Mesial view of distal portion of first pleopod of holotype; 2, annulus ventral of allotype; 3, lateral view of distal portion of first pleopod of holotype; 4, antennal scale of holotype; 5, epistome of holotype; 6, distal three podomeres of cheliped of holotype; 7, mesial view of first pleopod of holotype; 8, dorsal view of carapace of holotype; 9, lateral view of first pleopod of holotype; 10, mesial view of distal portion of first pleopod of morphotype; 11, lateral view of carapace of holotype; 12, lateral view of distal portion of first pleopod of morphotype (a—mesial process; d—caudal process; z—central projection.) 414 JOURNAL OF THE times as long as wide with five or six punctations in narrowest part. Cephalic section of cara- pace about 2.3 times as long as areola (length of areola about 27.6 percent of entire length of cara- pace). Rostrum moderately long, excavate; sides subparallel basally, slightly converging distally to base of long acumen which is set off by acute lateral spines. Acumen longer than half the remainder of rostrum. Margins of rostrum not swollen or conspicuously elevated. Upper surface with a few scattered minute setae. Subrostral ridges poorly developed and not evident in dorsal aspect. Postorbital ridges prominent, shallowly grooved laterally, and terminating cephalad in acute spines. Suborbital angle weak and obtuse; branchiostegal spine strong. Two strong acute spines present on each side of carapace; upper surface of carapace punctate and lateral surface granulate. Cephalic section of telson with two spines in each caudolateral corner. Margin of subtriangular epistome plumose with a very small cephalo- median spine (see Fig. 5). Antennules of the usual form with a strong acute spine present on ventral side of basal segment. Antennae extend caudad to telson. Antennal scale long; moderately broad; widest near mid- length; outer distal margin with a moderately strong spine. Right chela depressed with the palm inflated in middle; outer margin of hand concave at base of immovable finger. Hand entirely tuber- culate. Inner margin of palm with a row of seven tubercles, with one tubercle below this row and a row of four just above it; a very prominent tubercle present on lower surface of palm at base of dactyl. Opposable margin of dactyl with a row of 23 rounded tubercles, the fifth from base largest and forming a distinct emargination; upper surface of dactyl with a low rounded submedian longitudinal ridge flanked on proximal two-thirds by tubercles and distally by setiferous punctations; mesial margin of dactyl with 12 tubercles; lower margin of dactyl similar to upper surface. Immovable finger with opposable margin concave and bearing an upper row of 24 rounded tubercles, sixth from base largest, and a lower row along distal half of 9 tubercles of which the sixth from base is largest; upper and lower surfaces similar to those WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, NO. 12 of dactyl; although less tuberculate, lateral margin of immovable finger with a rounded longitudinal ridge flanked by tubercles proxi- mally and setiferous punctations distally. Carpus of first right pereiopod longer than broad; upper surface with a deep submedian furrow, flanked mesially by two rows of tubercles and laterally by less well defined rows; submedian furrow interrupted distally by a small tubercle near distal margin of podomere. Mesial surface with row of five tubercles, the third and fifth distinctly larger than others. Lower mesial margin with a row of four tubercles, the distal one of which is largest and corresponds to the mesial member of the usual two tubercles present on distal margin. Between these two rows is a group of four small tubercles. Lower surface with a large distal tubercle and a few scattered small ones. Lateral surface with small squamous tubercles. Merus of first right pereiopods with small tubercles and scattered punctations on lateral surface; upper surface with tubercles along entire length, except near distal extremity, with two of the more distal ones distinctly larger than the others; mesial surface smooth proxi- mally, with a few tubercles distally, and some- what excavate along middle three-fourths, pro- ducing a longitudinal furrow near lower margin. Lower surface with two rows of spikelike tu- bercles, an outer one of 15 and an inner one of 15; scattered small tubercles are present between and to the side of these two rows. Lower surface of ischiopodite bearing a mesial row of five spikelike tubercles and a lateral row of small tubercles; these are continu- ations of the corresponding rows on merus. Basipodite and coxopodite with no tubercles. Hooks present on ischiopodites of third and fourth pereiopods; hooks are both long and slender and only slightly recurved. Basipodite of fourth pereiopod bears no tubercle opposing the hook on ischiopodite; hooks of both third and fourth perelopods extend proximad of distal end of their respective basipodites. Coxopodites of fourth and fifth pereiopods with caudomesial projections: that on fourth heavy and inflated, and that on fifth somewhat smaller and more sharply defined. First pleopod extending to coxopodite of third pereiopod when abdomen is flexed. Tip terminating in three distinct parts (Fig. 3). Mesial process spiculiform and gently curved DECEMBER 1953 caudodistad; cephalic process represented by a mere rounded lobe at cephalic base of central projection; caudal element consists of a corneous well-defined caudal process and a very small and poorly defined caudal knob; central projection, the most conspicuous of the terminal elements, ecorneous, broad (cephalocaudal axis), and directed caudolaterad. Allotypic female.—The allotype differs only in a few minor details from the holotype; op- posable margin of dactyl of right chela with 14 tubercles; opposable margin of immovable finger of chela with upper row of 10 tubercles and no lower row; inner surface of carpus of left chela with three major tubercles instead of two; two rows of tubercles on lower surface of merus with fewer tubercles than in holotype. See measurements for differences in proportions. Annulus ventralis only slightly obscured in ventral aspect by small tubercles extending caudally from sternum immediately cephalad of annulus. Annulus subovate with the greatest length in the transverse axis; a_ transverse depression near midlength with high wall cephalad cut by a troughlike depression; caudo- mesial portion with a raised (ventrally) promi- nence. Sinus originates along median line near cephalic margin of annulus, extends caudo- dextrad and turns sharply sinistrad to cross the median line, and from there curving gently caudad to the midcaudal margin of the annulus (Fig. 2). Morphotypic male, form II.—Differs from the holotype in the following respects: Abdomen slightly longer than carapace (52.8-50.8 mm); inner margins of palm of right chela with a row of three tubercles above the main row and only one below it; opposable margin of dactyl with a row of 18 tubercles, the fourth from base largest; opposable margin of immovable finger with upper row of 16 tubercles, fourth from base largest, and lower row of four. Lower surface of merus with mesial row of 14 tubercles and a very irregular lateral row. Hooks on ischiopodites of third and fourth pereiopods much reduced and neither extends proximad of basipodite of re- spective appendage. Prominences on coxopodites of fourth and fifth pereiopods much reduced. First pleopod with three terminal elements visible (Figs. 10 and 12); the conspicuous mesial process directed caudally as are the less promi- nent caudal process and central projection. Measurements —As follows (in mm): HOBBS: RANGES OF SPICULIFER CRAYFISH 415 | Holotype Allotype Morphotype | Carapace: | Eleig ity eee eee Dio) oa cl 24.0 Width ee 25.3 | 22.9 24.4 Rength. ase tenn Soa || eared 51.0 Areola: ensthi feck Sy | SEA: 14.3 ViidGR ob ek giles. ee. Siren EG He et 2230 Rostrum: | enath¥tic te. Bake He Det lie ml4eGe se, Slee 1558 WitdiGhissvas Wisp set tone ae 8.5 1AG | 8.2 Right chela: | | Length of inner margin | | Ofgpaline eee se | 19.4 | 10.1 | 13.5 Width of palm......... } 2085 2222 ai 1388 Length of outer margin | | ofshand! nae. eee SIL) 28.8 Dee, Length of dactyl....... 31.8 16.9 38.3 Type locality —South fork of the Broad River, 1 mile south of Carlton on the Ogle- thorpe—Madison County line, Georgia (Savannah River drainage system). Disposition of types——The holotypic male, form I, allotypic female, and morphotypic male, form II are deposited in the United States National Museum (nos. 95124, 95125, and 95126, respectively). Of the 39 paratypes, one male, form I, one male, form II, and one female are deposited in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, and a similar series in the collection of Dr. G. H. Penn. One male, form I, is deposited in the United States National Museum and four males, form I, two males, form II, 15 fe- males, 7 juvenile males, and 14 juvenile females are retained in my personal collection at the University of Virginia. Relationships.—Procambarus raneyi has its closest affinities with P. spiculifer (LeConte); however, it may be distinguished from the latter by the structure of the first pleopod of the male and the annulus ventralis of the female. Specumens examined.—All these specimens were collected from streams. SAVANNAH RIVER DRAINAGE GrorGia: Madison—Oglethorpe County line— 9-1150-1, Anthony Shoals (south fork of Broad River) 1 mile south of Carlton [type locality], AP SI, 1PII, 72 9,5 juv.%H, ll juv.2 2,D.C. Seott, coll.; 4-1550-2a, same locality, 20°, D.C.S., coll. Madison County—4-1550-la, Small ck., 5 miles east of Carlton, 192 ,D.C.S., coll.; 4-1550-3, Masons Creek, 11 mi. W. of Royston on Route 29,1(¢7II,1°, D.CS., coll.; U.S.N.M. no. 93253 (9/10/47), trib. of Broad River, 0.7 miles southwest of Danielsville on Route 29, 1@'I, E. I. Lachner, coll. Elbert County— 416 4-1550-2a, 2.5 miles east of Broad River on Route 77,20°' SII, 29 9, 1ljuv.c', D.C.S., coll.; 3-2751-5a, Morea Creek, 1.5 miles south of Nuberg on Route 77,299, E. C. Raney, coll. Stephens County— 4-947-2b, north fork Broad River, 3.7 miles west of Toccoa, 1 juv.c’, 1 juv.? E.C.R., coll. SoutH Carouina: Abbeville County—3-2751-1b, Calhoun Creek, 7.6 miles east of Calhoun Falls on Route 72, 2o' I, 1 juv.?, E.C.R. coll.; 3-2751-3, same locality, 1@#I, E.C.R., coll.; 3-2751-4, Long Crane Creek, 4.4 miles east of Abbeville, 19, E.C.R., coll.; 3-2751-6, Little River, 5.6 miles east of Calhoun Falls on Route 22, Ild' II, 229, 1 iii. OF sH-O. Risecoll. OcCMULGEE RIVER DRAINAGE Geroreia: Dekalb County—3-2950-2, Flat Shoals on South River near Decatur, 4c°'d@' I, 42°, E.C.R., coll. Discussion.—Procambarus raneyt inhabits trib- utaries of the Savannah River in the Piedmont Province in Georgia and South Carolina and is known from a single locality in the headwaters of the Oemulgee River (Altamaha River drain- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 age) in Dekalb County, Ga. This latter locality, an isolated one, is of considerable interest, for here this species is surrounded by its nearest relative, P. spiculifer (see map 1), which is found in the Chattahoochee, lower Ocmulgee, and Oconee drainages. The simplest explanation as to how P. raneyi gained entrance into the headwaters of the Ocmulgee would involve transport by human agencies. There seems to be little reason to assume, however, that once intro- duced into a stream which is largely dominated by P. spiculifer it would be able to replace the latter. Certainly from an anatomical standpoint it has no obvious advantageous characteristics, and there are no data available concerning the reproductive capacities of either species. Al- though there is no geological evidence, nor are there other evidences, to support any other explanation for their presence here, it does not seem amiss to pose the question as to whether or not the Dekalb County population represents a relict fauna. @P spiculifer AP versutus OP raneyi @P suttkusi 26 Fig. 13.—Map of locality records for four species of Procambarus. DECEMBER 1953 LITERATURE CITED Hacen, Herman. Monograph of the North Amert- can Astacidae. Illus. Cat. Mus. Comp. Zool., No. 3; 1-109 pls. 1-11. 1870. Hoses, Horton H., Jr. A new crayfish of the LOOMIS: NEW MILLIPEDS 417 genus Procambarus from Alabama and Florida. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 66: 173-178, 1953. LEeContveE, JoHN. Description of new species of As- tacus from Georgia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 7: 400-402. 1856. ZOOLOGY —New millipeds of the western States and Lower California. H. F. Loomis, Coconut Grove, Fla. For many years past there has been accumulating a number of interesting but undescribed millipeds in the writer’s collec- tion. These have not lent themselves to inclusion in systematic treatment of groups that have been prepared recently or are contemplated. Several of the species exhibit characters that affect the present concepts of the family or genus to which they belong and consequently are especially noteworthy. Types of species here described are deposited in the U. S. National Museum. Cambala caeca, n. sp. One broken male (type) from ‘‘inner area of bat cave,’ Wyatt Cave, and 12 females from Felton Cave taken ‘in association with bat guano” by O. G. Babcock, Sonora, Tex., 1922-23. U.S.N.M. no. 2087. Diagnosis Although departing in several par- ticulars, such as lack of eyes, the anterior seg- ments forming a necklike constriction, and the presence of claws on the first male legs, from the characters associated with the genus, the gono- pods are so definitely typical of Cambala as to require inclusion of the species there and cause modification of the generic concept involving the above characters. Description.—Length 22 to 25 mm. Number of segments of females 46 to 48, male type with 54. Head without eyes, smooth, the clypeus with 6 to 8 setae, the labrum with 12 to 14 setae; an- tennae with joint 2 longest, joint 6 broadest and next in length. First segment as long as the next three to- gether, anterior angle broadly rounded and flar- ing outward somewhat from the side of the head; posterior angle slightly produced backward; sur- face of segment smooth but with a fine raised rim along the lateral margin. Fig. 1. Segments 2 and 3 with sides converging back- ward to form a noticeable necklike constriction; segment 2 entirely smooth above with segment 3 usually so, but infrequently dorsal crests are faintly evident near the back margin. From segment 4 to the penultimate segment inclusive there are four strong, smooth, dorsal crests between the poriferous ones, the latter having the posterior half of the same thickness as the dorsal crests but the anterior half is two or three times as broad, slightly more elevated, and with the pore in the center. Sides of segments striate but the surface just below the upper stria elevated to form a noticeable ridge; prozonites crossed lengthwise by numerous thin, low, beaded ridges. Last segment smooth, as long as the two pre- ceding segments together. Anal valves smooth, meeting in a groove. Pre- anal scale broad, slightly thickened and emar- ginate at middle and with an erect seta on either side; tab processes large, each with a single seta. Gonopods as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. First male legs 6-jointed, the first and second joints short but twice the width of the following joint; last jomt not modified and with a normal claw. Legs 6 and 7 with joints 4 and 5 enlarged, the former with a large rounded lobe ventrally. Remarks.—In Ent. News 63: 10-11. 1952. Chamberlin described a new genus and species of cambalid from the same two caves and taken by the same collector as were the spécimens above referred to the genus Cambala. In comparing the specimens before me with Chamberlin’s generic and specific descriptions of Eclomus (Eclytus) speobius one is struck by the numerous points of similarity of the two species. E. speobius, how- ever, 1s said to have dorsal carinae somewhat developed on segment 2 and on the succeeding segments “‘sharply elevated and complete’’, whereas specimens of C. caeca show segment 2 with no semblance of dorsal carinae and in only a few specimens do they appear as faint eleva- tions near the posterior border of segment 3. In other particulars the similarity is remark- ably close but EH. speobius is credited with but 41-43 segments whereas mature specimens of the present species have 46-54. Since no male char- acters whatever were mentioned for EH. speobius it 418 JOURNAL OF THE may be inferred that the genus was founded on females, immature specimens or both. With the numerous specimens in both collections coming from the same very restricted locations it is most remarkable that in neither were both species represented. Should it be shown at a later date that but a single species is involved the rules of priority would require that Hclomus be placed as a synonym of Cambala and caeca would then become a synonym of speobia. Orthoporus arizonicus, n. sp. Two males, | the type, and a female collected at Patagonia, Ariz., in July 1949, by R. H. Pee- bles and sent to me alive. U.S.N.M. no. 2088. Diagnosis. Closely related to punctiliger Cham- berlin as indicated by the gonopods but the size is smaller, and more slender; the sculpturing of the segments, anal valves and preanal scale is simply punctate without rugae; and the first seg- ment has but two lateral striae. Description.—Length 85 to 88 mm, diameter 5 to 6 mm, number of segments 63 to 65. Living color cinnamon brown, with the posterior margin of the segments narrowly darker, legs and an- tennae also cinnamon brown. Head with finely impressed sulcus on vertex; front coarsely, longitudinally rugose-punctate below but lessening above; clypeal fovoea 13 or 14; eyes separated by over one and a half times the length of an eye, composed of 53 to 56 ocelli in 7 transverse rows. First segment (Fig. 4) with two prominent lat- eral striae only; anterior corner somewhat pro- duced in the male. All segments, as well as the anal valves and preannal scale, very finely punctate and without any impressed lines or rugosity; transverse sulcus strongly evident throughout, bowed forward around the pore which is a third of the way to the posterior margin; last segment rather acute at tip, considerably exceeded by the anal valves. Gonopods as shown in Fig. 5. Hiltonius palmaris, n. sp. Two males, 1 the type, and a female collected by the writer in Palm Canyon, Palm Springs, Calif., December 4, 1919. U.'S.N.M. no. 2089. Diagnosis ——Apparently most closely related to H. mimus Chamberlin but with distinct differ- ences in all parts of the gonopods and in the much larger coxal lobes of the third male legs. Description Length of body 35 to 50 mm, WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 width 4.3 to 6 mm; number of segments 48 to 49. Head with frontal groove strong and wide, that of the vertex not so pronounced; eyes sub- triangular, composed of 25 to 30 ocelli in 6 longi- tudinal rows; clypeal fovoea 4 to 5 on each side. Sides of the first, second and third segments as shown in Fig. 6; the anterior margining rim of segment | broad; following segments with a fine median sulcus and a sharply marked trans- verse constriction on either side of which the surface is faintly convex; pore in front of the con- striction but not touching it; midbelt with lateral sulcus faint or absent but that of the hindbelt broad and deep in front, diminishing caudally. Last segment sharply rounded, in one speci- men distinctly angulate; transverse impression faint. Anal valves quite evenly inflated, not more conspicuously so near the margins which meet in a shallow groove; surface punctate and with irregular wrinkles near the opening. Preanal scale broadly rounded and with longitudinal stria- tions, more distinct near the hind margin. Gonopods as shown in Figs. 7 and 8. Coxae of third male legs as shown in Fig. 9. Arinolus latus, n. sp. A number of specimens, including the male type, were collected from beneath stumps of Yucca arborescens in Antelope Valley between Lancaster and Palmdale, Calif., January 8, 1928, by O. F. Cook. U.S.N.M. no. 2090. Diagnosis.—Distinguished from the other spe- cies by the gonopods, particularly the inner ones, and also by the stout body, thickened posterior margins of the segments, very broadly rounded last segment, and the living color. Description.—Body very stout and abruptly constricted at the ends; 29 to 35 mm long and 3.5 to 4 mm thick, the females stouter than the males; segments 42 to 44. Living colors very strongly shining black with the hindbelt almost golden yellow, semi-trans- lucent. In alcohol the hindbelt changes to dull yellow. | Head with a deep median sulcus on the vertex, the surface of which is slightly rugose in contrast to the shining surface elsewhere; clypeus with 5 or 6 punctations each side; eyes inconspicuous, composed of about 24 to 26 low ocelli in 6 rows forming a rounded patch. First segment with the margin from behind the eye to the lateral angle strongly raised, the angle a little more acute than in torynophor Chamb. DECEMBER 1953 LOOMIS: NEW MILLIPEDS 419 Fies. 1-20.—1, Cambala caeca, n. sp., lateral view of first segment; 2, the same, anterior view of gono- pods; 3, the same, lateral view of posterior gonopods; 4, Orthoporus arizonicus, n. sp., lateral view of first segment; 5, the same, anterior view of gonopods; 6, Hiltonius palmaris, n. sp., lateral view of seg- ments 1, 2 and 3; 7, the same, anterior view of gonopods; 8, the same, lateral view of gonopods with inner gonopod extended; 9, the same, coxae of third male leg; 10, 11, Arznolus latus, n. sp., anterior and posterior views respectively of gonopods; 12, the same, anterior view of inner gonopod; 13, Scobinomus serratus, n.sp., lateral view of first segment; 14, the same, lateral view of lower side of mid- and hindbelt of segment 21; 15, 16, the same, anterior and posterior views respectively of gonopods; 17, the same, inner gonopod; 18, Chipus wnicus, n. sp., posterior or ventral view of gonopods which are foreshortened in this aspect; 19, Wotyxia expansa, n. sp., right gonopod; 20, Motyxia exilis, n. sp., right gonopod. 120 JOURNAL OF THE and decidedly more so than in hospes (Cook) and usually containing one or two rudimentary striae. Seements with the constriction shallow but evident, the pore located behind it; in lateral view the surface of the seements behind the constrictions is flatter than in the other spe- cies but the hind margins are decidedly thicker; lateral sutures usually not visible but occasion- ally faintly evident behind the pore on segments near the posterior end of the body; median sulcus visible on the posterior third of all segments from the first to the last inclusive, on the latter form- ing a conspicuous furrow on the apical portion; surface of fore and midbelts as in torynophor, the hindbelt punctate but less noticeably striate, except along the thickened hind margin. Posterior end of body very abruptly con- stricted, the segments immediately preceding the last strongly telescoped. Last segment short, mar- gin very much thickened, apex subtruncate, very much more broadly rounded than in the other species. Anal valves almost vertical and visible from above, much less inflated than in the other species, and with the margins meeting in a shal- low groove. Preanal scale broadly truncate at the apex, the lateral margins noticeably emarginate. Gonopods as shown in Figs. 10 to 12. Segment 6 of the males conspicuously wider and longer than the adjacent segments and also wider than segment 1. Males with coxae of legs 3 and 4 less produced than are those of 5, 6, or 7, which are much as in hospes but thicker. transverse Scobinomus, n. gen. Genotype: Scobinomus serratus, n. sp. Diagnosis.—Scobinae have been associated with many of the tropical rhinocricids but with none of the North American Atopetholidae. The presence of scobinae, though rudimentary, and emargination of the segments above them, in this genus indicate a distinct gap between it and all other known genera of the family. The gonopods bear some resemblance to those of Tarascolus Chamb. but the anteriorly exposed coxal joints of the posterior lobes and differently shaped inner gonopods are distinctive characters in ad- dition to the external ones. Description.—Body rather small and slender, from 10 to 12 times as long as broad; subclavate, the first four or five segments broader than the others. First segment with the lateral angles nar- WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 12 rowed and flaring away from the body, forming its widest part, and distinctly visible from above. Second segment slightly narrower than the first segment and without an anterior ventral production. Segments 3, 4, and 5 gradually nar- rowing, after which the segments remain of uni- form width to the posterior end of the body ex- cept that in the males segment 6 is expanded and nearly as wide as segment 2. Midbody segments with a strong constriction through the midbelt, the surface behind it con- spicuously convex; pore located nearly half way between the constriction and the back margin, immediately behind the suture separating the mid- and hindbelt, thus placing the pore in the latter. Scobinae present, represented by trans- versely striate areas usually apparent as far for- ward as segment 6; segments in the scobinate region of the body with the posterior border emarginate adjacent to each scobina of the ensu- ing segment. Ventral striations reaching about half way to the pore, the marginal angle below each striation carried back into a slender, acute tooth. Last segment of normal length, the apex broadly rounded and not carried beyond the strongly convex anal valves. Gonopods with ventral plate short, transverse, not produced at middle; coxal joints of posterior lobes extensively exposed on either side in front; inner gonopods with apical joint short and stout. Legs long and slender, surpassing the sides of the body. Males with the first two pairs enlarged, the claws double the thickness and length of those on the other legs; coxae of third legs greatly elevated and with the apex bent backward; coxae of ensuing pregenital legs somewhat elevated but not reflexed. Scobinomus serratus, n. sp. Male type and three other specimens from 14 miles north of Ensenada, Lower California, January 7, 1925, and three specimens from Cere- gas Canyon, 8 to 10 miles from Ensenada, Janu- ary 5, 1925; collected by O. F. Cook. U.S.N.M. no. 2091. Description —Length 30 to 35 mm, width 2.5 to 2.8 mm; number of segments 42 to 46; males more slender than females. Head with antennae quite slender, joint 2 slightly longest, joits 3 and 6 subequal and next in length, joint 1 slightly longer than joint 7; ocelli 30 to 33 in six series forming a circular DECEMBER 1953 cluster; median furrow very faint on the vertex but strongly impressed on the clypeus. First segment (Fig. 13) emarginate below the eye and with a broad thickened rim; lateral an- gles narrowly produced downward and flaring outward from the body and forming its widest part, the angles visible from above; surface of the angulation, behind the anterior rim, with 2 to 5 short striae reaching forward from the pos- terior margin. Body not shining but with a dull sheen caused by minute reticulation of the entire dorsal sur- face; in addition there are a few fine punctations more apparent on the anterior end of the body and on the last segment; forebelt of all segments finely transversely striate; midbelt containing a broad transverse constriction that is lacking on the posterior segments; pore located in the anterior portion of the hindbelt which is strongly convex on constricted segments; scobinae, repre- sented by large, triangular, transversely striate areas, as broad as long and lacking an anterior pit, are present from segment 6 or 7 to just be- yond the middle of the body, the posterior mar- gin of the segments in the scobinate region emar- ginate above each scobina of the succeeding segment; ventral striations reaching only half- way to the pores, the posterior marginal angle below each stria produced as a rather long slender tooth, these teeth present on all but four or five segments at each end of body (Fig. 14). Penultimate segment almost entirely tele- scoped within the preceding segment, the last segment not telescoped, the apex produced and very broadly rounded but not exceeding the strongly convex anal valves which meet in a deep groove. Gonopods as shown in Figs. 15 and 16, with a large soft, and fleshy mass above the middle of the ventral plate between the anterior lobes and with a similar fleshy mass on either side at the basal junction of the anterior lobe and the coxal joint of the posterior lobe. Anterior lobes subquadrate, strongly produced at the inner distal corner, each lobe enclosed on the outer side by the conspicuous coxal jomt of the pos- terior lobe, outer joint of the latter rather small, subtriangular, with the apex produced. Inner gonopods as in Fig. 17, the outer joint short, stout, and excavated on the inner side. Chipus, n. gen. Genotype: Chipus unicus, n. sp. Diagnosis —Immediately distinguished from LOOMIS: NEW MILLIPEDS 421 all other members of the family Chelodesmidae by the curious elongated and crossed gonopods which clasp the sides of the body. Description.—Body strongly convex with lat- eral carinae more strongly projecting in the male; posterior angles rounded-obtuse, not produced backward except on two or three segments pre- ceding the last; carinae of segment 19 greatly reduced in size and thickness and with the slightly produced posterior angles small and acute. Seg- ment 1 with distinct raised margin on the sides in front. Gonopods unique in that the principal or pos- terior divisions are long, slender, two-parted and crossing each other, curving forward and upward between legs 5 and 6 and extending halfway up the sides of the body to the lateral carinae. Coxae of third male legs each with a hispid, tumid prominence on the ventral face. Chipus unicus, n. sp. A male (type) and female collected by A. Gib- son, July 20, 1949, in forest of western white pine, western fir, larch, cedar, and hemlock on west fork of Emerald Creek, St. Joe National Forest, Idaho. U.S.N.M. no. 2092. Description —Length 30 mm, width 5 mm; both sexes strongly convex, the female much more so. Head with a deep furrow on the vertex ex- tending downward to between the antennae; labrum and clypeus each with a fringe of close spaced setae, those of the clypeus much the longest; side of head above the clypeal fringe with 6 to 8 widely separated setae, a pair between the antennae and a more widely spaced pair on the vertex; antennae slender, not as long as width of the body and with joints 2-6 inclusive subequal in width and length. First segment with a rather thick, raised margin extending from just below the antennae to the lateral angle on each side. Lateral carinae of male projecting outward nearly twice as far as those of female; margins of carinae thickened, posterior angles rounded- obtuse and not produced backward except very slightly on segments 17 and 18, the carinae of segment 19 greatly reduced in size, thin, and with the posterior corner on each side small, acute and definitely produced behind the median margin. Pores opening outward from the cus- tomary segments. Gonopods (Fig. 18) with the posterior divi- 429 sions very long and slender, crossing each other and passing up the sides of the body, between legs 5 and 6, half way to the lateral carinae; outer portion of each division composed of two slender subequal closely applied pieces; anterior division of gonopods small, conical and not projecting beyond the opening in the segment; the margin of the opening through which the gonopods project thinly raised, highest on the sides. Coxae of third male legs each with a rounded, hispid lobe on the ventral face. Motyxia expansa, n. sp. One male (type) and two females collected at “The Grapevine” below Fort Tejon, Calif., February 28, 1929, by O. F. Cook. U.S.N.M. no. 2093. Diagnosis.—Differing from Chamberlin’s te- jona and monica in minor details of the gonopods, and from the latter, at least, in the more re- stricted carinae of segments 18 and 19. Description —Male 25 mm long and 4.5 mm wide, the largest female 27 mm long and 5 mm wide; male almost as convex as females. Living color in general light salmon which is most intense on the lateral carinae and along the posterior half of the segments; head, an- tennae, legs and ventral surface uncolored. Segments 2, 3 and 4 of typical shape but segments 17, 18 and 19 with lateral carinae much less produced than those of monica, seg- ment 19 being almost completely hidden within 18 and its posterior angles small, inconspicuous and very widely separated. Gonopods as shown in Fig. 19, rising from a transversely oval opening having a thick raised rim behind. Third male legs each with a rounded coxal lobe, higher than broad, at the inner angle; sternum between fourth legs with a pair of broad, low, rounded elevations. Remarks.—It is obvious that expansa, tejona JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 12 and monica are very closely related, but if details of the authors’ drawings of the gonopods of these species are compared, it will be seen that specific differences exist. Following the descrip- tion of tejona (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 99: 25, 1947) Chamberlin listed the other species in the genus but overlooked monica. Having done so, it is probable that he did not compare tejona with its closest known relative, but he did compare it with the more distantly related kerna. Motyxia exilis, n. sp. Several males, one the type, and several fe- males collected at Woodford, near Tehachapi, Calif., January 8, 1928, by O. F. Cook. U.S.N.M. no. 2094. Diagnosis.—The three slender terminal divi- sions of the gonopods immediately distinguish this species. Description.—Somewhat more sturdy than expansa, a small male being 25 mm long and 5.5 mm wide and the largest specimen, a female, 30 mm long and 7 mm wide, the males obviously less convex than females. Living color not noted but the alcoholic specimens are light in shade. Segments 2, 3 and 4 of customary shape. Segments 17, 18 and 19 with posterior angles backwardly produced; those of segment 18 most prominent; those of segment 19 very small and widely separated; posterior angles of these three segments more acute in males than females and moreso than in either monica or expansa. Gonopods as shown in Fig. 20. They protrude from an opening extending backward at middle between the coxae of the eighth legs and with the margining rim higher and thinner than in expansa, the coxae less widely separated than in that species. Males with coxae of third legs each with a smaller lower lobe than in expansa; sternum between the fourth legs with the two transverse elevations more pronounced than in expansa. HERPETOLOGY.—A new snake of the genus Oligodon from Annam. ALAN KE. Leviton, Natural History Museum, cated by Doris M. Cochran.) Recently Dr. Doris Cochran, of the United States National Museum, submitted the entire collection of the genus Olzgodon in the Museum to me for study. She called my attention to one specimen from Indo-China Stanford University, Calif. (Communi- that she was unable to identify and pre- sumed to represent a new species. Subse- quent study has led to the confirmation of Dr. Cochran’s suspicions. DECEMBER 1953 Oligodon annamensis, n. sp. Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 90408, young female, from Blao, Haut Donai, Annam, French Indo- China; collected by E. Poilane, March 11, 1933. Diagnosis —The new species of Oligodon dif- fers from all previously described forms by a combination of the following characteristics: Maxillary teeth 8, anal shield single, scales in 13 rows, loreal absent, 6 upper labials, 1 postocular, internasals present. Description.—Rostral well developed, as broad as deep, the portion visible from above less than half its distance to the frontal. Internasals broader than wide, not separated by the rostral; profrontals larger than the internasals, about one and one-third times as broad as wide, in con- tact with the second upper labial, nasal, and pre- ocular shields; frontal one and one-third times longer than its distance to the snout, somewhat longer than broad, two times as wide as the su- praocular, slightly shorter than the parietals; nasal large, partially divided; loreal absent; one preocular and one postocular; temporals 1 + 2. There are six upper labials, the third and fourth enter the eye; the order in decreasing size is 5, 6, 4, 3, 2, 1. Six lower labials, the first four in contact with the anterior genials which are about two times as long as the posterior shields. Ventrals 170; subcaudals 30; anal single; scales in 13-13-13 rows. Maxillary teeth 8, the extreme anterior por- tion of the maxillary bone edentulous. Three well developed palatine teeth present; no pterygoid teeth were observed. Kye moderate, its diameter equal to twice its distance to the lip; pupil round. Measurements —Total length, 249 mm; tail length, 29 mm. Coloration.—(Specimen preserved in 75 per cent alcohol.) Ground color light brown. On the head there are several areas of white, black- edged blotches; these include an interocular band, a short interparietal bar, and some small areas on the anterior portion of the snout. The rostral is white, strongly spotted by dark flecks as are the white areas of the bars on the head. A white blotch just in front of the eye covers parts of the second and third upper labials; another blotch extends from the fifth and sixth upper labials diagonally forward to the top of the head where it meets with the interocular band just above the eye. Both of these lateral white areas extend onto the lower labials and genials. There is a long oblique stripe on the neck which extends forward LEVITON: NEW SNAKE 493 and onto the posterior edge of the parietal; this stripe does not meet its fellow on the parietals. The body is transversed by a series of white black-edged bars, some of which are indistinct; this pattern extends onto the tail. Most of the body scales are edged by darker brown and are all peppered by fine dark flecks. Ventrally the ground color is white; many of the ventrals and subcaudals are either partially or completely covered by dark brown or black quadrangular spots. Remarks: There are but three species in the genus Oligodon with which annamensis could be confused, 1.e., ornatus, catenata, and violaceus pallidocinctus (= cinereus, var. IV of Smith, 1943). It can be distinguished from these three forms as follows: ornatus—annamensis has an un- divided anal plate and 13 scale rows while ornatus has a divided plate and 15 scale rows; catenata- annamensis has a single anal plate and a distinct pair of internasal shields while catenata has a divided anal plate and lacks internasals; cinereus, Fie. 1—Holotype of Oligodon annamensis, U.S.N.M. no. 90408. (Photograph by Antenor L. Carvalho) 424 JOURNAL OF THE var. [V—annamensis lacks the loreal and has 13 scale rows while cinereus has a loreal shield and either 15 or 17 scale rows. There can be little doubt that annamensis represents a degenerate”? species. This is exem- plified by the reduction in the number of head shields, 1.e., loss of the loreal, fewer upper labials, and low number of scale rows. Since the tendency toward the reduction in numbers of scales is to be found among many species that represent sev- eral species groups within the genus Oligodon, ereat care must be exercised in the interpretation of these traits, and any conclusions concerning relationships derived from such data must be aecepted on a provisional basis. A thorough study of the structure of the hemipenes, a problem that I am at present working on, seems to offer the only means by which the seemingly complex evolutionary history of the genus will be un- scrambled. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 12 Because of the lack of data concerning the structure of the hemipenes to be found in anna- mensis, any statement of relationships must be for the present considered purely speculative. However, from the evidence available it seems most likely that annamensis was derived from cinereus. The validity of this supposition must be determined in the future when and if addi- tional specimens of this species, particularly males, may be available for examination. REFERENCES Bourret, R. Les serpents de L’Indochine 2: Catalogue systématique descripttf, 505 pp., 189 figs. Toulouse, 1936. Leviton, A. E. Review of the genus Oligodon. Pts.eleand alien vise) Pore, C.H. The reptiles of China, lii + 542 pp., 27 pls., figs. American Museum of Natural History, 1935. SmitH, M.A. Fauna of British India, 3: Serpents, 583 pp., 166 figs. London, 1943. ICHTHYOLOGY —The fishes of the tidewater section of the Pamunkey Ruver, Virginia. E>warp C. Ranny and Witiiam H. Massmann, Cornell University and Virginia Fisheries Laboratory.! The distribution of the fish fauna of the tidewater section of most of the rivers that flow into Chesapeake Bay is poorly known. Indeed, this is true for practically all the great rivers tributary to the Atlantic from the Hudson southward to the Savannah. The few investigations usually have con- centrated on commercial species and our understanding of distribution has _ been inferred from the knowledge of nearby Coastal Plain streams reported in such studies as those by Hildebrand and Schroe- der (1928), Fowler (1945), Raney (1950), and Massmann, Ladd, McCutcheon (1952). In 1949 the junior author began a study of the spawning and early life history of shad in the Pamunkey and other nearby Virginia rivers and collected with seines at numerous locations in the tidal area. After exploratory seining, many of the stations were visited at almost weekly intervals during the period June 28 to September 29, 1949. Since that time additional collections have been made at established stations on the Pamunkey indicated on the map (Fig. 1). 1Gontribution from the Virginia Fisheries Laboratory. A minnow seine, 20 feet long and 4 feet in depth, was used in all but six collections when a net 75 by 6 feet was employed. All seines had a bar mesh size of 14 inch. The collections included 113 samples taken by minnow seine, 15 by surface trawl, 6 by rotenone, 4 by bottom trawl, and a series of plankton net collections which often contained small fishes. Continuous observa- tions were made on the commercial and sport fisheries. Many of the collections were sent to the senior author, who is responsible for the identification of all but the clupeid fishes. A total of 59 species were taken in the Coastal Plain region of the Pamunkey River and its tributaries; 52 were limited to the tidewater section. DESCRIPTION OF THE LOWER PAMUNKEY RIVER The Pamunkey River (Fig. 1) originates on the Piedmont plateau at the confluence of the North and South Anna Rivers, 5 miles northeast of Ashland, Va., and empties into the York River at West Point. The tidal region extends about 42 nautical miles up- stream to the vicinity of Bassett Bar. At West Point, salinities ranging from 0 to DECEMBER 1953 12.6 parts per thousand have been recorded; the river generally becomes fresh between West Point and Romancoke at a point 8 miles upstream. The precise boundary be- tween fresh and brackish water varies with river runoff, wind, and tide, as does the head of the tide itself. The tidal range averages about 3 feet. Turbidities, as meas- ured with a Secchi disk, range from 27 to 61 em; the upper sections of the river are generally clearer than the lower reaches. Submergent vegetation, of which the pre- dominant form is Nivtella, although sparse in the river, is found in abundance in a few protected coves. The tidal portion of the river may be divided into three rather homogeneous physiographic areas each approximately 15 miles in length. Area J (Fig. 1) is char- acterized by a wide channel which is from 20 to 60 feet deep and rather steep mud banks. It is surrounded by extensive tidal marshes. Eight small gravel and/or sand Bor f 4 7 RANEY AND MASSMANN: PAMUNKEY RIVER FISHES 425 beaches are present in this section. Area II is centered near Lester Manor. Here the river generally is wider, and is fed by many marsh creeks. Shoal areas, less than 5 feet in depth, are extensive, and numerous coves are present. The shoreline is mostly wooded. About a dozen sand and/or gravel beaches suitable for seining are present. Area III has an average depth of 12 feet, and few shoal areas, which are located in the mouths of tributary creeks. The muddy banks are rather steep and only about six small sand and/or gravel beaches are suited to seining. The shoreline is generally forested. FISHERIES OF THE PAMUNKEY RIVER The American shad and ecatfishes (/cta- lurus) are the major species of commercial importance on the Pamunkey River. Shad are caught during the spawning run in spring, mainly with drift gill nets, although a few set or stake gill nets are fished at West Point. In depth the drift nets may be PAMUNKEY RIVER Nautical Miles Lester Manor Romancoke West Point 7 7 Fra. 1—The tidewater section of the Pamunkey River between its mouth at West Point and Bassett Bar a point approximately 42 nautical miles upstream, showing localities mentioned in text 426 JOURNAL OF THE as much as 25 feet, depending on the water depths being fished; in length they vary from one-quarter to one-half the width of the channel. In area I, striped bass are often taken in shad nets. The alewife, glut herring, and hickory shad are also captured but generally, because of their smaller size, these fishes escape through the meshes of shad nets. A few small hoop fyke nets are fished in area I and their catch includes white perch, glut herring, alewife, and catfishes. In the vicinity of Lester Manor, a single haul seine operates and takes white perch, carp, striped bass, gizzard shad, and _ redhorse sucker. Catfishes are generally taken in cat- fish pots although two fishermen still use the more primitive trot lines. With the ex- ception of catfish pots, White House is the upper limit of commercial fishing on the Pamunkey, since the river beyond that point is not suited to the use of commercial nets. To obtain small quantities of fish for local consumption herring drift nets and set gill nets are sometimes used. Extensive angling is not carried on, but striped bass, large- mouth bass, catfishes, white perch, yellow perch and sunfishes are taken. ANNOTATED LIST OF FISHES The following annotated list includes only those fishes taken in the tidewater section. Their distribution in the several areas of the river is given in Table 1. The number appearing at the end of each species account represents the percentage frequency of occurrence in seine hauls. (See ,also Table 2.) PETROMYZONTIDAE Petromyzon marinus Linnaeus: Sea Lamprey Although no sea lamprey was caught or ob- served during the survey, it has been seen in the adjacent Chickahominy and Rappahannock Rivers. Local fishermen reported its capture in past years when nets of smaller mesh were com- monly used. ACIPENSERIDAE Acipenser oxyrhynchus (Mitchill): Atlantic Sturgeon A small specimen was taken in a shad drift net at Lester Manor. Formerly common, it is now seldom seen. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 43, No. 12 TABLE 1.—Phylogenetically arranged list of the Coastal Plain fishes of the Pamunkey River system. Areas I, II, and III are from the tidewater section of the lower Pamunkey River as shown in Fig. 1. Area IV represents collections from tributaries to the tidewater section and the upstream Pa- munkey River from Bassett Bar to the Fall Line. Species marked by an asterisk were also collected in the Piedmont region of the Pamunkey River system. Type of record: X—collected, O—observed, R—reliably reported by fisher- men, Area Species ee eee I II III IV FCUOMUZON MONIT US epee eee ne R Acipenser oxyrhynchus..............- egy 5) WEDPISOStCiUsSiOMOSSCUBAE Ee Ee een x KS AGNIG COG. Awe st chasianeyn dee ee Cee [* Be x AILOSCMINEDLOCTISS ELE Eee ere x x INUO CSO code basa soc daoceunk x Exe x Alosa pseudoharengus................ x x x Alosa sapidissima...................- x x x BreEvoorntia tynanwus.. ee eee x x Dorosoma cepedianum............... x x Anchoa. mes mitchltnn.. 4. sees x xe ANY ZONNO NODLONGUS ae nee ere x Mozostoma macrolepidotum*......... x x x Cyprinusican, iO eee eee eee O NEMOMIWSICOnDOTAUIS: ere eee x x x Semotilus a. atromaculatus*......... b,< Hybopsis leptocephalus*.............. x Notemigonus c. crysoleucas........... x ax x x INO ODUSATUOCIUILS EEE ae: eee x Notropis hudsonius saludanus........ x x x x Notropis analostanus*...............- x axe x x Hybognathus nuchalis regius......... xe x x x NGOQPOGHS COMO: sah ebodsansoeuesedsace x x x x Tetanus pa puUnclatusse eee nena xX x x Ameiurus natalis erebennus.......... p< x x AN ETINUS 1 NILCOMLOSUSh Eee een x x Sclilbeotessmollisea ee ae ee eer x x x Schilbeodes m. marginatus*.......... XG x Ganbiawpy qi acae ee eee eee IX S02 NAG ET oe eee ee ».< De axe ISOTRATIERUCAIVIES AE eee axe xX ANGLE PORTO so o502cseces0c00s5¢ x x ax ox Fundulus heteroclitus macrolepidotus| X x x Fundulus d. diaphanus.............. x x x x Gambusia affinis holbrooki............ ».€ Xi de xX Aphredoderus s. sayanus*............ x ISETOTLGULUTO TOU a ae ee x x IROCCUS SALAS ER eee eee X x x x WNCROME CHOTPUCVOUs obs Ab okeasccese 50% x x x axe er CORLAVESCEILSHE Ee ee eee x x oxe xX Etheostoma nigrum olmstedi......... xe x x x Micropterus s. salmoides............. xX x x x IGePOMUSegGLODOSUSE. eee ee eee xX x d€ x Lepomis m. macrochirus*............. aXe x x aXe eC DOTUISIOL UG Se eee axe Xia lege x Centrarchus macropterus.............. xX Pomozis nigromaculatus.............. BXe ».¢ x x Enneacanthus gloriosus............... axe Xe i) DEX x IE RN CACANURILSKOUES Sie ee eee x ACOMURGT.CUS PONLOLIS! eee a eee xX Menuinaiberyllinas tes oer eee eee x x x Mienrdiasmentdio en nee eee ene x x PAE DIA ULSIALENULOLUS hee ree ae eee xX (OM POSCOCIO. BRALHWISis sb ke onsnesessonc- x Letostomus zanthurus..............-. x Macropogon undulatus-sss--22- ee x x CODIDSETOD CONC soo nc cSes dhe yssc se See! x Poralienthysiientatiseenees eee eee x I MECLES IIL ACILLGCTALS ae ee x x x DECEMBER 1953 LEPISOSTEIDAE Lepisosteus osseus osseus (Linnaeus): Eastern Longnose Gar Numerous in areas I and II. On one boat trip large numbers of adults were observed near the surface between West Point and White House. One shad fishing reach near Lester Manor is sel- dom used because the gar, which damage shad nets, is so abundant in the area. Only three young gar were taken by minnow seine. 4. AMIIDAE Amia calva Linnaeus: Bowfin Several were observed on the beach at the Pamunkey Indian Reservation where they had been discarded from gill net catches, and two were col'ected near Bassett Bar. Fishermen re- ported an increase in abundance in recent years. CLUPEIDAE Alosa mediocris (Mitchill): Hickory Shad It migrates into the Pamunkey in spring to spawn and females in various stages of ripeness, and spent specimens were frequently seen al- though Hildebrand and Schroeder (1928, p. 84) reported to the contrary. This species was ob- served in commercial catches from West Point to White House. Although only three juveniles were collected while seining, 91 young were taken in two 15-minute hauls with a surface trawl in area I. 2. Alosa aestivalis (Mitchill): Glut Herring The most abundant of the river herrings. It generally spawns in tidal waters, but sometimes also in the tributaries. The main spawning migra- tion follows that of the American shad, and usu- ally occupies about three weeks. During this short but heavy run, canneries are often supplied with more herring than they can utilize, hence the common name, glut herring. However, this herring generally is not taken commercially on the Pamunkey since almost the entire fishing effort is directed toward the more valuable Amer- ican shad. Juveniles are present in large num- bers during the summer months and probably constitute one of the most important forage fishes. Young glut herring were collected at most stations from brackish waters to the head of tide- water. 35. RANEY AND MASSMANN: PAMUNKEY RIVER FISHES 427 Alosa pseudoharengus (Wilson): Alewife The main spawning run generally precedes that of the American shad by several weeks. Spawning often takes place in tributaries, but also in tidal waters. Young have been taken from all sections of the river. 17. Alosa sapidissima (Wilson): American Shad The main spawning run arrives in April al- though a few adult shad have been observed in the commercial catch from November to July. Spawning takes place in the freshwater tidal sec- tion of the river but is most concentrated in area II, as reported by Massmann (1952). Young shad were taken at most stations in fresh tidal waters. Greater numbers of young shad have been col- lected in the Pamunkey than in the Mattaponi or Rappahannock rivers. 57. Brevoortia tyrannus (Latrobe): Menhaden Although the menhaden is primarily a marine species, young are often found in fresh water. From area I, postlarval menhaden 20 to 30 mm. in length were collected in plankton nets during April, 1950. In the summer young menhaden were seined at stations in areas I and II. Collee- tions from the Rappahannock River indicate that large numbers of young may be found in fresh-water during the summer months. 5. Dorosoma cepedianum (LeSueur) : Gizzard Shad Observed at Lester Manor, where a few were taken in shad nets. Juveniles were collected in the mouth of a tidal creek, one mile south of Sweet Hall Landing. Fishermen reported that this species has become scarce in the past ten years. ENGRAULIDIDAE Anchoa mitchilli mitchilli (Valenciennes) : Anchovy Although typically marine, all stages of this anchovy from post-larvae to adult, may be pres- ent in large numbers in the rivers. The occurrence of postlarval specimens in fresh water suggests that it may spawn in or near the Pamunkey. It was co'lected from areas I and II. 16. CATOSTOMIDAE Moxostoma macrolepidotum (LeSueur): Eastern Redhorse Sucker This is the common sucker of the region. It 4:28 was found in all parts of the river. Young and juveniles were taken in seines, and adults were noted in summer gill net catches. 20. CYPRINIDAE Cyprinus carpio (Linnaeus): Carp Occasionally taken in the haul seine operated from Lester Manor. Not common in the Pamun- key but the carp is fished commercially in both the Chickahominy and James rivers. Semotilus corporalis (Mitchill): Fallfish Two juveniles were taken from area I and four- teen adults were caught in one-half hour of an- eling at Bassett Bar. However, the favorite habitat of this form is upstream from the Fall Line. 2. Notemigonus crysoleucas crysoleucas (Mitchill): Eastern Golden Shiner A sluggish water form which was taken more frequently in coves than from the river channel. Collected at many locations between brackish water and the head of tidewater. 6. Notropis amoenus (Abbott): Attractive Shiner A single juvenile was taken in area III. Typi- cally found upstream in pools usually near mov- ing water. |. Notropis hudsonius saludanus (Jordan and Brayton): Southern Spottail Shiner This gregarious shiner, one of the most com- mon fishes in the shore zone, was taken in all sections of the river. It is probably an important forage fish. 63. Notropis analostanus (Girard): Satinfin Shiner This shiner was slightly more abundant than the spottail shiner in collections made during 1949, 1950, and 1951. In 1952 the spottail shiner appeared in approximately the same abundance as in previous years, but the satinfin shiner was searce. It is an excellent bait minnow. 60. Hybognathus nuchalis regius (Girard): Eastern Silvery Minnow This common minnow, taken from all three river areas was generally more abundant in the river proper than in coves. 20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 43, No. 12 AMEIURIDAE Ictalurus catus Linnaeus: White Catfish An important commercial species and common in most of the river. It was seined about as fre- quently as the channel catfish. Fishermen re- ported that the white catfish will not enter cat- fish pots as readily as the channel catfish, and often used underwater fyke nets in areas where the former is more abundant. 12. Ictalurus punctatus punctatus (Rafinesque): Channel Catfish This introduced species is of about equal im- portance commercially as the native white cat- fish. The catfish fishery on the Chickahominy River was described by Menzel (1943). 10. Ameiurus natalis erebennus Jordan: Southern Yellow Bullhead Adults and young, taken in only three collec- tions, were found in areas I and II. This species is common in the Chickahominy River. Ameiurus nebulosus nebulosus (LeSueur): Northern Brown Bullhead Collected only once in the Pamunkey at Sweet Hall Landing. It is common in some of the ponds near the tidewater section and was taken fre- quently in collections from the Rappahannock River. Fishermen reported that it occasionally was taken on the mud flats by set gill nets. Schilbeodes mollis (Hermann): Tadpole Madtom Adults and young were taken from all three areas and it was more abundant it coves than in the river proper. 6. Schilbeodes marginatus marginatus (Baird): Common Eastern Madtom One adult was taken in a plankton net at Lester Manor. The species is typically found in riffes at or above the Fall Line where it is fairly common. It is probably to be considered a strag- gler in the lower river. EsocIDAE Esox niger (LeSueur): Chain Pickerel Adults were taken from a cove at Sweet Hall Landing and a creek mouth at Bassett Bar. This species.seems to avoid tidal waters where local fishermen also reported it as rare. It is fairly DECEMBER 1953 common in the tributaries and upstream from the Fall Line. Esox americanus Gmelin: Bulldog Pickerel Like the chain pickerel this species is seldom seen in the tidal section of the river. Several were collected at the mouth of a tidal creek near Bassett Bar. ANGUILLIDAE Anguilla rostrata (Le Sueur): American Eel This eel was collected at almost every locality on the Pamunkey River. Many elvers were taken in plankton nets during the spring. 17. CYPRINODONTIDAE Fundulus heteroclitus macrolepidotus (Walbaum) : Mummichog A more typically marine killifish which was taken most frequently near saltwater, but was found throughout the tidewater section. 7. Fundulus diaphanus diaphanus (Le Sueur): Eastern Banded Killifish Slightly more than one-half of the seine col- lections contained this killifish. It was common in hauls from stations near brackish water to the head of the tide. 55. POECILIIDAE Gambusia affinis holbrooki (Girard): Eastern Mosquitofish A typical quiet water Coastal Plain form: which more frequently appeared in hauls made in coves and backwaters. It was taken in each of the three river areas. 18. BELONIDAE Strongylura marina (Walbaum): Atlantic Needlefish This marine species was collected only in areas II and III, but undoubtedly occasionally oc- curred in area I. One specimen 23 mm. in length was taken by dip net at Lester Manor in April. This species and other members of the Belonidae are well known for their habit of entering fresh- waters and are sometimes found far from the sea. 2. SERRANIDAE Roccus saxatilis (Walbaum): Striped Bass Young were taken in seine collections from all RANEY AND MASSMANN: PAMUNKEY RIVER FISHES 429 three river areas. Tresselt (1952) found striped bass eggs only in area I. Adults, often taken in the spring by shad fishermen, occur most fre- quently downriver from Lester Manor. However, anglers have taken striped bass in June ten miles above Bassett Bar. The species appears to be more abundant in both the Mattaponi and Rap- pahannock rivers than in the Pamunkey. 35. Morone americana (Gmelin): White Perch A common and widely distributed species col- lected in more than half of the seine hauls be- tween brackish water and the head of the tide. Although frequently seined it does not appear to be as abundant in the Pamunkey as in the James or Rappannock rivers. In the past it was taken in set gill nets fished near Lester Manor in Janu- ary or February but this fishery has been dis- continued. Most of the white perch now taken are captured in hoop fyke nets located in area heb: PERCIDAE Perca flavescens (Mitchill): Yellow Perch Collected mostly in coves and creek mouths from all three river areas. 12. Etheostoma nigrum olmstedi (Storer): Tessellated Johnny Darter Common and widespread, this species was taken in more than one-half the seine collections in all areas of the river. 53. CENTRARCHIDAE Micropterus salmoides salmoides (Lacépede) : Northern Largemouth Bass Taken in collections from all three areas, but appears to prefer creeks and coves to the river _— proper. 7. Lepomis gibbosus (Linnaeus): Pumpkinseed Sunfish Captured in samples from all areas and was taken about one-half as often as the bluegill. 16. Lepomis macrochirus macrochirus Rafinesque: Common Bluegill A widespread and common species which ap- parently exceeds the other sunfishes in abun- dance. 36. Lepomis auritus (Linnaeus) : Yellowbelly Sunfish Found throughout the river. It appears to be 430 JOURNAL OF THE more typically a river fish than are the other cen- trarchids, for it was more abundant in collections from the main stream than in coves. However, it also is widespread in its upstream distribution and is often common in small tributaries. 22. Pomoxis nigromaculatus (LeSueur) : Black Crappie Occurred in seattered collections from all three river areas. 10. Enneacanthus gloriosus (Holbrook): Bluespot Sunfish Taken in collections from brackish waters to the head of the tide. It was more abundant in coves than in the river proper. 11. Enneacanthus obesus (Girard): Banded Sunfish Taken only once in the mouth of a creek at Sweet Hall Landing. ATHERINIDAE Menidia beryllina (Cope): Glassy Silverside Collections from all areas of the river included this species and it appears to be more abundant in the tidal freshwaters than in salt water. Al- though abundant in collections from the river course, 1t was seldom taken in coves. 24. Menidia menidia (Linnaeus): Atlantic Silverside Occurred in areas I and II and is common in Chesapeake Bay. This species occasionally is found in freshwater. 6. STROMATEIDAE Peprilus alepidotus (Linnaeus) : Harvestfish - Several were taken by surface trawl 5 miles upriver from West Point. When collected at high tide the surface salinity was 8.9 parts per thou- sand but on the succeeding low tide the water at that location became fresh. Harvest fish have been collected from waters of even lower salinity in the Mattaponi River but have not yet been found by us in water that was completely fresh. ScIAENIDAE Cynoscion regalis (Bloch and Schneider): Gray Squeteague Young were taken by surface trawl in the fresh- waters of area I. This species is generally found in salt water, but was recorded from freshwater by Gunter (1942). WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 43, No. 12 Leiostomus xanthurus Lacépede: Spot Young spot 20 to 40 mm. in length were taken in plankton nets while juveniles were collected by seine and surface trawl in area I. Spot was taken in both fresh and brackish waters. In the Rappahannock River it was collected 23 miles above brackish water and young have also been taken in the freshwaters of Mattaponi River. 3. Micropogon undulatus Linnaeus: Atlantic Croaker Young 20 to 30 mm. in length were collected in plankton nets in area I and small specimens were taken in plankton nets set at Lester Manor (area IT) in March, 1949. Both croaker and spot have been recorded previously from freshwater by Gunter (1942). Their occurrence in fresh- water at such a small size is unusual, for both species are believed to spawn in the ocean out- side of Chesapeake Bay. Young of both species have also been taken in plankton nets in fresh- waters of the Mattaponi River. GOBIIDAE Gobiosoma bosci Lacépede: Naked Goby Several specimens were collected in one seine haul five miles above West Point. This species is commonly taken near oyster beds which are not found in the Pamunkey River. 1. HIPPOGLOSSIDAE Paralichthys dentatus (Linnaeus): Summer Flounder A single specimen of this typically salt-water species was seined 5 miles above West Point. It is commonly caught commercially in the York River below West Point. 1. ACHIRIDAE Trinectes maculatus (Bloch and Schneider): Hogchoker Young were especially common in the tidal freshwaters. It was taken in many samples from the mouth of the Pamunkey River to the head of the tide. 28. FISHES oF ADJACENT SECTIONS Scattered collections were made in small streams tributary to the tidewater section and from the Coastal Plain area of the Pamunkey upstream from the limit of Bas- sett Bar (area III). The tributary streams were typically clear and shallow with sand DECEMBER 1953 RANEY AND MASSMANN: bottom and slight gradient, and all flow through wooded areas. Two of the best stations were located in pools just below mill dams. The stations in the Pamunkey River above area III were deep with steep banks which made seining difficult. Fishes taken in the above situations were Hrimyzon oblongus oblongus (Mitchill), eastern creek chubsucker; Semotilus atromaculatus atro- maculatus (Mitchill), northern creek chub; Hybopsis leptocephalus (Girard), Carolina chub; Umbra pygmaea, eastern mudminnow; Aphredoderus sayanus sayanus (Gilliams), eastern pirateperch; Centrarchus macrop- terus (Lacépedé), flier; and Acantharcus pomotis (Baird), mud sunfish. In five collections made in Pamunkey River and tributaries above the Fall Line in Louisa and Hanover counties, 12 addi- tional forms not listed in Table 1 were cap- tured. They are as follows: Catostomus c. commersoni (Lacépede), Hypenteliwm nigri- cans (LeSueur), Hybopsis micropogon (Cope), Hxoglossum maxillingua (LeSueur), Chrosomus oreas Cope, Clinostomus vando- isulus (Valenciennes), Notropis cornutus cornutus (Mitchill), Notropis procne procne (Cope), Hadropterus notogrammus Raney and Hubbs, Hadropterus peltatus peltatus (Stauffer), Etheostoma nigrum Rafinesque subsp., Htheostoma vitrea (Cope). These limited data on Piedmont fish distribution indicate that in this respect the Pamunkey River is much like the James River, as reported by Raney (1950, p. 189). RELATIVE ABUNDANCE The abundance of fishes is sometimes measured by their frequency of occurrence in collections made by seine hauls. This method has some limitations especially in large rivers. Recent investigations on the clupeid fishes reported by Massmann, Ladd, and McCutcheon (1952) has indicated that seining is not always a reliable measure of abundance. Other groups, such as the cat- fishes, are primarily nocturnal, and there- fore estimations of abundance based on day- time seine hauls may be erroneous. Fishes such as the hogchoker and eel often burrow in the mud where they are easily missed by minnow seines. The young of several species, such as longnose gar, bowfin and carp rarely PAMUNKEY RIVER FISHES 431 TABLE 2.—Fishes taken in the tidewater section of the Pamunkey River arranged in order by frequency of occurrence in per- centage of seine hauls. Some species are included here with full realization that seine collections do not reveal their true relative abundance. & S Re 32 Species | gee Species | g 28 |= 59 ESO |\Soo OOo ee foy(e}| Kol) (3 \F = | | Notropis hudsonius sal- | || Anchoa m. mitchilli......| 16 ULATUSESA = AS stent ede 63 | Lepomis gibbosus....... | 16 Notropis analostanus...| 60 || Ictalurus catus.......... 12 Alosa sapidissima....... | Dif AC COMLOVESCE NSH eal el Fundulus d. diaphanus. | 55 Enneacanthus gloriosus. . 11 Morone americana....... | 54 || Ictalvrus punctatus......| 10 Etheostoma nigrum olm- | | Pomozris nigromaculatus . 10 SLEWT: SSA ceca See ot: | 53 Fundulus heteroclitus | Lepomis ™m. macro- | | macrolepidotus......... u CHUTES an Ee Ae eee 36 || Micropterus s. salmoides.| 7 Alosa aestivalis......... | 35 | Menidia menidia......... teen Roccus saratilis.........| 35 | Notemigonus c. cryso- Trinectes maculatus..... 28 | leucas 6 ha samme Sey | {6 Menidia beryllina....... | 24 | Schilbeodes mollis........ | 6 Lepomis auritus........ 22 || Breevoortia tyrannus..... 5 Moxostoma macrolepi- | Lepisosteus 0. osseus..... 4 COLIN eee | 20 | Leiostomus canthurus.... 3 Hybognathus nuchalis | Strongylura marina...... 2 LC GUIES to nds tA 20 | Semotilus corporalis...... 2 Gambusia affinis hol- || Alosa mediocris.......... 2 BROOK SEE ee ae 18 || Notropis amoenus........ 1 Anguilla rostrata........ 17 | Gobiosoma bosci.......... 1 Alosa pseudoharengus...| 17 | Paralichthys dentatus.....; 1 TaBLE 3.—Relative abundance of the most common Pamunkey fishes seined in coves and in the river proper. The numbers are the ratios between the percentages of occurrence in seine hauls at the two habitats. Species | River proper Coves Menta iano ery line eee ee ee as Hybognathus nuchalis regius...........| MruMeGteS MACULauUSe ne eee ee eee all WEN OM AS AUT tee ae Ye ee ort | FR OCCUSESOZOLULS et eE aoe Moxostoma macrolepidotum............ | Amchoa m= mitchillt. ee ee Notropis hudsonius saludanus......... Fundulus heteroclitus macrolepidotus. . . Etheostoma nigrum olmstedi............ ALOSCAGESUUVCVISHA Ain A ee ee Notropisvanalostanuss, eee. NCOHNIGUS CONUS: svbcondc eon Sogoebe choas NOT ONCHOINENICON Cn ae ean IROMOLUS Mignomaculalus- 55) yee PAGO ROMAGMO . one doe ng oe lone w eae VAILOSORSUDLAUSSUI CO ee ee eee LODE GIONS Gh, (HOCH NOD MUS 2 oe oon ece oe | Gambusia affinis holbrooki............. Mucropterus s. salmotdes..............- | Enneacanthus gloniosws....-..--..-5--- | ORG BUADE SCOT Sher perme rn Cea = rae ILCIORRES (UM DOSUS: soc ce sagoce be secas Lepomis m. macrochirus...............| Schilbeodes mollis................-...--| AL OSG DSEUMAONGTENGRUSE 8 ne ee nee ee | te i eH kk Oe —— i CC Ss Cw Or Or Rm CW DO DDR RR BR i i es i i i NOON ODP PNR RK RB eRe ocoococoocoocoooeoo oO O&O ouoo _ Notemigonus c. crysoleucas............. 432 JOURNAL OF THE are taken in minnow seines, in Virginia rivers, even though adults may be numerous. Densely schooling fishes such as the glut herring and menhaden may be far more abundant than their percentage of occur- rence in seine hauls would indicate merely because these schools may be met. infre- quently while fishes of more uniform dis- tribution would ordinarily be taken more often. Anadromous species, which make up a considerable part of the fish fauna in tidal rivers, may be present for only part of the year in any given ontogenetic stage, and sampling therefore is representative only of the season when collecting occurred. The percentage of seine collections in which the various species occurred is given in Table 2. The spottail shiner was taken most frequently followed by satinfin shiner, American shad, banded killifish, white perch, and johnny darter, all of which appeared in more than one-half of the seine hauls. Next in order of frequency of capture are the bluegill sunfish, glut herring, striped bass, hogchoker, glassy silverside and yellowbelly sunfish. The remaining fishes occurred in 20 per cent or fewer seine hauls. DISTRIBUTION The habitat in which sampling is done is of considerable importance in determining the species that are taken. Even in a tidal river, where the various habitats tend to be unified by the influence of a mass of water of rather uniform physical and chemical character- istics (excluding the brackish waters), there are some differences in the environmental preferences of fishes. A distinct contrast is evident between coves, where the water is not affected by tidal currents, and the river proper where the effect of such currents is pronounced. The occurrence of fishes at cove and river stations is summarized in Table 3. Glassy silverside, silvery minnow, hogchoker, yel- lowbelly sunfish, and striped bass were WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, NO. 12 collected more frequently in the river while golden shiner, alewife, tadpole madtom, bluegill sunfish, pumpkinseed sunfish, yellow perch and bluespot sunfish occurred more often in coves. The other species were inter- mediate. With the exception of the alewife, those fishes favoring the cove habitat are generally found in sluggish water or ponds throughout their range, while those common to the river may or may not be found in still water in other parts of their range. It seems evident that the species of fishes obtained by sampling rivers was determined in part by the type of habitat sampled. Therefore, care must be exercised in selecting various locations that are adequately repre- sentative of all conditions. This is a difficult problem in rivers where sampling locations, especially by seine, are limited by water depth and bottom type. LITERATURE CITED Fow.er, Henry W. A study of the fishes of the southern Piedmont and Coastal Plain. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia Monogr. 7: 1-408, 313 figs. 1945. GUNTER, GorDON. A list of fishes of the mainland of North and Middle America recorded from both freshwater and sea water. Amer. Midl. Nat. 28(2): 305-326. 1942. HILDEBRAND, SAMUEL F., and ScHROEDER, WIL- LIAM C. Fishes of Chesapeake Bay. Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish. 48 (1927, pt. 1): 1-866, 211 figs. 1928. MASSMANN, WILLIAM H. Characteristics of spawn- ing areas of shad, Alosa sapidissima (Wilson) in some Virginia streams. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc. 81: 78-93, 3 figs. 1952. MassMANN, WiLLIAM H., Lapp, ERNrstT C. and McCutcHeon, Henry N. A surface trawl for sampling fishes in tidal rivers. Trans. North Amer. Wildlife Conf. 17: 386-392, 3 figs. 1952. MENZEL, R. Winston. The catfish industry of Vir- ginia. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc. 73: 364-372, 1 fig. 1945. TRESSELT, ERNEST F. Spawning grounds of the striped bass, Roccus saxatilis (Walbauwm), in Virginia. Bull. Bingham Oceanogr. Coll. 14(1): 98-110. 1952. RANEY, Epwarp C. Freshwater fishes. [In] The James River Basin, past, present and future: 151-194. Virginia Academy of Sciences, 1950. INDEX TO VOLUME 43 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES Anthropological Society of Washington. 271. Washington Academy of Sciences. 60, 93, 261. AUTHOR INDEX AspotTt, R. T. See WARMKE, GERMAINE L. 260. ALLEN, WiuuiaAM T. See Nicot, Davin. 344. AMSDEN, THomas W. Some notes on the Penta- meracea, including a description of one new genus and one new subfamily. 137. AnpreEws, E. A. Valletofolliculina bicornis, a unique new genus and species of folliculinid (Ciliata: Heterotricha) from California. 189. BaseEro, Bert B. Studies on the helminth fauna of Alaska: XII, The experimental infection of Alaskan gulls (Larus glaucescens Naumann) with Diphyllobothrium sp. 166. BarBeER, H. G., and SaitEr, R. I. A revision of the turtle bugs of North America (Hemiptera: Pentatomidae). 150. BeecHerR, WriiuiamM J. Feeding adaptations and systematics in the avian order Piciformes. 293. Buakef, Doris H. Eight new Neotropical chry- somelid beetles (Coleoptera). 232. BLANTON, FRANKLIN S. See WirTH, WILLIS W. 69. Brinton, Epwarp. Thysanopoda spinicaudata, a new bathypelagic giant euphausiid crusta- cean, with comparative notes.on 7’. cornuta and 7’. egregia. 408. Brown, Roxtanp W. The Geological Society of Washington. 341. CAMPBELL, WiLiiAM R. Dynamic stress-strain curves for mild steel using the tangent modu- lus procedure. 102. CHANDLER, Harry P. A new species of Climacia from California (Sisyridae, Neuroptera). 182. CuarRKE&, J. F. Gates. New species of Olethreu- tidae from Illinois (Lepidoptera). 226. -. Notes, new synonymy, and new assign- ments in American Gelechiidae. 317. CoNTRERAS, EpuARDO. See DRUCKER, PHILIP. 389. Dayton, W. A. Miriam Lucile Bomhard (obitu- eye Molo DeCar.o, José A. See Drak, Cari J. 109. Drake, Caru J., and DeCarto, Jost A. Ameri- can species of Ranatra annulipes Stal group (Hemiptera: Ranatridae). 109. Drake, Ropert J. Amnicola brandi, a new spe- cies of snail from northwestern Chihua- hua. 26. DRECHSLER, CHARLES. Development of Pythium debaryanum on wet substratum. 213. . Three new species of Conidiobolus isolated from leaf mold. 29. Drucker, Puiiip, and CoNnTRERAS, EDUARDO. Site patterns in the eastern part of Olmec ter- ritory. 389. DuNKLE, Davin H., and MALpoNADO-KOERDELL, M. Notes on some Mesozoic fossil fish remains from Mexico. 311. Evans, Auice C. Ida Albertina Bengtson (obitu- ary). 238. Farr, Marion M. Three new species of coccidia from the Canada goose, Branta canadensis (Linné, 1758). 336. FERGUSON, Epwarp, Jr. A new cyprid ostracod Maryland. 194. FisHER, WatTeR K. A new genus of bonelliid worms (Hchiuroidea). 258. GinsBuRG, Isaac. Ten new American gobioid fishes in the United States National Museum, including additions to a revision of Gobio- nellus. 18. GuRNEY, ASHLEY B. Recent advances in the tax- onomy and distribution of Grylloblatta (Or- thoptera: Grylloblattidae). 325. HANDLEY, CuHarRLEs O., Jr. Three new lemmings (Dicrostonyx) from Arctic America. 197. Hernricu, Gerp H. Holarctic elements among the Ichneumoninae of Maine. 148. Hosss, Horton H., Jr. On the ranges of certain crayfishes of the Spzculifer group of the genus Procambarus, with the description of a new species (Decapoda: Astacidae), 412. Horrman, Ricuarp L. Psammodesmus, a neglected milliped genus (Polydesmida: Platyrhacidae). 299. Humes, ArtHur G. Two new semiparasitic har- pacticoid copepods from the coast of New Hampshire. 360. JAMES, Maurice T. The Diptera collected on the Cockerell and Hubbell Expeditions to Hon- duras: Part II, Asilidae. 46. Joyce, J. W. Science in the State Department. 97. Kevan, D. Kerru McE. An interesting new pyrgo- morphine grasshopper (Orthoptera: Acridi- dae) in the U. S. National Museum. 117. KNIGHT, KENNETH L. Two new species of mosqui- toes from the Yemen (Diptera: Culicidae). a20): LANE, JoHN E. See Pratt, H. D. 358. Leviton, ALAN E. A new snake of the genus Oli- godon from Annam. 422. Li, Hur-Lin. Critical notes on the genus Symplo- cos in Formosa. 107. . The species of Pittosporum in Formosa. 43. Loomis, H. F. New millipeds of the western States and Lower California. 417. MaALDONADO-KOERDELL, M. See DuNKLE, Davip Jel, Sillile Martin, G. W. A new species of Protodontia from British Columbia. 16. Massty, Louis M., Jr., and Neat, A. Lesiiz. In- vestigations concerning the hatching factor 433 434 JOURNAL OF THE of the golden nematode of potatoes, Helero- dera rostochiensis Wollenweber. 396. MASSMANN, WILLIAM H. See RaNnry, Epwarp C. 424. Marrox, N. T. Two new species of Hulimnadia from Maryland and Virginia (Crustacea: Con- chostraca). 57. Minuer, Cari F. Additional information on the Indian pottery from Pissaseck (Leedstown), Westmoreland County, Virginia. 273. Moore, WALTER G. See WILSON, MILDRED STRAT- TON. L21. Nau, A. Lesuie. See Massey, Louis M., Jr. 396. Nicou, Davin. A new prionodont pelecypod ge- nus. 103. Review of the hving species of Echino- chama. 386. Nicot, Davip, and ALLEN, Wiuuram T. A new pelecypod from Upper Triassic strata in Peru. 344. PENN, GborGE Henry. A new crawfish of the ge- nus Procambarus from Louisiana and Arkan- sas (Decapoda: Astacidae). 163. PrrrrBoNE, Marian H. A new species of poly- chaete worm of the family Ampharetidae from Massachusetts. 384. PITTENDRIGH, CoLIN S. See SmitH, Lyman B. 401. Pratt, H. D., and Lane, Joun EH. Laelaps ory- zomydis, n. sp., with a key to some American species of Laelaps (Acarina: Laelaptidae). 308. Purt, Harspans 8. The ostracode genus Hemi- cythere and its allies. 169. RaMBERG, WALTER. Looking ahead in mechanics. 241. RaNngEy, Epwarp C., and Massman, WiLuiam H. The fishes of the tidewater section of the Pamunkey River, Virginia. 424. Reap, CHARLES B Prosseria grandis, a new genus and new species from the Upper Devonian of New York. 13. ROSEN, LEON. See STONE, ALAN. 354. Ross, Herpertr H. Additional material on the phylogeny and dispersal of Atopsyche (Tri- choptera: Rhyacophilidae). 287. SAILER, R. I. See BARBER, H. G. 150. ScHu.ttz, LEoNaRD P. See SrRasBuRG, DONALD W. 128. SrerzeR, Henry W. A new hedgehog from Africa. 237. Four new mammals from the Anglo- Egyptian Sudan. 333. Smrru, A. C. Studies of South American plants, Net 203: SmitH, Lyman B. Some new combinations in Guatemalan Bromeliaceae. 68. SmitH, Lyman B., and PiTTENDRIGH, CoLIN S. Realignments in the Bromeliaceae subfamily Tillandsioideae. 401. Soun, I. G. Cardiniferella, n. gen., the type of a new family of Carboniferous Ostracoda. 66. WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 43, No. 12 SoHNS, ERNEST R. Chaboissaea ligulata Fourn.: A Mexican grass. 405. Floral morphology of Jzophorus unisetus (Presl) Schlecht. 179. STONE, ALAN. New tabanid flies of Merycomylini. 255. STONE, ALAN, and Rosen, Leon. A new species of Culex from the Marquesas Islands and the larva of Culex atriceps Edwards (Diptera: Culicidae). 354. STRASBURG, DoNALpD W., and ScHULTZ, LEONARD P. The blenniid fish genera Cirripectus and Kerallias with descriptions of two new species from the tropical Pacific. 128. STRIMPLE, HARRELL L. A new carpoid from Okla- homa. 105. ———. A new species of Carinocrinus from Okla- homa. 201. Tueopor, Oskar. On a collection of Phlebotomus from the Yemen. 119. Topp, W. E. Ciypr. A taxonomic study of the American dunlin (Frolia alpina subspp.). 85. Tomuinson, Jack T. A burrowing barnacle of the genus T'rypetesa (order Acrothoracica). 373. TRAUB, RoBeERT. Hollandipsylla neali, a new ge- nus and new species of flea from North Bor- neo, with comments on eyeless fleas (Siphon- aptera). 346. Wenzella obscura, a new genus and new species of flea from Guatemala (Siphonap- Gera) 07. TRUESDELL, C. Paul Felix Neményi (obituary). 62. WaARMKE, GERMAINE L., and Assott, R. T. The gross anatomy and occurrence in Puerto Rico of the pelecypod Yoldia perprotracta. 260. WHEELER, GEORGE C., and WHEELER, JEANETTE. The ant larvae of the myrmicine tribes Melis- sotarsini, Metaponini, Myrmicariini, and Car- diocondylini. 185. WiuuiAMs, Atwyn. The classification of the stro- phomenoid brachiopods. 1. ——. The morphology and classification of the oldhaminid brachiopods. 279. Wiuiramson, A. A. Speculation on the cosmic function of life. 305. Wruson, MruprREp Srratrron, and Moore, WAL- TER G. New records of Diaptomus sanguineus and allied species from Louisiana, with the de- scription of a new species (Crustacea: Cope- poda). 121. Wirt, Wiuus W., and BLANTON, FRANKLIN S. Studies in Panama Culicoides (Diptera: Helei- dae): I, Descriptions of six new species. 69. Woopwick, KererrH H. Polydora nuchalis, a new the tribe species of polychaetous annelid from Cali- . fornia. 381. YocHELSON, Exurs L. Jedria, a new subgenus of Naticopsis. 65. Youna, R. T. Postmonorchis donacis, a new species of monorchid trematode from the Pacific coast, and its life history. 88. DECEMBER 1953 INDEX 435 SUBJECT INDEX Archeology. Additional information on the Indian pottery from Pissaseck (eedstown), West- moreland County, Virginia. Carn F. MILier. Zee Site patterns in the eastern part of Olmec ter- ritory. PH1ttrp DrucKER and Epuarpo Con- TRERAS. 389. Biochemistry. Investigations concerning the hatching factor of the golden nematode of potatoes, Heterodera rostochiensis Wollen- weber. Louts M. Massey, Jr.,and A. LESLIE NEAL. 396. Biology. Speculation on the cosmic function of life. A. A. WiLLiaMson. 305. Botany. Chaboissaea ligulata Fourn.: A Mexican grass. ERNEST R. Souns. 405. Critical notes on the genus Symplocos in Formosa. Hu1-Lin Lt. 107. Floral morphology of Jzophorus wunisetus (Presl) Schlecht. ERNEST R. Souns. 179. Realignments in the Bromeliaceae subfamily Tillandsioideae. Lyman B. SmrrH and CoLin S. PrrrenpriauH. 401. Some new combinations in Guatemalan Bro- meliaceae. LyMAN B. SMITH. 68. Studies of South American plants, XIJI. A. C. SMITH. 203. The species of Pittosporum in Formosa. Hvut- Lin Li. 43. Engineering. Dynamic stress-strain curves for mild steel using the tangent modulus pro- cedure. WILLIAM R. CAMPBELL. 102. Entomology. Additional material on the phylogeny and dispersal of Atopsyche (Trichoptera: Rhyacophilidae). HERBERT H. Ross. 287. American species of Ranatra annulipes Stal group (Hemiptera: Ranatridae). Caru J. DRAKE and Jos& A. DECaRLo. 109. A new species of Climacia from California (Sisyridae, Neuroptera). Harry P. CHanp- LER. 182. A new species of Culex from the Marquesas Islands and the larva of Culex atriceps Ed- wards (Diptera: Culicidae). ALAN STONE and LEON Rosen. 354. A revision of the turtle bugs of North America (Hemiptera: Pentatomidae). H. G. BARBER and R. I. Saruer. 150. An interesting new pyrgomorphine grass- hopper (Orthoptera: Acrididae) in the U.S. National Museum. D. Kerry McE. Kevan. Lae Light new Neotropical chrysomelid beetles (Coleoptera). Doris H. Buaxke. 232. Holarctic elements among the Ichneumoninae of Maine. Grerp H. Hernricu. 148. Hollandipsylla neali, a new genus and new species of flea from North Borneo, with comments on eyeless fleas (Siphonaptera). Ropert TrRavs. 346. Laelaps oryzomydis, n. sp., with a key to some American species of Laelaps (Acarina: Lae- laptidae). H. D. Pratt and Joun E. Lane. 358. New species of Olethreutidae from Illinois (Lepidoptera). J. F. Gares CLarkeE. 226. New tabanid flies of the tribe Merycomyiini. ALAN STONE. 255. Notes, new synonymy, and new assignments in American Gelechiidae. J. F. Gates CLARKE. 317. On a collection of Phlebotomus from the Yemen. Oskar THEODOR. 119. Recent advances in the taxonomy and dis- tribution of Grylloblatta (Orthoptera: Gryl- loblattidae). ASHLEY B. GuRNEY. 325. Studies in Panama Culicoides (Diptera: Helei- dae): I, Descriptions of six new species. Wiuurs W. WirtH and FRANKLIN 8S. BLAN- TON. 69. The ant larvae of the myrmicine tribes Melis- sotarsini, Metaponini, Myrmicariini, and Cardiocondvlini. GEorGr C. WHEELER and JEANETTE WHEELER. 185. The Diptera collected on the Cockerell and Hubbell Expeditions to Honduras: Part ITI, Asilidae. Maurice T. Jamess. 46. Two new species of mosquitoes irom the Ye- men (Diptera: Culicidae). KENNETH L. KnriGut. 320. Wenzella obscura, a new genus and new spe- cies of flea from Guatemala (Siphonaptera). ROBERT TRAUB. 77. General Science. Science in the State Department. Jc We Joven. 97. Geology. The Geological Society of Washington. RoLaNp W. Brown. 341. Helminthology. Studies on the helminth fauna of Alaska; XII, The experimental infection of Alaskan gulls (Larus glawcescens Naumann) with Diphyllobothrium sp. Brerv B. BaBERO. 166. Herpetology. A new snake of the genus Oligodon from Annam. ALAN E. LEviton. 422. Ichthyology. The blenniid fish genera Cirripectus and Hyrallias with descriptions of two new species from the tropical Pacific. DoNnaLp W. SrrRAsBuRG and LEONARD P.ScHUuLtz. 128. The fishes of the tidewater section of the Pamunkey River, Virginia. Hpwarp C. Raney and Witiiam H. Massmann. 424. Ten new American gobioid fishes in the United States National Museum, including additions to a revision of Gobionellus. Isaac GINSBURG. 18. Malacologyu. Amnicola brandi, a new species of snail from northwestern Chihuahua. Ros- ERT J. DRAKE. 26. Review of the living species of Echinochama. Davip Nicot. 386. The gross anatomy and occurrence in Puerto Rico of the pelecypod Yoldia perprotracta. GERMAINE L. WarmKEand R. T. Apsort. 260. Mammalogy. A new hedgehog from Africa. HENRY WE SERZnR Zale 436 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Four new mammals from the Anglo-Iigyptian Sudan. Henry W. Sperzer. 333. Three new lemmings (Dicrostonyx) from Are- tic America. CHARLES O. HANDLEY, Jr. 197. Mycology. A new species of Protodontia from British Columbia. G. W. Martin. 16. Development of Pythium debaryanum on wet substratum. CHARLES DRECHSLER. 213. Three new species of Conidiobolus isolated from leaf mold. CHARLES DRECHSLER. 29. Obituaries. BENGTSSON, IbA ALBERTINA. 238. BomMuHARD, Miriam Lucie. 136. NEAL, PauL ARDEEN. 1385. NeEmMENyYI, PAUL FELIX. 62. WENpT, EpwiIn F. 64. Ornithology. A taxonomic study of the American dunlin (Hrolia alpina subspp.). W. KE. CuypE Topp. 85. Feeding adaptations and systematics in the avian order Piciformes. WrLuiam J. BEECHER. 293. Paleobotany. Prosseria grandis, a new genus and new species from the Upper Devonian of New York. CHaruEs B. Reap. 13. Paleontology. A new carpoid from Oklahoma. HARRELL L. STRIMPLE. 105. A new pelecypod from Upper Triassic strata in Peru. Davin Nicout and WiuuiAm T. ALUEN. 344. A new prionodont pelecypod genus. DAvip Nico. 108. A new species of Carinocrinus from Okla- homa. HARRELL L. STRIMPLE. 201. Cardiniferella, n. gen., the type of a new family of Carboniferous Ostracoda. I. G. SOHN. 66. Jedria, a new subgenus of Naticopsis. Euuis L. YOCHELSON. 65. Notes on some Mesozoic fossil fish remains from Mexico. Davin H. DUNKLE and M. MaALpONADO-KOERDELL. 311. Some notes on the Pentameracea, including a description of one new genus and one new subfamily. THomas W. AmspENn. 137. The classification of the strophomenoid bra- chiopods. ALWYN WILLIAms. 1. The morphology and classification of the old- haminid brachiopods. ALwyN WILLIAMS. 279. The ostracode genus Hemicythere and its al- lies. HaARBANS S. Puri. 169. Physics. Looking ahead in mechanics. WALTER RAMBERG. 241. VOL. 43, NO. 12 Zoology. A burrowing barnacle of the genus T'rypetesa (order Acrothoracica). Jack T. TOMLINSON. 373. A new crawfish of the genus Procambarus from Louisiana and Arkansas (Decapoda: Astacidae). GEORGE HENRY PENN. 163. A new cyprid ostracod from Maryland. Ep- WARD FERGUSON, Jr. 194. A new genus of bonelliid worms (Hchiuroi- dea). WALTER K. FIsHer. 258. A new species of polychaete worm of the fam- ily Ampharetidae from Massachusetts. Marian H. PETTIBONE. 384. New millipeds of the western States and Lower California. H. F. Loomis. 417. New records of Diaptomus sanguineus and allied species from Louisiana, with the de- scription of a new species (Crustacea: Co- pepoda). MruprREpD STRATTON WILSON and Wa.tTeR G. Moore. 121. On the ranges of certain crayfishes of the Spiculifer group of the genus Procambarus, with the description of a new species (Deca- poda: Astacidae). Horron H. Hosss, Jr. 412. Polydora nuchalis, a new species of poly- chaetous annelid from California. KrrTH H. Woopwick. 381. Postmonorchis donacis, a new species of mon- orchid trematode from the Pacific coast, and its life history, R. T. Youne. 88. Psammodesmus, a neglected milliped genus (Polydesmidae: Platyrhacidae). RrcHarp L. HorrMan. 299. Three new species of coccidia from the Canada goose, Branta canadensis (Linné, 1758). Marion M. Farr. 336. Thysanopoda spinicaudata, a new bathy- pelagic giant euphausiid crustacean, with comparative notes on 7’. cornuta and T. egregia. EDWARD BRINTON. 408. Two new semiparasitic harpacticoid copepods from the coast of New Hampshire. ARTHUR G. Humss. 360. Two new species of Hulimnadia from Mary- land and Virginia (Crustacea: Concho- straca). N. T. Marrox. 57. Valletofolliculina bicornis, a unique new genus and species of folliculinid (Ciliata: Hetero- tricha) from California. E. A. ANDREWS. 189. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences RMI Eo, LMR Ghee o tas Sin oes F. M. Sretzuer, U.S. National Museum MPTECPOCNE-CLEEL. o.oo oe eee ees F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards PE se se i ee iis aie wal JASON R. SWALLEN, U.S. National Museum WReEGSUTEr: 1.2... .. Howarp 8S. Rappers, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired) ee es sie es la eas eile eo Joun A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haratp A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-Presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: En osepaical Society of Washington............0. 2-25.26 002 eee: A. G. McNisH Anthropological Society of Washington..................... WiLuiaM H. GILBERT iolesreal Society of Washington.................4...5... Hue Tuomas O’NEILL Ghenmca! oociety of Washington.............0.22...0.....- GEORGE W. IRVING, JR. Maramolosical Society of Washington. ..............0....0. 00 ccc eee: F. W. Poos BenrandeGcorraphic Society........... 0.20.0. .6 cee eden. ALEXANDER WETMORE Gealosien! Socicty of Washington............. 20.0.0. eee ees A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................. FREDERICK O. Cor Memetorslisiorical Society)... 0... 02.6.0. .e ee cede ee eg eens GILBERT GROSVENOR Pocemcaoociety of Washington..............:00.e..000 en: Harry A. BortTHWICK Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... GEORGE F. GRAVATT Washington Society ‘of HM GAN ECTS ocr e niche ils We ha LOREM an 262 C. A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers. .ARNOLD H. Scorr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers RicHarpD 8. Diiu Helminthological Society of Washington.......................... L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists.......... GLENN SLOCUM Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... FLoyp W. Houcu Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers....... HERBERT GROVE DORSEY District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Section, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine N. R. Evuis Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals............ Joun G, THOMPSON Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research Epwarp G. Hamp Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.......... R. J. SEEGER Elected Members of the Board of Managers: Lab diate avo G5? Se er Sara E. Branyam, Mitton Harris og Pon nih 1G 8 en ee R. G. Batss, W. W. DIEHL 02 SU 18 5 M. A. Mason, R. J. SEEGER IMO UMOMELUCTS.. 2. ok ee ee All the above officers plus the Senior Editor Peereebanors and Associate Hdttors............000 00 cc deen eee [See front cover] eerie Committee ...............0.5- F. M. Serzuer (chairman), F. M. DEFANDORF, J.R. Swatuen, H.S. Rappreyre, W. W, Rupry Committee on Membership...... E. H. Waker (chairman), Myron S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE Cottam, C. L. Crist, JOHN FABER, ANaus M. GRIFFIN, D. BREESE JONES, FRANK C. KRACEK, ‘Louis R. MaxwELL, A.G. ‘McNIsu, Epwarp C. REINHARD, REESE I. Satter, Lro A. SHINN, Francis A. SMITH, HEINz Specut, Horace M. "TRENT, ALFRED WEISSLER Cammetiee on Meetings................. Watson Davis (chairman), Joun W. ALDRICH, AustTIN Cuarx, D. J. Davis Committee on Monographs (W. N. FENTON, chairman): epmrepECrIECUNT rere ome ile! ie) Lae S. F. Buaxs, F. C. Kracrex PMN TBBRE SRL 5c OU ee g's sk ka Sale EG in wee Geis W.N. Fenton, ALAN STONE epee L056. fe. oe ee ke cele ee G. ArTHUR CoopER, JAMES I. HoFFMAN Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (A. V. AsTIN, general chairman): For Biological Sciences...... HERBERT FRIEDMANN (chairman), Harry A. Bortu- wick, Sara HE. BranuaM, Ira B. HANSEN, BENJAMIN SCHWARTZ, T. DALE STEWART For Engineering Sciences...... SAMUEL LrEvy (chairman), MicnaEL GOLDBERG, . H. Kennarp, BE. B. Rosperts, H. M. Trent, W. A. WILDHACK For Physical Sciences...... G. B. ScHUBAUER (chairman), R. S. Burtneton, F. C. Kracex, J. A. SANDERSON, R. J. SenamEr, J. S. WILLIAMS For Teaching of Science..M. A. Mason (chairman), F. EK. Fox, Monror H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research............... Karu F. HerzFevp (chairman), HERBERT N. Eaton, L. KE. Yocum Committee on Policy and Planning: Permepamuary 1954.0 ool oe ee was H. B. Couuins, W. W. Rusey (chairman) PeMrNrr iN Ono me ae ee te Ne Aber dy L. W. Parr, F. B. SILsBEE meromiary L956 te ees ee ly cae wc 6 E. C. CritrenpEN, A. WETMORE Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPHErson, chairman): Pere PeesAy LOA ve PVs Ce eG rAMos Ch oebngten Veen ieuy & envi CALDWELL, W. LL. Scumitr PIU TOs ie icy. Vices Saralar sdiglbine Boas b eaeee G ATE, McPHERSON, W. T. Reap SCM TINIE LODO 2 ish ye score acid a eis Wave ards oo Gale a's AUSTIN CLARK, J. H. McMiuueN Representative on Council of A. v6 TAGS ede ee easels Bh omieM NS ke SN ee Watson Davis Committee of Auditors....... Louise M. RussEuiu (chairman), R. 8S. Dru1, J. B. REEsIpE Committee of Tellers...... C. L. GARNER (chairman), L. G. Hensest, Myrna F. JONES CONTENTS Page ARCHEOLOGY.—Site patterns in the eastern part of Olmec territory. Paine DRUCKER and EDUARDO CONTRERAS........-.+.-s 50m 389 BIocHEMISTRY.—Investigations concerned the hatching factor of the golden nematode of potatoes, Heterodera rostochiensis Wollenweber. Louts M. Massry, Jr., and A. Lustre NwAL... .. ..2.:292eeeee 396 Borany.—Realignments in the Bromeliaceae subfamily Tillandsioideae. Lyman B. Surra and Contin 8.-PITrENDRIGH.........>. 0p eee 401 Botany.—Chaboissaea ligulata Fourn.: A Mexican grass. Ernest R. SOBING si. cui soe Clade oa 0's witéu a Save dele. Ge Sete) oon eae 405 ZooLocy.—Thysanopoda spinicaudata, a new bathypelagic giant eu- phausiid crustacean, with comparative notes on 7’. cornuta and T. egregra., EEDWARD BRINTON. ....2+ . sasc )2. Se ws os 3 Sr 408 ZooLtocy.—On the ranges of certain crayfishes of the Spinzfer group of the genus Procambarus, with the description of a new species (Decapoda: Astacidae). Horron H. Hopss,.Jr.......2... 2... 412 ZooLocy.—New millipeds of the western States and Lower California. HB Loomis 208) ee a ee 417 HERPETOLOGY.—A new snake of the genus Oligodon from Annam. ALAN He LEVITON. 2.005 0 ee 422 IcutHyoLocy.—The fishes of the tidewater section of the Pamunkey River, Virginia. Epwarp C. Ranry and WitutiAM H. MassMann.. 424 INDEX TO. VOLUME 439%. 40.. 22 ee ee eee 433 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. eee = eh Ty ie oes | ” tg ee ee 5) sh a 3 9088 01303 1943